Igcse Physics 0625 Past Papers 1999-2012

MULTIPLE CHOICE
PAPER ONE
International General Certificate of Secondary Education

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE LOCAL EXAMINATIONS SYNDICATE
0625/1
PHYSICS
PAPER 1 Multiple Choice
Wednesday
19 MAY 1999
Morning
45 minutes
Additional materials:
Electronic calculator and/or Mathematical tables
Multiple Choice answer sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
TIME
45 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Do not open this booklet until you are told to do so.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the answer sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has already been done for you.
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question, there are four
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft
pencil on the separate answer sheet.
Read very carefully the instructions on the answer sheet.
INFORMATION FOR CANDIDATES
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

SB (SC) QF91698/4
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
A measuring cylinder contains some liquid.

cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
What does the reading of the measuring cylinder scale give?
the density of the liquid
the height of the liquid
the mass of the liquid
the volume of the liquid
A tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.
Ignoring air resistance, what happens to the acceleration of the ball?

A
It decreases.
It increases.
It is constant.
It is zero.
0625/1 S99
The graph shows how the speed of a car changes over 200 s.
20
speed
m/s
0
50
100
150 200
time/s
For how many seconds is the car moving at constant speed?

A
50 s
100 s
150 s
200 s
Two apples are placed on a balance. The balance stays level.
apple 1
apple 2
What does this show about the mass and the weight of the apples?
mass of apples
weight of apples
different
different
different
the same
the same
different
the same
the same
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
The diagram shows a racing car.
32
PETROIL
VA LV O I L
Where should the centre of mass be, and why?
centre of mass
where
why
as high as possible
to give the car more acceleration
as high as possible
to give the car more stability
as low as possible
to give the car more acceleration
as low as possible
to give the car more stability
An object is pushed and then allowed to slide along a table.

The diagram shows the direction of the friction force acting on the object.
object
object sliding
this way
table
friction force
What is the effect of the friction force on the sliding object?
A
It has no effect.
It increases the objects weight.
It slows the object down.
It speeds the object up.
0625/1 S99
A student swings on a rope tied to a branch of a tree.

At which position is the students energy of motion (kinetic energy) the greatest?
D
C
The diagram shows four types of power station.

Which type of power station uses chemical energy to generate electricity?
A
geothermal
B
coal-fired
C
nuclear
hot rocks heat

water, steam turns
turbine and generator
coal burned to heat

water, steam turns
nuclear fuel heats

water, steam turns
0625/1 S99
D
hydroelectric
water from mountain

reservoir turns
[Turn over
Four people each have to lift bricks to the same height with a rope and pulley. Some lift more
bricks, and some lift the bricks faster.
Which person develops the most power?
A
10 bricks
in
2 seconds
10 bricks
in
4 seconds
20 bricks
in
2 seconds
20 bricks
in
4 seconds
10 The diagram shows a drawing pin (thumb tack) and a wooden board.
force
drawing pin
wooden board
The drawing pin is easily pushed into the wooden board.

Why is this?
A
The flat head raises the centre of mass.
The force produces a large moment about the point.
The large area of the flat head increases the force.
The small area of the point increases the pressure.
0625/1 S99
11 A liquid evaporates quickly.

How does its temperature change, and which of its molecules leave the surface?
temperature
change
molecules
leaving surface
rises
fastest-moving
rises
slowest-moving
falls
fastest-moving
falls
slowest-moving
12 A pupil looks through a microscope into a small, glass container in which tiny smoke particles
have been mixed with air. The container is very brightly lit and the pupil sees bright specks moving
randomly.
What are these specks?
A
air molecules being hit by air molecules
air molecules being hit by smoke particles
smoke particles being hit by air molecules
smoke particles being hit by smoke particles
13 A substance that melts at 60 C is heated in a test-tube to a temperature of 95 C. The substance

is then allowed to cool.
Which graph best shows how the temperature changes with time as the substance cools?
temperature / C
temperature / C
temperature / C
100
100
time
D
temperature / C
100
time
0625/1 S99
100
time
time
[Turn over
14 The diagram shows an experiment to investigate the effect of a rise in temperature on an iron bar.
iron bar
pointer
roller with
pointer attached
fixed support
heat
What would be seen after heating?
15 A flask with a narrow tube contains some coloured liquid. The diagram shows the height of the
liquid column at 0C, 100 C and X C.
80
70
60
50
millimetres 40
30
20
10
0
0 C
100 C
The liquid expands uniformly with temperature.

What is temperature X?
A
40 C
50 C
60 C
0625/1 S99
80 C
X C
16 Four wires of equal length, made of different materials, are placed on heat-sensitive paper. The
four ends of the wire are put together, as shown, and are heated for three minutes.
heat-sensitive paper
heated here
Heat-sensitive paper changes colour when it gets hot. The diagram below shows the marks on the
heat-sensitive paper due to the conduction of heat energy along the wires.
Which mark was made by the best conductor of heat?
B
C
A
D
17 A hot-air balloon rises when the air inside it is heated.

Why does this happen?
A
The air contracts and becomes less dense.
The air contracts and becomes more dense.
The air expands and becomes less dense.
The air expands and becomes more dense.
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
18 Different surfaces reflect different proportions of the Suns radiant energy. The chart shows the
percentage of heat energy that is reflected by some surfaces.
100
% of heat
energy
reflected
80
60
40
20
0
whitewashed
red
brick
soil
tar
What is the best way to treat a flat roof so as to increase the amount of heat absorbed by the roof?
A
cover it with a layer of red brick dust
cover it with a layer of soil
paint it with tar
paint it with whitewash
19 A barrier lies at the mouth of a harbour. It is closer to one side of the mouth of the harbour than the
other. Sea waves come towards the harbour and pass through the two gaps.
Which diagram shows the pattern that the waves make when they pass through the gaps?
waves moving
this way
A
sea
barrier
harbour
0625/1 S99
20 Which diagram shows the path of a ray of light through a glass prism and into the air beyond?
45
light
ray
light
ray
45
C
light
ray
45
D
light
ray
45
21 Which diagram shows how a converging lens in a camera forms an image on the film?
A
object
image
object
image
object
image
object
image
22 What is heard when the frequency of a sound wave is increased at constant amplitude?
A
higher pitch
lower pitch
louder sound
quieter sound
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
23 A bat is flying near a house. It makes a high-pitched sound. It hears the echo 0.5 s later. The
speed of sound in air is 300 m/s.
How far away is the house from the bat?
A
600 m
300 m
150 m
75 m
24 A student holds two pins on to a magnet as shown.
The student removes his thumb.

Which diagram shows the positions of the pins and the poles induced on them?
A
S
N
S
N
S
S
25 Different metals are separated by passing them under an electromagnet, which attracts and lifts
out some of the metals.
electromagnet
different metals
moving belt
Which line in the table shows what happens to the metals?

attracted
not attracted
copper
aluminium
copper
steel
iron
aluminium
iron
steel
0625/1 S99
26 Which diagram shows the directions of the forces between two charged particles?
A
27 A battery is labelled 9 VOLTS.
BATTERY
9 VOLTS
Which information does the label give about the battery?

A
the power it can supply
the current it can supply
its electromotive force (e.m.f.)
its resistance
28 The diagram shows how a student has connected some electrical components. The lamp does
not light because the circuit has not been completed.
crocodile clip
connecting wire
switch
lamp
battery
P
Q
crocodile clip
Where must the crocodile clips be connected, so that the lamp lights only when the switch is
closed?
A
at P and R
at P and S
at Q and R
0625/1 S99
at Q and S
[Turn over
29 The diagram shows a circuit in which all the lamps are lit.
The lamp marked X blows and breaks the circuit.

How many lamps remain lit?
A
30 In which diagram is the fuse correctly connected?
live
to mains
supply
live
earth
to mains
supply
neutral
earth
neutral
heater
heater
metal case
metal case
live
to mains
supply
live
earth
to mains
supply
neutral
heater
earth
neutral
heater
metal case
metal case
0625/1 S99
31 The diagram shows an electrical hazard.
soft plastic insulation

bare copper wire
hard plastic lamp holder
glass bulb
Which part gives an electric shock if touched?

A
soft plastic insulation
bare copper wire
hard plastic lamp holder
glass bulb
32 Which diagram shows the correct wiring of a transformer?

A
33 Which object makes use of the force on a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field?
A
electric fan
electric kettle
lamp
transformer
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
34 Which diagram shows an electric bell correctly connected?

A
35 A straight wire connected to a milliammeter is placed between the poles of a magnet.

1
3
straight wire
milliammeter
Which change causes a current in the milliameter?

A
moving the wire in direction 1
moving the wire in direction 2
moving the magnet in direction 2
moving the magnet in direction 3
0625/1 S99
36 Particles given off by a hot cathode in a vacuum are attracted to a plate P. There is a high potential
difference between the cathode and plate as shown.
vacuum
hot
cathode
What are these particles?

A
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
37 Which of the following is a correct statement about -particles?

A
They are fast-moving electrons.
They are more ionising than -particles.
They are stopped by a thin sheet of paper.
They can pass through a thick sheet of lead.
0625/1 S99
[Turn over
38 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive source varies with time.
count rate 400
count/minute
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time
minute
What is the half-life of the source?

A
50 minutes
100 minutes
200 minutes
400 minutes
39 Hydrogen may be written as 11H.

Which line is correct for a neutral hydrogen atom?
number of
electrons
number of
protons
number of
neutrons
0625/1 S99
40 The diagram represents the radioactive decay of a nucleus.
238
92
4
2
He
A
Z
Th
What are the values of A and Z ?
238
93
238
92
236
88
234
90
Go to answers
0625/1 S99
0625/1
PHYSICS
Tuesday
9 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes
There are forty questions in this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four
This question paper consists of 16 printed pages.

(NH) QK93704/4
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
The digital stopwatches show the finishing times of two runners in a race.
runner 1
min
runner 2
min
What is the time difference between the two runners?

A
1.14 s
7.28 s
8.42 s
15.70 s
The graph shows how the speed of an object changes with time.
speed
m/s
0
0
4
time
s
For how long does the object move?

A
2s
4s
6s
8s
Which statement is true about the weight of an object?

A
Its weight is the same everywhere.
Its weight is measured in kilograms.
Its weight is the force of gravity on it.
Its weight is zero on the Moon.
0625/1 W99
3
4
The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
cm3
30
20
10
What is the density of the liquid?

320 g/cm3
36 g/cm3
1.25 g/cm3
0.8 g/cm3
A heavy box is lifted by a force F, using a lever as shown.
x
F
What happens when the length x is made shorter?

distance F
moves
size of F
bigger
bigger
bigger
smaller
smaller
bigger
smaller
smaller
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
4
6
In which situation is there no resultant force on the car?

40 m/s
A
decreasing speed on a level road
30
B
m/s
going at a constant speed uphill
30
C
30 m/s
m/s
40
increasing speed downhill
30 m/s
D
m/s
40 m/s
increasing speed on a level road
A steel ball is allowed to roll along a frictionless track.

What is the highest point the ball reaches before rolling backwards? Ignore the effects of friction.
B
steel ball
C
What is the source of geothermal energy?

A
coal
hot rocks
tides
waves
0625/1 W99
5
9
Which object converts sound energy into electrical energy?

A
electric bell
loudspeaker
microphone
radio
10 A manometer is connected to a gas tap. Diagram X shows the liquid levels before opening the gas
tap. The gas pressure is greater than atmospheric pressure.
Which diagram shows what happens to the liquid levels after opening the gas tap?
X
gas tap
from gas supply
liquid
before opening
gas tap
11 The diagram shows water in an outdoor swimming pool.
Sun
water
swimming pool
The water level drops during a hot, sunny day.
What does this show?
A
that water boils at only one temperature
that water can evaporate below its boiling point
that water can expand as it becomes warmer
that water is a poor conductor of heat
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
6
12 A closed container full of gas is left to stand on a bench for a long time.
Which statement about the molecules of the gas is correct?
A
All the molecules are at the bottom of the container.
The fastest moving molecules are at the top of the container.
The molecules are moving at random throughout the container.
The pressure caused by the molecules on the container is greatest at the top of the container.
13 Metal railway lines can be laid in sections with small gaps in between, as shown. The sections are
connected by metal plates.
gap
railway line
metal plate
What is the reason for leaving the gaps?

A
to allow for contraction when the temperature falls
to allow for expansion when the temperature rises
to prevent an electric current in the railway line
to stop large vibrations
14 Four cooking pots are each made of iron.

Which cooking pot has the greatest heat capacity?
mass = 2.0 kg
mass = 1.8 kg
mass = 1.6 kg
mass = 1.4 kg
0625/1 W99
7
15 Two balloons are inflated at the same room temperature until they have the same volume of air
inside. They are then sealed. Balloon X is placed in a refrigerator for some time, while balloon Y
stays at room temperature. The diagram shows the balloons after this time.
balloon
X
balloon
Y
Assuming no air has leaked out of the balloons, which statement is correct?
A
The air in balloon X has contracted.
The air in balloon Y has expanded.
The rubber of balloon Y has expanded.
The rubber of balloon X has frozen and has compressed the air.
16 On a day when the temperature is low, the metal handlebars of a bicycle feel colder than the
plastic handlegrips.
What is the explanation for this?
A
Metals are colder than plastics.
Metals conduct heat better than plastics.
Plastics are softer than metals.
Plastics conduct heat better than metals.
17 A man puts a saucer on top of a cup of tea to keep the tea hot.
saucer
cup
Why does this help to keep the tea hot?

A
Conduction through the cup is reduced.
Convection in the air above the surface of the tea is reduced.
Convection in the tea is reduced.
Radiation from the shiny surface of the cup is reduced.

0625/1 W99
[Turn over
8
18 The following diagram represents a wave.
1 cm
1 cm
What is the wavelength of the wave?

A
8 cm
4 cm
2 cm
1 cm
19 The diagram shows a wavefront striking a plane reflecting surface PQ.

P
wavefront
Which of the following is changed by reflection?

A
direction
frequency
speed
wavelength
20 A child is 1 m tall. She stands 2 m in front of a plane mirror.

mirror
2m
1m
How far away from the child is her image?

A
1m
2m
3m
D
0625/1 W99
4m
9
21 Which diagram shows a possible path for a ray of light passing through water in a beaker with a
mirror at the bottom?
A
water
mirror
22 An electric bell is suspended in a bell-jar as shown. Switch S is closed and air is then pumped
from the jar. The sound of the bell becomes quieter.
S
electric
bell
bell-jar
to vacuum pump
Why does the sound become quieter?

A
Air is needed for an electric current in the bell.
Air is needed for the bells electromagnet to operate.
Air is needed for the bell to vibrate.
Air is needed to transmit sound waves.
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
10
23 A student shouts when standing by a cliff. A short time later the student hears an echo.
cliff
student
Which property of sound causes the echo?

A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
24 The diagram shows the circuit for an electromagnet. The core of the electromagnet can be made
from different materials.
material under test
iron nails attracted

to material
When switch S is closed, which material attracts the largest number of iron nails?
A
aluminium
copper
glass
iron
0625/1 W99
11
25 A plotting compass is placed at each end of a magnet.
Which diagram shows the positions of the pointers of the plotting compasses?
26 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.
negatively
charged
plastic sheet
What are the original charges on P and on Q?

charge on P
charge on Q
negative
negative
negative
positive
positive
negative
positive
positive
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
12
27 The meter in the circuit measures the potential difference across the resistor.
meter
Which unit is marked on the scale of the meter?
A
amp
ohm
volt
watt
28 Two resistors are connected in a circuit as shown.
2X
3X
What is the total resistance of the resistors?

A
less than 2
between 2 and 3
between 3 and 5
more than 5
0625/1 W99
13
29 The diagram shows a circuit with three lamps and a cell.
+
What is the circuit diagram for the above arrangement?

A
30 Which device can be used to switch off the current in a circuit when the current becomes too
large?
A
capacitor
circuit-breaker
light-dependent resistor
transformer
31 A hair dryer should

(i)
allow the fan to work with or without the heater,
(ii) not allow the heater to work without the fan.

Which circuit should be used?
A
fan
M
heater
C
fan
M
heater
D
fan
fan
heater
heater
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
14
32 A straight wire carries an electric current at right angles to the page. The black dot in each
diagram shows where the wire passes through the page.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern around the wire?
A
33 When electrical energy is transmitted over large distances, a high voltage is used.
Why is this better than using a low voltage?
A
There is a greater current in the cables.
There is less chance of an electric shock.
There is less heating in the cables.
Thicker cables can be used.
34 Which graph shows the output voltage V of an a.c. generator?

B
A
V
V
0
0
0
time
time
V
0
0
0
time
time
35 What is the symbol for a capacitor?

A
0625/1 W99
15
36 A waveform is displayed on the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
1 cm
The time base now changes from 1 ms/cm to 2 ms/cm.
Which diagram shows the new appearance of the waveform on the screen?
A
37 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 10 days.

Which of the following statements is correct?
A
After 5 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
After 5 days, a quarter of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
After 10 days, half of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
After 20 days, none of the original radioactive nuclei remain.
0625/1 W99
[Turn over
16
38 What can most -particles pass through?
A
2 mm of aluminium
2 mm of lead
2 cm of air
2 cm of concrete
39 The diagram represents an atom.
Which of the following describes the atom?

nucleus
electron
charge on electron
in middle
of atom
orbits round
nucleus
in middle
of atom
orbits round
nucleus
orbits round
electron
in middle
of atom
orbits round
electron
in middle
of atom
40 Which statement about the numbers of particles in a neutral atom must be correct?
A
number of protons = number of electrons
number of protons = number of neutrons
number of protons + number of electrons = number of neutrons
number of protons + number of neutrons = number of electrons
Go to answers
0625/1 W99

PHYSICS
0625/1

MAY/JUNE SESSION 2000
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes
This question paper consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

SB (SLC/DJ) QF05707/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
A stopwatch is used to time a student running a 1500 m race.
What is the reading on the stopwatch?
658.31 seconds
6 minutes 58.31 seconds
6.58 minutes 31 seconds
6 hours 58 minutes 31 seconds
A student lets 100 drops of water fall into a measuring cylinder which already contains some
water.
cm3
cm3
50
50
40
40
30
30
new level
of water
original level 20
of water
10
20
10
What is the volume of one drop?

0.05 cm3
0.25 cm3
5.0 cm3
25 cm3
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a car moving at constant speed?
0
0
time
0
0
time
0
0
0625/1 S00
speed
speed
speed
speed
time
0
0
time
3
4
A student investigates the speed of a trolley and finds that it is 50 cm/s, and one second later that
it is 150 cm/s.
What is the acceleration of the trolley?
A
50 cm/s2
100 cm/s2
150 cm/s2
200 cm/s2
Which property of an object is measured in newtons?

A
density
mass
volume
weight
Which instrument can be used to give a direct measurement of the mass of a rock on the Moon?
A
bathroom scales
B
beam balance
C
force meter
D
top-pan balance
The diagrams show an empty beaker on a balance and some liquid in a measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
80
60
liquid
40
20
When all the liquid is poured into the beaker, the balance reading changes to 140 g.
A
(140 60) g/cm3
(60 40) g/cm3

0625/1 S00
(40 60) g/cm3
(60 140) g/cm3

[Turn over
4
8
The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces, F, act on the brick.
Which brick does not move?
F
A
The diagram shows four ways of lifting a heavy box by using a lever.
Which way requires the smallest effort to lift the box?
effort
effort
A
box
box
effort
effort
D
box
box
10 The diagrams show a diver climbing some steps and jumping off a diving board.
Where does the diver have the most gravitational potential energy (energy of position)?
A
0625/1 S00
5
11 The diagrams show four schemes which use a barrier to convert tidal energy into electrical energy.
Which scheme has the greatest output of electrical energy?
turbine
low
water
level
barrier
high
water
level
turbine
barrier
high
water
level
low
water
level
low
water
level
high
water
level
high
water
level
low
water
level
12 The diagram shows a mercury barometer.
mercury
What is at X?
A
air at atmospheric pressure
air at high pressure
a vacuum
water vapour
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
6
13 Which diagram shows the best shape for a dam wall?
A
B
dam wall
dam wall
water
C
dam wall
D
dam wall
water
water
water
14 A fixed mass of gas is kept in a sealed cylinder, so that its volume does not change.
GAS
How does a change in the temperature affect the pressure of the gas?
temperature change
pressure change
decreases
increases
decreases
unchanged
increases
decreases
increases
increases
0625/1 S00
7
15 The diagram shows some molecules in a liquid.
Molecules A and D are fast-moving, molecules B and C are slow-moving.
Which of these molecules is the most likely to escape from the liquid by evaporation?
A (fast)
B (slow)
liquid
D (fast)
C (slow)
16 A mercury thermometer without a scale is placed in pure melting ice.
mercury
pure
melting
ice
water
What does the level of mercury in the thermometer show?
A
the boiling point of water
the lower fixed point
the melting point of mercury
the upper fixed point
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
8
17 Some ice is heated at a constant rate in a beaker. The ice melts and later the water boils for a
short while.
Which graph shows how the temperature changes with time?
time
time
temperature/ C
time
C
temperature/ C
B
temperature/ C
temperature/ C
18 A person lifts a hot pan from a stove. Although the pan is hot, the handle is cool.
What is the handle made of?
A
aluminium
copper
iron
wood
19 Warm water enters a tank of cold water from the side.
cold water
warm water
What happens to the warm water and why?

warm water
why?
rises
It is less dense than cold water.
rises
It is more dense than cold water.
sinks
It is less dense than cold water.
sinks
It is more dense than cold water.
0625/1 S00
time
9
20 Plane waves produced in a ripple tank arrive at a barrier that has a small gap.
waves moving in
this direction
What causes the wave pattern that is produced beyond the barrier?
A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
21 A floating cork moves up and down as a water wave passes it.

direction of water wave
movement of cork
A candle flame moves backwards and forwards as a sound wave passes it.
direction of sound wave
movement of flame
What does this show about water waves and sound waves?
water waves
sound waves
longitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
10
22 Which diagram shows how a real image is formed by the lens?
lens
image
lens
image
lens
image
lens
image
23 A ray of light is reflected from two mirrors as shown.
60
80
30 30
40
50
X
What is the angle of reflection at point X?

A
40
50
60
0625/1 S00
80
11
24 Two windows are double-glazed. Window X is made of two pieces of glass with a vacuum between
them. Window Y is made of two pieces of plastic with air between them.
glass
plastic
vacuum
air
window X
window Y
Which window is better at stopping sound passing through and why?

window
why?
Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
Sound cannot travel through glass.
Sound cannot travel through air.
Sound cannot travel through plastic.
25 The diagram shows a student standing 165 m in front of a wall. He claps his hands once.
wall
165 m
How long after the handclap does he hear the echo?
[The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.]
A
0.25 s
0.50 s
1.0 s
0625/1 S00
2.0 s
[Turn over
12
26 A magnet is placed in a coil connected to an electrical supply.
magnet
coil
electrical supply
What is the best way to demagnetise the magnet?
A
Use a d.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
Use a d.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
Use an a.c. supply and leave the magnet inside the coil.
Use an a.c. supply and slowly remove the magnet from the coil.
27 A magnet is brought near metal bars X and Y.

S
no effect
repulsion
What are X and Y made of?

X
aluminium
magnetised steel
aluminium
unmagnetised iron
unmagnetised iron
magnetised steel
unmagnetised iron
unmagnetised iron
0625/1 S00
13
28 Which diagram shows how a voltmeter and an ammeter are connected to find the value of the
resistance of resistor R?
A
R
C
V
A
V
D
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
14
29 Two uncharged metal-coated polystyrene spheres, P and Q, are suspended side by side.
Both spheres are then given positive charges.

Which diagram shows the new positions of the spheres?
A
30 Component Y is placed in the circuit shown and is used to reduce the brightness of the lamp
gradually.
Y
What is component Y?
A
a fuse
a relay
a switch
a variable resistor
0625/1 S00
15
31 In the circuit, which ammeter shows the greatest reading?
A
A
B
A
C
A
D
A
32 A lamp is connected across the mains supply.

Which diagram shows where the fuse should be connected?
A
live
fuse
live
fuse
neutral
neutral
C
live
live
fuse
neutral
neutral
fuse
33 An electric kettle takes 12 A of current from the mains supply. When the kettles cable needs to be
replaced, a 5 A cable is used that was originally attached to a small lamp. The original plug and
fuse from the kettles cable are used.
Why does this cause a problem?
A
The cable becomes hot and melts the insulation.
The fuse blows as soon as the kettle is switched on.
The kettle becomes too hot.
The water takes too long to reach its boiling point.
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
16
34 Which device makes use of the magnetic effect of an electric current?
A
electric bell
electric fire
fuse
lamp
35 The diagram shows a transformer, with 100 V applied to the primary coil.
100 V
primary coil
(40 turns)
secondary coil
(80 turns)
What is the voltage across the secondary coil?

A
50 V
100 V
200 V
800 V
36 The diagram shows part of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.

particles
from cathode
cathode
Which particles are emitted by the cathode?

A
alpha (-) particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
0625/1 S00
17
37 In the circuit shown, the brightness of the light reaching the light-dependent resistor increases.
light
light-dependant resistor
A ammeter
What happens to the current through the ammeter?

A
It becomes zero.
It decreases.
It does not change.
It increases.
38 Which statement about an alpha (-) particle is correct?

A
It can pass through thick paper.
It has no charge.
It is a helium nucleus.
It is a type of electromagnetic radiation.
0625/1 S00
[Turn over
18
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source plotted against time.
80
70
60
50
activity
40
counts/min
30
20
10
0
0
time/hours
After what time is the activity one quarter of its original value?
A
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
4 hours
Co.
40 A nuclide of cobalt is shown by the symbol 60
27
How many protons and neutrons are there in the nucleus of this nuclide?
protons
neutrons
27
33
27
60
60
27
60
87
Go to answers
0625/1 S00

0625/1
PHYSICS
Tuesday
7 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes

SB (KN/TC) QK07573/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
The diagram shows a measuring cylinder.
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Which unit would be most suitable for its scale?

A
mm2
mm3
cm2
cm3
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and at the finish of an experiment.
stopclock
at start
stopclock
at finish
60
60
45
15
45
30
30
How long did the experiment take?

A
10 s
25 s
15
35 s
0625/1 W00
45 s
3
3
A ball is thrown up into the air. The diagram shows the balls path.
Y
Ignoring air resistance, which statement about the acceleration of the ball is correct?
It is least at point X.
It is zero at point Y.
It is greatest at point Z.
It is the same at points X, Y and Z.
Which graph shows the speed of a stone, dropped from the top of a building, until it hits the
ground? (Assume there is no air resistance.)
time
time
0625/1 W00
speed
speed
speed
speed
time
time
[Turn over
4
5
The diagram shows a book resting on a slope.

In which direction does the weight of the book act?
A
B
D C
An astronaut has a mass of 60 kg on the Moon.

What is the mass of this astronaut on Earth?
A
6 kg
60 kg
60 N
600 N
R and S
The table shows information about four objects.

object
mass/g
volume/cm3
30
40
50
10
50
Which two objects have the same density?

A
P and Q
P and R
Q and S
0625/1 W00
5
8
A student tries to balance a 10 kg bag of rice on a pivoted beam, using a 5 kg bag of rice.
5 kg
10 kg
pivot
What should be done to balance the bags?
add some rice to the 10 kg bag
empty some rice out of the 5 kg bag
move the pivot away from the 10 kg bag
move the pivot towards the 10 kg bag
A hot-air balloon moves in the direction shown at constant speed and at constant height.
W, X, Y and Z are the forces acting on the balloon.
direction of
movement
Which statement about the forces is correct?

A
Z is equal to X and W is equal to Y.
Z is equal to X and W is less than Y.
Z is less than X and W is equal to Y.
Z is less than X and W is less than Y.
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
6
10 The diagram shows the main parts of a hydroelectric power station.
water
dam
wall
generator
turbine
Which energy change occurs in the generator?

A
chemical to electrical
electrical to chemical
electrical to kinetic
kinetic to electrical
11 Forces are used to move objects P, Q, R and S through the distances shown.
5N
10 N
5N
10 N
Which statement correctly describes the work done by each force?

A
Most work is done in moving R.
Most work is done in moving S.
The same amount of work is done in moving P and Q.
The same amount of work is done in moving P and R.
0625/1 W00
7
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
Which distance can be used to find atmospheric pressure?

A
25 cm
75 cm
80 cm
100 cm
13 A child has a set of identical building blocks.

Which arrangement produces the least pressure on the floor?
A
C
B
D
14 Liquid evaporates from an open dish.

Which molecules of liquid are most likely to escape?
A
all molecules with a little energy
all molecules with a lot of energy
surface molecules with a little energy
surface molecules with a lot of energy
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
8
15 A lorry driver checks the pressure of the air in the tyres when the temperature is 5 C. After a long
journey, the tyres are hot and the pressure of the air in the tyres has increased.
Why has the pressure increased?
A
Some air has leaked from the tyres during the journey.
The air in the tyres is less dense.
The average speed of the air molecules is greater.
The tyres have expanded and have a larger volume.
16 Long pipes that carry steam often have bends in them, as shown.
Why are these bends needed?

A
to allow for expansion
to allow for pressure changes
to make the pipes stronger
to reduce the flow of steam
17 A solid substance is heated. The graph shows the change in temperature of the substance with
time.
At which stage does melting take place?
stage
A
stage
B
stage
C
temperature
time
0625/1 W00
stage
D
9
18 At the end of a long race, a runner is wrapped in a thin, plastic blanket that has a shiny, metallic
surface.
Which type of heat loss is the shiny surface intended to reduce?
A
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
19 A woman stands by a fire to warm her hands and legs.
How does most of the heat reach her hands and legs?
hands
legs
convection
convection
radiation
convection
convection
radiation
radiation
radiation
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
10
20 The diagram shows waves in a ripple tank passing from deep water to shallow water.
shallow water
deep water
wavefront
What happens to the speed and frequency of the waves?

speed
frequency
decreases
decreases
decreases
unchanged
increases
increases
unchanged
increases
21 The diagram represents a wave.
displacement
P
distance
S
R
What is the amplitude and wavelength of the wave?
amplitude
wavelength
0625/1 W00
11
22 A paper-clip is placed in front of a plane mirror.
paper-clip
plane mirror
Which diagram shows the image formed behind the mirror?

A
23 A ray of white light passes into each glass block as shown.

Which block produces dispersion of the light?
A
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
12
24 The diagram shows apparatus used to find what happens to the sound from an electric bell as air
is removed from the container.
electric
bell
container
to vacuum
pump
What happens to the sound of the electric bell heard from outside the container?
A
It becomes louder.
It becomes quieter.
It becomes quieter, then louder.
It remains the same.
0625/1 W00
13
25 Two students stand 600 m apart.
student with
starting-pistol
student with
stopwatch
600 m
not to scale
They find that it takes 2 seconds for the sound from the starting pistol to travel from one student to
the other.
From these results, what is the speed of sound in air?
A
150 m/s
300 m/s
600 m/s
1200 m/s
26 A piece of soft iron is placed in a coil. The switch is then closed.

soft iron
switch open
What is the condition of the soft iron when the switch is open and when the switch is closed?
switch open
switch closed
magnetised
magnetised
magnetised
unmagnetised
unmagnetised
magnetised
unmagnetised unmagnetised
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
14
27 When a magnet is brought near some metals, it induces magnetic poles in the metals.
Which diagram shows the poles induced when a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised
piece of iron and to an unmagnetised piece of aluminium?
iron
A
N
magnet
aluminium
iron
B
N
magnet
S
(no poles)
aluminium
iron
C
N
magnet
aluminium
iron
D
N
magnet
S
(no poles)
aluminium
28 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A
V
V
V
V
0625/1 W00
15
29 Which diagram shows the directions of the electrostatic forces acting on two positively charged
spheres?
A
+
D
30 What is the correct symbol for a fuse?
31 In which circuit is lamp L1 lit, but lamp L2 unlit?

A
L1
L2
L1
L2
0625/1 W00
L1
L2
L1
L2
[Turn over
16
32 The diagram shows the structure of a fuse.
metal end cap
ceramic case
wire X
What is the purpose of wire X?

A
to decrease the resistance of the circuit
to increase the current in the circuit
to keep the end caps on
to melt when the current becomes too large
33 A wiring diagram for car headlamps and parking lamps is shown.
36 W
36 W
5W
5W
Why are the lamps connected in parallel?

A
so that, if one lamp goes out, the others will remain lit
so that the current in each lamp is the same
so that the lamps operate at normal brightness, even when the battery runs down
so that the voltage across each lamp is one quarter of the battery voltage
0625/1 W00
17
34 The diagram shows a step-up transformer.
input
(few turns)
output
(many turns)
What is stepped up by this type of transformer?

A
current
energy
power
voltage
35 Which diagram shows how a coil of wire and a magnet can be used to produce an electric current
through a meter?
magnet
movement
coil
C
coil
glued
on to
magnet
meter
0625/1 W00
[Turn over
18
36 The diagram shows part of an alarm circuit.
capacitor
What does the capacitor do?

A
It detects changes in light intensity.
It detects changes in temperature.
It produces a magnetic field.
It stores electrical energy.
37 The charges on the x-plates and y-plates of a cathode-ray oscilloscope cause the spot on the
screen to move to the position shown.
y-plate
screen
x-plate
x-plate
spot
y-plate
Which diagram shows how the plates are charged?

A
_
spot
spot
0625/1 W00
+
spot
spot
_
D
_
19
38 A piece of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector. What are the possible
radiations that can pass through the paper?
A
alpha () radiation only.
alpha () and gamma () radiation only.
beta () and gamma () radiation only.
alpha (), beta () and gamma () radiation.
39 The graph shows how the activity of a radioactive substance changes with time.
800
700
600
500
activity
counts/min
400
300
200
100
0
0
time/min
What is the half-life of the substance?
A
1 min
2 min
3 min
4 min
40 The diagram represents a helium atom.

key
e = electron
p = proton
p p
n n
n = neutron
= nucleus
e
What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom?
A
8
0625/1 W00
Go to answers
PHYSICS
0625/1
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes
possible answers, A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in
soft pencil on the separate answer sheet.

ND/CG QF10308/3
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
A student measures the width of a book using a ruler.

Which diagram shows the best way to do this?
book
10
20
30 cm
10
20
30 cm
10
20
30 cm
10
20
30 cm
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the start and finish of an experiment.
stopclock
at start
60
stopclock
at finish
60
45
15
45
30
30

A
10 s
25 s
15
35 s
0625/1/M/J/01
45 s
3
3
An apple falls from a tree. The diagram shows the apple at P, as it starts to fall, and at Q, just
before it hits the ground. The acceleration due to gravity is g. Air resistance can be ignored.
What is the acceleration of the apple at position P and at position Q?
acceleration at P
acceleration at Q
In a race, a car travels 60 times round a 3.6 km track. It takes 2.4 hours.
What is the average speed of the car?
A
2.5 km / h
90 km / h
144 km / h
216 km / h
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
4
5
A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
friction
mass
pressure
weight
A child of mass 40 kg sits on one end of a see-saw. The pivot is at the centre of the see-saw.
There are four sacks of sand, each with a different mass, as shown.
40 kg
see saw
X
30kg 20kg 10kg 5kg

pivot
How many of the sacks must be placed at X to balance the child?
A
An object has a mass of 75 g and a volume of 15 cm3.

What is its density?
A
0.2 g / cm3
5 g / cm3
60 g / cm3
0625/1/M/J/01
90 g / cm3
5
8
The diagrams show a brick resting on a smooth surface. Two equal forces F act on the brick.
In which diagram does the brick not move?
A
Four rings are screwed into a door, as shown. The door can be opened by putting a hook into
one of the rings and pulling.
B
A
C
D
pull
Which ring should be used if the pulling force is to be as small as possible?
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
6
10 A stone is thrown into the air. The diagram shows the path of the stone through the air.
At which position is the potential energy of the stone greatest?
C
B
11 Four weightlifters lift weights to different heights.

Which weightlifter does the most work?
A
1000 N lifted
through 1.0 m
1000 N lifted
through 1.2 m
0625/1/M/J/01
1200 N lifted
through 1.0 m
1200 N lifted
through 1.2 m
7
12 The diagram shows a simple barometer.
Which distance should be measured to find the atmospheric pressure?
vacuum
mercury
trough
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on snow.
X
Which boy is more likely to sink into the snow and why?
boy
pressure on snow
larger than Y
smaller than Y
larger than X
smaller than X
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
8
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure
volume
decreases
decreases
decreases
remains the same
increases
decreases
increases
remains the same
15 To keep a bottle of milk cold without a refrigerator on a hot day, the bottle can be covered with a
damp cloth in a bowl of water.
damp cloth
bottle
milk
bowl
water
How does this method keep the milk cold?

A
Milk condenses on the cloth.
Milk evaporates from the cloth.
Water condenses on the cloth.
Water evaporates from the cloth.
0625/1/M/J/01
9
16 The diagram shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
0C
liquid
100C
glass bulb
stem
When the thermometer becomes hotter, the liquid moves further along the stem.
Why is this?
A
The glass contracts.
The glass expands.
The liquid contracts.
The liquid expands.
17 Two copper rods, A and C, and two copper tubes, B and D, have the same external diameter.
Which rod has the highest thermal capacity?
A
B
C
D
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
10
18 On a cold night, two children sit next to a camp fire to warm their hands. Their hands are the
same distance from the fire. Child 1 holds his hands over the fire and child 2 holds her hands in
front of the fire.
child 1's hands
child 2's hands
How does the heat from the fire reach each childs hands?
child 1
child 2
convection only
radiation only
convection and radiation
radiation only
radiation only
radiation only
convection only
19 An electric kettle contains a metal heating element.
water
heating element
What are the main processes by which heat energy is transferred from the element to the water,
and throughout the water?
heat transfer process
element to water
throughout water
conduction
convection
convection
radiation
radiation
conduction
radiation
convection
0625/1/M/J/01
11
20 The diagrams show four sources of waves.
Which source generates longitudinal waves?
A
stick pushed up
and down in water
radio
transmitter
loudspeaker
lamp
21 The diagram shows a wave on the surface of some water.

At which two points are the molecules moving in the same vertical direction at the same time?
Q
T
R
S
P and Q
P and T
Q and T
R and S
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
12
22 The diagrams show a semi-circular glass block.
Which diagram correctly shows the path of the ray of light and the critical angle c?
A
B
c
D
c
23 A student copies a diagram of the electromagnetic spectrum but makes a mistake.

radio
waves
microwaves
infra-red
waves
visible
light
Xrays
ultra-violet
waves
long wavelength
gamma
rays
short wavelength
Which two names should be interchanged so that the order is correct?

A
infra-red waves and radio waves
infra-red waves and ultra-violet waves
radio waves and visible light
ultra-violet waves and X-rays
24 An electric bell is ringing inside a glass dome.

In which situation would the bell sound quietest?
A
vacuum
electric
bell
electric
bell
glass
dome
glass
dome
air
oxygen
0625/1/M/J/01
carbon
dioxide
13
25 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high. What information
does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave produced?
amplitude
frequency
too large
too large
too large
too small
too small
too large
too small
too small
26 The diagrams show a magnetised piece of steel being moved slowly to the left.
Which diagram shows the best method of demagnetising the steel?
A
d.c.
a.c.
steel
steel
C
S
D
magnet
steel
magnet
steel
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
14
27 The diagram shows some nails attracted to a metal rod by magnetic induction.
permanent
magnet
N
metal
rod
nails
From what could the metal rod be made?

A
aluminium
copper
iron
magnesium
28 What is the unit of potential difference?

A
joule
newton
volt
watt
0625/1/M/J/01
15
29 A plastic strip is rubbed on a piece of cloth and then held near water running slowly from a tap.
The water moves towards the plastic strip.
tap
plastic strip
water
A
The plastic strip cools the water.
The plastic strip warms the water.
There is a magnetic force on the water.
There is an electrostatic force on the water.
30 The diagrams show part of an electric circuit containing an ammeter and a voltmeter.
Which arrangement should be used to measure the p.d. across the resistor and the current
through it?
A
B
A
D
V
V
A
0625/1/M/J/01
[Turn over
16
31 The circuits contain identical lamps and identical cells.
In which circuit will the lamps be brightest?
A
32 Why are lamps in the lighting circuit of a house connected in parallel and not in series?
A
It allows them to be switched on and off independently.
It uses less electrical energy.
The filaments are less likely to burn out.
The p.d. across each lamp is reduced.
33 A builder plugs an electric drill into a socket inside a house.
house
electric cable
He uses the drill outdoors. It starts to rain heavily.

Why is it dangerous to continue using the electric drill in the rain?
A
The drill could give the builder an electric shock.
The drill could overheat.
The fuse could blow.
The rain could rust the drill.
0625/1/M/J/01
17
34 A wire is placed between the poles of a magnet and is briefly connected to a cell. It experiences
a downwards force.
downwards
force
magnet
The cell is now reversed so that it is connected the other way round.
What happens to the direction of the magnetic field of the magnet and to the direction of the
force on the wire?
direction of magnetic field
direction of force
reversed
reversed
reversed
unchanged
unchanged
reversed
unchanged
unchanged
35 The diagram represents a transformer.
input
voltage
output
voltage
Which arrangement would make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
number of turns on
primary coil P
number of turns on
secondary coil S
50
100
a.c.
50
100
d.c.
100
50
a.c.
100
50
d.c.
0625/1/M/J/01
type of input
voltage
[Turn over
18
36 Which circuit will act as a variable potential divider?
A
output
input
input
output
input
input
output
output
37 The circuit shown contains a light dependent resistor (LDR) and an ammeter, in series with a
battery.
How does the circuit behave when more light shines on it?
resistance of LDR
current through ammeter
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
0625/1/M/J/01
19
38 A thick sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.
radioactive
source
detector
sheet of paper
Which types of radiation can pass through the paper?

A
alpha-particles, beta-particles and gamma radiation
alpha-particles and gamma radiation
alpha-particles and beta-particles
beta-particles and gamma radiation
39 The count rate of radiation produced by a radioactive sample is measured every minute. The
results are recorded in the table.
time / minutes
count rate / per second
0
1
2
3
4
5
80
56
40
28
20
14
What is the half-life of the radioactive material?

A
minute
2 minutes
2 minutes
5 minutes
3 Li
7
40 A nuclide of lithium contains 3 protons and 4 neutrons.

Which symbol represents this nuclide?
A
4 Li
3
3 Li
4
7 Li
3
Go to answers
0625/1/M/J/01

PHYSICS
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2001
0625/1
45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes

SPA (ND/CG) S09093/4
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
cm3
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
What volume of liquid does the cylinder contain?

A
5.5 cm3
5.7 cm3
6.5 cm3
6.7 cm3
The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
0 cm 1
What is the internal diameter d of the tube?

A
2.8 cm
3.1 cm
3.4 cm
0625/1/O/N/01
7.4 cm
10
11
3
3
An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
Which graph shows this motion?
speed
speed
0
0
time
speed
speed
time
time
time
A motorist travels 200 km.

After travelling along a fast road for 2 hours, the motorist uses a slow road for the remaining
hour of the journey.
start
fast road 2 hours
slow road 1/2 hour
finish
A
80 km / h
100 km / h
400 km / h
0625/1/O/N/01
500 km / h
[Turn over
4
5
Which of the following has the same unit as weight?

A
energy
force
mass
power
The mass of an astronaut is 70 kg on the Moon.

What is the astronauts mass on Earth?
A
7 kg
70 kg
80 kg
700 kg
Which of the following is a unit of density?

A
cm3 / g
g / cm2
g / cm3
kg / m2
A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension/load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
start
with load added

x
What is the extension caused by the load?

A
y+x
yx
0625/1/O/N/01
5
9
Diagram X shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on a van when it is moving
forward at constant speed.
diagram X
(constant speed)
CIE
force Q
force R
Diagram Y shows the directions of the horizontal forces acting on the same van when it is
accelerating.
diagram Y
(accelerating)
CIE
force S
force T
Which of the following describes the sizes of the forces Q, R, S and T?

diagram X
(constant speed)
diagram Y
(accelerating)
Q less than R
S less than T
Q less than R
S equal to T
Q equal to R
S less than T
Q equal to R
S equal to T
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
6
10 A pole-vaulter runs up to a jump with his pole straight. He puts one end of the pole down on the
ground and the pole bends.
before
after
pole
Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?

A
chemical
gravitational
motion
strain
11 A ball is allowed to roll down a slope, as shown in the diagram. There is no friction.
At which point does the ball have the greatest energy of motion (kinetic energy)?
start
A
C
B
D
0625/1/O/N/01
7
12 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.
finger
pinhead
pin
thumb
Which statement is correct?

A
The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
13 The diagram shows a manometer attached to an inflated balloon.
balloon
mercury
What does the difference between the mercury levels show?

A
The air pressure inside the balloon is greater than atmospheric pressure.
The air pressure outside the balloon is greater than the pressure inside the balloon.
The air pressure in the left and right sides of the tube is equal.
The air pressure in the left side of the tube is greater than the pressure on the right side.
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
8
14 A gas is heated at constant volume.
What happens to its pressure and the speed of its molecules?
gas pressure
speed of molecules
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances.
Which substance is a gas at 25 C?
melting point / C
boiling point / C
-219
-183
-7
58
98
890
1083
2582
16 In an experiment, a piece of melting ice and a beaker of boiling water are in a laboratory which is
at 20 C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and of the boiling water?
temperature of the
melting ice
temperature of the
boiling water
constant
constant
constant
increasing
increasing
constant
increasing
increasing
0625/1/O/N/01
9
17 The glass stopper in the neck of a glass bottle is too tight to come out.
Which diagram shows the best way to loosen the stopper?
A
in a stream of
cold water for a
short time
in a stream of
hot water for a
short time
inside a warm
oven for a
long time
inside a refrigerator
for a long time
18 A camper warms her hands near a gas lamp.
Which waves carry most heat to her hands, and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves
electromagnetic
infra-red
no
infra-red
yes
light
no
light
yes
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
10
19 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Metal balls are
stuck with wax to rods made of different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
Which metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram X
diagram Y
heat
heat
D
C
B
A
after heating
before heating
20 Plane water waves are approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.

Which diagram shows the diffraction pattern?
A
0625/1/O/N/01
11
21 The diagram shows four waves drawn to the same scale.
P
0
0
0
0
distance
distance
0
0
0
0
distance
distance

A
The amplitude of wave P is the same as the amplitude of wave R.
The amplitude of wave S is double the amplitude of wave Q.
The wavelength of wave Q is double the wavelength of wave P.
The wavelength of wave S is the same as the wavelength of wave Q.
22 Which diagram shows how a ray of light passes through a glass prism in a periscope?
A
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
12
23 The diagram shows a section of the electromagnetic spectrum.
gamma-rays
X-rays
ultra-violet rays
visible light
How do the frequency and the speed of gamma rays compare with those of visible light?
frequency
speed in a vacuum
gamma greater
same
visible greater
same
gamma greater
gamma faster
visible greater
visible faster
24 Which change would make a sound louder?

A
decreasing the amplitude of the wave
increasing the amplitude of the wave
decreasing the wavelength
increasing the wavelength
0625/1/O/N/01
13
25 A lighted candle is put in front of a loudspeaker which is making a loud, steady note. The flame
vibrates because of the sound wave.
loudspeaker
candle
Which type of waves are sound waves and in which direction does the flame vibrate?
type of wave
A
longitudinal
transverse
longitudinal
transverse
direction of vibration
26 When a magnet is brought close to an unmagnetised piece of iron, the iron becomes
magnetised.
Which diagram correctly shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron?
A
magnet
iron
S
magnet
iron
iron
0625/1/O/N/01
N
S
S
N
iron
[Turn over
14
27 Two rods X and Y look the same.
magnet
P
N
rod X
rod Y
S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
end tested
result
attraction
attraction
attraction
repulsion
Which of the rods is a magnet?

A
neither of the rods
both of the rods
rod X only
rod Y only
0625/1/O/N/01
15
28 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?
R
R
A
R
V
29 A polythene rod repels an inflated balloon hanging from a nylon thread.

What charges must the rod and the balloon carry?
A
The rod and the balloon carry opposite charges.
The rod and the balloon carry like charges.
The rod is charged but the balloon is not.
The balloon is charged but the rod is not.
30 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.
Z
What should be connected at Z?
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
16
31 A student uses four ammeters to measure the current in different parts of a circuit.
P
10
R
A
20
S
A
Which two ammeters will each read the largest current?

A
P and Q
P and R
R and Q
R and S
32 Four lamps are each labelled 240 V, 60 W.

In which circuit would all four lamps have the correct brightness?
240 V
240 V
240 V
240 V
0625/1/O/N/01
17
33 A student makes the circuit shown.
5 A fuse
The fuse has blown and stopped the current.

What could have caused this?
A
A 3 A fuse should have been used.
The lamp was loose.
The current was too large.
The voltage was too small.
34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft-iron bar is hung near to it.
soft iron
coil
The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.
How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
with the battery as shown
with the battery reversed
attracted to the coil
repelled from the coil
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
18
35 A wire carries an electric current between the poles of a magnet. This causes a force that
pushes the wire upwards.
force on wire
current into
page
The poles of the magnet and the direction of the current are both reversed.
Which arrow now shows the direction of the force on the wire?
A
force on wire
N D
B S
current out
of page
0625/1/O/N/01
19
36 Which graph shows how a thermistor could behave?
A
resistance
resistance
brightness of light
resistance
brightness of light
resistance
temperature
temperature
37 The diagram shows a circuit which includes a switch and a capacitor.

Y
switch
X
capacitor
What happens to the capacitor when the switch is at X and when it is at Y?

switch at X
switch at Y
charging
charging
charging
discharging
discharging
charging
discharging
discharging
0625/1/O/N/01
[Turn over
20
38 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
activity/
counts per
second
120
90
60
30
0
0
2
3
4
time/minutes

A
1 minute
2 minutes
2 minutes
4 minutes
39 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms give out alpha-particles.
1st particle
atom
1
atom
2
atom
5
atom
3
atom
4
2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
Which atom will give out the next particle?
A
atom 2
atom 4
atom 5
it is impossible to tell
0625/1/O/N/01
21
40 The diagram shows the particles in an atom. Charged particles are marked + or .
What is the nucleon number (mass number) of the atom?

A
13
Go to answers
0625/1/O/N/01
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
0625/1
PHYSICS

45 minutes
Soft clean eraser
TIME
45 minutes

SP (AT/KN) S24280/2
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
The diagram shows a stopwatch, originally set at 00:00.

When a car was first seen, the stop-start button was pressed. When the car passed the observer,
the stopwatch showed 01:06.
stop-start button
min
01 : 06
How long did the car take to reach the observer?
1.06 seconds
6 seconds
66 seconds
106 seconds
A girl uses a rule to measure the length of a metal rod. Because the end of the rule is damaged,
she places one end of the rod at the 1 cm mark as shown.
metal rod
damaged
end
How long is the metal rod?

A
43 mm
46 mm
53 mm
0625/1/O/N/02
56 mm
cm
3
3
A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff into the sea. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A
acceleration
acceleration
0
0
time
C
acceleration
acceleration
0
0
time
time
time
A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child.

What is the length of the train?
A
10 m
30 m
90 m
270 m
Which of the following statements is correct?

A
Mass and weight are different names for the same thing.
The mass of an object is different if the object is taken to the Moon.
The weight of a car is one of the forces acting on the car.
The weight of a chocolate bar is measured in kilograms.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
4
6
In an experiment, six identical bags of flour are balanced by a 9 kg mass.
six bags
of flour
9 kg mass
pivot
Two bags of flour are removed. What mass will balance the remaining bags?
A
3 kg
6 kg
7 kg
9 kg
The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid are shown in the
diagram.
cm3
cm3
100
100
liquid
50
50
mass = 140 g
mass = 217 g

A
217 g / cm3
52
217 g / cm3
70
77 g / cm3
52
In which of these situations is no resultant force needed?

A
a car changing direction
a car moving in a straight line at a steady speed
a car slowing down
a car speeding up
0625/1/O/N/02
77 g / cm3
70
5
9
The diagram shows sections of four objects, all of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass
of each object has been marked with a cross.
Which object is the most stable?
A
10 A car accelerates along a road as it rises uphill.
Which energy changes are taking place?
energy of motion
(kinetic energy)
energy of position
(gravitational potential energy)
decreasing
decreasing
decreasing
increasing
increasing
decreasing
increasing
increasing
11 In a car engine, energy stored in the fuel is converted into thermal energy (heat energy) and
energy of motion (kinetic energy).
In which form is the energy stored in the fuel?
A
chemical
geothermal
hydroelectric
nuclear
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
6
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
vacuum
level X
level Y
mercury
If atmospheric pressure increases, what happens to level X and to level Y?
level X
level Y
goes down
goes down
goes down
goes up
goes up
goes down
goes up
goes up
13 Four flower vases have circular bases. They are filled with water so that they all have the same
weight.
Which vase exerts the greatest pressure on its base?
A
14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is placed in a refrigerator to cool down.

How do the gas molecules behave when this happens?
A
They move more quickly and are closer together.
They move more quickly and are further apart.
They move more slowly and are closer together.
They move more slowly and are further apart.
0625/1/O/N/02
7
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in
If the temperature of the gas does not change, what happens to the pressure of the gas?
A
It drops to zero.
It decreases, but not to zero.
It stays the same.
It increases.
16 A mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures from 0 C to 100 C.

Why is mercury suitable?
A
Mercury expands when heated.
Mercury has a boiling point below 100 C.
Mercury has a melting point above 0 C.
Mercury is a poor conductor.
17 A block of ice is heated at a constant rate. Eventually the melted ice boils.
The graph shows how the temperature changes with time.
100
temperature / C
0
0
10
time / minutes
How many minutes did it take to melt all the ice?

A
11
0625/1/O/N/02
13
[Turn over
8
18 How does thermal energy (heat energy) travel through the vacuum between the Earth and the
Sun?
A
by conduction
by convection
by radiation
by radioactive decay
19 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

A
Heat loss by radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
No heat passes through the sides of either cup.
The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
The lid is used to reduce heat loss by convection.
0625/1/O/N/02
9
20 Waves are sent along two long springs X and Y as shown.
spring X
direction of
wave travel
side to
side
movement
backward
and
spring Y
direction of
wave travel
forward
movement
How should the wave motions in X and Y be described?
spring X
spring Y
longitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
21 Radio waves are received at a house at the bottom of a hill.
hill
The waves reach the house because the hill has caused them to be
A
diffracted.
radiated.
reflected.
refracted.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
10
22 One of the effects of passing a ray of white light through a prism is to split the light into colours.
prism
white light
coloured light
What is the name given to this effect?
A
deviation
dispersion
reflection
refraction
23 A student looks at the letter P on a piece of paper, and at its reflection in a mirror.
What does he see?
A
D
mirror
mirror
paper
paper
24 Which of the following can be heard by the human ear?

A
A whistle emitting a wave of frequency 50 kHz.
A bat emitting a wave of frequency of 30 kHz.
An insect emitting a wave of 300 Hz.
A vibrating spring emitting a wave of frequency of 5 Hz.
0625/1/O/N/02
11
25 Two sound waves P and Q are displayed on an oscilloscope with the same time-base and
Y-plate settings for each.
Which statement correctly describes the pitch and the loudness of the two sounds?
A
P has a higher pitch and is louder than Q.
P has a higher pitch and is quieter than Q.
P has a lower pitch and is louder than Q.
P has a lower pitch and is quieter than Q.
26 A piece of magnetised steel is placed inside a coil of wire that has a large alternating current
passing through it. The magnet is slowly moved out of the coil to position P.
steel magnet moved

out of coil
12 V a.c.
How has the steel changed when it reaches P?
A
It has become demagnetised.
There has been no change.
It has become a stronger magnet.
The poles have changed ends.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
12
27 A permanent magnet is placed close to a bar of soft iron PQ.
permanent
magnet
soft-iron bar
What happens?
A
P becomes a north pole.
P becomes a south pole.
PQ does not become magnetised.
The poles of the magnet are reversed.
28 In which circuit does the ammeter read the total current through both resistors?
B
A
A
0625/1/O/N/02
13
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four light bulbs.
Which bulb has the greatest resistance when used normally?
voltage / V
current / A
0.5
0.2
12
12
1.0
30 In the following circuits, the resistors have the same value and the cells are identical.
Which circuit has the smallest resistance?
A
31 The diagram shows a circuit, with four possible positions to place a switch.
lamp 1
C
lamp 2
At which labelled point should a switch be placed so that lamp 1 remains on all the time and
lamp 2 can be switched on and off?
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
14
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
What is device X?
A
a fuse
a relay
a resistor
an ammeter
33 A classroom has four lights, each fitted with a lamp marked 240 V, 100 W.
Which circuit is most suitable for the classroom?
A
240 V
240 V
240 V
240 V
0625/1/O/N/02
15
34 Which graph shows the output of a simple a.c. generator?
A
e.m.f.
e.m.f.
0
0
time
time
e.m.f.
e.m.f.
0
0
time
0625/1/O/N/02
time
[Turn over
16
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.
X
current
force
magnet
magnet
N
Y
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A
downwards
upwards
to the left
to the right
36 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope.

What is the name and charge of these particles?
name of particles
charge of particles
electrons
negative
electrons
positive
protons
negative
protons
positive
0625/1/O/N/02
17
37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 resistors.
100
100
Diagram 1
One of the resistors is changed to 90 , as shown in diagram 2.
90
100
Diagram 2
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A
It becomes zero.
It decreases a little.
It increases a little.
It stays the same.
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
paper
thick aluminium
radiation
no radiation
passes through
all radiation
passes through
What does this show about the radiation?
A
It is alpha-particles.
It is beta-particles.
It is gamma-rays.
It is a mixture of alpha-particles and gamma-rays.
0625/1/O/N/02
[Turn over
18
39 A sample of a radioactive isotope is decaying.
Which atoms will decay first?
A
impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random
impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known
atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms
atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily
40 Which line in the table gives the numbers of protons and neutrons in the nuclide 73 Li?
protons
neutrons
0625/1/O/N/02
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/1/O/N/02

0625/01
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice
May/June 2003
45 minutes
Additional Materials:
Multiple Choice Answer Sheet

Soft clean eraser
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Write in soft pencil.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided
unless this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C, and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Read the instructions on the Answer Sheet very carefully.
This document consists of 18 printed pages and 2 blank pages.

SP (SLC/KN) S45991/2
CIE 2003
[Turn over
2
1
A glass tank contains some water.
V
water
T
Q
U
R
The length QR and the width RS of the tank are known.
What other distance needs to be measured in order to be able to calculate the volume of the
water?
A
ST
SV
TU
TV
A stopwatch is used to time a race. The diagrams show the watch at the start and at the end of the
race.
start
55
end
60
55
10
50
40
35
30
45.7 s
46.0 s
15
40
25
46.5 s
0625/01/M/J/03
47.0 s
20
seconds
35
How long did the race take?

A
10
45
20
seconds
50
15
45
60
30
25
3
3
The diagram shows a speed-time graph for a body moving with constant acceleration.
speed
time
0
What is represented by the shaded area under the graph?
acceleration
distance
speed
time
A tunnel has a length of 50 km. A car takes 20 min to travel between the two ends of the tunnel.
2.5 km / h
16.6 km / h
150 km / h
1000 km / h

A
Mass is a force, measured in kilograms.
Mass is a force, measured in newtons.
Weight is a force, measured in kilograms.
Weight is a force, measured in newtons.
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
4
6
Three children, X, Y and Z, are using a see-saw to compare their weights.

X
Which line in the table shows the correct order of the childrens weights?
lightest
What apparatus is needed to determine the density of a regularly-shaped block?

A
a balance and a ruler
a balance and a forcemeter (spring balance)
a measuring cylinder and a ruler
a measuring cylinder and a beaker
A spring is suspended from a stand. Loads are added and the extensions are measured.
spring
stand
loads
rule
Which graph shows the result of plotting extension against load?

C
0
0
load
0
0
extension
B
extension
A
extension
extension
heaviest
load
0625/01/M/J/03
load
0
0
load
5
9
A student uses a stand and clamp to hold a flask of liquid.

Which diagram shows the most stable arrangement?
A
10 What is the source of the energy converted by a hydro-electric power station?

A
hot rocks
falling water
oil
waves
11 A labourer on a building site lifts heavy concrete blocks onto a lorry. Lighter blocks are now lifted
the same distance in the same time.
What happens to the work done in lifting each block and the power exerted by the labourer?
work done in
lifting each block
power exerted by
labourer
decreases
decreases
decreases
remains the same
increases
increases
remains the same
increases
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
6
12 The diagram shows an instrument used to measure gas pressure.
liquid
What is the instrument called?

A
ammeter
barometer
manometer
thermometer
13 The diagrams show two divers swimming in the sea and two divers swimming in fresh water. Sea
water is more dense than fresh water.
On which diver is there the greatest pressure?
0m
0m
sea water
A
2m
4m
fresh water
C
2m
6m
4m
6m
14 When water evaporates, some molecules escape.

Which molecules escape?
A
the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with less energy than others
the molecules at the bottom of the liquid with more energy than others
the molecules at the surface with less energy than others
the molecules at the surface with more energy than others
0625/01/M/J/03
7
15 Two metal boxes containing air are standing in a room. Box X is on top of a heater. Box Y is on a
bench. The boxes are left for a long time.
Y
heater
bench
Which line in the table best describes the average speed of the molecules in the containers?
box X
box Y
fast
zero
fast
slow
slow
fast
zero
fast
16 The top of the mercury thread in a mercury-in-glass thermometer reaches point X at 0 C and
point Z at 100 C.
Z
Y
X
W
Where might it be at a temperature below the ice-point?

A
point W
point X
point Y
point Z
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
8
17 The same quantity of heat energy is applied to four different blocks. The temperature rise
produced is shown on each block.
Which block has the highest thermal capacity?
A
temperature
rise is
3 C
temperature
rise is
6 C
temperature
rise is
18 C
temperature
rise is
9 C
18 A person holds a glass beaker in one hand and fills it quickly with hot water. It takes several
seconds before his hand starts to feel the heat.
Why is there this delay?
A
Glass is a poor conductor of heat.
Glass is a good conductor of heat.
Water is a poor conductor of heat.
Water is a good conductor of heat.
0625/01/M/J/03
9
19 The diagram shows a heater used to heat a tank of cold water.
water
lagging
tank
heater
What is the main process by which heat moves through the water?
A
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
20 What causes refraction when light travels from air into glass?
A
The amplitude of the light waves changes.
The colour of the light changes.
The frequency of the light waves changes.
The speed of the light changes.
21 A woman tunes her radio to a station broadcasting on 200 m.

What does the 200 m tell her about the radio wave?
A
its amplitude
its frequency
its speed
its wavelength
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
10
22 Which statement is correct about the speed of electromagnetic waves in a vacuum?
A
Ultra-violet waves have the greatest speed.
Visible light waves have the greatest speed.
Infra-red waves have the greatest speed.
All electromagnetic waves have the same speed.
23 Which diagram correctly shows rays passing through a camera lens?

camera
camera
B
film
film
object
object
lens
lens
image
camera
image
camera
D
film
film
object
object
lens
image
0625/01/M/J/03
lens
image
11
24 A sound wave passes through the air, in the direction shown.
direction of travel of sound wave
How does a particle of air move as the sound wave passes?

A
moves to the right and stays there
moves left and right
moves up and stays there
moves up and down
25 A boy is stranded on an island 500 m from the shore.
500 m
cliffs
island
He shouts for help, but all he can hear in reply is the echo of his shout from some cliffs.
Sound travels at 340 m / s through the air.
What is the time interval between the boy shouting and hearing the echo?
A
500
s
340
2 500
s
340
340
s
500
0625/01/M/J/03
2 340
s
500
[Turn over
12
26 A student wishes to use a magnetising coil to make a permanent magnet from a piece of metal.
metal
Which metal should she use?

A
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
27 A metal rod XY is placed near a magnet. End X is attracted when it is placed near to the north pole
of the magnet, and also when it is placed near to the south pole.
X
Y
N
N
attraction
attraction
How does end Y behave when it is placed, in turn, near to the two poles of the magnet?
Y near north pole Y near south pole
A
attraction
attraction
attraction
repulsion
repulsion
attraction
repulsion
repulsion
0625/01/M/J/03
13
28 When the potential difference (p.d.) across a piece of resistance wire is changed, the current
through the wire also changes.
The temperature of the wire is kept the same.
Which graph shows how the p.d. and current are related?
A
current
current
current
0
0
p.d.
current
0
p.d.
0
p.d.
p.d.
29 Two faulty ammeters and two perfect ammeters are connected in series in the circuit shown.
A1
A2
A3
A4
The readings on the ammeters are

A1 2.9 A
A2 3.1 A
A3 3.1 A
A4 3.3 A
Which two ammeters are faulty?
A
A1 and A2
A1 and A4
A2 and A3
A3 and A4
30 Which electrical component would not normally be found in a battery-operated torch (flashlight)?
A
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
14
31 A student connects two lamps in the circuit shown.
2
3
Which switches must he close to light both lamps?

A
1 and 2
1, 2 and 3
1 and 3
2 and 3
32 A student makes four circuits.

In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?
A
0625/01/M/J/03
15
33 Four lamps are labelled 60 W 240 V.
In which circuit are the lamps connected so that they all work at normal brightness?
A
240 V
240 V
240 V
D
240 V
34 The diagram shows a solenoid connected to a sensitive voltmeter.

S
magnet
solenoid
V
Which of the following would give a zero reading on the voltmeter?

A
holding the magnet stationary inside the solenoid
moving the magnet away from the solenoid
moving the magnet towards the solenoid
moving the solenoid towards the magnet
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
16
35 The diagram shows a transformer with an alternating voltage of 100 V applied to the primary coil.
secondary coil
primary coil
100 V
(40 turns)
(80 turns)
What is the voltage produced across the secondary coil?

A
50 V
100 V
200 V
8000 V
36 The diagram below shows the screen of a cathode-ray oscilloscope tube.

spot of light
The tube is placed between a pair of charged plates.

Which diagram shows the new position of the spot?
A
0625/01/M/J/03
17
37 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown.
A
thermometer
water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
What is component X?
A
a capacitor
a light-dependent resistor
a reed relay
a thermistor
38 Which type of radiation can be stopped by a sheet of paper?

A
-particles
-particles
-rays
X-rays
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
A
0.03 g
0.12 g
1.92 g
7.68 g
0625/01/M/J/03
[Turn over
18
40 An atom of lithium contains three protons and three electrons.
The nucleon number (mass number) of the atom is 7.
How many neutrons are there in the atom?
A
10
Go to answers
0625/01/M/J/03

0625/01
PHYSICS
October/November 2003
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser


MML 4504 11/02 S53619/2
UCLES 2003
UNIVERSITY of CAMBRIDGE
Local Examinations Syndicate
[Turn over
2
1
Which of the following is not necessary when using a measuring cylinder to measure the volume
of a quantity of water?
A
making sure that the measuring cylinder is vertical
making sure that your eye is level with the liquid surface
reading the bottom of the meniscus
using the largest measuring cylinder possible
A pendulum is set in motion and 20 complete swings are timed. The time measured is 30 s.
What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?
A
0.67 s
0.75 s
1.5 s
3.0 s
Five telegraph poles are positioned at equal distances along the side of a road.
pole 1
pole 2
pole 3
pole 4
pole 5
A car accelerates until it is level with pole 4. The car then continues along the road at a steady
speed. The times taken to travel between one pole and the next are measured.
Which time is the greatest?
The time between
A
pole 1 and pole 2.
pole 2 and pole 3.
pole 3 and pole 4.
pole 4 and pole 5.
0625/01/O/N/03
3
4
A train travels along a track from Aytown to Beetown. The map shows the route.
Aytown
Beetown
The distance travelled by the train between the towns is 210 km. It moves at an average speed of
70 km / h.
How long does the journey take?
70
less than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line
210
70
exactly hours
210
210
exactly hours
70
210
more than hours, because the journey is not in a straight line
70
A beam is pivoted at its centre. Two masses are suspended at equal distances from the pivot as
shown in the diagram.
pivot
block X
2 kg mass

A
If X has a mass of exactly 2 kg, it will rise.
If X has a mass of less than 2 kg, it will fall.
If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will fall.
If X has a mass of more than 2 kg, it will rise.
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
4
6
The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg.

When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
What is the mass of the bottle?
A
0.40 kg
0.50 kg
0.65 kg
0.80 kg
A student tries to find the density of a metal block. First he measures the weight with a
forcemeter (spring balance). Next he measures the sides of the block using a rule, in order to
calculate the volume of the block. Finally he divides the weight by the volume to find the density.
The student has made a mistake.
Why does his method not give the density?
Density is volume divided by weight.
He should have measured the surface area, not the volume.
He should have used the mass in his calculation, not the weight.
Weight is not measured with a forcemeter (spring balance).
Two forces act on an object.

In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?
A
The two forces act in the same direction.
The two forces act through the same point.
The two forces are of the same type.
The two forces are the same size.
0625/01/O/N/03
5
9
The table below shows the length of a wire as the load on it is increased.
load / N
length / cm
50.0
10
20
30
52.1
54.1
56.3
Which graph correctly shows the extension of the wire plotted against load?
A
60
extension / cm
extension / cm
40
20
0
0
10
20
30
10
20
load / N
30
load / N
56.3
extension / cm
extension / cm
4
54.1
52.1
50.0
0
10
20
30
load / N
10
20
30
load / N
10 A large electric motor is used to lift a container off a ship.

Which of the following values are enough to allow the power of the motor to be calculated?
A
the mass of the container and the distance moved
the force used and the distance moved
the current used and the work done
the work done and the time taken
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
6
11
A tidal power station is made by building a barrage across the mouth of a river. At high tide the
sea water is trapped behind the barrage.
barrage
turbine
trapped sea water
sea at low
tide
At low tide the water is allowed to flow back into the sea through a turbine.
What is the useful energy change in a tidal power station?
A
electrical energy
electrical energy
C
D
energy of position (potential)

energy of motion (kinetic)
energy of position (potential)

energy of position (potential) electrical energy
energy of motion (kinetic)
12 Which diagram shows the child exerting least pressure on the ground?
A
0625/01/O/N/03
7
13 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?
gas
14 Which line in the table correctly describes whether the molecules of a solid, liquid and gas are
moving or stationary?
solid
liquid
gas
stationary
stationary
stationary
stationary
stationary
moving
stationary
moving
moving
moving
moving
moving
15 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres.

This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.
Why is this?
A
Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.
Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.
The force between the air molecules increases.
The speed of the air molecules increases.
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
8
16 The diagram shows how the atoms in a substance rearrange themselves during a change of
state.
Which change of state is shown?

A
gas to liquid
liquid to gas
liquid to solid
solid to liquid
17 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers. They are heated from 20 C
to 30 C by heaters of the same power. Liquid 2 takes twice as long to heat as liquid 1.
same mass of
different liquids
liquid 1
liquid 2
heaters of
same power
heating time = t
heating time = 2t

A
Both liquids receive the same amount of energy.
Liquid 1 receives more energy than liquid 2.
The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is equal to the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
The thermal capacity of liquid 1 is less than the thermal capacity of liquid 2.
0625/01/O/N/03
9
18 There is a vacuum between the double walls of a vacuum flask.
Which types of heat transfer are reduced by the vacuum?
A
conduction and convection
conduction and radiation
conduction, convection and radiation
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
A
B
water
ice
ice wrapped
in lead wire
water
D
water
water
ice
ice wrapped
in lead wire
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
10
20 The diagram shows a cork with a weight attached so that the cork floats upright.
cork
X
water surface
Y
weight
Transverse waves travel across the water from X to Y.

Which way do the waves make the cork move?
A
right and left
up and down
only to the right
only to the left
21 Waves travel more slowly on the surface of water when the water is shallow.
A person drops a stone into a pool at X. The diagram shows the first wavefront on the surface of
the pool.
Which region of the pool is likely to be most shallow?
C
D
wavefront
0625/01/O/N/03
11
22 Which diagram correctly shows the paths taken by red and blue light when a beam of white light
enters a glass prism?
A
B
red
blue
white
light
blue
red
white
light
D
blue
red
white
light
red
blue
white
light
23 Which diagram shows the correct order of the waves in the electromagnetic spectrum?
visible
infra
radio red
ultra
violet
X-ray
A
increasing wavelength
visible
ultra
radio violet
infra
red
X-ray
B
visible
ultra
X-ray violet
infra
red
radio
C
visible
infra
X-ray red
ultra
violet
radio
D
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
12
24 Which change will lower the pitch of a sound?
A
decreasing its amplitude
decreasing its frequency
increasing its amplitude
increasing its frequency
25 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no

atmosphere in space.
hammer
astronaut 1
astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A
no sound at all
a quieter sound
a sound of the same loudness
a louder sound
0625/01/O/N/03
13
26 A steel bar is magnetised by stroking it several times with the south pole of a magnet, as shown.
N
S
X
Y
steel bar
Which poles are formed at X and Y?
north
north
north
south
south
north
south
south
27 A steel ball on a horizontal wooden table rolls near the north pole of a bar magnet that is lying on
the table.
Which diagram shows the most likely path of the ball, as seen from above the table?
A
B
S
magnet
ball
ball
C
magnet
magnet
D
magnet
ball
ball
0625/01/O/N/03
stops
here
[Turn over
14
28 A student wants to find the resistance of resistor R using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Which circuit should the student use?
A
29 Two very light, charged balls P and Q are hung, one above the other, from nylon threads. When a
negatively charged plastic sheet is placed alongside them, P is repelled and Q is attracted.
negatively
charged
plastic sheet
What are the original charges on P and on Q?
charge on P
charge on Q
negative
negative
negative
positive
positive
negative
positive
positive
0625/01/O/N/03
15
30 Four students are asked to draw a circuit showing three lamps working in parallel, a cell, and a
switch that controls all three lamps.
Which student is correct?
A
31 A 3.0 lamp and a 6.0 lamp are connected in series.

What is the total resistance of the combination?
A
0.5
2.0
9.0
18.0
32 Why is a circuit breaker or a fuse used in a mains electric circuit?

A
It allows spare current to be returned to the mains.
It improves the insulation of the wiring.
It protects the mains wiring from current overload.
It saves energy by reducing the current.

0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
16
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
X
X
circuit 1
circuit 2

A
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, both the other lamps will go out.
If lamp Y breaks in circuit 1, lamp Z will go out, but lamp X will remain on.
34 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how
why
at high voltage
for safety
at high voltage
to reduce energy loss
at low voltage
for safety
at low voltage
35 In a cathode-ray tube, particles are given off from a hot cathode by thermionic emission.
Which particles are given off?
A
atoms
electrons
ions
protons
0625/01/O/N/03
17
36 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.

A
The resistance of the lamp decreases.
The resistance of the lamp increases.
The resistance of the thermistor decreases.
The resistance of the thermistor increases.
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and a -ray?
-particle
-ray
helium nucleus
electromagnetic radiation
helium nucleus
electron
proton
proton
electron
38 A radioactive nucleus R decays with the emission of a -particle as shown.

x
yR
qpS
+
Which equation is correct?

A
x=p
y=q
p=x1
q=y1
0625/01/O/N/03
[Turn over
18
39 Which line in the table shows the structure of the nucleus of a helium atom 24 He?
electrons
neutrons
protons
26 X.
40 A nucleus of substance X has the symbol 12
How many electrons orbit around the nucleus of a neutral atom of substance X?
A
12
14
26
38
Go to answers
0625/01/O/N/03
UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

0625/01
PHYSICS
May/June 2004
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser


IB04 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Which unit would be most suitable for its scale?

A
2
mm2
mm3
cm2
cm3
A piece of cotton is measured between two points on a ruler.

cotton
cm
10
11
12
13
14
15
When the length of cotton is wound closely around a pen, it goes round six times.
six turns of cotton
pen
What is the distance once round the pen?

A
2.2 cm
UCLES 2004
2.6 cm
13.2 cm
0625/01/M/J/04
15.6 cm
16
3
3
The diagram shows the speed-time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1
0
0
3
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s?

A
4
1.5 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
6.0 m
A small steel ball is dropped from a low balcony.

Ignoring air resistance, which statement describes its motion?
It falls with constant acceleration.
It falls with constant speed.
It falls with decreasing acceleration.
It falls with decreasing speed.
Which statement about the mass of a falling object is correct?

A
It decreases as the object falls.
It is equal to the weight of the object.
It is measured in newtons.
It stays the same as the object falls.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
4
6
The weights of four objects, 1 to 4, are compared using a balance.
4
2
Which object is the lightest?

A
7
object 1
object 2
object 3
object 4

A
cm3 / g
g / cm2
g / cm3
kg / m2
A piece of card has its centre of mass at M.

Which diagram shows how it hangs when suspended by a thread?
A
M
M
M
An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
The results are shown below.
load / N
length / cm
15.2
16.2
1.0
extension / cm
3
18.6
2.1
3.4
Which figure is missing from the table?

A
16.5
UCLES 2004
17.3
17.4
0625/01/M/J/04
18.3
5
10 The diagram shows a man diving into water.
Which form of energy is increasing as he falls?

A
chemical
gravitational
kinetic
strain
11 A boy and a girl run up a hill in the same time.
boy weighs 600 N
girl weighs 500 N
The boy weighs more than the girl.

Which statement is true about the power produced?
A
The boy produces more power.
The girl produces more power.
They both produce the same power.
It is impossible to tell who produces more power.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
6
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer. The barometer reading is h cm of mercury.
mercury
What is the pressure at S?
A
approximately zero
atmospheric pressure
atmospheric pressure + h cm of mercury
h cm of mercury
13 Two boys X and Y each have the same total weight and are standing on soft ground.
Which boy is more likely to sink into the soft ground and why?
boy more
likely to sink
pressure on soft
ground
larger than Y
smaller than Y
larger than X
smaller than X
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
7
14 A student places his thumb firmly on the outlet of a bicycle pump, to stop the air coming out.
trapped air
direction of
motion
handle
What happens to the pressure and to the volume of the trapped air as the pump handle is pushed
in?
pressure
volume
decreases
decreases
decreases
remains the same
increases
decreases
increases
remains the same
15 A balloon is inflated in a cold room. When the room becomes much warmer, the balloon becomes
larger.
How does the behaviour of the air molecules in the balloon explain this?
A
The molecules become larger.
The molecules evaporate.
The molecules move more quickly.
The molecules repel each other.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
8
16 A substance is heated at a steady rate. It changes from a solid to a liquid, and then to a gas.
The graph shows how its temperature changes with time.
S
temperature
R
Q
P
time
Which parts of the graph show a change of state taking place?
A
P and R
P and S
Q and R
Q and S
17 An engineer wants to fix a steel washer on to a steel rod. The rod is just too big to fit into the hole
of the washer.
steel
washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer onto the rod?
A
cool the washer and put it over the rod
cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together
heat the rod and then place it in the hole
heat the washer and place it over the rod
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
9
18 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat. Balls are stuck with
wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram X.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram Y.
Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram X
diagram Y
A
before heating
after heating
19 Thermometer X is held above an ice cube and thermometer Y is held the same distance below
the ice cube. After several minutes, the reading on one thermometer changes. The ice cube does
not melt.
thermometer X
ice cube
thermometer Y
Which thermometer reading changes and why?

thermometer
reason
cool air rises from the ice cube
warm air rises from the ice cube
cool air falls from the ice cube
warm air falls from the ice cube
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
10
20 Water waves change direction when they move from shallow water to deep water.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
deep
water
shallow
water
What is the name of this effect?

A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
21 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P. In two seconds, three wave crests are
produced on the surface of the water.
Y
wave
crests
Which statement is true?

A
Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.
Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.
Each circle represents a wavefront.
The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
11
22 A plane mirror is on a wall.
Which is a correct description of the image formed by the mirror?
A
the right way up and smaller than the object
the right way up and the same size as the object
upside down and smaller than the object
upside down and the same size as the object
23 The diagram shows a ray of light entering a block of glass.

normal
ray of
light
2
air
glass
1
3
4
Which numbered angles are the angles of incidence and of refraction?

angle
of incidence
angle
of refraction
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
12
24 Three rays of light fall on a converging lens as shown.
lens
Which diagram shows the path of the rays after passing through the lens?
25 Which type of wave cannot travel through a vacuum?

A
infra-red radiation
microwaves
sound waves
X-rays
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
13
26 An engineer standing at P hears the sound of an explosion at X.
Z
Y
X
DANGER BLASTING
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other.
The second bang is an echo from
A
XY.
PV.
ZY.
WX.
27 How can a permanent magnet be demagnetised?

A
cool the magnet for a long time
hit the magnet repeatedly with a hammer
leave the magnet in a coil which carries direct current
pass a small current through the magnet
28 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.

Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?
A
It is a good conductor of electricity.
It forms a permanent magnet.
It has a high density.
It has a high thermal capacity.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
14
29 Which circuit shows how a voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference across the
cell?
A

A
31 An electrical component is to be placed in the circuit at Z, to allow the brightness of the lamp to
be varied from bright to dim.
What should be connected at Z?

A
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
15
32 The circuit shown contains four lamps and three switches.
switch 1
lamp 1
switch 2
lamp 2
lamp 3
switch 3
lamp 4
Which switches must be closed to light only lamps 1 and 3?

A
switch 1 only
switch 1 and switch 2 only
33 The diagram shows a torch containing two 2 V cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic
case
brass
connecting
strip
switch
lamp
What is the circuit diagram for the torch?

A
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
16
34 Which statement is correct?
A
A fuse is included in a circuit to prevent the current becoming too high.
A fuse should be connected to the neutral wire in a plug.
An electric circuit will only work if it includes a fuse.
An earth wire is needed to prevent the fuse blowing.
35 A straight wire carrying a current produces a magnetic field.

Which diagram shows the correct shape of the field?
current
current
D
current
UCLES 2004
current
0625/01/M/J/04
17
36 A student carries out an experiment to see the effect of a magnetic field on a wire carrying a
current.
The wire moves upwards as shown.
wire moves
upwards
S
direction
of current
What should the student do to make the wire move downwards?

A
change the direction of the current
move the poles of the magnet closer together
send a smaller current through the wire
use a stronger magnet
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + +
cathode rays
_ _ _ _ _ _
In which direction is the beam deflected?

A
into the page
out of the page
towards the bottom of the page
towards the top of the page
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04
[Turn over
18
38 Which line correctly describes -particles?
electric charge
penetrates 1 cm
of aluminium?
negative
yes
negative
no
positive
yes
positive
no
39 A small amount of a radioactive isotope contains 72 billion unstable nuclei. The half-life of the
isotope is 4 hours.
How many unstable nuclei would remain after 12 hours?
A
6 billion
9 billion
18 billion
24 billion
40 How many nucleons are in a nucleus of

A
19
20
39
19 K
?
39
58
Go to answers
UCLES 2004
0625/01/M/J/04

0625/01
PHYSICS
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser


IB04 11_0625_01/2RP
UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
A floor is covered with square tiles. The diagram shows a ruler on the tiles.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cm
How long is one tile?

A
2
3 cm
6 cm
9 cm
12 cm
The diagrams show the times on a stopclock at the beginning and at the end of an experiment.
stopclock
at beginning
0
stopclock
at end
0
45
15
45
15
30
30

A
3
10 s
25 s
35 s
45 s
Which speed / time graph applies to an object at rest?

A
speed
speed
UCLES 2004
time
speed
time
0625/01/O/N/04
speed
time
time
3
4
A racing car is fitted with an on-board computer. Every time the car passes the starting line, the
computer records the distance travelled in the next 2 seconds.
Which set of data shows that the car is increasing in speed during the 2 seconds?
A
B
distance
travelled / m
time / s
0
100
90
200
180
C
time / s
distance
travelled / m
time / s
D
distance
travelled / m
time / s
distance
travelled / m
80
100
190
180
A spring is stretched by hanging a piece of metal from it.
spring
metal
What is the name given to the force that stretches the spring?
A
friction
mass
pressure
weight
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
4
6
The diagram shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The mass of the liquid is 16 g.
25
cm3
20
15
10
5

A
7
320 g / cm 3
36 g / cm 3
1.25 g / cm 3
0.8 g / cm 3
A student carries out an experiment to plot an extension / load graph for a spring. The diagrams
show the apparatus at the start of the experiment and with a load added.
start
with load added

x
What is the extension caused by the load?

A
8
y+x
yx
Three horizontal forces act on a car that is moving along a straight, level road.
air resistance
friction
driving force
Which combination of forces would result in the car moving at constant speed?
air resistance
friction
driving force
200 N
1000 N
800 N
800 N
1000 N
200 N
800 N
200 N
1000 N
1000 N
200 N
800 N
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
5
9
A child pushes a toy car along a level floor and then lets it go.
As the car slows down, what is the main energy change?
A
from chemical to heat
from chemical to kinetic
from kinetic to gravitational (potential)
from kinetic to heat
10 The diagram shows a cyclist riding along a hilly road.

At which position does the cyclist have the least gravitational (potential) energy?
B
C
D
11 A pin is squeezed between finger and thumb.

finger
pinhead
pin
thumb

A
The force of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
The force of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
The pressure of the pin is larger on the finger than on the thumb.
The pressure of the pin is larger on the thumb than on the finger.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
6
12 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
The liquids are poured into tubes as shown.
Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?
B
liquid X
liquid Y
liquid X
liquid Y
13 Some water molecules escape from the surface of a lake.

Which name is given to this process?
A
boiling
convection
evaporation
radiation
14 The diagram represents gas molecules contained in a cylinder. The piston is moved slowly
downwards and the temperature of the gas stays the same.
piston
cylinder
gas molecule
Why does the pressure of the gas increase?

A
The molecules collide harder with the walls.
The molecules collide more often with the walls.
The molecules move more quickly.
The number of molecules increases.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
7
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A
pure alcohol.
pure distilled water.
pure melting ice.
pure mercury.
16 A glass flask full of cool water is placed in a container of hot water.

X
glass flask full

of cool water
container of
hot water
What will happen to the level of water at X as the cool water becomes warmer?
A
It will fall.
It will rise.
It will rise then fall.
It will stay the same.
17 A beaker of water is heated at its base.

Why does the water at the base rise?
A
It contracts and becomes less dense.
It contracts and becomes more dense.
It expands and becomes less dense.
It expands and becomes more dense.
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
8
18 Which of these waves is longitudinal?
A
light waves
sound waves
water waves
X-ray waves
19 Waves move from deep water to shallow water where they are slower.
Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?
A
deep
water
deep
water
deep
water
shallow
water
deep
water
shallow
water
shallow
water
shallow
water
20 Which type of radiation lies between visible light and microwaves in the electromagnetic
spectrum?
A
infra-red
radio waves
ultra-violet
X-rays
21 The critical angle for a glass / air boundary is C.

Which diagram shows the correct path of the light ray?
A
air
glass
air
glass
C
UCLES 2004
air
glass
air
glass
C
0625/01/O/N/04
9
22 The diagram shows the image of a clockface in a plane mirror.
Which of these times is shown?

A
02.25
02.35
09.25
09.35
23 What is the approximate range of audible frequencies for most humans?

A
10 Hz to 10 000 Hz
20 Hz to 20 000 Hz
10 kHz to 10 000 kHz
20 kHz to 20 000 kHz
24 A 100 metre race is started by firing a gun. The gun makes a bang and a puff of smoke comes
out of the gun as shown.
starter
finishing
judge
100 m
When does the finishing judge see the smoke and hear the bang?
sees the smoke
hears the bang
immediately
immediately
immediately
after about 0.3 s
after about 0.3 s
immediately
after about 0.3 s
after about 0.3 s
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
10
25 Six small compasses are placed around a bar magnet.
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
B
26 A student carries out four tests with a magnet.

Which result shown is not correct?
arrangement
A
magnet
magnet
magnet
magnet
result
iron bar
attracts
magnet
copper bar
magnet
attracts
no effect
repels
27 A circuit is set up with a gap between two terminals X and Y. The four strips of material shown in
the diagram are connected in turn across the gap.
Which strip completes the circuit so that the lamp lights?
A
wood
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
B
glass
C
steel
D
rubber
11
28 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A
current + potential difference
current potential difference
potential difference current
potential difference x current
29 Which circuit could be used to find the resistance of resistor R?
R
R
A
A
V
30 In the circuit shown, the reading on ammeter 1 is 2 A.

2
2
ammeter 1
reading = 2 A
ammeter 2
reading = ?
What is the reading on ammeter 2?

A
0A
UCLES 2004
1A
2A
0625/01/O/N/04
4A
[Turn over
12
31 In which position in the circuit shown should a switch be placed so that both lamps can be
switched on or off at the same time?
32 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.

Which circuit has the least resistance?
33 Why are electric circuits often fitted with fuses?

A
Fuses break the circuit if the current is too high.
Fuses only allow the current through in the correct direction.
Fuses return any excess current to earth.
Fuses use up any spare current.
34 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A.

A hair-drier takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can carry up to 5 A.
Which of these fuses would be best to use in the plug fitted to the hair-drier lead?
A
1 A fuse
UCLES 2004
3 A fuse
10 A fuse
0625/01/O/N/04
50 A fuse
13
35 The diagram represents a transformer.
input
voltage
output
voltage
Which arrangement could be used to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage?
number of turns on
primary coil P
number of turns on
secondary coil S
type of input
100
50
a.c.
100
50
d.c.
50
100
a.c.
50
100
d.c.
36 A student sets up the apparatus shown in order to make a relay.
contact
core
spring
Which metal should be used to make the core?

A
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
[Turn over
14
37 Which particles are emitted during thermionic emission?
A
electrons
ions
neutrons
protons
38 The equation shows the decay of the nuclide X.

226
88
X QP Y +
4
2
What are the values of P and Q?

P
230
90
230
86
222
90
222
86
39 During a fire in a laboratory storeroom, some radioactive material was spilled. A firefighter
detected radiation through the lead-lined walls of the storeroom. The radiation was emitted by the
radioactive material.
lead-lined
storeroom
firefighter
detector
radioactive
material
Which type of radiation was being detected?

A
-particles
-particles
-rays
X-rays
40 How many neutrons are in a nucleus of 146C ?

A
UCLES 2004
0625/01/O/N/04
14
Go to answers

0625/01
PHYSICS
May/June 2005
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser

Write your name, Centre number and candidate number on the Answer Sheet in the spaces provided unless
this has been done for you.
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

IB05 06_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
A decorator wishes to calculate the area of a bathroom tile so that he can estimate the amount of
adhesive that he needs to buy.
What must he use?
a measuring cylinder only
a ruler only
a measuring cylinder and a clock only
a measuring cylinder and a ruler only
The three balls shown are dropped from a bench.
aluminium
lead
wood
Which balls have the same acceleration?
aluminium and lead only
aluminium and wood only
lead and wood only
aluminium, lead and wood
A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows how the cars speed changes with time.
speed
m/s
20
0
0
10
time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a steady speed?
A
10 m
UCLES 2005
20 m
100 m
0625/01/M/J/05
200 m
3
4

A
The mass of a bottle of water at the North Pole is different from its mass at the Equator.
The mass of a bottle of water is measured in newtons.
The weight of a bottle of water and its mass are the same thing.
The weight of a bottle of water is one of the forces acting on it.
Two blocks X and Y are placed on a beam as shown. The beam balances on a pivot at its centre.
Y
X
pivot
What does this show about X and Y?
They have the same mass and the same density.
They have the same mass and the same weight.
They have the same volume and the same density.
They have the same volume and the same weight.
The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3
cm3
200
200
100
100
liquid
mass = 80 g
mass = 180 g

A
100 g / cm3
120
UCLES 2005
100 g / cm3
140
180 g / cm3
120
0625/01/M/J/05
180 g / cm3
140
[Turn over
4
7
A girl and a boy are pulling in opposite directions on a rope. The forces acting on the rope are
shown in the diagram.
girl
boy
200 N
150 N
rope
Which single force has the same effect as the two forces shown?
50 N acting towards the girl
350 N acting towards the girl
50 N acting towards the boy
350 N acting towards the boy
Objects with different masses are hung on a 10 cm spring. The diagram shows how much the
spring stretches.
10 cm
20 cm
30 cm
100 g
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
What is the mass of object M?
A
110 g
UCLES 2005
150 g
200 g
0625/01/M/J/05
300 g
5
9
What is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?

A
capacitor
generator
motor
transformer
10 A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.

In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into
A
chemical energy.
electrical energy.
gravitational energy.
internal energy.
11 A ball is released from rest and rolls down a track from the position shown.
What is the furthest position the ball could reach?
ball
starts
here
B
D
A
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
6
12 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm
Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?

A
h would be too large if mercury were used.
h would be too small if mercury were used.
The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.
The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.
13 A farmer has two carts. The carts have the same weight, but one has four narrow wheels and the
other has four wide wheels.
narrow wheel
wide wheel
In rainy weather, which cart sinks less into soft ground, and why?
cart wheels
why
narrow
greater pressure on the ground
narrow
less pressure on the ground
wide
greater pressure on the ground
wide
less pressure on the ground
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
7
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
Which line in the table is correct?
type of motion
of particles
particles are
suspended in
vibration
a liquid or a gas
vibration
a solid, a liquid or a gas
random
a liquid or a gas
random
15 A measured mass of gas is placed in a cylinder at atmospheric pressure and is then slowly
compressed.
piston
gas
piston pushed in
The temperature of the gas does not change.

What happens to the pressure of the gas?
A
It drops to zero.
It stays the same.
It increases.
16 The graph shows the change in temperature of a material as it is heated.

Which part on the graph shows when the material is boiling?
temperature
C
B
A
time
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
8
17 An experiment is set up as shown.
pressure gauge
air
flask
water
heat
What does the pressure gauge show as the air in the flask becomes hotter?
A
a steady pressure
a decrease in pressure
an increase in pressure
an increase and then a decrease in pressure
18 An iron bar is held with one end in a fire. The other end soon becomes too hot to hold.
hand
fire
iron bar
How has the heat travelled along the iron bar?

A
by conduction
by convection
by expansion
by radiation
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
9
19 The diagram shows a block of ice placed in a warm room.
At which point is the temperature the lowest?
A
B
clamp
ice
table
20 The drawing shows a wave.

Which labelled distance is the wavelength?
A
B
D
C
hill
A
diffracted.
radiated.
reflected.
refracted.
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
10
22 Which diagram correctly shows a ray of light passing through a rectangular glass block?
23 The ray diagram shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.
24 cm
10 cm
8 cm
What is the focal length of this lens?

A
8 cm
UCLES 2005
10 cm
18 cm
0625/01/M/J/05
24 cm
11
24 A fire alarm is not loud enough. An engineer adjusts it so that it produces a note of the same pitch
which is louder.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude
frequency
larger
larger
larger
same
same
larger
same
same
25 To estimate the width of a valley, a climber starts a stopwatch as he shouts. He hears an echo
from the opposite side of the valley after 1.0 s.
sound
climber
valley
The sound travels at 340 m / s.
What is the width of the valley?
A
85 m
170 m
340 m
680 m
26 Which material is used for the core of an electromagnet?

A
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
12
27 A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction and a plotting compass is placed at each end.
brass rod
N
plotting
compass
Which diagram shows the positions of the needles of the plotting compasses?
A
28 How many of the following materials conduct electricity?

aluminium
silver
iron
plastic
A
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
13
29 In which circuit does the voltmeter read the potential difference across the lamp?
A
30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps.

6V
switch
What happens when the switch is closed?

A
X lights more brightly than Y.
Y lights more brightly than X.
X and Y light with equal brightness.
Neither X nor Y light.
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
14
31 The diagram shows a circuit with three ammeters, X, Y and Z.
A X
A
A
Y
Z
Which set of readings is possible?

X
2A
3A
5A
3A
2A
5A
3A
3A
3A
5A
2A
3A
32 A lamp is to be connected in a circuit so that the p.d. across it can be varied from 0 to 6 V.
Which circuit would be most suitable?
6V
6V
6V
UCLES 2005
6V
0625/01/M/J/05
15
33 A student makes the circuit shown.
5 A fuse
The fuse has blown and stopped the current.

What could have caused this?
A
The current rating of the fuse was too high.
The current was too large.
The lamp was loose.
The voltage was too small.
34 Which graph shows the output voltage from a simple a.c. generator?
voltage
A
time
voltage
B
time
voltage
C
time
voltage
D
UCLES 2005
time
0625/01/M/J/05
[Turn over
16
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An a.c. voltage
of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V
primary coil
50 turns
secondary coil
100 turns

A
12.5 V
50.0 V
175 V
200 V
36 Two circuits are set up as shown. The iron rods are placed close together, and are free to move.
S
iron rod
iron rod
What happens to the size of the gap at X when switch S is closed?

A
It decreases.
It decreases then increases.
It increases.
It does not change.
37 The diagram shows a simple cathode-ray tube.

Which part emits the electrons?
D
A
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
17
38 Which type of radiation has the greatest ionising effect?
A
-particles
-particles
-rays
all have the same ionising effect
39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits -particles.

The half-life of the material is 5 days.
What mass of that material remains after 10 days?
A
0 mg
40 mg
100 mg
200 mg
40 In the symbol below, A is the nucleon number and Z is the proton number.
A
Z
What is represented by the symbol?

A
an electron
a neutron
a nuclide
an X-ray
UCLES 2005
0625/01/M/J/05
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/05
20
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/05

0625/01
PHYSICS
Paper 1 Multiple Choice (Core)
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser

There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions.
For each question there are four possible answers A, B, C and D. Choose the one you consider correct and
record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.

IB05 11_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
A measuring cylinder is used to measure the volume of a liquid.

cm3
50
50
40
30
40
20
10
What is the volume of the liquid?

A
2
43 cm3
46 cm3
48 cm3
54 cm3
The graph represents part of the journey of a car.

30
speed
m / s 20
10
0
0
10
20
30
time / s
40
What distance does the car travel during this part of the journey?
A
3
150 m
300 m
600 m
1200 m
16 s
A man crosses a road 8.0 m wide at a speed of 2.0 m / s.

movement
of man
man
8.0 m
How long does the man take to cross the road?

A
4.0 s
UCLES 2005
6.0 s
10 s
0625/01/O/N/05
3
4
What is the gravitational force that the Earth exerts on an object?

A
the density of the object
the mass of the object
the volume of the object
the weight of the object
In an experiment, five identical bags of rice are balanced by a 10 kg mass.
five bags
of rice
10 kg mass
pivot
Two bags of rice are added to the other five.

What mass will now balance the bags?
A
6
3.5 kg
7.0 kg
10 kg
14 kg
The same mass of four different liquids is placed in some measuring cylinders.
Which measuring cylinder contains the liquid with the greatest density?
UCLES 2005
cm3
cm3
cm3
cm3
10
10
0625/01/O/N/05
25
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
[Turn over
4
7
The diagram shows a flat metal plate that may be hung from a nail so that it can rotate about any
of four holes.
holes
holes
flat metal plate
What is the smallest number of holes from which the flat metal plate should be hung in order to
find its centre of gravity?
A
8
Two equal forces F act on each of four planks.

Which plank turns?
A
pivot
pivot
pivot
pivot
Which type of power station does not use steam from boiling water to generate electricity?
A
geothermal
hydroelectric
nuclear
oil-fired
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
5
10 A man standing at the top of a cliff throws a stone.
X
Which forms of energy does the stone have at X and at Y?

energy at X
energy at Y
gravitational only
kinetic only
kinetic only
gravitational only
gravitational only
gravitational and kinetic
11 Four blocks, each weighing 10 N, rest on a horizontal table.

Which block applies the greatest pressure on the table?
D
table
10 N
UCLES 2005
10 N
10 N
0625/01/O/N/05
10 N
[Turn over
6
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?

A
25 cm
75 cm
80 cm
100 cm
13 A drop of liquid falls on a students skin and quickly evaporates.

What is the effect on the skin and the reason?
A
The skin cools because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
The skin cools because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
The skin warms because the most energetic molecules escape from the liquid.
The skin warms because the most energetic molecules remain in the liquid.
14 A suspension of pollen grains in water is observed under a microscope. The pollen grains are
seen to be moving all the time.
Which diagram illustrates this motion?
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
7
15 A knife is being sharpened on a rotating sharpening-stone. A spark flies off and lands on the
operators hand. The spark is a very hot, very small piece of metal. The operator feels nothing.
What does this show about the piece of metal?
A
It has a low thermal capacity.
It is a good conductor of heat.
It is a poor conductor of heat.
16 Which substance is a liquid at a room temperature of 25 oC?

substance
melting point / oC
boiling point / oC
218
183
39
357
44
280
119
444
17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.
cooling
unit
Why is the cooling unit placed at the top?

A
Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.
Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.
Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.
Cold air stops at the top and so prevents convection.
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
8
18 How does heat from the Sun reach the Earth?
A
conduction only
convection only
radiation only
19 The diagrams show four sources of waves.

Which source generates longitudinal waves?
A
stick pushed up
and down in water
UCLES 2005
radio
transmitter
0625/01/O/N/05
loudspeaker
lamp
9
20 In a ripple tank, water waves move towards a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier
water
waves
Which diagram best shows the waves beyond the barrier?
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
10
21 A ray of light passes from glass into air at an angle of incidence of 40o. The glass has a critical
angle of 42 o.
Which diagram shows what happens to the ray?
air
air
glass
glass
40o
40o
air
air
glass
glass
40o
40o
22 Rays of light enter and leave a box.

ray 1
ray 1
ray 2
ray 2
What could be inside the box to make the rays behave as shown?
A
a converging lens
a parallel-sided glass block
a plane mirror
a triangular prism
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
11
23 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.
screen
image
lens
candle
The screen and the lens are moved back and forth and various focused images are produced on
the screen.
Which statement is always true?
A
The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.
The image is bigger than the object.
The image is closer to the lens than the object is.
The image is inverted.
24 Two astronauts without radios can only communicate in space if their helmets are touching.
There is no air in space.
What does this show about sound?

through a solid
through a vacuum
can travel
can travel
can travel
cannot travel
cannot travel
can travel
cannot travel
cannot travel
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
12
25 When the horn on a ship is sounded, the passengers hear an echo from a cliff after 4.0 s.
If the speed of sound is 340 m / s, how far away is the cliff?
A
170 m
340 m
680 m
1360 m
26 How many of the following methods could be used to demagnetise a piece of steel?
heating it until it is red hot
pulling it from a coil that is carrying an alternating current
placing it in an east-west direction and hammering it
putting it in a coil which is carrying a direct current
A
27 Two rods X and Y look the same.

magnet
P
N
rod X
rod Y
S
The N pole of a magnet is brought close, in turn, to each end of both rods. The results of these
four actions are shown in the table.
end tested
result
attraction
attraction
attraction
repulsion
Which of the rods is a permanent magnet?

A
neither of the rods
both of the rods
rod X only
rod Y only
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
13
28 Which circuit should be used to find the resistance of a lamp?
A
A
V
V
V
V
A
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
Which heater has the least resistance?
voltage / V
current / A
110
5.0
110
10
230
5.0
230
10
30 Which component can store energy for use in time delay circuits?
A
capacitor
potentiometer
resistor
thermistor
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
[Turn over
14
31 When the circuit shown is connected with switch S open, the 6 V lamp glows.
6V
R
6 V lamp
What happens to the brightness of the lamp when switch S is closed?

A
It becomes brighter.
It remains the same.
It becomes dimmer.
It goes off.
32 Why are the electric lamps in a house lighting circuit normally connected in parallel?
A
The current in every circuit must be the same.
The lamps are always switched on and off at the same time.
The voltage across each lamp must be the mains voltage.
When one of the lamps blows, all the others go out.
33 In the circuit shown, one of the fuses blows and all the lamps go out.
Which fuse blows?
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
15
34 Which arrangement may be used to step up a voltage?
a.c.
input
output
iron core
d.c.
input
output
iron core
a.c.
input
output
iron core
iron core
d.c.
input
output
35 The diagrams show a straight wire carrying a current into the paper.
Which diagram shows the magnetic field pattern due to this current?
A
wire
UCLES 2005
wire
wire
0625/01/O/N/05
wire
[Turn over
16
36 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil which is connected
to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring
N
centre-zero
ammeter
S
What does the ammeter show when the magnet vibrates slowly up and down?
A
a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left
a steady reading to the left
a steady reading to the right
a steady zero reading
37 Charged particles are emitted from the cathode of an oscilloscope.

What is the name and the charge of these particles?
name of particles
charge of particles
electrons
negative
electrons
positive
protons
negative
protons
positive
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
17
38 A radioactive source emits radiation that can pass through a sheet of paper but not through thick
aluminium.
paper
(all the radiation
passes through)
thick aluminium
(none of the radiation
passes through)
radiation
What does this show about the radiation?

A
It is -particles.
It is -particles.
It is -rays.
It is a mixture of -particles and -rays.
39 An unstable nucleus has 145 neutrons and 92 protons. It emits a -particle.

How many neutrons and protons does the nucleus have after emitting the -particle?
neutrons
protons
144
92
144
93
145
91
145
93
40 Which particles are found in the nucleus of an atom?

A
neutrons and protons only
neutrons only
protons and electrons only
protons, electrons and neutrons
UCLES 2005
0625/01/O/N/05
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/05
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
0625/01/O/N/05

0625/01
PHYSICS
May/June 2006
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser

answers A, B, C and D.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.

IB06 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
A measuring cylinder contains some water. When a stone is put in the water, the level rises.
cm3
200
cm3
200
150
150
100
100
50
50
stone
What is the volume of the stone?

A
2
50 cm3
70 cm3
75 cm3
125 cm3
The graph represents the movement of a body accelerating from rest.

10
speed
m/s
8
6
4
2
0
time / s
After 5 seconds how far has the body moved?
A
3
2m
10 m
25 m
50 m
A child is standing on the platform of a station, watching the trains.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3 s to pass the child.

A
10 m
UCLES 2006
30 m
90 m
0625/01/M/J/06
135 m
3
4
Below are four statements about the effects of forces on objects.

Three of the statements are correct.
Which statement is incorrect?
A force can change the length of an object.
A force can change the mass of an object.
A force can change the shape of an object.
A force can change the speed of an object.
A simple balance has two pans suspended from the ends of arms of equal length. When it is
balanced, the pointer is at 0.
arm
pivot
pointer
0
pan X
pan Y
Four masses (in total) are placed on the pans, with one or more on pan X and the rest on pan Y.
Which combination of masses can be used to balance the pans?
1 g, 1 g, 5 g, 10 g
1 g, 2 g, 2 g, 5 g
2 g, 5 g, 5 g, 10 g
2 g, 5 g, 10 g, 10 g
A person measures the length, width, height and mass of a rectangular metal block.
Which of these measurements are needed in order to calculate the density of the metal?
A
mass only
height and mass only
length, width and height only
length, width, height and mass
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
4
7
Two forces act on an object.

In which situation is it impossible for the object to be in equilibrium?
The two forces act in the same direction.
The two forces act through the same point.
The two forces are of the same type.
The two forces are the same size.
The diagram shows four models of buses placed on different ramps.

centre
of mass
centre
of mass
centre
of mass
centre
of mass
How many of these models will fall over?

A
9
Which form of energy do we receive directly from the Sun?

A
chemical
light
nuclear
sound
10 A labourer on a building site lifts a heavy concrete block onto a lorry. He then lifts a light block the
same distance in the same time.
Which of the following is true?
work done in lifting the
blocks
power exerted by labourer
less for the light block
the same for both blocks
more for the light block
the same for both blocks
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
5
11 The diagram shows a thick sheet of glass.
Which edge must it stand on to cause the greatest pressure?
A
B
D
C
12 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas inside a tank. A, B, C and D
show the manometer at different times.
At which time is the gas pressure inside the tank greatest?
gas
13 Brownian motion is seen by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.

How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion?
A
all in the same direction
at random
in circles
vibrating about fixed points
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
6
14 Driving a car raises the temperature of the tyres.
This causes the pressure of the air in the tyres to increase.
Why is this?
A
Air molecules break up to form separate atoms.
Air molecules expand with the rise in temperature.
The force between the air molecules increases.
The speed of the air molecules increases.
15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, fixed points are needed.

Which is a fixed point?
A
the bottom end of the thermometer tube
the top end of the thermometer tube
the temperature of pure melting ice
the temperature of pure warm water
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal (heat)
energy.
Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?
UCLES 2006
temperature
rise = 2 oC
temperature
rise = 4 oC
temperature
rise = 6 oC
temperature
rise = 8 oC
0625/01/M/J/06
7
17 A long thin bar of copper is heated evenly along its length.
copper bar
heat
What happens to the bar?
A
It becomes lighter.
It becomes longer.
It becomes shorter.
It bends at the ends.
18 A beaker contains water at room temperature.

water
How could a convection current be set up in the water?

A
cool the water at X
cool the water at Y
stir the water at X
stir the water at Y
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
8
is put on top as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

A
20 Which is the best description of the speed of a water wave?

A
the distance between one wave crest and the next
the distance between the crest of a wave and a trough
the distance that a particle of water moves up and down in one second
the distance that a wavefront moves along the surface in one second
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
9
21 Water waves travel more slowly in shallow water than in deep water.
Which diagram shows what will happen to plane waves in deep water when they enter shallow
water?
A
deep
B
shallow
deep
C
deep
shallow
deep
shallow
shallow
22 A ray of light passes through a window.

Which path does it take?
air
glass
air
A
B
C
D
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
10
23 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.
What time is shown?

A
02:25
02:35
09:25
09:35
24 The diagram shows a man standing at X who shouts to a man standing at Y.
X
N
Y
The mans voice will be heard sooner and more clearly if the wind is blowing towards the
A
north.
south.
east.
west.
25 Sounds are made by vibrating objects. A certain object vibrates but a person nearby cannot hear
any sound.
Which statement might explain why nothing is heard?
A
The amplitude of the sound waves is too large.
The frequency of the vibration is too high.
The sound waves are transverse.
The speed of the sound waves is too high.
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
11
26 A student investigates which end of a magnetic compass needle is attracted to a bar magnet.
What does the investigation show?
A
Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the north pole of the magnet.
Both ends of the compass needle are attracted by the south pole of the magnet.
One end of the compass needle is attracted by the north pole and the other end by the south
pole.
The compass needle is not attracted by either end of the magnet.
27 From which materials are the coil and the core of an electromagnet made?
coil
core
copper
copper
copper
iron
iron
copper
iron
iron
28 What are the symbols used for the units of current and resistance?
unit of current
unit of resistance
29 When a plastic comb is placed next to a small piece of aluminium foil hanging from a nylon
thread, the foil is repelled by the comb.
Why is this?
A
The comb is charged and the foil is uncharged.
The comb is uncharged and the foil is charged.
The comb and the foil have charge of opposite signs.
The comb and the foil have charge of the same sign.
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
12
30 Which symbol represents an electrical component used to store energy?
31 Four lamps and four switches are connected to a power supply as shown in the circuit diagram.
When all the switches are closed, all the lamps are lit.
When one of the switches is then opened, only one lamp goes out.
Which switch is opened?
32 Four resistors and an ammeter are connected to a battery as shown.

The ammeter reads 2 A.
Which of the four labelled points in the circuit is the only one where the current is less than 2 A?
A
A
C
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
13
33 Why is a fuse used in an electrical circuit in a house?
A
to increase the circuit resistance
to keep the power used to a minimum value
to prevent a short-circuit from occurring
to stop the cables from carrying too much current
34 An electric power tool is being used outdoors in a shower of rain.

What is the greatest hazard to the user?
A
The cable gets hot and causes burns.
The circuit-breaker cuts off the current.
The current passes through water and causes a shock.
The tool rusts.
35 A current-carrying coil in a magnetic field experiences a turning effect.
variable power supply
How can the turning effect be increased?

A
increase the number of turns on the coil
reduce the size of the current
reverse the direction of the magnetic field
use thinner wire for the coil
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
14
36 A transformer is to be used to produce a 6 V output from a 24 V input.
coil X
coil Y
24 V
6V
What are suitable numbers of turns for coil X and for coil Y?
number of turns
on coil X
number of turns
on coil Y
240
60
240
240
240
960
960
60
37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.

Which line in the table shows the charge and the temperature of the anode?
anode charge
anode temperature
negative
cool
negative
hot
positive
cool
positive
hot
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
15
38 The diagram shows five atoms in a radioactive substance. The atoms each give out an -particle.
1st particle
atom
1
atom
2
atom
5
atom
4
atom
3
2nd particle
Atom 1 is the first to give out a particle. Atom 3 is the second to give out a particle.
Which atom will give out the next particle?
A
atom 2
atom 4
atom 5
impossible to tell
39 A Geiger counter detects radiation from radioactive sources.

A radioactive source is inside a thick aluminium container as shown.
radioactive source
2m
Geiger counter
thick aluminium container

Which type of radiation from this source is being detected?
A
-particles
-particles
-rays
radio waves
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06
[Turn over
16
40 The nucleus of a neutral atom of lithium is represented by 73 Li.
How many protons, electrons and neutrons does the atom contain?
protons
electrons
neutrons
UCLES 2006
0625/01/M/J/06

0625/01
PHYSICS
45 minutes

Soft clean eraser


IB06 11_0625_01/RP
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
A ruler is used to measure the length of a nail.
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
cm
What is the length of the nail?

A
2
1.3 cm
2.9 cm
5.2 cm
8.1 cm
A cyclist is riding along a road when an animal runs in front of him. The graph shows the cyclists
motion. He sees the animal at P, starts to brake at Q and stops at R.
speed
P
R
0
time
What is used to find the distance travelled after he applies the brakes?
A
the area under line PQ
the area under line QR
the gradient of line PQ
the gradient of line QR
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
3
3
A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.
5 km
10 km
Q
5 km
10 km
10 km / hour
20 km / hour
30 km / hour
60 km / hour
A newton is a unit of force.

Which quantity is measured in newtons?
A
acceleration
density
mass
weight
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
4
5
A student pours liquid into a measuring cylinder.

100
90
80
measuring
cylinder
70
60
50
40
liquid
digital
balance
30
20
10
The student records the volume of the liquid from the scale on the measuring cylinder. He then
puts the measuring cylinder containing the liquid on a balance and records the mass.
What else needs to be measured before the density of the liquid can be calculated?
A
the depth of the liquid in the measuring cylinder
the mass of the empty measuring cylinder
the temperature of the liquid in the measuring cylinder
the volume of the empty measuring cylinder
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
5
6
The diagram shows four blocks, each made of glass of density 2.6 g / cm3.
The top of each block has an area of 1 cm2.
Which block has a mass of 13 g?
15 cm
10 cm
5 cm
2 cm
A
7
A heavy beam is resting on two supports, so that there are three forces acting on it.
R1
R2
The beam is in equilibrium.

A
All the forces are equal in value.
The forces are in one direction and their turning effects are in the opposite direction.
The resultant force is zero and the resultant turning effect is zero.
The total upward force is twice the total downward force.
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
6
8
The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
A
Which source of energy uses the production of steam to generate electricity?

A
hydroelectric
nuclear
tides
waves
10 A cyclist travels down a hill from rest at point X without pedalling.

The cyclist applies his brakes and the cycle stops at point Y.
X
hill
Y
Which energy changes have taken place between X and Y?

A
kinetic internal (heat) gravitational potential
kinetic gravitational potential internal (heat)
gravitational potential internal (heat) kinetic
gravitational potential kinetic internal (heat)
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
7
11 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer
board
soft ground
Why does this prevent the mixer sinking?

A
The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.
The large area increases the pressure on the ground.
The large area decreases the weight on the ground.
The large area increases the weight on the ground.
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer.
V
W
mercury
X
Y
Z
The atmospheric pressure increases.
Which distance increases?
A
VW
UCLES 2006
WY
XY
0625/01/O/N/06
XZ
[Turn over
8
13 A gas cylinder is left outside on a sunny day.
The Sun heats the gas inside the cylinder.
What happens to the gas molecules?
A
They collide less often.
They expand.
They move closer together.
They move more rapidly.
14 Water spilled on the ground on a hot day evaporates.

Which diagram represents the change in arrangement of the particles in the water as it
evaporates?
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
9
15 A block of ice is heated until it has all melted. The water that is produced is then heated until it
boils.
Which line in the table states what happens to the temperature of the ice while it is melting, and
to the temperature of the water while it is boiling?
temperature of ice
while it is melting
temperature of water
while it is boiling
increases
increases
increases
stays the same
stays the same
increases
stays the same
stays the same
16 A thermometer with no scale is taped to a ruler as shown. When placed in steam, the mercury
level rises to 22 cm. When placed in pure melting ice, the mercury level falls to 2 cm.
cm
30
28
26
24
22
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
mercury
Which temperature is shown by the mercury level in the diagram?

A
6 C
UCLES 2006
8 C
30 C
0625/01/O/N/06
40 C
[Turn over
10
17 Which line in the table is correct about conduction and convection?
conduction
convection
can happen in a solid
only happens in fluids
18 A heating element is positioned in a narrow sealed tube of liquid.

What would be the best place to position the heating element in order to obtain the best
circulation of the liquid through the tube?
A
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
liquid
11
19 In a ripple tank experiment, plane water-waves meet a straight barrier with a wide gap in it.
wave
motion
barrier
Which diagram shows the wave pattern beyond the barrier?
20 The diagram shows a wave.

displacement
0
distance
X
How many wavelengths are there between X and Y?

A
2
3
UCLES 2006
1 21
0625/01/O/N/06
3
[Turn over
12
21 A parallel beam of light falls on a converging lens.
Which diagram shows what happens to the beam of light?
A
22 The image of a clock face as seen in a plane mirror is shown.
21
6
What is the time on the clock?
A
1.25
1.35
10.25
10.35
23 A police car with its siren sounding is stationary in heavy traffic. A pedestrian notices that,
although the loudness of the sound produced does not change, the pitch varies.
Which line in the table describes the amplitude and the frequency of the sound?
amplitude
frequency
constant
varying
constant
constant
varying
constant
varying
varying
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
13
24 A sports field is next to a large school building. At the far side of the sports field, a student sees a
groundsman hammer a pole into the ground.
school building
student
hammer
pole
about 400 m
The student hears two bangs each time the hammer hits the pole.
Why does the student hear two bangs?
first bang caused by
second bang caused by
sound of hammer hitting pole
sound of pole hitting hammer
sound reaching left ear
sound reaching right ear
sound reaching student directly
sound due to echo from school building
sound reflected back from school building
sound reaching student directly
25 A student uses three small plotting compasses to investigate the magnetic field around a bar
magnet.
Which diagram shows the directions in which the compass needles point?
A
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
14
26 The ends of three metal rods are tested by holding end Q of rod 1 close to the others in turn.
R
rod 1
rod 2
rod 3
The results are as follows.

End Q: attracts end R,
attracts end S,
attracts end T,
repels end U.
Which of the metal rods is a magnet?
A
rod 1 only
rod 1 and rod 2 only
rod 1 and rod 3 only
rod 3 only
27 A student wishes to measure the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of a battery and the potential
difference (p.d.) across a resistor.
She has the resistor, the battery and some connecting wires.
What else does she need?
A
a voltmeter only
an ammeter only
an ammeter and a voltmeter
a force meter (newton meter) and a voltmeter
28 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field?

A
-particle
electron
neutron
proton
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
15
29 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
A
longer and thicker.
longer and thinner.
shorter and thicker.
shorter and thinner.
30 Which graph shows how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature?
resistance /
resistance /
temperature / C
resistance /
temperature / C
resistance /
temperature / C
temperature / C
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
Which lamp breaks?
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
16
32 Circuit-breakers are used with electrical appliances as safety devices.
Which description is correct for a circuit-breaker?
position
action when overloaded
connected in the live wire
melts
connected in the live wire
operates an electromagnet
connected to the casing of the appliance
melts
connected to the casing of the appliance
operates an electromagnet
33 An electric heater is connected to the mains using insulated copper wires. The wires become
very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
A
Use thicker copper wires.
Use thinner copper wires.
Use thicker insulation.
Use thinner insulation.
34 The diagram shows an electrical device.
rotation
magnet
S
commutator
carbon brush
battery
What is this electrical device?
A
a d.c. motor
an a.c. generator
a magnetising coil
a transformer
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
17
35 The graph shows the voltage input to a step-down transformer.
12 V
voltage
input
0
time
Which diagram shows the voltage output from the transformer?

A
12 V
voltage
output
0
12 V
voltage
output
0
time
time
12 V
voltage
output
0
12 V
voltage
output
0
time
time
36 Particles are emitted by a heated cathode in a cathode-ray tube.

heater
particles
cathode
anode

A
atoms
electrons
neutrons
protons
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
[Turn over
18
37 Which line in the table describes the nature of an -particle and of a -ray?
-particle
-ray
helium nucleus
helium nucleus
electron
proton
proton
electron
38 The count rates of four radioactive sources were measured at the same time on three
consecutive days.
Which source has a half-life of two days?
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
100
50
25
200
140
100
300
300
300
400
200
100
39 Which statement is true of all neutral atoms?

A
The number of electrons equals the number of nucleons.
The number of neutrons equals the number of protons.
The number of nucleons equals the number of neutrons.
The number of protons equals the number of electrons.
40 There are three nuclides of hydrogen.

nuclide 1
1
1
nuclide 2
2
1
nuclide 3
3
1
Which of these nuclides have the same number of protons in their nuclei?
A
1 and 2 only
2 and 3 only
all of them
none of them
UCLES 2006
0625/01/O/N/06
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/06
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/06

0625/01
PHYSICS
May/June 2007
45 minutes
*4300881997*

Soft clean eraser


IB07 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2
1
The diagram shows a thick-walled tube. The thickness of the wall is 3 mm.
0 cm 1
10
11
What is the internal diameter d of the tube?

A
2
2.8 cm
3.1 cm
3.4 cm
7.4 cm
The graph shows the progress of an athlete in a 100 m race.
100
distance
travelled / m
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
11
12
time / s
What time was taken to travel 10 m from the start?
A
2.4 s
UCLES 2007
2.8 s
65 s
0625/01/M/J/07
70 s
13
14
3
3
Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?
what will happen
why
both stones hit the floor at the same time
the acceleration of free fall is constant
they fall at constant speed
the heavier stone hits the floor first
acceleration increases with weight
speed increases with weight
The diagram shows a bird in flight.

In which direction does the weight of the bird act?
B
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
4
5
The mass of a full bottle of cooking oil is 1.30 kg.

When exactly half of the oil has been used, the mass of the bottle plus the remaining oil is
0.90 kg.
What is the mass of the empty bottle?

A
6
0.50 kg
0.65 kg
0.80 kg
g / cm3
kg / m2

A
0.40 kg
cm3 / g
g / cm2
Each of the solids shown in the diagram has the same mass.
Which solid has the greatest density?
A
2 cm
1 cm
2 cm
1 cm
2 cm
UCLES 2007
2 cm
1 cm
1 cm
1 cm
0625/01/M/J/07
1 cm
2 cm
2 cm
5
8
A force acts on a moving rubber ball.

How many of the following changes could happen to the ball because of the force?
a change in direction
a change in shape
a change in mass
a change in speed
A
A light aircraft stands at rest on the ground. It stands on three wheels, one at the front and two
further back.
Which point could be its centre of mass?
10 Which form of energy is used to generate electrical energy in a tidal power station?
A
chemical energy
gravitational energy
internal energy (thermal energy)
nuclear energy
11 Which line in the table gives an example of the stated form of energy?
form of energy
example
gravitational
internal
the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode ray tube
kinetic
the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a

high diving board
strain
the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat
UCLES 2007
the energy due to the movement of a train
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
6
12 A pressure is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.
pressure to
be measured
h
water
The water in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is more dense.
How does the value of h change?
A
It becomes zero.
It stays the same.
It increases.
13 A cylinder is filled with a gas and then sealed, so that the gas has a fixed volume.
The gas molecules are given energy so that their average speed increases.
What happens to the pressure and to the temperature of the gas in the cylinder?
pressure
temperature
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
7
14 Diagram 1 shows apparatus being used to observe smoke particles.
Diagram 2 shows how a smoke particle moves randomly.
diagram 1
diagram 2
random
movement
microscope
air molecules
and
smoke particles
light
Why do the smoke particles move randomly?

A
They are hit by air molecules.
They are less dense than air.
They are moved by convection currents.
They gain energy from the light.
15 The graph shows how the temperature of hot liquid wax changes with time as the wax is allowed
to cool.
At which labelled point on the graph are both liquid wax and solid wax present?
temperature
A
D
0
0
UCLES 2007
time
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
8
16 1 kg of water and 1 kg of aluminium are heated to the same temperature and then allowed to cool
in a room.
Why does the aluminium cool more quickly than the water?
A
Aluminium contracts more than water.
Aluminium does not evaporate but water does.
Aluminium has a higher thermal capacity than water.
Aluminium has a lower thermal capacity than water.
17 Bread can be cooked by placing it below, but not touching, a heating element.
heating element
bread
Which process transfers thermal energy from the heating element to the bread?
A
conduction
convection
insulation
radiation
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
9
18 The diagram shows a refrigerator. The cooling unit is placed at the top. The cooling unit cools the
air near it.
cooling unit
What happens to the density of this air as it cools and how does it move?
density of the air
movement of the air
decreases
moves down
decreases
stays where it is
increases
moves down
increases
stays where it is
19 Water waves are reflected at a plane surface.

Which property of the waves is changed by the reflection?
A
direction
frequency
speed
wavelength
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
10
20 Plane water waves travel from a shallow region into a deeper region. They travel more quickly in
the deeper water.
shallow water
boundary
wave
direction
deep water
Which diagram shows the wave pattern in the deeper water?
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
11
21 A man sees a stone at the bottom of a pool of water.
Which path could be taken by light from the stone to the man?
man
air
water
stone
22 A ray of light is reflected by two parallel plane mirrors X and Y.

mirror X
30
mirror Y

A
The angle of incidence at mirror X is 30.
The angle of incidence at mirror Y is 60.
The angle of reflection at mirror X is 120.
The angle of reflection at mirror Y is 0.
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
12
23 Music is produced by the loudspeaker of a radio.
Which property of the sound wave increases when the music is made louder?
A
amplitude
frequency
speed
wavelength
24 A starting pistol is fired 640 m away from a spectator.

640 m
spectator
The spectator hears the sound of the starting pistol two seconds after seeing the flash from the
gun.
What is the speed of sound in air?
A
160 m / s
320 m / s
640 m / s
1280 m / s
25 Small particles of metal are scattered near a bar magnet to show the pattern of the magnetic
field.
Which metal is suitable?
A
aluminium
brass
copper
iron
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
13
26 A strong electromagnet is used to attract pins.
core
pins
coil
What happens when the current in the coil is halved?

A
No pins are attracted.
Fewer pins are attracted.
The same number of pins is attracted.
Many more pins are attracted.
27 Four plotting compasses are placed near a bar magnet.

Which plotting compass is shown pointing in the correct direction?
A
N
C
28 Four wires are made from the same material.

Which wire has the greatest resistance?
length of wire / cm
diameter of wire / mm
50
0.1
50
0.2
100
0.1
100
0.2
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
14
29 A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth and becomes positively charged.
Why has the rod become positively charged?
A
It has gained electrons.
It has gained neutrons.
It has lost electrons.
It has lost neutrons.
30 Which circuit is a variable potential divider (potentiometer)?
output
output
output
output
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
15
31 The circuit contains a relay.
relay
lamp 2
switch S
lamp 1
When switch S is closed, what is the state of the lamps?
lamp 1
lamp 2
on
on
on
off
off
on
off
off
32 Which diagram shows a circuit that will allow the lamps to be switched on and off independently?
33 What is the symbol for a fuse?

A
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
[Turn over
16
34 A cable in a house is carrying too much current.
What is the greatest danger?
A
appliances not working
electric shock
fire
low power
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope,
which shows a graph of voltage output against time.
oscilloscope
contact
contact
Which graph shows the voltage output against time?

A
36 The diagram shows a lamp connected to a transformer.

40 turns
200 turns
12 V a.c.
What is the potential difference across the lamp?

A
2.4 V
UCLES 2007
12 V
60 V
0625/01/M/J/07
240 V
17
37 A beam of cathode rays passes through an electric field between two parallel plates.
+ + + + + +
cathode rays

A
into the page
out of the page
towards the bottom of the page
towards the top of the page
38 What are the most penetrating and the least penetrating types of radiation?
most penetrating
least penetrating
-particles
-particles
-particles
-particles
-rays
-particles
-rays
-particles
39 The half-life of a radioactive substance is 5 hours. A sample is tested and found to contain 0.48 g
of the substance.
How much of the substance was present in the sample 20 hours before the sample was tested?
A
0.03 g
UCLES 2007
0.12 g
1.92 g
0625/01/M/J/07
7.68 g
[Turn over
18
40 The data below relates to the nucleus of a particular neutral atom of nitrogen.
proton number
Z=7
nucleon number
A = 17
Which row represents the correct number of neutrons and electrons in this atom?
number of neutrons
number of electrons
10
10
10
17
17
10
UCLES 2007
0625/01/M/J/07
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/07
20
BLANK PAGE
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/01/M/J/07

0625/01
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*9483001639*

Soft clean eraser


IB07 11_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2
1
Some water is poured into four tubes of different cross-sectional areas.

Which tube contains the largest volume of water?
area = 10 cm2
area = 20 cm2
area = 30 cm2
area = 40 cm2
6 cm
4 cm
3 cm
Four students try to explain what is meant by acceleration.

Which student makes a correct statement?
It is related to the changing speed of an object.
It is the distance an object travels in one second.
It is the force acting on an object divided by the distance it travels in one second.
It is the force acting on an object when it is near to the Earth.
A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.4 s later hears an echo from a wall.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.

How far away is the player from the wall?
A
66 m
UCLES 2007
132 m
264 m
0625/01/O/N/07
825 m
2 cm
3
4
What are the correct units for force and for weight?
force
weight
kg
kg
kg
kg
The table shows the weight of a 10 kg mass on each of five planets.

planet
weight of a 10 kg mass / N
Mercury
40
Venus
90
Earth
100
Mars
40
Jupiter
250
On which planets would an astronaut have a smaller weight than on Earth?
Mercury, Mars and Jupiter
Mercury, Venus and Mars
Mercury, Venus and Jupiter
Venus, Mars and Jupiter
A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly-shaped solid.
Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both?
A
balance, clock, ruler
balance, measuring cylinder, ruler
balance, measuring cylinder, string
clock, ruler, string
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
4
7
A metal drum has a mass of 200 kg when empty and 1000 kg when filled with 1.0 m3 of
methylated spirit.
What is the density of methylated spirit?
0.0050 kg / m3
0.11 kg / m3
800 kg / m3
1000 kg / m3
An empty glass is placed on a join between two tables as shown. The glass remains stable.
Which point is the centre of mass of the glass?
B
C
D
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
5
9
An aeroplane is in equilibrium.
The diagram shows the forces acting on the aeroplane.
lift force from wings
force from
engine
air
resistance
weight
Which statement about the forces is correct?

force from engine
lift force from wings
equal to air resistance
equal to weight
equal to air resistance
greater than weight
greater than air resistance
equal to weight
greater than air resistance
greater than weight
10 A student adds loads to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each load.
He then plots a graph from the results.
load / N
Which length is plotted on the vertical axis?

A
measured length
original length
(measured length original length)
(measured length + original length)
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
6
11 A person uses chemical energy to run up some stairs.
She stops at the top of the stairs.

What has the chemical energy been converted to when she is at the top of the stairs?
A
kinetic energy and gravitational energy
kinetic energy and strain energy
gravitational energy and heat energy
strain energy and heat energy
12 Electrical energy may be obtained from nuclear fission.

In what order is the energy transferred in this process?
A
nuclear fuel generator reactor and boiler turbines
nuclear fuel generator turbines reactor and boiler
nuclear fuel reactor and boiler generator turbines
nuclear fuel reactor and boiler turbines generator
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
7
13 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer, used to measure atmospheric pressure.
P
mercury
Atmospheric pressure increases.

What happens to the level L and to the pressure at P?
level L
pressure at P
falls
increases
falls
stays the same
rises
increases
rises
stays the same
14 The gas in a container is heated but is kept at constant volume.

Why does the gas pressure increase?
A
The molecules expand.
The molecules increase in mass.
The molecules move further apart.
The molecules move more rapidly.
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
8
15 The table lists the melting points and the boiling points of four different substances A, B, C and D.
Which substance is a gas at 25 C?
substance
melting point / C
boiling point / C
219
183
58
98
890
1083
2582
16 The diagram shows four blocks of steel. The same quantity of heat is given to each block.
Which block shows the greatest rise in temperature?
17 A wooden wheel can be strengthened by putting a tight circle of iron around it.
wooden wheel
iron circle
Which action would make it easier to fit the circle over the wood?
A
cooling the iron circle
heating the iron circle
heating the wooden wheel
heating the wooden wheel and cooling the iron circle
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
9
18 Which statement refers to convection?
A
It does not involve energy transfer.
It is the transfer of heat energy without the movement of particles.
It only occurs in liquids or gases.
It only occurs in solids.
19 Spoons made of different materials were placed in four cups of coffee poured from the same jug.
Which spoon will be hottest to touch at end X?
experiment A
wooden
spoon
experiment B
steel
spoon
experiment C
white plastic
spoon
experiment D
black plastic
spoon
20 Which line gives an example of a longitudinal wave and describes its vibrations?
example of a
longitudinal wave
vibrations
light wave
at right angles to the direction the wave travels
Iight wave
in the same direction as the wave travels
sound wave
at right angles to the direction the wave travels
sound wave
in the same direction as the wave travels
21 The diagram shows a section through a series of waves on water.

Which dotted line shows the position of the still water surface after the waves have passed?
A
B
C
D
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
10
22 A student shines a narrow beam of white light into a prism as shown in the diagram. He sees a
spectrum of colours emerging from the prism.
X
Y
Z
narrow beam
of white light
spectrum
of colours
Which three colours does he see at X, at Y and at Z?

X
blue
yellow
red
red
blue
yellow
red
yellow
blue
yellow
red
blue
23 An object placed in front of a plane mirror at O produces an image at I.

O
If the object moves towards the mirror in the direction shown by the arrow, in which direction does
the image move?
O
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
11
24 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
A
The sound waves are absorbed.
The sound waves are diffracted.
The sound waves are reflected.
The sound waves are refracted.
25 The graph represents a sound wave. The horizontal (x) axis represents time.
y
The frequency of the sound is increased.

The graphs below are shown to the same scale. Which graph represents the new sound wave?
x
y
x
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
x
[Turn over
12
26 Which materials are suitable for making a permanent magnet and the core of an electromagnet?
permanent magnet
core of an electromagnet
iron
iron
iron
steel
steel
iron
steel
steel
27 Three charged balls, P, Q and R, are suspended by insulated threads. Ball P is negatively
charged.
insulated thread
What are the charges on Q and on R?

Q
positive
positive
positive
negative
negative
positive
negative
negative
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
13
28 The circuit shows a current I in a resistor of resistance R.
3.0 V
R
Which line gives possible values of I and of R?
I/A
R/
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.0
6.0
2.0
4.0
12.0
29 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
The voltage-current graph for X is as shown.
variable voltage supply
voltage
A
X
0
0
current
What is the component X?

A
a capacitor
a closed switch
a metallic resistor
an open switch
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
14
30 Four lamps are connected in a circuit as shown in the diagram.
Each lamp is designed to operate at 12 V.
12 V
The circuit is now switched on.

A
Each lamp can be switched off independently.
If one lamp breaks all the others will stay alight.
The current is the same in all the lamps.
The lamps will all light at normal brightness.
31 The diagram shows a battery connected to three identical resistors. Four ammeters A, B, C and
D are connected in the circuit.
Which ammeter shows the smallest reading?
A A
A D
A
B
A
C
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
15
32 In the circuit shown, the switch is closed for a long time, then opened.
voltmeter 1
V
voltmeter 2
voltmeter 3
Immediately after the switch is opened, which voltmeters will read zero?
A
voltmeter 1 only
voltmeter 2 only
voltmeter 3 only
voltmeter 1, voltmeter 2 and voltmeter 3
33 A householder asks an electrician to install a mains electrical socket in her bathroom so that she
may use a hairdryer there. The electrician refuses to do this because it would be dangerous.
Why would installing the socket be dangerous?
A
The current drawn by the hairdryer would cause overheating in the cables.
The handling of electrical equipment in damp conditions could cause an electric shock.
The hot air produced by the hairdryer would cause the fuse to melt.
The temperature in the bathroom would damage the insulation.
34 A mains electrical circuit uses insulated copper cable and the cable overheats.
To prevent the cable overheating, how should the cable be changed, and why?
A
Use thicker copper cable which has less resistance.
Use thicker insulation which stops the heat escaping.
Use thinner copper cable which has more resistance.
Use thinner insulation which allows less heat to escape.
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
16
35 How is electricity transmitted over large distances and why is it transmitted in this way?
how
why
at high voltage
for safety
at high voltage
at low voltage
for safety
at low voltage
36 Which parts of an a.c. generator slide past each other when the generator is working?
A
brushes and coil
coil and magnets
magnets and slip rings
slip rings and brushes
37 The diagram shows a cathode-ray tube.

electron
beam
top
screen
Y2
X2
heater
Y1
cathode anode
Y-plates
X1
X-plates
What must be done to deflect the electron beam upwards?

A
make X1 more positive than X2
make X2 more positive than X1
make Y1 more positive than Y2
make Y2 more positive than Y1
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
bottom
17
38 A sheet of paper is placed between a radioactive source and a detector.
radioactive
source
detector
sheet of paper
Which types of radiation can pass through the paper?

A
-particles and -particles only
-particles and -rays only
-particles, -particles and -rays
39 A sample of radioactive isotope is decaying.

The nuclei of which atoms will decay first?
A
impossible to know, because radioactive decay is random
impossible to know, unless the age of the material is known
atoms near the centre, because they are surrounded by more atoms
atoms near the surface, because the radiation can escape more easily
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
[Turn over
18
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?
n
+
+
+ +
n
key
n = a neutron
+ = a proton
= an electron
C
(not to scale)
n
+n+
n n
+
n
+n+
n n
+
UCLES 2007
0625/01/O/N/07
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/07
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/O/N/07

0625/01
PHYSICS
May/June 2008
45 minutes
*1101906355*

Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB recommended)


IB08 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
Some liquid is heated in a flask.

The diagrams show the height of the liquid in the tube when the liquid is cold and when it is hot.
cold
hot
scale
tube
cm
cm
liquid
flask
What is the difference in the heights?

A
2
1.7 cm
2.8 cm
3.2 cm
4.5 cm
The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.

Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus the greatest?
C
speed
B
D
time
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
3
3
The circuit of a motor racing track is 3 km in length. In a race, a car goes 25 times round the
circuit in 30 minutes.
75 km / hour
90 km / hour
150 km / hour
750 km / hour
The force of gravity acting on an astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft is less than when she is on
the Earths surface.
Compared with being on the Earths surface, how do her mass and weight change when she
goes into orbit?
mass in orbit
weight in orbit
decreases
decreases
decreases
unchanged
unchanged
decreases
unchanged
unchanged
When two blocks X and Y are placed on a uniform beam, the beam balances on a pivot at its
centre as shown.
Y
X
pivot
What does this show about X and Y?

A
They have the same mass and the same density.
They have the same mass and the same weight.
They have the same volume and the same density.
They have the same volume and the same weight.
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
4
6
The diagram shows a rectangular metal block measuring 10 cm 5.0 cm 2.0 cm.
10 cm
5.0 cm
2.0 cm
Its mass is 250 g.

What is the density of the metal?
A
7
0.20 g / cm3
0.40 g / cm3
2.5 g / cm3
5.0 g / cm3
The diagram shows an experiment to find the density of a liquid.
cm3
cm3
50
50
measuring
cylinder
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
balance
200 g
liquid
10
250 g

A
8
0.5 g / cm3
2.0 g / cm3
8.0 g / cm3
What are the conditions for equilibrium?

resultant force
acting
resultant turning
effect acting
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
10.0 g / cm3
5
9
The diagram shows four objects standing on a flat surface.

The centre of mass of each object is marked M.
Which object will fall over?
A
D
M
10 A stone is thrown from the edge of a cliff. Its path is shown in the diagram.
3
ground
In which position does the stone have its greatest kinetic energy and in which position does it
have its least gravitational energy?
greatest kinetic
energy
least gravitational
energy
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
6
11 A worker is lifting boxes of identical weight from the ground onto a moving belt.
At first, it takes him 2 s to lift each box. Later in the day, it takes him 3 s.
A
Later in the day, less work is done in lifting each box.
Later in the day, more work is done in lifting each box.
Later in the day, less power is developed in lifting each box.
Later in the day, more power is developed in lifting each box.
12 A manometer is used to indicate the pressure in a steel vessel, as shown in the diagram.
liquid
manometer
steel vessel
What value does the liquid manometer give for the pressure in the vessel?
A
It is zero.
It is between zero and atmospheric pressure.
It is equal to atmospheric pressure.
It is greater than atmospheric pressure.
13 Four glass tanks contain water.

In which tank is the pressure of the water on the base greatest?
A
4m
3m
4m
3m
2m
UCLES 2008
2m
6m
2m
1m
2m
0625/01/M/J/08
4m
6m
7
14 Which line in the table describes the properties of solids and of liquids at a fixed temperature?
solids
liquids
definite volume and definite shape
no definite volume but definite shape
definite volume but no definite shape
no definite volume and no definite shape
15 Air is pumped slowly into a car tyre to increase the pressure. The temperature of the air does not
change.
number of molecules
hitting 1 cm2 of the
tyre each second
average speed at which

molecules hit the tyre
increases
increases
increases
unchanged
unchanged
increases
unchanged
unchanged
16 The thermometer in the diagram has no scale.
bulb
Where must the bulb be placed so that 0 C can be marked on the stem?
A
in boiling water
in cold water
in a freezer
in melting ice
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
8
17 A sample of a solid is heated for 12 minutes and its temperature noted every minute.
The results are shown in the table.
time / min
temperature / C
10
11
12
11.5
16.1
22.1
31.0
31.1
31.1
31.1
31.3
45.0
65.2
66.2
66.3
66.3
How should the sample be described at the end of the 12 minutes?

A
all solid
in the process of melting
all liquid
in the process of boiling
18 A heater is placed in a room.

Which diagram shows the movement of air as the room is heated?
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
9
19 The diagrams show four identical pieces of ice that are heated in test-tubes of water.
In which test-tube will the ice take the longest time to melt?
ice
water
water
ice wrapped
in lead wire
D
ice
water
water
ice wrapped
in lead wire
20 The diagram represents water waves about to move into shallow water from deep water.
wavefront
deep water
shallow water
Which property of the waves remains the same after the waves move into shallow water?
A
frequency
speed
wavefront direction
wavelength
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
10
21 Two sets of water waves overlap as shown in the diagram.
P
U
Q
S
From which two points are the sets of waves coming?

A
P and S
T and R
Q and T
U and Q
22 Which diagram shows total internal reflection of light?

A
C
glass prism
mirror
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
11
23 Light from the Sun passes through a prism and a spectrum is produced on a screen.
screen
narrow slit
P
red
light from
the Sun
violet
A thermometer placed at P shows a large temperature rise.

Which type of radiation causes this?
A
infra-red
microwave
ultra-violet
visible light
24 Two thin converging lenses X and Y are used as shown to give a focused image of an illuminated
slit. The rays shown are parallel between X and Y.
X
slit
image
screen
source
of light
30 cm
20 cm
15 cm
What are the correct values for the focal lengths of X and of Y?
focal length
of X / cm
focal length
of Y / cm
50
35
30
20
30
15
20
20
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
12
25 Which equation can be used to calculate the speed of sound?
A
speed = distance
time
speed = distance time
speed =
speed = time + distance
time
distance
26 A battery-operated bell is surrounded by a box with double walls.

air
bell
box walls
gap
The bell is ringing but no sound at all is heard outside the box.
What is in the gap?
A
a solid
a liquid
a gas
a vacuum
27 Which line in the table shows whether iron and steel are ferrous or non-ferrous materials?
iron
steel
ferrous
ferrous
ferrous
non-ferrous
non-ferrous
ferrous
non-ferrous
non-ferrous
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
13
28 A solenoid carrying a current is used to demagnetise a bar magnet.
solenoid
bar magnet
power
supply
Which conditions achieve demagnetisation?

current through
solenoid
movement of bar magnet
a.c.
around the solenoid quickly
a.c.
through the solenoid slowly
d.c.
around the solenoid quickly
d.c.
through the solenoid slowly

A
30 Which circuit symbol represents a component used to store energy?

A
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
14
31 In the circuit shown, the switches S1 and S2 may be open (off) or closed (on).
V
+
12 V
S2
S1
switches shown
open (off)
Which line in the table shows the voltmeter reading for the switch positions given?
S1
S2
voltmeter reading / V
open
open
12
closed
closed
12
open
closed
closed
open
12
32 The device X in this circuit is designed to cut off the electricity supply automatically if too much
current flows.
X
What is device X?
A
a fuse
a switch
a resistor
an ammeter
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
15
33 The diagrams show two ways in which three lamps may be connected.
X
Y
X
Z
circuit 1
circuit 2

A
34 The wire XY shown in the diagram is connected to a sensitive voltmeter with a centre zero. XY is
then moved quickly once through the magnetic field.
X
S
V
N
movement
What is observed on the voltmeter?

A
The needle moves briefly in one direction and then returns to the centre.
The needle moves quickly in one direction and stays deflected.
The needle vibrates rapidly from side to side whilst XY is moving.
The needle stays still.
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
16
35 The diagram shows a transformer connected to a 240 V a.c. supply.
soft-iron core
primary coil
60 turns
secondary coil
30 turns
240 V
a.c.
What is the potential difference across the secondary coil of the transformer?
A
30 V
120 V
240 V
480 V
36 In order to produce a beam of cathode rays, a heated filament is placed near to an anode in an
evacuated glass vessel.
evacuated glass vessel
anode
heated filament
What is the type of charge on the anode and why is this charge chosen?
charge
reason
negative
to attract electrons
negative
to repel electrons
positive
to attract electrons
positive
to repel electrons
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
17
37 Diagram 1 shows a potential divider circuit containing two 100 resistors.
One of the resistors is changed to 90 , as shown in diagram 2.
diagram 1
diagram 2
100
90
100
100
How does the reading on the voltmeter change when this is done?
A
It becomes zero.
It decreases a little.
It increases a little.
It stays the same.
38 What is a -particle and from which part of a radioactive atom is it emitted?

-particle
emitted from
electron
nucleus
electron
outer orbits
helium nucleus
nucleus
helium nucleus
outer orbits
39 A sample of radioactive uranium has mass 1 g. Another sample of the same material has
mass 2 g.
Which property is the same for both samples?
A
the amount of radiation emitted per second
the half-life
the number of uranium atoms
the volume
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
[Turn over
18
40 A particular nuclide has the symbol
37
17
Cl .
What is true for atoms of this nuclide?

A
There are 17 nucleons in the nucleus.
There are 17 protons in the nucleus.
There are 37 electrons in the nucleus.
There are 37 neutrons in the nucleus.
UCLES 2008
0625/01/M/J/08
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/08
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/01/M/J/08

0625/01
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*7002360314*

Soft clean eraser


IB08 11_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
Two digital stopwatches X and Y, which record in minutes and seconds, are used to time a race.
The readings of the two stopwatches, at the start and at the end of the race, are shown.
stopwatch X
stopwatch Y
start
end
00:00
00:40
start
end
01:30
02:20
Which statement about the time of the race is correct?
Both stopwatches record the same time interval.
Stopwatch X recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch Y.
Stopwatch Y recorded 10 s longer than stopwatch X.
Stopwatch Y recorded 50 s longer than stopwatch X.
A tennis player hits a ball over the net.

P
Q
R
In which position is the ball accelerating?

A
P and Q only
P and R only
Q and R only
P, Q and R
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
3
3
A car travels at various speeds during a short journey.

The table shows the distances travelled and the time taken during each of four stages
P, Q, R and S.
stage
distance travelled / km
time taken / minutes
1.8
3.6
2.7
2.7
During which two stages is the car travelling at the same speed?
A
4
P and Q
P and S
Q and R
R and S
What is the meaning of the weight of an object?

A
the density of the material from which it is made
the force exerted on it by gravity
the mass of the matter it contains
the pressure it exerts on the floor
The weight of an object is to be found using the beam balance shown in the diagram.
object
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan,
with the following results.
weights in the right hand pan
effect
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N
balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N
balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
What is the best estimate of the weight of the object?

A
0.27 N
UCLES 2008
0.29 N
0.31 N
0625/01/O/N/08
0.58 N
[Turn over
4
6
A student needs to find the density of a cubic block of wood.

Which two pieces of apparatus should she use?
balance and metre rule
balance and thermometer
measuring cylinder and metre rule
measuring cylinder and thermometer
Two identical measuring cylinders containing different liquids are placed on a simple balance.
They balance as shown.
liquid X
volume = 200 cm3
liquid Y
volume = 100 cm3
How does the density of X compare with the density of Y?

1
2
density of Y
density of X =
density of X = density of Y
density of X = 2 density of Y
density of X = 4 density of Y
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
5
8
The diagrams show a uniform rod with its midpoint on a pivot.

Two equal forces F are applied to the rod, as shown.
Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?
A
F
pivot
pivot
B
F
pivot
pivot
A train is travelling along a horizontal track at constant speed. Two of the forces acting on the
train are shown in the diagram.
forwards
force from engine
60 000 N
friction
20 000 N
A force of air resistance is also acting on the train to give it a resultant force of zero.
What is this air resistance force?
A
40 000 N backwards
80 000 N backwards
40 000 N forwards
80 000 N forwards
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
6
10 The diagram shows water stored behind a dam.
dam
water
turbine
generator
water
The water flows to a turbine and turns a generator.

Which sequence for the conversion of energy is correct?
A
gravitational energy kinetic energy electrical energy
kinetic energy gravitational energy electrical energy
gravitational energy electrical energy kinetic energy
kinetic energy electrical energy gravitational energy
11 A rubber ball is dropped from a height of 2 m on to a table.

Whilst in contact with the table, some of its energy is converted into internal energy.
What is the highest possible point the ball could reach after bouncing?
4m
height
B
2m
ball released
from this height
C
D
0
table
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
7
12 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer used to measure atmospheric pressure.
mercury
Q

A
The pressure at P is atmospheric pressure.
The pressure at P is nearly zero.
The pressure at Q is lower than the pressure at P.
The pressure at Q is nearly zero.
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
8
13 A brick with rectangular sides rests on a table.
brick
table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this change affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force
pressure
unchanged
unchanged
increased
unchanged
unchanged
increased
increased
increased
14 Viewed through a microscope, very small particles can be seen moving with Brownian motion.
type of motion
of particles
particles are
suspended in
vibration
a liquid or a gas
vibration
random
a liquid or a gas
random
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
9
15 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
pressure
pressure
0
0
time
C
pressure
pressure
0
0
UCLES 2008
time
time
0625/01/O/N/08
time
[Turn over
10
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are heated using the same heater. The graph shows how
the temperature of each liquid changes with time.
temperature
liquid 1
liquid 2
0
0
time
What does the graph tell us about the liquids?

A
Liquid 1 has a higher melting point than liquid 2.
Liquid 1 has a higher boiling point than liquid 2.
Liquid 1 starts to melt sooner than liquid 2.
Liquid 1 starts to boil sooner than liquid 2.
of the washer.
steel
washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?

A
Cool the washer and put it over the rod.
Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.
Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.
Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
11
18 A cup with a lid contains a hot drink.
lid
hot drink
When the lid is removed, the rate of heat loss from the drink increases.
What causes this?
A
convection only
evaporation only
both convection and evaporation
neither convection nor evaporation
19 A cupboard is placed in front of a heater. Air can move through a gap under the cupboard.
wall
cupboard
heater
air moves through gap

floor
Which line in the table describes the temperature and the direction of the air that moves through
the gap?
air temperature
air direction
cool
away from the heater
cool
towards the heater
warm
away from the heater
warm
towards the heater
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
12
20 Waves in a tank pass from shallow to deep water.
The wavefront diagram is shown.
wavefront
shallow
water
deep
water
Which quantity increases as the waves enter the deep water?

A
amplitude
frequency
wave energy
wavelength
21 The diagrams represent water waves in a tank.

Which diagram represents waves that change speed?
B
A
barrier
barrier
D
barrier
deeper
water
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
shallower
water
13
22 Which diagram shows the dispersion of white light?
B
glass
glass
white
light
white
light
D
glass
glass
white
light
white
light
23 In the diagram, the distance OP is the focal length of the lens.

Through which point will the ray shown pass, after refraction by the lens?
lens
A
P
focal length
focal length
C
24 Which word correctly completes the sentence below?

An echo is a sound wave which is by a large obstacle.
A
absorbed
dispersed
reflected
refracted
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
14
25 In an experiment to measure the speed of sound, a student uses a stopwatch to find how long a
sound takes to travel from X to Y. She does this six times.
sound travels from X to Y
X
The table shows her results.

time / s
first
0.5
second
0.7
third
0.6
fourth
0.4
fifth
0.9
sixth
0.5
What value for the time should be used to calculate the speed of sound?
A
0.4 s
0.5 s
0.6 s
0.9 s
26 A student wishes to demagnetise a steel bar. He uses the apparatus shown.

coil
electrical
supply
steel bar
Which type of electrical supply should the student use and what should he do with the steel bar?
supply
what to do with the steel bar
a.c.
keep it inside the coil
a.c.
slowly remove it from the coil
d.c.
keep it inside the coil
d.c.
slowly remove it from the coil
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
15
27 Two metal bars are held together. At least one of the bars is a magnet. The bars repel each
other.
What does this show about the bars and why?
what it shows
why
only one of the bars is a magnet
two magnets always attract each other
only one of the bars is a magnet
induced magnetism in the other bar makes it repel
they are both magnets
there must be like poles facing each other
they are both magnets
there must be opposite poles facing each other
28 When there is an electric current in a metal wire, what flows through the wire?
A
atoms
electrons
neutrons
protons
29 The table shows the voltage and current ratings for four electric heaters.
Which heater has the least resistance?
voltage / V
current / A
110
5.0
110
10.0
230
5.0
230
10.0
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
16
30 In the circuit below, X and Y are identical 6 V lamps.
6V
switch
What happens when the switch is closed (the current is switched on)?
A
X lights more brightly than Y.
Y lights more brightly than X.
X and Y both light with full brightness.
X and Y both light with half brightness.
31 The diagram shows four different circuits.

P
What is the order of increasing resistance of these circuits?

lowest
resistance
highest
resistance
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
17
32 A student makes four circuits.
In which circuit are both lamps protected by the fuse?
33 A mains circuit can safely supply a current of 40 A.

A hairdryer takes 2 A. It is connected to the circuit by a lead which can safely carry up to 5 A.
Which fuse is best to use in the plug fitted to the hairdryer lead?
A
1 A fuse
3 A fuse
10 A fuse
50 A fuse
34 Two different systems are used to transmit equal amounts of electrical power from one building to
another.
One system uses low voltage and the other uses high voltage. Both systems use identical wires.
Which line in the table is correct about which system wastes least energy and why?
least energy wasted
why
high voltage system
the current in the wires is bigger
high voltage system
the current in the wires is smaller
low voltage system
the current in the wires is bigger
low voltage system
the current in the wires is smaller
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
18
35 When the electric current in wire XY is in the direction shown, there is an upward force on the
wire.
X
current
force
magnet
magnet
N
Y
If the north and south poles of the magnet exchange positions, in which direction will the force on
the wire act?
A
downwards
upwards
to the left
to the right
36 A cathode-ray beam passes through an electric field between charged parallel plates.
+
cathode-ray beam

A
towards the negative plate
towards the positive plate
into the page
out of the page
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
19
37 When the thermistor in the circuit below is heated, the lamp becomes brighter.

A
The resistance of the lamp decreases.
The resistance of the lamp increases.
The resistance of the thermistor decreases.
The resistance of the thermistor increases.
38 The diagram shows an experiment to monitor the radiation from a radioactive gas. The counter
readings are corrected for background radiation.
counter
000.0
radioactive gas
The table shows how the counter reading varies with time.
time / seconds
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
counter reading /
counts per minute
140
105
82
61
44
36
27
20
15
10
What is the half-life of the gas?

A
between 20 and 40 seconds
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
[Turn over
20
39 Which material is commonly used as a lining for a box for storing radioactive samples?
A
aluminium
copper
lead
uranium
40 A uranium
238
92 U
nucleus emits an -particle.
What are the new nucleon and proton numbers?

nucleon number
proton number
238
88
236
90
234
92
234
90
UCLES 2008
0625/01/O/N/08
First Variant Question Paper

0625/11
PHYSICS
May/June 2009
45 minutes
*7150187285*

Soft clean eraser

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

IB09 06_0625_01/3RP
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
A metre rule is used to measure a length.

Which reading is shown to the nearest millimetre?
A
0.7 m
0.76 m
0.761 m
0.7614 m
The graph represents the movement of a body.

10
speed
m/s
8
6
4
2
0
0
time / s
How far has the body moved after 5 s?

A
3
2m
10 m
25 m
50 m
A car travels 100 km. The highest speed of the car is 90 km/h, and the lowest speed is
30 km/h. The journey takes two hours.
What is the average speed for the journey?
A
30 km / h
50 km / h
60 km / h
90 km / h
Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct?
A
A balance can only be used to compare weights, not masses.
Heavy objects always have more mass than light ones.
Large objects always have more mass than small ones.
Mass is a force but weight is not.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
3
5
The table shows the weight in newtons of a10 kg mass on each of four planets.
planet
weight of a 10 kg mass / N
Earth
100
Jupiter
250
Mercury
40
Venus
90
The diagram shows a force meter (spring balance) being used.
18 N
2.0 kg
On which planet is the force meter (spring balance) being used?
Earth
Jupiter
Mercury
Venus
Which items of apparatus are required to determine the density of a liquid?

A
balance and measuring cylinder
metre rule and measuring cylinder
metre rule and thermometer
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
4
7
Which property of an object cannot be changed by a force?

A
its mass
its motion
its shape
its size
A wooden plank rests in equilibrium on two boulders on opposite sides of a narrow stream. Three
forces of size P, Q and R act on the plank.
P
R
plank
How are the sizes of the forces related?
P+Q=R
P+R=Q
P=Q=R
P=Q+R
Electricity can be obtained from different energy resources.

Which energy resource is used to obtain electricity without producing heat to boil water?
A
coal
geothermal
hydroelectric
nuclear
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
5
10 Four people of equal weight on a beach use different routes to get to the top of a sea wall.
pavement
slipway
sea wall
beach
Which person produces the greatest average power?

person
route
time taken
runs across the beach, then climbs the ladder
8s
walks across the beach, then climbs the ladder
16 s
runs up the slipway
5s
walks up the slipway
10 s
11 The diagrams show two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram
shows a tube of bigger diameter, but the diagram is incomplete. There is a vacuum above the
mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube could show the mercury level in that tube?
vacuum
A
B
C
glass
tubes
D
dish
mercury
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
dish
[Turn over
6
12 A student fills two containers with water (density 1.0 g / cm3) and two with oil (density 0.8 g / cm3),
as shown in the diagrams.
In which container is the pressure on the base the greatest?
A
water
oil
water
oil
13 In an experiment, some of a substance changes from a liquid to a gas. The temperature of the
remaining liquid changes because of this.
What is the name for this change of state and how does the temperature change?
change of state
how temperature changes
condensation
decreases
condensation
increases
evaporation
decreases
evaporation
increases
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
7
14 A piston traps a certain mass of gas inside a cylinder. Initially the piston is halfway along the
length of the cylinder.
The piston is now moved towards the open end of the cylinder. The temperature of the gas
remains constant.
initial position
final position
How are the density and the pressure of the gas affected by moving the piston?
density
pressure
decreases
decreases
decreases
unchanged
increases
decreases
increases
unchanged
15 The graph shows the change in temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.

Which part of the graph shows when the substance is boiling?
temperature
C
B
A
time
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
8
16 Four blocks, made of different materials, are each given the same quantity of internal energy
(heat).
Which block has the greatest thermal capacity?
A
temperature
rise = 2 oC
temperature
rise = 4 oC
temperature
rise = 6 oC
temperature
rise = 8 oC
17 A rod is made up of copper and wood joined together.

After the rod is heated at the join in the centre for about a minute, where would the lowest
temperature be?
B
wood
copper
18 The diagram shows a fire.
Why does the smoke rise above the fire?

A
Smoke evaporates more quickly at higher temperatures.
Smoke molecules diffuse more quickly at higher temperatures.
The density of the air is lower at higher temperatures.
The pressure of the air is greater at higher temperatures.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
9
19 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water at the
broken line.
Which diagram shows what happens to the waves?
fast
slow
fast
slow
deep
water
shallow
water
deep
water
shallow
water
fast
slow
fast
slow
deep
water
shallow
water
deep
water
shallow
water
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
10
20 The diagrams show examples of wave motion.
2
ripple tank
drum
waves on water
waves in air
waves on a rope
waves in a spring
(as shown)
Which are longitudinal waves?

A
1 only
1, 2 and 4
2 and 3 only
2 and 4 only
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
11
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
white
light
spectrum
white
light
spectrum
D
spectrum
white
light
white
light
spectrum
22 The diagram shows the path of a ray of light passing through a principal focus F of a lens.
Which broken line shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the lens?
lens
ray
lig
ht
of
A
F
F
B
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
12
23 A small boat in a harbour is protected from waves on the sea by harbour walls.
land
sea
waves
small
boat
harbour
harbour
walls
Some waves can curve round the harbour walls and reach the boat.
What is the name for this effect?
A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
24 An engineer standing at P sees an explosion at X.

Z
Y
X
DANGER BLASTING
After the explosion, she hears two bangs. One bang is heard a fraction of a second after the
other. The second bang is an echo.
From which surface has the sound reflected to cause this echo?
A
XY
UCLES 2009
PV
ZY
0625/11/M/J/09
WX
13
25 The north pole of a bar magnet is placed next to end P of an iron bar PQ, as shown. As a result,
magnetic poles are induced in the iron bar.
S
magnet
Q
iron bar
What are the magnetic poles induced at P and at Q?

magnetic pole at P
magnetic pole at Q
north
north
north
south
south
north
south
south
26 An electromagnet is used to separate magnetic metals from non-magnetic metals.

Why is steel unsuitable as the core of the electromagnet?
A
It forms a permanent magnet.
It has a high density.
It is a good conductor of electricity.
27 Which particle does not experience a force due to an electric field?

A
-particle
electron
neutron
proton
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
14
28 Using the circuit shown, the current I is found for various voltages V. The temperature of the
resistor does not change.
variable direct
voltage
V
A
I
Which graph shows the results obtained?
A
0
V
D
I
0
0
0
V
29 In the circuit shown, ammeter X reads 0.5 A.

4.0 V
A Y
X A
5.0
3.0
What does ammeter Y read?

A
UCLES 2009
0.5 A
3.5 A
0625/11/M/J/09
4.0 A
15
30 In the circuits shown, all the resistors are identical.
Which circuit has the least resistance?
A
31 In the circuit below, one of the lamps breaks, causing all the other lamps to go out.
Which lamp breaks?
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
16
32 Either a fuse or a circuit-breaker can be used to protect electrical cables from large currents that
could cause overheating.
cable
X
live
electrical
supply
appliance
neutral
cable
If a fuse is used, in which position in the circuit should it be connected, and if a circuit-breaker is
used, in which position should it be connected?
position
of fuse
position of
circuit-breaker
33 The current in a lamp at full brightness is 0.25 A. The flexible cable to the lamp is designed for
currents up to 5.0 A, so it can safely carry the 0.25 A taken by the lamp.
Which fuse should be inserted in the plug at the other end of the flexible cable?
A
0.2 A
UCLES 2009
1.0 A
5.0 A
0625/11/M/J/09
10.0 A
17
34 A wire perpendicular to the page carries an electric current in a direction out of the page. There
are four compasses near the wire.
Which compass shows the direction of the magnetic field caused by the current?
wire with
current out
of page
D
35 A transformer has 50 turns on its primary coil and 100 turns on its secondary coil. An alternating
voltage of 25.0 V is connected across the primary coil.
25.0 V
primary coil
50 turns
secondary coil
100 turns

A
12.5 V
50.0 V
175 V
200 V
36 In a cathode-ray tube, a hot tungsten cathode releases particles by thermionic emission.

A
-particles
electrons
protons
tungsten atoms
UCLES 2009
0625/11/M/J/09
[Turn over
18
cathode
anode
top Y plate
P
screen
bottom Y plate
A student wants the cathode rays to make a spot at P on the screen.

Which parts of the cathode-ray tube should be positive?
A
anode and top Y plate
anode and bottom Y plate
cathode and top Y plate
cathode and bottom Y plate
38 A radioactive nucleus contains 138 neutrons. The nucleus emits an -particle.

How many neutrons are in the nucleus after it has emitted the -particle?
A
134
UCLES 2009
136
138
0625/11/M/J/09
139
19
39 The graph shows the decay curve for one particular radioactive nuclide.
2500
count rate
counts / min
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0
5
time / days
What is the half-life of this nuclide?
40
1.0 day
16
7N
is the symbol for a particular nuclide of nitrogen.
1.5 days
2.0 days
2.5 days
23
How many nucleons does this nuclide contain?

A
UCLES 2009
16
0625/11/M/J/09
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/11/M/J/09

0625/11
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*7565115686*

Soft clean eraser


IB09 11_0625_01/4RP
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
A stopwatch is used to time an athlete running 100 m. The timekeeper forgets to reset the watch
to zero before using it to time another athlete running 100 m.
60
55
55
50
seconds
35
10
45
15
40
20
15
seconds
40
25
30
50
10
45
60
35
stopwatch at
end of first
athletes run
30
20
25
stopwatch at
end of second
athletes run
How long does the second athlete take to run 100 m?

A
2
11.2 s
11.4 s
12.4 s
23.8 s
A ball is thrown upwards.

What effect does the force of gravity have on the ball?
It produces a constant acceleration downwards.
It produces a constant acceleration upwards.
It produces a decreasing acceleration upwards.
It produces an increasing acceleration downwards.
A car accelerates from traffic lights. The graph shows the cars speed plotted against time.
speed
m/s
20
0
0
10
time / s
How far does the car travel before it reaches a constant speed?
A
10 m
UCLES 2009
20 m
100 m
0625/11/O/N/09
200 m
3
4
Which property of a body can be measured in newtons?

A
density
mass
volume
weight
A cup contains hot liquid.

Some of the liquid evaporates as it cools.
What happens to the mass and to the weight of the liquid in the cup as it cools?
mass
weight
decreases
decreases
decreases
stays the same
stays the same
decreases
stays the same
stays the same
The diagrams show a rectangular box with inside measurements of 5 cm 6 cm 4 cm.

liquid
4 cm
6 cm
5 cm
mass = 40 g
total mass = 220 g
The box has a mass of 40 g when empty. When filled with a liquid, it has a total mass of 220 g.
A
220 g / cm3
(5 6 4)
(220 40)
g / cm3
(5 6 4)
(5 6 4) g / cm3
220
(5 6 4)
g / cm3
(220 40)
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
4
7
Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
They would cause the bus to become unstable.
They would cause the bus to slow down.
They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.
They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.
The object in the diagram is acted upon by the two forces shown.
3N
2N
object
What is the effect of these forces?

A
The object moves to the left with constant speed.
The object moves to the left with constant acceleration.
The object moves to the right with constant speed.
The object moves to the right with constant acceleration.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
5
9
The diagram shows a microphone being used in an interview.
microphone
Which energy change takes place in the microphone?

input energy
output energy
chemical
electrical
electrical
chemical
electrical
sound
sound
electrical
10 The table shows the times taken for four children to run up a set of stairs.
Which childs power is greatest?
mass of child / kg
time / s
40
10
40
20
60
10
60
20
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
6
11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply to a house. It gives a
reading of h cm of water.
gas
supply
h cm
Why is it better to use water rather than mercury in this manometer?

A
h would be too large if mercury were used.
h would be too small if mercury were used.
The tube would need to be narrower if mercury were used.
The tube would need to be wider if mercury were used.
12 The diagrams show two swimming pools. One contains fresh water and the other contains salt
water. Salt water is more dense than fresh water.
At which labelled point is the pressure the greatest?
water surface
water surface
A
fresh water (less dense)
salt water (more dense)
13 Brownian motion is observed by looking at smoke particles through a microscope.

How do the smoke particles move in Brownian motion?
A
all in the same direction
at random
in circles
vibrating about fixed points
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
7
14 A small amount of air is introduced into the vacuum above the mercury in a mercury barometer
tube.
The mercury level goes down.
Why does the mercury level go down?
A
The air molecules cool the mercury and make it contract.
The air molecules decrease the pressure above the mercury.
The air molecules heat the mercury and make it expand.
The air molecules increase the pressure above the mercury.
15 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are
needed.
Which of these is a fixed point?
A
room temperature
the temperature inside a freezer
the temperature of pure melting ice
the temperature of pure warm water
16 The table gives the melting points and boiling points of glycerine and benzene.
melting point
boiling point
glycerine
18 C
290 C
benzene
5.4 C
80 C
At which temperature will both glycerine and benzene be liquid?

A
0 C
UCLES 2009
50 C
100 C
0625/11/O/N/09
150 C
[Turn over
8
17 A beaker contains water at room temperature.
water
Y
How could a convection current be set up in the water?
A
cool the water at X
cool the water at Y
stir the water at X
stir the water at Y
18 A student warms her hands near a fire.
Which waves carry most heat to her hands and are these waves electromagnetic?
waves
electromagnetic
infra-red
no
infra-red
yes
visible light
no
visible light
yes
19 The drawing shows a wave.

Which labelled distance is the wavelength?
A
B
D
C
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
9
20 Sound waves travel from a point X to another point Y.
X
Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, caused by the sound waves, in the
region between X and Y.
A
D
X
21 A ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.

Which path does the ray of light take when the angle of incidence i is less than the critical angle?
A
B
air
glass
C
D
ray of
light
22 An object O is placed in front of a converging lens of focal length f.

At which point will the top of the image be seen?
A
B
O
f
C
D
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
10
23 Which range of frequencies typically can be heard by a 10 year-old child?
A
20 Hz 2000 Hz
20 Hz 20 000 Hz
200 Hz 2000 Hz
200 Hz 20 000 Hz
24 Astronaut 1 uses a hammer to mend a satellite in space. Astronaut 2 is nearby. There is no air in
space.
astronaut 1
hammer
astronaut 2
Compared with the sound heard if they were working on Earth, what does astronaut 2 hear?
A
a louder sound
a quieter sound
a sound of the same loudness
no sound at all
25 A permanent magnet is brought near to a piece of copper. The copper is not attracted by the
magnet.
Why is there no attraction?
A
Copper is ferrous but is only attracted by an electromagnet.
Copper is ferrous but is not attracted by any type of magnet.
Copper is not ferrous and is only attracted by an electromagnet.
Copper is not ferrous and is not attracted by any type of magnet.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
11
26 Four plotting compasses are placed in the magnetic field of two identical bar magnets as shown
in the diagram.
Which compass is shown pointing in the wrong direction?
B
A
D
S
S
C
27 A pupil measures the potential difference across a device and the current in it.
Which calculation gives the resistance of the device?
A
current + potential difference
current potential difference
28 A student uses a length of wire as a resistor. He discovers that the resistance of the wire is too
small.
To be certain of making a resistor of higher value, he should use a piece of wire that is
A
longer and thicker.
longer and thinner.
shorter and thicker.
shorter and thinner.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
12
29 The diagram shows a battery connected to two identical resistors. Three ammeters M1, M2 and
M3 are connected in the circuit.
M1 A
A M3
A
M2
Meter M1 reads 1.0 A.

What are the readings on M2 and on M3?
reading on M2 / A
reading on M3 / A
0.5
0.0
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
30 The diagram shows a torch containing two cells, a switch and a lamp.
plastic
case
brass
connecting
strip
switch
lamp
What is the circuit diagram for the torch?

A
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
13
31 An electrical component X is placed in water, as shown.
A
thermometer
X
water
When the temperature of the water is increased, the reading on the ammeter increases.
A
a capacitor
a relay
a thermistor
32 A certain electrical appliance is powered from a mains supply. The appliance normally uses a
current of 3 A, but the current briefly rises to 4 A at the instant the appliance is switched on. The
cable to the appliance is designed for currents up to 6 A.
The fuses available to protect the cable are rated at 1 A, 3 A, 5 A and 13 A.
Which fuse should be used?
A
1A
3A
5A
13 A
33 On a building site, metal scaffolding is firmly embedded in the damp ground. A builder holds a
mains-operated electric drill in one hand. With his other hand he holds on to the scaffolding.
The power cable of the drill is damaged where it enters the metal casing of the drill.
What danger does this present to the builder?
A
A current could pass through the builder and electrocute him.
A current in the scaffolding could heat it up and burn him.
The large current could blow the fuse and damage the drill.
The large current could make the motor spin too quickly.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
14
34 Which device is designed to allow a small direct current (d.c.) to control a large direct current
(d.c.)?
A
a generator
a motor
a relay
a transformer
35 A transformer is to be used to provide a 10 V output from a 100 V supply.
100 V
10 V
primary coil
secondary coil
What are suitable numbers of turns for the primary coil and for the secondary coil?
number of turns on
the primary coil
number of turns on
the secondary coil
100
1000
200
110
400
490
800
80
36 The diagram shows a beam of cathode rays entering an electric field.
beam
+
In which direction is the beam deflected by the field?
A
downwards
upwards
into the page
out of the page
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
15
37 To create cathode rays in a vacuum, what might be a suitable potential difference to connect
between the cathode and anode?
A
6 V a.c.
6 V d.c.
600 V a.c.
600 V d.c.
38 Which statement explains the meaning of the half-life of a radioactive substance?

A
half the time taken for half the substance to decay
half the time taken for the substance to decay completely
the time taken for half the substance to decay
the time taken for the substance to decay completely
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
X
Y
Z
2 mm of
plastic
10 mm
of aluminium
lead
Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z?

X
-particles
-particles
-rays
-particles
-particles
-rays
-particles
-rays
-particles
-rays
-particles
-particles
Question 40 is on the next page.
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09
[Turn over
16
40 How many neutrons and how many protons are contained in a nucleus of
neutrons
protons
92
146
146
92
146
238
238
92
238
92 U ?
UCLES 2009
0625/11/O/N/09

0625/11
PHYSICS
May/June 2010
45 minutes
*0334676086*

Soft clean eraser


IB10 06_0625_11/4RP
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
A scientist needs to determine the volume of a small, irregularly shaped rock sample. Only a rule
and a measuring cylinder, partially filled with water, are available.
cm3
cm
rule
rock sample
measuring
cylinder
To determine the volume, which apparatus should the scientist use?
both the measuring cylinder and the rule
neither the measuring cylinder nor the rule
the measuring cylinder only
the rule only
A student uses a stopwatch to time a runner running around a circular track. The runner runs two
laps (twice around the track). The diagrams show the reading on the stopwatch when the runner
starts running, at the end of the first lap, and at the end of the second lap.
reading when
runner starts
reading at end
of first lap
reading at end
of second lap
What is the time taken for the runner to run the second lap?
A
0 min 50 s
UCLES 2010
1 min 10 s
1 min 13 s
0625/11/M/J/10
2 min 03 s
3
3
Two distance / time graphs and two speed / time graphs are shown.
Which graph represents an object that is at rest?
A
B
distance
distance
time
time
speed
speed
0
time
time
A snail moves along a ruler. It takes 20 s to move from Q to R.

P
cm
12
What is its average speed from Q to R?

A
12 cm / s
20
12 2 cm / s
20
20 cm / s
12
20 cm / s
12 2
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
4
5
Two blocks of metal X and Y hang from spring balances as shown in the diagram.
N0
N0
X
Y
What does the diagram show about X and Y?

A
They have the same mass and the same volume but different weights.
They have the same mass and the same weight but different volumes.
They have the same mass, the same volume and the same weight.
They have the same weight and the same volume but different masses.
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
5
6
The graph shows how weight varies with mass on planet P and on planet Q.
400
planet P
weight / N
300
planet Q
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
mass / kg
An object weighs 400 N on planet P. The object is taken to planet Q.

Which row is correct?
mass of object
on planet Q / kg
weight of object
on planet Q / N
40
200
40
400
80
200
80
400
The diagram shows a rectangular block of density 2 g / cm3.

3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
What is the mass of the block?

A
2g
UCLES 2010
6g
14 g
0625/11/M/J/10
24 g
[Turn over
6
8
Which statement about a moving object is correct?

A
When an object is accelerating, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
When an object is moving at a steady speed, the air resistance acting on it must equal zero.
When an object is moving at a steady speed, the resultant force acting on it must equal zero.
When an object is moving, there must be a resultant force acting on it.
An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
load / N
length / cm
15.2
16.2
1.0
extension / cm
3
18.6
2.1
3.4
Which figure is missing from the table?

A
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.6
10 Energy is stored in a battery and in a box of matches.

Which type of energy is stored in each of them?
a battery
a box of matches
chemical
chemical
chemical
internal (thermal)
electrical
chemical
electrical
internal (thermal)
11 A man lifts 20 bricks, each of weight 6 N.

What other information is needed to calculate the useful work done in lifting the bricks?
A
the distance he lifts the bricks
the mass of the bricks
the time taken to lift the bricks
the volume of the bricks
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
7
12 To prevent a cement mixer sinking into soft ground, the mixer is placed on a large flat board.
cement mixer
board
soft ground
Why does this prevent the mixer sinking?

A
The large area decreases the pressure on the ground.
The large area increases the pressure on the ground.
The large area decreases the weight on the ground.
The large area increases the weight on the ground.
13 The pressure of a gas is measured using a manometer as shown in the diagram.

pressure to
be measured
mercury
The mercury in the manometer is replaced with a liquid which is less dense.
How does the value of h change?
A
It becomes zero.
It stays the same.
It increases.
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
8
14 The diagram represents the molecules of a gas in a closed container of constant volume.
What happens to the molecules when the gas is heated?

A
They expand.
They hit the walls less often.
They move further apart.
They move more quickly.
15 A liquid is left in an open dish. After several days there is less liquid in the dish.
Which statement explains this?
A
The least energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
The least energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
The most energetic molecules leave the surface and escape into the air.
The most energetic molecules leave the surface and return.
16 A thermometer has a scale which starts at 10 C and ends at 110 C.

10 0
100 110
C
What is the value of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point of the scale?
lower fixed point
/ C
upper fixed point

/ C
10
100
10
110
100
110
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
9
17 A student carries out an experiment to find the melting point of wax. The graph shows how the
temperature of the wax changes as it cools.
X
temperature
/ C
Y
melting point
of wax
0
0
time

A
At X the temperature drops more slowly than at Z.
At Y all the wax is solid.
At Y thermal energy is being given out by the wax.
At Z the wax molecules are not moving.
18 Hot liquid in a vacuum flask cools extremely slowly. This is because some methods of heat
transfer cannot take place in a vacuum.
Which methods cannot take place in a vacuum?
A
conduction and convection only
conduction and radiation only
convection and radiation only
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
10
19 A teacher demonstrates convection currents using a box with two chimneys and a lighted candle.
She holds a smoking taper at point P.
In which direction does the convection current cause the smoke to move?
B
A
chimney
chimney
20 Which waves are longitudinal?

A
sound waves
from a trumpet
water waves
on a pond
88:88
light waves
from a lamp
microwaves
in an oven
21 A navigation buoy floating on the sea oscillates up and down as a wave passes.
navigation
buoy
In exactly two minutes, six complete wavelengths pass the buoy.

What is the frequency of the waves?
A
0.050 Hz
UCLES 2010
0.33 Hz
3.0 Hz
0625/11/M/J/10
20 Hz
11
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the edge of a piece of glass. The angle i is bigger
than the critical angle.
Which arrow correctly shows the direction of the ray after it leaves the edge of the glass?
normal
ray of
light
D
i
glass
air
C
A
B
23 Which diagram correctly shows rays of light passing through a converging lens in a camera?
A
B
camera
object
camera
image
object
image
lens
lens
D
camera
object
camera
image
object
image
lens
lens
24 What is the approximate value of the highest frequency that can be heard by a young person?
A
20 Hz
UCLES 2010
200 Hz
2000 Hz
0625/11/M/J/10
20 000 Hz
[Turn over
12
25 A police car siren emits two different sounds P and Q. These are produced alternately. The
diagram represents the sounds emitted.
P
displacement
Q
time
Which sound is the louder and which has the lower pitch?
louder
lower pitch
26 A magnet attracts two pieces of iron.

iron
N
What is the arrangement of the induced poles in the pieces of iron?

A
S S
S N
N S
N N
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
13
27 A piece of iron and a piece of steel are picked up by an electromagnet as shown.
electromagnet
steel
iron
The current to the electromagnet is switched off.

What happens?
A
Both the iron and the steel remain magnetised.
Neither the iron nor the steel remain magnetised.
Only the iron remains magnetised.
Only the steel remains magnetised.
28 The table shows the lengths and diameters of four copper wires.
Which wire has the least resistance?
length / m
diameter / mm
0.50
1.0
0.50
2.5
0.75
1.0
0.75
2.5
29 A circuit is set up to measure the resistance of a resistor R. The meter readings are 2.0 A and
3.0 V.
A
V
R
What is the resistance of the resistor R?

A
0.67
UCLES 2010
1.5
5.0
0625/11/M/J/10
6.0
[Turn over
14
30 The circuit shown is a potential divider.
X
output
A
a relay
a thermistor
a variable resistor
31 A lamp is connected in four circuits in turn, each using identical batteries.

The resistors are all identical.
In which circuit will the lamp be brightest?
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
15
32 Which diagram shows the correct positions for both the switch and the fuse?
switch
live wire
A
lamp
neutral wire
fuse
live wire
switch
fuse
lamp
neutral wire
live wire
fuse
lamp
neutral wire
switch
live wire
D
lamp
neutral wire
fuse
switch
33 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.
What is the greatest hazard?
A
a fire
a fuse will blow
an electric shock
no current will flow
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
[Turn over
16
34 A coil is connected to a battery and a soft iron bar is hung near to it.
soft iron
coil
The current is then reversed by reversing the battery connections.

How does the soft iron bar behave in the two cases?
with the battery as shown
with the battery reversed
35 A transformer has 15 000 turns on its primary coil and 750 turns on its secondary coil.
Connected in this way, for what purpose could this transformer be used?
A
to convert the 8000 V a.c. output of a power station to 160 000 V for long-distance power
transmission
to convert the 160 000 V d.c. supply from a power line to 8000 V for local power transmission
to use a 12 V d.c. supply to operate a 240 V razor
to use a 240 V a.c. mains supply to operate a 12 V motor
36 What are cathode rays?

A
a beam of electrons
a beam of neutrons
a beam of protons
electromagnetic waves
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
17
37 A cathode-ray tube has an anode and an earthed cathode.
Which row shows the charge on the anode and the temperature of the cathode?
anode charge
cathode
temperature
negative
cool
negative
hot
positive
cool
positive
hot
38 Which row describes the properties of -particles?

ionizing
effect
radiation stopped
by aluminium?
large
no
large
yes
small
no
small
yes
39 A radioactive substance has a half-life of 2 weeks. At the beginning of an investigation the

substance emits 3000 -particles per minute.
How many -particles will it emit per minute after 6 weeks?
A
375
500
1500
40 The nuclide notation for radium-226 is 226

88 Ra .
How many electrons orbit the nucleus of a neutral atom of radium-226?
A
UCLES 2010
88
138
0625/11/M/J/10
226
18
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/11/M/J/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

0625/11
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*0588341704*

Soft clean eraser


IB10 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
The diagrams show an experiment to determine the volume of a stone.

without stone
with stone
10 cm3
9
10 cm3
9
7
6
5
7
6
5
3
2
1
3
2
1
stone
What is the volume of the stone?

A
2
3 cm3
4 cm3
7 cm3
11 cm3
Four athletes run twice around a track. The table shows their times at the end of each lap.
Which athlete runs the second lap the fastest?
athlete
time at end of first lap / s
time at end of second lap / s
22.99
47.04
23.04
47.00
23.16
47.18
23.39
47.24
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
3
3
The diagram shows the speed / time graph for an object moving at constant speed.
2
speed
m/s
1
0
0
3
time / s
What is the distance travelled by the object in the first 3 s?

A
4
1.5 m
2.0 m
3.0 m
6.0 m
A car travels along the route PQRST in 30 minutes.

S
5 km
10 km
5 km
10 km
R

A
5
10 km / hour
20 km / hour
30 km / hour
60 km / hour
Which list contains the name of a force?

A
acceleration, charge, temperature
density, resistance, speed
distance, frequency, mass
energy, power, weight
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
4
6
The reading on a spring balance with a holder and eight identical discs is 3.0 N.
Six discs are removed and the reading becomes 1.2 N.
spring
balance
N0
1
N0
1
holder
for discs
two
discs
eight
discs
What is the weight of one disc?

A
7
0.2 N
0.3 N
0.5 N
0.6 N
A student is trying to find the density of water and of a large, regularly shaped concrete block.
Which apparatus is needed to find the density of both the water and the concrete block?
balance, clock, measuring cylinder
balance, clock, ruler
balance, measuring cylinder, ruler
clock, measuring cylinder, ruler
A force acts on a moving rubber ball.

Which of these changes could not happen to the ball because of the force?
A
a change in direction
a change in mass
a change in shape
a change in speed
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
5
9
The extension / load graph for a spring is shown. The unloaded length of the spring is 15.0 cm.
3
extension / cm
0
0
5
load / N
When an object of unknown weight is hung on the spring, the length of the spring is 16.4 cm.
What is the weight of the object?
A
0.55 N
0.67 N
3.5 N
4.1 N
10 Which of these is designed to change electrical energy into kinetic energy?

A
a capacitor
a generator
a motor
a transformer
11 A car is driven on a long journey along a flat, horizontal road. The car stops several times on the
journey and its engine becomes hot.
Which type of energy does not change during the journey?
A
the chemical energy in the fuel tank
the gravitational energy of the car
the internal (thermal) energy of the engine
the kinetic energy of the car
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
6
12 What is a simple mercury barometer designed to measure?
A
the pressure beneath a liquid
the pressure of a gas supply
the pressure of car tyres
the pressure of the atmosphere
13 Liquid X has a density of 1010 kg / m3. Liquid Y has a density of 950 kg / m3.
The liquids are poured into tubes as shown.
Which tube has the greatest pressure on its base?
liquid X
liquid Y
liquid X
14 Some gas in a sealed plastic bag is cooled.

How do the gas molecules behave when this happens?
A
They move more quickly and become closer together.
They move more quickly and become further apart.
They move more slowly and become closer together.
They move more slowly and become further apart.
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
liquid Y
7
15 A block of ice cream is prevented from melting by wrapping it in newspaper soaked in water. The
water evaporates from the newspaper.
Which molecules escape from the water and what happens to the average speed of the water
molecules that remain in the newspaper?
escaping molecules
average speed of the

remaining water molecules
the more energetic ones
decreases
the more energetic ones
increases
the less energetic ones
decreases
the less energetic ones
increases
16 Which change is condensation?

A
solid
B
liquid
UCLES 2010
gas
D
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
8
17 A beaker containing ice and a thermometer is left in a warm room for 15 minutes.
No water is visible in the beaker until 5 minutes has passed. After 15 minutes some ice is still
visible.
ice
ice
water
start of
experiment
after
5 minutes
after
15 minutes
Which graph shows how the thermometer reading changes?
temperature
/ C
temperature
/ C
10
15
time / min
temperature
/ C
temperature
/ C
UCLES 2010
10
15
time / min
10
15
time / min
0625/11/O/N/10
10
15
time / min
9
18 A piece of wood has some iron nails pushed through it. One side of the wood is covered with heat
sensitive paper which turns from pink to blue when heated. The wood is heated as shown for a
few minutes and blue dots appear on the heat sensitive paper where it touches the nails.
wood
heat sensitive paper
iron
nails
heat
blue
dots
This experiment shows that, compared to wood, iron is a good

A
absorber of heat.
conductor of heat.
convector of heat.
emitter of heat.
19 An electric heater is placed inside a metal box which has one side open. The diagram shows four
possible positions for the box.
The heater is switched on for several minutes.
In which position does the box become the hottest?
A
UCLES 2010
heater
heater
box
box
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
10
20 Which group contains only transverse waves?
A
infra-red waves, light waves, sound waves
infra-red waves, light waves, ultra-violet waves
infra-red waves, ultra-violet waves, sound waves
light waves, sound waves, ultra-violet waves
21 Water waves in a tank pass over a thin plastic block as shown.

plastic block
tank
What happens to the waves as they reach the plastic block?

A
They are diffracted because they slow down.
They are diffracted because they speed up.
They are refracted because they slow down.
They are refracted because they speed up.
22 A girl writes the word LEFT on a piece of card.
LEFT
She looks at the image of this card, made by reflection by a plane mirror.
What does she see?
A
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
11
23 A scientist is trying to direct a ray of light through a glass block without any light leaving the top of
the block. However, some light does leave the top.
light leaving top
top of block
glass block
ray of
light
The scientist changes angle X and stops the ray of light leaving the top.
Which row in the table describes the change to angle X and the name of the effect produced?
change to angle X
name of effect produced
decrease
total internal reflection
decrease
total internal refraction
increase
increase
total internal refraction
24 The diagrams represent two different sound waves.

wave P
wave Q
displacement
displacement
time
time
How do the frequency and pitch of P compare with the frequency and pitch of Q?
frequency of P
pitch of P
greater than Q
higher than Q
greater than Q
same as Q
same as Q
higher than Q
same as Q
same as Q
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
12
25 A ship sends a pulse of sound vertically downwards to the sea bed. An echo is heard
0.4 seconds later.
If the speed of sound in the water is 1200 m / s, how deep is the water below the ship?
A
240 m
480 m
1500 m
3000 m
26 Which statement about a magnet is not correct?

A
It can attract another magnet.
It can attract an unmagnetised piece of iron.
It can repel another magnet.
It can repel an unmagnetised piece of iron.
27 A chain of steel nails and a chain of iron nails hang from a strong magnet. The chains are then
carefully removed from the magnet.
magnet
steel
iron
What happens to the chains?

A
Both chains fall apart.
Both chains stay together.
Only the chain of iron nails falls apart.
Only the chain of steel nails falls apart.
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
13
28 A potential difference (p.d.) across a resistor causes a current in it.
resistor
current
p.d.
The p.d. and the resistance of the resistor can both be changed.
Which row shows two changes that will both increase the current in the resistor?
change
change
decrease p.d.
decrease resistance
decrease p.d.
increase resistance
increase p.d.
decrease resistance
increase p.d.
increase resistance
29 The diagram shows a circuit containing two ammeters and three resistors.
ammeter
X
R1
R2
ammeter
Y
R3
Which of the ammeters will show the current in resistor R2?

A
ammeter X only
ammeter Y only
both ammeter X and ammeter Y
neither ammeter X nor ammeter Y
30 Which component can store energy and can be used in time-delay circuits?
A
a capacitor
a potentiometer
a resistor
a thermistor
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
14
31 A circuit contains two resistors connected in parallel with a battery.
R
P
Which of the following statements about the currents at P, Q and R is true?

A
The current at P is the greatest.
The current at Q is the greatest.
The current at R is the greatest.
The current is the same at points P, Q and R.
32 The potential divider shown is connected across a constant 12 V supply.
20
V1
12 V
V2
When R has a value of 20 , the voltmeter readings are equal.

How do these readings change when the value of R is reduced to 10 ?
reading on V1
reading on V2
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
15
33 A fuse is a safety device for use in an electrical appliance.
How does a fuse affect a circuit when the current in it becomes higher than the correct value for
the appliance?
A
It completely stops the current.
It reduces the current to the correct value for the appliance.
It sends the current to the outer case of the appliance.
It sends the excess current to the earth wire.
34 Some electrical equipment is connected to a 230 V supply. It is kept inside a metal case which is
not earthed. The case is fixed to a plastic support. A strand of wire has become loose and
touches the metal case as shown.
cable
metal case on plastic support
strand of wire
electrical
equipment
Which statement about this situation is correct?

A
An electric current is passing through the metal case.
A fuse in the live wire will blow.
Someone touching the case would receive an electric shock.
The metal case is at 0 V.
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
16
35 A coil is rotated steadily between the poles of a magnet. The coil is connected to an oscilloscope.
oscilloscope
contact
contact
Which graph shows the output voltage V against time t ?

A
V
t
V
t
36 A village has to be supplied with electricity from a power station that is a long way from the
village.
Which type of current should be used, and at which voltage?
type of current
voltage
alternating current
high voltage
alternating current
low voltage
direct current
high voltage
direct current
low voltage
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
17
37 An electric field is set up between two parallel plates.
Cathode rays are directed into this field, parallel to the plates.
+
cathode
rays
In which direction are the cathode rays deflected by the electric field?
A
downwards
upwards
into the page
out of the page
38 A radioactive element has a half-life of 70 s.

The number of emissions per second, N, of a sample of the element is measured at a certain
time.
What was the number of emissions per second 70 s earlier?
A
N/2
2N
39 S is a radioactive source emitting -particles, -particles and -rays. A detector is placed 5 cm

away from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
thin sheet of paper
S
detector
5 cm
Which radiations can be detected?

A
-particles and -particles only
-particles, -particles and -rays
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
[Turn over
18
40 In the atomic model, an atom consists of a central mass, orbited by much smaller particles.
central
mass
orbiting
particles
What is the name of the central mass and of the orbiting particles?
central mass
orbiting particles
neutron
-particles
neutron
electrons
nucleus
-particles
nucleus
electrons
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/11/O/N/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

0625/11
PHYSICS
May/June 2011
45 minutes
*3129497903*

Soft clean eraser


IB11 06_0625_11/4RP
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
mm
cm
10
20
30
What is the length of the feather?

A
2
19 mm
29 mm
19 cm
29 cm
An object moves initially with constant speed and then with constant acceleration.
Which graph shows this motion?
speed
speed
0
0
0
0
time
speed
0
0
UCLES 2011
time
speed
0
time
0625/11/M/J/11
time
3
3
A tennis player hits a ball hard and 0.40 s later hears the echo from a wall.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.

How far away is the player from the wall?
A
4
66 m
132 m
264 m
825 m
Which statement about mass and weight is correct?

A
Mass and weight are both forces.
Neither mass nor weight is a force.
Only mass is a force.
Only weight is a force.
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
4
5
The diagram shows a balance being used to find the weight of a baby. The weight of the basket
can be ignored.
At equilibrium, the pivot is nearer to the weight W than to the baby.
centre of mass
of beam
pivot
W
baby
basket
What is the weight of the baby?
less than W
more than W
impossible to tell
A cube of side 2.0 cm is placed on a balance.
2.0 cm
balance
7.2 g
What is the density of the cube?

A
0.90 g / cm3
UCLES 2011
1.2 g / cm3
1.8 g / cm3
0625/11/M/J/11
3.6 g / cm3
5
7
Objects with different masses are hung on a spring. The diagram shows how much the spring
stretches.
10 cm
20 cm
30 cm
100 g
The extension of the spring is directly proportional to the mass hung on it.
What is the mass of object M?
A
8
110 g
150 g
300 g
Which row gives an example of the stated form of energy?

form of energy
200 g
example
gravitational
internal
the energy due to the flow of cathode rays in a cathode-ray tube
kinetic
the energy due to the position of a swimmer standing on a

high diving board
strain
the energy due to the compression of springs in a car seat
the energy due to the movement of a train along a level track
Which energy resource is used to generate electricity by first boiling water?

A
hydroelectric
nuclear fission
tides
waves
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
6
10 Two farmers use an electrically powered elevator to lift bales of hay. All the bales of hay have the
same mass.
bale of hay
As sunset approaches, they increase the speed of the motor so that more bales are lifted up in a
given time.
How does this affect the work done in lifting each bale and the useful output power of the motor?
work done in
lifting each bale
useful output power

of the motor
increases
decreases
increases
increases
no change
decreases
no change
increases
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
7
11 A brick with flat, rectangular sides rests on a table.
brick
table
The brick is now turned so that it rests on the table on its smallest face.
How has this affected the force and the pressure exerted by the brick on the table?
force
pressure
increased
increased
increased
unchanged
unchanged
increased
unchanged
unchanged
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
8
12 The diagram shows two mercury barometers.
Barometer 1 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 1.
Barometer 2 is measuring atmospheric pressure on day 2.
mercury
point Y
point X
barometer 1, day 1
barometer 2, day 2
Which statement is true?

A
The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is less than the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
The atmospheric pressure on day 1 is the same as the atmospheric pressure on day 2.
The pressure at point X is less than the pressure at point Y.
The pressure at point X is the same as the pressure at point Y.
13 A sealed gas cylinder is left outside on a hot, sunny day.

What happens to the average speed of the molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the
cylinder as the temperature rises?
average speed of
the gas molecules
gas pressure
falls
falls
falls
rises
rises
falls
rises
rises
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
9
14 When a liquid evaporates, some molecules escape from it and its temperature changes.
From where do the molecules escape and what is the effect on the temperature of the liquid?
molecules escape from
temperature of liquid
all parts of the liquid
decreases
all parts of the liquid
increases
only the liquid surface
decreases
only the liquid surface
increases
15 The diagram shows a thermometer calibrated in degrees Celsius.

C
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
10
What are the values of the lower fixed point and of the upper fixed point on the Celsius scale?
lower fixed
point / C
upper fixed
point / C
10
110
20
100
20
100
16 An ice cube at a temperature of 0 C is put into a drink at a temperature of 10 C.

After a short time, some of the ice has melted and the drink has cooled to a temperature of 8 C.
What is the temperature of the remaining ice?
A
0 C
UCLES 2011
2 C
4 C
0625/11/M/J/11
8 C
[Turn over
10
17 An experiment is set up to find out which metal is the best conductor of heat.
Balls are stuck with wax to rods made from different metals, as shown in diagram 1.
The rods are heated at one end. Some of the balls fall off, leaving some as shown in diagram 2.
Which labelled metal is the best conductor of heat?
diagram 1
diagram 2
A
heated end
heated end
before heating
after heating
18 Food is kept in a cool-box which uses two ice packs to keep it cool.
Where should the ice packs be placed to keep all the food as cool as possible?
A
both at the bottom of the box
both at the top of the box
one at the front and one at the back of the box
one on the left and one on the right of the box
19 Water waves can be used to show reflection, refraction and diffraction.

For each of these, which row shows whether or not the speed of the water waves changes?
reflection
refraction
diffraction
no
no
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
11
20 A vertical stick is dipped up and down in water at P.
In two seconds, three wave crests are produced on the surface of the water.
wave
crests

A
Distance X is the amplitude of the waves.
Distance Y is the wavelength of the waves.
Each circle represents a wavefront.
The frequency of the waves is 3 Hz.
21 The diagram shows the dispersion of white light by a glass prism.
white light
red light
glass prism
violet light
Why does dispersion occur when white light enters the glass?
A
The frequency of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
The frequency of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
The speed of red light decreases more than that of violet light.
The speed of violet light decreases more than that of red light.
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
12
22 A thin converging lens is used to produce, on a screen, a focused image of a candle.
screen
image
lens
candle
Various focused images are produced on the screen by moving the lens and the screen
backwards and forwards.
Which statement is always correct?
A
The image is at the principal focus (focal point) of the lens.
The image is bigger than the object.
The image is closer to the lens than the object is.
The image is inverted.
23 Sound travels by wave motion.

Which property of waves causes echoes?
A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
24 A student listens to a machine that makes sounds of different frequencies. He can only hear one
of the sounds.
Which frequency of sound is the student able to hear?
A
2 Hz
UCLES 2011
10 Hz
2 kHz
0625/11/M/J/11
30 kHz
13
25 Which test could be used to find which end of a magnet is the north pole?
A
putting it near a compass needle
putting it near a ferrous metal
putting it near a non-ferrous metal
putting it near a steel spoon
26 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
experiment 1
magnet
experiment 2
magnet
iron bar
iron bar
Which magnetic poles are induced at X and at Y?

pole induced at X
pole induced at Y
27 An ammeter and an 18 resistor are connected in series with a battery. The reading on the
ammeter is 0.50 A. The resistance of the battery and the ammeter can be ignored.
A
18
What is the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?

A
9.0 N
UCLES 2011
9.0 V
36 N
0625/11/M/J/11
36 V
[Turn over
14
A
29 Which circuit includes a capacitor and what does the capacitor do in this circuit?
circuit
what the
capacitor does
potential divider
stores current
potential divider
stores energy
time delay
stores current
time delay
stores energy
30 A student sets up the circuit shown. The switch is open (off).
Which lamps are on and which lamps are off?

lamp X
lamp Y
lamp Z
off
off
off
on
off
off
on
off
on
on
on
on
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
15
31 The diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the
thermistor.
The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.
resistance
temperature
As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the
reading on the voltmeter?
resistance
voltmeter reading
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
16
32 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a
fault.
X
electrical supply
Which components are suitable to use at X?

A
a circuit-breaker, a fuse or a switch
only a circuit-breaker or a fuse
only a circuit-breaker or a switch
only a fuse
33 Which graph shows how the output voltage varies with time for a simple a.c. generator?
voltage
voltage
0
time
time
voltage
voltage
0
time
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
time
17
34 A magnet is suspended from a spring so that it can move freely inside a coil. The coil is
connected to a sensitive centre-zero ammeter.
spring
moving magnet
N
centre-zero ammeter
stationary coil
What does the ammeter show when the magnet repeatedly moves slowly up and down?
A
a reading constantly changing from left to right and right to left
a steady reading to the left
a steady reading to the right
a steady reading of zero
35 The diagram shows a simple step-down transformer used to decrease a voltage.

Which part is the primary coil?
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
[Turn over
18
power
supply
vacuum
screen
X
What are the correct labels for X and for Y?

X
negative anode
positive cathode
negative cathode
positive anode
positive anode
negative cathode
positive cathode
negative anode
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel metal plates connected to a high-voltage
d.c. power supply.
Which path does the beam follow?
D
cathode
rays
A
38 Which row shows the relative ionising effects and penetrating abilities of -particles and
-particles?
ionising effect
penetrating ability
greater than
greater than
greater than
less than
less than
greater than
less than
less than
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
19
39 A powder contains 400 mg of a radioactive material that emits -particles.
The half-life of the material is 5 days.
What mass of that material remains after 10 days?
A
0 mg
40 mg
100 mg
200 mg
40 An atom of the element lithium has a nucleon number of 7 and a proton number of 3.
Which diagram represents a neutral atom of lithium?
n
+
+
+ +
n
key
n = a neutron
+ = a proton
= an electron
(not to scale)
n
+n+
n n
+
n
+n+
n n
+
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/11/M/J/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

0625/11
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*1240126518*

Soft clean eraser


IB11 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
A ruler is used to measure the length of an object.

object
10
cm
What is the length of the object?

A
2
3.0 cm
4.0 cm
5.0 cm
6.5 cm
The graph shows how the speed of a car changes with time.
speed
time
Between which two times is the car stationary?

A
3
U and V
V and W
W and X
X and Y
90 m
A child is standing on the platform of a station.
A train travelling at 30 m / s takes 3.0 s to pass the child.

A
10 m
UCLES 2011
27 m
30 m
0625/11/O/N/11
3
4
The weight of an object is to be found using the balance shown in the diagram.
object
The object is put in the left-hand pan and various standard weights are put in the right-hand pan.
These are the results.
weights in the right-hand pan
effect
0.1 N, 0.1 N, 0.05 N, 0.02 N
balance tips down slightly on the left-hand side
0.2 N, 0.1 N, 0.01 N
balance tips down slightly on the right-hand side
What is the best estimate of the weight of the object?

A
0.27 N
UCLES 2011
0.29 N
0.31 N
0625/11/O/N/11
0.58 N
[Turn over
4
5
The diagrams show four blocks with the same mass.

Which block is made from the least dense material?
8 cm
3 cm
1 cm
3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
5 cm
2 cm
4 cm
3 cm
2 cm
2 cm
A student is told to measure the density of a liquid and also of a large cube of metal.
Which pieces of equipment are sufficient to be able to take the measurements needed?
A
balance, measuring cylinder and ruler
measuring cylinder and ruler
measuring cylinder, ruler and thermometer
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
5
7
A uniform rod rests on a pivot at its centre. The rod is not attached to the pivot. Forces are then
applied to the rod in four different ways, as shown. The weight of the rod can be ignored.
Which diagram shows the rod in equilibrium?
100 N
100 N
100 N
100 N
C
D
100 N
100 N
8
100 N
Which combination of forces produces a resultant force acting towards the right?
A
B
5N
10 N
5N
2N
100 N
100 N
4N
6N
3N
4N
10 N
5N
7N
3N
A student adds weights to an elastic cord. He measures the length of the cord for each weight.
He then plots a graph from the results, as shown.
0
0
weight / N
Which length has he plotted on the vertical axis?

A
measured length
original length
(measured length original length)
(measured length + original length)
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
6
10 A force F moves a load from the bottom of a slope to the top.
r
F
loa
The work done by the force depends on the size of the force, and on a distance.
What is this distance?
A
p+q
11 A water manometer is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply.
gas
supply
10 cm
initial level
of water
10 cm
water
When it is attached to the gas supply, the water falls on the left side and rises on the right side.
The difference in the levels of water on the two sides is now 20 cm.
What is the pressure of the gas supply?
A
the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water
the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water
the pressure due to 10 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
the pressure due to 20 cm depth of water plus atmospheric pressure
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
7
12 A chair is placed on protective cups to prevent damage to the carpet underneath it.
chair
carpet
protective cups
How do the cups change the area of contact with the carpet and the pressure on it?
area of contact
pressure
decreased
decreased
decreased
increased
increased
decreased
increased
increased
13 Evaporation occurs when molecules escape from a liquid surface into the air above it. During this
process the temperature of the liquid falls.
Why does the temperature of the liquid fall?
A
The molecules in the vapour expand because the pressure is less.
The molecules left in the liquid have more space to move around.
The molecules move more slowly when they escape into the air.
The molecules with the highest energies escape into the air.
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
8
14 The pressure of a fixed mass of gas in a cylinder is measured. The volume of the gas in the
cylinder is then slowly decreased. The temperature of the gas does not change.
Which graph could show the change of pressure of the gas during this process?
pressure
pressure
0
0
time
time
pressure
pressure
0
0
time
time
15 To mark the lower fixed point of a Celsius scale on a thermometer, the thermometer should be
placed in
A
pure alcohol.
pure distilled water.
pure melting ice.
pure mercury.
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
9
16 The diagram shows an electric heater being used to heat a beaker of water and an identical
beaker of oil for several minutes.
oil
water
electric heater
The temperature of the water and the temperature of the oil increase constantly. The rise in
temperature of the oil is much greater than that of the water.
Why is this?
A
The oil has a higher boiling point than water.
The oil has a higher thermal capacity than water.
The oil has a lower boiling point than water.
The oil has a lower thermal capacity than water.
17 The diagram shows a cooling unit in a refrigerator.
cooling
unit
Why is the cooling unit placed at the top?

A
Cold air falls and warm air is displaced upwards.
Cold air is a bad conductor so heat is not conducted into the refrigerator.
Cold air is a good conductor so heat is conducted out of the refrigerator.
Cold air remains at the top and so prevents convection.
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
10
18 Two identical copper cans are filled with boiling water.
thermometer
hot water
copper can
wool
uninsulated can
insulated can
One can is insulated with wool. The temperature of the water in each can is taken every minute
for several minutes. Graphs of the results are plotted.
Which graph shows the results obtained?
temperature
temperature
insulated
insulated
uninsulated
uninsulated
time
time
D
insulated
temperature
temperature
uninsulated
uninsulated
insulated
time
time
19 Which of these waves is longitudinal?

A
infra-red
radio
sound
water
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
11
radio
waves
house
hill
A
diffracted.
radiated.
reflected.
refracted.
21 The diagram shows a ray of light travelling from X. Angle P is less than the critical angle.
In which direction does the ray continue?
X
P
glass
air
B
D
22 The diagram shows the image of a clock in a plane mirror.
What time is shown?

A
02:25
UCLES 2011
02:35
09:25
0625/11/O/N/11
09:35
[Turn over
12
23 A student wishes to measure the speed of sound in air. She plans to measure the time between
making a sound and hearing the echo from a cliff.
cliff
student
She will use the equation: speed = distance .

time
Which type of sound should she make and which distance should she use in her calculation?
type of sound
distance to use
continuous sound
distance to cliff
2
continuous sound
distance to cliff 2
short, sharp sound
distance to cliff
2
short, sharp sound
distance to cliff 2
24 The diagrams show the wave shapes of two different sounds. The scales are the same in each
diagram.
time
sound 1
sound 2
How does sound 2 compare with sound 1?

A
Sound 2 is louder than sound 1.
Sound 2 is quieter than sound 1.
Sound 2 has a higher pitch than sound 1.
Sound 2 has a lower pitch than sound 1.
UCLES 2011
time
0625/11/O/N/11
13
25 A horseshoe magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar.
iron bar
Which row in the table shows the magnetic poles induced in the iron bar and the direction of the
forces between the bar and the magnet?
magnetic poles induced
in iron bar
force between iron bar

and magnet
attraction
repulsion
attraction
repulsion
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
14
26 Four nails, A, B, C and D, are tested to find which makes the strongest permanent magnet.
nail
N
bar magnet
paper clips
One of the nails is placed against a bar magnet and the number of paper clips which the nail can
support is recorded. The bar magnet is then removed and the number of paper clips remaining
attached to the nail is recorded. Each nail is tested in turn.
Which nail becomes the strongest permanent magnet?
nail
number of paper clips attached to the nail

bar magnet present
bar magnet removed
27 Which symbols are used for the units of current and of resistance?
unit of current
unit of resistance
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
15
28 The diagram shows a lamp in a circuit.
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
A
adding another resistor in parallel with the one in the circuit
adding another resistor in series with the one in the circuit
decreasing the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery in the circuit
moving the lamp to point P in the circuit
29 The diagram shows an electric circuit containing three meters, X, Y and Z, all connected
correctly.
What are meters X, Y and Z?

X
ammeter
ammeter
ammeter
ammeter
voltmeter
ammeter
voltmeter
ammeter
voltmeter
voltmeter
voltmeter
voltmeter
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
16
30 The diagrams show four arrangements of resistors.
Which arrangement has the smallest total resistance?
A
4
4
4
4
31 The diagram shows a potential divider circuit with two identical lamps L1 and L2.
X
K
L1
L2
The contact K is halfway between X and Y and the lamps are equally bright.
What will happen to the brightness of the lamps when contact K is moved a short distance
towards X?
lamp L1
lamp L2
brighter
brighter
brighter
dimmer
dimmer
brighter
dimmer
dimmer
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
17
32 A fuse and a relay each use an effect of an electric current.
Which effect of an electric current is used by a fuse and which effect is used by a relay?
effect used by
a fuse
effect used by
a relay
heating effect
heating effect
heating effect
magnetic effect
magnetic effect
heating effect
magnetic effect
magnetic effect
33 Which diagram represents the direction of the magnetic field around a straight wire carrying a
current out of the page?
B
current out
of page
D
current out
of page
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
18
34 The diagram shows an a.c. generator.
rotation
of coil
coil
output voltage
With the coil in the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V.
When does the output voltage become 10 V?
A
when the coil has turned 90
35 The diagram shows a simple transformer.
core
input
output
From which material should the core be made?

A
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
19
36 Cathode rays are emitted in a vacuum tube. They consist of particles that are found in atoms.
What is the name of the particles and how are the cathode rays produced?
name of particles
how the cathode rays

are produced
electrons
electromagnetic induction
electrons
thermionic emission
protons
electromagnetic induction
protons
thermionic emission
37 Two parallel metal plates in a vacuum are connected to the terminals of a high-voltage power
supply. A beam of cathode rays is passed into the space between the two plates, as shown.
In which direction does the beam of cathode rays deflect?
high-voltage
power supply
+
metal plate
B
A
C
cathode rays
metal plate
38 A scientist needs to use a source of -rays as safely as possible.

Which action will not reduce the amount of radiation that reaches the scientist?
A
keeping the distance between the source and the scientist as large as possible
keeping the temperature of the source as low as possible
keeping the time for which the scientist uses the source as small as possible
placing a lead screen between the scientist and the source
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
[Turn over
20
39 The graph shows the activity of a radioactive source over a period of time.
2000
activity
/ counts per
second
1500
1000
500
0
0
3
time / hour

A
1
2
hour
1 hour
40 A nuclide of substance X has the symbol
1 1 hours
2
26
12 X
3 hours
How many electrons are there in a neutral atom of substance X?

A
12
14
26
38
UCLES 2011
0625/11/O/N/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

0625/11
PHYSICS
May/June 2012
45 minutes
*9772978782*

Soft clean eraser


IB12 06_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
A cylindrical can is rolled along the ruler shown in the diagram.

starting position
final position
can rolled
mark on
can
0 cm
10
15
20
25
30 cm
The can rolls over twice.

What is the circumference (distance all round) of the can?
A
2
13 cm
14 cm
26 cm
28 cm
A car is moving downhill along a road at a constant speed.

Which graph is the speed / time graph for the car?
A
speed
speed
0
0
0
0
time
time
speed
speed
0
0
0
0
time
time
In a race, a car travels 60 times around a 3.6 km track. This takes 2.4 hours.
A
1.5 km / h
UCLES 2012
90 km / h
144 km / h
0625/11/M/J/12
216 km / h
3
4
Which quantity is measured in newtons?

A
density
energy
pressure
weight
A geologist places a small rock on the left-hand pan of a balance. The two pans are level as
shown when masses with a total weight of 23 N are placed on the right-hand pan.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N.
masses
rock
0
What is the mass of the small rock?

A
6
0.023 kg
2.3 kg
23 kg
230 kg
A stone has a volume of 0.50 cm3 and a mass of 2.0 g.

What is the density of the stone?
A
0.25 g / cm3
1.5 g / cm3
2.5 g / cm3
4.0 g / cm3
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
4
7
Passengers are not allowed to stand on the upper deck of double-decker buses.
upper deck
lower deck
Why is this?
They would cause the bus to become less stable.
They would cause the bus to slow down.
They would increase the kinetic energy of the bus.
They would lower the centre of mass of the bus.
The diagram shows a handle with three forces, each 100 N, applied to it. The handle is free to
move.
100 N
100 N
100 N
handle
pivot
What is the effect of the forces on the handle?
The handle will move downwards.
The handle will not move.
The handle will turn anticlockwise (to the left).
The handle will turn clockwise (to the right).
In which pair of energy sources are both sources renewable?

A
oil and coal
oil and tidal
tidal and geothermal
tidal and nuclear fission
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
5
10 An object on a thread is swinging between X and Z, as shown in the diagram. It is momentarily at
rest at X and at Z.
thread
Z
Y
An incomplete word equation about the energy of the object is shown below.
gravitational potential energy = kinetic energy + energy + energy losses
at X
at Y
at Y
Which form of energy is needed to complete the word equation?
A
chemical
gravitational potential
internal
strain
11 Which statement is explained by reference to pressure?

A
Objects with greater mass have greater weight.
One kilogram of water occupies more volume than one kilogram of lead.
Spikes on running-shoes sink into the ground.
Water cooled to a low enough temperature turns to ice.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
6
12 The diagram shows a mercury manometer used to measure the pressure of gas in a container.
Atmospheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
gas
mercury
20 cm
12 cm
What is the pressure of the gas?

A
56 cm of mercury
68 cm of mercury
84 cm of mercury
96 cm of mercury
13 Brownian motion is observed when looking at smoke particles in air using a microscope.
What causes the smoke particles to move at random?
A
Smoke particles are hit by air molecules.
Smoke particles are moved by convection currents in the air.
Smoke particles have different weights and fall at different speeds.
Smoke particles hit the walls of the container.
14 The molecules of a substance become more closely packed and move more quickly.
What is happening to the substance?
A
A gas is being heated and compressed.
A gas is being heated and is expanding.
A liquid is boiling.
A liquid is evaporating at room temperature.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
7
15 Which pair contains only physical quantities that vary with temperature and so could be used in
making a thermometer?
A
activity of a radioactive source, volume of a gas
mass of a liquid, volume of a liquid
activity of a radioactive source, mass of a solid
volume of a gas, volume of a liquid
16 A heater supplies 80 J of energy to a block of metal. The temperature of the block rises by 20 C.
What happens to the block of metal when its temperature falls by 10 C?
A
Its internal energy decreases by 40 J.
Its internal energy decreases by 160 J.
Its internal energy increases by 40 J.
Its internal energy increases by 160 J.
of the washer.
steel
washer
steel rod
How can the engineer fit the washer on to the rod?

A
Cool the washer and put it over the rod.
Cool the washer and rod to the same temperature and push them together.
Heat the rod and then place it in the hole.
Heat the washer and then place it over the rod.
18 Why does convection take place in a liquid when it is heated?

A
Liquids expand when they are heated.
Liquids start to bubble when they get close to boiling point.
Molecules in the liquid expand when they are heated.
Molecules near to the surface of the liquid escape into the air.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
8
is put on top, as shown.
lid
small spacer
small air gap
hot water
bench

A
20 What is the unit of wavelength?

A
hertz
metre
metre per second
second
21 Which row correctly describes light waves and radio waves?

light waves
radio waves
longitudinal
longitudinal
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
longitudinal
transverse
transverse
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
9
22 The diagram shows water waves passing through a gap in a harbour wall. The waves curve
round the wall and reach a small boat in the harbour.
harbour wall
waves
harbour
gap
boat
What is the name of this curving effect, and how can the gap be changed so that the waves are
less likely to reach the boat?
name of effect
change to the gap
diffraction
make the gap slightly bigger
diffraction
make the gap slightly smaller
refraction
make the gap slightly bigger
refraction
make the gap slightly smaller
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
10
23 The image formed by a plane mirror is upright.
position
of image
object
eye
What are the other characteristics of the image?

laterally inverted
(left to right)
magnified
(larger than the object)
virtual
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
yes
no
yes
yes
yes
no
24 A student draws three rays of light from point P through a converging lens.
Each point labelled F is a principal focus of the lens.
ray X
ray Z
Which of the rays are drawn correctly?

A
ray Y only
ray Z only
ray X and ray Y
ray X and ray Z
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
ray Y
11
25 A girl stands at a distance from a large building. She claps her hands and a short time later hears
an echo.
Why is an echo produced when the sound waves hit the building?
A
The sound waves are absorbed.
The sound waves are diffracted.
The sound waves are reflected.
The sound waves are refracted.
26 The diagrams represent the waves produced by four sources of sound. The scales are the same
for all the diagrams.
Which sound has the highest frequency?
time
time
time
time
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
12
27 Which statement describes a property of a magnet?
A
It attracts ferrous materials.
It could have only one pole (north or south).
It points in a random direction when suspended.
It repels non-ferrous materials.
28 Which procedure may be used to demagnetise a steel bar?

A
cooling it in a freezer
earthing it with a copper wire
placing it in a solenoid carrying a large direct current (d.c.)
striking it repeatedly with a hammer
29 In which unit is potential difference measured?

A
ampere
ohm
volt
watt
30 The circuit shown in the diagram contains an unknown component X, hidden in a box.
The voltage-current graph for X is as shown.
voltage
A
X
0
0
What is the component X?

A
a capacitor
a closed switch
an open switch
a resistor of constant resistance
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
current
13
31 Which circuit contains a fuse?
A
32 A thermistor is used in a circuit to control a piece of equipment automatically.

What might this circuit be used for?
A
lighting an electric lamp as it becomes darker
ringing an alarm bell if a locked door is opened
switching on a water heater at a pre-determined time
turning on an air conditioner when the temperature rises
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
14
33 A student connects a variable potential divider (potentiometer) circuit.
R
V
T
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A
It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
It remains at 0 V.
It remains at 12 V.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
15
34 A circuit-breaker is designed to protect a circuit which usually carries a current of 2 A.
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
160
time taken
to break the
circuit / s
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0
10
12
14
16
18
20
current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current 18 A?
when the current is 2 A
when the current is 18 A
the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
the circuit does not break
35 The diagram shows a coil connected to a battery and a switch. Two unmagnetised iron bars hang
freely near opposite ends of the coil.
coil
iron bar
iron bar
What happens to the iron bars when the switch is closed?

A
Both X and Y move away from the coil.
Both X and Y move towards the coil.
X moves towards the coil, Y moves away from the coil.
Y moves towards the coil, X moves away from the coil.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
[Turn over
16
36 A wire passes between the poles of a horseshoe magnet. There is a current in the wire in the
direction shown, and this causes a force to act on the wire.
magnet
current
N
S
wire
force
Three other arrangements, P, Q and R, of the wire and magnet are set up as shown.
P
magnet turned around
current direction reversed
current direction reversed

and magnet turned around
Which arrangement or arrangements will cause a force in the same direction as the original
arrangement?
A
P, Q and R
P and Q only
P only
37 The diagram shows a device to produce cathode rays.

evacuated glass container
cathode
Which part of the device is heated and why?

part heated
reason
anode
to emit electrons
anode
to emit protons
cathode
to emit electrons
cathode
to emit protons
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
anode
R only
17
38 A radioactive nucleus emits a -particle.
-particle
nucleus
What happens to the proton number (atomic number) of the nucleus?

A
It stays the same.
It increases by 1.
It decreases by 2.
It decreases by 4.
39 The diagram shows the paths of three different types of radiation, X, Y and Z.
X
Y
Z
2 mm of
plastic
10 mm of
aluminium
50 mm
of lead
Which row in the table correctly identifies X, Y and Z?

X
-particles
-particles
-rays
-particles
-particles
-rays
-particles
-rays
-particles
-rays
-particles
-particles
40 Which diagram could represent the structure of a neutral atom?

A
key
neutron
++
++
++
+
+ proton
electron
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
18
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/11/M/J/12
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

0625/11
PHYSICS
45 minutes
*8913251826*

Soft clean eraser


IB12 11_0625_11/3RP
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
A pendulum is set in motion and timed. The time measured for 20 complete swings is 30 s.
What is the time for one complete swing of the pendulum?
A
0.67 s
0.75 s
1.5 s
3.0 s
Two stones of different weight fall at the same time from a table. Air resistance may be ignored.
What will happen and why?
what will happen
why
acceleration of free fall is constant
they fall at constant speed
acceleration increases with weight
speed increases with weight
The speed-time graph shown is for a bus travelling between stops.

Where on the graph is the acceleration of the bus greatest?
C
speed
B
D
time
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
3
4
A large bag of feathers and a steel block balance each other on some scales.
bag of
feathers
steel block
What does this show about the masses and the weights of the bag of feathers and the steel
block?
It shows that the masses are equal and the weights are equal.
It shows that the masses are equal, but the weights might be different.
It shows that the masses might be different and the weights might be different.
It shows that the weights are equal, but the masses might be different.
A parachutist inside an aeroplane has a mass of 70 kg.
What is his mass after he has jumped from the aeroplane?

A
0 kg
between 0 kg and 70 kg
70 kg
greater than 70 kg
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
4
6
A liquid has a density of 0.80 g / cm3.

Which could be the volume and mass of this liquid?
volume / cm3
mass / g
2.0
16
8.0
10
10
8.0
16
2.0
The diagram shows sections of four objects of equal mass. The position of the centre of mass of
each object has been marked with a cross.
A
A see-saw is made by resting a long plank of wood with its centre of mass on a barrel.
A boy sits on one side of the barrel and a girl sits on the other side so that the see-saw is
balanced.
x
boy
girl
boys weight
girls weight
Which statement must be true?

A
boys weight = girls weight
distance x = distance y
total downward force = total moment about the barrel
resultant force and resultant moment are both zero
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
5
9
A power station uses nuclear fission to obtain energy.

In this process, nuclear energy is first changed into
A
chemical energy.
electrical energy.
gravitational energy.
thermal (heat) energy.
10 A person lifts boxes of equal weight on to a platform.
boxes
platform
Which quantity will not affect the work done by the person?
A
the height of the platform above the ground
the number of boxes lifted
the time taken to lift the boxes
the weight of the boxes
11 A skier walks from the bottom of a ski slope to the top and gains 10 000 J of gravitational potential
energy.
She skis down the slope. At the bottom of the slope, her kinetic energy is 2000 J.
How much energy was converted into thermal energy and sound energy as the skier moved
down the slope?
A
2000 J
UCLES 2012
8000 J
10 000 J
0625/11/O/N/12
12 000 J
[Turn over
6
25 cm
mercury
75 cm
5 cm
Which distance is used to calculate the pressure of the atmosphere?

A
25 cm
75 cm
80 cm
100 cm
13 A heavy table has six legs. The area of cross-section of each leg is X.
The legs of the table make marks in a carpet. These marks become deeper with increased
pressure.
What would reduce the depth of the marks for a table of a fixed weight?
A
using three legs, each of an area smaller than X
using four legs, each of an area the same as X
using six legs, each of an area smaller than X
using eight legs, each of an area the same as X
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
7
14 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
Looking through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random, jerky
manner.
eye
microscope
light
pollen grains
in water
What are the moving specks of light?
A
pollen grains being hit by other pollen grains
pollen grains being hit by water molecules
water molecules being hit by other water molecules
water molecules being hit by pollen grains
15 A swimmer feels cold after leaving warm water on a warm, windy day.
Why does she feel cold even though the air is warm?
A
The less energetic water molecules on her skin escape quickly.
The more energetic water molecules on her skin do not escape quickly.
The water on her skin does not evaporate quickly enough to keep her warm.
The water on her skin evaporates quickly and cools her skin.
16 Which physical property is used to measure temperature in a liquid-in-glass thermometer?

A
the length of the thermometer
the thickness of the glass bulb
the volume of the glass bulb
the volume of the liquid
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
8
17 The graph shows the temperature of a substance as it is heated steadily.
In which part of the graph is the substance boiling?
D
temperature
C
B
A
time
18 A night storage heater contains a large block of material that is heated electrically during the
night. During the day the block cools down, releasing thermal energy into the room.
Which thermal capacity and which night-time temperature increase will cause the most energy to
be stored by the block?
thermal capacity
of block
night-time
temperature increase
large
large
large
small
small
large
small
small
19 After a sheep has its wool cut off, it is harder for it to stay warm when the air temperature falls.
How does the wool help the sheep to stay warm?
A
Air can circulate between the wool fibres and heat up the skin by convection.
Air trapped by the wool fibres reduces heat losses from the skin by convection.
The wool fibres are curly so it takes longer for heat to be conducted away from the skin.
The wool fibres conduct heat to the skin from the air outside.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
9
20 A boy sits near a campfire. He pokes the fire with an iron bar. His hand becomes hot.
iron bar
In which ways does thermal energy (heat) from the fire reach his hand?
A
conduction and convection only
conduction and radiation only
convection and radiation only
21 The diagram shows plane waves reflected by a plane surface.

Which line represents a wavefront?
C
A
D
22 A swimmer is sitting on a rock at the sea shore looking at passing waves. He notices that five
complete wavelengths pass him in 20 s.
What is the frequency of this wave?
A
0.25 Hz
UCLES 2012
4.0 Hz
15 Hz
0625/11/O/N/12
100 Hz
[Turn over
10
23 A thin converging lens forms an image.
object
image
F
What is the nature of this image and can it be formed on a screen?

nature of image
can be formed
on a screen?
not real
no
not real
yes
real
no
real
yes
24 A piece of paper has PAL written on it.

A student holds the paper in front of a plane mirror.
back of
mirror
PAL
What does the student see?

B
PAL
LAP
UCLES 2012
PAL
0625/11/O/N/12
PAL
11
25 A girl notices that when she shouts into a cave she hears an echo.
Which wave property causes the echo?
A
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
26 In a test, a car horn is found to be too loud and the pitch of the note is too high.
What information does this give about the amplitude and the frequency of the sound wave
produced?
amplitude
frequency
too large
too large
too large
too small
too small
too large
too small
too small
27 Two bars of soft iron are placed near a bar magnet.

bar magnet
soft iron
soft iron
P
Which row states and explains the behaviour of poles P and Q of the soft iron bars?
P and Q
reason
attract
P and Q are like poles
attract
P and Q are unlike poles
repel
P and Q are like poles
repel
P and Q are unlike poles
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
12
28 Some electrical devices require a magnet which may be switched on and off many times in a
second.
Which type of magnet may be used?
A
an electromagnet only
a permanent magnet only
either a permanent magnet or an electromagnet
neither a permanent magnet nor an electromagnet
29 Which of these is an electric current?

A
a beam of atoms
a beam of electrons
a beam of molecules
a beam of neutrons
30 The diagram shows a circuit used to find the resistance of lamp L.

Blocks P, Q and R represent the different components used.
12 V
R
L
Which is a correct possible choice of components to use for P, Q and R?

P
ammeter
variable resistor
voltmeter
variable resistor
voltmeter
ammeter
voltmeter
ammeter
variable resistor
voltmeter
variable resistor
ammeter
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
13
31 A student connects the circuit shown.
1
2
4
Which switches must be closed for the bell to ring without lighting the lamp?
A
1 and 2 only
1 and 3 only
1, 3 and 4 only
2, 3 and 4 only
32 Which row shows a use of a capacitor and a use of a relay?

use of a capacitor
use of a relay
switching circuit
voltage transformation
time-delay circuit
switching circuit
switching circuit
time-delay circuit
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
14
33 The diagram shows two voltmeters, P and Q, connected to a potential divider.
voltmeter P
voltmeter Q
The sliding connection at point X is moved towards the top of the diagram.
What happens to the reading on P and to the reading on Q?
reading on P
reading on Q
decreases
decreases
decreases
increases
increases
decreases
increases
increases
34 An electric oven is connected to the mains supply using insulated copper wires. The wires
become very warm.
What can be done to prevent so much heat being produced in the connecting wires?
A
Use thicker copper wires.
Use thinner copper wires.
Use thicker insulation.
Use thinner insulation.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
15
35 Which graph shows how the voltage of a simple a.c. generator varies with time?
A
voltage
voltage
0
0
0
0
time
voltage
voltage
0
0
UCLES 2012
time
0
0
time
0625/11/O/N/12
time
[Turn over
16
36 The diagram shows a wire in the magnetic field between two poles of a magnet.
magnet
wire
The current in the wire repeatedly changes between a constant value in one direction and a
constant value in the opposite direction. This is shown on the graph.
current
0
0
time
What is the effect on the wire?

A
The force on the wire alternates between one direction and the opposite direction.
The force on the wire is constant in size and direction.
There is no force acting on the wire at any time.
There is only a force on the wire when the current reverses.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
17
37 A beam of cathode rays passes between two parallel, charged metal plates in a vacuum.
cathode rays
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+

A
into the page
out of the page
to the left of the page
to the right of the page
38 How does the ionising effect of -particles compare with that of -particles and -rays?
compared with -particles
compared with -rays
-particles are less strongly ionising
-particles are more strongly ionising
39 The table shows the count rates obtained from four radioactive sources. The measurements were
taken at noon on four consecutive days.
Which source has the longest half-life?
count rate /.counts per second
day 1
day 2
100
48
27
11
200
142
99
69
300
297
292
290
400
202
99
48
UCLES 2012
day 3
day 4
0625/11/O/N/12
[Turn over
18
40 Which statement about a carbon nucleus represented by 146 C is correct?
A
It contains 6 neutrons.
It contains 6 electrons.
It contains 8 protons.
It contains 14 nucleons.
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/11/O/N/12
CORE
PAPER TWO
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/2
PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Monday
24 MAY 1999
Afternoon
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.

TIME
1 hour
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
FOR EXAMINERS USE

MML LOC 864 4/98 QF91699
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
An insect lands on a 30 cm ruler and walks along the edge, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
topicvolume
cm
10
15
20
25
30
Fig. 1.1
A child measures the time the insect takes to walk from the 5 cm mark to the 25 cm mark. It
takes 50 s to do this.
What is the average speed, in cm/s, of the insect?
speed = ...................................... [3]
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
3
2
(a) A uniform beam AB of weight W is balanced at its midpoint on a pivot. Two weights W1
and W2 are then hung at equal distances from the midpoint of the beam.
For
Examiner's
Use
topiccentreofmass
topiccentre
topicmass
B
pivot
W1
W2
Fig. 2.1
When this is done, the end B moves down.
(i) Which is the heavier weight?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which way would W1 have to be moved so that the beam is again balanced?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) W2 is removed from the beam. This means that the only forces acting downwards on
the beam are the weight W of the beam and W1.
W is much greater than W1.
A
W1
Fig. 2.2
On Fig. 2.2, mark a possible position for the pivot to be placed so that the beam is
again balanced.
[2]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
4
3
(a) How does the separation of the molecules of substance X in the solid state compare
with the separation when substance X is in the gaseous state? Tick one box.
topicmolecularmodels
topicmolecular
topicmodels
molecules further apart in the solid state

molecules further apart in the gaseous state
molecules same distance apart in both cases
[1]
(b) State how the molecules of substance X move in the solid state and in the gaseous
state.
solid state .........................................................................................................................
gaseous state ............................................................................................................ [2]
Here are some statements about energy. Complete the statements using words from the
following list.
topicwork
topicworkandpower
topicpower
chemical, electrical, geothermal, heat, hydroelectric, light,

movement (kinetic), position (potential), strain, tidal, wave
(a) A coal fire converts .............................................. energy into
.............................................. energy and .............................................. energy.
[3]
(b) When a ball falls from rest, its .............................................. energy increases
and its .............................................. energy decreases.
[2]
(c) The source of energy, in which hot rocks under the Earths surface heat water
to produce steam, is referred to as .............................................. energy.
0625/2/S99
[1]
For
Examiner's
Use
5
5
topiccircuits
(a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the graph you would expect to get if you plotted values of the
potential difference V across a metallic conductor at constant temperature and the
current I through it.
[2]
For
Examiner's
Use
V/V
I/A
Fig. 5.1
(b) How would you use the graph to find the resistance of the conductor?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
6
6
topicrefraction
A narrow beam of white light passes through a glass prism and is split into a band of
colours, which is seen on a screen AB. This is illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
glass prism
A
narrow beam
of white light
B
Fig. 6.1
(a) What name do we give to the process by which the white light is split up into colours?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What name do we give to the band of colours seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What colour is seen at the edge of the band of colours closer to A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A thin sheet of clear red plastic is put in the path of the light before the light reaches
the prism. What is now seen on the screen?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
7
7
A student wraps a length of fine wire around a wood block and hangs the block between
the poles of a magnet, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For
Examiner's
Use
topicforce
topicforceonaconductorinamagneticfield
topicconductor
topicmagnetic
topicfield
fine wire
wood block
Fig. 7.1
(a) What is seen to happen when the student passes a current through the fine wire?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Why does this happen?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Name a device which makes use of this effect.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
State one safety reason why
topicradioactivity
(a) radioactive sources should not be touched with bare hands,

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) radioactive sources emitting -rays should be stored in lead boxes with thick sides,
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) the radiation symbol should be displayed on the cupboard or drawer in which
radioactive materials are kept.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
8
9
In a factory which makes paper, the sheets are packed in piles of 500. One pile (of
500 sheets) has a mass of 2.4 kg, and is 0.05 m thick. The sheets measure 0.3 m x 0.2 m.
The pile is illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
topicconverging
topicthinconverginglens
topicthin
500 sheets
of paper
0.3 m
0.2 m
0.05 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the volume of the pile of 500 sheets,
volume = ............................................
(ii) the density of the paper.
density = ............................................
[6]
(b) An object of mass 1 kg has a weight of 10 N. Calculate the weight of one pile of paper.
weight = ....................................... [1]
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
For
Examiner's
Use
(c) The pressure exerted by the pile of paper when it is on a table is given by
force
pressure = .
area
Calculate this pressure.
pressure = .................................... [4]

(d) Another pile of the same paper contains only 250 sheets.
(i) How does the mass of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) How does the density of the paper in this pile compare with that of paper in the
first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) How does the weight of this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) How does the pressure exerted by this pile compare with that of the first pile?
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
10
10 You are given a steel spring hanging from a support, a load and a 30 cm rule.
topictransformer
spring
load
30 cm rule
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, describe carefully the steps you would take in order to measure
the extension of the spring when the load is hanging on it. You may draw a diagram if
this helps you to answer the question.
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
.................................................................................................
[5]
(b) You also have a range of other loads which you can hang on to the spring. Equal
increases in load cause equal increases in length. Using the maximum load from this
range, the spring returns to its original length when this load is removed. On Fig. 10.2,
sketch the extension / load graph you would expect to obtain with the spring as the load
is increased. Label this line GRAPH 1.
[2]
extension
load
Fig. 10.2
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
11
(c) The first spring is replaced with a second spring and the experiment is repeated. The
second spring does not stretch as much as the first spring when the same load is hung
on it.
For
Examiner's
Use
On Fig.10.2, sketch the graph you would expect to obtain.

Label this line GRAPH 2.
[1]
(d) A wooden trolley is placed on a horizontal bench.

F
Fig. 10.3
The first spring is attached to the trolley, as shown in Fig.10.3.
(i) A force F keeps the spring slightly extended and the trolley moves. Describe the
motion of the trolley.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The first spring is replaced by the second spring, and the same force F stretches
the spring. How does the motion of the trolley compare with your answer to (d)(i)?
Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
12
11 (a)
(i) Draw a clear diagram of a simple mercury barometer.
[4]
topicmercurybarometer
topicbarometer
topicmanometer
topicmercury
Now fully label your diagram.
[2]
(ii) State the physical quantity that can be determined by using a mercury barometer.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) On your diagram in (i), mark clearly, using the letter h, the length you would
measure to determine the physical quantity named in (ii).
[2]
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
13
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a
container.
30 cm rule
glass tube
30
container
For
Examiner's
Use
25
20
15
gas
10
5
mercury
Fig. 11.1
(i) What is the difference in height of the two mercury levels?
............................. cm [1]
(ii) What does the difference in height of the mercury levels indicate?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) State whether the gas pressure is greater than or less than the atmospheric
pressure and how you know this.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(iv) What would happen to the two mercury levels if the gas pressure increased
slightly?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) The mercury manometer is replaced by another manometer that contains a liquid
of lower density. How, if at all, does this affect the difference between the liquid
levels?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
0625/2/S99
[Turn over
14
For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) Fig. 12.1 illustrates a cathode-ray tube.

topicmolecularmodel
topicmolecular
topicmodel
topictube
topicoscilloscope
cathode
anode
screen
A
filament
H
G
Fig. 12.1
(i) Between which two points would you connect a low potential difference in order to
heat the cathode?
Between ................................... and ..................................
(ii) Between which two points would you connect a high potential difference in order
to produce cathode rays?
Between ................................... and ..................................
(iii) Between which two points would you connect a potential difference in order to
deflect the cathode rays upwards?
Between ................................... and ..................................
[3]
0625/2/S99
15
(b) When the time base of a cathode-ray oscilloscope is turned on, there is a horizontal
trace across the screen, as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Fig. 12.2
(i) An alternating potential difference of constant frequency and constant amplitude
is connected to the Y-input of the oscilloscope.
On Fig. 12.2, sketch the trace which might be obtained.
(ii) The time base is switched off but the alternating potential difference is left
connected. Describe what would be seen on the screen.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) A microphone is connected to another cathode-ray oscilloscope, with the time base
switched to a suitable setting. First, a lady with a high-pitched voice sings into the
microphone. Then a man with a low-pitched voice sings into the microphone. Describe
how the traces seen on the screen would differ.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/2
PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Friday
12 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
1 hour

300 mm ruler
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

MML LOC 864 4/98 QK93705
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiner's
Use
A small tank contains water of depth 2 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
topicspeed
2 cm
8 cm
5 cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) Show that the volume of water in the tank is 80 cm3.
[3]
0625/2/W99
3
(b) The water is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.2. On Fig. 1.2, mark
the level of the water surface in the measuring cylinder when this has been done.
[1]
For
Examiner's
Use
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Fig. 1.2
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
4
2
When the cardboard shape in Fig. 2.1 is freely hung from A, line AX is vertical.
topicturningeffect
topiceffect
topicturning
X
Fig. 2.1
When it is freely hung from B, line BY is vertical.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark the position of the centre of mass of the shape, using a clear dot ().
[1]
(b) On Fig. 2.1, draw a line through C which would be vertical if the shape were to be
freely hung from C.
[1]
0625/2/W99
For
Examiner's
Use
5
3
For
Examiner's
Use
Magnet A is put on a smooth (frictionless) horizontal table, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
topicmagnet
S
magnet A
Fig. 3.1
(a) A second magnet is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
magnet A
S
magnet B
Fig. 3.2
What happens to magnet A?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Magnet C is now moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.3.
magnet A
N
magnet C
Fig. 3.3
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
6
(c) An iron bar is moved towards magnet A, as shown in in Fig. 3.4.
S
magnet A
iron bar
Fig. 3.4

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A plastic rod is moved towards magnet A, as shown in Fig. 3.5.
S
magnet A
plastic rod
Fig. 3.5

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
For
Examiner's
Use
7
4
A person walks from A to E, a journey which goes over the top of the hill BCD, as shown in
in Fig. 4.1.
For
Examiner's
Use
topicenergytransformations
topicenergy
topictransformations
Fig. 4.1
(a)
(i) During which part of the walk does the person do most work? Tick one box.
AB
BC
CD
DE
(ii) Explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b)
(i) The person now runs over the hill from A to E. How does the average power
developed by the person compare with that when the person walked? Tick one box.
greater than when walking
same as when walking
less than when walking
(ii) Explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
8
5
topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows a battery, a switch and a bell connected so that the bell rings when the
switch is pushed.
battery
switch
bell
Fig. 5.1
(a) Draw the circuit diagram for this arrangement. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
(b) A second bell is now connected in parallel with the first bell.
(i) Copy your circuit diagram from (a) and add the second bell.
(ii) Why will the battery run out more quickly when the switch has been pushed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/W99
For
Examiner's
Use
9
6
topicdispersion
A ray of yellow light enters a rectangular glass block at A and leaves it at B, as shown in
Fig. 6.1.
For
Examiner's
Use
B
A
glass block
ray of
yellow light
Fig. 6.1
(a) At A on Fig. 6.1,
(i) draw the normal,
(ii) mark carefully and label clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r.
[3]
(b) At B on Fig. 6.1, draw carefully the ray of light which emerges from the glass block. [2]
Fig. 7.1 shows an electric kettle.
topicconvection
element
Fig. 7.1
Explain why the heating element is placed near the bottom of the kettle.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
10
8
Describe the structure of an atom in terms of its nucleus and electrons. Do not mention
protons or neutrons.
topicstructure
topicatomic
topicatomicstructure
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
.........................................................................
................................................................... [3]
9
topicdensity
topicpressure
topicvolume
topicrefraction
topiclens
(a) Light from an illuminated slit passes through two lenses A and B and forms a focused
image on a screen, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
screen
lens
A
slit
lens
B
source
of
light
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, indicate clearly
(i) the focal length of lens A, using the symbol fA,
(ii) the focal length of lens B, using the symbol fB.
0625/2/W99
[4]
For
Examiner's
Use
11
(b) In Fig. 9.2, O is an object placed with its base on the axis of a lens, and PF is the focal
length of the lens.
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 9.2
(i) Use your rule to draw two rays from the top of the object, through the lens, which
meet at the top of the image.
[5]
(ii) Draw in the image, and label it I.
[1]
(iii) Put ticks in the boxes alongside the statements which correctly describe your
image.
real
upright
inverted
larger than object
smaller than object
same size as object
[3]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
12
For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the structure of a simple transformer.

topictension
Fig. 10.1
On Fig. 10.1, label the important components of the transformer.
[5]
(b) Explain why the coils of a transformer are made of copper, rather than some other
metal.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A transformer has 500 turns in its primary coil, and 1500 turns in its secondary coil.
Energy losses from the transformer are so small that they may be neglected.
V
N
(i) Use the equation s = s to calculate the potential difference across the
s
e
c
o
n
d
a
r
y
Vp Np
coil when an alternating potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the secondary coil when a
steady (d.c.) potential difference of 10 V is supplied to the primary coil.
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(d) Another transformer has the same number of turns on its primary coil as it has on its
secondary coil. An alternating potential difference is supplied across the primary coil.
State the size of the output potential difference compared with the input potential
difference.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/2/W99
13
11 (a) In the table below, write two different physical properties which may be used to
measure temperature. An example has been given to help you.
For
Examiner's
Use
topicthermometer
The change in volume
OF
a liquid
OF
OF
[4]
(b) When creating a temperature scale, fixed points are needed.
Explain what is meant by a fixed point.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In the table below, state the upper and lower fixed points used when calibrating a
liquid-in-glass thermometer with a centigrade temperature scale.
THE UPPER FIXED POINT IS
THE TEMPERATURE OF
ITS VALUE IS
THE LOWER FIXED POINT IS

THE TEMPERATURE OF
ITS VALUE IS
[5]
0625/2/W99
[Turn over
14
(d) Fig. 11.1 shows how the temperature changes with time for a substance as it is heated
steadily from a solid to a liquid and then to a gas.
temperature / C
time / min
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1,
(i) label the melting point and the boiling point of the substance,
(ii) indicate the time when the substance is completely liquid.
[3]
0625/2/W99
For
Examiner's
Use
15
12 A football is inflated by pumping air into it.
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
topicray
(a) Describe the behaviour of an air molecule in the middle of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Using a diagram, describe the behaviour of the molecule near the inside surface of the
football.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Use your answer to explain how air molecules create the pressure on the inside of the
football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) When the football is left in the Suns rays, it gets hot. Describe what happens to the air
molecules, and how this affects the pressure of the football.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/2/W99
For
Examiner's
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/2
PAPER 2
1 hour

Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SB (SM/JG) QF05708/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
Read the sentences below and then answer the questions which follow.
topicvolume
topicweight
topicmass
topicdensity
When potatoes are bought in a market, the weight of a bag full of potatoes is affected by the
density of the potatoes. A lady fills her bag when she buys 5 kg of large potatoes. A man
buys 5 kg of small potatoes. He puts them in a bag of the same size as the ladys, but his bag
is not filled.
(a) Which word in these sentences describes a quantity which is a force?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What does the 5 kg measure? Tick one box.
the density of the potatoes
the mass of the potatoes
the volume of the potatoes
the weight of the potatoes
[1]
topictransfer topicthermal topicenergy
(c) Suggest one reason why the mans 5 kg of potatoes occupies less volume than the
ladys potatoes.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
2
A dish of hot food is put on a wooden table.
topicturningeffect
topiceffect
topicturning
topicenergy
Fig. 2.1
(a) State three processes by which the dish and its contents could lose heat to the
surroundings.
1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...................................................................................................................................
3.
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i)
Describe one way of reducing the heat loss to the surroundings.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which form of heat loss would this reduce?

...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
3
3
For
Examiners
Use
You are given an iron bar, a reel of insulated wire, a battery and some wire cutters.
topicmagnet
iron bar
reel of
insulated
wire
battery
wire cutters
Fig. 3.1
(a) In the space below, describe how you would make an electromagnet. You may use a
labelled diagram if it helps you to answer the question.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) How would you check that your electromagnet actually works?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
4
4
At night, the light beam from a torch is shone into a swimming pool along the line TSA.
Instead of striking the bottom of the pool at A, the beam travels to B, as shown on Fig. 4.1.
topicenergy
topicapparentdepth
torch
S
water
39
A
55
B
Fig. 4.1
(a) At S, the direction of the beam changes. State the name we use to describe this change.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the surface at S.

Clearly mark and label the angle of incidence.
[2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the same pool and the same points A, B, S and T. The critical angle for
the water is 50.
T
S
water
39
A
55
B
Fig. 4.2
(i)
A beam of light is directed up from B to S. On Fig. 4.2, carefully draw the path of
the ray from B to S and then out into the air.
(ii)
1.
A beam of light is directed up from A to S. Describe what happens to the beam

at S.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
2.
Explain why this happens.

...........................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
5
5
A man is watching a thunderstorm which is directly over a village. Some distance behind the
village is a mountain.
For
Examiners
Use
topicsound
topicspeedofsoundandlight
topiclight
topicspeed
cloud
mountain
lightning
village
man
Fig. 5.1
(a) Thunder is created at the same time as the lightning flash but, after the man sees a
lightning flash, he has to wait a short time before he hears the thunder.
Why is there this delay?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) When he listens carefully, the man realises that, for each lightning flash, he can hear a
loud sound of thunder followed by a quieter one.
(i)
After studying Fig. 5.1, explain why he hears two sounds for each lightning flash.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why the second sound is quieter.

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
6
(c) The man measures the time between seeing a flash of lightning over the village, and
hearing the first sound of thunder. The time is 4 s.
The speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.
How far away is the village?
ANSWER: ................................. m
6
[3]
Some smoke is mixed with the air in a glass box. The box is lit brightly from the side and its
contents studied from above through a microscope.
topicbrownian
topicbrownianmotion
topicmotion
glass box containing

air and smoke
mixed together
bright light
Fig. 6.1
(a) Bright specks are seen moving in continuous and jerky random movement.
(i)
What are the bright specks? Tick one box.

air molecules
smoke molecules
smoke particles
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
7
(ii)
For
Examiners
Use
What is the explanation for the jerky random movement? Tick one box.
The air molecules bombard each other.
The smoke particles bombard each other.
The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.
The air molecules bombard the glass.
The smoke particles bombard the glass.
[2]
(b) The contents of the glass box exert a pressure on the glass walls.
Tick any of the following sentences which might help explain this pressure.
The air molecules bombard each other.
The smoke particles bombard each other.
The air molecules bombard the smoke particles.
The air molecules bombard the glass.
The smoke particles bombard the glass.
0625/2 S00
[2]
[Turn over
8
7
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 7.1 shows one way of using water to generate electricity.
topicforce
topicconductor
(a) Fill in the missing words in the boxes.
[4]
reservoir
dam
(iii) The water rotates the

pipe
(i) This water has
so that the generator

produces
energy because
of its height.
energy.
(ii) This moving water

has increased
energy.
generator
house
Fig. 7.1
(b) In other places, water is used in different ways to generate electricity.
State two of these ways.
1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 S00
9
8
This question deals with the decay of a radioactive source.

The radioactive source has a count rate of 640 counts/minute at the start of an experiment.
This value has been plotted on Fig. 8.1.
For
Examiners
Use
topicradioactivity
x
600
count rate
counts / minute
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
time / minutes
Fig. 8.1
The source has a half-life of 20 minutes.
(a) (i)
What would you expect the count rate to be after 20 minutes?

............................................... counts/minute
(ii)
(b) (i)
Plot this value on the graph.
[2]
What would you expect the count rate to be after a further 20 minutes
(i.e. 40 minutes after the start of the experiment)?
............................................... counts/minute
(ii)
Plot this value on the graph.
[2]
(c) Plot two further points which might be expected if the decay curve were perfect.
[1]
(d) Draw a smooth curve through all five points on your graph.
[1]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
10
(e) If this perfect decay continued, how long would it take from the beginning of the
experiment for the count rate to decrease to zero?
Tick one answer.
90 minutes
100 minutes
120 minutes
a very long time
an infinite time
(f)
[1]
In a real experiment, the values found for the count rates might not all lie exactly on a
smooth curve. One reason for this might be experimental error. State one other reason.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
9
topicpressure
(a) Heavy furniture sometimes marks the floor on which it stands.

Four tables of the same weight each have four legs. Fig. 9.1 shows part of a leg from
each table.
A
Fig. 9.1
(i)
Which leg is least likely to mark the floor underneath it? ...............
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
11
For
Examiners
Use
(b) A hot flat metal sheet is placed on a horizontal surface.
D
C
A
B
Fig. 9.2
As the hot metal sheet cools, what happens to the quantities in the list below?
Tick one answer for each.
increases
decreases
stays the same
length AB
width BC
thickness CD
area touching the
horizontal surface
mass of sheet
weight of sheet
density of metal
pressure on
horizontal surface
[6]
0625/2 S00
[Turn over
12
10 A laboratory technician wants to make a resistor of value 64 , using some resistance wire.
He takes 1.0 m of this wire. The wire is shown in Fig. 10.1 as AC. He connects up the circuit
shown.
topictension
V
uniform
resistance
wire
A
0.5 m
0.5 m
crocodile clip
Fig. 10.1
(a) He connects the crocodile clip at B, which is 0.5 m from A.
Here are the readings he gets.
voltmeter reading
12 V
ammeter reading
1.5 A
Calculate the resistance of wire AB.
ANSWER: resistance of AB = ...................
[3]
(b) The laboratory technician now connects the crocodile clip to C, to measure the
resistance of 1 m of the wire. The wire has constant thickness.
(i)
In the spaces below, write the readings he obtains. Ignore the effects of the
resistance of the ammeter, voltmeter and battery.
voltmeter reading
............... V
ammeter reading
............... A
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
13
(ii)
For
Examiners
Use
What is the resistance of wire AC?
ANSWER: resistance of AC = ................
[3]
(c) Use your answer to (b) to answer the following questions.

(i)
What is the resistance per metre of this wire?
ANSWER: resistance per metre = ........... /m

(ii)
What length of wire does the laboratory technician need for the 64 resistor?
ANSWER: length needed = .................. m
0625/2 S00
[3]
[Turn over
14
11 Here is a list of different types of waves.
topicmercury
topicbarometer
gamma ()
infra-red
radio
sound
ultra-violet
visible
X-rays
(a) Which one of these is the only one which is not part of the electromagnetic spectrum?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Which one of these makes us feel warm when the Sun shines?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Which one of these do doctors use to detect broken bones?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) (i)
Fig. 11.1
On the moon, two astronauts cannot hear each other, even when they shout,
unless they have their radios switched on.
1.
Why cannot they hear each other even when they shout?
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
2.
Why can they hear each other using their radios?

...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which type of wave is used to carry messages from the astronauts to mission
control on Earth?
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
15
12 The hammers A and B shown in Fig. 12.1 consist of steel hammer-heads of different weights
fitted to identical wooden handles.
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topicray
topiccathode
A
hammer
-head
B
handle
nail
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i)
Which hammer-head causes the greater moment about the end of the handle
when the hammer is held horizontally, as shown in Fig. 12.1?
ANSWER: hammer ............
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i)
Which hammer-head requires the greater work to lift it a distance of 30 cm from the
position shown?
ANSWER: hammer ............
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) If you wanted to estimate the power developed when lifting hammer A through 30 cm,
what two other quantities would you need to measure?
1.
...................................................................................................................................
2.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) One of the hammers hits the nail and comes to rest without bouncing.
(i)
What form of energy did the hammer lose when it came into contact with the nail?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State two forms of energy into which this lost energy is changed.
1.
...........................................................................................................................
2.
.......................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 S00
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name
0625/2
PHYSICS
PAPER 2
Friday
10 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
1 hour

Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SB (KN/DJ) QK07574/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
Moving cars always experience friction. A driver goes on a short journey in a car.
topicweight
topicmass
topicdensity
topicvolume
Fig. 1.1 shows the car at four places during the journey. The arrows represent the size and
direction of the horizontal forces on the car.
driving
force
friction
force
The car is ............................... .

driving
force
driving
force
friction
force
The car is ............................... .
friction
force
The car is ............................... .
The car is ............................... .

Fig. 1.1
On the line underneath each picture, state whether the car is

at rest,
speeding up,
going at steady speed,
slowing down.
[4]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows three types of water tap (faucet).
type A
type B
type C
PUSH KNOB
DOWN
Fig. 2.1
In the box underneath each tap, write YES if a person would need to cause a moment
on the handle in order to make the water flow, or NO if the person would not need to
cause a moment.
[3]
(b) A old person has taps of type A in the kitchen. The person has difficulty operating the
tap. What could be done to make it easier to operate the tap?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a motorcycle.
topicmodels
topicmolecular
35
30
25
speed
m/s
20
15
10
5
0
0
10
15
20 25
time/s
30
35
40
Fig. 3.1
(i)
What is the maximum speed of the motorcycle? ..................... m/s
(ii)
Whilst accelerating, the motorcycle changes gear three times.

State one of the speeds at which the gear is changed. ............ m/s
(iii)
For how long is the motorcycle slowing down? ...................... s

[3]
0625/2 W00
5
(b) On another occasion, the motorcycle is made to increase its speed at a constant rate for
10 s. The speed/time graph for this is shown in Fig. 3.2.
For
Examiners
Use
20
15
speed
10
m/s
5
0
0
5
time/s
10
Fig. 3.2
How far does the motorcycle travel in these 10 s?
distance travelled = ................ m [3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Some students are asked to write down what they know about evaporation of a liquid.
Here are their statements, some of which are correct and some incorrect.
topicevaporation
Put a tick alongside those statements which are correct.

A
Evaporation occurs at any temperature.
Evaporation only occurs at the boiling point.
Evaporation occurs where the liquid touches the bottom of the container.
Evaporation occurs at the surface of the liquid.
It is the higher energy molecules which escape.
The molecules gain energy as they escape.
The liquid temperature always rises when evaporation occurs.
Rapid evaporation produces cooling.

[4]
(b) Sometimes after shaving, men splash a liquid, called an aftershave, over their faces.
This makes their faces feel fresher as the aftershave evaporates.
(i)
Which of the statements in part (a) explains why the aftershave, even though it is at
room temperature, cools the skin.
statement ................
(ii)
Suggest why the aftershave cools the skin better than water at room temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) Complete the following sentence.
topicsound
topicspeed
topicthermal
topicthermalcapacity
topiclight
The temperature of a body rises when the .............................................. energy of its

molecules is increased.
[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 gives details about an empty beaker and the same beaker with different
substances in it.
empty
beaker
beaker
+ water
beaker
+ sand
mass
250 g
500 g
500 g
energy needed
to raise
temperature
by 1C
125 J
1175 J
325 J
Fig. 5.1
(i)
Which of the arrangements has the highest thermal capacity?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
1.
What is the mass of the water? ..................... g
2.
What is the mass of the sand?
3.
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of

the water by 1C?
4.
..................... J
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of

the sand by 1C?
5.
..................... g
..................... J
Use your answers above to suggest why, on a sunny day, the temperature of
the sand on a beach rises faster than the temperature of the sea.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[6]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a view from above of a vertical mirror. A small lamp is placed at the point
marked L.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
topicmotion
mirror
P
Fig. 6.1
(a) One ray, LP, from the lamp has been drawn.
(i)
At P, draw and label the normal to the mirror.
(ii)
At P, draw and label the reflected ray.
(iii)
Mark, using an X for each, two angles which are equal.

[3]
(b) Carefully mark, using a clear dot, the position of the image of the lamp.
[1]
(c) If you were looking into the mirror from point L, you might see something like Fig. 6.2
looking back at you. (Apologies if you are better-looking than this!)
Fig. 6.2
(i)
Mark clearly with the letter R, the image of your right ear.
(ii)
Your nose is 30 cm from the mirror.

How far from your nose is its image? ........................................................................
[2]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
(a) A ray of red light passes through a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For
Examiners
Use
topicforce
topicconductor
red
light
red
light
Fig. 7.1
What name do we use for the change of direction of the ray as it enters the glass?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the same prism, with white light passing through it.
The path of red light is shown.
red
light
white
light
Fig. 7.2
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw a possible path for blue light.
(ii)
Something else is happening to the white light, in addition to what is shown in

Fig. 7.1.
What name do we use for this? ................................................................................
[5]
(c) Light from the Sun is now passed through the prism. The path of red light is shown in
Fig. 7.3.
red
light
Sun's
light
Fig. 7.3
We can detect infra-red rays using a thermocouple. On Fig. 7.3, mark with the letter T a
position where the thermocouple could detect the infra-red rays after they have passed
through the prism.
[1]
[Turn over
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
10
8
Here are the approximate densities of some metals.
topicradioactivity
platinum
gold
lead
brass
iron
aluminium
21 000 kg/m3
19 000 kg/m3
11 000 kg/m3
9 000 kg/m3
8 000 kg/m3
3 000 kg/m3
(21 g/cm3)
(19 g/cm3)
(11 g/cm3)
( 9 g/cm3)
( 8 g/cm3)
( 3 g/cm3)
A person sees a coin offered for sale in an antiques market.
Fig. 8.1
The market trader says that the coin is made of gold. After buying the coin, the person finds
that its volume is 1.4 cm3 and its mass is 12.6 g.
(a) Write down the equation which enables you to calculate density.
[1]
(b) Calculate the density of the metal from which the coin is made.
density = ....................... g/cm3 [2]

(c) Is the coin made of gold?
YES/NO
[1]
(d) If not, use the list above to suggest what it might be made from.
The coin might be made from ................................ .[1]
(e) If a country wanted to keep its coinage the same but of as low a mass as possible,
which of the metals in the list should it choose?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
The circuit in Fig. 9.1 is connected up.
topicvolume
topiclens
topicpressure
topicdensity
20
6V
40
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors in Fig. 9.1.
combined resistance = ..................... [2]

(b) (i)
State the relationship between resistance, p.d. and current by completing the
following equation.
resistance =
(ii)
Calculate the current, I, in Fig. 9.1. State the unit in your answer.
current = ..............................
[5]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
12
(c) Use your answer to (b)(ii) to calculate the p.d. across the 40 resistor.
State the unit in your answer.
p.d. = ................................ [3]

(d) The circuit is now used as a potential divider, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
20
6V
40
V out
Fig. 9.2
Use your answer to (c) to state the value of Vout , the output voltage of the potential
divider.
Vout = ............................. V [1]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a view from above of a person standing at the edge of a pond, dipping
the end of a stick up and down in the water.
Some of the wavefronts that spread out are shown.
For
Examiners
Use
topicripples
topicwaves
small piece
of wood,
floating on
water
water
cm
90
edge
of
pond
Fig. 10.1
(i)
How many wavelengths are there between X and Y? ..........................................[1]
(ii)
The distance from X to Y is 90 cm. Calculate the wavelength of the waves.
wavelength = .......................... cm [2]

(iii)
The speed of the waves is affected by the depth of the water.

1.
Describe the shape of the wavefronts, as seen from above.

...........................................................................................................................
2.
What does the shape of the wavefronts tell you about the depth of the pond?
Give a reason for your answer.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
14
(iv)
Fig. 10.2 shows a sideways view of the water surface just before the first wave
reaches the floating piece of wood.
small piece
of wood
stick
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 10.2
Describe how the piece of wood moves after the waves reach it.
You may draw on Fig. 10.2 if it helps you to answer the question.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An underwater loudspeaker, placed in the pond in part (a), sends out sound waves
through the water, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
underwater
loudspeaker
L
Fig. 10.3
(i)
What is the difference between the nature of these sound waves and the water
waves in (a)? Write the appropriate words in the gaps in the following sentences.
Water waves are ..................................... waves.
Sound waves are ..................................... waves.
(ii)
[2]
Fig. 10.4 shows a sideways view along the line KL.
underwater
loudspeaker
L
M
Fig. 10.4
The dot labelled M represents a water molecule on the line KL.

Describe how the molecule moves when the loudspeaker is working.
You may draw on Fig. 10.4 if it helps you to answer the question.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 W00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 (a) (i)
Copper is an electrical conductor. What is meant by a conductor ?
topicmercury
topicbarometer
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Ebonite, glass and polythene are electrical insulators. What is meant by an

insulator ?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Polythene is easily given a negative charge by rubbing it with a dry woollen cloth.
(i)
nylon thread
Fig. 11.1 shows a charged

polythene rod being held
close to a suspended charged
polythene rod.
moves
away
Complete the phrase,

like charges ......................
negatively
charged polythene
Fig. 11.1
(ii)
nylon thread
Fig.11.2 shows rod X being

held near the suspended
charged polythene rod.
Tick any of the following which

might correctly describe rod X.
moves
towards
negatively
charged
polythene
rod X
positively charged glass

negatively charged ebonite
Fig. 11.2
uncharged copper
negatively charged polythene
[3]
0625/2 W00
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
16
210
12 (a) One nuclide is written as 84 Po.
topicradioactivity
(i)
Which figure is the proton number (atomic number)? ...............................................
(ii)
Which figure is the nucleon number (mass number)? ..............................................
(iii)
Which figure gives the number of protons in the nucleus? .......................................
(iv)
How can you find the number of neutrons in the nucleus?

...................................................................................................................................
[4]
4
(b) An -particle can be written as 2 .

210
Polonium 84 Po decays into lead (Pb) by emitting an -particle.

Complete the nuclear equation below, by writing the correct numbers in the boxes.
210
84 Po
Pb + 2
0625/2 W00
[2]
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/2
PAPER 2
1 hour

No additional materials required.
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SB (SC/CG) QF10309/4
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
topicdensity
topicweight
A machine operator is making metal cylinders. The factory inspector wants to check whether
the machine operator is working fast enough.
(a) He tells the operator to start working when the clock on the wall of the factory shows the
time in Fig. 1.1.
What time is this? Tick one box.
11 12 1
2
10
9
3.01
1.03
8
7
3.05
5.03
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(b) The operator is told to stop when the clock shows the time in Fig. 1.2.
What time is this? Tick one box.
11 12 1
2
10
9
3.07
7.03
8
7
3.35
4.35
Fig. 1.2
[1]
(c) How long did the test take?
length of test = ................... minutes [1]

(d) During this time, the operator makes 5 cylinders. What is the average time to make one
cylinder?
time to make one cylinder = ................... minutes [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
For
Examiners
Use
(a) What is meant by the term moment of a force?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The sawn-off branch of a tree is laid across a log.
A
Fig. 2.1
The branch balances when point A is in contact with the log.
(i)
How does the moment of the part of the branch to the left of A compare with the
moment of the part to the right of A?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly, using the letter X, the centre of mass of the whole
branch.
[2]
A rubber balloon is filled with air.
topicmodels
topicmolecular
(a) Describe how the pressure in the balloon is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The temperature of the air in the balloon increases.
(i)
What happens to the air molecules?

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What happens to the pressure in the balloon, and why?

what happens ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
why ...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
4
4
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.1 shows the view from above of a triangular object on one side of a vertical mirror.
topicenergy
object
mirror
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the image formed by the mirror.
0625/2/M/J/01
[3]
5
5
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 5.1 represents a wave.
topicresistance
displacement
distance
from source
Fig. 5.1
(a) Making use of the letters on Fig. 5.1, state which distances you would measure to find
(i)
the wavelength of the wave: measure between and .
(ii)
the amplitude of the wave: measure between and .

[2]
(b) What is meant by the frequency of the wave?

..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) One complete wave takes 0.2 s to generate.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency of wave = ...................Hz [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
6
6
A charged ebonite rod has negative charges all over its surface. It is held above three small
pieces of aluminium foil, one positively charged, one negatively charged and one uncharged.
This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
topicmotion
topicbrownian
topicbrownianmotion
ebonite
rod
insulating
sheet
+
positive
negative no charge
Fig. 6.1
(a) Put a circle around any of the pieces of aluminium which are attracted by the ebonite
rod.
[2]
(b) Ebonite is an insulator. What is meant by the term insulator?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Write down the name of another insulating material.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
7
7
Three resistors are connected in series between X and Y. When a cell is connected across
XY, the current at X is 0.1 A, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
For
Examiners
Use
topicconvection
12
0.1A
V1
Fig. 7.1
(a) What is the value of the current at Y? ................... A
[1]
(b) Calculate V1, the p.d. across the 12 resistor.
p.d. across the 12 resistor = ...................V [2]

(c) What instrument would you use to measure the p.d. V1? ............................................[1]
(d) How does the e.m.f. of the cell compare with your answer to part (b)? Tick one box.
e.m.f. of cell is larger than V1

e.m.f. of cell is smaller than V1
e.m.f. of cell is the same as V1
[1]
(e) Calculate the combined resistance of the three resistors.
combined resistance = ................... [2]
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
8
8
For
Examiners
Use
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a simple transformer.
topicradioactivity
core
Vs
Vp
coil
N p turns
coil
N s turns
Fig. 8.1
Complete the following sentences about the transformer.

The transformer only works using current.
It steps the potential difference up or down according to the equation
Vp _____ .
__ =
Vs
The core of the transformer is made of . .
[3]
(b) In each of the following examples, state the potential difference Vs.
(i)
12 v~
100 turns
Vs
50 turns
Vs = ................... V
(ii)
6 v~
Vs
80 turns
80 turns
Vs = ................... V
(iii)
Vs
6v
80 turns
80 turns
Vs = ................... V
[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
9
9
For
Examiners
Use
The table below gives some data about an accelerating car.
topicpressure
time/s
10
speed
m/s
10
15
19
24
25
25
(a) On Fig. 9.1, plot the speed/time graph for the motion.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0
10
time/s
Fig. 9.1
[4]
(b) How far did the car travel during the first 3 s?
distance travelled = ...................m [3]

(c) What was the top speed of the car? .....................................................................m/s [1]
(d) How far would the car travel in 3 s if travelling at its top speed?
distance travelled = ...................m [3]

0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
10
10 Two workers, A and B, are lifting boxes of food in a store-room. The boxes all weigh the
same and are lifted from the floor on to the same shelf.
topicwaves
topicripples
topicenergy
A is able to lift 10 boxes in 2 minutes.

B takes longer than 2 minutes to lift 10 boxes.
(a) How does the total work done by A compare with the total work done by B?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How does the power of A compare with the power of B?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i)
Which form of energy in their bodies do the workers transform in order to do the
work lifting the boxes?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
From what did they obtain this supply of energy?

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The boxes have more energy when they are on the shelf than when they were on the
floor.
Which form of energy has increased?...........................................................................[1]
(e) One of the boxes falls off the shelf and crashes to the ground.
Describe the energy changes as the box falls and hits the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
11
11 (a) A builder is building a brick wall. He has 500 bricks delivered, all neatly stacked together.
For
Examiners
Use
topicmercury
topicbarometer
Each brick measures 0.2 m x 0.1 m x 0.06 m and is a solid block, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
Fig. 11.1
(i)
Calculate the volume of one brick.
volume of one brick = ...................

(ii)
The brick has a density of 2400 kg/m3.

Show that the mass of one brick is 2.88 kg.
(iii)
What is the mass of the stack of bricks?
mass of stack = .................. kg

[6]
(b) Some other bricks have the same size and are made of the same material, but they
have a hollow in one face, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2
(i)
How does the mass of one of these bricks compare with the mass of one of the
bricks in (a)(ii)?
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01
[Turn over
12
(ii)
The hollow of one brick is filled level with wet cement, as shown in Fig. 11.3.
wet cement
Fig. 11.3
The brick now has a mass of 2.91 kg.
Compare this with the mass given in (a)(ii). What does it tell you about the density
of the wet cement?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
12 Fig. 12.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
topicray
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.
brightness
focus
time-base
y-gain
ms/cm
x-shift
volts/cm
y-shift
y input
on
off
Fig. 12.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright line is seen across the centre of the
screen.
(i)
What causes the bright line?

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
13
(ii)
When the brightness control is turned up, the line gets brighter.
What happens inside the oscilloscope to cause this increase in brightness?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i)
Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope? ........................
(ii)
Fig. 12.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 12.2
1.
Which oscilloscope control would you adjust to vary the amplitude, h, of the trace
on the screen? ..................
2.
Which control would you adjust to vary the number of waves visible on the screen?
..................
3.
What would you see on the screen if you switched the time-base setting to zero?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
PAPER 2
0625/2
1 hour

No additional materials are required.
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SB (NH/CG) S10760/3
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
A piece of string wraps around a cylinder 8 times.
topicmass
topicweight
topicdensity
string
cylinder
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the string laid along a 30 cm rule.
string
10
15
20
25 cm
30
Fig. 1.2
(a) How long is the string?
length of string = ......................... cm [1]

(b) Calculate the circumference (distance once round) the cylinder.
circumference of cylinder = ......................... cm [2]
0625/2 O/N01
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A trainee designer makes a jug for holding drinks. The jug is shown in Fig. 2.1.
topiceffect
topicturningeffect
topicturning
Fig. 2.1
Unfortunately, it is very easy to knock the jug over, so the trainee designer has to change the
shape of the jug.
State two things he could do to improve the stability of the jug.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
2. .........................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
4
3
(a) How can a metal bar be made to expand in all directions?
topicmodels
topicmolecular
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What happens to the spacing between the atoms in an iron bar when it expands?
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State one example where expansion of a solid can be useful.
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State one example where expansion of a solid causes problems which need to be
overcome.
.........................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
topicevaporation
(a) A ray of light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 4.1. It emerges
at point X.
For
Examiners
Use
ray
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, draw the ray which emerges from the block at X.
[2]
(b) The glass of which the block is made has a critical angle of 42.
Another ray passes into the block as shown in Fig. 4.2.
ray
50
Y
Fig. 4.2
(i)
On Fig. 4.2, show what happens to the ray at Y.
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A third ray enters the block perpendicularly, as shown in Fig. 4.3.
ray
Fig. 4.3
On Fig. 4.3, draw the ray as it passes through the block and out into the air again.
0625/2 O/N01
[2]
[Turn over
6
5
topicresistance
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a students attempt at drawing a diagram to illustrate the formation of a
spectrum by using a glass prism.
screen
Suns
rays
red
orange
yellow
green
blue
indigo
violet
spectrum
Fig. 5.1
The student labelled the colours in the correct positions but made two mistakes in
showing the passage of the rays through the prism. What are these mistakes?
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The prism in Fig. 5.1 can transmit infra-red radiation.
(i)
What instrument could the student use to detect the presence of the infra-red
radiation?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the letters I.R. to show where the infra-red radiation would strike the screen.
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Infra-red radiation is one example of an invisible part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
Give the names of two other invisible parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. ...................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
(a) Three metal rods look the same.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
One is made of aluminium.

One is made of unmagnetised iron.
One is a permanent magnet.
Describe how a small bar magnet could show which rod is
(i)
made of aluminium,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) made of unmagnetised iron,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
a permanent magnet.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In an experiment, a steel ball-bearing is held up by an electromagnet, as shown in

Fig. 6.1.
electromagnet
steel ball-bearing
Fig. 6.1
The electromagnet then releases the ball-bearing, which falls to the floor.
(i)
From what metal is the core of the electromagnet made?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
How is the electromagnet made to work?

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What is done to make the electromagnet release the ball-bearing?

...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
8
7
This question is about the dangers of electricity.
topicforce
topicconductor
(a) A builder tries to save money by not fitting fuses or circuit-breakers to the electric
circuits in a house. Why might this be dangerous?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another builder only has switches like the one shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
The builder decides it might be dangerous to fit one of these switches in a washroom,
where there would be water and steam.
Why might it be dangerous?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A cleaning operator is trained to check the cable of a vacuum cleaner for damage
before it is used.
Why might it be dangerous to use equipment with a damaged cable?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
8
(a) Describe what happens to an atom when it undergoes radioactive decay.
topicradioactivity
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) A scientist measures the count rate from a radioactive substance over a period of 20
minutes. The table shows the results of his measurements.
(i)
time/minutes
10
15
20
count rate
counts/s
800
400
205
105
50
From the table, estimate the half-life of the substance.

half-life = ......................... minutes
(ii)
How many half-lives elapsed during the 20 minute experiment?

number of half-lives = ......................... minutes
(iii)
If the scientist had taken readings for 25 minutes, what might the count rate have
been at the end of his experiment?
count rate after 25 minutes = ......................... counts/s
[3]
(c) In the following table, write in the correct numbers of electrons, protons and neutrons
contained in an -particle and in a -particle.
electrons
protons
neutrons
-particle
-particle
[4]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
10
9
topicpressure
A student draws the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1. The circuit is intended to be used to measure
the resistance of R, a length of nichrome resistance wire.
Z
R
Y
Fig. 9.1
(a) The student cannot remember which meters he should use at X and at Y.
(i)
Which meter should he show at X? ..........................................................................
(ii)
Which letter should he put in the circle at X? ............................................................
(iii)
Which meter should he show at Y? ..........................................................................
(iv)
Which letter should he put in the circle at Y? ............................................................

[4]
(b) (i)
What is the component labelled Z? ...........................................................................
(ii)
What is the purpose of Z in the circuit? .....................................................................

[3]
(c) The student connects the circuit and obtains the graph shown in Fig. 9.2.
4.0
p.d. / V
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
Fig. 9.2
0625/2 O/N01
0.5
0.6 0.7 0.8

current / A
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
(i)
How can the student use the graph to find the resistance of R?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the value of R.
resistance R = ......................... [4]

(d) The student removes the length of nichrome wire R and replaces it with the same length
of thinner nichrome wire.
(i)
Will the resistance of this wire be greater than, smaller than or the same as the wire
in the rest of the question?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 9.2, sketch a line which the student might obtain when he repeats the
experiment with the thinner wire.
[3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
10
The densities of three solids are
topictension
2 700 kg/m3,
2 200 kg/m3,
600 kg/m3,
aluminium
concrete
wood
Blocks having identical dimensions are made of these three substances. The blocks are
stood on a horizontal surface, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
con
alu
min
wo
cre
ium
aluminium
od
te
concrete
wood
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
Which block has the greatest mass? .........................................................................

How do you know this?..............................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Which block has the greatest weight? .......................................................................
(iii)
Which block exerts the greatest pressure on the horizontal surface? .......................
[4]
(b) The wood block can be placed on the horizontal surface in any one of three ways, A, B
or C (see Fig. 10.2).
B
wo
od
wood
wo
od
Fig. 10.2
In which position does the wood block exert the greatest pressure?................................
How do you know this? .....................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2 O/N01
13
(c) A person spends some time relaxing on a sandy beach. He sits on a chair with four
legs, as shown in Fig. 10.3.
For
Examiners
Use
sand
Fig. 10.3
Unfortunately, the chair quickly sinks into the sand.
(i)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest how the person might stop this happening.

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2 O/N01
[Turn over
14
11
A laboratory thermometer is put into some heated pure water, as shown in Fig. 11.1. After
some time the water boils.
topicthermometer
thermometer
pure water
heat
Fig. 11.1
(a) What quantity does the thermometer measure? ...........................................................[1]
(b) Suggest what liquid might be contained by the thermometer. ......................................[1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is normal.
What value should the thermometer show when the water is boiling? .........................[2]
(d) The heating is continued and the water carries on boiling.
What happens to the reading on the thermometer?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) How could you check that the zero mark on the thermometer had been correctly
positioned? You may use a diagram if it helps you to answer clearly.
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
0625/2 O/N01
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
15
12
Fig. 12.1 shows the plan of the dining room in a house in a cold country. Details of the rest of
the rooms are not shown. The air outside the house is much colder than that inside the house.
topictube
topiccathoderaytube
topiccathode
topicray
interior walls
COLD
WARM
door
plan (view
from above)
WARM
external
walls
dining room
window
(single glass)
Fig. 12.1
Heat is lost from the dining room by conduction at the rates shown below.
through external walls
through internal walls
through door
through window
3 000 000 J/hour

100 000 J/hour
50 000 J/hour
1 000 000 J/hour
(a) Suggest why

(i)
much more heat is lost through the external walls than through the internal walls,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
such a lot of heat is lost through the window.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) If the figures above relate to the only sources of heat loss, how many J/hour would the
heater in the dining room need to supply in order to keep the temperature in the room
constant?
rate of heat supply needed = ......................... J/hour [2]

(c) Suggest one other way heat might be lost from the room.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2 O/N01
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/2
PHYSICS
PAPER 2

1 hour
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SP (NF/JB) S22944/3
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
Here are two statements made by people who havent learned their Physics very well.
Each statement is incorrect. In the space alongside each statement, say what is wrong with
the statement.
statement
what is wrong with this statement
The weight of this bag

of peas is 1 kg.
The mass of this object

is another name for its
weight.
[2]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
(a) Which of the following statements describe the property of a substance that would be
suitable for measuring temperature? Tick the box alongside any acceptable statement.
(i)
a property that increases regularly with temperature
(ii)
a property that decreases regularly with temperature
(iii)
a property that remains constant as the temperature changes
For
Examiners
Use
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows how the length of the thread in a liquid-in-glass thermometer varies with
temperature.
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0
25
50
75
100
temperature / C
Fig. 2.1
(i)
What temperature is indicated by a thread length of 14.5 cm?

temperature = ........................ C
(ii)
What happens to the thread of the thermometer if the temperature drops below the
ice point?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a machine for making loud sounds. It is called a siren. This consists of a
rotating disc with 25 holes. As each hole passes the jet, a puff of air passes through the
hole.
disc with
25 holes
jet of air
Fig. 3.1
(i)
How many puffs of air will there be during one revolution of the disc?
number of puffs = ....................
(ii)
The disc rotates 40 times per second.

Show that the frequency of the note produced by the siren is 1000 Hz.
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) The siren described in (a) is located some distance from a large building, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
For
Examiners
Use
large
building
siren
Fig. 3.2
The siren is briefly sounded once. A short time later, the sound is heard again.
(i)
Why is this second sound heard?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What is the frequency of this second sound? Tick one box.

less than 1000 Hz
1000 Hz
more than 1000 Hz
(iii)
What is the amplitude of this second sound? Tick one box.

less than the original sound
the same as the original sound
more than the original sound
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
6
4
(a) In the following table, tick the appropriate boxes to indicate where protons, neutrons and
electrons are found in an atom.
particle
found in the nucleus
found in an orbit
proton
neutron
electron
[3]
(b) A neutral atom of phosphorus (P) contains 15 protons, 16 neutrons and 15 electrons.
(i)
Write down the proton number (atomic number) of phosphorus. ...............
(ii)
Write down the nucleon number (mass number) of phosphorus. ..............
(iii)
The nuclide notation for oxygen is 168O.

Write down the nuclide notation for phosphorus.
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) Describe one method of magnetising a steel rod.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) How would you check that the steel rod had been magnetised?
what would show that the steel
rod had been magnetised
what I would do
[2]
(c) A glass tube is supported vertically on a bench. A strong bar magnet A is placed in the
bottom of the tube, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
hand
S
N
magnet B
glass tube
N
bench
magnet A
S
Fig. 5.1
A second magnet B is now dropped into the tube.

Describe what happens to magnet B, and explain why.
what happens to magnet B
explanation
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a vacuum tube in which it is hoped to generate cathode rays.
vacuum
filament
anode
y-plates
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw the symbol for a battery connected so that thermionic emission
occurs.
(ii)
What particles are emitted in thermionic emission? .................................................

[2]
(b)
+
Fig. 6.2
(i)
On Fig. 6.2, show the + and terminals suitably connected so that cathode rays
may pass along the tube.
(ii)
On Fig. 6.2, draw a line showing the path of the cathode rays.
(iii)
How are the cathode rays detected in the tube?

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
(c) Fig. 6.3 shows the same vacuum tube, with the terminals labelled.
T
P
Q
S
Fig. 6.3
Between which two points should a battery be connected if the cathode rays are to be
deflected upwards?
between point ........ and point ........ [1]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 illustrates one countrys system for transmitting electricity around the country, from
the power station to peoples houses.
voltage here
=
power station
step-up
transformer
grid system
voltage here
=
voltage here
=
step-down step-down house

transformer transformer
Fig. 7.1
(a) At different points in this system, the voltage is 220 V, 11 000 V or 132 000 V. At the three
places marked on Fig. 7.1, write in the appropriate value of the voltage.
[3]
(b) State one advantage of using high voltages for the transmission of electricity.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
11
8
In a research laboratory using radioactive materials, safety precautions have to be observed.

Some of the safety precautions adopted by the laboratory are listed below.
For
Examiners
Use
On the lines after each precaution, state reasons why it is a wise precaution.
(a) Radioactive materials should only be picked up using long-handled tools.
REASON 1 .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
REASON 2 .......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Food must not be taken where radioactive materials are being used.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The researchers must wash their hands after the source has been put away safely.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Radioactive materials must be stored in a locked drawer or cabinet.
REASON ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes three ammeters. The resistance of the ammeters
and the battery can be ignored.
A1
A3
20 X
A2
20 X
Fig. 9.1
(i)
What is the total resistance of the circuit?

resistance = ............
(ii)
Ammeter A1 reads 0.2 A. What do the other two ammeters read?

A2 reads ............ A
A3 reads ............ A
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the same components as in (a), but connected differently.
A1
A2
20 X
A3
20 X
Fig. 9.2
(i)
What is the total resistance of the circuit? Tick one box.

40
30
20
10
(ii)
Ammeter A1 reads 0.8 A. What do the other two ammeters read? Tick the
appropriate boxes.
more than 0.8 A
0.8 A
less than 0.8 A
A2 reads
A3 reads
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
14
10 (a) A manufacturer of car tyres estimates that the area of a car tyre in contact with the road
is about the same as the area of a persons shoe in contact with the ground.
(i)
A car weighs 10 000 N and a person weighs 500 N.

Calculate the ratio
pressure of car on ground
________________________ .
pressure of person on ground
Remember that the car has 4 tyres and a person has 2 feet.
(ii)
Suggest why it might be a good idea to reduce the pressure of the air in car tyres if
the car is to be driven over soft sand or over snow.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) A U-tube manometer is used to measure lung pressure by blowing at A, as shown in

Fig. 10.1.
liquid
Fig. 10.1
(i)
Before the person blows at A, the liquid levels X and Y are the same.
State the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
15
(ii)
Which way do the liquid levels move when the person blows at A?
level X moves ..........................
level Y moves ..........................
(iii)
What would you measure in order to find the persons lung pressure?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
16
11 In an experiment, different weights are hung on the end of a spring, and the length of the
spring is measured. The results are as follows.
weight/N
length/mm
extension/mm
40
48
60
64
72
80
88
96
20
(a) What is the length of the unstretched spring?

length of unstretched spring = ............ mm [1]
(b) Some of the extensions have been calculated for you.
Complete the table by writing in the remaining extensions.
(c) (i)
[2]
On the graph grid of Fig 11.1, plot the values from your table.
extension / mm
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
Fig. 11.1
0625/2/M/J/02
6
weight / N
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
17
(ii)
Draw the best straight line through your points.
(iii)
The experimenter has read one of the lengths incorrectly.

1. Which one is it? ...................................................................................................
2. What do you think the length reading should have been? ........... mm
[5]
(d) The spring is now attached to a block resting on a rough surface, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
block
rough
surface
spring
pulling
force
friction
force
Fig. 11.2
As the pulling force is increased, the block just starts to move to the right when the
spring is 68 mm long.
(i)
What is the extension of the spring when it is 68 mm long?

extension = .......... mm
(ii)
Use your graph to find the force that causes this extension.
force = .......... N
(iii)
What is the value of the friction force as the block starts to move?
friction force = .......... N
[4]
0625/2/M/J/02
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
18
12 (a) A beam of light is travelling parallel to the axis of a thin lens, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
P C
Fig. 12.1
After passing through the lens, the rays all pass through the point F.
(i)
Which word best describes what happens to the rays? Tick one box.
The rays
converge
diffract
disperse
reflect
(ii)
On Fig. 12.1, complete the paths of the two rays.
(iii)
Complete the following sentence, referring to Fig. 12.1.
The focal length of the lens is the distance between point ....... and point ...... .
[3]
0625/2/M/J/02
19
(b) In this part of the question, you are required to draw an accurate ray diagram on
Fig. 12.2 for the lens in part (a).
object
Fig. 12.2
(i)
From the top of the object, draw a ray that, after leaving the lens, passes through F.
(ii)
From the top of the object, draw a ray that passes through P.
(iii)
Mark in the image, and write image alongside it.
(iv)
From your diagram, state two things that are the same (or approximately the same)
about the image and the object.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(v)
From your diagram, state one thing that is definitely different about the image and
the object.
...................................................................................................................................
[9]
0625/2/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/2
PHYSICS
PAPER 2

1 hour
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

SP (CW/SLC) S23398/3
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
A baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving
belt. The moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner.
moving
belt
suitcase on ground
suitcase held
level with belt
suitcase moving
on belt
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A?
Tick one box.
The total energy is greater in B than in A.
The total energy is the same in B and in A.
The total energy is less in B than in A.
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) (i)
How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick
one box.
For
Examiners
Use
The total energy is greater in C than in B.

The total energy is the same in C and B.
The total energy is less in C than in B.
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
Here are five words relating to the transfer of thermal energy.

conductor, convection, evaporation, insulator, radiation
Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list.
(a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal
...................................... .
[1]
(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of .......................................
[1]
(c) Copper is a good ...................................... of thermal energy.
[1]
(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that
...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water.
0625/2/O/N/02
[1]
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. There is a current down the
wire.
large
current
card
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above.
card
Fig. 3.2
The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current.
On Fig. 3.2,
(a) show the direction of the magnetic field,
[1]
(b) carefully draw three more magnetic field lines.
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.
For
Examiners
Use
cm3
500
mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.1
cm3
oil
500
mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.2
(a) (i)
Calculate the mass of oil in the jug.
mass of oil =........................ g

(ii)
Calculate the density of the oil.
density of oil =......................................

(iii)
How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the
measuring jug?
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
(b) Water is more dense than oil.

On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be
if it replaced the oil.
[1]
level
of oil
cm3
500
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.3
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
6
5
For
Examiners
Use
(a) What happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity
falls to of its original value?
time = ........................ years [2]
(a) State what is meant by the melting point of a solid.

The melting point is ..........................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes.
boiling point of iron
freezing (solidifying) point of iron
melting point of iron
[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
boiling
liquid
heat
Fig. 6.1
(i)
On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature
of the liquid whilst it is boiling.
temperature
time
time at which
liquid starts
to boil
Fig. 6.2
(ii)
On your graph, mark the boiling point of the liquid.

[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
8
7
A student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other.
dry cotton
cloth
polythene
rod
Fig. 7.1
(a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Around the charged rod will be an electric field.
What is meant by an electric field ?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
9
(d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has
been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
nylon
thread
For
Examiners
Use
charged
polythene
rod ()
charged
polythene
rod ()
Fig. 7.2
(i)
What is seen to happen to the suspended rod?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not
be able to charge the rod?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 resistor, an ammeter and a
variable resistor with a sliding contact. The variable resistor is set at zero. The ammeter and
battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored.
sliding contact
variable
resistor
A
Y
4.7
Fig. 8.1
(a) In what unit do we measure the e.m.f. of the battery? .................................................[1]

(b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
[2]
(c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 resistor is 0.5 A.
Calculate the p.d. across the resistor.
p.d. across resistor = ........................ [2]

(d) The sliding contact of the variable resistor is moved from X to Y.
(i)
What happens to the resistance of the variable resistor?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What happens to the reading on the ammeter?

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 .
What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?
resistance of variable resistor = ........................ [2]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in
air.
For
Examiners
Use
My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured
the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I
stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I
saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard
the sound. We obtained the following readings.
distance across field = 238 m
time for sound to cross field = 0.7 s
(a) Why was it necessary to be a long way from any buildings?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Why was it necessary to use such a large distance?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together
and hearing the bang?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Use the readings to calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ...................................... [4]

(f)
Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment
after they had exchanged positions.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
12
10 (a) The apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the
copper rod.
hanging copper rod
N
S
mercury
Fig. 10.1
(i)
Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is
closed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The cell is reversed and the switch closed.

How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
(b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.
coil
Fig. 10.2
(i)
In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an
example.
(ii)
Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is
connected?
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit.
lamp
flexible
iron reeds
Fig. 11.1
Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
15
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm.
warning
lamp
thermistor
Fig. 11.2
When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to
operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases.
Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
[Turn over
16
12 (a) A narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at A, as shown in
Fig. 12.1.
screen
red light
Fig. 12.1
(i)
On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.
(ii)
What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A?

...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
17
(b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in
Fig. 12.2.
screen
red +
violet light
Fig. 12.2
Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light.
[2]
(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the
Sun. State what is now seen on the screen.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through
glass.
(i)
On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the
Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.
(ii)
Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen?

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What could be used to detect the infra-red radiation?

...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2
May/June 2003
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
For Examiners Use

If you have been given a label, look at the
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
Stick your personal label here, if
provided.

SP (AT/KN) S46409/2
CIE 2003
[Turn over
2
1
A person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the
ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
ends cut
off here
thread
1 m rule
Fig. 1.1
(a) To the nearest metre, what is the length of the thread?
.................. m [1]
(b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)?
Tick one box and give your reason.
slightly greater
slightly less
reason .......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
(a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10 N
Fig. 2.1
A force of 10 N pulls on one string.
(i)
The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string?
F = .............................. N
(ii)
What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause?

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equallyspaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.
The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
(i)
What is the force exerted by each block on the pot?
(ii)
State the direction of these forces.
...............N
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot
up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the
pot?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
4
3
For
Examiners
Use
(a) An unopened bottle of olive oil has

a mass of 0.97 kg. The empty bottle
has a mass of 0.51 kg.
Calculate the mass of the olive oil.
OLI V
OIL
OLI V
OIL
0.97 kg
0.51 kg
Fig. 3.1
mass of olive oil = .................................. kg
[2]
(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders
are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2.
cm3
250
200
50
150
100
50
Fig. 3.2
(i)
What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder?
volume = .................................. cm3
(ii)
Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.
volume = .................................. cm3

(iii)
Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ..................................
[7]
0625/2/M/J/03
5
4
The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
fixed
pivot
For
Examiners
Use
load
piston
cylinder
air
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The load is increased.
(i)
State what happens to the piston.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.
what happens ...........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
6
5
An immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 C. The immersion heater is switched
on.
insulating
beaker
immersion heater
crushed ice
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the
ice has melted.
[3]
100
temperature / C
0
time
0
time when
all ice has
melted
Fig. 5.2
(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.
After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
(i)
Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
In this question, drawing should be done carefully.

Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light striking mirror 1 at point X.
ray of
light
mirror 1
mirror 2
X
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1,

(i)
draw the normal at X,
(ii)
draw the ray reflected from mirror 1,
(iii)
mark the angle of incidence using the letter i and the angle of reflection using the
letter r.
[3]
(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2.
Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You
may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below.
The reflected ray from mirror 2 is .....................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
8
7
For
Examiners
Use

(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds
after the sound was made.
[1]
time elapsed/s
distance travelled/m
340
Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave.
distance
travelled
/m
2000
1500
1000
500
5
time/s
Fig. 7.2
0625/2/M/J/03
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
9
(c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.
distress
flare
lifeboat
sinking ship
Fig. 7.3
The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a
bright flash of light.
(i)
A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time.
State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the
lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.
distance of lifeboat = .................................. m

[6]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
10
8
(a) In an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store? ................................
[1]
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.
S1
large-value
resistor
+
6 V d.c.
V
capacitor
S2
Fig. 8.1
(i)
Switch S1 is open. Switch S2 is closed and then opened again.

What reading now shows on the voltmeter?
(ii)
................................ V
S2 is left open and S1 is closed and left closed.

Describe what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The circuit in Fig. 8.1 is an example of a simple time-delay circuit.

State one use of a time-delay circuit.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically
in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
S
N
Fig. 9.1
Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A
and B is not shown.
magnet
pole
magnet
pole
Fig. 9.2
(a) (i)
(ii)
Fig. 9.3
On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes
through it.
[2]
Explain why the wire looks like this.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed.
0625/2/M/J/03
[1]
[Turn over
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
IGCSE OSCILLOSCOPE CO.
brightness
focus
time-base
y-gain
ms/cm
x-shift
volts/cm
y-shift
on
off
y input
Fig. 10.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen.
(i)
Describe what causes this bright spot.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iv)
Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal
line.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i)
Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 10.2
1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor.
Fig. 11.1
The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the
variable resistor makes no difference.
In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor
may be used to change the brightness of the lamp.
[2]
0625/2/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
15
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply.
The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored.
8
Q
+
P
6V
For
Examiners
Use
R
S
Fig. 11.2
(i)
Calculate the combined resistance of the 8 and 4 resistors in series.
combined resistance = ..................................

(ii)
[2]
1. Calculate the current supplied by the 6 V d.c. supply.
current = ..................................
2. State the value of the current
in section PQ of the circuit ..................................
recorded by the ammeter ..................................
in section SR of the circuit ..................................
[5]
(iii)
On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference

across the 4 resistor.
[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
[Turn over
16
For
Examiners
Use
12 A rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
safety rope
climber
Fig. 12.1
(a) To climb the rock face, the climber must do work.
Which force must the climber work against as he climbs? Tick one box.
air resistance
friction on the rock
his weight
tension in the safety rope
[1]
(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the
work done by the climber?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to
climb the cliff.
(i)
Which one has done the most work? ........................................................................
(ii)
Which one has the greater power rating? .................................................................

[2]
(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential
energy than he had at the bottom.
(i)
What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra
gravitational potential energy? ..................................................................................
(ii)
Where did he get this energy from? ..........................................................................
(iii)
Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was
energy in his body used? State one way.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Theory
1 hour

Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).

For Examiners Use

provided.

MML 4505 11/02 S53489/2
UCLES 2003
[Turn over
2
1
(a) The block of wood in Fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table.
Q
B
A
Fig. 1.1
If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when
released.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be.
(ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to
topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.
A
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must
now lie.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.
B
Fig. 1.3
Which diagram shows the safer arrangement? .....................

Give a reason for your choice.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be
opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Fig. 1.4
Suggest why they have this mechanism.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
A wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second.

Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for
one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]
Fig. 3.1 shows a rock-fall down a mountain-side.
loose
rocks
mountain
Fig. 3.1
The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the
mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of
energy being described.
Before they fall, the rocks have this
energy because of their position.
As the rocks are falling,

their energy is changing
to these other types of energy.
At the bottom, the only energy
retained by the rocks is this type
of energy.
[5]
0625/02/O/N/03
5
4
(a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels.
Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.
vehicle 1
For
Examiners
Use
vehicle 2
Fig. 4.1
Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is
very soft? Give your reasons.
vehicle ................................................................
reasons ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b)
(i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be
extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain
why this is not extremely painful.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, AB and CD, in a symmetrical glass block.
glass block
A
B
P
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1,
(i) draw the ray AB before it entered the block at A,
(ii) draw the normal at B,
(iii) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at B,
(iv) draw the normal at D,
(v) draw a ray which could emerge into the air at D.
[5]
(b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the
point P?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
7
6
(a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
For
Examiners
Use
speed, wavelength, frequency

(i) Which of these is the same in a vacuum for both X-rays and radio waves?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
8
7
(a) The resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length.
On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies
with length.
[2]
resistance
0
0
length
Fig. 7.1
(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the
circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.
50 m
meter 1
meter 2
Fig. 7.2
(i) What sort of meter is meter 1? ........................................................................... [1]
(ii) Complete the sentence: Meter 1 is measuring the .................................................
across the coil of wire.
[1]
(iii) What sort of meter is meter 2? ........................................................................... [1]
(iv) Complete the sentence: Meter 2 is measuring the .................................................
in the coil of wire.
[1]
0625/02/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
(v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).
3 4
0.1
0.4
0.5
10
0.3
0.2
Fig. 7.3(a)
Fig. 7.3(b)
From the readings, calculate the resistance of the coil of wire.
resistance of coil = ................................ [5]

(vi) What is the resistance per metre of the wire?
resistance per metre = .......................... [2]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. The
dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet.
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown
experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines
below.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
(a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to

(i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the number of protons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the charge on the nucleus?
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of
3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the
nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.
activity = ......................... count / min [4]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
12
10 In a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the
spring.
load / N
extension / mm
16
45
48
64
80
104 150
(a) Plot these values on the axes of Fig. 10.1.
[3]
200
extension / mm
150
100
50
0
0
10
load / N
Fig. 10.1
(b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a
circle around the incorrect extension.
[1]
(c) After a load of about 5 N, the graph begins to curve upwards.
Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/02/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
11
Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in C.

10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 11.1
(a)
(i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling
water at standard pressure?
........................... C
(ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice?
........................... C
(iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the
thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing
point of water.
[3]
(b) The mercury-in-glass thermometer uses the expansion of a liquid to measure

temperature. State another physical property that can be used to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
[Turn over
14
12 In a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 V, the transformer in Fig. 12.1 is used
to enable a 6 V lamp to be lit.
A
240 V
mains
8000
turns
6V
lamp
B
Fig. 12.1
(a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at
normal brightness.
number of turns = ........................ [3]

(b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at
normal brightness,
A
(i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e.
number of turns = ....................
B
A
(ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e.
number of turns = ....................
B
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2
May/June 2004
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

provided.

SPA (NH/BI) S61205/2
UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
The clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot
see the clock can know what hour of the day it is.
At precisely 6 oclock, the clock starts to strike. It strikes 6 times.
At the first strike of the bell, a mans wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
11
12
1
2
10
9
3
8
4
7
Fig. 1.1
When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
11
12
1
2
10
9
3
8
4
7
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.
time interval = s [1]

(b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.

(c) At precisely 11 oclock, the clock starts to strike.
Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 11th strike.

UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. The rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people
through.
hinge
For
Examiners
Use
rail
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that
would be needed to begin to raise the rail.
[3]
(b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force?
Tick one box.
force
work
moment
movement
[1]
(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift
the rail.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
4
3
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist.
25
speed
m/s
20
15
10
5
R
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i)
Calculate the distance travelled during the first 50 s.
distance travelled = ... m

(ii)
Calculate the distance travelled between 50 s and 100 s.
distance travelled = ... m
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
5
(iii)
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate the total distance travelled.
total distance travelled = ... m

(iv)
Calculate the average speed during the 100 s.
average speed = ... m/s

[8]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from A to B at a steady
speed.
B
Fig. 4.1
State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done
by the person.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls
much harder than the person in (a).
Describe what happens to the second persons barrow.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i)
State which person has the greater power between A and B.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Give two reasons for your answer to (c)(i).

reason 1 ....................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...................................................................................................................
[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. The bulb of a
thermometer is held in the liquid. A jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that the
liquid evaporates rapidly.
For
Examiners
Use
thermometer
jet of air
liquid
shallow dish
Fig. 5.1
(a) State what happens to the reading shown on the thermometer.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment
occurs.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
8
6
(a) When a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature
of the aluminium rises by 1 C.
1 kg aluminium inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to aluminium
Fig. 6.1
In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
1 kg copper inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to copper
Fig. 6.2
The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the
1 kg aluminium block in (a).
Explain, in terms of thermal capacity, why this is so.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
For
Examiners
Use
Boy A throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
B
A
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) Girl B hears the plop sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she
sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the
pond where she is sitting.
Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest.
Write fastest in one box and slowest in another box. Leave one box empty.
sound wave
light wave
water wave
[2]
(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal
wave.
sound wave
light wave
water wave
[3]
(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a
substance in which to travel.
sound wave
light wave
water wave
UCLES 2004
[1]
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
10
8
A, B, C and D are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. Tests
are performed to find out which bar is which.
Each row of Fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end.
A
repel
attract
no effect
Fig. 8.1
Which bar is which? Complete the lines below.
Bar A is ........................................................................
Bar B is ........................................................................
Bar C is ........................................................................
Bar D is ........................................................................
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[4]
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
Some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste.

The radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks.
The results are shown in the table below.
time/weeks
activity
count/s
800
440
240
130
70
40
(a) Plot these values on Fig. 9.1.
For
Examiners
Use
[3]
activity 800
count/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
6
time/weeks
Fig. 9.1
(b) Draw the best curve through your points.
[1]
(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly
on the graph how you obtained your answer.
half-life of radioactive material = weeks [2]

(d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this
would have affected, if at all,
(i)
the activity readings, .................................................................................................
(ii)
the value of the half-life. ............................................................................................

[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
12
10 (a) One coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. The other coil is connected to a
240 V a.c. mains supply, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V
primary coil
4800 turns
secondary coil
200 turns
to
train
set
Fig. 10.1
(i)
How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Calculate the voltage at which the toy train operates.
toy train operates at V [3]

(iii)
1.
The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage
supplied to the train set? Tick one box.
increases
decreases
stays the same
2.
An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is
110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train
operates.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
13
For
Examiners
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor.
pivoted iron
armature
power supply
for motor
M motor
switch
contacts
relay core
Fig. 10.2
Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works.
A
The armature pivots and the contacts close.
The core of the relay is magnetised.
The switch is closed and the current flows through the coil.
A current flows through the motor, making it work.
The core attracts the top part of the armature.
Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters
in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example.
Stage 1 is sentence
Stage 2 is sentence
Stage 3 is sentence
Stage 4 is sentence
Stage 5 is sentence
UCLES 2004
[3]
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
14
11 (a) The list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an
electric circuit.
capacitor
resistor
thermistor
variable resistor
Which of these has

(i)
a resistance that falls rapidly when the temperature rises,

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a resistance that changes when a sliding contact is moved,

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
a high resistance in the dark but a low resistance in daylight?

...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.
0.50 A
12 V
lamp
Fig. 11.1
(i)
1.
Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.
2.
The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance of lamp =
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
15
(ii)
For
Examiners
Use
A resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
12 V
lamp
Fig. 11.2
1.
State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added.
...........................................................................................................................
2.

...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
3.
Suggest what change might be seen in the lamp.

...........................................................................................................................
[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
[Turn over
16
12 (a) A man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. This is shown from the side in Fig. 12.1.
mirror
Fig. 12.1
(i)
On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip
A of the mans beard will be.
(ii)
On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the mans beard that reflects from
the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish.
Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(iii)
The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is
given to this type of image?
...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the
ray makes with the mirror.
[7]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
17
(b) A girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. Fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in
the mirror.
reflection seen
in mirror
Fig. 12.2
(i)
In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box.

left hand
right hand
(ii)
She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye.
Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection.
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Theory
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

provided.

UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid.
cm3
100
90
80
liquid
Fig. 1.1
(a) What is the volume of liquid in the measuring cylinder?
volume = .............................cm3 [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observers eye could look when taking the reading from
the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct
reading.
[1]
(c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are
added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder.
Calculate the average volume of one drop.
average volume of a drop = ............................cm3 [4]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
(a) In Fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in
order to indicate the gas pressure.
For
Examiners
Use
air pressure
760 mm of mercury
gas pressure
781 mm of mercury
B
A
mercury
Fig. 2.1
For convenience, gas pressure is often expressed in mm of mercury.
The gas pressure is 781 mm of mercury and air pressure is 760 mm of mercury.
(i)
State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.
difference in height = ...mm

(ii)
The temperature of the gas rises.

State what happens to
1. the gas pressure, ..................................................................................................
2. the level A, ............................................................................................................
3. the level B. ...........................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where
the drum is situated.
(i)
State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on
the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force
exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
4
3
A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods.
The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.20 m
0.60 m
0.50 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg.
(i)
Calculate the volume of the bundle of boxes.
volume = .....................................[3]
(ii)
Calculate the density of the corrugated cardboard.
density = .....................................[4]
(b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2
shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard.
thick paper
air
Fig. 3.2
(i)
Here is an incomplete sentence about the paper.

The density of the paper is ................................... that of the corrugated cardboard.
Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box.
greater than
(ii)
the same as
less than
Explain your answer to (b) (i).

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
For
Examiners
Use
Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
State two types of energy that the burning logs possess.

1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the
person sitting nearby.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A spark jumps out of the fire.

(i)
State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its
movement.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The spark lands on the persons hand.

State which method of heat transfer causes the person to feel the spark.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up.
1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing.
...................................................................................................................................
2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
6
5
In order to observe Brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass
box. The box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from above
through a microscope. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State what causes the effect described in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is
seen through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
(a) Here is a list of solid materials. Put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are
good conductors of heat.
For
Examiners
Use
aluminium
copper
cork
gold
polystyrene
wood
[3]
(b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for
(i)
the base of a cooking pot,..........................................................................................
(ii)
the covering on the handle of a kettle. .......................................................................

[2]
(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
All the water heats up quite quickly.
State the process by which heat spreads most rapidly through the water.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
8
7
A girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is
obtained).
girl
explosion
rock face
quarry
1600 m
Fig. 7.1
(a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures
the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang.
The time is 5.0 s.
(i)
Calculate the speed of the sound.
speed of sound = ...m/s [3]

(ii)
State what assumption you have made in your working in (i).

...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suppose the explosion had taken place at Y instead of X.

State two ways in which the girls observations would have been different.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
9
8
For
Examiners
Use
Two light conducting balls A and B are hanging side by side, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
Fig. 8.1
A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below.
In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case.
Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate.
charge on A
charge on B
positive
positive
negative
negative
positive
negative
zero
positive
negative
zero
what is seen to happen
[5]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
10
9
(a) Two 10 resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
3.0 A
10
10
Fig. 9.1
The current at point X is 3.0 A.

(i)
State the current at

1. point Y, ....................A
2. point Z. ....................A
(ii)
Calculate the combined resistance of the two 10 resistors.
combined resistance = ...

[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
11
For
Examiners
Use
(b) The 10 resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
3.0 A
1.5 A
10
10
Fig. 9.2
(i)
The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A.
1. What is the current at Y? Tick one box.
0A
1.5 A
3.0 A
4.5 A
2. State the value of the current at Z. ....................A
(ii)
What is the combined resistance of the two 10 resistors? Tick one box.
0
5
10
20
[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
12
10 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
State which of these three
(a) has a negative charge, ..................................................................................................[1]
(b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1]
(c) has a much smaller mass than the others, ...................................................................[1]
(d) is outside the nucleus,...................................................................................................[1]
(e) are nucleons,.................................................................................................................[2]
(f)
are lost from the nucleus during -particle emission. ...................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
13
For
Examiners
Use
11 The ray diagram in Fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image II of an object OO.
O
D
O
BC
I
Fig. 11.1
(a) State
(i)
which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................
(ii)
which distance is the focal length of the lens.............................................................

[2]
(b) Which of the following words describe the image?

Tick all that are correct.
real
virtual
inverted
upright
enlarged
diminished
[3]
(c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O, the top of the object, to the image.
[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[Turn over
14
12 (a) A small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. A triangular piece of card with a small hole in
each corner is hung on the pin from corner A and allowed to settle, as shown in
Fig. 12.1. A plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line AP is marked on
the card.
A
P
plumb-line
B
Fig.
Fig. 12.1
This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is
marked.
After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2.
A
Fig. 12
B
Fig. 12.2
On Fig. 12.2,
(i)
draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,
(ii)
clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G.
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
15
(b) Fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. Fig. 12.3b shows an identical
ornament filled with coloured glass beads.
State which ornament is more stable, and why.

..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.
B
A
rough
surface
Fig. 12.4
The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and
explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/02 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2
May/June 2005
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

provided.

SPA (MML 8112 3/04) S80361/3
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) A measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3 of water. 20 cm3 of the water is poured into a
beaker.
On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder.
[2]
cm3
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
15
100
10
50
5
Fig. 1.2
(i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation
volume = cross-sectional area length.
Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.
cross-sectional area = .................................

[5]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
3
2
A boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. Fig. 2.1 shows how the
speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its final
destination at 2100 hrs.
For
Examiner's
Use
speed
0
0900
1100
1300
1500
1700
1900
2100
time of day (24 -hour clock)
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate how long the whole journey takes.
time taken = ....................... hours [2]

(b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed.
time of day = ................................. [1]
(c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place.
longest time = ....................... hours [1]
(d) If the speed axis had values marked on it, state
(i) how the graph could be used to find the distance travelled between 0900 hrs and
1130 hrs,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.
..................................................................................................................................
UCLES 2005
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Turn
over
0625/02/M/J/05
4
3
(a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P.
A horizontal 5 N force acts at Q, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
Q
5N
P
pivot
R
Fig. 3.1
Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
Q
5N
P
pivot
R
5N
Fig. 3.2
(i)
Describe what, if anything, will happen to the piece of plastic.

..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
UCLES 2005
On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the
direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force
next to the arrow.
[4]
0625/02/M/J/05
For
Examiner's
Use
5
4
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity.
reservoir
power
station
water flows down
water flows out
Fig. 4.1
Answer the following questions, using words from this list.
chemical
kinetic
electrical
light
gravitational
nuclear
sound
internal (heat)
strain
(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of
energy for this system?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess
because of this movement?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the
turbines possess because of their rotation?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What sort of energy does the power station generate?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted
energy released?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
6
5
(a) On a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. She then screws the cap
back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air.
cap screwed on tightly
air
Fig. 5.1
She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it.
After a while in the Suns rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before.
(i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
For
Examiner's
Use
7
(b) Also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as
shown in Fig. 5.2.
For
Examiner's
Use
water
Fig. 5.2
As the Sun shines on it, the volume of water slowly decreases.
(i) State the name of the process causing this decrease.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the effect of the Suns rays on the water molecules, explain your answer
to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
8
6
The table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day
to cause a current of 0.03 A in a particular thermistor.
time of day (24-hour clock)
0900
1200
p.d. / V
15.0
9.9
resistance /
500
1500
1800
7.5
210
250
(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your
working. Write your answers in the table.
[3]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, plot the four resistance values.
600
resistance /
400
200
0
0600
0900
1200
1500
1800
2100
time of day
Fig. 6.1
(c)
[2]
(i) Draw a smooth curve through your points.

(ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the
points?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
For
Examiner's
Use
9
(d) The thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature
increases.
For
Examiner's
Use
(i) From your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest.
time of day = .............................
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (d)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
10
7
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio
visible
Fig. 7.1
Two of the regions have been labelled.
(a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions.
[4]
(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave.
Tick one box to show which type of wave is not electromagnetic.
microwave
radar
sound
UCLES 2005
[1]
0625/02/M/J/05
11
8
An inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. He cuts a
square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box.
For
Examiner's
Use
A side view of the arrangement is shown in Fig. 8.1.

mirror
box cut
in half
mirror
Fig. 8.1
Fig. 8.2 shows the arrangement, drawn larger.
ray 1 from object

ray 2 from object
45
90
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.
(a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventors head will
be.
[3]
(b) Look at what has happened to the two rays.
What can be said about the image the inventor sees?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
12
9
The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in
Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.
woman
man
249 m
249 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time
when he hears the echo from the wall.
time interval = ........................... s [3]

(b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the
clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall.
How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes.
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s
UCLES 2005
[2]
0625/02/M/J/05
For
Examiner's
Use
13
10 (a)
(i) What name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass
through it?
For
Examiner's
Use
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b)
(i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical
charges to pass through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and
charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
14
For
Examiner's
Use
11 The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is connected up.
2
resistance wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2
resistor? Tick one box.
smaller
same
greater
[1]
(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a
voltmeter connected across the 2 resistor.
State the value of the resistance of the resistance wire.
........................................ [1]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.
combined resistance = ........................................ [2]

(d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in
Fig. 11.2.
resistance wire
2
Fig. 11.2
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
15
(i) What is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in Fig.11.2? Tick one box.
For
Examiner's
Use
zero
1
2
3
(ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in
Fig. 11.2? Tick one box.
zero
less than 0.3 A
0.3 A
more than 0.3 A
[2]
(e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by
measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on
either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.
thin wire
fixing pin
fixing pin
crack
Fig. 11.3
The wall moves and the crack widens slightly.
(i) the length of the wire, ...............................................................................................
(ii) the resistance of the wire. ........................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
[Turn over
16
12 (a) Complete the following table about the particles in an atom. The first row has been filled
in as an example.
particle
proton
mass
charge
location
1 unit
+1 unit
in the nucleus
For
Examiner's
Use
neutron
electron
[6]
(b)
(i) Which of the particles in the table make up an -particle?

..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state
1.
the mass of an -particle, .................................................................................
2.
the charge of an -particle. ...............................................................................

[3]
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
UCLES 2005
0625/02/M/J/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

provided.

MML 8113 3/04 S80925/2
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
The length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 N to 6.0 N are hanging
from it. Fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results.
25
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0
5
load / N
Fig. 1.1
Use the graph to find
(a) the length of the spring with no load attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(b) the length of the spring with 4.5 N attached,
length = ......................... cm [1]
(c) the extension caused by a 4.5 N load.
extension = ................... cm [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
3
2
For
Examiner's
Use
Palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort.
1
IGCSE
Fig. 2.1
The IGCSE school bus drives along the highway.
(a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.
Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.
average speed = .......................... [4]

(b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time
taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b).
The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to
travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
[1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a
Winter Olympics competition.
skate
ski
Fig. 3.1
Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why?
Which? .............................................................................................................................
Why? .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to
drive when it is very windy.
Fig. 3.2
Suggest why they receive this warning.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
5
4
For
Examiner's
Use
A man is delivering a cupboard to a house.
house
step
wheels
Fig. 4.1
(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction
force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push.
force = .................... N [1]
(b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard.
force = .................... N [1]
(c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.
work required = ..................................... [4]

(d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together,
they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard.
Calculate the power developed by each man.
power developed = ................................ [4]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
6
5
The apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson.
flask
air
clamp
tube
water
Fig. 5.1
Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning.
(a) What change is observed in the apparatus?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why this change happens.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Suggest one disadvantage of using this apparatus to measure temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable
resistor is adjusted.
For
Examiner's
Use
power
supply
reed
relay
S
variable resistor
Fig. 6.1
(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The
reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done.
(i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay
close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.
current
in
coil
Fig. 6.2(a)
0
0
time
current
in
motor
Fig. 6.2(b)
0
0
time
On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with
time as the variable resistor is adjusted.
[4]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
8
7
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of
the lens.
[1]
(b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.
object
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2,
(i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the
principal focus on the right of the lens,
[1]
(ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens
and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area,
[1]
(iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis
after it has passed through the lens,
[1]
(iv) draw and label the image.
UCLES 2005
[2]
0625/02/O/N/05
9
8
(a) Two magnets are laid on a bench. End A of an unidentified rod is held in turn above
one end of each magnet, with the results shown in Fig. 8.1.
A
S
bench
For
Examiner's
Use
A
N
south pole
lifted off
bench
north pole
lifted off
bench
Fig. 8.1
(i) Suggest what the unidentified rod is made from.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of
1.
an unmagnetised iron bar, ................................................................................
2.
an uncharged plastic rod. ........................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where
the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been
drawn on one plotting compass.
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the
directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places.
[3]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
10
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. The names are in the wrong order.
Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an
example.
cell
lamp
ammeter
voltmeter
switch
Fig. 9.1
[3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a circuit.
ammeter 1
switch
lamp 2
lamp 1
cell
1.5
ammeter 2
Fig. 9.2
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
11
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols.
[1]
For
Examiner's
Use
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the cell.
[1]
(iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A.
What current does ammeter 2 read?
current = .................... A [1]
(v) One lamp blows, so that its filament breaks.
What happens in the circuit?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
12
10 Some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in Fig. 10.1.
10 cm
4 cm
6.5 cm
Fig. 10.1
Use the information in Fig. 10.1 to calculate
(a) the volume of the block,
volume = ...................... cm3 [2]

(b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ............................. [5]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
13
For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. The tube contains various parts.
B
C
D
A
Fig. 11.1
A spot is formed on the screen by the cathode rays.
(a) What do cathode rays consist of? .............................................................................. [1]
(b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1]
(c)
(i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1]

(ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A potential difference is applied between the two halves of part C.

What effect does this have on the cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why there needs to be a vacuum inside the tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
[Turn over
14
For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) State what is meant by

(i) the half-life of a radioactive substance,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) In a certain laboratory, the background radiation level is 25 counts/minute.
Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance
from a radioactive source in the laboratory.
80
70
count-rate
counts / min
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
time / min
Fig. 12.1
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
120
140
15
(i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is
80 counts/minute.
Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.
count-rate due to source = .................. counts/min [2]

(ii) After one half-life has elapsed, what is the count-rate
1.
due to the source alone,
count-rate due to source = ................. counts/min

2.
measured by the detector?
count-rate measured by detector = ........................ counts/min

[2]
(iii) Use the graph to find the half-life of the source.
half-life of source = ......................... min [1]
(iv) Why does the graph not drop below the 25 counts/minute line?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter
half-life.
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/02/O/N/05
For
Examiner's
Use
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes

Write in dark blue or black pen.
For Examiners Use

MML 10757 3/05 S99216/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
(a) For a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes
by. Unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put the
chair on a large flat board, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
chair
board
soft
ground
Fig. 1.1
Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
For
Examiner's
Use
3
(c) A pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). A valve in the pump becomes blocked,
as shown in Fig. 1.3.
blocked
valve
air
For
Examiner's
Use
piston
direction of motion of piston

Fig. 1.3
(i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air
trapped in the pump.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
4
2
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block.
C
B
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your
values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures.
length of AB = ......................... cm
length of BC = ......................... cm
length of CD = ........................ cm [2]
(b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not
attempt a calculation.
[1]
(c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block?
unit of volume = ........................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
5
3
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance.

Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water.
measuring
cylinder
reading Q
reading P
water
stone
balance
reading S
reading R
(a)
(b)
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone?
reading ...................... and reading ...................... [1]
(c) In a certain experiment,
mass of stone = 57.5 g,
volume of stone = 25 cm3.
(i) Write down the equation linking density, mass and volume.
[1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the stone.
density of stone = ........................ [3]

UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
6
4
For
Examiner's
Use
A piece of fruit is falling from a tree.
Fig. 4.1
(a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy.
Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit.
chemical
electrical
gravitational (PE)
internal (thermal)
kinetic (KE)
light
sound
strain
[4]
(b) Which form of energy increases as the fruit falls?

....................................................................
[1]
(c) Which form of energy decreases as the fruit falls?

....................................................................
[1]
(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?
....................................................................
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[1]
7
5
(a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is
heated.
For
Examiner's
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Most substances expand when they are heated.
(i) State one example where such expansion is useful.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 6.1 shows a section through a series of waves on water.
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully mark and label
(i) the wavelength of the waves,
[2]
(ii) the level of the flat, still water surface after the waves have passed.
[2]
(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
8
7
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism.
screen
air
no
air
rm
al
of
ray ht
lig
blue
Fig. 7.1
With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and
into the air until it reaches the screen.
[3]
(b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of
colours that can be seen on the screen.
(i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box.
convergence
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
[1]
(ii) Which colour is deviated least by the prism? ..................................................... [1]

(iii) Which colour is deviated most by the prism? ..................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
9
8
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) State what is meant by the north pole of a magnet.

..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together.
What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force
[1]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.
magnet
N
iron
bar
Fig. 8.1
(i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the
iron bar.
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the
iron bar.
[1]
(ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is
taken away.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
10
9
(a) The table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances.
substance
half-life
iodine-128
25 minutes
radon-222
3.8 days
strontium-90
28 years
Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample
will have the greatest activity in 1 years time? Explain your answer.
substance with greatest activity after 1 year ....................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive
substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.
Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cows milk.
The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks.
time / days
activity
counts / s
UCLES 2006
14
21
28
1000
547
294
162
88
0625/02/M/J/06
For
Examiner's
Use
11
For
Examiner's
Use
(i) On Fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table.

1000
800
activity
_______
counts / s
600
400
200
0
0
10
15
20
25
time / days
30
Fig. 9.1
(ii) Draw the best-fit curve through your points.
(iii) Use your graph to find the half-life of iodine-131, showing clearly on your graph
how you obtained your value.
half-life of iodine-131 = ....................... days
[6]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
12
For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced.
fluorescent
screen
anode
filament
A
B
D
Fig. 10.1
(i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission.
Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected?
between point .................. and point .................... [1]
(ii) Where does the thermionic emission occur?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
[1]
(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the
electrical connections are correctly made.
[1]
(v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
13
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in Fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube.
A high p.d. is connected between the plates.
For
Examiner's
Use
+V
V
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw the path of the cathode rays.
[3]
(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it.
State why this vacuum is necessary.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
14
For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car.
1000 m
500 m
start
of
town
end
of
town
oil drops
on road
1500 m
pylon
tree
Fig. 11.1
The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road.
(a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town.
(i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.
distance between oil drops = ................... m [2]

(ii) The town is 500 m across. Show that it takes the car 50 s to travel through the
town.
[3]
(b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of
1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all
75 m apart.
Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.
speed of car = ................ m/s [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
15
For
Examiner's
Use
(c) What has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree?
Tick one box.
The car has accelerated.
The car has decelerated.
The car has travelled at constant speed.
[1]
(d) Each of the three parts of the journey takes 50 s.

Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of
the town and the pylon.
average speed = ................ m/s [5]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
[Turn over
16
12 In the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. In the boxes of the right
column are means of protecting against those hazards.
From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an
example.
electrical hazard
means of protection
loose live wire touches

metal case of appliance
fuse or circuit-breaker
in the circuit
worn insulation on cable

to an appliance
use of switches with

a nylon pull-cord
steam in a washroom
condenses inside a switch
earth wire connected to the

metal case of the appliance
wires get hot because

current is too high
visual check of cables

before connecting appliance
[3]
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
UCLES 2006
0625/02/M/J/06
For
Examiner's
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

MML 10757 3/05 S99316/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
A worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. An inspector times the
worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. To start, the stopwatch is set to zero.
After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
55
60
50
10
50
45
40
60
30
10
20
40
15
20
35
30
25
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the reading on the stopwatch.
reading = .......................... s [1]
(b) Calculate the time taken to make 1 bracket.
time taken = .......................... s [2]

(c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.
Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to
your answer.
Does the worker meet his target?
Yes
No
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[4]
For
Examiner's
Use
3
2
For
Examiner's
Use
Some IGCSE students were asked to write statements about mass and weight.
Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct
statements.
Mass and weight are the same thing.
Mass is measured in kilograms.
Weight is a type of force.
Weight is the acceleration caused by gravity.
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[2]
[Turn over
4
3
For
Examiner's
Use
Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor.
speed
m/s
4
2
P
O
S
0
50
170
time / s
100
200
Fig. 3.1
(a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections.
OP ....................................................................................................................................
PQ ....................................................................................................................................
QR ...................................................................................................................................
RS .............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary?
point ................. and point ................. [1]
(c) State the greatest speed reached by the tractor.
greatest speed = ................ m/s [1]
(d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed?
at constant speed for ................... s [1]
(e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s
journey. Do not attempt a calculation.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
5
4
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred

(i) from the Sun to the Earth, ........................................................................................
(ii) through the metal of a cooking pot. ..........................................................................
[2]
(b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the
oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word
equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.
gravitational
potential energy
at the top of the
oscillation
.........................
energy at the
bottom of the
oscillation
.........................
energy at the
bottom of the
oscillation
energy losses
(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly
decreases.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
6
5
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a
pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.
F1
F2
Fig. 5.1
(i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in
equilibrium.
1. There must be no resultant ..................................................
2. There must be no resultant ..................................................
(ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the
pivot P.
Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.
F = ....................................................
(iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P?
...................................................
[4]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
7
6
A woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For
Examiner's
Use
mirror
1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, carefully draw
(i) a clear dot to show the position of the image of her eye,
(ii) the normal to the mirror at the bottom edge of the mirror,
(iii) a ray from her toes to the bottom edge of the mirror and then reflected from the
mirror.
[5]
(b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c)
(i) How far is the woman from her image?

............................ m
(ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between
her and her image is 6.0 m?
distance walked = ............................ m

direction = ............................................
[4]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
8
7
A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo.
He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree.
(i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s.
Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.
obstacle distance = ............................ m

[4]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For
Examiner's
Use
9
(b) A branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. The branch sets
up a wave. The wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of a
moored boat and reflecting back again.
For
Examiner's
Use
water
wave
B
side of
boat
3.0 m
A
Fig. 7.2
The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB.
Calculate the speed of the water-wave.
speed of wave = ......................... m/s [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
10
8
For
Examiner's
Use
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials.
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
copper
plastics
iron
silk
gold
glass
aluminium
ebonite
Fig. 8.1
(i) Which group contains metals?

...................................................
(ii) Which group contains insulators?
...................................................
(iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by
rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth.
...................................................
[3]
(b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate.
One is attracted to the plate and one is repelled.
attracted to plate
charged
plate
repelled by plate
Fig. 8.2
Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a sign on the one that is
negatively charged.
[1]
(c) State what is meant by an electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
11
9
The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching
experiment.
For
Examiner's
Use
100
length / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0
load / N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to
the edge of the grid.
[1]
(b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the extension caused by the 3 N load.
extension = ...................... mm [2]

(d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes
62 mm.
Use the graph to find the weight of the object.
weight of object = ......................... N [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
12
10 A person has a 6 V bell. He hopes to operate the bell from a 240 V a.c. mains supply, with
the help of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V
a.c.
input
primary coil
5000 turns
output
secondary coil
250 turns
Fig. 10.1
(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains
supply.
output voltage = .................... V [3]

(d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For
Examiner's
Use
13
For
Examiner's
Use
11 The table below contains some information about uranium-238.
proton number Z = 92
nucleon number A = 238
decays by emitting -particle
(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.
........................................
[1]
(b) State where in the atom the electrons are to be found.

........................................
[1]
(c) State how many neutrons there are in an atom of uranium-238.

........................................
[1]
(d) State where in the atom the neutrons are to be found.

........................................
[1]
(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an
-particle is emitted.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
[Turn over
14
For
Examiner's
Use
12 Fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit.
ammeter
battery
lamp
15 resistor
Fig. 12.1
(a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way.
What change should be made so that the ammeter works correctly?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What does an ammeter measure?
.............................................................................
[1]
(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit
symbols.
[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
15
(d)
(i) Name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference
(p.d.) across the 15 resistor.
.............................................................
(ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a
position to measure the p.d. across the 15 resistor.
[2]
(e) The potential difference across the 15 resistor is 6 V.

Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .................... A [3]

(f)
Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp.
lamp current = .................... A [1]
(g) Another 15 resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 resistor that is already in the
circuit.
(i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15 resistors in parallel?
Tick one box.
30
15
7.5
zero
(ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/02/O/N/06
For
Examiner's
Use
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/06

*8187295232*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes

DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiners Use
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25803/4
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2
1
The mechanical stop-clock shown in Fig. 1.1 has
and
For
Examiners
Use
a seconds hand, which rotates once every minute

a minutes hand, which rotates once every hour.
start
55
reset
60
stop
5
10
50
minutes hand
15
45
seconds hand
20
40
35
30
25
Fig. 1.1
(a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway
past his school.
He sets the clock to zero (both hands vertical).
As train 1 passes, he starts the clock and leaves it running.
After 35 s, train 2 passes.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2
passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which.
[2]
55
60
5
10
50
15
45
20
40
35
30
25
Fig. 1.2
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
3
(b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3
passes.
[2]
55
60
5
10
50
15
45
20
40
35
25
30
Fig. 1.3
(c) Calculate the time interval between train 2 and train 3.
time interval = ............... min ............... s [1]

[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
In a training session, a racing cyclists journey is in three stages.

Stage 1
He accelerates uniformly from rest to 12 m/s in 20 s.
Stage 2
He cycles at 12 m/s for a distance of 4800 m.
Stage 3
He decelerates uniformly to rest.
For
Examiners
Use
The whole journey takes 500 s.

(a) Calculate the time taken for stage 2.
time = ............... s [2]

(b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclists ride.
14
12
speed /
m/s
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
100
200
300
400
500
time / s
Fig. 2.1
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[3]
5
(c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m.
For
Examiners
Use
[4]
(d) Calculate the average speed of the cyclist.
average speed = ............... m/s [2]

[Total: 11]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
6
3
A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape hinges.
This is shown in Fig. 3.1.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
A
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.1
(a) The cardboard is lifted as shown, using a force applied either at A or B or C.
(i)
On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as
possible.
[2]
(ii)
Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The
cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.2
State the condition for the box of matches to fall over.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape hinge
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.3
(i)
Complete the sentence below, using either the words greater than or the same
as or less than.
In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before
the box of matches falls is the angle
before the box of matches falls in Fig. 3.2.
(ii)
[1]
Give a reason for your answer to (c)(i).

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
4
In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.1
A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree.
(a) (i)
(ii)
Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1]
Explain your answer to (a)(i).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height
as the birds.
How does the increase in the squirrels gravitational potential energy compare with that
of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below.
Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrels potential
energy is ................................................................. .
Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrels potential
energy is ................................................................. .
[2]
(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of
the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The small bird flies back down to the ground.
What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
9
5
(a) Here is a list of descriptions of molecules in matter.

description
For
Examiners
Use
solid
gas
free to move around from place to place

can only vibrate about a fixed position
closely packed
relatively far apart
almost no force between molecules
strong forces are involved between molecules
In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the
molecules in
(i)
a solid,
(ii)
a gas.
[4]
(b) The water in a puddle of rainwater is evaporating.

Describe what happens to the molecules when the water evaporates.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
10
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period
of time.
pressure
time
Fig. 6.1
Which of the following statements could explain this variation of pressure?
Tick two statements.
The temperature of the gas is increasing.
The temperature of the gas is decreasing.
The volume of the container is increasing.
The volume of the container is decreasing.
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston.
cylinder
For
Examiners
Use
piston
gas
Fig. 6.2
The temperature of the gas is raised.
(i)
State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of
the gas constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State your reasons for your answer to (b)(i).

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
12
7
An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A
soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1.
copper tip
metal cylinder
with heater coil
inside
plastic handle
lead to
electricity
supply
Fig. 7.1
Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the
copper tip.
(a) (i)
Suggest why the tip is made of copper.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Suggest why the handle is made of plastic.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the
heat is used to melt the solder.
(i)
State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?
Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think
are correct).
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
UCLES 2007
[2]
0625/02/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
13
(c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even
though the heater coil is constantly generating heat.
The soldering iron is rated at 40 W.
What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box.
greater than 40 W
equal to 40 W
less than 40 W
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
8
A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses
against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening.
3000 rotations / minute
springy
metal strip
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.
number of rotations per second = ....................... [1]

(b) Calculate the frequency of the sound caused by this arrangement.
frequency = ................ Hz [2]

(c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason
for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
15
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows two resistors connected to a 6 V battery.
For
Examiners
Use
2
6V
X
10
Y
Fig. 9.1
(i)
What name do we use to describe this way of connecting resistors?

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Calculate the combined resistance of the two resistors.
combined resistance = .................. [1]

(iii)
Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ...................... [4]

(iv)
Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10
resistor.
potential difference = .................. V [2]

(v)
State the potential difference between terminals X and Y.

.................. V [1]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
16
(b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a
sliding contact.
A
sliding
contact
6V
Fig. 9.2
(i)
(ii)
State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at
1.
end A of the resistor,
.............. V
2.
end B of the resistor.
.............. V
[2]
The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference
between X and Y is 5 V.
On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact.
[1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
17
10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You
are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire.
(a) Describe what you would do.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Name a device which makes use of electromagnetic induction.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the
surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the
north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots.
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the
four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge
of the board.
[5]
(b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field.
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
19
12 Three particles you have learned about are
For
Examiners
Use
protons, neutrons and electrons.

(a) How many of each of these particles
(i)
are found in an -particle,

number of protons
= ...................
number of neutrons = ...................

number of electrons = ...................
(ii)
[1]
are found in a -particle?

number of protons
= ...................
number of neutrons = ...................

number of electrons = ...................
[1]
(b) Sodium-24 can be represented as 24

11Na.
How many of each of these particles are there in a neutral atom of 24
11Na?
number of protons
= .....................
number of neutrons = .....................

number of electrons = .....................
[3]
(c) A nucleus of sodium-24 decays to become magnesium-24, by the emission of one

particle. The equation below describes this change.
The symbol yx represents the emitted particle.
24Na
11
24 Mg
12
+ yx
(i)
State the value of x.
....................
[1]
(ii)
State the value of y.
....................
[1]
(iii)
What type of particle is ? ....................
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/M/J/07
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/07

*8902325113*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
part question.
For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

SP (MML 13331 4/06) T25940/5
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The metal can next to it has a crosssectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder
90
80
70
60
metal
can
50
40
liquid
30
20
10
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the volume of the liquid.
volume = ........................................ cm3 [1]
(b) The liquid is poured into the metal can.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can.
[2]
(c) Complete the following sentence.

The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is than
the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder.
[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A theatre measures 100 m 80 m 25 m. The air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it
is cool.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) Calculate the volume of the air in the theatre.
volume of air = .......................................... m3 [1]

(b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.
mass of air = ................................................ [4]

(c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.
State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)
is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size.
glass tube
mercury
reservoir
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to
calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ..................................... cm Hg [2]

(b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
5
(c) On another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in
Fig. 3.1.
For
Examiners
Use
On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might
be.
[2]
(d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the
tube.
Explain why the barometer no longer functions.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
A diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see Fig. 4.1).

diesel
engine
slipway
s
h
Fig. 4.1
The boat finishes in the position shown by the broken outline.
(a) On Fig. 4.1, carefully mark
(i)
the weight W of the boat, using an arrow labelled W,
[1]
(ii)
the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F.
[1]
(b) State, in terms of W, F, h and s, how you could calculate

(i)
the work done lifting the weight of the boat,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the work done against the friction force,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful
power output of the diesel engine?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
capillary tube
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 130 140 150
liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments.
State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in
(i)
pure melting ice (label this point ICE),
[1]
(ii)
steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM).
[1]
(c) A liquid-in-glass thermometer makes use of the expansion of a liquid to measure

temperature. Other thermometers make use of other properties that vary with
temperature.
In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be
used to measure temperature.
example
expansion
OF
1.
OF
2.
OF
a liquid
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
8
6
A motorcyclist drives along a straight road. Fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of
his ride.
start
0m/s
after 10 s
18 m / s
after 5 s
9m/s
Fig. 6.1
(a) From the information on Fig. 6.1,
(i)
describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,
constant speed
uniform acceleration
uniform deceleration
[1]
(ii)
estimate the average speed of the motorcyclist during the 10 s,
average speed = ........................................ m / s [1]

(iii)
calculate the distance travelled during the 10 s.
distance travelled = ............................................ m [2]

(b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled
in the first 10 s of the journey.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
A girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond.
Fig. 7.1
(a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the
wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.
(i)
The wave travels at 5 cm / s.

Calculate how far the wave travels in 0.3 s.
distance travelled = .......................................... cm [1]

(ii)
On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown.
[2]
Fig. 7.2
(b) A ringing bell also sends out waves in all directions.
State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than
the fact that one is created in air and the other in water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
8
An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY.
Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image.
X
I
O
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1,
(i)
clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens,
[3]
(ii)
draw a third ray from X to Y.
[1]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) The following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images.
Tick any which apply to the image shown in Fig. 8.1.
real
virtual
enlarged
diminished
inverted
upright
image distance less than object distance
image distance more than object distance
[4]
(c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further
away from the lens.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
12
9
A thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water.

The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
A
V
thermometer
water
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 9.1
At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of
the voltage is noted.
temperature / C
voltage / V
15
30
45
60
75
90
18.8
8.8
4.7
2.6
1.5
1.2
(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature.
[4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
25
voltage / V
20
15
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
temperature / oC
Fig. 9.2
(b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA
(i)
at 40 C,
voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(ii)
at 80 C.
voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor
(i)
at 40 C,
resistance at 40 C = .....................................................
(ii)
at 80 C.
resistance at 80 C = .....................................................
[5]
(d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort
used in this experiment.
The thermistor in this experiment is a device whose resistance
as the temperature increases.
[1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.
(i)
On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil.
[4]
(ii)
A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil.
Which one makes the field stronger? ................................................................. [1]
(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then
closed.
Fig. 10.2
The iron rods move apart. Suggest why this happens.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
15
11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.
The results are shown in the table.
time / minutes
activity
10
20
30
40
50
60
461
332
229
162
106
81
51
For
Examiners
Use
count / s
(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = .................................. minutes [1]
(b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the
start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.
Suggest what values might be obtained for
(i)
the activity at the start of the second experiment,

................................... count / s [1]
(ii)
the half-life of the material in the second experiment.

................................... minutes [1]
(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this
activity.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
[Turn over
16
12 A beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. The beam
is surrounded by four metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 as shown in Fig. 12.1.
On Fig. 12.1, the beam is shown as the dot at the centre.
P2
P1
P3
P4
Q
Fig. 12.1
(a) Cathode rays are produced by thermionic emission.

What is the name of the particles which make up cathode rays?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3.
State what happens to the beam of cathode rays.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can
now be deflected down the page towards Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
UCLES 2007
0625/02/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

*3498617057*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
For Examiners Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows a uniform rod.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1
(i)
Use your rule to find the length of the rod.

length = ...........................................cm
(ii)
[1]
On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C.
[1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker
at one end.
Fig. 1.2
Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass
of this rod will be.
[2]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
3
2
A motorcyclist is travelling along a country road, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
B
1375 m
Fig. 2.1
The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B.
1.
2.
3.
The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to
25 m/s in 10 s.
It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.
It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A.
35
30
speed
m/s 25
20
15
10
5
0
time/s
Fig. 2.2
(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2,
(i)
a suitable time scale,
[1]
(ii)
the graph of the motion of the motorcycle.
[5]
(b) The distance from A to B is 1375 m.

Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to
the nearest m/s.
UCLES 2008
average speed = ..........................................m/s [4]

[Total: 10]
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
4
3
A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
b
c
a
F1
F2
F3
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which of the forces exert(s)

a clockwise moment,
...................
an anticlockwise moment? ...................
[3]
(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.
Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the
beam? Explain your answer.
Which distance? ..............................................................................................................
Explanation
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.
?
Fig. 3.2
The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.
He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he
cannot exactly balance the beam.
His best attempts are
masses used
effect
10 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g, 2 g
beam tips down slightly on the left-hand side
20 g, 10 g
beam tips down slightly on the right-hand side
Estimate the mass of the object.

mass = ............................................. g [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform

of a special tower, in order to reach a
high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
Which form of energy, possessed by the
electricians body,
(i)
is greater at the top of the tower than

it was at the bottom,
..................................................... [1]
(ii)
is less at the top of the tower than it

was at the bottom?
..................................................... [1]
(b) One of the electricians assistants also

climbs up to the platform. The assistant
weighs less than the electrician.
Which of the two people does the most
work climbing up to the platform, and
why?
Which person? ........................................
Why? .......................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
............................................................. [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.
Which quantities does he need to know in order to do this?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
5
In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central
mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
central
mass
orbiting
particles
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the name given to the central mass.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the orbiting particles.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made.
........................................................... and .................................................................... [2]
(d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in
radioactive decay.
Which particle is this? ................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens.
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.1
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is
known.
[1]
(b) On Fig. 6.2,
(i)
copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image
formed by the lens,
[1]
(ii)
mark and label the image.
[2]
(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the
focused image.
[1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
7
(a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the
three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas.
In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the lefthand column.
condition of the molecules
state in which the

substance exists
The molecules are a great distance apart, moving

very rapidly, with negligible interaction. The
substance occupies all the space available.
The molecules are only able to vibrate rapidly about
fixed positions. The substance does not need a
container to maintain its shape.
The molecules move about amongst each other,
with attractive forces between them. The substance
does not necessarily fill its container.
[2]
(b) (i)
What is the state of matter just before a substance boils?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Describe what happens to the molecules during boiling.

..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii)
State two differences between boiling and evaporating.

1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
What is the state of matter just before a substance melts?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Aluminium melts at 660 C. At what temperature does it freeze?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
9
8
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between
these is divided into equal divisions.
-10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 8.1
A thermometer is being calibrated with the Celsius scale.
(i)
1.
Write down another name for the lower fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.
How is this temperature achieved?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
3.
What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [1]
1.
Write down another name for the upper fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2.
How is this temperature achieved?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
3.
What is the temperature of this fixed point?................................................... [2]
(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at
room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped,
the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.
Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.
The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the
aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block.
[1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
9
Fuses are often included in circuits.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1]
(b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how
a fuse protects a circuit.
A
fuse wire heats up
B
circuit is broken,
so current stops
C
fuse wire melts
D
current becomes
too high
On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.
State two possible outcomes of this mistake.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
11
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a series circuit.
For
Examiners
Use
R1
R2
Fig. 10.1
Resistance R1 = 25 and resistance R2 = 35 . The cell has zero resistance.
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of R1 and R2.
resistance = ...........................................
[2]
(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure
the potential difference between X and Y.
[1]
(c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
(i)
current = .................................................. [4]

(ii)
State the value of the potential difference across the cell.

potential difference = ............................................ V
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[1]
[Turn over
12
(d) The resistance of the variable resistor is increased.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
What happens to the current in the circuit? Tick one box.

increases
stays the same
decreases
(ii)
[1]
What happens to the voltmeter reading? Tick one box.

increases
stays the same
decreases
(iii)
[1]
State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V.
resistance = ............................................
[1]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
13
11 (a) An experimenter uses a length of wire ABC in an attempt to demonstrate
electromagnetic induction. The wire is connected to a sensitive millivoltmeter G.
N
S
Fig. 11.1
Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the
expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic
field.
(i)
Explain why there is no deflection shown on G.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
What change should be made in order to observe a deflection on G?

..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Name one device that makes use of electromagnetic induction.

...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes
with time.
time/minutes
activity
counts/s
128
30
58
60
25
90
11
120
Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.
half-life = .........................................min [2]
(b) The half-lives of various substances are given below.
radon-220
iodine-128
radon-222
strontium-90
(i)
55 seconds
25 minutes
3.8 days
28 years
If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
A sample of each of these substances is obtained.

Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one
year, and why?
Which? .....................................................................................................................
Why? ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08

*5545678956*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
question.
For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards
across the river.
11
12
10
11
2
2
3
10
3
12
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
When he starts fishing one morning, the boys wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
When he finishes his mornings fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(a) For how many minutes was the boy fishing?
number of minutes = ................................................ [3]

(b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,
load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.
Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy
was fishing.
number of journeys = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m 1.5 m 1.0 m. It is full of water.
For
Examiners
Use
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the volume of the tank.
volume = ................................................ [3]

(b) Water has a density of 1000 kg/m3.
Calculate the mass of water in the tank.
mass = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
4
3
A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it.

Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load.
before
For
Examiners
Use
after
W
X
Z
load
Fig. 3.1
(a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order
to find the extension of the spring.
distance = ................................................ [1]
(b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains
the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.
3
extension / cm
2
0
0
4 load / N 5
Fig. 3.2
(i)
When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension
of the spring is 1.7 cm.
Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.
weight = ............................................ N [1]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
5
(ii)
State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it.
tension = ................................................ [2]
(iii)
The load is pulled down further.

State what happens to the tension in the spring.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
After being pulled down, the load is released.

State what happens to the load immediately after it is released.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the
visible light part of the spectrum.
microwaves
infra
-red
visible
X-rays
-rays
visible
M
Fig. 4.1
(a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1.
In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions.
[2]
(b) Write long wavelength next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic
spectrum.
[1]
(c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions.
microwaves ......................................................................................................................
infra-red ...........................................................................................................................
-rays ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) State the colour you would expect to find
(i)
at end M of the visible spectrum, ..............................................................................
(ii)
at end N of the visible spectrum. ..............................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect
alternatives. An example has been given to help you.
large
(example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle.
thin
(i)
(ii)
reflected
An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle.
dispersed
[1]
An echo from a stationary obstacle has

a greater frequency than
the same frequency as
a smaller frequency than
the sound hitting the obstacle.
[1]
(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed
of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged
together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown
in Fig. 5.1.
school
wall
240 m
Fig. 5.1
Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch.
B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s.
(i)
How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s?
(ii)
Calculate the speed of sound.
................................ m [1]
speed of sound = ......................................... m/s [3]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
(iii)
The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to
330 m/s.
Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students value was different from
what was expected.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is
incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum.
X
glass
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 6.1
(a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured
in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure.
[2]
(b) A small quantity of air is introduced into X.
(i)
State what happens to the mercury level in the tube.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.
On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube.
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
9
(d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum.
Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the
effect of changing the external conditions.
rises
falls
stays the same
effect on the level of the

mercury in the left-hand tube
change
effect on the level of the

mercury in the right-hand tube
rises
temperature
rises
[4]
[Total: 10]
7
This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light
striking a plane mirror.
ray of
light
mirror
A
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1,
(i)
draw the normal to the mirror at A,
[1]
(ii)
draw the path of the reflected ray,
[1]
(iii)
mark and label the angle of incidence, i,
[1]
(iv)
mark and label the angle of reflection, r.
[1]
(b) State the equation that links i and r.

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 7.1
(i)
draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to
the right of A,
[1]
(ii)
draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror.
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1]
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
8
(a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
N
For
Examiners
Use
S
iron rod
Fig. 8.1
(i)
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the
iron rod.
[1]
(ii)
What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel
[1]
(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
N
iron rod
Fig. 8.2
(i)
On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod.
(ii)
What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.
[1]
nothing
they attract
they repel
[1]
(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
N
Fig. 8.3
What happens to the two magnets? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[1]
11
(d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in
Fig. 8.4.
N
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 8.4
What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
they repel
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
9
A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either
switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs.
The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1.
X
6V
lamp
switch 2
a
b
6 V supply
switch 1
A
B
Fig. 9.1
(a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The lamp has a resistance of 4.0 .
current = ................................................ [4]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
13
(d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply.
Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in
Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer.
X
connection 2
connection 1
Fig. 9.2
Which is best? .................................................................................................................

Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor
on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider.
pivoted iron
armature
6V
power supply
for motor
M motor
switch
relay core
contacts
Fig. 10.1
(a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just
operates.
[1]
(b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply.
A
6V
lamp
240V
mains
B
iron
8000 turns
Fig. 11.1
(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesnt it
matter?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [3]

(d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
16
12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by
the symbol
For
Examiners
Use
218
84
Po
(a) State the proton number of this nuclide.
........................ [1]
(b) State the nucleon number of this nuclide.
........................ [1]
(c) The nucleus decays according to the following equation.

218
84
Po
214
82
Pb + emitted particle
(i)
State the proton number of the emitted particle.
.......................... [1]
(ii)
State the nucleon number of the emitted particle.
.......................... [1]
(iii)
Name the emitted particle. Tick one box.

-particle
-particle
neutron
proton
[1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
0625/02/O/N/08

*4743961177*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2009
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use
1
2
appropriate units.
3
part question.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

SPA SHW 00151 2/08 T76303/3
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy
road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles
per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings.
11
12
10
appearance of clock at beginning of investigation
3
8
4
7
11
12
10
appearance of clock at end of investigation
3
8
4
7
vehicles counted travelling left to right = 472

vehicles counted travelling right to left = 228
(a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.
counting time = ......................................... min [1]

(b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.
vehicles per minute = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 4]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the
Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions
of the quantities in the left-hand column.
For
Examiners
Use
Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you.
There is only one definition for each quantity.
work
force of gravity on a body

how big the body is
mass
power of a given force

weight mass
weight
amount of matter in a body

force distance moved
density
mass volume
the acceleration due to gravity
[3]
[Total: 3]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
4
3
The car in Fig. 3.1 is on a level road.
For
Examiners
Use
500 N
frictional forces
2000 N force
propelling car forwards
Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force on the car.
resultant force = ............................................. N [1]

(b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.
travels forward at constant speed
travels forward with increasing speed
travels forward with decreasing speed
travels backward at constant speed
travels backward with increasing speed
travels backward with decreasing speed
remains at rest
[1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
5
(c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the
car?
For
Examiners
Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a
gas supply.
mm
300
250
from a
gas supply
200
150
100
50
mercury
0
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.
difference = ......................................... mm [1]
(b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of
mercury?
excess pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]
(c) The atmospheric pressure is 750 mm of mercury.
Calculate the actual pressure of the gas supply.
actual pressure = ....................... mm of mercury [1]

(d) The gas pressure now decreases by 20 mm of mercury.
On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels.
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a typical laboratory thermometer.
C 10
10
20
30
40
50
For
Examiners
Use
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the thermometer has
(i)
thin walls on its bulb,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
thick walls on its stem,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
a narrow capillary tube along which the liquid expands.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Suggest a liquid which the thermometer might contain.

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put
on between these two marks.
State the values of
(i)
the ice point, ......................................
(ii)
the steam point. .................................

[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take
measurements.
time
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how you deduced your answer to (a)(i).

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i)
State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how you deduced your answer to (b)(i).

............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
9
(c) (i)
How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half
its initial value?
For
Examiners
Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The wave has a frequency of 300 Hz.

1.
What is meant by a frequency of 300 Hz ?

...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [1]
2.
How long does 1 cycle of the wave take?

..................................................................................................................... [1]
3.
How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were
longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and
then further apart.
(i)
Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................
(ii)
Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules?
(iii)
The student gives light as another example of longitudinal waves.

Is this correct?
.................
.................
[2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
10
7
Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from
a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block.
beam of light
apartment
block
apartment
block
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
UCLES 2009
On Fig. 7.1,
1.
draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H,
[1]
2.
label the angle of incidence of the beam of light on window H.
[1]
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
11
(ii)
State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection.
................................................. [1]
(iii)
For
Examiners
Use
Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H?
................................................. [1]
(iv)
Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?

................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.
mirror
card
Fig. 7.2
The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the reflection of the letter P.
[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
12
8
(a) Four rods are shown in Fig. 8.1.
plastic rod
For
Examiners
Use
iron rod
wooden rod
brass rod
Fig. 8.1
State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be
(i)
magnetised by stroking it with a magnet,

................................................. [1]
(ii)
charged by stroking it with a dry cloth.

................................................. [1]
(b) Magnets A and B in Fig. 8.2 are repelling each other.
N
magnet A
magnet B
Fig. 8.2
The north pole has been labelled on magnet A.

On Fig. 8.2, label the other three poles.
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[1]
13
(c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other.
For
Examiners
Use
+
rod C
rod D
Fig. 8.3
On Fig. 8.3, show the charge on rod D.
[1]
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north.
N
Fig. 8.4
A brass rod is positioned in an east-west direction. A plotting compass is put at each
end of the brass rod, as shown in Fig. 8.5.
brass rod
plotting
compass
Fig. 8.5
On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a simple circuit.
For
Examiners
Use
6V
reading
50 mA
A
R
Fig. 9.1
(a) What is the value of
(i)
the e.m.f. of the battery,

................................................. [1]
(ii)
the current in the circuit?

................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the resistance R of the resistor.
R = ................................................ [3]
(c) State how the circuit could be changed to
(i)
halve the current in the circuit,

............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
reduce the current to zero.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
15
(d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown
in Fig. 9.2.
For
Examiners
Use
6V
students
incorrect
connection
A
R
Fig. 9.2
(i)
Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
What effect would this current have on the circuit?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
16
10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric
current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by
putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position.
pan
current
out
current
in
Fig. 10.1
(a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I.
His results are given below.
(i)
UCLES 2009
I/A
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
F/N
0.012
0.023
0.035
0.047
On the grid of Fig. 10.2,

1.
mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values,
[2]
2.
plot the points on your grid,
[2]
3.
draw the best straight line through your points.
[1]
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
17
For
Examiners
Use
F/N
I/A
0
Fig. 10.2
(ii)
From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A.
force = ............................................. N [1]
(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor
balance.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
[Turn over
18
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are
empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this
question. Not all of the boxes will be used.
heater filament
cathode rays
anode
grid
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box.
[1]
(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.
Write UP AND DOWN in the appropriate box.
[1]
(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it.
Write GLOWS in the appropriate box.
[1]
(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated.
(e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays.
(f)
[1]
................................................ [1]
What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box.
air
alpha particles
hydrogen
steam
vacuum
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
19
12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations.
For
Examiners
Use
Complete the table by filling in the missing properties.

alpha
nature
2 protons +
2 neutrons
approximate mass
charge
ability to penetrate
solids
beta
gamma
[2]
1 unit
positive
[2]
[2]
very penetrating
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/M/J/09
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/09

*3735851861*
0625/02
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

part question.

DCA (SHW 00151 2/08) 12741/5
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing some water.

A student allows 200 drops of water to fall into the water in the measuring cylinder. Fig. 1.2
shows the measuring cylinder after the addition of the drops.
cm3
cm3
50
50
40
40
30
30
20
original level
of water
20
final level
of water
10
10
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
(a) State
(i)
the original volume of water in the cylinder,

................................................ cm3
(ii)
the final volume of water in the cylinder.

................................................ cm3
[1]
(b) Calculate the volume of water added.
volume added = ......................................... cm3 [1]

(c) Calculate the average volume of one of the drops of water.
average volume = ......................................... cm3 [2]

[Total: 4]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is
bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
pole
Fig. 2.1
(a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which form of energy is stored in the pole because it is bent?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done
lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?
............................................................. and .............................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girls bicycle ride and the axes for the
corresponding speed/time graph.
distance
from
starting
point
0A
time
time
speed
Fig. 3.1
(a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.
(i)
Answer the following questions for the time interval AB.

1.
What is happening to the distance from the starting point?

...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
2.
What can you say about the speed of the bicycle?

..................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
5
(ii)
On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could
show the speed during AB.
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
(b) On the speed/time axes of Fig. 3.1

(i)
draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC,
[1]
(ii)
draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD.
[2]
(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?
distance from starting point = ................................................ [1]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
6
4
(a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N.
12 N
15 N
6N
weight = 12 N
Fig. 4.1
(i)
State what happens to the object.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to
a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force.
[2]
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the
letter G.
[1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the
upper deck.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.2
(i)
What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars
are loaded?
Tick one box.
rises
stays at the same height
falls
[1]
(ii)
How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?
Tick one box.
more stable
no effect
less stable
[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
8
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A.
For
Examiners
Use
temperature
A
C
B
D
time
Fig. 5.1
(i)
(ii)
Describe what is happening to the substance between

1.
A and B, . ..........................................................................................................
2.
B and C, ...........................................................................................................
3.
C and D. ...........................................................................................................
[3]
During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to
the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.
between A and B
between B and C
between C and D
[2]
(iii)
What is the state of the substance at D?

................................................. [1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
9
(b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it
again reaches the temperature it had at A.
For
Examiners
Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the
substance.
[2]
temperature
time
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
10
6
A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
For
Examiners
Use
handle
bung
A
piston
air
Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is
pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B.
Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as
the piston is moved.
greater with
piston at A
greater with
piston at B
same with
piston at A or B
the average speed of the air molecules

the frequency with which the air
molecules hit the walls and the piston
the pressure of the air in the pump
[3]
(b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.
Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes.
friction force between bung and hole
resultant due to forces of air on each side of piston
resultant due to forces of air on each side of bung
gravitational force on bung
force of air on walls
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
11
7
Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a
plane mirror.
lens
For
Examiners
Use
image
r
torch
p
plane
mirror
hole cut
in card
Fig. 7.1
The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real
experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the
centre of the lens.
(a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.
................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F.
[1]
(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.
erect
inverted
real
virtual
[2]
(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.
State what, if anything, happens to the image on the card if
(i)
the plane mirror is moved slightly to the left,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the lens is moved slightly to the left.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside.
steep
mountainside
student
bell tower
and bell
990 m
990 m
Fig. 8.1
The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.
(a) Explain why the student hears two rings.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State which of the sounds is loudest, and why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
13
(c) Sound in that region travels at 330 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the first time.
For
Examiners
Use
time interval = ............................................. s [2]

(ii)
Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the second time.
time interval = ............................................. s [1]

(iii)
Calculate the time interval between the two sounds.
time interval = ............................................. s [1]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
14
9
(a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery.
For
Examiners
Use
Complete the statement under each circuit.
R1
R3
R2
R4
Resistors R1 and R2 are
Resistors R3 and R4 are
connected in
connected in
[1]
Fig. 9.1
(b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so
low that it can be ignored.
280
12 V
A
200
Fig. 9.2
(i)
Calculate the total resistance in the circuit.
resistance = ............................................ [2]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
15
(ii)
Calculate the current delivered by the battery.
For
Examiners
Use
current = ................................................ [4]

(iii)
Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 resistor.
p.d. = ............................................. V [2]

(iv)
Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 resistor is
the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use
for this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a diagram of a transformer.
For
Examiners
Use
30 turns
300 turns
12 V
a.c.
a.c. voltmeter
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer.
[1]
Name a suitable material from which the core could be made.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State the purpose of the core.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ............................................. V [3]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
17
11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in
Fig. 11.1.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 11.1
The drill mechanism itself is guaranteed to be electrically safe.
Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his
purchase is electrically safe.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3. .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
[Turn over
18
12 A radioactive material, X, has a half-life of 2 minutes.
At the beginning of an experiment, a sample of the material produces a count-rate of
800 counts / s.
Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life
has elapsed.
900
800
700
600
500
count-rate
counts / s
400
300
200
100
0
0
time t / minutes
Fig. 12.1
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
10
12
14
For
Examiners
Use
19
(a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve
through your points.
[3]
(b) From your graph find
(i)
the count-rate from the sample after 9 minutes,

count-rate = ................................. counts / s [1]
(ii)
the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.
time = ................................... minutes [1]
(c) A second sample of this radioactive material X gives an initial count-rate of

400 counts / s.
What will be the half-life of this sample?
half-life = ................................... minutes [1]
(d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and
prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the
mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive
material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.
(i)
Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the
dumped mud.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable
for tracking the mud.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2009
0625/02/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/09

*2425863101*
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes


DCA (SHW 00380 1/09) 20403/6
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the
vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road.
You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.
(a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle,
and which instruments would you use to measure them?
quantity measured
instrument used
[4]
(b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use
symbols, state what your symbols mean.
[1]
(c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of
90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.
(i)
Why is the average speed less than the top speed?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The journey between the towns takes 20 minutes.

Calculate the distance between the towns.
distance = .......................................... km [3]

[Total: 9]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
bench top
0
29.8
cm
spring
pin
62.8
cm
metre rule
load = 5.5 N
100
100
Fig. 2.1
Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.
When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring.
extension = .......................................... cm [2]

(b) The law relating extension to load is given by the equation
load = constant extension.
(i)
Calculate the numerical value of the constant.
constant = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
Suggest a suitable unit for the constant.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
4
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine.
For
Examiners
Use
useful output
energy U
input energy I
wasted energy W
Fig. 3.1
Write down the equation linking I, U and W.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of
goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
motor
pulley
cable
chains
packing case
pallet
ground
Fig. 3.2
The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N.
(i)
State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a
steady speed.
tension force = ............................................. N [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
5
(ii)
When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to
(b)(i)?
For
Examiners
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load
is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight,
does he need to measure?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the
power required to lift the load?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase
in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below.
The electrical energy supplied to the motor is the
increase in energy of the load.
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
6
4
(a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator.

A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
signal generator
amplitude frequency
Fig. 4.1
By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of
the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.
The person moves to a position further away from the loudspeaker.
(i)
State what, if anything, happens to

1.
the pitch of the sound heard,

...........................................................................................................................
2.
the loudness of the sound heard.

..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound
heard in the new position is the same as in the original position?
frequency control ......................................................................................................
amplitude control ................................................................................................ [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her
hand.
For
Examiners
Use
rock face
Fig. 4.2
The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.
(i)
Why did the sound return to her?

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a childs toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a
metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium.
metal rod
metal weight
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy.
[1]
(b) The metal weight falls off the tail.
(i)
On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass.
[1]
(ii)
What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
9
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk.
For
Examiners
Use
section through
beaker
layer of corrugated
cardboard stuck to
a layer of smooth
cardboard, with air
trapped between them
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It
has a thin plastic lid.
(i)
State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the
person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i)
State the meaning of the term thermal capacity.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same
internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low
thermal capacity.
When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always
drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.
State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least
fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why.
mug ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Total: 8]
[Turn over
10
7
The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has 240 V, 100 W marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of
fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.1
(a) (i)
Fig. 7.2
To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.
Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can
feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.
By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box.
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
[1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) (i)
The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is
operating normally.
For
Examiners
Use
State the value of

1.
the normal operating potential difference across the lamp,

...........................................................................................................................
2.
the power of the lamp.

..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
When the lamp is working normally, its resistance is 576 .

Calculate the current in the lamp.
current = ................................................ [4]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows how an image is formed by a converging lens.

24 cm
For
Examiners
Use
10 cm
8cm
I
O
F2
F1
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the value of the focal length of the lens.
focal length = .......................................... cm [1]
(b) The object O is moved a small distance to the left.
State two things that happen to the image I.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Points F1 and F2 are marked on Fig. 8.1.
(i)
State the name we give to these two points.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2.
Continue your ray until it meets the image.
[4]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
13
9
(a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads
SAFETY WARNING
For
Examiners
Use
This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be
operated by pull-cord switches.
(i)
Explain why it might be dangerous to use a push-button switch in a washroom.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Why is it safe to use a pull-cord switch in a washroom?

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working
normally.
The cable fitted to the heater has a maximum safe current of 12 A.
Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable
of the heater? Tick one box.
5A
10 A
13 A
20 A
[1]
(c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table
lamp.
(i)
Why do cookers need a much thicker cable?

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Total: 6]
[Turn over
14
10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a
240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and
Z on Fig. 10.1.
P
W
X
Y
Z
240 V
primary coil
500 turns
secondary coil
500 turns
Fig. 10.1
Between W and X there are 300 turns.

Between X and Y there are 175 turns.
Between Y and Z there are 25 turns.
(a) A person wishes to run a 12 V electric bell, using the transformer.
Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?
Show your working.
bell connected between terminal ............. and terminal ............ [4]

(b) State the voltage between terminals W and Z.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
15
(c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made.
name ................................................................................................................................
For
Examiners
Use
material ...................................................................................................................... [2]

(d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a
lamp with a white-hot filament.
glass
prism
glass
lens
screen
P
A
visible spe
ctrum
B
Q
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 11.1
(a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the
prism.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) What colour light will be seen at
(i)
edge A of the spectrum, ...........................................................................................
(ii)
edge B of the spectrum? ..........................................................................................

[2]
(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.
(i)
On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross () the position where the thermometer will show
its largest reading.
[2]
(ii)
What type of radiation would cause this high reading?

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
17
12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market.
The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is
radioactive.
For
Examiners
Use
In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets
of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
radiation
detector
watch
counter
sheet
Fig. 12.1
The results of his investigation are given in the following table.
material
effect
sheet of paper
no observable change in count rate
1 mm thick sheet of aluminium
a noticeable decrease in the count rate
1 mm thick sheet of lead
considerable decrease in the count rate

but still above background
(i)
From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the
watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
The back of the watch is made of steel 1 mm thick.

State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
[Turn over
18
(b) Radioactive materials are stored in a cupboard.
(i)
Which of the symbols shown in Fig. 12.2 is used on the door of the cupboard to
warn of the radiation hazard? Tick one box.
Fig. 12.2
[1]
(ii)
State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive
substances in the cupboard.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/M/J/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

*2512877189*
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (NF/SW) 24995/3
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
(a) (i)
Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a
ruler. They are not shown full size.
Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers
in cm.
length of block ................. cm [1]
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
millimetres
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300
millimetres
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Fig. 1.1
width of block ...................... cm [1]
Fig. 1.2
(ii)
When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.
Calculate the volume of the block.
volume = ................................................. cm3 [2]

UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
3
(b) Another block has a volume of 20 cm3.
Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance.
block
40 50 60 70
grams
Fig. 1.3
Find the density of this block.
density = ......................................................... [4]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
4
2
A boy cycles a distance of 960 m from home to school in 8.0 minutes.

(a)
Calculate his average speed for the journey.
average speed = ......................................................... [4]

(b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of
the work he has done.
Against which force has this work been done?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
(a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of
how the energy is converted to electrical energy.
Which energy resource are you describing? ............................................................................
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
5
4
Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus
of the lens.
Fig. 4.1
(a) What name do we give to the distance PF? ....................................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the
broken line.
[2]
(c) A flat white screen is placed at F, parallel to the broken line.
Describe what is seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The screen is moved so that it is along the broken line.
Describe what is now seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
6
5
Here is a list of different types of radiation.

alpha (),
beta (),
gamma (),
infra-red,
radio,
ultra-violet,
visible,
(a) Underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations.
X-rays
[2]
(b) Which radiation is the most penetrating? ............................................................................ [1]

(c) Which radiation has the longest wavelength? ..................................................................... [1]
(d) Which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4He nuclei? ............................. [1]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 6.1 shows two experiments to investigate energy transfer in water.
water
water
ice
gentle
heating
ice trapped by
small piece of
wire gauze
gentle
heating
Experiment 1
Cold water is gently heated
at the bottom. The ice at the
top melts before the water
boils.
Experiment 2
Cold water is gently heated
at the top. The ice trapped
at the bottom remains solid,
even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i)
Name the principal process in Experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the
bottom to the ice at the top.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
7
(ii)
Describe how the process in (b)(i) occurs.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest two reasons why the ice in Experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
8
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
9
7
(a) In Fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. The angle of the refracted ray to
the normal is 40.
On Fig. 7.1, mark clearly the angle of incidence i.
[1]
ray of
light
air
40
water
Fig. 7.1
(b) In Fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of
40 to the normal.
air
40
water
Fig. 7.2
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air.
[2]
(ii)
The angle in the water in Fig. 7.2 is increased from 40 to 70, and the ray no longer
emerges into the air.
State what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. Some distance away is a
vertical cliff.
cliff
workman
boy
girl
Fig. 8.1
(a) A boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. It takes 1.5 s for
the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy.
(i)
What does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Calculate the distance between the post and the boy.
distance = ..................................................... m [3]

(b) A girl is also watching the workman. She is standing the same distance behind the post as
the boy is in front of it. She hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the
post.
(i)
Why does she hear two sounds?

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
11
(ii)
How long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds?
girl hears first sound after ............... s
girl hears second sound after ............... s [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet.
Fig. 9.1
(i)
On Fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters N and S.
[2]
(ii)
A small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at A.

What, if anything, happens to it?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
A small piece of positively charged plastic is placed at B.

What, if anything, happens to it?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows an electromagnet.

coil
core
Fig. 9.2
(i)
What must be done to magnetise the core?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
Suggest the material from which the core should be made.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
State one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
13
10 A cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. The crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the
ships electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps.
Fig. 10.1
Each string of lamps contains thirty 100 V lamps. The strings of lamps are run from a 100 V
generator. The resistance of each lamp is 250 . Ignore the resistance of the generator.
(a) State whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Calculate the current in each lamp when it is at normal brightness.
current = ..................................................... A [3]

(c) What current does the generator supply to each string of lamps?
current = ..................................................... A [1]
(d) The generator supplies current to several strings of lamps.
State whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) One of the lamps blows and forms an open circuit.
What effect, if any, does this have on
(i)
the other lamps in the same string, ...................................................................................
(ii)
the lamps in the other strings? .................................................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
14
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
15
11 The reed switch (reed relay) shown in Fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one.
Fig. 11.1
When a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell.
S
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete Fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is
taken away.
[2]
(b) Fig. 11.3 shows a door in a wall.
(i)
On Fig 11.3, show where

you would fix the reed
switch and the magnet of
Fig 11.2, so that the bell
rings when the door opens.
Use the letter S for the
switch and the letter M for
the magnet.
[2]
(ii)
Suggest one application of

this arrangement.
............................................
............................................
............................................
...................................... [1]
Fig. 11.3
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Total: 5]
[Turn over
16
12 The table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay.
(a) Complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has
charge. Three answers have been given to help you.
mass
alpha ()
charge
YES
beta ()
YES
gamma ()
NO
[3]
(b) From which part of the atom do all of these emissions come?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance.
elapsed time / minutes
(i)
count rate
counts / min
909
20
689
40
522
60
400
80
300
100
230
120
170
140
125
160
99
On Fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you.

Plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for
these points.
[3]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
17
1000
900
count rate
counts / min
800
time to decrease from 800 counts / min to

200 counts / min
700
= .................................. minutes
600
half-life of substance
= .................................. minutes
500
400
300
200
100
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
elapsed time / minutes

Fig. 12.1
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
[Turn over
18
(ii)
From the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min
to 200 counts / min. Write your answer and any working in the space on the graph.
[3]
(iii)
Use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.
Write your answer in the space on the graph.
[1]
(d) A different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of
4000 counts / min.
Write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/21/O/N/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 6 9 9 3 4 3 1 9 7 2 *
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes

You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.

DC (NH/DJ) 28876/6
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a measuring cylinder containing water.

Fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone A has been lowered into it on a fine
string.
60.4 cm3
44.2 cm3
water
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the volume of stone A.
volume = .......................... cm3 [2]

(b) The mass of stone A is measured as 40.5 g.
Calculate the density of the rock from which stone A was formed.
density = ................................. [4]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
3
(c) Stone B, from the same rock as stone A, has a larger volume.
Stone A is removed from the water and replaced by stone B. The measurements are then
repeated.
Which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone B?
Tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed.
60.4 cm3
40.5 g
density
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
4
2
A fixed amount of dry gas is exerting a pressure on its container.

(a) In terms of molecules, explain what causes the pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) One of the sketch graphs in Fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume
at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at
constant volume.
The pressure axis has been labelled in each case.
pressure
/ Pa
pressure
/ Pa
Fig. 2.1
(i)
On the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis volume / m3 and the other horizontal
axis temperature / C .
(ii)
On one of the graphs, mark, with the letter X, the pressure of the gas at the ice point.
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
5
3
Electricity can be generated from either renewable or non-renewable energy sources.

(a) Describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy
source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
Name one renewable energy source.

...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating
electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i)
Name one non-renewable energy source.

...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating
electricity up until the present time.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
6
4
The main parts of a cold store are shown in Fig. 4.1.

cooling tubes
cold store
refrigeration
unit
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The walls are made of thick thermally-insulating material.
Why is it important to have the walls made like this?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
7
(d) Even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the
temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
8
5
(a) The four words below can each be used to describe waves.
Put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves.
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[2]
(b) How does an echo occur?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. The river is in a wide gorge and there are high
cliffs on each side.
cliff
A
cliff
B
Fig. 5.1
The boat sounds its hooter once. Two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat.
The first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. The second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds.
(i)
Which cliff caused the first echo? ...................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.

Calculate the distance between the two cliffs.
distance = ....................................................... m [3]

UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
9
(iii)
Further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway
between the cliffs. The boat sounds its hooter again.
Without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is
heard.
what is heard .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
when ..................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
10
6
A laser is a device that gives a narrow parallel beam of monochromatic (single-colour)

light.
Fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism.
screen
prism
light from laser
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen.
[2]
(b) What will be seen on the screen?

...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp.
State what is now seen on the screen.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
11
7
(a) Two light, identical spheres, A and B, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon
threads, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
nylon threads
Fig. 7.1
A is given a positive charge and B is given a negative charge.
On Fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been
charged.
[1]
(b) A cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth.
Unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering.
(i)
Suggest why this happens.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
Suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was
very slightly damp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows two resistors forming part of a circuit.

3
A
4.2 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i)
Complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between A and D.
The two resistors are connected in ..................................................... .
(ii)
[1]
The potential difference between A and D is 4.2 V.

State the value of the potential difference between B and C.
potential difference = ........................................................V [1]
(iii)
Calculate the current in the 3 resistor.
current = ............................................................[4]
(iv)
State how the current in AB compares with

1. the current in each of the two resistors,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. the current in CD.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
13
(b) In the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical
resistors. Arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current.
Draw one circuit in each box.
[2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
14
9
(a) A car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 V battery, a switch, two 12 V headlamps and a 12 V
indicator lamp (inside the car).
Fig. 9.1 shows the symbols of these components.
left headlamp
right headlamp
indicator lamp
(inside car)
12 V battery
switch
Fig. 9.1
Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness
when the switch is closed.
[2]
(b) (i)
Explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
15
(ii)
Brass expands when heated.

Invar is a metal that expands very little when heated.
The flasher lamp shown in Fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car.
lamp
filament
contact
brass strip
invar strip
Fig. 9.2
The flasher lamp is designed to flash on and off repeatedly.
It contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along
their lengths.
1. State what happens to the bimetallic strip when it is heated.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. Explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an
appropriate battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
16
10 A rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed
between the poles of a permanent magnet.
Figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different
positions.
Fig. 10.1
Fig. 10.2
Fig. 10.3
(a) Which diagram shows the coil in the position where

(i)
the induced e.m.f. in the coil is at its maximum, .................................................
(ii)
the induced e.m.f. in the coil is zero? ..................................................................
[2]
(b) On Fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil.
+
e.m.f.
0
time
Fig. 10.4
[4]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
17
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. The
terminals labelled H.T. are connected to a high voltage source.
S1
+
H.T.
horizontal metal
plates
screen
V1
D
C
S2
cathode anode
S3
V2
Fig. 11.1
(a) When the cathode becomes hot it releases electrons.
What name is used to describe the release of electrons by heating?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
Which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot?

switch = ...............................................................
(ii)
Which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along CD?
switch = ...............................................................
(iii)
Which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards?
switch = ...........................................................[2]
(c) What must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of
downwards?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
[Turn over
18
12 (a) Complete the following definition of radioactive half-life.
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken for .....................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time.
30
count rate
counts / s
25
20
15
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
time / s
Fig. 12.1
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
100
19
(i)
Use Fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.
half-life = ....................................................... s [1]

(ii)
Use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to
10 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [1]

(iii)
Use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease
from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.
time taken = ....................................................... s [2]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/21/M/J/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 1 2 6 4 5 3 7 1 3 4 *
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (CW/CGW) 34004/4
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of a moving object.

speed
m/s 5
0
0
A
10
20
time / s
D
35
Fig. 1.1
(a) Which part, or parts, of Fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is
(i)
travelling at uniform speed, ...........................................................................................[1]
(ii)
accelerating? .................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled in the last 15 s.
distance = ...................................................... m [3]

[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
3
2
Two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
bridge 1
50
m
bridge 2
Fig. 2.1
(a) The distance between the two bridges is measured as 50 m.
Suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. The girl on bridge 2 measures how
long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. It takes 400 s to travel between the two
bridges.
(i)
Name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe the procedure for measuring this time.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii)
Calculate the speed of the water.
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
4
3
(a) In a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is
suspended first from point A and then from point B, as shown in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2.
A
C
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2
When suspended from A, point D is found to be vertically below A.

When suspended from B, point E is vertically below B.
(i)
What piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through A and B?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of
the triangular card. Label this point clearly with the letter G.
A
E
C
[3]
Fig. 3.3
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
5
(b) Fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put
in to start with.
Fig. 3.4
On one of the three positions of the toy shown in Fig. 4.3, clearly mark X at a possible position
for the centre of mass of the toy.
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
6
4
In Fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been
injected.
microscope
smoke
cell
light
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the
focused microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State the name we normally give to what is seen.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from
these observations?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
7
5
A card is held against a rotating toothed wheel, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
card
Fig. 5.1
The wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second.
(a) Calculate the frequency of the sound produced.
frequency = .................................................... Hz [2]

(b) State the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
lowest frequency = ........................... Hz
highest frequency = ........................... Hz [1]
(c) The speed of rotation of the wheel is increased.
What happens, if anything, to the pitch of the sound that is heard?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
8
6
The list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they
are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included.
infra-red radiation
X-rays
gamma rays
visible light
radio waves
ultrasound waves
ultra-violet radiation
(a) Which one of these is not electromagnetic?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
In the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of
wavelength. The first and last boxes have been filled in for you.
radio waves
gamma rays
[2]
(ii)
Which of these has the longest wavelength?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
Which of these produces a significant heating effect?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv)
Which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
9
7
The pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised.
The coil shown in Fig. 7.1 is to be used to magnetise it again.
coil
steel
arrow
Fig. 7.1
(a) Describe carefully
(i)
how the coil is used to magnetise the steel arrow,

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
how the polarity of the magnetised needle may be checked.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle.
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
10
8
A student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
battery
ammeter
01 23
AMP
S
coil of
wire
variable resistor
(rheostat)
Fig. 8.1
(a) The student has already made one mistake with his connections.
What is his mistake?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1, using
standard symbols.
[2]
(c) The student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find
the resistance of the coil of wire. On your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to
measure the potential difference across the coil.
[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
11
(d) Having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of
the variable resistor are as shown in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
5
5
10
AMPS
15
VOLTS
Fig. 8.2
(i)
Fig. 8.3
Record these two readings.

ammeter reading = ...................................................... A
voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [1]
(ii)
The slider on the variable resistor (see Fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left,
reducing its resistance.
State what happens to the readings on the two meters.
ammeter reading ...............................................................................................................
voltmeter reading ...........................................................................................................[2]
(iii)
The slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave
the readings in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
Calculate the new values of the readings on the meters.
ammeter reading = ...................................................... A

voltmeter reading = ....................................................... V [2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
12
9
(a) The circuit symbol shown in Fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment.
Fig. 9.1
State the name of this device.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical
energy from a power station to domestic consumers. The device in part (a) is used both at X
and at Y.
132 000 V
power
station
22 000 V
X
transmission
cables and
pylons
240 V
Y
domestic
consumer
Fig. 9.2
(i)
Using information from Fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns necessary at X and
primary turns
at Y.
turns ratio at X = ...............................................................

turns ratio at Y = ...........................................................[3]
(ii)
State two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is
very high.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
13
10 (a) Complete the following statement about an electric field.
An electric field is a region in which ........................................................
experiences a .......................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads.
nylon thread
ball
A
B
Fig. 10.1
Ball A is given a positive charge and ball B is given a negative charge.

In the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take,
now that the balls are charged.
[2]
(c) On ball B in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of
(i)
the electrostatic force on the ball (label it E),
(ii)
the weight of the ball (label it W),
(iii)
the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it T).
[2]
(d) Ball B is in equilibrium. State the value of the resultant of forces E, W and T.
resultant = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
[Turn over
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. Metal plates above and below
the tube have zero potential difference between them.
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, clearly label
(i)
the filament cathode (label it C),
(ii)
the anode (label it A).
[2]
(b) On Fig. 11.1, draw

(i)
a battery (label it B), connected to cause thermionic emission of electrons,
(ii)
a 1000 V power supply (label it P), connected to cause a beam of cathode rays along the
tube,
(iii)
the path of the beam of cathode rays along the tube.

[3]
(c) What is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower
plate is positive and the upper plate is negative.
What change is seen on the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
15
12 The count-rate from a sample of radioactive material is investigated by a team of scientists in a
laboratory.
(a) With the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every
7 days, with the results shown below. The background count-rate has already been subtracted.
time / days
14
21
28
count-rate
counts / s
1000
550
300
160
90
On Fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time.
[3]
1000
800
600
count-rate
counts / s
400
200
0
0
10
15
20
25
time / days
30
Fig. 12.1
(b) (i)
(ii)
From your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is

1.
800 counts / s,
.................................................. days
2.
200 counts / s.
.................................................. days [2]
From the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ................................................. days [3]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
16
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/21/O/N/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 4 8 0 8 1 1 0 5 3 7 *
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes

You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
appropriate units.
For Examiners Use
part question.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

DC (NF/JG) 43201/2
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
A car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. Fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in
the car. A speedometer registers how fast the car is going.
60
80
40
100
20
120
km / hour
140
Fig. 1.1
(a) How far, in km, does the car travel in hour at the speed shown in Fig. 1.1?
distance = .......................................... km [3]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) (i)
On the axes shown in Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the
hour mentioned in (a). Do not go beyond hour.
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
100
speed
km / hour
80
60
40
20
0
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
(ii)
At the end of the hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up
into some mountains. The car climbs the mountains for a further hour.
During the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. The driver then stops
the car so that he can admire the view.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car.
[4]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
4
2
A student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is
slightly different from normal. In his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing
some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder.
His experiment is illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
measuring
cylinder
reading 2
reading 1
water
balance
reading 4
reading 3
Fig. 2.1
The readings he obtains are as follows:
reading 1
53 cm3
reading 2
84 cm3
reading 3
205 g
reading 4
238 g
Calculate
(a) the volume of the added water,
volume = ......................................... cm3 [2]

(b) the mass of the added water,
mass = ............................................. g [2]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
5
(c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using.
For
Examiners
Use
density = ................................................. [4]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
6
3
A train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The track is
horizontal.
Fig. 3.1
The engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 N. There is a 25 000 N force opposing the
motion, due to friction in the wheels.
(a) Mark these forces on Fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 N and an arrow labelled
25 000 N.
[2]
(b) The train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting
on it.
(i)
State the direction of this force.

..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the size of this force.
size of force = ................................................... N

(iii)
Suggest what might be causing this force.

..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engines forward thrust.
All other forces stay the same.
(i)
What happens to the train? ......................................................................................
(ii)
Why does this happen? ............................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
7
4
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container.
..........................................................................................................................................
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Complete the following two sentences.
(i)
At constant temperature, the pressure of a gas increases as its volume

.............................................. .
(ii)
At constant volume, the pressure of a gas increases as its temperature

.............................................. .
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
8
5
(a) The principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor
destroyed.
What, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a
television?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The television in Fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. During this time, 720 kJ
of electrical energy is supplied.
electrical energy
input = 720 kJ
light energy
output = 4 kJ
sound energy
output = 20 kJ
Fig. 5.1
(i)
From the information on Fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see
and hear the television during this programme.
energy = ............................................ kJ [1]

(ii)
Suggest what happens to the rest of the energy supplied.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
9
(iii)
Calculate how much energy is involved in (b)(ii).
For
Examiners
Use
energy = ............................................ kJ [1]

(iv)
Comment on the efficiency of the television.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
10
6
The ray diagram in Fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a
converging lens.
object
F2
F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses
the ray printed on the diagram.
[2]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw the image of the object.
[1]
(c) Which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? Tick 3 boxes.
much larger than the object
much smaller than the object
same size as the object
upright
inverted
real
UCLES 2012
[3]
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
11
(d) The object is moved to a position further from the lens.
For
Examiners
Use
What differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image?
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
12
7
(a) Remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the
television.
Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum is used? Tick one box.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
[1]
(b) Modern warfare often uses heat-seeking missiles.

microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
[1]
(c) Injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
UCLES 2012
[1]
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
13
(d) Mobile phones communicate using electromagnetic radiation.
For
Examiners
Use

microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
14
8
(a) Complete the following sentences.

(i)
An electric current exists in a wire when .................................................. are made

to flow in the wire.
[1]
(ii)
The current in a wire may be measured using an instrument called

.................................................... .
(iii)
[1]
The potential difference across a wire may be measured by connecting

................................................... across the wire.
[1]
(b) A length of resistance wire is connected in a simple series circuit.

The current in it is 0.8 A. The potential difference across it is 9.6 V.
Calculate the resistance of the wire.
resistance = ................................................. [4]

(c) The resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel.
Without further calculation, state the effect this has on
(i)
the resistance in the circuit,

..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 V across it, as
before.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
15
9
The coil in the d.c. motor in Fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown.
For
Examiners
Use
rotation
magnet
batter
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, clearly label the coil.
[1]
(b) State two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1 in order to make
the coil rotate more rapidly.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows four different types of switch.
For
Examiners
Use
wall-mounted
switch
ceiling-mounted
pull-cord
switch
flush
wall-mounted
switch
nylon cord
plug
plug switch
metal
sections
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.
[1]
(b) (i)
Which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the reason for your answer to (b)(i).

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
17
(c) A laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation.
(i)
Which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the
laundry?
For
Examiners
Use
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the reason for your answer to (c)(i).

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) The laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and
the three lamps.
mains
supply
Fig. 10.2
Complete Fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to
light at full brightness when the switch is on.
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
[Turn over
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point A, the electric field between two
charged metal plates.
B
electron
beam
C
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between A and the line BC.
[3]
(b) The voltage across the plates is reversed. State what difference this makes to the path
of the electron beam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
19
12 The table below gives details about some radioactive substances.
For
Examiners
Use
substance
symbol
type of radiation emitted
half-life
barium-139
139 Ba
56
beta ()
85 minutes
silver-110
110 Ag
47
beta ()
24 seconds
technetium-99m
99 Tc
43
gamma ()
6.0 hours
thorium-232
232 Th
90
alpha ()
1.4 1010 years
(a) Which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its
atoms?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral
atom?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which of these substances are emitting particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Samples of each of these substances are decaying. Each sample starts with the same
number of atoms.
Which sample decays the most in one hour?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the investigation of a blood circulation problem, a patient is given an injection
containing one of these substances. The radiation needs to be detectable from outside
the body.
Which of the substances might be suitable for this use?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/21/M/J/12
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 0 2 9 5 0 5 8 2 3 2 *
0625/21
PHYSICS
Paper 2 Core
1 hour 15 minutes

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you
hand in.
appropriate units.
question.
For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Total

DC (CW/SW) 49779/4
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
(a) State the name that is given to the turning effect of a force.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. A man opens the gate by pulling on it, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
After he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him.
When closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length.
State two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he
opened the gate.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
3
2
(a) State the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume.
..........................................................................................................................................
For
Examiners
Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an
oil slick, on the water.
One such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 104 m by
6.0 103 m.
The oil slick is 3.0 106 m (0.0000030 m) thick.
(i)
Calculate the volume of the oil slick.
volume = ........................................... m3 [3]

(ii)
The density of the oil is 900 kg / m3.

Calculate the mass of oil in the slick.
mass = ............................................ kg [2]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day.
starting pistol
timekeeper
80 m
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
(a) Sound travels at 320 m / s.
Calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.
time = .............................................. s [3]

(b) The timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the
stopwatch.
He makes no other experimental inaccuracies.
(i)
By how much will his time for the race be in error?
time error = .............................................. s [2]

(ii)
Suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
5
(c) When he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance
of the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 3.2.
55
50
For
Examiners
Use
min
5
45
10
15
seconds
40
35
20
30 25
Fig. 3.2
How long did the winner actually take to run the race?
time = .............................................. s [2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
6
4
An archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in Fig. 4.1.
He then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target.
bow
string
arrow
Fig. 4.1
(a) The archer does work on the bow.
When is this work done? Tick one box.
as the string is pulled back to the position shown in Fig. 4.1
whilst holding the string in the position shown in Fig. 4.1
after releasing the string to fire the arrow
[1]
(b) What type of energy is stored in the bow because it is bent?

...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) On another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height
before falling back down to the ground.
Use words from the following list to complete the sentences below.
gravitational potential,
kinetic,
thermal,
maximum,
minimum,
zero
As the arrow rises, its ..................................................... energy increases. At the top of

the flight, this energy is at a ..................................................... . As the arrow falls, this
energy is converted into ..................................................... energy. When it hits the ground,
the energy of the arrow is converted into ..................................................... energy.
[4]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) A metal ruler with a rectangular cross-section is heated in an oven.

(i)
For
Examiners
Use
State two things that happen to the atoms of the metal.

1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii)

1. the length of the ruler, ..........................................................................................
2. the width of the ruler, ............................................................................................
3. the thickness of the ruler. ......................................................................................
[2]
(b) The nut in Fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate.
nut
bolt
very hot
flame
Fig. 5.1
Explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
8
6
(a)
In Fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to
another prism that is identical but upside down.
igh
l
red
Fig. 6.1
(i)
The angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on Fig. 6.1 as i.
On Fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into
the air again. Label the emergent ray line R.
[3]
(iii)
The beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along
line R.
Using the letter P, mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the lefthand prism.
[1]
(b) On another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a
prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
red lig
ht
t
igh
+ ht
ig
el
blu
l
red
Fig. 6.2
(i)
UCLES 2012
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air
again.
[3]
0625/21/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
9
(ii)
Refraction is occurring at the first surface.
For
Examiners
Use
Which of the following is also occurring? Tick one box.

diffraction
dispersion
focusing
[1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the Earths magnetic field.
For
Examiners
Use
compass
needle
N
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the Earth.
[1]
(b) The S pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the S pole of the compass needle, as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
Fig. 7.2
Describe what is seen happening to the compass needle as this is done.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
11
(c) The magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass
needle, as shown in Fig. 7.3.
For
Examiners
Use
wire
Fig. 7.3
When there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle.
Suggest why this rotation occurs.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a cell.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 8.1
(a) What does the 1.5 V indicate about the cell?
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Three cells identical to the cell in Fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 V battery. The battery is
connected in series with a 180 resistor.
current = .................................................. [4]

(c) A second 180 resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 resistor from (b).
(i)
In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel,
connected to the battery. Use standard symbols.
[3]
(ii)
State the value of

1. the potential difference across the second 180 resistor, ...................................
2. the current in the second 180 resistor. ..............................................................
[2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor C and a resistor of very high
resistance.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, use the letter S to label the switch.
[1]
(b) When the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero.
After the switch has been closed, what happens, if anything, to
(i)
the charge in the circuit,

..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the reading on the voltmeter?

..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The switch is now opened again.

State what happens, if anything, to the reading on the voltmeter.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
14
10 A 240 V a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in
Fig. 10.1. A lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 V supply is connected to the secondary
coil.
6V
lamp
240 V
mains
8000 turns
soft iron
Fig. 10.1
(a) Name a suitable material from which the coils may be made.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see
Fig. 10.1).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to
light at full brightness.
number of turns = .................................................. [3]

(d) State what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was
(i)
much less than that calculated in (c),

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
much more than that calculated in (c).

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 The apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is
shown in Fig. 11.1.
radioactive
source
absorbing
material
For
Examiners
Use
detector
Fig. 11.1
The source and detector are about 2 cm apart. The detector is connected to a scaler, which
measures the count rate.
Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector.
The table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers.
absorbing material
count rate
counts / s
air
sheet of paper
0.5 mm of aluminium
10 mm of aluminium
10 mm of lead
523
523
391
214
122
(a) How can you tell that the source is not emitting any -particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) What is the evidence that -particles are being emitted?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) What is the evidence that -rays are being emitted?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
[Turn over
16
4
12 (a) The symbol for an -particle is either 2 or 2 He.

(i)
For
Examiners
Use
What does the 4 indicate about an -particle?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
What does the 2 indicate about an -particle?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
0
(b) The symbol for a -particle is either 1 or 1e.

(i)
What does the 0 indicate about a -particle?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
What does the 1 indicate about a -particle?

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides.
240
94Pu
(i)
244
96Cm
244
96Cm
248
98Cf
250
97Bk
250
98Cf
decays by emitting an -particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
(ii)
250
97Bk
decays by emitting a -particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/21/O/N/12
EXTENSION
PAPER THREE
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/3
PHYSICS
PAPER 3
Tuesday
25 MAY 1999
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes

Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE

1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (SLC) QF91700/5
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a plan view of a rotating sprayer used for the watering of crops.
topicmass
topicweight
topicdensity
topicvolume
topicprojectiles
N
W
E
O
holes through which

water sprays out horizontally
direction of rotation
Fig. 1.1
(a) The device rotates about O at a constant rate of 0.2 revolutions per second. OP is 10 m
long.
Calculate the speed of the point P. (The circumference of a circle is 2 x radius.)
speed = ...........................................
(b) (i)
[4]
Use your answer to (a) to write down the velocity of the point P when P is at the
point shown in Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain why the speed of point P is constant but its velocity changes as the
sprayer rotates.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 S99
3
(c) Explain how you know that there is a net force at the end of the arm P, acting towards O.
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
Question 1 is continued on page 4
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
4
(d) Water is forced out of the sprayer horizontally. Fig. 1.2 shows how the horizontal speed
of the water changes between leaving the sprayer and hitting the ground.
12
10
horizontal speed
m/s
8
6
4
2
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6
time/s
0.7
Fig. 1.2
(i)
Explain
1. why the horizontal speed decreases slightly over the 0.6 s of the motion,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
2. why the line is approximately vertical at 0.6 s.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate

1. the height above the ground at which the water leaves the sprayer,
height = ...........................................
2. the horizontal distance travelled by the water.
distance = ...........................................
[7]
0625/3 S99
For
Examiners
Use
5
(e) Fig. 1.3 shows the path of the water at one instant. The pressure of the water on an
object placed at point Q is much greater than the pressure of the water on the same
object when placed at point R.
Q
For
Examiners
Use
sprayer
ground
R
Fig. 1.3
The pressure exerted by the water on the object at point Q is 5 x 105 N/m2 and the
pressure on the object at R is 1 x 105 N/m2.
Explain this decrease in pressure.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
6
2
A student attempted to find the specific heat capacity of water using the following data
obtained from the heating system of a small swimming pool:
topicturningeffect
topicturning
topiceffect
mass of water in the pool, heating system and circulation pipes, 54 000 kg;
power of the heating system, 30 kW;
rise in temperature, 2 C in 5 hours (18 000 s).
(a) Assuming no energy loss, use these data to calculate a value for the specific heat
capacity of water. Show your working.
specific heat capacity ..............................................
0625/3 S99
[6]
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) The student found that the value for the specific heat capacity of water, worked out by
this method, was higher than the accepted value.
For
Examiners
Use
The average temperature of the water in the pool during the test period was 24 C,
whilst the average temperature of the air was 19 C.
(i)
Describe, in molecular terms, ways in which the water loses heat from its surface.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain why the loss of heat from the water led to the students higher value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
8
3
(a) A converging lens of focal length 4.0 cm is used to produce a virtual image which is
3 times the height of the object.
Fig. 3.1 shows the lens position and the focal length PF. The length PF is to scale.
The object and the image are both on the left-hand side of the lens but their positions
are not shown.
topicmolecular
topicrefraction
topicmodels
topicflow
line which passes through the top of the image
lens position
line which passes through the top of the object

line which passes through the bottom of the image and the object
Fig. 3.1
Draw rays on Fig. 3.1 and determine
(i)
the scale used, ..........................................................................................................
(ii)
the distance of the image from the lens, ...................................................................
(iii)
the distance of the object from the lens. ...................................................................

[6]
0625/3 S99
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a wide parallel beam of monochromatic light incident on a block of glass
at an angle of 37.
For
Examiners
Use
37
90
air
glass
Fig. 3.2
(i)
What is meant by the word monochromatic ?

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State the approximate speed of light in air.

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
The angle of refraction in the glass is 22. Calculate the refractive index of this
glass.
refractive index = .....................................

(iv)
On Fig. 3.2, use your protractor to draw in the path of the beam of light in the glass.
[7]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
10
4
Fig. 4.1 shows part of a cathode-ray tube.

An electron beam PQ is entering the region between two horizontal, charged metal plates.
topicenergy
topicthermometers
topicapparentdepth
topiccharge
topicelectrons
topicelectronsinamagneticfield
topicmagnetic
topicfield
tube wall
+V
positively
charged plate
vacuum
R
P
0V
negatively
charged plate
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 4.1, draw the electron beam from Q to show its path between the charged
plates.
(ii)
Explain any change of direction of the electron beam when it is between the
charged plates.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1, show the direction of the conventional current in the electron beam by
drawing an arrow and labelling it D.
[5]
(b) The voltage across the plates is increased so that one of the plates collects 1014
electrons in 10 s. Each electron carries a charge of 1.6 x 1019 C.
(i)
Calculate the total charge collected by the plate in 10 s.
charge = ..........................................
(ii)
State an equation linking charge and current. Hence calculate the current in wire RS.
...................................................................................................................................
current = ..........................................
[4]
0625/3 S99
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) Air containing charged dust particles flows between two metal plates. A high potential
difference is connected across the plates as illustrated in Fig. 4.2.
For
Examiners
Use
direction of air flow

containing charged
dust particles
large p.d.
Fig. 4.2
The charged particles are attracted to the upper plate and move through a potential
difference of 10 000 V. The ammeter records a current of 2.1 x 10 6 A.
Calculate
(i)
the energy supplied by the voltage source in 10 minutes (600 s),
energy = ...........................................
(ii)
the power supplied.
power = ...........................................
[6]
0625/3 S99
[Turn over
12
(d) Fig. 4.3 shows a beam of electrons entering the magnetic field of a coil. This magnetic
field is directed into the paper.
coil
beam of
electrons
vacuum
+
12 V
Fig. 4.3
(i)
On Fig. 4.3, sketch the path of the electron beam until it hits the end of the tube.
Explain your choice of path.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The resistance of the coil producing the magnetic field is 100 . Calculate the
current in the coil.
current = ..........................................
(iii)
State the effect on the electron deflection of increasing and reversing the potential
difference connected across the coil.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
0625/3 S99
For
Examiners
Use
13
5
(a) A laboratory needs to find a radioactive isotope which will produce very intense
ionisation of air.
topicspeed
topicsound
The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.

thick copper wire
insulator
high potential difference

5000 V
copper gauze
radioactive isotope
Fig. 5.1
(i)
Explain why sparks jump between the gauze and the wire when a radioactive
isotope with high ionising properties is brought near the gauze.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
An -emitting source, a -emitting source and a -emitting source, each of the

same activity, are tested. One source gives no sparks at all, the second gives only
a few sparks per second and the third many sparks per second. State the relative
quantities of ionisation produced by each type of emitter.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) Some of the results of a comparison between -particles, -particles and -rays are
shown in the table below.
mass
4 units
constitution
charge
2 protons + 2 neutrons
+2 units
Complete the table by filling in the blank boxes.
0625/3 S99
[4]
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/3
PHYSICS
PAPER 3
16 NOVEMBER 1999
Thursday
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes

TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE

1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (CW/DJ) QK93706/2
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the outline of a machine for driving steel pillars (called piles) into the ground.
topicmass
topickineticenergy
topickinetic
topicvolume
topicweight
topicprojectiles
topicdensity
suspension
steel mass
tube
steel pile
ground
Fig. 1.1
The steel mass is raised by an electric motor and then falls under gravity.
The falling steel has a mass of 200 kg and falls a distance of 6.0 m.
(a) The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate
(i)
the potential energy gained by the mass each time it is raised,
potential energy gained = .....................................

(ii)
the maximum speed at which the mass hits the pile.
speed = .....................................
[7]
0625/3 W99
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) When the mass hits the pile, it has kinetic energy. This energy is transformed into other
forms of energy as the speed of the falling mass rapidly reduces to zero. As this
happens, the pile is forced a small distance into the ground.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
State the energy conversions which take place, starting from the kinetic energy of
the falling mass.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how a large force is produced when the pile is driven a short distance into
the ground.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[8]
(c) In raising the steel mass 6.0 m, the electric motor uses more energy than that
calculated in (a) (i).
Write down and explain two causes of this higher energy requirement.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
4
(d) The equipment design is changed so that when the mass falls once, the pile is driven
further into the ground than before the design was changed.
Suggest three changes that could be made to do this.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. .....................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
;;;
;;;
;;;
Fig. 2.1 shows a piece of apparatus which could be used to find the specific heat capacity of
a metal at high temperatures.
topicenergy
topiceffect
topicturningeffect
topicturning
topicthermocouple
lagging
metal
block
electric heater inserted

centrally in the block
thermocouple inserted
in the block
Fig. 2.1
Results from an experiment using the apparatus are recorded as follows:

mass of the metal block, 1.0 kg;
power of the heater, 200 W;
time for which the heater is switched on, 2.5 minutes (150 s);
rise in temperature during this time, from 160 C to 210 C.
(a) Describe the experimental steps which were taken to obtain these results.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) Use the results to calculate an average value for the specific heat capacity of the metal
over this temperature range.
specific heat capacity = .....................................
For
Examiners
Use
[4]
(c) The temperature of the metal was measured by using a thermocouple.

(i)
Draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple being used as a thermometer.
(ii)
Describe the action of a thermocouple when measuring a temperature change.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest two reasons why use of a thermocouple might have an advantage over a
mercury-in-glass thermometer.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
6
3
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 3.1 shows a ray of light, PQRS, passing along a simple optical fibre.
topicrefraction
topicreflection
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topicrefraction
topiclens
topicinternal
topicangle
topictotal
topictotalinternalreflection
air
85
85
T
N
M
glass
air
Fig. 3.1
(a) Calculate the angle between the ray PQ and the ray RS.
angle = .....................................
[2]
(b) Explain why the ray PQ does not leave the fibre at Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Another ray TQ also strikes the surface at Q.
The refractive index of the glass is 1.50.
(i)
Calculate the critical angle for this glass.
critical angle = .....................................

(ii)
Explain why the ray TQ leaves the fibre.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 W99
7
(d) The light waves travelling towards Q are monochromatic and have a frequency of
4 x 1014 Hz and a wavelength of 5 x 107 m.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
What is meant by monochromatic?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the speed of these waves in the glass.
speed = .....................................
(iii)
Waves travelling along TQ pass into the air. The refractive index of the glass
is 1.50.
Write down an expression from which the speed of the light waves in air could be
found.
..............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
8
4
Fig. 4.1 is a block diagram of an electrical generating and distribution system.
topicenergy
topicapparentdepth
topicelectronsinamagneticfield
topicelectrons
topicelectric
topiccharge
long supply cables

(several km)
turbine
generator
transformer
No. 1
transformer
No. 2
consumer
circuits
Fig. 4.1
(a) The generator produces an e.m.f. by a process called electromagnetic induction.
(i)
Name two factors and state how they are changed in order to increase the output
e.m.f. of the generator.
1. .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain what is meant by the statement the induced e.m.f. acts in such a direction
as to produce effects to oppose the change causing it.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
0625/3 W99
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) (i)
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.2 shows the basic parts of transformer No. 1 which is 100% efficient.
input
from generator
400 V, 80 A
output to
supply cables
30 000 V
Fig. 4.2
Using the information on Fig 4.2, calculate the current in the supply cables.
current = .....................................
(ii)
Describe the function of transformer No. 2.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain why the use of the two transformers results in a big reduction in power loss
in the supply cables.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
10
(c) Fig. 4.3 shows one of the consumer circuits with three electrical appliances R, S and T,
connected into the circuit.
7.7 A
Y
2.3 A
4.6 A
110 V
24
48
Fig. 4.3
Using the current, voltage and resistance values shown on Fig. 4.3, calculate
(i)
the current at point X and at point Y,

current at X = .....................................
current at Y = .....................................
(ii)
the resistance of appliance T,
resistance = .....................................
(iii)
the combined resistance of appliances R and S,
resistance = .....................................
(iv)
the power developed in appliance R,
power = .....................................
(v)
the energy converted by the appliance S in 2 minutes (120 s).
energy converted = .....................................

[10]
0625/3 W99
For
Examiners
Use
11
5
For
Examiners
Use
Lengths of steel may be joined by welding them together, as iillustrated in Fig 5.1.
topicresistance
steel weld
steel
Fig. 5.1
A liquid radioactive source is to be used to test that the welds joining lengths of steel pipe
are of equal thickness.
The diameter of the pipes is 120 mm and the pipe wall thickness is 5 mm.
The liquid runs through the pipes whilst a suitable detector moves around the outside of the
joints.
(a) With the aid of a labelled diagram, explain how this method detects places where the
welds are thinner than 5 mm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
[Turn over
12
(b) In order to find out the most suitable type of isotope for this purpose, tests were carried
out on the ability of the radiations from an -emitter, a -emitter and a -emitter to
penetrate steel.
(i)
Write down what you would expect to be the results of these tests.
-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
-emitter ..................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State and explain which type of emitter would be most useful for testing these
welds.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) Describe three precautions which should be taken to ensure the safety of the operator
who is making these tests.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W99
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
PAPER 3
0625/3
1 hour 15 minutes

Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each
question or part question.
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

(NH) QF05709/2
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
topicmass
topicweight
topicdensity
A firework leaves the ground with an initial velocity of 45 m/s, travelling vertically upwards. It
reaches a maximum height of 100 m.
At this point the firework fails to explode and falls back down the same vertical path to the
ground.
At any point on its path, the firework has both a velocity and a speed.
(a) Using the terms vector and scalar, explain the difference between velocity and speed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 1.1 is a graph which shows the height of the firework above the ground during the
first 5 s of its journey.
120
100
height
above ground / m
80
60
40
20
0
time / s 5
Fig. 1.1
(i)
Use the information on the graph to

1.
find the time taken for the firework to reach its maximum height above the
ground,
...................................................................................................................................
2.
describe how the motion of the firework changes over the first 5 s of its journey.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
3
(ii)
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2 and air resistance on the firework is
negligible.
For
Examiners
Use
State
1.
the deceleration of the firework as it is rising,

deceleration = ........................................................
2.
the total time taken for the firework to rise 100 m and then to fall back to the
ground.
time taken = ...........................................................
(iii)
State the velocity with which the falling firework hits the ground.
velocity =................................................................
[8]
0625/3 S00
[Turn over
4
2
In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of fusion of ice, an electric heater, of power
200 W, is used.
topicturningeffect
topicturning
topiceffect
topicenergy
topicthermocouple
The following readings are taken.

mass of ice at 0 C, before heating started, 0.54 kg
mass of ice at 0 C, after 300 s of heating, 0.36 kg
(a) Calculate a value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = .......................
[4]
(b) Explain, in molecular terms, how heat is transferred from the surface of a block of ice to
its centre.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple beam balance made from a pivot and a metre rule.
topicmodels
topicmolecular
topiclens
topicangle
topicrefraction
cm markings
98
50
metre rule
cotton
bag of
sand
0.25 kg
mass
pivot
0.50 kg
mass
bench top
Fig. 3.1
(a) Find
(i)
the mass of the bag of sand,
mass =.................................................
(ii)
the weight of the bag of sand. (The acceleration of freefall is 10 m/s2.)
weight =...............................................
[3]
(b) Explain, in terms of moments of forces, why the beam balances.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) The cotton holding the 0.50 kg mass snaps and the mass falls to the bench.
It strikes the bench at a speed of 1.2 m/s.
Calculate its kinetic energy just before it hits the bench.
kinetic energy of the mass = ...................................
[3]
(d) On impact with the bench, the mass bounces up a small distance. Some transformation
of energy occurs during the impact. State the forms of the energy just before and just
after the impact.
before: ..............................................................................................................................
after: .............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed box containing only dry air. At a particular instant, one of the air
molecules in the box is situated at P and it is moving towards face ABCD along the direction
shown by the arrow.
topicenergy
G
F
P
H
D
A
E
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe and explain a possible path of the molecule within the box.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain how this molecule
(i)
helps to cause a pressure on the side ABCD,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
helps to cause an equal pressure on all the sides.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) The box is squashed but no air leaks out. By calculation, complete the table below.
volume of box
/m3
pressure
/Pa
temperature
/C
before squashing
0.09
1.0 x 105
20
after squashing
0.04
20
[2]
5
topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows how a right-angled prism may be used to change the direction of a ray of
light.
A
90
Fig. 5.1
(a) Explain why the ray of light does not change direction at D and at F.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State one property of the light which does change at D and at F. At each point say
whether it increases or decreases.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) At E the light splits, with one ray along the surface of the prism and one ray along EF.
Draw the normal at E. Label the critical angle with the letter X and state its value.
critical angle = .......................................
[2]
(d) The refractive index of this glass may be calculated using the formula
refractive index of glass = 1/sin c,
where c is the critical angle.
Use your value of the critical angle of this glass to calculate its refractive index.
refractive index = ...................................
0625/3 S00
[2]
[Turn over
8
6
For
Examiners
Use
(a) A sound wave in air is made up of compressions and rarefactions.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
topicmotion
(i)
State what is meant by a compression.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State what is meant by a rarefaction.

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The distance between two consecutive rarefactions in a sound wave is 2.5 m. The
speed of sound in air is 330 m/s.
Calculate the frequency of this sound wave.
frequency = .............................................................
[2]
(c) A person makes a loud sound and hears the echo of this sound 1.2 s later.
Calculate how far the person is from the object causing the echo. Assume that the
speed of sound is 330 m / s.
distance =................................................................
0625/3 S00
[2]
9
7
A student is given a battery, a switch, two insulated thick copper leads and a coil of
resistance wire. On Fig. 7.1 only the coil is drawn in.
For
Examiners
Use
topicforce
topicconductor
topicmagnetic
coil of
resistance
wire
cardboard
tube
Fig. 7.1
(a) The student set up the apparatus to make a current flow through the coil.
Using standard symbols for components, complete a circuit diagram on Fig. 7.1. Also on
Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field lines in and around the coil, with arrows to indicate the
direction of the lines.
[4]
(b) A charge of 16 C flows through the coil in 40 s.
Calculate the current in the coil.
current =..................................................................
0625/3 S00
[2]
[Turn over
10
For
Examiners
Use
(c) The potential difference across the coil is 1.2 V.

(i)
Calculate the energy released as heat in the coil in 40 s.
energy = ..................................................................
(ii)
[4]
Calculate the resistance of the coil.
resistance =.............................................................
[4]
(d) The battery supplies 24 J of energy to drive 16 C of charge around the circuit.
Define the e.m.f. of this battery.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
11
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a transformer.
topicradioactivity
240 V a.c.
12 V a.c.
primary
coil
secondary
coil
Fig. 8.1
(a) Explain why there is an e.m.f. across the secondary coil even though there is no
electrical connection between the primary and secondary coils.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) When the transformer is in use, the current in the secondary circuit is 3.2 A. The
transformer may be considered 100% efficient.
Calculate the current in the primary coil.
current = .....................................................
0625/3 S00
[3]
[Turn over
12
9
topicvolume
topiclens
topicdensity
topicpressure
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons about to enter the region between two charged
metal plates.
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1 continue the path of the electron beam between the plates
(i)
for plates with a very small charge (label this path P),
(ii)
for plates with the opposite charges to those shown on Fig. 9.1 (label this path R).
[3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows another arrangement, similar to the first, but in this case the electron
beam continues in a straight line because a magnet (which is not shown) has been
placed near the plates.
Fig. 9.2
Explain where you would place the N-pole of the magnet in order to achieve this effect.
You may draw on the diagram if you feel that it will make your answer clearer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
10
topictension
(a) A radioactive source contains an isotope of thorium.

Thorium (22980 Th) decays by -particle emission to radium (Ra).
Write an equation to show this decay.
[2]
(b) The radium produced is also radioactive. Fig. 10.1 shows a laboratory experiment to
test for the presence of the radioactive emissions from the thorium source, using a
radiation detector.
In the laboratory there is a background count of 20 counts/minute.
5 mm thick
aluminium
P
radioactive
source
3 cm
Fig. 10.1
The readings are given in the table.
position
reading in counts/minute
2372
361
State and explain

(i)
which radiation could be causing the count at Q,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
which radiations could be causing the count at P.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 S00
[Turn over
14
(c) All three types of radioactive emission cause some ionisation of gases.
(i)
Explain what is meant by the term ionisation of gases.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest a reason why -radiation produces very little ionisation.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3 S00
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/3
PHYSICS
PAPER 3
Tuesday
14 NOVEMBER 2000
Morning
1 hour 15 minutes

Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

(NH) QK07575/2
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1 shows a 0.5 kg mass hanging freely on a length of steel wire.
topicspeed
length of steel
wire
0.5 kg mass
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1 use labelled arrows to indicate the direction and line of action of each of the
two forces acting on the 0.5 kg mass.
The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2. Calculate the values of the two forces which you
have indicated.
first force = .............................. second force = ..............................
[4]
(b) Suggest what causes the two forces to act on the mass.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
3
(c) The 0.5 kg mass is increased by steps of 0.5 kg up to 10 kg. The corresponding
extensions of the steel wire are measured. When the mass on the wire is 10 kg, the wire
snaps. Fig. 1.2 shows part of the graph of extension against load for the wire.
For
Examiners
Use
15
extension
/mm
10
5
Y
X
0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
mass/kg
Fig. 1.2
(i)
On Fig. 1.2, sketch a possible graph line between Y and Z.
(ii)
Determine the mass needed to produce an extension of 3 mm.

mass =..........................................................
(iii)
Determine the extension of the wire just before it snaps.

extension = ...................................................
[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a students design for a thermometer. The student stated that the material
labelled M could be a copper rod, alcohol or nitrogen gas.
free pivot
fixed pivot
cylinder
piston
scale
Fig. 2.1
(a) Explain what is meant by the term sensitivity of the thermometer.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
State which of the three suggested materials would give a thermometer of greatest
sensitivity.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) (i)
State which of the three materials would allow the thermometer to measure the
largest range of temperature.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The student found that the temperature scale of this thermometer was non-linear.
Explain what this means.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a person raising a concrete block from a river bed by using two pulleys.
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topiclens
pulley
pulley
6m
block
Fig. 3.1
(a) As shown in Fig. 3.1, the top of the block is 6.0 m below the water surface. The density
of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
Calculate the water pressure acting on the top of the block.
pressure = ............................................
[3]
(b) The block is raised through the water. At one point, the water pressure acting on the top
of the block is 4.5 x 104 Pa. The area of the top of the block is 0.015 m2. Calculate the
downward force exerted by the water on the top of the block.
force =...................................................
[2]
(c) When the block is clear of the water, it is raised a further 4.0 m. The weight of the block
is 550 N. Calculate the work done on the block as it is raised the 4.0 m through the air.
work =...................................................
[2]
(d) Some of the energy the person uses to raise the block is converted into heat energy.
Indicate on the Fig. 3.1, using an arrow and the letter H, two places where heat is
released. For each place, explain why heat is released there.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows water wavefronts which are approaching a small gap in a wall which divides
two stretches of water of the same depth. The diagram is drawn to scale.
topicevaporation
wavefronts
gap in wall
Fig. 4.1
(a) The waves moving towards the wall have a wavelength of 1.6 m and a frequency of
0.80 Hz.
Calculate the speed of these water waves.
speed of waves =..................................
[2]
(b) State the wavelength and frequency of the waves after they have passed through the
gap in the wall.
wavelength = ................................................
frequency =...........................................
(c) On Fig. 4.1, complete the pattern of wavefronts to the right of the wall.
0625/3 W00
[2]
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) A student determines the specific heat capacity of water. It is found that 15.5 kJ of
energy supplied raise the temperature of 0.45 kg of water by 8.2 C.
For
Examiners
Use
topicspeed
topiclight
topicsound
Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
specific heat capacity of water = .............................
[4]
(b) A cylinder, which is closed by a gas-tight moveable piston, contains 0.0060 m3 of gas.
The gas has its pressure raised from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 3.5 x 105 Pa, without any change in
temperature.
(i)
Describe how this could be achieved.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume when the pressure is 3.5 x 105 Pa.
volume = .......................................................
[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows an object placed 2.0 cm from a thin lens, which is to be used as a magnifying
glass.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
topicmotion
topiclens
The focal length of the lens is 3.0 cm. The diagram is drawn to full scale.
lens
object
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw any two rays from the tip of the object which enable you to locate the
tip of the image. Draw in the image and label it I.
[3]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw in an eye position which would enable image I to be seen.
[1]
(c) By taking measurements from Fig. 6.1, work out how many times bigger the image is
than the object.
The image is .................... times bigger than the object.
0625/3 W00
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
topicconvection
Fig. 7.1 shows how a student set up a circuit using three identical lamps. Assume that the
resistance of each lamp does not change with the brightness of the lamp.
For
Examiners
Use
Each lamp is labelled 12 V, 2.0 A.

12 V
A
P
Fig. 7.1
(a) Calculate the resistance of one of the lamps.
resistance = ..........................................
[2]
(b) Calculate the combined resistance of the three lamps as connected in Fig. 7.1.
combined resistance = .........................
[2]
(c) Calculate the current which would be shown on the ammeter in Fig. 7.1.
current = ...............................................
[2]
(d) Explain why lamp R is less bright than normal and why lamps P and Q are both equally
very dim.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
10
(e) In the space below draw a circuit diagram which shows P, Q and R connected so that
they will all work at normal brightness.
[1]
Fig. 8.1 shows a simple electrical generator. By turning the handle, the single coil may be
spun between the poles of the magnet.
topicatomic
topicatomicstructure
topicstructure
topicelectromagneticinduction
topicelectromagnetic
topicinduction
rotation
S
N
bulb
Fig. 8.1
0625/3 W00
For
Examiners
Use
11
(a) The handle is turned so that the coil makes two complete revolutions per second. The
maximum output is 7 V. On Fig. 8.2, sketch this output over a period of 1 s.
For
Examiners
Use
8
e.m.f.
/V 6
4
2
0
0
0.25
0.50
0.75
1.00
time / s
4
6
8
[3]
Fig. 8.2
(b) Explain
(i)
how an e.m.f. is induced,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
why the e.m.f. varies in magnitude and direction.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
12
9
Fig. 9.1 shows an uncharged metal plate held in a wooden clamp and stand.
topicvolume
topicdensity
topicpressure
metal plate
wooden clamp
and stand
Fig. 9.1
(a) A polythene rod is charged negatively by rubbing it with a duster.
Suggest, in terms of the movement of electrons,
(i)
how the polythene becomes negatively charged,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the metal plate can be positively charged without the polythene touching the
plate.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) A strong -particle emitting source is brought close to, but not touching, the positively
charged metal plate.
Explain why the plate rapidly loses its charge.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3 W00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
10
topictension
(a) A nuclide, symbol AZ X, decays by -particle emission to a nuclide, symbol Y.

A -particle has the symbol o1 e.
Write an equation for this decay.
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows how a -particle source may be used to measure the thickness of paper
as it is being produced.
rollers
- particle
source
paper
wound
on roll
detector
Fig. 10.1
(i)
Explain why the reading of the detector changes with the thickness of the paper.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Write down two reasons why -particles are more useful than -rays for this
purpose.
reason 1. ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
reason 2. ...................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3 W00
[Turn over
14
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a beam of -particles entering a magnetic field, the direction of which is
into the paper.
beam of
-particles
magnetic
field into
paper
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2 continue the path of the beam of -particles as they pass through the magnetic
field.
[2]
0625/3 W00
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/3
PAPER 3
1 hour 15 minutes

TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

SB (CW/KN) QF10310/2
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed of a small, very dense object which is falling vertically from an
aeroplane, up to the point at which it hits the ground. The air resistance on the object is
negligibly small for the first 5 s of its fall. The object is fitted with a parachute which springs
open after a certain time of fall.
150
100
vertical speed
m/s
50
0
0
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the type of motion
(i)
between 0 and 5 s,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
between 42 s and 47 s.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Estimate the time at which the parachute opens.

......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
3
(c) On Figs 1.2 and 1.3, indicate by labelled arrows the vertical forces acting on the falling
object
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
after 3 s of fall,
falling object
Fig. 1.2
(ii) after 45 s of fall.
parachute
falling object
Fig. 1.3
[3]
(d) State whether or not there is a resultant vertical force acting on the falling object
(i)
after 3 s of fall,
.....................................
(ii)
after 45 s of fall.
.....................................
[1]
(e) Calculate the distance fallen in the first 5 s of fall.
distance fallen = .....................................[2]

0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
4
2
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a moving car on a level road.
topicturningeffect
topicturning
uniform speed of
20 m/s in the
direction shown
mass 800 kg
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the momentum of the car.
momentum of car = ..................................... [2]

(b) The brakes of the car are applied for 4 s, which reduces the speed of the car to 5 m/s.
(i)
Calculate the average force of the brakes.
average force = .....................................

(ii)
Calculate the average deceleration of the car.
average deceleration = .....................................

[6]
0625/3/M/J/01
5
3
topicmagnet
Describe an experiment to find the average density of a small rock sample of approximately
100 g mass.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) In the space below draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus.
[2]
(b) List all the measurements which must be taken.
[2]
(c) Explain how to work out the average density from the measurements taken.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a very magnified view of tiny dust particles suspended in still air, as seen
under a microscope.
topicenergy
air-tight container
Fig. 4.1
(a) In the space below, draw a diagram to show how the particle labelled P would move
when it is observed for a short time.
[1]
(b) With reference to dust particles and air molecules, explain the movement which you
have drawn.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe and explain how the movement would change if the temperature of the air in
the container increased.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus which may be used to find the specific heat capacity of a liquid.
For
Examiners
Use
topicsound
topiclight
topicspeed
electric
immersion
heater
thermometer
glass beaker
liquid
Fig. 5.1
The readings taken are:
power of the heater,
time heater is switched on,
initial temperature of the liquid,
final temperature of the liquid,
mass of the liquid heated,
50 W
600 s
20 C
65 C
200 g
(a) Use the data to calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
specific heat capacity = ..................................... [5]

(b) (i)
Explain why the value obtained from this data will be higher than the actual value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe one addition to the apparatus which would make the calculated
experimental value nearer to the actual value.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows some apparatus in use in an experiment to find the critical angle for blue light.
topicbrownianmotion
topicbrownian
topicmotion
topicinternal
topictotal
topiclens
topicreflection
60
incident ray
of blue light
Q
glass
prism
emergent
ray
Fig. 6.1
The ray hits the prism at point P, then crosses the prism to point Q. Part of the ray emerges
along the surface QR as shown.
(a) (i)
By using measurements taken from the diagram, find the critical angle of the glass
for blue light.
critical angle = .....................................

(ii)
Use your value to explain how total internal reflection of blue light could be made to
occur at point Q.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) Using measured angles on the diagram, calculate the refractive index of the glass for
blue light.
refractive index = ..................................... [4]
0625/3/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
topicconvection
Fig. 7.1 shows an unlabelled diagram which a teacher draws to represent a sound wave in
air.
For
Examiners
Use
Q
Fig. 7.1
(a) What label should be put on the line with the arrow?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
What does the uneven spacing of the lines show?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What is being shown at P?

...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What is being shown at Q?

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Describe the motion of an air particle at R.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) From Fig. 7.1, measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
wavelength = ..................................... [1]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
10
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a coil of thin wire and a lamp connected to a 4 V supply.
topicradioactivity
4V
Fig. 8.1
The lamp is marked 1.5 V, 0.6 W. The lamp lights at normal brightness.
Calculate
(i)
the current in the lamp,
current = .....................................
(ii)
the resistance of the lamp,
resistance = .....................................
(iii)
the charge flowing through the lamp in 20 s.
charge = ...............................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) The resistance of the coil of wire shown in Fig. 8.1 is 6.2 and its length is 1.0 m.
Using only 1.0 m lengths from the same reel of wire, and without cutting any of them,
state how you would produce a resistance of
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
3.1 ,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
12.4 .
...................................................................................................................................
Complete the circuits in Fig. 8.2 and in Fig. 8.3 to show how the lengths of wire are
connected in each case.
[3]
4V
4V
resistance
3.1
resistance
12.4
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.3
(c) In a similar circuit to that shown in Fig. 8.1, the resistance of the coil is 5.0 and the
current through it is 0.6 A.
Calculate the heat energy produced in the coil in 20 s.
energy = ..................................... [3]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
12
9
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer.
topicpressure
240 V a.c.
12 V a.c.
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain
(i)
why a secondary output is obtained even though there is no electrical connection

between the primary and secondary coils,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
why there would be no output voltage if the primary coil were connected to a 240 V
d.c. supply.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) The transformer is assumed to be 100% efficient.

(i)
There are 100 turns on the secondary coil. How many turns are there on the
primary coil?
turns on the primary = .....................................

(ii)
The output current is 4.0 A. Calculate the input current.

input current = .....................................
[4]
0625/3/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
13
10 (a) Complete the following table for -particles. The first answer has been given.
topictension
property/nature
symbol
complete this column

4
2
He
(hint: it is a helium nucleus)
mass
number
charge
(hint: write down the number of

(hint: proton charges)
ionisation of gases
(hint: choose from: strong, weak

(hint: or almost none)
deflection in a
magnetic field
(hint: choose from: towards N,

(hint: towards S or at right angles
(hint: to the magnetic field lines)
deflection in an
electric field
(hint: choose from: towards +ve,

(hint: towards -ve or no deflection)
[5]
0625/3/M/J/01
[Turn over
14
(b) Fig.10.1 shows the paths of -particles scattered by the nuclei of metal atoms in thin foils.
key:
-particle
nuclei of metal atoms
Fig. 10.1
Explain what can be deduced from the paths shown in Fig. 10.1 about
(i)
the mass of the nucleus of a metal atom compared to the mass of an -particle,
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the charge on the nucleus of a metal atom,

............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the volume occupied by a metal atom compared to its nucleus.

............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/01
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/3
PAPER 3
1 hour 15 minutes

TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

SB (CW/KN) S10764/2
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the motion of a train over a section of track which includes a sharp bend.
topicmass
topicweight
topicdensity
topicvolume
topicprojectiles
30
25
20
speed
m/s
15
10
5
0
0
10
20
30
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The section of the track with the sharp bend has a maximum speed restriction. The train
decelerates approaching the bend so that at the start of the bend it has just reached the
maximum speed allowed. The train is driven around the bend at the maximum speed
allowed and accelerates immediately on leaving the bend.
(i)
What is the maximum speed allowed round the bend in the track?
maximum speed = .....................................
(ii)
How long does the train take to travel the bend of the track?
time taken = .....................................
(iii)
Calculate the length of the bend.
length of bend = .....................................

[3]
(b) The train has to slow down to go round the bend. Calculate the deceleration.
deceleration = .....................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
3
(c) As the train is driven round the bend, there is an extra force acting, called the centripetal
force.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
On Fig. 1.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of this force.

train
curved
track
direction
of motion
Fig. 1.2
(ii)
State the effect that this force has on the motion.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
State how this force is provided.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
4
2
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a car with a dummy driver before and after a collision test.
just before impact
just after impact

V = 0 m/s
V = 45 m/s
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the dummy driver is 90 kg. The impact time to reduce the dummys speed from
45 m/s to zero is 1.2 s.
(a) Calculate
(i)
the momentum of the dummy just before impact,
momentum = .....................................
(ii)
the average force on the dummy during impact.
force = .....................................
[4]
(b) State the main energy transformation during the collision.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate how much of the dummys energy is transformed during the collision.
energy = ..................................... [3]
0625/3/O/N/01
5
3
topicmagnet
A body is in equilibrium and is acted upon by two vertical downward forces in such a way that
there is no net moment about a pivot. A student is asked to show this experimentally.
The student is provided with a suitable pivot, a metre rule with a hole drilled in the centre,
two sets of masses and strong cotton.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up ready for use.
[2]
(b) Describe how two sets of readings are taken, explaining how equilibrium is achieved in
each case.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Write down, in table form, two possible sets of values and use them to show that there
is no net moment.
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows the path that one molecule, M, in a gas might take.
topicenergy
start of
movement
M
position after
a short time
interval
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why, in Fig. 4.1, the path of M has sudden, sharp changes of direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) At the end of the short time interval, M is a short distance from its starting point. Use
this observation to explain why a gas spreads slowly through air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) A student concludes that the results of his experiments show that it requires more
energy to convert 1 g of water into steam at 100 C than it does to raise the temperature
of 1 g of water from 0 C to 100 C.
Use the students data to confirm that this conclusion is correct and calculate the
difference between the two amounts of energy.
For
Examiners
Use
topicspeed
topicthermal
topicsound
topicthermometer
topicthermalcapacity
topiclight
experiment 1
mass of water used 250 g
heat energy supplied 10 500 J
rise in temperature 10 C
experiment 2
mass of water evaporated at 100 C 15 g
heat energy supplied 33 900 J
energy difference = .....................................[5]

(b) Explain, in molecular terms, why considerable heat energy is needed to convert 1 g of
water into 1 g of steam at 100 C, without any change in temperature taking place.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The mercury-in-glass thermometer used in experiment 1 above is said to have
moderate sensitivity,
a good range,
a linear scale.
By reference to this thermometer, explain what is meant by
(i)
sensitivity,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
range,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
linear scale.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
8
6
For
Examiners
Use
(a) Figs 6.1 and 6.2 show what happens to waves at two different types of boundary.
topicdispersion
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
Complete the table below.
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.2
name of the effect shown

wavelength change, if any
frequency change, if any
[4]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Fig. 6.3 is drawn to full scale. The distance CF is the focal length of the lens.
object
F
Fig. 6.3
(i)
By drawing rays from the tip of the object, locate the position of the image.
Hence work out how many times bigger the image is than the object.
number of times bigger = .....................................
(ii)
1.
2.
Draw an eye on Fig. 6.3 to show a suitable place to view the image.
Suggest a use for this lens arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a current-carrying solenoid and the position of a plotting compass.
topicconductor
topicforce
cardboard
direction of current
in the solenoid
indicated by
arrows
compass
originally
placed at A
Fig. 7.1
The plotting compass is used to follow magnetic field lines.
On Fig. 7.1 draw in one magnetic field line which links A and B, both through the inside
of the solenoid and round the outside of the solenoid.
Mark the direction of each part of the field line with an arrow.
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the result of a similar experiment with a current-carrying, straight wire.
For
Examiners
Use
direction of
current vertically
upwards through
the cardboard
C A
horizontal
cardboard
Fig. 7.2
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw another magnetic field line starting at C. Mark its direction with an
arrow.
(ii)
Explain why the line from C could never pass through B.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
What would be the effect on the strength and on the direction of the magnetic
field of
1.
reversing the current without changing its value,

strength.......................................
2.
direction...........................................
increasing the value of the current without changing its direction?

strength.......................................
direction...........................................
[5]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows how two security lamps are connected to a mains supply.
topicradioactivity
240 V
a.c.
Z
Fig. 8.1
Lamp A is labelled 240 V, 600 W and lamp B is labelled 240 V, 300 W.
(a) Calculate the currents at points X, Y and Z in Fig. 8.1.
current at X = .....................................
current at Y = .....................................
current at Z = ..................................... [2]
(b) The resistance of lamp A is 96 and the resistance of lamp B 192 . Using these
values, or by an alternative method, calculate the total circuit resistance. (Ignore the
resistance of the circuit wiring.)
resistance = ..................................... [3]

(c) Fig. 8.2 shows the same lamps connected differently.
240 V
a.c.
P
96
192
Fig. 8.2
(i)
Calculate the current at P.
current at P = .....................................
(ii)
Calculate the potential difference across A and across B.

potential difference across A = .....................................
potential difference across B = .....................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
13
(d) (i)
With reference to values already worked out, explain why the lamps should be
connected as in Fig. 8.1 and not as in Fig. 8.2.
For
Examiners
Use
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The two lamps are to be switched on and off independently. State and explain
which circuit is better for this purpose when suitably placed switches are included.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit and a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
topicdensity
topicpressure
topicvolume
d.c. supply
Fig. 9.1
(a) Complete the connections to show how you would use the c.r.o. to measure the
potential difference across the lamp.
[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when measuring this potential difference.
trace when
p.d. connected
trace before p.d. connected
Fig. 9.2
When calibrated, each vertical division corresponds to a potential difference of 0.4 V.
What is the potential difference across the lamp?
potential difference = ..................................... [2]

(c) Suggest one advantage of using this method of measuring potential difference rather
than using a standard voltmeter.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
15
10 (a) Radioactive sodium has a nuclide represented by the symbol 24
11 Na.
Complete the equation below to show how this nuclide decays with the emission of
a -particle.
For
Examiners
Use
topictension
24
11
Na
Mg +
[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a narrow beam of -particles entering an electric field created by two
charged plates.
+
narrow beam
of -particles
Fig 10.1
(i)
Complete the path of the -particles, starting from the point P.
(ii)
Explain any change of direction which you have shown.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/01
[Turn over
16
(c) (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an arrangement, using a radioactive

source which emits -particles, for finding the variation in thickness of a sheet of
paper.
(ii)
State the readings which need to be taken and how they would be used to decide
whether or not the thickness of the paper varies.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/3/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/3
PHYSICS
PAPER 3

1 hour 15 minutes
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

SP (AT/JB) S22941/2
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
A group of students attempts to find out how much power each student can generate. The
students work in pairs in order to find the time taken for each student to run up a flight of
stairs.
The stairs used are shown in Fig. 1.1.
finishing point
starting point
Fig. 1.1
(a) Make a list of all the readings that would be needed. Where possible, indicate how the
accuracy of the readings could be improved.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Using words, not symbols, write down all equations that would be needed to work out
the power of a student.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i)
When the student has reached the finishing point and is standing at the top of the
stairs, what form of energy has increased to its maximum?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why the total power of the student is greater than the power calculated by
this method.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A small rubber ball falls vertically, hits the ground and rebounds vertically upwards.
Fig. 2.1 is the speed-time graph for the ball.
10
speed
8
m/s
6
4
2
A
E
0
0
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Using information from the graph, describe the following parts of the motion of the ball.
(i)
part AB
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
part DE
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Explain what is happening to the ball along the part of the graph from B through C to D.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Whilst the ball is in contact with the ground, what is the
(i)
overall change in speed,

change in speed = ........................................
(ii)
overall change in velocity?

change in velocity = ......................................
[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
4
(d) Use your answer to (c) to explain the difference between speed and velocity.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Use the graph to calculate the distance travelled by the ball between D and E.
distance travelled = ..................................[2]

(f)
Use the graph to calculate the deceleration of the ball between D and E.
deceleration = ..................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
Fig. 3.1 is an attempt to show the molecules in water and the water vapour molecules over
the water surface.
For
Examiners
Use
water vapour
molecules
water molecules
Fig. 3.1
(a) Explain, in terms of the energies of the molecules, why only a few water molecules have
escaped from the water surface.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State two ways of increasing the number of water molecules escaping from the surface.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
2 .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Energy is required to evaporate water.
Explain, in molecular terms, why this energy is needed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a cylinder containing air at a pressure of 1.0 105 Pa. The length of the
air column in the cylinder is 80 mm.
80 mm
air
piston
cylinder
Fig. 4.1
The piston is pushed in until the pressure in the cylinder rises to 3.8 105 Pa.
Calculate the new length of the air column in the cylinder, assuming that the
temperature of the air has not changed.
new length = .................................. [3]

(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder containing air.
air
Fig. 4.2
The volume of the air in the cylinder changes as the temperature of the air changes.
(i)
The apparatus is to be used as a thermometer. Describe how two fixed points, 0 C

and 100 C, and a temperature scale could be marked on the apparatus.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how this apparatus could be used to indicate the temperature of a large
beaker of water.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/3/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows an arrangement where a plane mirror is used in a shop to watch a display
counter. The arrangement is drawn to a scale of 1 cm : 1 m.
For
Examiners
Use
plane mirror
wall
display counter
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
State the law of reflection.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays to show how much of the display cannot be seen from P.
Indicate this by shading in the part that cannot be seen.
[3]
(b) By construction on Fig. 5.1 and by using the scale, calculate how far the mirror must be
moved so that all of the display counter can be seen from P.
distance moved = .................................... [2]

(c) State the characteristics of an image seen in a plane mirror.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
8
6
For
Examiners
Use
Observations of a distant thunderstorm are made.

(a) During a lightning flash, the average wavelength of the light emitted is 5 107 m. This
light travels at 3 108 m/s.
Calculate the average frequency of this light.
frequency = ...................................... [2]

(b) The interval between the lightning flash being seen and the thunder being heard is
3.6 s. The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
(i)
Calculate the distance between the thunderstorm and the observer.
distance = ............................................
(ii)
Explain why the speed of light is not taken into account in this calculation.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A single ray of white light from the lightning is incident on a prism as shown in Fig. 6.1.
prism
screen
ray of
light
Fig. 6.1
Complete the path of the ray to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. Label the
colours.
[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
9
7
(a) Two non-conducting spheres, made of different materials, are initially uncharged. They
are rubbed together. This causes one of the spheres to become positively charged and
one negatively charged.
For
Examiners
Use
Describe, in terms of electron movement, why the spheres become charged.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Once charged, the two spheres are separated, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
+ +
+ + +
+ +

Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw the electric field between the two spheres. Indicate by arrows the
direction of the electric field lines.
[2]
(c) A conducting wire attached to a negatively charged metal object is connected to earth.
This allows 2.0 1010 electrons, each carrying a charge of 1.6 1019 C, to flow to
earth in 1.0 103 s.
Calculate
(i)
the total charge that flows,
charge .....................................
(ii)
the average current in the wire.
current .....................................
[3]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a transformer and a rectifier used in a battery charging circuit for a 12 V
battery.
T1
240 V a.c.
T2
primary
secondary
Fig. 8.1
(a) The transformer produces an output of 15 V across the secondary coil.

Calculate a suitable turns ratio for the transformer.
turns ratio = ................................ [2]

(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the 15 V output across the secondary coil.
potential
difference
time
Fig. 8.2
On the same axes, sketch the graph of the potential difference across the terminals T1
and T2 before the battery is connected.
[2]
(c) Explain how the circuit converts an a.c. supply into a d.c. output.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) On Fig. 8.1, draw in a battery connected so that it may be charged.
0625/3/M/J/02
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
11
(e) When fully charged, the 12V battery can supply a current of 2.0 A for 30 hours (1.08
105 s).
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate
(i)
the battery power when supplying a current of 2.0 A,
power = ......................................
(ii)
the total energy that the battery will supply during the 30 hours.
energy = ......................................
[4]
Fig. 9.1 shows three resistors connected across a low voltage d.c. supply, and a c.r.o.
A
d.c.
supply
Y input
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain how you would use a 1 V d.c. supply to calibrate the c.r.o.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 9.1, draw in the connections between the c.r.o. and the circuit so that the
potential difference between points C and D may be measured.
[2]
(c) The potential differences between A and F, B and C, C and D, and D and E are
measured.
State the relationship between them.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/02
[Turn over
12
10 Some liquid from an atomic power station is known to be radioactive. A sample of this liquid
is tested in a laboratory.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the test apparatus used to verify that
-particles are emitted from the liquid.
[2]
(b) Explain how the apparatus may be used to estimate the quantity of -radiation being
emitted from the sample.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State any two safety precautions that the technician might take whilst making the test.
precaution 1 .....................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
precaution 2 .....................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/3/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/3
PHYSICS
PAPER 3

1 hour 15 minutes
TIME
1 hour 15 minutes
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
TOTAL

SP (NF/KS) S23400/3
CIE 2002
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a smooth metal block about to slide down BD, along DE and up EF.
BD and DE are friction-free surfaces, but EF is rough. The block stops at F.
B
metal
block
C
F
E
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey from B to F.
Label D, E and F on your graph.
[3]
speed
B
time
Fig. 1.2
(b) The mass of the block is 0.2 kg. The vertical height of B above A is 0.6 m.
The acceleration due to gravity is 10 m/s2.
(i)
Calculate the work done in lifting the block from A to B.
work done = ............................

(ii)
At C, the block is moving at a speed of 2.5 m/s. Calculate its kinetic energy at C.
kinetic energy = ...............................

[5]
0625/3/O/N/02
3
(c) As it passes D, the speed of the block remains almost constant but the velocity
changes. Using the terms vector and scalar, explain this statement.
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) F is the point where the kinetic energy of the block is zero. In terms of energy changes,
explain why F is lower than B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
4
2
A student is given the following apparatus in order to find the density of a piece of rock.
100 g mass
metre rule
suitable pivot on which the rule will balance
measuring cylinder that is big enough for the piece of rock to fit inside
cotton
water
The rock has a mass of approximately 90 g.
(a) (i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of apparatus from this list set up so
that the student is able to find the mass of the piece of rock.
(ii)
State the readings the student should take and how these would be used to find the
mass of the rock.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Describe how the volume of the rock could be found.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The mass of the rock is 88 g and its volume is 24 cm3.
Calculate the density of the rock.
density of rock = .............................. [2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
A thermocouple is used to measure the temperature of the inner wall of a pottery kiln.
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple that could be used for
this purpose.
[2]
(b) Describe
(i)
how you would read the temperature of the wall from the thermocouple,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the thermocouple works.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two conditions in which a thermocouple is very suitable for temperature
measurement.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
6
4
(a) In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of water, the following readings were
taken.
m1 mass of water at 100 C, before boiling starts
m2 mass of water at 100 C, after boiling finishes
V voltage across the heater
I current through the heater
t time that the heater was supplying energy
120 g
80 g
12 V
2.0 A
3750 s
(i)
Using the symbols above, write down the equation that must be used to find the
value of the specific latent heat L of water.
(ii)
Use the equation to calculate the specific latent heat of water from the readings
above.
specific latent heat = ......................................

[4]
(b) Explain, in terms of the energy of molecules, why the specific latent heat of water has a
high value.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the air pressure variation along a sound wave.
air pressure
above normal
normal
B
distance along
wave
below normal
Fig. 5.1
(i)
On AB in Fig. 5.1, mark one point of compression with a dot and the letter C and
the next point of rarefaction with a dot and the letter R.
(ii)
In terms of the wavelength, what is the distance along the wave between a
compression and the next rarefaction?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A sound wave travels through air at a speed of 340 m/s. Calculate the frequency of a
sound wave of wavelength 1.3 m.
frequency = ......................... [2]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
8
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the results of an experiment to find the critical angle for light in a semicircular glass block.
air
glass
Fig. 6.1
The ray of light PO hits the glass at O at an angle of incidence of 0.
Q is the centre of the straight side of the block.
(i)
Measure the critical angle of the glass from Fig. 6.1.

critical angle = .........................
(ii)
Explain what is meant by the critical angle of the light in the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows another ray passing through the same block.
W
Y
Z
Fig. 6.2
The speed of the light between W and Q is 3.0 108 m/s. The speed of the light
between Q and Y is 2.0 108 m/s.
(i)
State the speed of the light between Y and Z.

speed = ......................................
(ii)
Write down an expression, in terms of the speeds of the light, that may be used to
find the refractive index of the glass. Determine the value of the refractive index.
refractive index = ........................

(iii)
Explain why there is no change of direction of ray QY as it passes out of the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
What happens to the wavelength of the light as it passes out of the glass?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows an arrangement that could be used for making an electromagnet or a
permanent magnet.
12 V d.c.
supply
A
turns of thick
copper wire
cardboard tube
Fig. 7.1
Two bars of the same size are also available, one made of iron and the other of steel.
(a) (i)
State which bar should be used to make a permanent magnet.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how the apparatus would be used to make a permanent magnet.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest one reason why the circuit contains an ammeter and a variable resistor.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) During the making of a permanent magnet, the ammeter reads a steady current of 4.0 A
throughout the 5.0 s that the current is switched on. The voltage of the supply is 12 V.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate
(i)
the total circuit resistance,
resistance = ............................
(ii)
the power of the supply,
power = .................................
(iii)
the energy supplied during the 5.0 s.
energy = .................................
[6]
(c) The potential difference across the variable resistor is 7.0 V and that across the
ammeter is zero.
(i)
Calculate the potential difference across the magnetising coil.
potential difference = .................................

(ii)
State the general principle used in making this calculation.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a long straight wire between the poles of a permanent magnet.
It is connected through a switch to a battery so that, when the switch is closed, there is a
steady current in the wire.
wire in a direction
at right angles to the page
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the direction of the magnetic field between the poles of the magnet.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The wire is free to move. The current is switched on so that its direction is into the page.
(i)
State the direction of movement of the wire.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how you reached your answer to (b)(i).

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) This experiment is the basis of an electric motor.

Describe two changes to the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1 that would enable
continuous rotation to take place.
change 1 ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
change 2 ..........................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of electrons, two charged plates and a screen. These components
are inside an electron tube, the outline of which is not shown.
For
Examiners
Use
charged plate
P
beam of
electrons
X
screen
charged plate
Fig. 9.1
The beam of electrons hits the screen at the point P.
(a) On Fig. 9.1,
(i)
complete the path of the electron beam,
(ii)
mark the charges on both plates,
(iii)
mark with an arrow and the letter C the direction of the conventional current in the
electron beam.
[4]
(b) In this electron tube, the electrons are produced at X and are accelerated towards Y.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the components needed to produce and
accelerate the electrons.
[4]
0625/3/O/N/02
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 Fig. 10.1 is part of the decay curve for a sample of a -emitting isotope.
100
% activity
75
50
25
0
0
10
15
20
time / days
Fig. 10.1
(a) Use Fig. 10.1 to find the half-life of the isotope.
half-life = .......................... [1]

(b) Complete Fig. 10.1 as far as time = 20 days, by working out the values of a number of
points and plotting them. Show your working.
[2]
(c) The decay product of the -emitting isotope is not radioactive.

Explain why the sample of the radioactive isotope will be safer after 20 days than after
1 day. Support your answer by reference to the graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The isotope used for this decay curve may be represented by the symbol AZX.
Write down an equation, by filling in the gaps below, to show the -decay of this isotope
to a decay product that has the symbol Y.
AX
Z
0625/3/O/N/02
[2]
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3
May/June 2003
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
provided.
8
9
10
11
Total

SP (AT/KN) S46413/2
CIE 2003
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus that may be used to compare the strengths of two springs of the
same size, but made from different materials.
spring
scale
masses
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
Explain how the masses produce a force to stretch the spring.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why this force, like all forces, is a vector quantity.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the graphs obtained when the two springs are stretched.
20
force/N
spring 1
15
spring 2
10
5
0
10
20
30
extension/mm
Fig. 1.2
0625/3/M/J/03
40
For
Examiners
Use
3
(i)
State which spring is more difficult to extend. Quote values from the graphs to
support your answer.
For
Examiners
Use
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
On the graph of spring 2, mark a point P at the limit of proportionality. Explain your
choice of point P.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Use the graphs to find the difference in the extensions of the two springs when a
force of 15 N is applied to each one.
difference in extensions = ..................................

[6]
The speed of a cyclist reduces uniformly from 2.5 m/s to 1.0 m/s in 12 s.
(a) Calculate the deceleration of the cyclist.
deceleration = ..................................[3]
(b) Calculate the distance travelled by the cyclist in this time.
distance = ..................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows the arm of a crane when it is lifting a heavy box.
1220 N
950 N
40 30
P
box
Fig. 3.1
(a) By the use of a scale diagram (not calculation) of the forces acting at P, find the weight
of the box.
[5]
0625/3/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) Another box of weight 1500 N is raised vertically by 3.0 m.
(i)
Calculate the work done on the box.
work done = ..................................

(ii)
The crane takes 2.5 s to raise this box 3.0 m. Calculate the power output of the
crane.
power = ..................................
[4]
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed glass syringe that contains air and many very tiny suspended dust
particles.
syringe
seal
piston
dust particles
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the dust particles are suspended in the air and do not settle to the bottom.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The air in the syringe is at a pressure of 2.0 105 Pa. The piston is slowly moved into the
syringe, keeping the temperature constant, until the volume of the air is reduced from
80 cm3 to 25 cm3. Calculate the final pressure of the air.
pressure = ..................................[3]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a thermocouple set up to measure the temperature at a point on a solar
panel.
Sun's rays
surface
of solar
panel
Z
X
cold junction
Y
hot junction
Fig. 5.1
(a) X is a copper wire.
(i)
Suggest a material for Y.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Name the component Z.

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Explain how a thermocouple is used to measure temperature.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Experiment shows that the temperature of the surface depends upon the type of
surface used.
Describe the nature of the surface that will cause the temperature to rise most.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/3/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of light crossing the edge of a glass block from air into glass.
air
direction in which
wavefronts
are moving
glass
edge of glass
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1
(i)
draw in an incident ray, a normal and a refracted ray that meet at the same point on
the edge of the glass block,
(ii)
label the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction,
(iii)
measure the two angles and record their values.

angle of incidence = ..................................
angle of refraction = ..................................
[4]
(b) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ..................................[3]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
8
7
For
Examiners
Use
In a thunderstorm, both light and sound waves are generated at the same time.
(a) How fast does the light travel towards an observer?
speed = ..................................
[1]
(b) Explain why the sound waves always reach the observer after the light waves.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The speed of sound waves in air may be determined by experiment using a source that
generates light waves and sound waves at the same time.
(i)
Draw a labelled diagram of the arrangement of suitable apparatus for the

experiment.
(ii)
State the readings you would take.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain how you would calculate the speed of sound in air from your readings.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3/M/J/03
9
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a battery with a resistor connected across its terminals. The e.m.f. of the
battery is 6.0 V.
For
Examiners
Use
6.0 V
Fig. 8.1
The battery causes 90 C of charge to flow through the circuit in 45 s.
(a) Calculate
(i)
the current in the circuit,
current = ..................................
(ii)
the resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ..................................
(iii)
the electrical energy transformed in the circuit in 45 s.
energy = ..................................
[6]
(b) Explain what is meant by the term e.m.f. of the battery.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/3/M/J/03
[Turn over
10
9
A transformer has an output of 24 V when supplying a current of 2.0 A. The current in the
primary coil is 0.40 A and the transformer is 100% efficient.
(a) Calculate
(i)
the power output of the transformer,
power = ..................................
(ii) the voltage applied across the primary coil.
voltage = ..................................
[4]
(b) Explain
(i)
what is meant by the statement that the transformer is 100% efficient,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
how the transformer changes an input voltage into a different output voltage.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/3/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
11
10 Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 show two views of a vertical wire carrying a current up through a
horizontal card. Points P and Q are marked on the card.
For
Examiners
Use
vertical
wire
view from above the card

Fig. 10.1
Fig. 10.2
(a) On Fig. 10.2,

(i)
draw a complete magnetic field line (line of force) through P and indicate its
direction with an arrow,
(ii)
draw an arrow through Q to indicate the direction in which a compass placed at Q

would point.
[3]
(b) State the effect on the direction in which compass Q points of

(i)
increasing the current in the wire,

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
reversing the direction of the current in the wire.

...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Fig. 10.3 shows the view from above of another vertical wire carrying a current up
through a horizontal card. A cm grid is marked on the card. Point W is 1 cm vertically
above the top surface of the card.
T
R
vertical
wire carrying
current
S
W
Fig. 10.3
State the magnetic field strength at S, T and W in terms of the magnetic field strength
at R. Use one of the alternatives, weaker, same strength or stronger for each answer.
at S ........................................................................
at T ........................................................................
at W........................................................................
0625/3/M/J/03
[3]
[Turn over
12
For
Examiners
Use
11 (a) A radioactive isotope emits only -particles.

(i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus you would use to
prove that no -particles or -radiation are emitted from the isotope.
(ii)
Describe the test you would carry out.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Explain how your results would show that only -particles are emitted.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a stream of -particles about to enter the space between the poles of a
very strong magnet.
N
-particles
Fig. 11.1
Describe the path of the -particles in the space between the magnetic poles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/3/M/J/03
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

9
10

provided.
11
Total

MML 4504 11/02 S53411/2
UCLES 2003
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a bus during tests.
At time t = 0, the driver starts to brake.
speed
m/s
20
15
P
test 2 graph
10
Q
5
test 1 graph
R
0
0
10
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) For test 1,
(i) determine how long the bus takes to stop,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) state which part of the graph shows the greatest deceleration,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) use the graph to determine how far the bus travels in the first 2 seconds.
distance = ..........................................
[4]
(b) For test 2, a device was fitted to the bus. The device changed the deceleration.
(i) State two ways in which the deceleration during test 2 is different from that during
test 1.
1 ...............................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................
(ii) Calculate the value of the deceleration in test 2.
deceleration = ....................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a sketch graph of the magnitude of the acceleration for the bus when it
is travelling around a circular track at constant speed.
For
Examiners
Use
magnitude
of acceleration
0
0
time
Fig. 1.2
(i) Use the graph to show that there is a force of constant magnitude acting on the
bus.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) State the direction of this force.
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
4
2
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 2.1 shows a diver 50 m below the surface of the water.

water surface
50 m
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of water is 1000 kg/m 3 and the acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s 2 .
Calculate the pressure that the water exerts on the diver.
pressure = .................................... [3]

(b) The window in the divers helmet is 150 mm wide and 70 mm from top to bottom.
Calculate the force that the water exerts on this window.
force = .......................................... [3]
0625/03/O/N/03
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a simple see-saw. One child A sits near to end X and another child B sits
near to end Y. The feet of the children do not touch the ground when the see-saw is
balanced.
X
For
Examiners
Use
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(a) Child A has a mass of 18.0 kg and child B has a mass of 20.0 kg.
Without calculation, indicate where the children could sit so that the see-saw balances
horizontally. You may draw on Fig. 3.1 if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the relationship between the moment caused by child A and that caused by
child B.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Child A is 2.50 m from the pivot. Calculate the distance of child B from the pivot.
distance = .................................... [2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows water being heated by an electrical heater. The water in the can is not
boiling, but some is evaporating.
can
heater
water
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of the movement and energies of the water molecules, how
evaporation takes place.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State two differences between evaporation and boiling.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) After the water has reached its boiling point, the mass of water in the can is reduced
by 3.2 g in 120 s. The heater supplies energy to the water at a rate of 60 W. Use this
information to calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water.
specific latent heat = ............................. [3]

0625/03/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
For
Examiners
Use
(a) Equal volumes of nitrogen, water and copper at 20 C are heated to 50 C.

(i) Which one of the three will have a much greater expansion than the other two?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain your answer in terms of the way the molecules are arranged in the three
substances.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows a thermometer with a range of 10 C to 50 C.
10 C
50 C
Fig. 5.1
Explain what is meant by

(i) the sensitivity of a thermometer,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the linearity of a thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
8
6
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 6.1 shows the diffraction of waves by a narrow gap.

P is a wavefront that has passed through the gap.
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more wavefronts to the right of the gap.
[3]
(b) The waves travel towards the gap at a speed of 3 x 108 m/s and have a frequency of
5 x 1014 Hz. Calculate the wavelength of these waves.
wavelength = ................................ [3]
0625/03/O/N/03
9
7
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 7.1 is drawn to full scale. The focal length of the lens is 5.0 cm.
axis
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark each principal focus of the lens with a dot and the letter F.
[2]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the tip of the object O that appear to pass through the
tip of the image.
[2]
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw the image and label it with the letter I.
[1]
(d) Explain why the base of the image lies on the axis.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State a practical use of a convex lens when used as shown in Fig. 7.1.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows the outline of an a.c. generator. The peak output voltage of the generator is
6.0 V and the output has a frequency of 10 Hz.
output
coil
iron core
bearing
rings
connected
one to each
end of coil
handle to
turn coil
Fig. 8.1
(a) Fig. 8.2 shows the axes of a voltage-time graph for the generator output.
voltage / V
0.1
0.2
0.3
time / s
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2,
(i) mark suitable voltage values on the voltage axis,
(ii) draw a graph of the generator output.
[3]
0625/03/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
11
For
Examiners
Use
(b) The generator shown in Fig. 8.1 works by electromagnetic induction.

Explain how this effect produces the output voltage.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) State the energy changes that occur in the generator when it is producing output.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows the screen of a c.r.o. (cathode-ray oscilloscope).

The c.r.o. is being used to display the output from a microphone.
The vertical scale on the screen is in volts.
voltage / V
2
1
0
1
2
Fig. 9.1
(i) Describe the output from the microphone.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Use the graph to determine the peak voltage of the output.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Describe how you could check that the voltage calibration on the screen is
correct.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows the screen of the c.r.o. when it is being used to measure a small time
interval between two voltage pulses.
For
Examiners
Use
10
cm scale
Fig. 9.2
(i) What is the distance on the screen between the two voltage pulses?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The time-base control of the c.r.o. is set at 5.0 ms / cm.
Calculate the time interval between the voltage pulses.
time = ........................................
(iii) Suggest one example where a c.r.o. can be used to measure a small time
interval.
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
[Turn over
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a battery with an e.m.f of 12 V supplying power to two lamps.
The total power supplied is 150 W when both lamps are on.
L1
L2
Fig. 10.1
(a) Calculate the current supplied by the battery when both lamps are on.
current = ...................................... [2]

(b) The current in lamp L2 is 5.0 A.
Calculate
(i) the current in lamp L1,
current = ............................................
(ii) the power of lamp L1,
power = ..............................................
(iii) the resistance of lamp L1.
resistance = .......................................
[6]
0625/03/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 (a) A sodium nucleus decays by the emission of a -particle to form magnesium.
(i) Complete the decay equation below.
24 Na
11
Mg +
(ii) Fig. 11.1 shows -particles from sodium nuclei moving into the space between the
poles of a magnet.
-particles
Fig. 11.1
Describe the path of the -particles between the magnetic poles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Very small quantities of a radioactive isotope are used to check the circulation of blood
by injecting the isotope into the bloodstream.
(i) Describe how the results are obtained.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Explain why a -emitting isotope is used for this purpose rather than one that
emits either -particles or -particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/03/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3
May/June 2004
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
provided.
8
9
10
11
Total

UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1 shows a cycle track.

A
v = 6 m/s
D
Fig. 1.1
A cyclist starts at A and follows the path ABCDEB.
The speed-time graph is shown in Fig. 1.2.
B
6
speed
m/s 5
4
3
2
1
0A
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Use information from Fig. 1.1 and Fig. 1.2 to describe the motion of the cyclist
(i)
along AB,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
along BCDEB.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
(b) The velocity v of the cyclist at C is shown in Fig. 1.1.

State one similarity and one difference between the velocity at C and the velocity at E.
similarity ...........................................................................................................................
difference ......................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Calculate
(i)
the distance along the cycle track from A to B,
distance =
(ii)
the circumference of the circular part of the track.
circumference =
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a rock that is falling from the top of a cliff into the river below.
cliff
falling
rock
river
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the rock is 75 kg. The acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
Calculate the weight of the rock.
weight = [1]
(b) The rock falls from rest through a distance of 15 m before it hits the water.
Calculate its kinetic energy just before hitting the water. Show your working.
kinetic energy = [3]

(c) The rock hits the water. Suggest what happens to the kinetic energy of the rock during
the impact.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
For
Examiners
Use
A large spring is repeatedly stretched by an athlete to increase the strength of his arms.
Fig. 3.1 is a table showing the force required to stretch the spring.
extension of spring / m
force exerted to produce extension / N
0.096
0.192
0.288
0.384
250
500
750
1000
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
State Hookes law.

...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Use the results in Fig. 3.1 to show that the spring obeys Hookes law.
[1]
(b) Another athlete using a different spring exerts an average force of 400 N to enable her
to extend the spring by 0.210 m.
(i)
Calculate the work done by this athlete in extending the spring once.
work done =
(ii)
She is able to extend the spring by this amount and to release it 24 times in 60 s.
Calculate the power used by this athlete while doing this exercise.
power =
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
6
4
(a) Two identical open boxes originally contain the same volume of water.
One is kept at 15 C and the other at 85 C for the same length of time.
Fig. 4.1 shows the final water levels.
15 C
85 C
Fig. 4.1
With reference to the energies of the water molecules, explain why the levels are
different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) In an experiment to find the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water, it took 34 500 J
of energy to evaporate 15 g of water that was originally at 100 C.
A second experiment showed that 600 J of energy was lost to the atmosphere from the
apparatus during the time it took to evaporate 15 g of water.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water that would be obtained from
this experiment.
specific latent heat = [3]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
7
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows two identical metal plates. The front surface of one is dull black and the
front surface of the other is shiny silver.
The plates are fitted with heaters that keep the surfaces of the plates at the same
temperature.
dull black
For
Examiners
Use
shiny silver
Fig. 5.1
(i)
State the additional apparatus needed to test which surface is the best emitter of
heat radiation.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State one precaution that is needed to ensure a fair comparison.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
State the result that you expect.

...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Write down another name for heat radiation.

...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of an everyday situation in which a
convection current occurs.
Mark the path of the current with a line and show its direction with arrows.
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[3]
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray PQ of blue light incident on the side of a rectangular glass block.
glass
C
Q
air
Fig. 6.1
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
By drawing on Fig. 6.1, continue the ray PQ through and beyond the block.
Mark the angle of incidence at CD with the letter i and the angle of refraction at CD
with the letter r.
[3]
(b) The speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108 m/s and the speed of light in glass is 2.0 x 108 m/s.
(i)
Write down a formula that gives the refractive index of glass in terms of the
speeds of light in air and glass.
refractive index =
(ii)
Use this formula to calculate the refractive index of glass.

refractive index =
[2]
(c) The frequency of the blue light in ray PQ is 6.0 x 1014 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ..[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
Fig. 7.1 shows the cone of a loudspeaker that is producing sound waves in air.
At any given moment, a series of compressions and rarefactions exist along the line XY.
For
Examiners
Use
cone
wires
air
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, use the letter C to mark three compressions and the letter R to mark three
rarefactions along XY.
[1]
(b) Explain what is meant by
(i)
a compression,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a rarefaction.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) A sound wave is a longitudinal wave. With reference to the sound wave travelling along
XY in Fig. 7.1, explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) There is a large vertical wall 50 m in front of the loudspeaker. The wall reflects the
sound waves.
Calculate the time taken for the sound waves to travel from X to the wall and to return
to X.
time = [2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a 240 V a.c. mains circuit to which a number of appliances are connected and
switched on.
240 V a.c.
refrigerator
fan
1.2 kW
200 W
60 W
60 W
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate the power supplied to the circuit.
power = ..[1]
(b) The appliances are connected in parallel.
(i)
Explain what connected in parallel means.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State two advantages of connecting the appliances in parallel rather than in series.
advantage 1 ...............................................................................................................
advantage 2 ...............................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Calculate
(i)
the current in the refrigerator,
current = ..
(ii) the energy used by the fan in 3 hours,
energy = ..
(iii) the resistance of the filament of one lamp.
resistance = ..
[7]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
Electromagnetic induction can be demonstrated using a solenoid, a magnet, a sensitive

ammeter and connecting wire.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up to demonstrate
electromagnetic induction.
[2]
(b) State one way of using the apparatus to produce an induced current.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Explain why your method produces an induced current.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Without changing the apparatus, state what must be done to produce
(i)
an induced current in the opposite direction to the original current,

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a larger induced current.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04
[Turn over
12
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the faces of two ammeters. One has an analogue display and the other
a digital display.
2
1
4
5
Fig. 10.1
State what is meant by the terms analogue and digital.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i)
Name the components from which logic gates are made.

...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
(iii)
UCLES 2004
In the space below, draw the symbol for an AND gate.

Label the inputs and the output.
[1]
Describe the action of an AND gate with two inputs.
[2]
0625/03 M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
13
For
Examiners
Use
11 (a) -particles can be scattered by thin gold foils.

Fig. 11.1 shows part of the paths of three -particles.
Complete the paths of the three -particles.
[3]
-particle 1
-particle 2
-particle 3
gold nuclei
Fig. 11.1
(b) What does the scattering of -particles show about atomic structure?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State the nucleon number (mass number) of an -particle.
nucleon number = [1]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 M/J/04

PHYSICS
Paper 3
0625/03
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidate
Name
Centre
Number
Candidate
Number

For Examiners Use

question.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate
units.
DO NOT WRITE IN THE BARCODE.
DO NOT WRITE IN THE GREY AREAS BETWEEN THE PAGES.

in the space given on this page.
provided.
3
4
5
8
9
10
11
Total

UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the path of one drop of water in the jet from a powerful hose.
vertical path
of a single
water drop
hose set in ground
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is a graph of speed against time for the water drop shown in Fig. 1.1.
speed 40
m/s
30
20
10
0
0
4
6
8
time after leaving the hose / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Describe the movement of the water drop in the first 4 s after leaving the hose.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Use Fig. 1.2 to find
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
the speed of the water leaving the hose,

speed = ...
(ii)
the time when the speed of the water is least.

time = ...
[2]
(c) Use values from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the acceleration of the drop as it falls back towards
the ground. Show your working.
acceleration = ...[3]
(d) Calculate the greatest distance above the ground reached by the drop.
distance = ...[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a reservoir that stores water.
For
Examiners
Use
20 m
valve
water
dam
exit pipe
Fig. 2.1
(a) The valve in the exit pipe is closed. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3 and the
acceleration of free fall is 10 m/s2.
Calculate the pressure of the water acting on the closed valve in the exit pipe.
pressure = ...[2]
(b) The cross-sectional area of the pipe is 0.5 m2.
Calculate the force exerted by the water on the closed valve.
force = ...[2]
(c) The valve is then opened and water, originally at the surface of the reservoir, finally
flows out of the exit pipe. State the energy transformation of this water between the
surface of the reservoir and the open end of the pipe.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
5
3
A scientist needs to find the density of a sample of rock whilst down a mine. He has only a
spring balance, a measuring cylinder, some water and some thread.
(a) In the space below, draw two labelled diagrams, one to show the spring balance being
used and the other to show the measuring cylinder being used with a suitable rock
sample.
[2]
(b) The spring balance is calibrated in newtons. State how the mass of the rock sample
may be found from the reading of the spring balance.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State the readings that would be taken from the measuring cylinder.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) State how the volume of the rock would be found from the readings.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State in words the formula that would be used to find the density of the sample.
density =
[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
(a) Fig. 4.1 shows a simple type of thermocouple that has been calibrated to measure
temperature.
copper wire
hot junction
V
iron wire
sensitive voltmeter
cold junction
Fig. 4.1
(i)
Describe how the thermocouple could be used to measure the temperature of a

beaker of hot water.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
State two situations where a thermocouple would be a good choice of thermometer

to measure temperature.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) A mercury-in-glass thermometer is placed in an insulated beaker of water at 60 C. The
water is heated at a constant rate. The temperature of the water is measured and
recorded on the graph shown in Fig. 4.2.
100
temperature/C
80
60
40
20
0
10
15
20
time/min
Fig. 4.2
State the effect of the heat supplied
(i)
during the period 0 to 5 minutes,

...................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................
(ii)
during the period 10 to 15 minutes.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a sealed box.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 5.1
(i)
The box contains a large number of air molecules. On Fig. 5.1, draw a possible
path of one of the air molecules, as it moves inside the box.
(ii)
Explain
1
how air molecules in the box create a pressure on the inside walls,
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
why this pressure rises as the temperature of the air in the box increases.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) Air in a cylinder is compressed slowly, so that the temperature does not rise. The
pressure changes from 2.0 x 105 Pa to 5.0 x 105 Pa. The original volume was 0.35 m3.
Calculate the new volume.
volume = ...[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows an optical fibre. XY is a ray of light passing along the fibre.
For
Examiners
Use
fibre
Z
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, continue the ray XY until it passes Z.
[1]
(b) Explain why the ray does not leave the fibre at Y.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The light in the optical fibre has a wavelength of 3.2 x 107 m and is travelling at a speed
of 1.9 x 108 m/s.
(i)
Calculate the frequency of the light.
frequency = ...
(ii)
The speed of light in air is 3.0 x 108 m/s.

Calculate the refractive index of the material from which the fibre is made.
refractive index = ...

[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a 12 V battery connected to a number of resistors.
For
Examiners
Use
12 V
4
4
A
8
Fig. 7.1
(a) Calculate the current in the 8 resistor.
current = ..[2]
(b) Calculate, for the resistors connected in the circuit, the combined resistance of
(i)
the two 5 resistors,
resistance = ..
(ii)
the two 4 resistors.
resistance = ..
[2]
(c) The total current in the two 4 resistors is 6 A.
Calculate the total power dissipated in the two resistors.
power = ..[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
11
(d) What will be the reading on a voltmeter connected across
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
the two 4 resistors,
reading = ..
(ii)
one 5 resistor?
reading = ..
[2]
(e) The 8 resistor is made from a length of resistance wire of uniform cross-sectional area.
State the effect on the resistance of the wire of using
(i)
the same length of the same material with a greater cross-sectional area,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
a smaller length of the same material with the same cross-sectional area.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows plane waves passing through a gap in a barrier that is approximately equal to
the wavelength of the waves.
barrier
Fig. 8.1
(a) What is the name given to the wave property shown in Fig. 8.1?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, carefully draw the pattern that would be obtained if the gap were
increased to six times the wavelength of the waves.
[4]
(c) The effect in Fig. 8.1 is often shown using water waves on the surface of a tank of water.
These are transverse waves. Explain what is meant by a transverse wave.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
13
9
(a) An engine on a model railway needs a 6 V a.c. supply. A mains supply of 240 V a.c. is
available.
(i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a transformer suitable for producing
the required supply voltage.
(ii)
Suggest suitable numbers of turns for the coils.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) The power needed for this model engine is 12 W. Calculate the current taken from the
mains when just this engine is in use, assuming that the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = ..[2]
(c) Explain why transformers will only work when connected to an a.c. supply.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 (a) (i)
What is the function of a transistor when placed in an electrical circuit?

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe the action of a transistor.

...................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i)
(ii)
In the space below, draw the symbol for an OR gate. Label the inputs and the output.
[1]
Describe the action of an OR gate that has two inputs.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 (a) The decay of a nucleus of radium 226
Ra leads to the emission of an -particle and
88
leaves behind a nucleus of radon (Rn).
In the space below, write an equation to show this decay.
[2]
(b) In an experiment to find the range of -particles in air, the apparatus in Fig. 11.1 was
used.
particle source
detector
ruler
Fig. 11.1
The results of this experiment are shown below.
count rate / (counts/minute)
distance from source to detector/cm
(i)
681 562 441 382 317

1
20
19
21
19
State what causes the count rate 9 cm from the source.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Estimate the count rate that is due to the source at a distance of 2 cm.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Suggest a value for the maximum distance that -particles can travel from the
source.
...................................................................................................................................
(iv)
Justify your answer to (iii).

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/03 O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use

PHYSICS
Paper 3
0625/03
May/June 2005
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidate
Name
Centre
Number
Candidate
Number

hand in.
For Examiners Use

1
2

part question.
appropriate units.
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
Total
SPA (SJF3442/CG) S92054/2.1
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
A solid plastic sphere falls towards the Earth.

Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of the fall up to the point where the sphere hits the Earths
surface.
140
R
speed
m/s
120
100
80
60
Q
40
20
P
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70 80
time / s
90
100 110
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe in detail the motion of the sphere shown by the graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) On Fig. 1.2, draw arrows to show the directions of the forces acting on the sphere when
it is at the position shown by point S on the graph. Label your arrows with the names of
the forces.
[2]
Fig. 1.2
(c) Explain why the sphere is moving with constant speed at S.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Use the graph to calculate the approximate distance that the sphere falls
(i)
between R and T,
(ii)
between P and Q.
distance = . [2]
distance = . [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a simple pendulum that swings backwards and forwards between P and Q.
support
string
Q
pendulum bob
Fig. 2.1
(a) The time taken for the pendulum to swing from P to Q is approximately 0.5 s.
Describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i)
State the two vertical forces acting on the pendulum bob when it is at position R.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
The pendulum bob moves along the arc of a circle. State the direction of the
resultant of the two forces in (i).
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The mass of the bob is 0.2 kg. During the swing it moves so that P is 0.05 m higher
than R.
Calculate the increase in potential energy of the pendulum bob between R and P.
potential energy = . [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
A mass of 3.0 kg accelerates at 2.0 m/s2 in a straight line.

(a) State why the velocity and the acceleration are both described as vector quantities.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the force required to accelerate the mass.
force = . [2]
(c) The mass hits a wall.
The average force exerted on the wall during the impact is 120 N.
The area of the mass in contact with the wall at impact is 0.050 m2.
Calculate the average pressure that the mass exerts on the wall during the impact.
pressure = . [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that a student uses to make an estimate of the specific heat
capacity of iron.
electrical heater
thermometer
iron block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The power of the heater is known. State the four readings the student must take to find
the specific heat capacity of iron.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
4. ................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Write down an equation, in words or in symbols, that could be used to work out the
specific heat capacity of iron from the readings in (a).
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) (i)
Explain why the value obtained with this apparatus is higher than the actual value.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State one addition to the apparatus that would help to improve the accuracy of the
value obtained.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows the paths of a few air molecules and a single dust particle. The actual air
molecules are too small to show on the diagram.
paths of
air molecules
dust particle
Fig. 5.1
Explain why the dust particle undergoes small random movements.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows the paths of a few molecules leaving the surface of a liquid. The liquid is
below its boiling point.
air and vapour

liquid
Fig. 5.2
(i)
State which liquid molecules are most likely to leave the surface.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain your answer to (i).

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light OPQ passing through a semi-circular glass block.
For
Examiners
Use
30
Fig. 6.1
(a) Explain why there is no change in the direction of the ray at P.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the changes, if any, that occur to the speed, wavelength and frequency of the light
as it enters the glass block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) At Q some of the light in ray OPQ is reflected and some is refracted.
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate positions of the reflected ray and the refracted ray.
Label these rays.
[2]
(d) The refractive index for light passing from glass to air is 0.67.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the ray that is refracted at Q into air.
angle = . [3]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
10
7
Fig. 7.1 shows the parts of the electromagnetic spectrum.
ultraviolet
- rays and X - rays
v
i
s
i
b
l
e
infrared
For
Examiners
Use
radio
waves
Fig. 7.1
(a) Name one type of radiation that has
(i)
a higher frequency than ultra-violet,

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
a longer wavelength than visible light.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Some -rays emitted from a radioactive source have a speed in air of 3.0 x 108 m/s and
a wavelength of 1.0 x 1012 m.
Calculate the frequency of the -rays.
frequency = . [2]
(c) State the approximate speed of infra-red waves in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
11
8
A student has a power supply, a resistor, a voltmeter, an ammeter and a variable resistor.
(a) The student obtains five sets of readings from which he determines an average value
for the resistance of the resistor.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a circuit that he could use.
[3]
(b) Describe how the circuit should be used to obtain the five sets of readings.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows another circuit.
6.0 V
resistor
3.0
resistor of
unknown value
Fig. 8.1
When the circuit is switched on, the ammeter reads 0.50 A.
(i)
Calculate the value of the unknown resistor.
resistance = . [2]
(ii)
Calculate the charge passing through the 3.0 resistor in 120 s.
charge = . [1]
(iii)
Calculate the power dissipated in the 3.0 resistor.

power = . [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows an a.c. supply connected to a resistor and a diode.
a.c. supply
resistor
For
Examiners
Use
output
Fig. 9.1
(i)
State the effect of fitting the diode in the circuit.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 9.2, sketch graphs to show the variation of the a.c. supply voltage and the
output voltage with time.
a.c. supply
voltage
0
time
output
voltage
0
time
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(b) (i)
In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOT gate.
[1]
(ii)
State the action of a NOT gate.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is the decay curve for a radioactive isotope that emits only -particles.
For
Examiners
Use
400
count rate
counts / min
300
200
100
0
0
10
30
time / min
20
40
Fig. 10.1
Use the graph to find the value of the half-life of the isotope.
Indicate, on the graph, how you arrived at your value.
half-life . [2]
(b) A student determines the percentage of -particles absorbed by a thick aluminium
sheet. He uses a source that is emitting only -particles and that has a long half-life.
(i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus required, set up to
make the determination.
[2]
(ii)
List the readings that the student needs to take.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
[Turn over
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a flexible wire hanging between two magnetic poles. The flexible wire is
connected to a 12 V d.c. supply that is switched off.
wire fixed here
+
12 V d.c.
flexible wire hanging

between magnetic poles
wire fixed here
Fig. 11.1
(a) Explain why the wire moves when the supply is switched on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the direction of the deflection of the wire.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When the wire first moves, energy is changed from one form to another. State these two
forms of energy.
from ........................................................... to ............................................................ [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
15
(d) Fig. 11.2 shows the flexible wire made into a rigid rectangular coil and mounted on an
axle.
magnetic pole
axle
N
coil
magnetic pole
axle
Fig. 11.2
(i)
Add to the diagram an arrangement that will allow current to be fed into the coil
whilst allowing the coil to turn continuously. Label the parts you have added.
[1]
(ii)
Briefly explain how your arrangement works.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/M/J/05

PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
0625/03
1 hour 15 minutes

hand in.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs, music or rough working.
For Examiners Use

1
2

part question.
appropriate units.
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
Total

SP (SJF3441/CG) T03202/4
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
(a) State what is meant by the terms

(i)
weight, ......................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
density. ......................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student is given a spring balance that has a scale in newtons. The student is told that
the acceleration of free-fall is 10 m/s2.
(i)
Describe how the student could find the mass of an irregular solid object.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
Describe how the student could go on to find the density of the object.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows three forces acting on an object of mass 0.5 kg. All three forces act
through the centre of mass of the object.
centre of mass
9.0 N
3.0 N
4.0 N
Fig. 1.1
Calculate
(i)
the magnitude and direction of the resultant force on the object,
magnitude =
(ii)
direction .............................................................. [2]
the magnitude of the acceleration of the object.
acceleration = [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
Fig. 2.1 shows apparatus for investigating moments of forces.
spring
balance
10
20
30
For
Examiners
Use
horizontally balanced
metre rule
40
60
50
70
80
90
100
horizontal pivot
6.0 N
weight
Fig. 2.1
The uniform metre rule shown in Fig. 2.1 is in equilibrium.

(a) Write down two conditions for the metre rule to be in equilibrium.
condition 1 ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
condition 2 ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Show that the value of the reading on the spring balance is 8.0 N.
[2]
(c) The weight of the uniform metre rule is 1.5 N.

Calculate the force exerted by the pivot on the metre rule.
magnitude of force =
direction of force [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a pond that is kept at a constant depth by a pressure-operated valve in the
base.
water
pressure-operated
valve
outlet
spring
Fig. 3.1
(a) The pond is kept at a depth of 2.0 m. The density of water is 1000 kg/m3.
Calculate the water pressure on the valve.
pressure =.. [2]

(b) The force required to open the valve is 50 N. The valve will open when the water depth
reaches 2.0 m.
Calculate the area of the valve.
area = .. [2]
(c) The water supply is turned off and the valve is held open so that water drains out
through the valve.
State the energy changes of the water that occur as the depth of the water drops from
2.0 m to zero.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus that could be used to measure the specific latent heat of ice.
60 W heater
power supply
melting ice at 0 C
beaker
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how you would use the apparatus. You may assume that ice at 0 C and a
stopwatch are available. State all the readings that would be needed at each stage.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) In an experiment, 120 g of ice at 0 C is to be melted. The specific latent heat of ice is
340 J/g. Assume that all the energy from the heater will be used to melt the ice.
Calculate the expected time for which the 60 W heater is switched on.
expected time = [2]

(c) When the experiment is carried out, the ice melts in slightly less time than the expected
time.
(i)
State one reason why this happens.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Suggest one modification to the experiment that would reduce the difference
between the experimental time and the expected time.
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Turn over
0625/03/O/N/05
UCLES 2005
For
Examiners
Use
6
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a way of indicating the positions and direction of movement of some
molecules in a gas at one instant.
piston
cylinder
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
Describe the movement of the molecules.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
Explain how the molecules exert a pressure on the container walls.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the gas in the cylinder is heated, it pushes the piston further out of the cylinder.
(i)
the average spacing of the molecules,

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the average speed of the molecules.

.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The gas shown in Fig. 5.1 is changed into a liquid and then into a solid by cooling.
Compare the gaseous and solid states in terms of
(i)
the movement of the molecules,

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the average separation of the molecules.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 shows the path of a sound wave from a source X.
For
Examiners
Use
X
path of sound wave
wall
Fig. 6.1
(a) State why a person standing at point Y hears an echo.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The frequency of the sound wave leaving X is 400 Hz. State the frequency of the sound
wave reaching Y.
frequency = .. [1]
(c) The speed of the sound wave leaving X is 330 m/s. Calculate the wavelength of these
sound waves.
wavelength = . [2]
(d) Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
State what is meant by the term longitudinal.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
8
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows two rays of light from a point O on an object. These rays are incident on
a plane mirror.
O
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, continue the paths of the two rays after they reach the mirror. Hence
locate the image of the object O. Label the image I.
[2]
(ii)
Describe the nature of the image I.

...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 is drawn to scale. It shows an object PQ and a convex lens.
position of
convex lens
F
principal focus
F
Q
principal focus
Fig. 7.2
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
principal
axis
For
Examiners
Use
9
(i)
On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the top of the object P that pass through the lens.
Use these rays to locate the top of the image. Label this point T.
[3]
(ii)
On Fig. 7.2, draw an eye symbol to show the position from which the image T
should be viewed.
[1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a high-voltage supply connected across two metal plates.
+
high-voltage
supply
A
metal plates
Fig. 8.1
When the supply is switched on, an electric field is present between the plates.
(a) Explain what is meant by an electric field .
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field lines between the plates and indicate their direction
by arrows.
[2]
(c) The metal plates are now joined by a high-resistance wire. A charge of 0.060 C passes
along the wire in 30 s.
Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = [2]

(d) The potential difference of the supply is re-set to 1500 V and the ammeter reading
changes to 0.0080 A. Calculate the energy supplied in 10 s. Show your working.
energy = . [3]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
11
9
(a) In the space provided, draw the symbol for a NOR gate. Label the inputs and the output.
[2]
(b) State whether the output of a NOR gate will be high (ON) or low (OFF) when
(i)
one input is high and one input is low,

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
both inputs are high.

...................................................................................................................................
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit made from three NOT gates and one NAND gate.
HIGH
LOW
Fig. 9.1
(i)
Write HIGH or LOW in each of the boxes on Fig. 9.1.
(ii)
State the effect on the output of changing both of the inputs.
[2]
...................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows the basic parts of a transformer.
For
Examiners
Use
primary coil
secondary coil
X
input
output
Y
Y
Fig. 10.1
(a) Use ideas of electromagnetic induction to explain how the input voltage is transformed
into an output voltage. Use the three questions below to help you with your answer.
What happens in the primary coil?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
What happens in the core?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
What happens in the secondary coil?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [5]
(b) State what is needed to make the output voltage higher than the input voltage.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
13
(c) The core of this transformer splits along XX and YY. Explain why the transformer would
not work if the two halves of the core were separated by about 30 cm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A 100% efficient transformer is used to step up the voltage of a supply from 100 V to
200 V. A resistor is connected to the output. The current in the primary coil is 0.4 A.
Calculate the current in the secondary coil.
current = [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
11 A radioactive source emits only -particles.
(a) A scientist wishes to investigate the deflection of -particles by an electric field. Draw a
labelled diagram to suggest a suitable experimental arrangement.
[3]
(b) State how the apparatus would be used to show the deflection of the -particles by the
electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State how the results would show the deflection of the -particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Explain the direction of the deflection obtained.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/03/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/05
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/05

PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
0625/03
May/June 2006
1 hour 15 minutes

hand in.
For Examiners Use

1
2

appropriate units.
part question.
8
9
10
11
Total

SP (SLM/KS) T04130/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
A bus travels from one bus stop to the next. The journey has three distinct parts. Stated in
order they are
uniform acceleration from rest for 8.0 s,
uniform speed for 12 s,
non-uniform deceleration for 5.0 s.
Fig. 1.1 shows only the deceleration of the bus.
15
speed
m/s
10
0
0
10
15
20
25
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, complete the graph to show the first two parts of the journey.
[3]
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the bus 4.0 s after leaving the first bus stop.
acceleration = ........................[2]
(c) Use the graph to estimate the distance the bus travels between 20 s and 25 s.
estimated distance = ........................[2]

(d) On leaving the second bus stop, the uniform acceleration of the bus is 1.2 m / s2. The
mass of the bus and passengers is 4000 kg.
Calculate the accelerating force that acts on the bus.
force = ........................[2]
(e) The acceleration of the bus from the second bus stop is less than that from the first bus
stop.
Suggest two reasons for this.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A student sets up the apparatus shown in Fig. 2.1 in order to find the resultant of the two
tensions T1 and T2 acting at P. When the tensions T1, T2 and T3 are balanced, the angles
between T1 and the vertical and T2 and the vertical are as marked on Fig. 2.1.
pulley
pulley
T1 = 6.0 N
69
44
T2 = 8.0 N
vertical
board
P
T3
Fig. 2.1
In the space below, draw a scale diagram of the forces T1 and T2. Use the diagram to find the
resultant of the two forces.
State
(a) the scale used,
scale = ........................................
(b) the value of the resultant,
value = ........................................
(c) the direction of the resultant.
UCLES 2006
direction = ........................................
[6]
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
3
An electric pump is used to raise water from a well, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
pump
ground
well
Fig. 3.1
(a) The pump does work in raising the water. State an equation that could be used to
calculate the work done in raising the water.
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The water is raised through a vertical distance of 8.0 m. The weight of water raised in
5.0 s is 100 N.
(i)
Calculate the work done in raising the water in this time.
work done = .......................[1]

(ii)
Calculate the power the pump uses to raise the water.
power = ........................[1]
(iii)
The energy transferred by the pump to the water is greater than your answer to (i).
Suggest what the additional energy is used for.
..............................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
(a) State two differences between evaporation of water and boiling of water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2260 kJ / kg.
Explain why this energy is needed to boil water and why the temperature of the water
does not change during the boiling.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) A laboratory determination of the specific latent heat of vaporisation of water uses a
120 W heater to keep water boiling at its boiling point. Water is turned into steam at the
rate of 0.050 g / s.
Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of vaporisation obtained from this
experiment. Show your working.
specific latent heat of vaporisation = ........................[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a tank used for evaporating salt solution to produce crystals.
evaporating tank
steam in
salt solution
steam out
Fig. 5.1
Suggest two ways of increasing the rate of evaporation of the water from the solution.
Changes may be made to the apparatus, but the rate of steam supply must stay constant.
You may assume the temperature of the salt solution remains constant.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A manufacturer of liquid-in-glass thermometers changes the design in order to meet
new requirements.
Describe the changes that could be made to
(i)
give the thermometer a greater range,

..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
make the thermometer more sensitive.

..............................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A toilet flush is operated by the compression of air. The air inside the flush has a
pressure of 1.0 105 Pa and a volume of 150 cm3. When the flush is operated the
volume is reduced to 50 cm3. The temperature of the air remains constant during this
process.
Calculate the new pressure of the air inside the flush.
pressure = .......................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at P on a glass prism. Only the refracted red ray PQ is
shown in the prism.
P red ray
Q
white ligh
screen
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to complete the path of the red ray and the whole path of the
violet ray up to the point where they hit the screen. Label the violet ray.
[3]
(b) The angle of incidence of the white light is increased to 40. The refractive index of the
glass for the red light is 1.52.
Calculate the angle of refraction at P for the red light.
angle of refraction = ........................[3]

(c) State the approximate speed of
(i)
the white light incident at P,
speed = ........................ [1]
(ii)
the red light after it leaves the prism at Q.
speed = ........................ [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
7
Fig. 7.1 shows how the air pressure at one instant varies with distance along the path of a
continuous sound wave.
air pressure
normal
P
air pressure
Y
distance in direction
of travel of the wave
Fig. 7.1
(a) What type of waves are sound waves?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, mark on the axis PY
(i)
one point C where there is a compression in the wave,
[1]
(ii)
one point R where there is a rarefaction in the wave.
[1]
(c) Describe the motion of a group of air particles situated on the path of the wave shown in
Fig. 7.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The sound wave shown has speed of 340 m / s and a frequency of 200 Hz.
Calculate the distance represented by PX on Fig. 7.1.
distance = ........................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
9
8
Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit.
For
Examiners
Use
12.0 V d.c.
A
one metre resistance wire
4.0
sliding
contact
Fig. 8.1
The resistance of the lamp is 4.0 when it is at its normal brightness.

(a) The lamp is rated at 6.0 V, 9.0 W.
Calculate the current in the lamp when it is at its normal brightness.
current = ........................[2]
(b) The sliding contact C is moved to A. The lamp lights at its normal brightness.
Calculate
(i)
the total circuit resistance,

resistance = ........................[1]
(ii)
the potential difference across the 4.0 resistor R.

potential difference = ........................[1]
(c) The sliding contact C is moved from A to B.

(i)
Describe any change that occurs in the brightness of the lamp.

..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain your answer to (i).

..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The 1 m wire between A and B, as shown in Fig. 8.1, has a resistance of 2.0 .
Calculate the resistance between A and B when
(i)
the 1 m length is replaced by a 2 m length of the same wire,

resistance = ........................[1]
(ii)
the 1 m length is replaced by a 1 m length of a wire of the same material but of only
half the cross-sectional area.
resistance = ........................[1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
10
9
A transformer is needed to step down a 240 V a.c. supply to a 12 V a.c. output.

(a) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a suitable transformer.
[3]
(b) Explain
(i)
why the transformer only works on a.c.,

..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
how the input voltage is changed to an output voltage.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The output current is 1.5 A.

Calculate
(i)
the power output,

power = ........................[1]
(ii)
the energy output in 30 s.

energy = ........................[1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
11
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a positively charged plastic rod, a metal plate resting on an insulator,
and a lead connected to earth.
positively charged
plastic rod
metal plate
insulator
lead connected
to earth
Fig. 10.1
Describe how the metal plate may be charged by induction.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) An electrostatic generator sets up a current of 20 mA in a circuit.
Calculate
(i)
the charge flowing through the circuit in 15 s,
charge = ............................
(ii)
the potential difference across a 10 k resistor in the circuit.
potential difference = ............................

[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of radiation that contains -particles, -particles and -rays. The
beam enters a very strong magnetic field shown in symbol form by N and S poles.
For
Examiners
Use
N
beam of
radiation
S
Fig. 11.1
Complete the table below.
radiation
direction of deflection,
if any
charge carried by
radiation, if any
-particles
-particles
-rays
[6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
UCLES 2006
0625/03/M/J/06

PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
0625/03
1 hour 15 minutes

hand in.
For Examiners Use

1
2

appropriate units.
part question.
8
9
10
11
Total

SP (SLM/KS) T04132/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
(a) A stone falls from the top of a building and hits the ground at a speed of 32 m/s.
The air resistance-force on the stone is very small and may be neglected.
(i)
Calculate the time of fall.
time = ............................
(ii)
On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling stone.
40
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0
4
time/s
Fig. 1.1
(iii)
The weight of the stone is 24 N.

Calculate the mass of the stone.
mass = ............................
[5]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) A student used a suitable measuring cylinder and a spring balance to find the density of
a sample of the stone.
(i)
Describe how the measuring cylinder is used, and state the readings that are
taken.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how the spring balance is used, and state the reading that is taken.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Write down an equation from which the density of the stone is calculated.
..................................................................................................................................
(iv)
The student then wishes to find the density of cork. Suggest how the apparatus and
the method would need to be changed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[6]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
In an experiment, forces are applied to a spring as shown in Fig. 2.1a. The results of this
experiment are shown in Fig. 2.1b.
16
R
Q
12
ruler
force/N
spring
8.0
4.0
weights
0
0
Fig. 2.1a
2.0
4.0
6.0
extension/mm
Fig. 2.1b
(a) What is the name given to the point marked Q on Fig. 2.1b?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For the part OP of the graph, the spring obeys Hookes Law.
State what this means.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The spring is stretched until the force and extension are shown by the point R on the
graph. Compare how the spring stretches, as shown by the part of the graph OQ, with
that shown by QR.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The part OP of the graph shows the spring stretching according to the expression
F = kx.
Use values from the graph to calculate the value of k.
k =..................................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
Fig. 3.1 shows water falling over a dam.

dam
For
Examiners
Use
falling water
7.0 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) The vertical height that the water falls is 7.0 m.
Calculate the potential energy lost by 1.0 kg of water during the fall.
potential energy = ........................[2]

(b) Assuming all this potential energy loss is changed to kinetic energy of the water,
calculate the speed of the water, in the vertical direction, at the end of the fall.
speed = ........................[3]
(c) The vertical speed of the water is less than that calculated in (b). Suggest one reason
for this.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
6
4
Some water is heated electrically in a glass beaker in an experiment to find the specific heat
capacity of water. The temperature of the water is taken at regular intervals.
The temperature-time graph for this heating is shown in Fig. 4.1.
60
temperature / C
50
40
30
20
10
0
0
60
120
180
240
300
time / s
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
Use the graph to find

1. the temperature rise in the first 120 s,
............................
2. the temperature rise in the second 120 s interval.
............................
(ii)
Explain why these values are different.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The experiment is repeated in an insulated beaker. This time, the temperature of the
water increases from 20 C to 60 C in 210 s. The beaker contains 75 g of water. The
power of the heater is 60 W. Calculate the specific heat capacity of water.
specific heat capacity = ........................[4]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) In order to measure the temperature during the heating, a thermocouple is used.
Draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple connected to measure temperature.
For
Examiners
Use
[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
8
5
(a) Fig. 5.1 shows a copper rod AB being heated at one end.
copper rod
B
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 5.1
(i)
Name the process by which heat moves from A to B.

..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
By reference to the behaviour of the particles of copper along AB, state how this
process happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Give an account of an experiment that is designed to show which of four surfaces will
absorb most heat radiation.
The four surfaces are all the same metal, but one is a polished black surface, one is a
polished silver surface, one is a dull black surface and the fourth one is painted white.
Give your answer under the headings below.
labelled diagram of the apparatus
readings to be taken
one precaution to try to achieve a fair comparison between the various surfaces
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light, from the top of an object PQ, passing through two glass
prisms.
Q
C
D
Fig. 6.1
(a) Complete the path through the two prisms of the ray shown leaving Q.
[1]
(b) A person looking into the lower prism, at the position indicated by the eye symbol, sees
an image of PQ.
State the properties of this image.
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why there is no change in direction of the ray from P at points A, C, D and F.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The speed of light as it travels from P to A is 3 108 m/s and the refractive index of the
prism glass is 1.5.
Calculate the speed of light in the prism.
speed = ........................[2]
(e) Explain why the ray AB reflects through 90 at B and does not pass out of the prism
at B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
7
Fig. 7.1 is a drawing of a students attempt to show the diffraction pattern of water waves that
have passed through a narrow gap in a barrier.
barrier with
narrow gap
direction of
water waves
Fig. 7.1
(a) State two things that are wrong with the wave pattern shown to the right of the barrier.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the space below, sketch the wave pattern when the gap in the barrier is made five
times wider.
[2]
(c) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 1.2 cm and a frequency of
8.0 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the water waves.
speed =..................................[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
11
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a low-voltage lighting circuit.
For
Examiners
Use
12 V d.c.
supply
Fig. 8.1
(a) On Fig. 8.1, indicate with a dot and the letter S, a point in the circuit where a switch
could be placed that would turn off lamps Y and Z at the same time but would leave
lamp X still lit.
[1]
(b) (i)
In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a component that would vary the
brightness of lamp X.
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, mark with a dot and the letter R where this component should be
placed.
[2]
(c) Calculate the current in lamp Y.

current = ........................[2]
(d) The current in lamp Z is 3.0 A. Calculate the resistance of this lamp.
resistance = ........................[2]
(e) The lamp Y is removed.
(i)
Why do lamps X and Z still work normally?

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
The current in lamp X is 1.0 A. Calculate the current supplied by the battery with
lamp Y removed.
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
current = ............................
[2]
[Turn over
12
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 shows how a beam of electrons would be deflected by an electric field produced
between two metal plates.
The connections of the source of high potential difference are not shown.
+
high
potential
difference
metal
plate
beam of electrons
metal
plate
Fig. 9.1
(i)
On Fig. 9.1, draw in the missing connections.
(ii)
Explain why the beam of electrons is deflected in the direction shown. In your
answer, consider all the charges involved and their effect on each other.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) The deflection of a beam of electrons by an electric field is used in cathode-ray

oscilloscopes.
(i)
What makes the electron beam move backwards and forwards across the screen?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
What makes the electron beam move up and down the screen?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
13
(c) An a.c. waveform is displayed so that two full waves appear on the screen of a cathoderay oscilloscope.
Fig. 9.2 shows the face of the oscilloscope. On Fig. 9.2, draw in the waveform.
Fig. 9.2
[1]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit that is used to switch on a lamp automatically when it starts to go
dark.
+
V
C
B
Fig. 10.1
(a) Write down the names of the components labelled A, B, C and D.
A ...........................................
B ...........................................
C ...........................................
D ...........................................
[2]
(b) Which of the four components A, B, C or D acts as a switch?

........................[1]
(c) Explain why the lamp comes on as it goes dark.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 (a) -particles, -particles and -rays are known as ionising radiations.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
Describe what happens when gases are ionised by ionising radiations.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest why -particles are considered better ionisers of gas than -particles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i)
Suggest two practical applications of radioactive isotopes.

1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii)
For one of the applications that you have suggested, describe how it works, or draw
a labelled diagram to illustrate it in use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2006
0625/03/O/N/06
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/06

*9716875438*
0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
For Examiners Use
part question.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Total

SPA (MML 13116 3/06) T25815/6
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows a model car moving clockwise around a horizontal circular track.
direction of
movement
P
model
car
circular
track
Fig. 1.1
(a) A force acts on the car to keep it moving in a circle.
(i)
Draw an arrow on Fig. 1.1 to show the direction of this force.
[1]
(ii)
The speed of the car increases. State what happens to the magnitude of this force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i)
(ii)
The car travels too quickly and leaves the track at P. On Fig. 1.1, draw an arrow to
show the direction of travel after it has left the track.
[1]
In terms of the forces acting on the car, suggest why it left the track at P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
3
(c) The car, starting from rest, completes one lap of the track in 10 s. Its motion is shown
graphically in Fig. 1.2.
For
Examiners
Use
30
25
speed /
cm / s
20
15
10
5
0
0
8
9
time / s
10
Fig. 1.2
(i)
Describe the motion between 3.0 s and 10.0 s after the car has started.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Use Fig. 1.2 to calculate the circumference of the track.
circumference = ................................................ [2]

(iii)
Calculate the increase in speed per second during the time 0 to 3.0 s.
increase in speed per second = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a steam safety valve. When the pressure gets too high, the steam lifts the
weight W and allows steam to escape.
0.2 m
pivot
W
force of
steam
Fig. 2.1
(a) Explain, in terms of moments of forces, how the valve works.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The moment of weight W about the pivot is 12 N m. The perpendicular distance of the
line of action of the force of the steam on the valve from the pivot is 0.2 m.
The area of the piston is 0.0003 m2.
Calculate
(i)
the minimum steam force needed for the steam to escape,
force = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the minimum steam pressure for the steam to escape.
pressure = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
A student wishes to work out how much power she uses to lift her body when climbing a
flight of stairs.
For
Examiners
Use
Her body mass is 60 kg and the vertical height of the stairs is 3.0 m. She takes 12 s to walk
up the stairs.
(a) Calculate
(i)
the work done in raising her body mass as she climbs the stairs,
work = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the output power she develops when raising her body mass.
power = ................................................ [2]

(b) At the top of the stairs she has gravitational potential energy.
Describe the energy transformations taking place as she walks back down the stairs
and stops at the bottom.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a students attempt to estimate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice by
adding ice at 0 C to water at 20 C. The water is stirred continuously as ice is slowly added
until the temperature of the water is 0 C and all the added ice has melted.
glass rod
stirrer
thermometer
ice
glass beaker
water
top-pan balance
Fig. 4.1
(a) Three mass readings are taken. A description of the first reading is given.
Write down descriptions of the other two.
reading 1 the mass of the beaker + stirrer + thermometer
reading 2 .........................................................................................................................
reading 3 ................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Write down word equations which the student could use to find
(i)
the heat lost by the water as it cools from 20 C to 0 C,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the heat gained by the melting ice.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) The student calculates that the water loses 12 800 J and that the mass of ice melted is
30 g.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate a value for the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion = ................................................ [2]

(d) Suggest two reasons why this value is only an approximate value.
Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 .........................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus designed to compare the ability of two surfaces to absorb
infra-red radiation.
surface
painted
dull
black
surface
painted
shiny white
Bunsen burner
Fig. 5.1
The containers, which are identical, are painted on the outside. One is dull black, the other is
shiny white. Both are filled with water, initially at the same temperature.
(a) (i)
Describe how you would use the apparatus to compare the abilities of the two
surfaces to absorb infra-red radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State the result that you would expect.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The thermometers used have high sensitivity and linear scales.
(i)
State what is meant by high sensitivity.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Explain why a high sensitivity is important for this experiment.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State what is meant by a linear scale.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a rectangular glass block ABCD.

F
60
A
E
Fig. 6.1
(a) The ray FE is partly reflected and partly refracted at E.
(i)
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the approximate path of the refracted ray, within and beyond
the block. Label the ray refracted ray.
[1]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, draw in the path of the reflected ray. Label the ray reflected ray.
[1]
(b) A second ray, almost parallel to AE, strikes the block at E and is partly refracted at an
angle of refraction of 43.
(i)
State an approximate value for the angle of incidence at E.

................................................. [1]
(ii)
State an approximate value for the critical angle for the light in the glass block.
................................................. [1]
(iii)
Calculate an approximate value for the refractive index of the glass of the block.
refractive index = ................................................ [2]

(c) The speed of the light along ray FE is 3.0 x 108 m/s. Calculate the speed of the refracted
light in the glass block.
speed = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
10
7
Two students are asked to determine the speed of sound in air on the school playing fields.
(a) List the apparatus they need.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) List the readings that the students need to take.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State how the speed of sound is calculated from the readings.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State one precaution that could be taken to improve the accuracy of the value obtained.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The table gives some speeds.
speed/
m/s
speed of sound
in air
speed of sound
in water
10
100
1000
10 000
Place a tick in the table to show the speed which is closest to

(i)
the speed of sound in air,
(ii)
the speed of sound in water.

[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
8
Fig. 8.1 shows part of a low-voltage lighting circuit containing five identical lamps.
12 V d.c.
supply
B
A
C
D
E
Fig. 8.1
(a) Complete the circuit, by the addition of components as necessary, so that

(i)
the total current from the supply can be measured,
(ii)
the brightness of lamp E only can be varied,
(iii)
lamps C and D may be switched on and off together whilst lamps A, B and E remain
on.
[4]
(b) All five lamps are marked 12 V, 36 W. Assume that the resistance of each lamp is the
same fixed value regardless of how it is connected in the circuit.
Calculate
(i)
the current in one lamp when operating at normal brightness,
current = ................................................ [1]

(ii)
the resistance of one lamp when operating at normal brightness,
resistance = ................................................ [1]

(iii)
the combined resistance of two lamps connected in parallel with the 12 V supply,
resistance = ................................................ [1]

(iv)
the energy used by one lamp in 30 s when operating at normal brightness.
energy = ................................................ [1]

UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
12
(c) The whole circuit is switched on. Explain why the brightness of lamps A and B is much
less than that of one lamp operating at normal brightness.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
Fig. 9.1 is a sketch of some apparatus, found in a Science museum, which was once used to
show how electrical energy can be converted into kinetic energy.
When the switch is closed the wheel starts to turn.
switch
+
metal
supports
d.c. supply
magnet
metal
spoked
wheel
N
small dish of
mercury
S
magnet
wood base
Fig. 9.1
(a) Explain why the wheel turns when the switch is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of rotation of the wheel.
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
(c) The d.c. motor is another way to convert electrical energy into kinetic energy.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a d.c. motor.
[3]
(d) Describe how the split-ring commutator on an electric motor works.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit based on a transistor and a thermistor.
power
supply
R2
R1
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe the action of the thermistor in this circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) State and explain how the circuit may be modified so that the lamp switches on at a
different temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) State one practical use of this circuit.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the paths of three -particles moving towards a thin gold foil.
gold foil
A
Fig. 11.1
Particle A is moving directly towards a gold nucleus.
Particle B is moving along a line which passes close to a gold nucleus.
Particle C is moving along a line which does not pass close to a gold nucleus.
(a) On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the -particles A, B and C.
[3]
(b) State how the results of such an experiment, using large numbers of -particles,
provides evidence for the existence of nuclei in gold atoms.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/M/J/07
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/M/J/07

*8019038925*
0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes

DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES
appropriate units.
For Examiners Use
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question
or part question.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Total

SPA (MML 13331 4/06) T25941/7
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
A large plastic ball is dropped from the top of a tall building.

Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the falling ball until it hits the ground.
20
15
speed
m / s 10
5
0
0
6
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) From the graph estimate,
(i)
the time during which the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
time = ................................................ [1]
(ii)
the time during which the ball is accelerating,

time = ................................................ [1]
(iii)
the distance fallen while the ball is travelling with terminal velocity,
distance = ................................................ [2]
(iv)
the height of the building.
height = ................................................ [2]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the ball, why
(i)
the acceleration of the ball decreases,

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii)
the ball reaches terminal velocity.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a track for a model car.
P
S
Q
0.5 m
0.4 m
0.4 m
Fig. 2.1
The car has no power supply, but can run down a sloping track due to its weight.
(a) The car is released at Q. It comes to rest just before it reaches S and rolls back.
(i)
Describe the motion of the car after it starts rolling back and until it eventually
comes to rest.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Explain in terms of energy transformations why the car, starting at Q, cannot

pass S.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A second car, of mass 0.12 kg, is released from P. It continues until it runs off the track at
T.
Calculate the maximum speed that the car could have at T assuming friction in the car is
negligible.
speed = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
5
3
(a) A spring of original length 3.0 cm is extended to a total length of 5.0 cm by a force of
8.0 N.
For
Examiners
Use
Assuming the limit of proportionality of the spring has not been reached, calculate the
force needed to extend it to a total length of 6.0 cm.
force = ................................................ [3]

(b) Fig. 3.1 shows the arrangement for an experiment on moments.
spring
pivot
F
metre rule
Fig. 3.1
The spring exerts a force F on the metre rule.
(i)
On Fig. 3.1, mark another quantity which must be measured to find the moment of
the force F.
[1]
(ii)
State how the moment of the force F is calculated.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
Fig. 4.1 shows a sealed steel cylinder filled with high pressure steam.
steam
Fig. 4.1
Fig. 4.2 shows the same cylinder much later when all the steam has condensed.
water
Fig. 4.2
(a) (i)
Describe the movement of the molecules in the high pressure steam.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Explain how the molecules in the steam exert a high pressure on the inside walls of
the cylinder.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Describe, in terms of particles, the process by which heat is transferred through the
cylinder wall.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) When all the steam has condensed, 75 g of water is in the cylinder.
Under these high pressure conditions, the specific latent heat of vaporisation of steam
is 3200 J / g.
Calculate the heat lost by the steam as it condenses.
heat = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
7
5
Fig. 5.1 shows some apparatus which is to be used to compare the emission of infra-red
radiation from four differently painted surfaces.
For
Examiners
Use
this side
painted dull
white
this side
painted shiny
white
water inlet
metal box
this side
painted shiny
black
this side
painted dull
black
Fig. 5.1
Near the centre of each side is an infra-red detector. The four detectors are identical.
A supply of very hot water is available.
(a) Describe how you would use this apparatus to compare the infra-red radiation from the
four surfaces.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Suggest which surface will be the best emitter and which will be the worst emitter.
best emitter ...........................................
worst emitter .........................................
[1]
(c) The infra-red detectors are made from thermocouples soldered to blackened metal
plates. These are connected to galvanometers.
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple.
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
6
Virtual images may be formed by both plane mirrors and by convex lenses.
Fig. 6.1 shows a plane mirror and a convex lens.
O
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw rays to locate the approximate positions of the images of the tops of
the two arrow objects O and P.
Label the images.
[5]
(b) Both images are virtual.
(i)
What is meant by a virtual image?

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one other similarity between the two images.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State one difference between the two images.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
9
7
(a) In the space below, draw a diagram to represent a sound wave.

On your diagram, mark and label
(i)
two consecutive compressions and two consecutive rarefactions,
(ii)
the wavelength of the wave.

[3]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
INFRA
RED
X-RAYS
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, label the positions of -rays, visible light waves and radio waves.
(ii)
State which of the three types of wave in (i) has the lowest frequency.
[1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State the approximate value of the speed in air of radio waves.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
8
Fig. 8.1 shows two electrical circuits.

V
4.0
4.0
A
P
ammeter
1
ammeter
A
2
6.0
6.0
Q
Q
circuit 1
circuit 2
The batteries in circuit 1 and circuit 2 are identical.

Fig. 8.1
(a) Put ticks in the table below to describe the connections of the two resistors P and Q.
series
parallel
circuit 1
circuit 2
[1]
(b) The resistors P and Q are used as small electrical heaters.
State two advantages of connecting them as shown in circuit 2.
advantage 1 .....................................................................................................................
advantage 2 ............................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In circuit 1, the ammeter reads 1.2 A when the switch is closed.
Calculate the reading of the voltmeter in this circuit.
voltmeter reading = ................................................ [2]
(d) The two switches in circuit 2 are closed. Calculate the combined resistance of the two
resistors in this circuit.
combined resistance = ................................................ [2]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
11
(e) When the switches are closed in circuit 2, ammeter 1 reads 5 A and ammeter 2 reads
2 A.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate
(i)
the current in resistor P,

current = ................................................ [1]
(ii)
the power supplied to resistor Q,

power = ................................................ [1]
(iii)
the energy transformed in resistor Q in 300 s.

energy = ................................................ [1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
12
9
Electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated using a magnet, a solenoid and other

necessary apparatus.
(a) Explain what is meant by electromagnetic induction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the apparatus set up so that
electromagnetic induction may be demonstrated.
[2]
(c) Describe how you would use the apparatus to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) State two ways of increasing the magnitude of the induced e.m.f. in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
13
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows an AND gate with two inputs A and B and one output.
output
Fig. 10.1
State the output when
(i)
A is high and B is low,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
both A and B are low.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electrical thermometer in a greenhouse gives a low output if the temperature is too
low.
A humidity sensor in the same greenhouse gives a high output if the humidity in the
greenhouse is too high.
An alarm sounds when both the temperature is too low and the humidity is too high.
(i)
Complete the diagram below to show how a NOT gate and an AND gate may be
used to provide the required output to the alarm.
[2]
electrical thermometer
alarm
humidity sensor
(ii)
On your diagram, use either high or low to indicate the level of the inputs and
outputs of both gates when the alarm sounds.
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
[Turn over
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows an experiment to test the absorption of -particles by thin sheets of
aluminium. Ten sheets are available, each 0.5 mm thick.
-particle source
sheets of
detector
counter
aluminium
Fig. 11.1
(a) Describe how the experiment is carried out, stating the readings that should be taken.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State the results that you would expect to obtain.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/03/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/07
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/03/O/N/07

*5079794953*
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
part question.

SPA (SHW 00013 3/07) T49721/6
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graphs for two falling balls.
For
Examiners
Use
30
rubber ball
speed
m/s
20
plastic ball
10
0
0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
Both balls fall from the same height above the ground.
(a) Use the graphs to find
(i)
the average acceleration of the falling rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
acceleration = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the distance fallen by the rubber ball during the first 3.0 s,
distance = ................................................ [2]

(iii)
the terminal velocity of the plastic ball.

terminal velocity = ................................................ [1]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
3
(b) Both balls have the same mass but the volume of the plastic ball is much greater than
that of the rubber ball. Explain, in terms of the forces acting on each ball, why the plastic
ball reaches a terminal velocity but the rubber ball does not.
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The rubber ball has a mass of 50 g. Calculate the gravitational force acting on the rubber
ball.
force = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
4
2
(a) Name the process by which energy is released in the core of the Sun.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how energy from the Sun becomes stored energy in water behind a dam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Data for two small power stations is given in Table 2.1.
input to power station
output of power station
gas-fired
100 MW
25 MW
hydroelectric
90 MW
30 MW
Table 2.1
(i)
State what is meant by the efficiency of a power station.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Use the data in Table 2.1 to explain that the hydroelectric station is more efficient
than the gas-fired power station.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
A cyclist rides up and then back down the hill shown in Fig. 3.1.
For
Examiners
Use
top of hill
14 m
starting and
finishing point
Fig. 3.1
The cyclist and her bicycle have a combined mass of 90 kg. She pedals up to the top and
then stops. She turns around and rides back to the bottom without pedalling or using her
brakes.
(a) Calculate the potential energy gained by the cyclist and her bicycle when she has
reached the top of the hill.
potential energy = ................................................ [2]

(b) Calculate the maximum speed she could have when she arrives back at the starting
point.
speed = ................................................ [3]

(c) Explain why her actual speed will be less than that calculated in (b).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
6
4
Fig. 4.1 is a design for remotely operating an electrical switch using air pressure.
electrical switch
operated by
air pressure
connecting pipe
For
Examiners
Use
flexible rubber
box cover
metal
box
Fig. 4.1
The metal box and the pipe contain air at normal atmospheric pressure and the switch is off.
When the pressure in the metal box and pipe is raised to 1.5 times atmospheric pressure by
pressing down on the flexible rubber box cover, the switch comes on.
(a) Explain in terms of pressure and volume how the switch is made to come on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Normal atmospheric pressure is 1.0 105 Pa. At this pressure, the volume of the box
and pipe is 60 cm3.
Calculate the reduction in volume that must occur for the switch to be on.
reduction in volume = ................................................ [3]

(c) Explain, in terms of air particles, why the switch may operate, without the rubber cover
being squashed, when there is a large rise in temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
7
5
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how thermal expansion takes place in a solid and in a
gas.
For
Examiners
Use
solid .................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
gas ...................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Complete Table 5.1 to show the relative expansion of equal volumes of liquids, gases
and solids.
Choose words from
much less, slightly less, slightly more and much more.
state of matter
[2]
expansion compared to solids, for the

same temperature rise
liquids
gases
Table 5.1
(c) Alcohol is often used in thermometers.
State one property of alcohol that makes it suitable for use in thermometers.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
8
6
Fig. 6.1 shows an object, the tip of which is labelled O, placed near a lens L.
For
Examiners
Use
The two principal foci of the lens are F1 and F2.
F2
F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the paths of two rays from the tip of the object so that they pass
through the lens and continue beyond.
Complete the diagram to locate the image of the tip of the object. Draw in the whole
image and label it I.
[3]
(b) Describe image I.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
9
7
Fig. 7.1 and Fig. 7.2 show wavefronts of light approaching a plane mirror and a rectangular
glass block, respectively.
For
Examiners
Use
direction of travel
of wavefronts
mirror
Fig. 7.1
direction of travel
of wavefronts
glass block
Fig. 7.2
(a) On Fig. 7.1 and on Fig. 7.2 draw wavefronts to show what happens after the waves
strike the surface.
[4]
(b) In Fig. 7.2, the waves approaching the block have a speed of 3.0 108 m/s and an angle
of incidence of 70. The refractive index of the glass of the block is 1.5.
(i)
Calculate the speed of light waves in the block.
speed = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
Calculate the angle of refraction in the block.
angle = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
10
8
Fig. 8.1 is the plan of a small apartment that has four lamps as shown.
2 60 W
living room
For
Examiners
Use
100 W
kitchen
60 W
bathroom
Fig. 8.1
Power for the lamps is supplied at 200 V a.c. and the lamps are all in parallel.
(a) In the space below, draw a lighting circuit diagram so that there is one switch for each
room and one master switch that will turn off all the lamps. Label the lamps as 60 W or
100 W.
[3]
(b) The 100 W lamp is switched on. Calculate
(i)
the current in the lamp,
current = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the charge passing through the lamp in one minute.
charge = ................................................ [2]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
11
(c) The three 60 W lamps are replaced by three energy-saving ones, that give the same
light output but are rated at only 15 W each.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate
(i)
the total reduction in power,
reduction in power = ................................................ [1]

(ii)
the energy saved when the lamps are lit for one hour.
energy saved = ................................................. [2]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
12
9
Fig. 9.1 shows apparatus used to investigate electromagnetic effects around straight wires.
thin flexible wire
T3
T1
thick rigid
vertical wire
large circular
hole in card
small circular
hole in card
T4
T2
Fig. 9.1
Fig. 9.2 is a view looking down on the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.2
(a) A battery is connected to T1 and T2 so that there is a current vertically down the thick
wire.
On Fig. 9.2, draw three magnetic field lines and indicate, with arrows, the direction of all
three.
[2]
(b) Using a variable resistor, the p.d. between terminals T1 and T2 is gradually reduced.
State the effect, if any, that this will have on
(i)
the strength of the magnetic field, ...................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the direction of the magnetic field. ...................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
13
(c) The battery is now connected to terminals T3 and T4, as well as to terminals T1 and T2,
so that there is a current down both wires. This causes the flexible wire to move.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
Explain why the flexible wire moves.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State the direction of the movement of the flexible wire.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
The battery is replaced by one that delivers a smaller current.

State the effect that this will have on the force acting on the flexible wire.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
[Turn over
14
10 (a) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
For
Examiners
Use
[1]
(b) Describe the action of a NOR gate in terms of its inputs and output.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A chemical process requires heating at low pressure to work correctly.
When the heater is working, the output of a temperature sensor is high.
When the pressure is low enough, a pressure sensor has a low output.
Both outputs are fed into a NOR gate. A high output from the gate switches on an
indicator lamp.
(i)
Explain why the indicator lamp is off when the process is working correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State whether the lamp is on or off in the following situations.

1.
The pressure is low enough, but the heater stops working. .............................
2.
The heater is working, but the pressure rises too high. .............................. [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
15
11 (a) Chlorine has two isotopes, one of nucleon number 35 and one of nucleon number 37.
The proton number of chlorine is 17.
Table 11.1 refers to neutral atoms of chlorine.
Complete Table 11.1.
nucleon number 35
nucleon number 37
number of protons
number of neutrons
number of electrons
[3]
Table 11.1
(b) Some isotopes are radioactive.
State the three types of radiation that may be emitted from radioactive isotopes.
1. .......................................................
2. .......................................................
3. .......................................................
(c) (i)
[1]
State one practical use of a radioactive isotope.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Outline how it is used.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/31/M/J/08

*0631463082*
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes


SPA (SHW 00014 3/07) T50468/5
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows apparatus used to find a relationship between the force applied to a trolley
and the acceleration caused by the force.
tickertape
trolley
string
hanging mass
ticker-tape
timer
roll of tape
runway
Fig. 1.1
For each mass, hung as shown, the acceleration of the trolley is determined from the tape.
Some of the results are given in the table below.
weight of the hanging mass / N
acceleration of the trolley

m/s2
0.20
0.25
0.40
0.50
0.70
0.80
(a) (i)
1.0
Explain why the trolley accelerates.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
Suggest why the runway has a slight slope as shown.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Calculate the mass of the trolley, assuming that the accelerating force is equal to the
weight of the hanging mass.
mass = ................................................ [2]

UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
3
(c) Calculate the value missing from the table. Show your working.
For
Examiners
Use
value = ................................................ [2]

(d) In one experiment, the hanging mass has a weight of 0.4 N and the trolley starts from
rest.
Use data from the table to calculate
(i)
the speed of the trolley after 1.2 s,
speed = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the distance travelled by the trolley in 1.2 s.
distance = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 11]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a circular metal disc of mass 200 g, freely pivoted at its centre.
pivot
Fig. 2.1
Masses of 100 g, 200 g, 300 g, 400 g, 500 g and 600 g are available, but only one of each
value. These may be hung with string from any of the holes. There are three small holes on
each side of the centre, one at 4.0 cm from the pivot, one at 8.0 cm from the pivot and one at
12.0 cm from the pivot.
The apparatus is to be used to show that there is no net moment of force acting on a body
when it is in equilibrium.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw in two different value masses hanging from appropriate holes. The
values of the masses should be chosen so that there is no net moment. Alongside the
masses chosen, write down their values.
[2]
(b) Explain how you would test that your chosen masses give no net moment to the disc.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the moments about the pivot due to the two masses chosen.
moment due to first mass = .....................................................

moment due to second mass = ......................................................
[2]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
5
(d) Calculate the force on the pivot when the two masses chosen are hanging from the
disc.
For
Examiners
Use
force = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
6
3
(a) A submarine descends to a depth of 70 m below the surface of water.
For
Examiners
Use
The density of the water is 1050 kg/m3. Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 105 Pa.
Calculate
(i)
the increase in pressure as it descends from the surface to a depth of 70 m,
increase in pressure = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
the total pressure on the submarine at a depth of 70 m.
total pressure = ................................................ [1]

(b) On another dive, the submarine experiences a total pressure of 6.5 105 Pa. A hatch
cover on the submarine has an area of 2.5 m2.
Calculate the force on the outside of the cover.
force = ................................................ [2]

(c) The submarine undergoes tests in fresh water of density 1000 kg/m3.
Explain why the pressure on the submarine is less at the same depth.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
7
4
The whole of a sealed, empty, dusty room is kept at a constant temperature of 15 C. Light
shines into the room through a small outside window.
For
Examiners
Use
An observer points a TV camera with a magnifying lens into the room through a second
small window, set in an inside wall at right angles to the outside wall.
Dust particles in the room show up on the TV monitor screen as tiny specks of light.
(a) In the space below draw a diagram to show the motion of one of the specks of light over
a short period of time.
[1]
(b) After a period of one hour the specks are still observed, showing that the dust particles
have not fallen to the floor.
Explain why the dust particles have not fallen to the floor. You may draw a labelled
diagram to help your explanation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) On another day, the temperature of the room is only 5 C. All other conditions are the
same and the specks of light are again observed.
Suggest any differences that you would expect in the movement of the specks when the
temperature is 5 C, compared to before.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus that could be used to determine the specific latent heat of fusion of
ice.
finely crushed ice
40 W electric heater
glass funnel
stand with clamps to hold

funnel and heater
Fig. 5.1
(a) In order to obtain as accurate a result as possible, state why it is necessary to
(i)
wait until water is dripping into the beaker at a constant rate before taking
readings,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
use finely crushed ice rather than large pieces.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power of the heater and the time for which water is collected are known. Write down
all the other readings that are needed to obtain a value for the specific latent heat of
fusion of ice.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
9
(c) Using a 40 W heater, 16.3 g of ice is melted in 2.0 minutes. The heater is then switched
off. In a further 2.0 minutes, 2.1 g of ice is melted.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice from these results.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ................................................ [4]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows two rays of monochromatic light, one entering the prism along the normal DE
and the second one along PQ.
B
D
E
F
30
P
Q
42
C
Fig. 6.1
(a) State what is meant by monochromatic light.

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The refractive index of the glass of the prism is 1.49. The ray EF is refracted at F. Use
information from Fig. 6.1 to calculate the angle of refraction at F.
angle of refraction = ................................................ [3]

(c) On Fig. 6.1, draw in the refracted ray, starting from F.
[1]
(d) State how the refraction, starting at F, would be different if the monochromatic ray were
replaced by a ray of white light.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The critical angle for the glass of the prism is just over 42. State the approximate angle
of refraction for the ray striking BC at R.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f)
Another monochromatic ray, not shown in Fig. 6.1, passes through the prism and strikes
BC at an angle of incidence of 50. State what happens to this ray at the point where it
strikes BC.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
11
7
Fig. 7.1 shows a scale drawing of plane waves approaching a gap in a barrier.
For
Examiners
Use
direction of travel
of plane waves
barrier
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw in the pattern of the waves after they have passed the gap.
[3]
(b) The waves approaching the barrier have a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm/s.
Calculate the frequency of the waves.
frequency = ................................................ [2]

(c) State the frequency of the diffracted waves.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
12
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a car battery being charged from a 200 V a.c. mains supply.
car
battery
200 V ~
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the function of the diode.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The average charging current is 2.0 A and the battery takes 12 hours to charge fully.
Calculate the charge that the battery stores when fully charged.
charge stored ................................................ [2]

(c) The battery has an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12 V and, when connected to a circuit,
supplies energy to the circuit components.
State what is meant by an electromotive force of 12 V.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
13
(d) (i)
(ii)
In the space below, draw a circuit diagram to show how two 6.0 V lamps should be
connected to a 12 V battery so that both lamps glow with normal brightness.
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
The power of each lamp is 8.0 W. Calculate the current in the circuit.
current = ................................................. [2]

(iii)
Calculate the energy used by the two lamps when both are lit for one hour.
energy = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
14
9
Fig. 9.1 is a block diagram of an electrical energy supply system, using the output of a coalfired power station.
power
station
output
at 1100 V
step-up
transformer
transmission
output
at 32 000 V
step-down
transformer
output
consumer
at 240 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest one possible way of storing surplus energy when the demand from the
consumers falls below the output of the power station.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State why electrical energy is transmitted at high voltage.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A transmission cable of resistance R carries a current I. Write down a formula that gives
the power loss in the cable in terms of R and I.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The step-up transformer has 1200 turns on the primary coil. Using the values in Fig. 9.1,
calculate the number of turns on its secondary coil. Assume that the transformer has no
energy losses.
number of turns = ................................................. [2]

(e) The input to the step-up transformer is 800 kW.
Using the values in Fig. 9.1, calculate the current in the transmission cables, assuming
that the transformer is 100% efficient.
current = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
15
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit for a warning lamp that comes on when the external light intensity
falls below a pre-set level.
For
Examiners
Use
+
low voltage
supply
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.1, label
(i)
with the letter X the component that detects the change in external light intensity,
(ii)
with the letter Y the lamp,
(iii)
with the letter Z the component that switches the lamp on and off.
[3]
(b) Describe how the circuit works as the external light intensity decreases and the lamp
comes on.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08
[Turn over
16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the basic design of the tube of a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO).
heater filament
For
Examiners
Use
cathode rays
anode
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the names of parts A, B, C and D in the boxes provided.
[2]
(b) State the function of:

part A, ..............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
part B. ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A varying p.d. from a 12 V supply is connected to a CRO, so that the waveform of the
supply is shown on the screen.
To which of the components in Fig. 11.1
(i)
is the 12 V supply connected,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
is the time-base connected?

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
UCLES 2008
0625/31/O/N/08

*6024898353*
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (SHW 00151 2/08) 14866/7
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
Fig 1.1 shows part of a measuring instrument.
0
mm
For
Examiners
Use
25
20
Fig. 1.1
(a) State the name of this instrument.
................................................. [1]
(b) Record the reading shown in Fig. 1.1.
................................................. [1]
(c) Describe how you would find the thickness of a sheet of paper used in a magazine.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
3
2
The list below gives the approximate densities of various metals.

gold
19 g / cm3
lead
11 g / cm3
copper
9 g / cm3
iron
8 g / cm3
For
Examiners
Use
At an antiques market, a collector buys what is advertised as a small ancient gold statue.
When the collector tests it in the laboratory, he finds its mass is 600 g and its volume is
65 cm3.
(a) In the space below, describe how the volume of the statue could be measured. You may
draw diagrams if you wish.
[3]
(b) Use the figures given above to decide whether the statue was really made of gold. Show
your working.
Was the statue made of gold? (Tick one box.)

yes
no
[3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
4
3
A student investigated the stretching of a spring by hanging various weights from it and
measuring the corresponding extensions. The results are shown below.
weight / N
extension / mm
21
40
51
82
103
(a) On Fig. 3.1, plot the points from these results. Do not draw a line through the points yet.
[2]
120
100
extension / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0
4
weight / N
Fig. 3.1
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) The student appears to have made an error in recording one of the results.
For
Examiners
Use
Which result is this?

.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Ignoring the incorrect result, draw the best straight line through the remaining points.
[1]
(d) State and explain whether this spring is obeying Hookes Law.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Describe how the graph might be shaped if the student continued to add several more
weights to the spring.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(f)
The student estimates that if he hangs a 45 N load on the spring, the extension will be
920 mm.
Explain why this estimate may be unrealistic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
6
4
(a) A force acting on an object causes the object to accelerate.
For
Examiners
Use
In which direction is the acceleration?

................................................. [1]
(b) Any object moving in a circle has a force acting on it towards the centre of the circle.
What does this force do to the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) A woman of mass 60 kg is standing in a lift at a shopping centre.
(i)
The lift is at rest.

1.
State the value of the weight of the woman.

................................................. [1]
2.
State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor of the lift.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Calculate the force required to accelerate a mass of 60 kg at 2.5 m / s2.
force = ................................................ [2]

(iii)
The lift accelerates upwards at 2.5 m / s2.

Calculate the force exerted on the woman by the floor when the lift is accelerating.
force = ................................................ [1]

(iv)
The lift reaches a steady upward speed.

State the value of the force exerted on the woman by the floor at this steady
speed.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
7
5
A farmer uses an electric pump to raise water from a river in order to fill the irrigation channels
that keep the soil in his fields moist.
water pours
into channel
For
Examiners
Use
electric
pump
field
water rises
up tube
3m
irrigation
channel
river
Fig. 5.1
Every minute, the pump raises 12 kg of water through a vertical height of 3 m.
(a) Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy of 12 kg of water when it is
raised 3 m.
increase in gravitational potential energy = ................................................ [3]

(b) Calculate the useful power output of the pump as it raises the water.
power = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
8
6
A vertical cylinder has a smooth well-fitting piston in it. Weights can be added to or removed
from a tray on the top of the piston.
(a) Weights are added to the tray, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
weights
piston
air
cylinder
Fig. 6.1
(i)
State what happens to the pressure of the air in the cylinder as a result of adding
these weights.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The initial pressure of the trapped air is 1.05 105 Pa. When the weights are added,
the volume of the air decreases from 860 cm3 to 645 cm3.
The temperature of the air does not change.
Calculate the final pressure of the trapped air.
pressure = ................................................ [3]

(iii)
The area of the piston is 5.0 103 m2.

Calculate the weight that is added to the piston.
weight added = ................................................ [4]

UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) The weights are kept as shown in Fig. 6.1. The temperature of the air in the cylinder is
increased.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
State what happens to the volume of the air in the cylinder as a result of this
temperature rise.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State how, if at all, the pressure of the air changes as the temperature changes.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State what must be done to prevent the volume change in (b)(i).

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv)
The volume change in (b)(i) is prevented. State what happens to the pressure of
the air in the cylinder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
10
7
Three wires and a meter are used to construct a thermocouple for measuring the surface
temperature of a pipe carrying hot liquid, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
meter
wire 2
wire 1
cold junction
wire 3
hot junction
hot liquid in pipe

Fig. 7.1
(a) Copper wire and constantan wire are used in the construction of the thermocouple.
State which metal might be used for
wire 1 ......................................................
wire 2 ......................................................
wire 3 ......................................................
[1]
(b) State what type of meter is used.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State one particular advantage of thermocouples for measuring temperature.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 3]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
11
8
Fig. 8.1 shows a thin converging lens. The two principal foci are shown.
F2
For
Examiners
Use
F1
principal
axis
Fig. 8.1
A vertical object, 2 cm tall, is to be positioned to the left of the lens, with one end on the
principal axis.
On Fig. 8.1,
(a) draw the object in a position which will produce a virtual image, labelling the object with
the letter O,
[1]
(b) draw two rays showing how the virtual image is formed,
[2]
(c) draw in the image, labelling it with the letter I.
[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
12
9
(a) State what is meant by specific heat capacity.

..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Water has a very high specific heat capacity.
Suggest why this might be a disadvantage when using water for cooking.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 illustrates an experiment to measure the specific heat capacity of some metal.
stirrer
thermometer
lid
thread
boiling water
cup
insulation
metal
water
heater
Fig. 9.1
The piece of metal is heated in boiling water until it has reached the temperature of
the water. It is then transferred rapidly to some water in a well-insulated cup. A very
sensitive thermometer is used to measure the initial and final temperatures of the water
in the cup.
specific heat capacity of water = 4200 J / (kg K)
The readings from the experiment are as follows.
mass of metal = 0.050 kg
mass of water in cup = 0.200 kg
initial temperature of water in cup = 21.1 C
final temperature of water in cup = 22.9 C
(i)
Calculate the temperature rise of the water in the cup and the temperature fall of
the piece of metal.
temperature rise of water = ......................................................
temperature fall of metal = ......................................................
[1]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
13
(ii)
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in the cup. State the equation
that you use.
For
Examiners
Use
thermal energy gained = ................................................ [3]

(iii)
Assume that only the water gained thermal energy from the piece of metal.
Making use of your answers to (c)(i) and (c)(ii), calculate the value of the specific
heat capacity of the metal. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
specific heat capacity = ................................................ [2]

(iv)
Suggest one reason why the experiment might not have given a correct value for
the specific heat capacity of the metal.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
14
10 Alternating current electricity is delivered at 22 000 V to a pair of transmission lines.
The transmission lines carry the electricity to the customer at the receiving end, where
the potential difference is V. This is shown in Fig. 10.1. Each transmission line has a
resistance of 3 .
3
22 000 V
3
Fig. 10.1
(a) The a.c. generator actually generates at a much lower voltage than 22 000 V.
(i)
Suggest how the voltage is increased to 22 000 V.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one advantage of delivering electrical energy at high voltage.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The power delivered by the generator is 55 kW. Calculate the current in the transmission
lines.
current = ................................................ [2]

(c) Calculate the rate of loss of energy from one of the 3 transmission lines.
rate of energy loss = ................................................ [2]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
15
(d) Calculate the voltage drop across one of the transmission lines.
For
Examiners
Use
voltage drop = ................................................ [2]

(e) Calculate the potential difference V at the receiving end of the transmission lines.
V = ................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09
[Turn over
16
11 Fig. 11.1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit controlling a lamp.
For
Examiners
Use
temperature
sensor
relay
lamp
B
A
light
sensor
Fig. 11.1
(a) State the names of the logic gates A and B.
A ........................................................
B ........................................................
[2]
(b) The output of the temperature sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised temperature.
The output of the light sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised light levels.
State the outputs of A and B when the surroundings are
(i)
dark and cold,
output of A = ....................................
output of B = ....................................
(ii)
dark and warm,
output of A = ....................................
output of B = ....................................
(iii)
bright and warm.
[1]
output of A = ....................................
output of B = ....................................
(c) (i)
[1]
[1]
Suggest why B is connected to a relay, rather than directly to the lamp.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The relay switches on when its input is high. In which of the three combinations in
(b) will the lamp light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
Suggest a practical use for this circuit.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/31/O/N/09

*7776753992*
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (SHW 00380 1/09) 20284/4
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed/time graph for a car travelling along a straight road.
The graph shows how the speed of the car changes as the car passes through a small
town.
35
D
30
speed
m/s
A
25
enters
town
here
20
leaves
town
here
15
B
10
0
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe what happens to the speed of the car
(i)
between A and B, .....................................................................................................
(ii)
between B and C, .....................................................................................................
(iii)
between C and D. .....................................................................................................

[1]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Calculate the distance between the start of the town and the end of the town.
For
Examiners
Use
distance = ................................................ [3]

(c) Calculate the acceleration of the car between C and D.
acceleration = ................................................ [3]

(d) State how the graph shows that the deceleration of the car has the same numerical
value as its acceleration.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
4
2
A car of mass 900 kg is travelling at a steady speed of 30 m / s against a resistive force of

2000 N, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
30 m / s
2000 N
resistive
force
Fig. 2.1
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the car.
kinetic energy = ................................................ [2]

(b) Calculate the energy used in 1.0 s against the resistive force.
energy = ................................................ [2]

(c) What is the minimum power that the car engine has to deliver to the wheels?
minimum power = ................................................ [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
5
(d) What form of energy is in the fuel, used by the engine to drive the car?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
For
Examiners
Use
(e) State why the energy in the fuel is converted at a greater rate than you have calculated
in (c).
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
6
3
Two students make the statements about acceleration that are given below.
Student A:
For a given mass the acceleration of an object is proportional to the resultant

force applied to the object.
Student B:
For a given force the acceleration of an object is proportional to the mass of

the object.
(a) One statement is correct and one is incorrect.

Re-write the incorrect statement, making changes so that it is now correct.
For a given ..................... the acceleration of an object is ...............................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the equation which links acceleration a, resultant force F and mass m.
[1]
(c) Describe what happens to the motion of a moving object when
(i)
there is no resultant force acting on it,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
a resultant force is applied to it in the opposite direction to the motion,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
a resultant force is applied to it in a perpendicular direction to the motion.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
7
4
(a) Four identical metal plates, at the same temperature, are laid side by side on the ground.
The rays from the Sun fall on the plates.
For
Examiners
Use
One plate has a matt black surface.

One plate has a shiny black surface.
One plate has a matt silver surface.
One plate has a shiny silver surface.
State which plate has the fastest-rising temperature when the sunlight first falls on the
plates.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 is known as Leslies Differential Air Thermometer.
glass bulb
painted
matt black
radiant heater
shiny
glass bulb
air
T
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The heater is switched off. Tap T is opened so that the air on the two sides of T has the
same pressure. Tap T is then closed.
(i)
The heater is switched on. On Fig. 4.1, mark clearly where the two liquid levels
might be a short time later.
[1]
(ii)
Explain your answer to (b)(i).

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
8
5
A certain substance is in the solid state at a temperature of 36 C. It is heated at a constant

rate for 32 minutes. The record of its temperature is given in Fig. 5.1.
time / min
temperature / C
36 16
10
14
18
22
24
26
28
30
32
32
75
101 121 121 121 121
Fig. 5.1
(a) State what is meant by the term latent heat.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State a time at which the energy is being supplied as latent heat of fusion.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Explain the energy changes undergone by the molecules of a substance during the
period when latent heat of vaporisation is being supplied.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) (i)
The rate of heating is 2.0 kW.

Calculate how much energy is supplied to the substance during the period
18 22 minutes.
energy supplied = ................................................ [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
9
(ii)
The specific heat capacity of the substance is 1760 J / (kg C).

Use the information in the table for the period 18 22 minutes to calculate the
mass of the substance being heated.
For
Examiners
Use
mass heated = ................................................ [3]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
10
6
Some plane waves travel on the surface of water in a tank. They pass from a region of deep
water into a region of shallow water. Fig. 6.1 shows what the waves look like from above.
boundary
waves move
this way
deep
water
shallow
water
Fig. 6.1
(a) State what happens at the boundary, if anything, to

(i)
the frequency of the waves,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the speed of the waves,

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
the wavelength of the waves.

............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The waves have a speed of 0.12 m / s in the deep water. Wave crests are 0.08 m apart in
the deep water.
Calculate the frequency of the source producing the waves. State the equation that you
use.
frequency = ................................................ [3]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows identical waves moving towards the boundary at an angle.
For
Examiners
Use
boundary
A B
waves move
this way
deep
water
shallow
water
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw carefully the remainder of waves A and B, plus the two previous waves
which reached the shallow water. You will need to use your ruler to do this.
[3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
12
7
During a thunderstorm, thunder and lightning are produced at the same time.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) A person is some distance away from the storm.

Explain why the person sees the lightning before hearing the thunder.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A scientist in a laboratory made the following measurements during a thunderstorm.
time from start of storm / minutes
0.0
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10.0
time between seeing lightning and hearing thunder / s
3.6
2.4
1.6
2.4
3.5
4.4
Fig. 7.1
(i)
How many minutes after the storm started did it reach its closest point to the
laboratory?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
How can you tell that the storm was never immediately over the laboratory?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
When the storm started, it was immediately above a village 1200 m from the
laboratory.
Using this information and information from Fig. 7.1, calculate the speed of sound.
speed of sound = ................................................ [2]

(iv)
State the assumption you made when you calculated your answer to (b)(iii).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
13
(c) Some waves are longitudinal; some waves are transverse.
For
Examiners
Use
Some waves are electromagnetic; some waves are mechanical.

Put ticks () in the table below to indicate which of these descriptions apply to the light
waves of the lightning and the sound waves of the thunder.
light waves
sound waves
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
14
8
(a) The transformer in Fig. 8.1 is used to convert 240 V a.c. to 6 V a.c.
iron core
A
C
D
B
primary
coil
(480 turns)
secondary
coil
Fig. 8.1
(i)
Using the information above, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ................................................ [2]

(ii)
Describe how the transformer works.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(iii)
State one way in which energy is lost from the transformer, and from which part it is
lost.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
15
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a device labelled IGCSE Transformer.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 8.2
Study the label on the case of the IGCSE Transformer.
(i)
What is the output of the device? ....................................................................... [1]
(ii)
From the information on the case, deduce what other electrical component must be
included within the case of the IGCSE Transformer, apart from a transformer.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) A transformer supplying electrical energy to a factory changes the 11 000 V a.c. supply to
440 V a.c. for use in the factory. The current in the secondary coil is 200 A.
Calculate the current in the primary coil, assuming no losses from the transformer.
current = ................................................ [2]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
16
9
(a) Fig. 9.1 illustrates the left hand rule, which helps when describing the force on a currentcarrying conductor in a magnetic field.
thumb
motion / force
first finger
second finger
Fig. 9.1
One direction has been labelled for you.
In each of the other two boxes, write the name of the quantity that direction represents.
[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a simple d.c. motor connected to a battery and a switch.
N
S
X
switch
battery
Fig. 9.2
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
17
(i)
On Fig. 9.2, write in each of the boxes the name of the part of the motor to which
the arrow is pointing.
[2]
(ii)
State which way the coil of the motor will rotate when the switch is closed, when
viewed from the position X.
For
Examiners
Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State two things which could be done to increase the speed of rotation of the coil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
[Turn over
18
10 A certain element is known to exist as two different isotopes.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) State one thing that is the same for atoms of both isotopes.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State one thing that is different between atoms of these two isotopes.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) An atom of one of these isotopes is unstable and decays into a different element by
emitting a -particle.
(i)
State one thing about the atom that remains the same during this decay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
State one thing about the atom that changes as a result of this decay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
19
11 (a) A coil of wire is connected into a circuit containing a variable resistor and a battery.
For
Examiners
Use
The variable resistor is adjusted until the potential difference across the coil is 1.8 V.
In this condition, the current in the circuit is 0.45 A.
Calculate
(i)
the resistance of the coil,
resistance = ................................................ [1]

(ii)
the thermal energy released from this coil in 9 minutes.
energy released = ................................................ [3]

(b) The coil in part (a) is replaced by one made of wire which has half the diameter of that
in (a).
When the potential difference across the coil is again adjusted to 1.8 V, the current is
only 0.30 A.
Calculate how the length of wire in the second coil compares with the length of wire in
the first coil.
length of wire in second coil is the length of wire in first coil
[4]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/31/M/J/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

*3428909673*
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (NF/SW) 24990/4
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
An object of weight W is suspended by two ropes from a beam, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
30
50.0 N
86.6 N
60
W
Fig. 1.1
The tensions in the ropes are 50.0 N and 86.6 N, as shown.
(a) In the space below, draw a scale diagram to find the resultant of the two tensions.
Use a scale of 1.0 cm = 10 N.
Clearly label the resultant.
UCLES 2010
[3]
0625/31/O/N/10
3
(b) From your diagram, find the value of the resultant.
resultant = ......................................................... [1]
(c) State the direction in which the resultant is acting.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) State the value of W.
W = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
A car travels around a circular track at constant speed.

(a) Why is it incorrect to describe the circular motion as having constant velocity?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A force is required to maintain the circular motion.
(i)
Explain why a force is required.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
In which direction does this force act?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
Suggest what provides this force.

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
4
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a hydraulic lift in a car repair workshop.
car support
hydraulic fluid
4 pistons, each
of area 0.02 m2
piston A, area 0.01 m2
Fig. 3.1
The hydraulic fluid transmits the pressure, caused by piston A, equally to each of the four pistons
holding up the car supports. The pressure throughout the fluid is the same.
A force of 1000 N on piston A is just enough to raise the car.
(a) Using values from Fig. 3.1, find
(i)
the pressure caused by piston A on the fluid,
pressure = ......................................................... [2]

(ii)
the total upward force caused by the fluid.
force = ......................................................... [3]

UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
5
(b) The weight of each of the two car supports is 1000 N.
Calculate the mass of the car.
mass = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
6
4
A student in a laboratory uses the apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 to determine the specific heat
capacity of aluminium.
to low voltage supply
and measuring instruments
thermometer
electrical heater
aluminium block
Fig. 4.1
The readings obtained in the experiment are given below.
mass of aluminium block
= 0.930 kg
initial temperature of block = 13.1 C

final temperature of block
= 41.3 C
electrical energy supplied = 23 800 J

(a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Use the readings above to calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
State the equation you use.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
7
(c) Because the student knows it is good scientific practice to repeat readings, after a short time
he carries out the experiment again, supplying the same quantity of electrical energy.
This time the temperature readings are:
initial temperature of block = 41.0 C
final temperature of block
(i)
= 62.1 C
Use these figures to calculate a second value for the specific heat capacity of
aluminium.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [1]

(ii)
The student did not make any mistakes when taking the readings.
Suggest why the second value for the specific heat capacity of the aluminium is greater
than the first.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest two ways of improving the experiment in order to give as accurate a result as
possible.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
8
5
Fig. 5.1 shows a model cable-car system. It is driven by an electric motor coupled to a gear
system.
gears
6.0
m
electric
motor
2.0 m
smooth
pulley
model
cable-car
Fig. 5.1
The model cable-car has a mass of 5.0 kg and is lifted from the bottom pulley to the top pulley in
40 s. It stops automatically at the top.
(a) Calculate
(i)
the average speed of the cable-car,
average speed = .......................................................... [2]

(ii)
the gravitational potential energy gained by the cable-car,
gravitational potential energy gained = .......................................................... [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
9
(iii)
the useful output power of the driving mechanism.
power = ......................................................... [2]

(b) How would the electrical power input to the motor compare with your answer to (a)(iii)?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
10
6
Fig. 6.1 shows part of the path of a ray of light PQ travelling in an optical fibre.
Q
glass
Fig. 6.1
PQ undergoes total internal reflection at Q.
(a) Explain what is meant by total internal reflection, and state the conditions under which it
occurs.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Carefully complete the path of the ray of light, until it reaches the end R of the optical fibre.
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
11
7
(a) The following list contains the names of types of energy transfer by means of waves.
-rays,
(i)
infra-red,
radio/TV/microwaves,
sound,
visible light,
X-rays
Which one of these is not a type of electromagnetic wave?

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
State the nature of the wave you have named in (a)(i).

..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii)
The remaining names in the list are all regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but one
region is missing.
Name the missing region.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A television station emits waves with a frequency of 2.5 108 Hz. Electromagnetic waves
travel at a speed of 3.0 108 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the waves emitted by this television station. State the equation
you use.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
12
8
The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a 2.0 V cell, whose resistance you should ignore.
There are also three resistors, a 3-position switch, an ammeter and another component, P.
5.0
A
S
20.0
A
P
2.0 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the name of component P.
.......................................................... [1]
(b) Deduce the resistance of the circuit when switch S is

(i)
in position A,
resistance = ......................................................... [1]

(ii)
in position B.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
13
(c) Describe and explain what is seen on the ammeter when S is moved to position C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) With S in position A, calculate how long it takes for the circuit to transfer 320 J of electrical
energy to other forms.
time taken = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
14
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
15
9
In Fig. 9.1, A and B are two conductors on insulating stands. Both A and B were initially
uncharged.
X
Fig. 9.1
(a) Conductor A is given the positive charge shown on Fig. 9.1.
(i)
On Fig. 9.1, mark the signs of the charges induced at end X and at end Y of conductor B.
[1]
(ii)
Explain how these charges are induced.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii)
Explain why the charges at X and at Y are equal in magnitude.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) B is now connected to earth by a length of wire.

Explain what happens, if anything, to
(i)
the charge at X,
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the charge at Y.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Total: 8]
[Turn over
16
10 Emissions from a radioactive source pass through a hole in a lead screen and into a magnetic
field, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
radioactive
source
magnetic field
into paper
lead
screen
C
3 cm
Fig. 10.1
Radiation detectors are placed at A, B and C. They give the following readings:
A
32 counts / min
543 counts / min
396 counts / min
The radioactive source is then completely removed, and the readings become:
A
33 counts / min
30 counts / min
31 counts / min
(a) Explain why there are still counts being recorded at A, B and C, even when the radioactive
source has been removed, and give the reason for them being slightly different.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
17
(b) From the data given, deduce the type of emission being detected, if any, at A, at B and at C
when the radiation source is present.
State the reasons for your answers.
detector at A .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
detector at B .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
detector at C .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
[Turn over
18
11 When no circuit is connected to the input of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (CRO), there is a horizontal
trace across the middle of the screen.
Fig. 11.1 shows three circuits, each connected to a CRO.
On the grid alongside each circuit, draw the trace that might be seen on the screen of the CRO.
+
battery
CRO
a.c. supply
CRO
a.c. supply
CRO
[6]
Fig. 11.1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
19
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
20
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/31/O/N/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 9 9 7 8 9 4 1 3 2 5 *
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (LEO/DJ) 28843/5
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
In a laboratory, an experiment is carried out to measure the acceleration of a trolley on a horizontal

table, when pulled by a horizontal force.
trolley
force
Fig. 1.1
The measurements are repeated for a series of different forces, with the results shown in the table
below.
force / N
4.0
6.0
10.0
14.0
acceleration
m / s2
0.50
0.85
1.55
2.25
(a) On Fig. 1.2, plot these points and draw the best straight line for your points.
16
force / N
12
0
0
0.5
1.0
Fig. 1.2
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
1.5
2.0
acceleration
m / s2
2.5
[2]
3
(b) The graph shows that below a certain force there is no acceleration.
(i)
Find the value of this force. ............................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
A force smaller than that in (b)(i) is applied to the stationary trolley. Suggest what happens
to the trolley, if anything.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Show that the gradient of your graph is about 5.7.
gradient = ...........................................................[1]
(d) (i)
State the equation that links resultant force F, mass m and acceleration a.
[1]
(ii)
Use your gradient from (c) to find the mass of the trolley.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(e) On Fig. 1.3, sketch a speed / time graph for a trolley with constant acceleration.
speed
0
0
time
Fig. 1.3
[1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
4
2
Some builders decide to measure their personal power ratings using apparatus they already have
on site. Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement they use.
pulley
rope
load
pulley
Fig. 2.1
(a) In the table below, list the three quantities they must measure in order to calculate one mans
power, and the instrument they would use for each measurement.
quantity to be measured
instrument used for measurement
1.
2.
3.
[3]
(b) One workman is measured as having a power of 528 W. His weight is 800 N.
He can develop the same power climbing a ladder, whose rungs are 30 cm apart.
How many rungs can he climb in 5 s?
number of rungs = ...........................................................[3]

UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
5
(c) The human body is only about 15% efficient when climbing ladders.
Calculate the actual energy used from the body of the workman in (b) when he climbs 20
rungs.
energy used = ...........................................................[2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
6
3
During a period of hot weather, the atmospheric pressure on the pond in Fig. 3.1 remains constant.
Water evaporates from the pond, so that the depth h decreases.
force due to
air pressure
Fig. 3.1
(a) Study the diagram and state, giving your reason, what happens during this hot period to
(i)
the force of the air on the surface of the pond,

...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
the pressure at the bottom of the pond.

...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On a certain day, the pond is 12 m deep.

(i)
Water has a density of 1000 kg / m3.

Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the pond due to the water.
pressure due to the water = ...........................................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
7
(ii)
Atmospheric pressure on that day is 1.0 105 Pa.

Calculate the total pressure at the bottom of the pond.
total pressure = ...........................................................[1]

(iii)
A bubble of gas is released from the mud at the bottom of the pond. Its initial volume is
0.5 cm3.
Ignoring any temperature differences in the water, calculate the volume of the bubble as
it reaches the surface.
volume = ...........................................................[2]
(iv)
In fact, the temperature of the water is greater at the top than at the bottom of the pond.
Comment on the bubble volume you have calculated in (b)(iii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
8
4
The circuit of Fig. 4.1 is set up to run a small immersion heater from a 6.0 V battery.
6.0 V
heater
Fig. 4.1
(a) State the name and purpose of component X.
name .........................................................................................................................................
purpose .................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The heater is designed to work from a 3.6 V supply. It has a power rating of 4.5 W at this
voltage.
(i)
Calculate the current in the heater when it has the correct potential difference across it.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii)
Calculate the resistance of component X if there is to be the correct potential difference

across the heater. The battery and the ammeter both have zero resistance.
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(c) Some time after the heater is switched on, the ammeter reading is seen to have decreased.
Suggest why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
9
(d) As an alternative to running the heater from a battery, it is decided to construct a circuit to
enable it to be operated from the a.c. mains supply.
Name the electrical component needed to
(i)
reduce the potential difference from that of the mains supply down to a potential difference
suitable for the heater,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
change the current from a.c. to a current which has only one direction.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
10
5
The manufacturers label on an electric heater is as shown in Fig. 5.1.
C.I.E. Electrical Company

Suitable for use on 110 V, 60 Hz supply
1 kW/ 2 kW
This appliance must be earthed when in use
Fig. 5.1
(a) State what electrical quantity is represented by
(i)
110 V,
(ii)
60 Hz, ............................................................................................................
(iii)
1 kW.
(b) (i)
............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................
[1]
Which part of the electric heater must be earthed?

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain what the hazard might be if the heater is not earthed.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The heater has two 110 V heating elements, with two switches, so that either one or both
elements may be switched on.
In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing how the heating elements and switches
are connected to the mains supply.
for each heating element.
Use the symbol
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
11
6
(a) Six different nuclides have nucleon and proton numbers as follows:
nuclide
nucleon number
proton number
214
84
214
85
211
84
211
86
210
82
210
83
State which two nuclides are isotopes of the same element.
.................. and ................. [1]
(b) Thorium-232 has a half-life of 1.4 1010 years.

At a particular instant, the activity of a sample of thorium-232 is 120 Bq.
(i)
Calculate the time taken for the activity of this sample to fall to 15 Bq.
time taken ...........................................................[1]

(ii)
Explain why, when the activity has become 15 Bq, much of the sample will no longer be
thorium-232.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii)
The sample of thorium-232 is used in an experiment in a laboratory.

Explain why its activity may be regarded as constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
12
7
(a) The speed of light in air is known to be 3.0 108 m / s.

Outline how you would use a refraction experiment to deduce the speed of light in glass. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) A tsunami is a giant water wave. It may be caused by an earthquake below the ocean.
Waves from a certain tsunami have a wavelength of 1.9 105 m and a speed of 240 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the frequency of the tsunami waves.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
13
(ii)
The shock wave from the earthquake travels at 2.5 103 m / s.

The centre of the earthquake is 6.0 105 m from the coast of a country.
Calculate how much warning of the arrival of the tsunami at the coast is given by the
earth tremor felt at the coast.
warning time = ...........................................................[4]

[Total: 10]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
14
8
(a) Fig. 8.1 shows a section of an optical fibre. It consists of a fibre of denser transparent material,
coated with a layer of a less dense transparent material.
less dense
material
ray
denser material
Fig. 8.1
One ray within the fibre has been started for you on Fig. 8.1.
(i)
State and explain what happens to the ray already drawn, after it reaches the boundary
between the materials.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, carefully continue the ray until it reaches the end of the section of optical
fibre.
[1]
(b) Fibre-optic cables are sometimes used to carry out internal examinations on the human
stomach.
(i)
Suggest one reason why the cable is made of thousands of very thin optical fibres.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe briefly how the inside of the stomach is illuminated.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
15
(iii)
Describe briefly how the light from the stomach is transferred to the detecting equipment
outside the body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
16
9
A simple motor is made in a school laboratory. A coil of wire is mounted on an axle between the
poles of a horseshoe magnet, as illustrated in Fig. 9.1.
coil
B
S
A
springy contacts (brushes)
+
battery
Fig. 9.1
(a) At the instant illustrated in Fig. 9.1, the coil ABCD is horizontal and the battery is connected
as shown.
(i)
For this position, state the direction of the force on AB and the direction of the motion of
AB.
force on AB ........................................................................................................................
direction of motion of AB ...............................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Explain why BC does not contribute to the turning force on the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
17
(b) At the instant when the coil is vertical, the springy contacts do not, in fact, make contact with
the ends of the coil.
Describe and explain what happens to the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The motor in Fig. 9.1 does not rotate very quickly. The designer of a commercial motor is
required to produce a faster-rotating motor.
Suggest one change that could be made to increase the speed of the motor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
18
10 (a) A cathode-ray oscilloscope makes use of the process known as thermionic emission.
Describe what happens during this process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
Include in your diagram the tube, the cathode, the accelerating anode, the focusing anode
and both X- and Y-plates. Do not attempt to show any external circuits.
[3]
(c) A cathode ray is a beam of electrons.
Suggest one way of controlling the number of electrons in the beam.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
19
(d) One cathode-ray tube has 5000 V between the accelerating anode and the cathode.
The beam of electrons carries a total charge of 0.0095 C in 5.0 s.
Calculate
(i)
the current caused by the beam,
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii)
the energy transferred by the beam in 20 s.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
[Turn over
20
11 A mass of 0.36 kg of a certain substance is in the solid state in a well-insulated container. The
substance is heated at the rate of 1.2 104 J / minute.
2.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance is all at the same temperature, and it starts to
melt.
11.0 minutes after starting the heating, the substance finishes melting and the temperature starts
to rise again.
(a) Calculate the specific latent heat of the substance.
specific latent heat = ...........................................................[3]

(b) (i)
After 11 minutes of heating, when the temperature starts rising again, in which state is
the substance?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Describe what happens to the molecules as thermal energy is supplied to them in this
state.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/M/J/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 4 2 0 3 7 8 0 5 5 2 *
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes


DC (NH/DJ) 33051/8
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
(a) Define acceleration. Explain any symbols in your definition.

...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a graph of speed against time for a train. After 100 s the train stops at a
station.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
5
0
0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i)
For the time interval between 40 s and 100 s, calculate the distance travelled by the train.
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii)
The train stops for 80 s, then accelerates to 30 m / s with an acceleration of 0.60 m / s2. It
then travels at constant speed.
Complete the graph for the interval 100 s to 280 s, showing your calculations in the space
below.
[5]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
3
2
(a) Energy from the Sun evaporates water from the sea. Some of this water eventually drives a
hydroelectric power station. Give an account of the processes and energy changes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In a hydroelectric power station, 200 000 kg of water per second fall through a vertical distance
of 120 m. The water passes through turbines to generate electricity, and leaves the turbines
with a speed of 14 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the gravitational potential energy lost by the water in 1 second. Use g = 10 m / s2.
potential energy lost = ............................................................[2]

(ii)
Calculate the kinetic energy of the water leaving the turbines in 1 second.
kinetic energy = ............................................................[2]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
4
3
(a) State the two conditions required for the equilibrium of a body acted upon by a number of
forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a diagram of an arm with the hand holding a weight of 120 N.
F
2 cm
P
15 cm
20 N
33 cm
120 N
Fig. 3.1
The 20 N force is the weight of the forearm, acting at its centre of mass. F is the force in the
muscle of the upper arm. P is the point in the elbow about which the arm pivots. The distances
of the forces from point P are shown.
(i)
By taking moments about point P, calculate the force F.
force F = ...........................................................[3]
(ii)
A force acts on the forearm at point P. Calculate this force and state its direction.
force = ...............................................................
direction = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
5
4
(a) Complete Fig. 4.1 to show a simple mercury barometer. Insert the correct labels in the
boxes. Label with the letter h the measurement required to calculate the pressure of the
atmosphere.
[3]
Fig. 4.1
(b) The value of h taken using this barometer is 0.73 m. The density of mercury is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of the atmospheric pressure suggested by this measurement.
Use g = 10 m / s2.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]

(c) Standard atmospheric pressure is 0.76 m of mercury. Suggest a reason why the value of h in
(b) is lower than this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
6
5
(a) Equal volumes of a gas held at constant pressure, a liquid and a solid undergo the same
temperature rise.
(i)
(ii)
State which of the three, solid, liquid or gas,

1.
expands the most, ..............................
2.
expands the least. ..............................
Explain why the pressure of the gas must be kept constant for this comparison.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an alcohol thermometer.

10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70 C
Fig. 5.1
(i)
State two properties of alcohol which make it suitable for use in a thermometer.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
State two changes to the design of this thermometer which would make it more
sensitive.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain why it is an advantage for the glass surrounding the alcohol in the bulb of the
thermometer to be very thin.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
7
6
(a) Fig. 6.1 shows the position of layers of air, at one moment, as a sound wave of constant
frequency passes through the air. Compressions are labelled C. Rarefactions are labelled R.
Fig. 6.1
(i)
State how Fig. 6.1 would change if

1.
the sound had a higher frequency,

................................................................................................................................[1]
2.
the sound were louder.

....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
On Fig. 6.1, draw a line marked with arrows at each end to show the wavelength of the
sound.
[1]
(b) In an experiment to measure the speed of sound in steel, a steel pipe of length 200 m is
struck at one end with a hammer. A microphone at the other end of the pipe is connected
to an accurate timer. The timer records a delay of 0.544 s between the arrival of the sound
transmitted by the steel pipe and the sound transmitted by the air in the pipe.
The speed of sound in air is 343 m / s. Calculate the speed of sound in steel.
speed of sound in steel = ...........................................................[3]

[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
8
7
(a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of monochromatic red light, in air, incident on a glass block at an angle of
incidence of 50.
50
Fig. 7.1
(i)
State what is meant by monochromatic light.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
For this red ray the refractive index of the glass is 1.52. Calculate the angle of refraction
for the ray.
angle of refraction = ...........................................................[2]

(iii)
UCLES 2011
Without measuring angles, use a ruler to draw the approximate path of the ray in the
glass block and emerging from the block.
[2]
0625/31/O/N/11
9
(b) The red ray in Fig. 7.1 is replaced by a ray of monochromatic violet light. For this violet ray the
refractive index of the glass is 1.54. The speed of light in air is 3.00 108 m / s.
(i)
Calculate the speed of the violet light in the glass block.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii)
Use a ruler to draw the approximate path of this violet ray in the glass block and emerging
from the block. Make sure this path is separated from the path drawn for the red light in
(a)(iii). Mark both parts of this path with the letter V.
[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
10
8
(a) In Fig. 8.1, a magnet is moving towards one end of a solenoid connected to a sensitive centrezero meter. During this movement a current is induced in the solenoid.
Fig. 8.1
Suggest three possible changes to the system in Fig. 8.1 that would increase the induced
current.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...........................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a transformer. P is the primary coil. S is the secondary coil. The coils are
wound on an iron core.
Fig. 8.2
P has 200 turns and S has 800 turns. The e.m.f. induced across S is 24 V. The current in S is
0.50 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
11
Calculate
(i)
the voltage of the supply to P,
voltage = ...........................................................[2]
(ii)
the current in P.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
12
9
The graphs in Fig. 9.1 show the relation between the current I and the potential difference V for a
resistor and a lamp.
6
5
I/A
lamp
4
3
2
resistor
1
0
0
V/V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i)
Describe how, if at all, the resistance varies as the current increases in

1. the resistor, ...................................................................................................................
2. the lamp. ...................................................................................................................[2]
(ii)
State the value of the potential difference when the resistor and the lamp have the same
resistance.
potential difference = ...........................................................[1]
(b) The two components are connected in parallel to a supply of e.m.f. 4.0 V. Calculate the total
resistance of the circuit.
total resistance = ...........................................................[4]

[Total: 7]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
13
10 (a) In Fig. 10.1, A is a 1000 resistor, C is a transistor, and D is a lamp. S is a 9 V supply.
D
A
+
S
C
B
Fig. 10.1
(i)
Name the component labelled B.

.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
At 20 C the resistance of B is 800 .

At 100 C the resistance of B is 25 .
In terms of the p.d. across B, explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature
varies from 20 C to 100 C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Suggest a practical use for this circuit.

...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
[Turn over
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows the main components of a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
fluorescent
screen
electron
beam
heater
cathode
anode Y-plates X-plates

vacuum
system
Fig. 11.1
(a) State the purpose of

(i)
the heater,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the cathode,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the anode system.

...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
15
(b) Without deflection, the electron beam produces a spot at the centre of the fluorescent screen.
A deflection of the spot towards the top of the screen is required.
(i)
Describe how the Y-plates can be used to bring about this deflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Fig. 11.2 shows the Y-plates.
Fig. 11.2
On Fig. 11.2, sketch the pattern of the electric field produced between the plates.
[4]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
16
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/31/O/N/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 9 3 4 4 1 2 2 4 5 9 *
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes

appropriate units.
For Examiners Use

1
2
question.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Total

DC (NF/JG) 43223/5
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
The period of the vertical oscillations of a mass hanging from a spring is known to be
constant.
(a) A student times single oscillations with a stopwatch. In 10 separate measurements, the
stopwatch readings were:
1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.9 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s, 1.9 s, 1.7 s, 1.8 s, 1.8 s.
What is the best value obtainable from these readings for the time of one oscillation?
Explain how you arrive at your answer.
best value = .....................................................................................................................

explanation ......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Describe how, using the same stopwatch, the student can find the period of oscillation
more accurately.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A girl rides her bicycle along a straight level road. Fig. 2.1 shows a graph of her distance
moved against time.
For
Examiners
Use
400
C
300
distance / m
200
100
B
A
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe her motion
(i)
from A to B, ..............................................................................................................
(ii)
from B to C, ..............................................................................................................
(iii)
from C to D. ..............................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Calculate
(i)
her average speed from A to D,
average speed = ................................................. [2]

(ii)
her maximum speed.
maximum speed = ................................................. [3]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
4
3
(a) State an example of the conversion of chemical energy to another form of energy.
example ...........................................................................................................................
energy conversion ....................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The electrical output of a solar panel powers a pump. The pump operates a water
fountain. The output of the solar panel is 17 V and the current supplied to the pump is
0.27 A.
(i)
Calculate the electrical power generated by the solar panel.
power = ................................................. [2]

(ii)
The pump converts electrical energy to kinetic energy of water with an efficiency
of 35%.
Calculate the kinetic energy of the water delivered by the pump in 1 second.
kinetic energy = ................................................. [2]

(iii)
The pump propels 0.00014 m3 of water per second. This water rises vertically as a
jet. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
Calculate
1.
the mass of water propelled by the pump in 1 second,
mass = ................................................. [2]

2.
the maximum height of the jet of water.
maximum height = ................................................. [2]

[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
5
4
Fig. 4.1 represents part of the hydraulic braking system of a car.
For
Examiners
Use
piston Y
piston X
F1
F2
Fig. 4.1
The force F1 of the drivers foot on the brake pedal moves piston X. The space between
pistons X and Y is filled with oil which cannot be compressed. The force F2 exerted by the oil
moves piston Y. This force is applied to the brake mechanism in the wheels of the car.
The area of cross-section of piston X is 4.8 cm2.
(a) The force F1 is 90 N. Calculate the pressure exerted on the oil by piston X.
pressure = ................................................. [2]

(b) The pressure on piston Y is the same as the pressure applied by piston X. Explain why
the force F2 is greater than the force F1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Piston Y moves a smaller distance than piston X. Explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the braking system does not work properly if the oil contains bubbles of air.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
6
5
(a) Suggest
(i)
an example of a change of state resulting from the removal of thermal energy from
a quantity of material,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
the effect of this change of state on the temperature of the material.

............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Define the thermal capacity of a body.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) A polystyrene cup holds 250 g of water at 20 C. In order to cool the water to make a
cold drink, small pieces of ice at 0 C are added until the water reaches 0 C and no
unmelted ice is present.
[specific heat capacity of water = 4.2 J / (g C), specific latent heat of fusion of
ice = 330 J / g]
Assume no thermal energy is lost or gained by the cup.
(i)
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water in cooling to 0 C.
thermal energy lost = ................................................. [2]

(ii)
State the thermal energy gained by the ice in melting.
thermal energy gained = ................................................. [1]

(iii)
Calculate the mass of ice added.
mass of ice = ................................................. [2]

[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
7
6
Fig. 6.1 shows a glass flask full of water at 10 C and sealed with a bung. A long glass tube
passes through the bung into the water. The water level in the tube is at X.
bung
For
Examiners
Use
glass flask
water
Fig. 6.1
When the flask is placed in hot water, the water level initially falls a little below X, and then
rises some way above X.
(a) Suggest why
(i)
the water level initially falls,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
the water level then rises,

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii)
the rise is greater than the fall.

..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest a change to the apparatus that would make the fall and rise of the water level
greater.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
8
7
(a) A wave passes along the surface of the water in a ripple tank. Describe the motion of a
molecule on the surface as the wave passes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a view from above of water waves approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.
The water on both sides of the barrier has the same depth.
barrier with
narrow gap
direction of
water waves
Fig. 7.1
(i)
On Fig. 7.1, sketch the pattern of waves in the region to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii)
State the process by which waves arrive at point P to the right of the barrier.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The waves approaching the barrier in Fig. 7.1 have a wavelength of 1.4 cm and travel at
a speed of 12 cm / s.
Calculate the frequency of the waves.
frequency = ................................................. [2]

[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
9
8
(a) In Fig. 8.1, S is a metal sphere standing on an insulating base. R is a negatively charged
rod placed close to S.
For
Examiners
Use
insulating
base
Fig. 8.1
(i)
Name the particles in S that move when R is brought close to S.

............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 8.1, add + signs and signs to suggest the result of this movement.
[1]
(iii)
Describe the actions which now need to take place so that S becomes positively
charged with the charge distributed evenly over its surface. A positively charged
object is not available.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) During a thunderstorm, the potential difference between thunderclouds and the ground
builds up to 1.5 106 V. In each stroke of lightning, 30 C of charge passes between the
thunderclouds and the ground. Lightning strokes to the ground occur, on average, at 2
minute intervals.
Calculate
(i)
the average current between the thunderclouds and the ground,
average current = ................................................. [2]

(ii)
the energy transferred in each stroke of lightning.
energy = ................................................. [2]

UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Total: 9]
[Turn over
10
9
This question refers to quantities and data shown on the circuit diagram of Fig. 9.1.
For
Examiners
Use
6.0 V
I4
I1
3.0 1
I2
X
A
Y
I3
2.0 1
Fig. 9.1
(a) State the relationship between
(i)
the currents I1, I2 and I3 , ..................................................................................... [1]
(ii)
the currents I1 and I4 . ......................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ammeter reads 0.80 A. Assume it has zero resistance.

Calculate
(i)
the potential difference between X and Y,
p.d. = ................................................. [1]

(ii)
the current I3,
current = ................................................. [2]

(iii)
the resistance of R.
resistance = ................................................. [4]

[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
11
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire PQ placed between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in
wire PQ.
For
Examiners
Use
Q
S
Fig. 10.1
(i)
On Fig. 10.1, sketch lines with arrows to show the direction of the magnetic field
between the poles of the magnet.
[1]
(ii)
The force on PQ is into the paper.

Draw an arrow on PQ to show the direction of the current.
[1]
(b) The wire PQ in Fig. 10.1 is replaced by a narrow beam of -particles travelling from left
to right.
(i)
Suggest a suitable detector for the -particles.

............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State the direction of the force on the -particles.

............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii)
Describe the path of the -particles in the space between the poles of the magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv)
State what happens to the air molecules along the path of the -particles.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
[Turn over
12
11 Fig. 11.1 shows part of a circuit designed to switch on a security lamp when it gets dark.
relay coil
For
Examiners
Use
A
+
X
B
Fig. 11.1
When there is a current in the relay coil, switch S closes and the lamp L comes on.
(a) Write down the name of the component X.
.................................................. [1]
(b) The circuit has gaps at A and at B.

State the components that need to be connected into these gaps for the circuit to
perform its required function.
gap A ...............................................................................................................................
gap B ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is modified. The function of lamp L is now to give a warning when
the temperature becomes too high.
State any necessary changes of components in the circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/M/J/12
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 4 1 5 8 3 5 2 4 2 9 *
0625/31
PHYSICS
Paper 3 Extended
1 hour 15 minutes

For Examiners Use
1
2
appropriate units.
3
question.
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Total

DC (AC/SW) 49515/3
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows the graph of speed v against time t for a train as it travels from one station to
the next.
For
Examiners
Use
20
v
m/s
10
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
t /s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use Fig. 1.1 to calculate
(i)
the distance between the two stations,
distance = ................................................. [4]

(ii)
the acceleration of the train in the first 10 s.
acceleration = ................................................. [2]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
3
(b) The mass of the train is 1.1 105 kg.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate the resultant force acting on the train in the first 10 s.
resultant force = ................................................. [2]

(c) The force generated by the engine of the train is called the driving force.
Write down, in words, an equation relating the driving force to any other forces acting on
the train during the period t = 10 s to t = 130 s.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
4
2
(a) State the factors which completely describe a vector quantity.

..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An aeroplane is flying towards the east in still air at 92 m / s. A wind starts to blow at
24 m / s towards the north.
Draw a vector diagram to find the resultant velocity of the aeroplane. Use a scale of
1.0 cm = 10 m / s.
resultant speed = ......................................................

angle between resultant and easterly direction = ......................................................
[5]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
(a) A stationary body is acted upon by a number of forces. State the two conditions which
must apply for the body to remain at rest.
For
Examiners
Use
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device used for compressing crushed material.
380 mm
120 mm
H
lever arm
plunger
20 N
cylinder
cross-sectional
area A
crushed material
Fig. 3.1
The lever arm rotates about the hinge H at its right-hand end. A force of 20 N acts
downwards on the left-hand end of the lever arm. The force F of the crushed material on
the plunger acts upwards. Ignore the weight of the lever arm.
(i)
Use the clockwise and anticlockwise moments about H to calculate the upward
force F which the crushed material exerts on the plunger. The distances are shown
on Fig. 3.1.
force F = ................................................. [3]

(ii)
The cross-sectional area A of the plunger in contact with the crushed material is
0.0036 m2. Calculate the pressure exerted on the crushed material by the plunger.
pressure = ................................................. [2]

UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Total: 7]
[Turn over
6
4
(a) State what is meant by the centre of mass of a body.

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows an athlete successfully performing a high jump.
Fig. 4.1
The height of the bar above the ground is 2.0 m. The maximum increase in gravitational
potential energy (g.p.e.) of the athlete during the jump is calculated using the expression
g.p.e. = mgh.
Explain why the value of h used in the calculation is much less than 2.0 m.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows, in order, five stages of an athlete successfully performing a pole-vault.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.2
Describe the energy changes which take place during the performance of the polevault, from the original stationary position of the pole-vaulter before the run-up, to the
final stationary position after the vault.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [6]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
8
5
(a) Explain
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
how gas molecules exert a force on a solid surface,

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
the increase in pressure of a gas when its volume is decreased at constant

temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A cylinder of volume 5.0 103 cm3 contains air at a pressure of 8.0 105 Pa.
A leak develops so that air gradually escapes from the cylinder until the air in the cylinder
is at atmospheric pressure. The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 105 Pa.
Calculate the volume of the escaped air, now at atmospheric pressure. Assume that the
temperature stays constant.
volume = ............................................cm3 [4]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
9
6
(a) Define specific latent heat of fusion.

..........................................................................................................................................
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i)
A tray of area 0.25 m2, filled with ice to a depth of 12 mm, is removed from a
refrigerator.
Calculate the mass of ice on the tray. The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
mass = ................................................. [2]

(ii)
Thermal energy from the Sun is falling on the ice at a rate of 250 W / m2. The ice
absorbs 60 % of this energy.
Calculate the energy absorbed in 1.0 s by the 0.25 m2 area of ice on the tray.
energy = ................................................. [2]

(iii)
The ice is at its melting temperature.

Calculate the time taken for all the ice to melt. The specific latent heat of fusion of
ice is 3.3 105 J / kg.
time = ................................................. [3]

[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
10
7
(a) Explain why a liquid cools when evaporation takes place from its surface.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows five vessels each made of the same metal and containing water.
Vessels A, B, C and D are identical in size and shape. Vessel E is shallower and wider.
The temperature of the air surrounding each vessel is 20 C.
Fig. 7.1
The table shows details about each vessel and their contents.
vessel
outer surface
volume of
water / cm3
initial temperature
of water / C
dull
200
80
shiny
200
80
dull
200
95
dull
100
80
dull
200
80
The following questions are about the time taken for the temperature of the water in the
vessels to fall by 10 C from the initial temperature.
(i)
Explain why the water in B takes longer to cool than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Explain why the water in C cools more quickly than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
Explain why the water in D cools more quickly than the water in A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
11
(iv)
Suggest two reasons why the water in E cools more quickly than the water in A.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
For
Examiners
Use
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
12
8
(a) A ray of light in air travels across a flat boundary into glass. The angle of incidence is
51. The angle of refraction is 29.
(i)
In the space below, draw a labelled diagram to illustrate this information.
(ii)
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
[3]
refractive index = ................................................. [2]

(b) A ray of light in glass travels towards a flat boundary with air. The angle of incidence is
51. This ray does not emerge into the air.
State and explain what happens to this ray.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
13
9
Fig. 9.1 shows a thin, straight rod XY placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a
magnet. The wires from the ends of XY are connected to a centre-zero voltmeter.
For
Examiners
Use
X
N
V
Fig. 9.1
(a) When XY is moved slowly upwards the needle of the voltmeter shows a small deflection.
(i)
State how XY must be moved to produce a larger deflection in the opposite

direction.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
XY is now rotated about its central point by raising X and lowering Y. Explain why
no deflection is observed.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) The effect of moving XY can be seen if the wires are connected to the terminals of a
cathode-ray oscilloscope instead of the voltmeter.
(i)
State the parts inside the oscilloscope tube to which these terminals are connected.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
The spot on the oscilloscope screen moves up and down repeatedly. State how XY
is being moved.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii)
State the setting of the time-base of the oscilloscope during the process described
in (ii).
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
14
10 (a) State the electrical quantity that has the same value for each of two resistors connected
to a battery
(i)
when they are in series, ............................................................................................
(ii)
when they are in parallel. ..........................................................................................

[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit with a 1.2 k resistor and a thermistor in series. There is no
current in the voltmeter.
1.2 k1
9.0 V
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the voltmeter reading when the resistance of the thermistor is 3.6 k.
voltmeter reading = ................................................. [3]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
15
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a fire-alarm circuit. The circuit is designed to close switch S and ring
bell B if there is a fire.
relay coil
For
Examiners
Use
9.0 V
Fig. 10.2
Explain the operation of the circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
[Turn over
16
11 (a) A radioactive source emits -, - and -radiation.
For
Examiners
Use
Which of these radiations

(i)
has the shortest range in air,
..............................
(ii)
has a negative charge,
..............................
(iii)
is not deflected in a magnetic field?
..............................
[2]
(b) In a famous experiment, carried out in a vacuum, a very thin sheet of gold was placed in
the path of alpha particles.
It was found that a large number of the alpha particles passed through the sheet with
little or no deflection from their original path. A very small number of the alpha particles
were reflected back towards the source.
(i)
Explain, in terms of the force acting, why the direction of motion of an alpha particle
changes when it comes close to the nucleus of a gold atom.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii)
State two conclusions, about the nuclei of atoms, that were made from the results
of this experiment.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/31/O/N/12
ALTERNATIVE
TO PRACTICAL
PAPER SIX
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/6
PHYSICS
PAPER 6 Alternative to Practical
Friday
28 MAY 1999
Morning
1 hour

Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
You may use a calculator.
FOR EXAMINERS USE

1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

MML LOC 898 4/98 QF91703
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
Rays of light were reflected from the outside surface of a beaker that contained some water
coloured with blue ink.
P4
layout of apparatus as seen from above

beaker
P3
P2
P1
A
L
lamp
Fig. 1.1
The path of an incident ray LI, from lamp L, was marked by two pins P1 and P2. The
reflected ray was located and marked using pins P3 and P4.
The diagram of Fig. 1.1 represents the beaker, the lamp and the pin marks.
(a) Complete the diagram by drawing lines to represent the incident and reflected rays.
Label each ray.
[3]
(b) Measure the angle between the incident and the reflected ray, call this angle d and
record its value in the table. Also measure and record the angle e between the incident
ray and the line AL.
[2]
angle
d
e
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
For
Examiner's
Use
(c) Use your values of d and e to calculate a value for the ratio d
.
e
d
= ............................................................................................
e
(d)
[1]
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark, with the letter E, the position where you would place your eye
so as to see the lamp by the reflected ray.
(ii) Why is it an advantage to fill the beaker with coloured water when viewing the
lamp by a ray reflected from the outside surface of the beaker? You may draw a
diagram if you wish.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
4
2
The lever balance shown in Fig. 2.1 was constructed from a straw AB fitted with a pointer at
one end and a piece of card. The balance was supported on a pivot and the straw set
horizontal by adjusting the position of a small counterweight. The height of the pointer was
measured by using a metre rule placed beside the apparatus.
pointer
pivot
straw
A
B
metre rule
card
X
counterweight
Y
bench
Fig. 2.1
(a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule was perpendicular to the bench.
You may draw on Fig. 2.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the counterweight was placed at the corner X of the card, the straw was found to
be horizontal. In the space below, draw a sketch of the straw to represent its position
when the counterweight was attached at the point labelled Y, not X.
[2]
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
5
(c) With the straw horizontal, as shown in Fig. 2.1, a small paper clip was attached to the
end A of the straw. The balance came to rest as shown in Fig. 2.2. Write down the
reading shown for the height of the pointer B.
24
straw
26
pointer
25
pivot
27
metre rule
For
Examiner's
Use
card
A
paper clip
Fig. 2.2
pointer reading = ........................................................................................................ [1]
(d) In one experiment, additional clips were attached to the end of the straw. The clips
were added one at a time. After each clip had been added, the height h of the pointer
was determined. Draw up a table in which you could record the values of h together
with the corresponding total number of clips used. Your table should be suitable for use
in your laboratory book.
[2]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
6
(e) The distance d moved by the pointer, for each number n of paper clips hung from the
balance, was calculated from the values of h. The graph of Fig. 2.3 represents the
results of one experiment.
x
d / cm
x
10
x
9
x
x
6
x
5
x
4
x
3
x
2
x
1
0
0
10
11
12
number of paper clips n

Fig. 2.3
The paper clips were removed from the straw and a small mass of plasticine was hung
on the end A of the straw. The following information was obtained when this small
mass of plasticine was in air and when it was totally submerged in water.
with the plasticine in air, the distance moved by the pointer
da = 9.1 cm
with the plasticine in water, the distance moved by the pointer dw = 4.6 cm
(i) From Fig. 2.3 determine the corresponding value for the number n of clips in use.
for da = 9.1 cm,
na = ........................
for dw = 4.6 cm,
nw = ........................
(ii) The values for na and nw are not the same. As well as its weight, another force F
is acting on the plasticine when it is submerged in water.
1. In which direction does F act? ..............................................................................
2. Using the information you gave in (i) what can you say about the magnitude of F?
........................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
7
3
An equal volume of water was placed in each of three similar test-tubes. The tubes were
used in three experiments as described below.
For
Examiner's
Use
topicmodels
topicmolecular
topiclens
Experiment 1
A small sheet of glass was placed on top of the tube and the apparatus turned upside
down, as shown in Fig. 3.1. A strip of graph paper was held close to the tube and used as a
scale.
graph grid as a scale
water
h1
sheet of glass
Fig. 3.1
The height h1 of the water level above the glass was observed over a period of 5 hours.
The observations are recorded in the table on page 8.
Experiment 2
The apparatus was similar to that for experiment 1. In addition, a piece of paper tissue was
placed between the sheet of glass and the tube, as shown in Fig. 3.2. Once again, the
height h2 of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours.
water
fan
water
h2
tissue
tissue
h3
sheet of glass
sheet of glass
Fig. 3.2
Fig. 3.3
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
For
Examiner's
Use
Experiment 3
The apparatus was similar to that used for experiment 2. In addition, an electric fan was
used to produce a draught over the surface of the tissue, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The area
and shape of the tissue paper was the same as for experiment 2. Once again, the height h3
of the water level was observed over a period of 5 hours.
The three experiments were conducted over the same 5 hour period. The temperature of
the water was the same at the start of the experiments.
The observations are shown in the table.
height of water levels

room
temperature
/ C
glass
tissue
tissue + fan
time
t / hour
h1 / cm
h2 / cm
h3 / cm
26.8
14.0
14.0
14.0
26.8
14.0
13.3
12.5
27.0
14.0
12.8
9.3
26.9
14.0
12.1
6.5
27.0
14.0
11.4
3.4
27.0
14.0
10.9
0.1
Fig. 3.4
(a)
(i) Calculate an average value for room temperature during the 5 hour period.
average value for = ......................................................
(ii) What was the largest difference between the average room temperature and the
actual temperature of the room?
largest temperature difference = ....................................
Explain why it is reasonable to assume that the temperature of the room remained
constant during the three experiments.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6/S99
9
(b)
For
Examiner's
Use
(i) The area of cross-section of each tube was 2.0 cm2. During the 5 hour period,
what volume of water flowed out of each tube?
Experiment 1
volume = ...........................
Experiment 2
volume = ...........................
Experiment 3
volume = ...........................
(ii) Calculate the average rate of flow of water, in cm3 per hour, from the tube during
experiment 3.
rate of flow = ..............................

[2]
(c) Write a conclusion to the experiments. Your conclusion should explain why the three
rates of flow are so different.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
10
4
The circuit shown in Fig. 4.1 was used to determine R, the resistance of a resistor, using
the equation
topicevaporation
R=V
.
power supply
+
switch
X
Y
Z
Fig. 4.1
The value for R is to be determined for different values of current I.
(a) Name the components labelled X and Y.
X ......................................................................................................................................
Y ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) What is the purpose of the component X?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Explain how you would use the apparatus to determine values of R. Your answer
should include what you would do before you close the switch.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) The value of R is about 9.5 and the current through it must not exceed 0.10 A. What
would be a good choice for the maximum reading of the component labelled Z?
maximum reading = ......................................................

0625/6/S99
[1]
For
Examiner's
Use
11
BLANK PAGE
Question 5 starts on page 12
0625/6/S99
[Turn over
12
5
topicresistance
A drinking straw was sealed at one end with candle wax. The straw was made to float
upright in water by putting a small amount of ballast into the straw. The height of the top of
the straw above the bench was determined. This height was called h, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
rule
set-square
drinking straw
container full of water

h
ball
ballast
wax
Fig. 5.1
A steel ball was put inside the straw and the new value for h was obtained. Additional balls
were put in the straw one at a time. For each new ball the corresponding value of h was
determined. Fig. 5.2 shows the values obtained.
number n of balls
h / cm
29.1 28.2 27.1 26.3 25.0 24.2 23.1 22.0 21.1
Fig. 5.2
(a)
(i) Plot the graph of h / cm (y-axis) against n (x-axis). Start your y-axis at h = 16 cm
and make sure that your x-axis is scaled over the values n = 0 to n = 10.
(ii) Using your graph, estimate the value of h you would obtain if 10 balls were added.
Show your working.
Mark the graph to show how you obtained this value for h.
h = .................................................................
[4]
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
13
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
[Turn over
14
(b) Explain why the set-square is used when taking the reading for h.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Before taking the readings for h, one student pushed the straw down a little. The straw
then moved up and down before coming to rest. Suggest a reason why this was done.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The straw floats in the water so that its top is as high as possible. For this reason, the
container was always full of water. Suggest what would happen if the container was
not quite full so that the water surface was as shown in Fig. 5.3.
Fig. 5.3
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/6/S99
For
Examiner's
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name
0625/6
PHYSICS
Monday
22 NOVEMBER 1999
Morning
1 hour

Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (SLC/DJ) QK93709/2
UCLES 1999
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
A transparent U-tube is held vertically in a clamp. Some water and kerosene are poured into
the tube and the final levels of the liquids are as shown in Fig. 1.1. This diagram is drawn full
size.
kerosene
water
bench top
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using your own ruler, make measurements which will enable you to determine h, the
difference between the vertical heights of the water levels above the bench top at P and
at Q. Show all of your measurements and your calculation of h in the space below.
[4]
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) When the experiment is carried out in a laboratory, the vertical height of the water level
at P is measured using a half-metre rule.
For
Examiners
Use
Explain how you would use the rule when the apparatus is on a bench in the laboratory.
Your answer should include how you would position the rule and what you would do to
obtain an accurate value for the height of the water level. You may draw a diagram or
draw on Fig. 1.1 if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
4
2
(a) The circuit symbol for a diode is shown in Fig. 2.1. The diode conducts when the polarity
is as shown.
topicturningeffect
topicturning
Fig. 2.1
Draw a circuit diagram showing the following components, all connected in series:
a d.c. power supply, labelled to show its polarity,
a fixed resistor,
a diode,
a switch.
On your circuit diagram, the switch should be shown open and the diode should be able
to conduct when the switch is closed.
[3]
(b) (i)
Redraw your circuit diagram, adding an ammeter to measure the current in the
diode. Label the polarity of the ammeter terminals.
(ii)
Is there any other position in the circuit where you could put the ammeter to
measure the current through the diode? Tick one box.
yes
no
Give one reason to support your answer.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
5
(c) (i)
Assuming that the fixed resistor has a resistance of 100 and that the potential
difference of the power supply is 3.0 V, calculate the maximum current Imax in the
circuit.
For
Examiners
Use
Imax = ......................................
(ii)
In order to calculate the value for Imax in (i) above, what assumption did you make
about the resistance of the circuit?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
;
;
;;
A small steel ball is dropped through a hole in a card and falls through a clear plastic tube
before it hits a glass surface as shown in Fig. 3.1. There is a rubber band on the outside of
the tube. This band can be moved along the tube.
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topiclens
hole
plastic tube
clamp
card
ball
rubber
band
14.7 cm
glass surface
Fig. 3.1
When the ball bounces, it rises up inside the tube to a height shown as h in Fig. 3.1. The top
of the bounce is marked by the position of the rubber band.
(a) Four different balls are used. These are dropped from the same height onto four pieces
of glass, which are 2 mm thick. The areas of the top surface of the glass are 56 cm2,
112 cm2, 224 cm2 and 450 cm2. The results of this experiment are shown in Fig. 3.2.
mass of
ball / g
values of h / cm for each of the four pieces of glass

56 cm2
112 cm2
224 cm2
450 cm2
1.08
0.40
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.8
0.24
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
0.12
5.4
5.4
5.4
5.4
Fig. 3.2
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
(i)
maximum mass
1. Calculate the ratio for the balls.
minimum mass
ratio of masses = ......................................

maximum area
2. Calculate the ratio for the glass surfaces.
minimum area
ratio of areas = ......................................

(ii)
Use the table to justify the assertion that the value for h does not depend upon the
value for the surface area of the glass.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
Describe how the height h depends upon the mass of the ball for this experiment.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[6]
(b) The height of the hole above the surface of the glass block is 14.7 cm. Each ball is
released from this height. The following relation gives the change in potential energy of
each ball when it falls.
energy = mass x g x height
All of this energy becomes kinetic energy just before the moment of impact with the
glass.
Suggest what happens to this kinetic energy after the impact for the heaviest and for the
lightest balls. Your answer should include information from the table.
heaviest ball .....................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
lightest ball .......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
8
4
A small mass of ammonium chloride is dissolved in some water, causing the temperature of
the water to fall. The apparatus, which is used to determine the fall in temperature, is shown
in Fig. 4.1.
topicenergy
topicapparentdepth
topicelectric
lid
;;;
;;;
hand
lens
stirrer
thermometer
lagging
Fig. 4.1
(a) Give a reason for using each of the following items of apparatus.
(i)
the lagging
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the stirrer
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
the hand lens

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Part of the thermometer that is used to determine the fall in temperature is shown in
Fig. 4.2. The diagram shows the thermometer before and after adding the ammonium
chloride.
C
-10
10
20
30
40
50
-10
10
20
30
40
50
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 4.2
(i)
Record each of the temperatures and determine the fall in temperature.

temperature before adding the ammonium chloride = .....................................
temperature after adding the ammonium chloride = .....................................
fall in temperature = .....................................
(ii)
In Fig. 4.2 the liquid thread is shown along the edge of the scale marks. This is the
recommended way to position the liquid thread before reading a temperature. In
Fig. 4.3 the thread is positioned away from the edge of the scale.
-10
10
20
30
40
50
Fig. 4.3
Suggest a reason for the recommended way to use a thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
(c) How would you avoid making a parallax error when reading the thermometer shown in
Fig. 4.2? You may draw a labelled diagram if you wish.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6 W99
[Turn over
10
5
An image of the filament of a lamp is produced on a screen using the apparatus shown in
Fig. 5.1. The image distance, shown as x, is measured and recorded.
topicsound
topicspeed
topiclight
screen
lens
lamp
Fig. 5.1
y
w
screen
block
lens
lamp
Fig. 5.2
A glass block is now placed between the lens and the screen as shown in Fig. 5.2. The block
has width w. The image is out of focus. The screen is moved until the image is once again
sharp. The lens to screen distance, shown as y in Fig. 5.2, is now greater than x. The new
value for y is measured and recorded.
The experiment is repeated for different values of the lamp to lens distance. The values
obtained for x and y are given in Fig. 5.3.
y / mm
175
184
212
250
290
x / mm
152
163
189
229
269
(y x )/mm
Fig. 5.3
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
11
(a) Plot the graph of y / mm (y-axis) against x / mm (x-axis). Start your x-axis at x / mm = 140
and your y-axis at y / mm = 170. Draw the best straight line to fit the plotted points.
[5]
(b) (i)
(ii)
Determine the values of (y x) and enter them in the table of Fig. 5.3, shown on
page 10. On Fig. 5.2, show what is meant by the distance (y x).
State what happens to the value for (y x) as the value for x increases.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii)
A second glass block of width greater than w is used in a repeat experiment.

Suggest how this might affect the values of (y x).
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/6 W99
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6 W99
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/6

1 hour

Protractor
Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (SM/KS) QF05712/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 represents the apparatus an IGCSE class is using for an optics experiment, in which
a glass beaker filled with water acts like a lens.
The glass beaker filled with water is placed with C, the centre of its base, on a line labelled
LL . An optics pin is placed at the point labelled O, so that the pin is touching the side of the
beaker.
I
Two points A and A are on the surface of the beaker at equal distances from the line LL . The
pin at point O acts as an optical object. The ray emerging from A is located by using two pins
placed at two points labelled P1 and P2.
I
(a) Draw a neat, thin and accurate line to show the path of the ray from O to A in the water.
Complete the path, in air, of the emerging ray along AP1P2.
[3]
(b) Produce the line P2P1A backwards so as to cut the line LL . Label, with the letter I, the
point where the two lines cross. Point I is the position of the image of the pin O when it
is touching the side of the beaker.
[2]
I
(c) Draw the line OA to represent a ray in water from O passing through A . Using the
information you gained in (b), draw a line to show the path of the ray in air after it passes
through the point A . Mark your diagram in such a way as to show how you found the
direction of the ray in air.
[1]
I
(d) Take measurements to calculate the following ratio.
IR : OC = : 1
Record your measurements and show your working.
IR : OC = : 1
[2]
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
glass beaker filled with water
P1
P2
A
L
pin
L'
C
A'
Fig. 1.1
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
4
2
When investigating the magnetic field due to a bar magnet, a student places the magnet on
a sheet of paper as shown in Fig. 2.1, on page 5. The edge of the paper is placed so that it is
parallel to the direction of the Earths magnetic field. The bar magnet is then placed as
shown so that it is at right angles to the direction of the Earths magnetic field. (In Fig. 2.1,
the lines OX and OY are perpendicular to each other.) A small plotting compass is used to
investigate the magnetic field.
topicturningeffect
topicturning
topiceffect
(a) It is found that there are positions where the small magnet in the plotting compass
points so that it is parallel to the line OX. Some of these positions are located and are
labelled A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H, as shown on Fig. 2.1. The positions shown in Fig. 2.1
also lie on straight lines that come from the centre of the bar magnet.
Describe how you would locate the position labelled A. Your answer should explain
(i)
what you would do to help you judge when the small magnet in the plotting
compass is parallel to OX,
(ii)
how you would ensure that the small magnet of the plotting compass is not sticking,
(iii)
what you would do so as to mark the point A on the radial line,
(iv)
how you would avoid making a parallax error when locating the point A.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
Y
80
North
(magnetic)
60
C
plotting
compass
B
D
A
E
40
20
G
S
bar magnet
Fig. 2.1
(b) The plotting compass is at point C as shown in Fig. 2.1.

(i)
Mark the plotting compass in such a way as to show which end of the small magnet
of the plotting compass is a North pole.
(ii)
The compass is at point C. It is then moved along the radial line so that it is closer
to the bar magnet. Describe and explain what happens to the small magnet of the
plotting compass.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
6
3
topicmagnet
Fig. 3.1 shows the top of a variable resistor that has a scale of resistance, which gives the
resistance in use.
terminals
y
x
5
4
6
7
control knob
2
1
10
0
OHM
Fig. 3.1
(a) What range of values of resistance are available with this resistor?
range of values of resistance available = ..................................
[1]
(b) On Fig. 3.1, draw a line representing the position of the pointer when the value of the
resistance in use is 6.3 .
[1]
(c) Between the numbers 3 and 4, there are two letters x and y.
(i)
What is the resistance when the pointer is at x?

resistance at x = ..................................
(ii)
What is the change in resistance when the pointer moves from x to y?

change in resistance = ..................................
[2]
(d) Draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.
[1]
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
7
(e) A student is asked to connect a circuit so that the current through a filament lamp can
be changed by using a variable resistor.
For
Examiners
Use
The student makes a mistake when connecting the circuit.

Fig. 3.2 represents the students wrongly connected circuit. (In this diagram the circuit
symbol is not used for the variable resistor.)
lamp
5
4
6
7
variable resistor
8
OHM
10
Fig. 3.2
When the variable resistor is varied from 10 to 5 , the change in the current is very
small.
What could the student do to obtain a larger change in the current when the variable
resistor is changed from 10 to 5 ?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
8
4
For
Examiners
Use
The apparatus shown in Fig. 4.1 is used in a heat experiment.
topicenergy
topicapparentdepth
boiling water
plastic cup
cold water
metal block
HEATER
Fig. 4.1
A piece of metal at the boiling temperature of water is transferred to a mass of cold water.
Initially, the cold water is at a temperature of TC. The hot metal raises the temperature of this
water to TH. The rise in temperature, , is determined from the relation = TH TC. The
experiment is repeated so as to obtain five sets of readings for different masses of cold
water.
(a) Draw up a table, for use in your laboratory notebook, in which you can record
m, the mass of cold water used,
TC, the temperature of the cold water,
TH, the maximum temperature reached by the cold water,
, the rise in temperature of the cold water.
[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 on page 9 is a graph showing how varies with m, the mass of cold water used.
(i)
Why has a smooth line been drawn through the points?

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
graph showing how varies with m

15
C 14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
20
30
40
50
60
m
g
70
Fig. 4.2
(ii)
(iii)
The graph point that is labelled A does not lie on the graph line. (You can assume
that the graph line is correctly drawn.) Complete the following statements about the
value of and of m at the point A.
1.
If the value of were .................... C smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
2.
If the value of m were .................... g smaller, the point A would lie on the line.
In (ii) above which is the most likely reason, 1 or 2, for the point A not being on the
line? Give a reason for your choice.
choice: Tick one box.
1.
2.
reason:
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 S00
[Turn over
10
5
topicresistance
The class is investigating the use of nichrome (resistance) wire instead of thin thread as part
of a simple pendulum. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.
clamp
nichrome wire
wire wrapped round a

cylindrical mass and
twisted back on itself
Fig. 5.1
Four tests are carried out.
Test A using very thin cotton thread for the suspension, (this thread is considered to
have a negligible diameter).
Tests B, C and D in which nichrome wires of different diameters, d, are used.
In each test the length of the pendulum is 30.0 cm. The period, T, is determined by obtaining
the total time, t, of a suitable number of oscillations. The period is given by T = t /N, where N
is the number of oscillations.
The table gives the measurements taken by the class.
test
suspension
d /mm
t /s
cotton thread
negligible
50
54.8
nichrome wire
0.31
50
53.4
nichrome wire
0.56
50
50.3
nichrome wire
0.91
50
43.3
(a) For each test, determine the value T and record it in the table.
T /s
[1]
(b) Suggest why 50 oscillations are used.

......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) (i)
(ii)
Plot a graph of T /s ( y-axis) against d /mm (x-axis ). Start the T /s axis at T /s = 0.7.
Draw a neat thin curved line through the four points.
Label each plotted point with the correct test letter A, B, C or D.
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
11
(iii)
Describe how the values of T change when the values of d, the diameter of the
wire, decrease.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[7]
(d) In the laboratory you have enough time to take another set of measurements for one
other value for the diameter of the nichrome wire. Study the shape of your graph line
and then suggest an approximate value for the diameter that you think should be used.
Give a reason for your choice.
choice for the value of d = ...................... mm
reason for this choice
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 S00
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6 S00
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name
0625/6
PHYSICS
20 NOVEMBER 2000
Monday
Morning
1 hour

Ruler (30 cm)
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (SM/DJ) QK07578/3
UCLES 2000
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows a metre rule clamped to a bench top. A mass of 50 g is attached to the free
end of the rule. The weight of the rule and of the 50 g mass depresses the free end of the
rule by a small distance, x, from the horizontal.
clamp
block of wood
weight
x depression
metre rule
Fig. 1.1
In the experiment, the depression is found to be about 4 cm.
(a) Describe how you would determine the value of x to the nearest mm. Your answer should
include the following points.
(i)
How you would locate the position of the horizontal line from which the depression
is measured.
(ii)
What apparatus you would use to help you measure the depression.
(iii)
What practical steps you would take to improve the accuracy of your measurement.
You may draw diagrams if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/6 Nov00
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) The free end of the loaded rule is now pushed down so that the depression is greater
than x, and then the rule is released. The rule performs vertical oscillations. How would
you determine the time, T, for one oscillation?
For
Examiners
Use
Your answer should include the following points.

(i)
What measurements you would make and how you would use these measurements
to determineT.
(ii)
What equipment you would use to make the measurements.
(iii)
How you would avoid making errors.
(iv)
How you would try to reduce errors.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
4
2
The class is using a beaker filled with water to investigate one of the effects produced by a
cylindrical water lens. Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus.
patch of light
beaker of water
sheet of paper
w width of patch of light

x distance from the
lamp
centre of the beaker
Fig. 2.1
A large sheet of paper is placed on the bench. A straight line is drawn along the centre of the
sheet.
A beaker is placed with its centre on the straight line. The beaker of water acts as a
cylindrical lens. A small lamp is placed on the line. The lamp acts as a bright object. The light
that emerges on the other side of the lens produces a patch of light on the sheet of paper.
The broken lines mark the edge of this patch of light. The width of the patch of light
decreases and shows a sharp focus at the point I. At different points along the central line
the width, w, of the patch of light is determined. The investigation is to discover how w
depends upon x, the distance from the centre of the beaker.
Fig. 2.2 is a full size copy of the patch of light obtained in one experiment.
(a) On Fig. 2.2, at the points denoted by X1, X2, X3 and X4, take measurements of the
width, w, of the patch of light and the distance, x, from the centre of the lens. Record the
values for w and x in a table.
Determine the values of the product wx, and include these values in your table.
[5]
(b) Describe how the values of w change as the values of x increase.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 Nov00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
centre of beaker
X1
X2
X3
X4
Fig. 2.2
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
6
3
In this experiment, the class is investigating how the thermal energy lost by a 50 g mass of
brass, initially at 100 C, depends upon the time it is cooling. The apparatus is shown in
Fig. 3.1.
topicmolecular
topicmodels
topiclens
boiling water
plastic cup
cold water
50 g brass cooling for t seconds

HEATER
Fig. 3.1
A 50 g mass of brass is heated in boiling water for at least five minutes. The mass is then
removed from the boiling water and given a very quick shake to remove any hot water
remaining on the mass. A time t, after the brass has been removed from the boiling water,
when the temperature of the brass has cooled to H, the 50 g mass is placed into 50 cm3 of
cold water. The initial temperature of the cold water is C. The temperature of the cold water
rises and the maximum temperature M is determined.
H is then calculated using the following equation.

H = 11M 10C
The experiment is repeated for different values of cooling time t.
Fig. 3.2 is a graph of a set of typical results for this experiment.
100
90
H
80
Y
X
70
60
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
t /s
90
Fig. 3.2
0625/6 Nov00
100 110 120 130 140 150
For
Examiners
Use
7
(a) Why is it important to remove any water remaining on the brass as soon as it is lifted
from the boiling water?
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) You do not have a partner helping you with this experiment. How would you measure
the cooling time t, using the clock shown in Fig. 3.3?
....................................................................................
re-set
....................................................................................
....................................................................................
55
60
5
10
50
45
....................................................................................
15
55 60 5
50
10
45
15
40
20
35 30 25
40
35
....................................................................................
start
30
20
25
stop
................................................................................[2]
Fig. 3.3
(c) Describe how you would perform the experiment in order to obtain the values that will
enable you to plot the point labelled X on the graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) The point labelled Y does not lie close to the graph line and it is to be repeated.
(i)
How would you ensure that the initial temperature of the cold water in the plastic
cup is the same as in the previous trial?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Measuring cylinders are not very accurate for measuring small volumes of water.
How would you obtain 50 cm3 of water with more accuracy than that obtained by
using a measuring cylinder?
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(e) Why is it a good procedure to stir the cold water after adding the brass mass?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
8
4
Fig. 4.1 is a series circuit in which a variable resistor is used so as to control the magnitude
of the current in the circuit. The circuit is designed so as to obtain any value of current from
0.2 A to 2 A.
topicevaporation
V=2V
fixed resistor
R = 1
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
The variable resistor is marked 0 to 10 .

What is meant by the phrase 0 to 10 ?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii)
Why is it important that the value of the variable resistance may be changed
smoothly?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i)
A 1 m length of nichrome wire has a resistance of 10.0 .

How would you use 1 m of this wire, and a jockey-slide contact, as the variable
resistor shown in Fig. 4.1?
Your answer should
1.
include a diagram showing the wire in use,
2.
explain how you would achieve smooth changes in the value of the variable
resistance,
3.
explain why the wire must be bare and clean.
Diagram
0625/6 Nov00
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii)
If the current in the nichrome wire becomes 2.0 A, then the wire becomes very hot
and has a temperature of about 300 C. The wire is then dangerous to touch.
A safe current to use in the circuit is about 0.6 A. To obtain a current of 0.6 A, the
total resistance in the circuit should be about 3.3 . The length of resistance wire
in use is then 23 cm.
What could you do to the apparatus you have been given in (b)(i) to prevent
anyone using a length of resistance wire that is less than 23 cm?
You may draw a diagram if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
10
5
A bar magnet A is placed on a waxed cardboard disc which floats on water as shown in
Figs. 5.1 and 5.2. At first, magnet A points in the North-South direction. A similar magnet, B,
is moved along the EW line as shown. As magnet B approaches magnet A, magnet A is
deflected. The deflection, y, is measured. An experiment is performed to find out how y
depends upon x, the distance between the centre of A and the centre of B.
topicspeed
topicsound
magnetic N
waxed cardboard
disc floating on water
W
E
B
A
N
cylindrical glass
vessel
x
S
Fig. 5.1
disc
A
N
N
S
water
0
scale
wood
5 6
x
S
Fig. 5.2
The data obtained from the experiment are given in the table.
deflection y / mm
separation x / mm
16
40.5
74.5
600
400
300
200
150
0625/6 Nov00
For
Examiners
Use
11
(a) Plot a graph of y /mm (y-axis) against x /mm (x-axis). Draw a smooth curve through the
points.
[5]
(b) (i)
For
Examiners
Use
Use the graph to complete the table below.

x / mm
y / mm
x1
170
y1
x2
600
y2
x1/x2
y1/y2
0625/6 Nov00
[Turn over
12
(ii)
Given that an increase in y means an increase in the force between the magnets,
describe how the force changes as the separation, x, decreases. Your answer
should include a comment on the magnitude of the two ratios that you have
calculated in part (b) (i).
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
0625/6 Nov00
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/6

1 hour

TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (ND/CG) QF10313/2
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
(a) Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used for an experiment to investigate the extension of a
steel spring. The laboratory bench to which the pulley and support for the spring are
firmly fixed is not shown.
pointer
spring
80 90 100 110
70
12
80 7
60
100
0 6 0 13
110
0
0
5 0 120
50
0
13
0 10
20
30
180 170 16
01
50 40
14
0
pulley
protractor
70 180
60 1
01
10 0
15
20
0
30
14
40
1
topicspeed
load
Fig. 1.1
The load is attached to the spring by a length of thread which passes over a pulley. The
protractor is fixed in position. It is assumed that the angle through which the pointer
moves when the load is increased is proportional to the extension of the spring.
A student recorded the angle through which the pointer moved for a range of loads, L,
as shown in the table.
L /N /
0
1
2
3
4
5
(i)
0
3
14
27
43
57
Plot the graph of / (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).

Draw the best fit straight line for loads from 1 N to 5 N.
0625/6/M/J/01
[6]
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
(ii) The student expected the graph to show a straight line through the origin. Suggest
a reason why the results were not as expected.
.................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
4
(b) Another student obtained results using the apparatus set up as shown in Figs. 1.2 and
1.3 which show the spring unloaded and the spring with a load of 1 N.
rigid support
rigid
support
load
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
(i) On Fig. 1.2, show clearly lo, the length of the unloaded spring.
(ii) On Fig. 1.3, show clearly l1, the corresponding length of the spring with a load of
1 N.
(iii) Write down the equation you would use to calculate e, the extension produced by
adding the 1 N load.
e =.........................
[2]
0625/6/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
5
2
Some students were asked to carry out a simple experiment to compare different heat
insulation materials.
(a) One student measured the temperature of hot water in insulated beakers (all the same
size), waited for 5 minutes for the water to cool and then measured the temperatures
again. Fig. 2.1 shows how one student recorded the results.
80 C start
73 C after
5 minutes
200cm
water
85 C start
69 C after
5 minutes
170cm
water
79 C start
67 C after
5 minutes
150cm
water
Fig. 2.1
(i) Calculate the temperature fall for each beaker.
beaker A ..........................................................
beaker B ..........................................................
beaker C ..........................................................
If you had only these results and no information about the way these results had
been obtained, which beaker would appear to be the best insulated?
.............................................................
(ii) Suggest a simple, practical way to overcome the problem of heat loss, by
evaporation and convection, from the surface of the water in the beaker.
.................................................................................................................................
(iii) Look at Fig. 2.1 again. Suggest one further improvement that you would make to
improve the reliability of the experiment.
.................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................
[5]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
(b) Another student carried out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables,
and took temperature readings every 4 minutes. Room temperature during the
experiment was 19 C. He plotted a graph of temperature against time to show the
cooling of the water in each beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the graph obtained.
100
90
80
70
60
Temp/C
50
A
40
B
30
C
20
10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
Time/Min
Fig. 2.2
(i) From the graph, which beaker, A, B or C, was best insulated ? .............................
(ii) The student extended graph line B with a dotted line as shown. Explain why this
does not show a realistic continuation of the cooling of the water.
.................................................................................................................................
(iii) On the graph, extend line A to show a realistic result up to 60 minutes.
[3]
0625/6/M/J/01
7
3
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 3.1 shows a circuit in which three resistors are connected to a d.c. power supply.
topicmagnet
power
source
R1
R2
V1
R3
V2
V3
Fig. 3.1
A 0 - 1 V voltmeter was used to measure the potential differences V1, V2 and V3.
Fig. 3.2 represents the face of the voltmeter when reading these values.
VOLT
0
0.4
0.2
0.6
VOLT
0.8
0.2
0.6
0.4
VOLT
0.8
V2
V1
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
V3
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i)
Record the reading of each potential difference, shown in Fig. 3.2, in the table
below.
potential
difference
V/V
V1
V2
V3
(ii) Using the values in your table, predict the voltmeter reading when a 0 - 5 V
voltmeter is connected across all three resistors together.
potential difference = ...............................................................................................
[5]
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
8
(iii) The current, I, in the circuit is 0.35 A. Using the values in your table and the
equation R = V / I, calculate the resistances R1, R2 and R3
R1 = .................................................
R2 = .................................................
R3 = .................................................
[2]
(b) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram showing the same components as in Fig. 3.1
but with
the three resistors in parallel,
a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across all three resistors
the ammeter connected to record the current through R1 only.
[3]
0625/6/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
9
4
Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used to determine the maximum temperature rise of cold
water when a hot glass stopper is transferred to the cold water.
topictensiontopicdispersion
topicevaporation
topicresistance
string
thermometer
boiling
water
at 100 C
cold
water
at 20 C
glass
stopper
heater
Fig. 4.1
(a) On Fig. 4.2, draw the mercury thread of the thermometer when it shows the
temperature of the cold water in the plastic cup shown in Fig. 4.1.
-10
10
20
30
40
50
Fig. 4.2
[1]
(b) The glass stopper was heated for a long time in the boiling water. Suggest a reason for
this.
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Give one reason why the glass stopper should be transferred quickly from the boiling
water to the cold water.
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The maximum temperature that the cold water reached after the hot glass stopper was
transferred to the cold water was 30.5 C.
Calculate
(i) the temperature rise of the cold water,
.................................................................................................................................
0625/6/M/J/01
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
(ii) the temperature fall of the glass stopper.
.................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) When the experiment is repeated with a larger glass stopper, the temperature rise of
the cold water was greater than with the smaller glass stopper. Why was this?
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
For
Examiners
Use
11
5
Fig. 5.1 shows an illuminated object, a lens and a screen set up for an experiment to
investigate the size of the image produced by the lens. The lens is mounted on a rectangular
wooden block.
topicthermometer
topicradioactivity
topicpressure
topicconvection
lens
u
stiff card
lamp
illuminated
object
screen
wooden block
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2 shows the shape and height (x cm) of the object.
stiff card
thin wire
x
triangular hole in
the card is the illuminated
object
Fig. 5.2
(a) A student carried out the experiment, keeping the lens in the same position throughout.
He set the object at a distance u = 15.0 cm from the centre of the lens, moved the
screen until the image was sharply focused and then measured v, the distance from the
centre of the lens to the screen. Finally, he measured y, the height of the image on the
screen. He repeated the procedure using different values of u. The table below shows
the readings he obtained.
u / cm
v / cm
x / cm
y / cm
15.0
20.0
25.0
30.0
19.6
16.8
1.5
1.5
1.5
2.9
1.6
1.1
0625/6/M/J/01
y / cm (by calculation)
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
For
Examiners
Use
The height of the image can be found by calculation, using the equation below.
y=vxx
u
Calculate the y values in this way and enter them in the table, giving the values to an
appropriate number of significant figures for comparison with the measured values. [2]
(b) Describe how you would measure as accurately as possible from the centre of the lens
to the screen. You may draw a diagram and assume that a metre rule is available and
other simple laboratory apparatus (e.g. set square and fine line marker pen).
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) In Fig. 5.3 below, draw a full-size diagram of the image formed on the screen when
u = 15.0 cm. (Use the students measured value, not the calculated value.)
[2]
Fig. 5.3
(d) State one precaution you would take when setting up the apparatus in order to obtain a
clear image on the screen.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/01
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/6

1 hour

TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SB (SLC/SLC) S11938/5
UCLES 2001
[Turn over
2
1
topicspeed
Fig. 1.1 shows a strip of wood approximately 1 m long, clamped at each end to rigid supports
so that the strip is horizontal and about 50 cm above the floor. A small loop of string is fixed
at the centre of the strip.
clamp
wooden strip
clamp
load, L
Fig. 1.1
A student investigates how the bending of the strip of wood depends on the load hung from
the loop of string. The depression d of the strip at the centre is measured for each load L.
The readings obtained are shown in the table below.
L / N d / mm
0.0
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
(a) (i)
(ii)
0.0
11.5
23.0
34.0
46.0
57.5
Plot a graph of d / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit.
[6]
From the graph, determine the depression that would be produced by a load of
2.5 N. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
depression produced by a load of 2.5 N = .......................................................
[2]
(b) Draw a diagram in the space below to show how you would measure the depression
produced by a load. You may assume that simple standard laboratory apparatus is
available.
[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
0625/6/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a circuit in which lamps are connected to a d.c. power supply.
d.c. power
supply
A
Fig. 2.1
Three lamps B, C and D are available and are connected in the circuit in turn. Each time the
potential difference V across the lamp and the current I through the lamp are measured. A
0 0.5 A ammeter is used to measure the current. Fig. 2.2 represents the face of the
ammeter when reading the current values.
0 .1
AMP
0.2 0.3
0.4
0.5
reading with lamp B
0 .1
AMP
0.2 0.3
0.4
reading with lamp C
0 .1
AMP
.
0 2 0.3
0.4
reading with lamp D

Fig. 2.2
0625/6/O/N/01
0.5
0.5
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
(a) (i)
(ii)
In the table below, record each ammeter reading shown in Fig. 2.2.
lamp
V/V
2.0
2.1
1.9
I/A
[3]
Using the values in the table and the equation R = V / I, calculate the resistance of
each lamp.
resistance of lamp B = ...........................................................
resistance of lamp C = ...........................................................
resistance of lamp D = ...........................................................
[2]
(b) In the space below, draw a new circuit diagram showing

the power source and switch,
the three lamps in parallel,
the voltmeter connected to measure the voltage across the lamps,
the ammeter connected to measure the current through lamp C.
[3]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows a pile of 15 glass microscope slides, drawn actual size.
topicmolecular
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to measure h, the height in mm of the pile of slides.
h = .............................................................
(ii)
Calculate the thickness t of one slide.
t = ..............................................................
[2]
(iii)
The surface area A of each slide is 1200 mm2. Calculate the volume V of one slide
using the equation
V = A x t.
V = ..............................................................
(iv)
[2]
The mass of one microscope slide is 3.7 g. Calculate the density d of the glass, in
g/mm3, using the equation
d = m /V.
Give your answer to an appropriate number of significant figures.
d = .............................................................
0625/6/O/N/01
[2]
7
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows the pile of microscope slides being used in a balancing experiment. The
metre rule is to be balanced, at the 50.0 cm mark, on the pivot. The pile of slides has a
mass of 55.5 g and is placed with its centre of mass on the rule at a distance 20.0 cm
from the pivot.
For
Examiners
Use
On Fig. 3.2, show clearly the approximate position of a 100 g mass placed on the rule
to make it balance. (You are not expected to carry out a calculation.)
microscope slides
metre rule
pivot
Fig. 3.2
[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
8
4
Fig. 4.1 shows three metal cans A, B and C. The cans are all drawn to one quarter actual
size.
topicenergy
topicapparentdepth
Fig. 4.1
Each can contains water at room temperature. The outer surfaces of the cans are as follows:
A painted white
B painted black
C polished metal (no paint).
(a) A student carries out an experiment to investigate how the colour of the surface affects
the rate of heating of the water when the cans are placed close to a radiant heater. Her
readings are shown below.
can
initial water
final water
temperature/C temperature/C
heating
time/min
20
55
20
20
43
23
20
52
18
temperature
change/C
(i)
Calculate the temperature change for each can and record the values in the table
above.
[1]
(ii)
The student realises that the variables have not been controlled, so that it is not
possible to draw reliable conclusions about the effect of the colour of the surface
on the rate of heating.
Suggest two changes you would make to obtain a more reliable set of readings.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...........................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Another student carries out a similar experiment, with proper control of the variables,
and takes temperature readings every 60 s. All the cans reach a steady temperature
within 25 minutes of the start of timing. She plots a graph of temperature against time to
show the heating of the water in each can. Fig. 4.2 shows the graph obtained.
For
Examiners
Use
P
30
Q
R
temperature / C
20
10
0
10
15
20
25
time/min
Fig. 4.2
(i)
From the graph, which can, P, Q or R, reached its final temperature most quickly?
....................
(ii)
[1]
Using the graph, determine the temperature of the water at the start of the
experiment. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
temperature = ....................
[2]
0625/6/O/N/01
[Turn over
10
5
topicresistance
Fig. 5.1 shows the outline of a transparent perspex block used in an experiment to
determine the value of a quantity called the refractive index of perspex. The block is placed
on a sheet of plain paper that is mounted on a cork mat. Two pins P1 and P2 are viewed
through the block and two additional pins P3 and P4 are stuck into the mat so that P3, P4 and
the images of P1 and P2 appear to be exactly in line, one behind the other.
P1
i
P2
E
N
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 5.1
0625/6/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
11
(a) (i)
On Fig. 5.1, draw a line through the positions of P3 and P4 and extend the line until
it meets CD. Mark this point as F.
Show the path of the ray of light through the block by joining point E to point F. [1]
(ii)
Measure the angle i.

i = ...........................................................
[1]
(b) Give two precautions that you would take to obtain an accurate path for the ray of light.
You should consider the positioning of the pins P3 and P4 and how they are viewed. You
may assume that simple laboratory apparatus is available, if required.
first precaution ..................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
second precaution ............................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i)
Measure the distance NF.

NF = ..............................
(ii)
Measure the distance EF.

EF = ...............................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of perspex using the equation

EF
n = 0.5 x .
NF
n = .........................
[4]
0625/6/O/N/01
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/6/O/N/01
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

0625/6
PHYSICS

1 hour
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE

1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SP (SC/JB) S25730/5
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
Fig. 1.1 shows how a student used a rule to measure h, the height of a pile of wooden
blocks. The reading was inaccurate because the students practical technique was poor.
cm
30
20
eye
10
Fig. 1.1
(a) Complete Fig. 1.2 to show the correct method to read the height h using the metre rule.
[2]
Fig. 1.2
(b) (i)
Use your rule to measure the height marked h on Fig. 1.2.

h = ................................................
(ii)
Fig. 1.2 is drawn to scale. It is a tenth of actual size.

Calculate t, the actual thickness of one block of wood.
t = .................................................
[5]
0625/6/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
(a) A student set up a circuit in order to measure the current through a lamp when different
potential differences were applied. Fig. 2.1 below shows the diagram that the student
drew. The diagram is incomplete. A voltmeter and an ammeter are required.
power source
meter
Fig. 2.1
(i)
Draw the appropriate symbol in the space labelled meter.
(ii)
Draw the circuit symbol for the other meter and show it connected correctly to the
circuit.
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the scale of the ammeter.
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.4
0.5
Fig. 2.2
(i)
On Fig. 2.2, draw the position of the pointer when the ammeter reading is 0.46 A.
(ii)
What is the range of the ammeter shown?

..............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) When the current is 0.46 A, the voltmeter reading is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of
the lamp filament, using the equation V = IR.
resistance = ..................[3]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
3
The IGCSE class was asked to investigate the solubility of sugar under different conditions.
They were reminded of the importance of carrying out a fair test by controlling the possible
variables. One student decided to investigate the effect of temperature on the rate at which
the sugar dissolved.
For each test the student added water to some sugar in a beaker, stirred the mixture briefly,
and recorded , its temperature, and t, the time taken for all the sugar to dissolve. The
readings are shown below.
temperature, / C
dissolving time, t/s
20
450
25
240
31
145
36
90
39
72
46
45
50
24
(a) List three possible variables that this student should keep constant throughout the
experiment.
.........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[3]
0625/6/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) Plot the graph of t/s (y-axis) against /C (x-axis). Start both axes at zero. Draw the
best-fit curve.
[5]
(c) (i)
When the temperature of the water is increased, what is the effect on the time
taken for sugar to dissolve?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the ratios
dissolving time at 20C ,

dissolving time at 30C
ratio = ................................
dissolving time at 40C .

ratio = ................................
(iii)
Use your answers from part (ii) to predict a possible value for the ratio
dissolving time at 50C .
ratio = ............................[4]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
A student carried out an experiment to find the position of an image in a plane mirror. The
object was an optics pin. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.1.
sheet of
plain paper
mirror
A
cork mat
Fig. 4.1
The student viewed the image of the object pin P in the mirror. He placed two pins A and B
some distance apart so that the image of P and pins A and B were exactly in line, one
behind the other.
Then, without moving the object pin P, he viewed the image from a different position
and repeated the experiment with pins C and D. The students ray trace sheet is shown in
Fig. 4.2.
mirror
D
B
Fig. 4.2
0625/6/M/J/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
(a) On Fig. 4.2

(i)
draw in the two reflected rays,
(ii)
draw in the two incident rays that produced the reflected rays you have drawn,
(iii)
show clearly, on the incident and reflected rays, the direction in which the light is
travelling,
(iv)
find the position of the image of the object pin P by using the directions of the
reflected rays. Show clearly on the diagram how you found the image position.
Label the image position I.
[6]
(b) State whether the image is real or virtual.

.........................................................................................................................................
Justify your answer by reference to the lines you have drawn in part (a).
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
8
BLANK PAGE
0625/6/M/J/02
9
5
In an experiment to study the effect of increasing pressure on the volume of air, the IGCSE
class used the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1.
scale
air
pressure gauge
oil
to foot pump
Fig. 5.1
air
tube
20 cm3
30 cm3
oil
Fig. 5.2
(a) What is the volume reading shown in Fig. 5.2?
volume reading = ............................[1]
0625/6/M/J/02
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
For
Examiners
Use
220
p / kPa
200
180
160
140
120
100
0
10
20
30
40
50
V / cm3
Fig. 5.3
Fig. 5.3 shows the graph that one student plotted from the readings. She drew a best-fit
curve.
Theory suggests that the relationship between pressure and volume is given by the
equation
p x V = constant.
The student is required to find the value of the constant.
(b) Why is it better to find the value of the constant using the graph than from a single
measurement of p and V?
.........................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/M/J/02
11
(c) (i)
Use these two examples, taken from the graph, to show that the readings from the
experiment support the theory.
Example 1:
when p = 200 kPa

V = cm3
pV =
Example 2:
when V = 37 cm3
p = .. kPa
pV =
(ii)
Using your answers from (c)(i), predict the pressure required to reduce the volume to
18 cm3.
p = . kPa
[4]
0625/6/M/J/02
Centre Number
Candidate
Number
Candidate Name

PHYSICS
0625/6

1 hour
TIME
1 hour
FOR EXAMINERS USE
1
2
3
4
5
TOTAL

SP (NF/SLC) S37969/1
CIE 2002
[Turn over
2
1
In an experiment to determine the volume of glass beads, a student used two different
methods.
Method 1
The student measured the combined diameters of some beads and then calculated the
volume of one bead. The end view of the apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
bead
wooden block
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the side view of the same apparatus, drawn actual size.
x
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i)
On Fig. 1.2, use your rule to measure the distance x, in cm.

...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate d, the average diameter in cm of one glass bead. Show your working.
d = ............................................... cm
(iii)
Calculate V, the volume of one glass bead using the equation

d 3
V = ___ .
6
V = .................................................[6]
0625/6/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
Method 2
The student used a displacement method to determine the volume of a glass bead. Fig. 1.3
and Fig. 1.4 show how this was done.
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder
cm3
100
80
80
60
60
water
water
40
40
20
20
Fig. 1.3
Fig. 1.4
(b) (i)
measuring
cylinder
225 glass beads
Write down the values of the readings taken.

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume of 225 glass beads.
volume = .........................................
(iii)
Calculate V, the average volume of one glass bead.
V = .........................................
[3]
(c) Suggest which of the two methods will give the more accurate result for the volume of a
glass bead. Give a reason for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating electromagnets. The electromagnets are made by

wrapping insulated wire around a soft-iron core. The wire is connected to a power pack.
Fig. 2.1 shows the arrangement.
power
pack
soft-iron core
paper clip
Fig. 2.1
Two students studied how the number of paper clips that an electromagnet can hold up
depends on the potential difference across the coil.
(a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by adding a voltmeter, connected to measure the p.d. across the coil.
[2]
(b) Student A used the control on the power pack to obtain set values of p.d. and recorded
the maximum number of paper clips that the electromagnet could hold at each p.d. The
results are shown below.
Student A
p.d. / V
number of paper clips
10
12
0625/6/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
5
Student B connected a variable resistor into the circuit and used it to change the p.d.
across the coil. She recorded the minimum p.d. required to hold 1 paper clip, then 2
paper clips, etc. The results are shown below.
For
Examiners
Use
Student B
p.d. / V
(i)
number of paper clips
2.2
4.5
6.6
8.7
11.0
Which set of results gives the more accurate indication of the strength of the
electromagnet at different potential differences? Tick the correct box.
Student A
Student B
(ii)
Justify your answer to part (b)(i).

...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Draw the circuit symbol for a variable resistor.
[1]
(d) On the diagram below, show the position of the pointer on the voltmeter when the
voltmeter reading is 8.7 V.
10
5 6 7
3 4
8
2
[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
6
3
A student carried out a principle of moments experiment using a metre rule placed on a
pivot at the 50.0 cm mark. The aim was to determine an unknown weight. The arrangement
of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 3.1.
a
unknown
weight W
b
5.0 N weight
50 cm
mark
metre rule
pivot
Fig. 3.1
The student placed the unknown weight W at a convenient distance a from the pivot. He
found b, the distance from the pivot that the 5.0 N weight must be placed so that the rule
balanced horizontally. He then repeated the experiment using different values of a.
The readings are shown in the table below.
a/m
b/m
0.100
0.122
0.200
0.238
0.250
0.302
0.300
0.360
0.350
0.435
0.400
0.470
0625/6/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
(a) (i)
(ii)
Plot the graph of b / m (y-axis) against a / m (x-axis).

Draw the best-fit straight line.
[6]
(iii)
Determine G, the gradient of the line.
G = ....................................
(iv)
Determine W, the unknown weight, using the equation

W = XG
where X = 5.0 N.
W = ....................................
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
8
(v)
Explain why the student could not choose distance a to have a value of 0.450 m.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[5]
(b) Another student, who was performing this experiment, found that the unloaded metre
rule balanced on the pivot at the 50.3 cm mark, instead of the 50.0 cm mark.
Suggest what the student should do to obtain the correct value for W from the
experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
The IGCSE class was performing a heating experiment. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1.
The aim was to determine the rate at which the temperature of 200 cm3 of water increased
when heated with an electric immersion heater.
thermometer
cable to
power supply
beaker
electric
immersion
heater
water
Fig. 4.1
0625/6/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
9
The water was heated from room temperature up to 60 C. The teacher measured the power
of the immersion heater and calculated (correctly) the time required to raise the temperature
of 200 cm3 of water from 21 C to 60 C.
The students found that the water must be heated for longer than the calculated time.
(a) (i)
For
Examiners
Use
What is the most likely cause of the longer time recorded?

Tick the appropriate box.
an inaccurate thermometer
errors in reading the stopwatch
heat loss during the experiment
(ii)
Suggest two precautions that could be taken to obtain more accurate results.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) What is the reading on the thermometer shown in Fig. 4.2?
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
reading = ........................ [1]

Fig. 4.2
(c) The power P of the immersion heater is calculated using the equation P = V I
Calculate the power of an immersion heater in which the current is 5.5 A when the p.d.
across it is 12.0 V.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/6/O/N/02
[Turn over
10
5
A student carried out a lens experiment to investigate the magnification of an image. The
apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.
u
illuminated
object
lens
screen
Fig. 5.1
The object is a triangular hole in a screen. Fig. 5.2 shows this, actual size.
1.5 cm
2.0 cm
Fig. 5.2
The student set the distance u at 35.0 cm and moved the screen to obtain a sharply focused
image. The image distance v was 72.3 cm.
(a) (i)
Calculate m, the magnification, using the equation

m = v /u.
m = .................................................
0625/6/O/N/02
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
(ii)
Draw a diagram of the image, actual size, for a magnification m = 2.0.
[5]
(b) The image distance v is the distance from the screen to the centre of the lens.
Explain briefly how you would position a metre rule to obtain an accurate value for v.
You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/6/O/N/02
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
Paper 6 Alternative to Practical
May/June 2003
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
provided.
2
3
4
5
Total

SP (AT/KS) S47471/3
UCLES 2003
[Turn over
2
1
A student carried out an experiment to find the spring constant of a steel spring. The
apparatus is shown in Fig. 1.1.
l0
l
load W
half-metre
rule
half-metre
rule
Fig. 1.1
The student recorded the unstretched length l0 of the spring. Then she added loads W to the
spring, recording the new length l each time. The readings are shown in the table below.
W/N
l / mm
30
32
33
36
39
40
42
e / mm
l0 = 30 mm
(a) Calculate the extension e of the spring produced by each load, using the equation
e = (l l0).
Record the values of e in the table.
0625/06/M/J/03
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Plot the graph of e / mm (y-axis) against W / N (x-axis).
[4]
(c) Draw the best-fit straight line for the points you have plotted. Calculate the gradient of
the line. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the necessary information.
gradient = ..[4]
0625/06/M/J/03
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
An IGCSE student was investigating the passage of red light through a prism. Fig. 2.1
shows the outline of the prism and an incident ray.
A
normal
ray
box
C
Fig. 2.1
(a) Measure the angle of incidence i shown in Fig. 2.1.

i = .[1]
(b) The angle of refraction as the ray entered side AB of the prism was 22.
(i)
On Fig. 2.1, draw in the refracted ray from point D as accurately as possible.
(ii)
Mark the point E, where the ray meets side AC. Draw the normal at point E.
[4]
(c) At point E the ray came out of the prism with an angle of refraction of 75. On Fig. 2.1,
draw as accurately as possible the ray coming out of the prism.
[1]
(d) Another student used four optics pins to trace the passage of a ray through a prism.
Fig. 2.2 shows the prism, the position of the students eye and the directions of the ray.
incident ray
eye
Fig. 2.2
On Fig. 2.2, show positions of the four optics pins, placed to obtain as accurate a result
as possible. Mark each position clearly with a cross (X).
[2]
0625/06/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
5
3
In an electrical experiment, a student set up a circuit to measure current and potential

difference. Part of the circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1.
power
source
A
Y
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
Complete the circuit diagram by drawing in a voltmeter connected across the lamp.
Name the component labelled Y. .
[2]
(b) The first reading on the voltmeter was 2.2 V. On the voltmeter face shown in Fig. 3.2,
show the position of the pointer giving the reading 2.2 V.
3
7
8
10
0
V
[1]
Fig. 3.2
(c) The readings of V and I obtained by the student are given in the table below.
(i)
V/
I/
2.2
0.36
4.1
0.62
6.0
0.86
7.9
0.98
9.8
1.20
R/
Calculate the resistance R of the lamp filament for each set of V and I readings
and write the values in the table. Use the equation
R=
(ii)
V
.
I
Complete the column headings in the table.

0625/06/M/J/03
[6]
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
4
An IGCSE class watched a demonstration experiment to show that a metal rod expands
when heated. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1.
pointer
metal rod
pin
wooden block
heat
bench
Fig. 4.1
When the rod expands, it rolls the pin which moves the pointer. So a very small expansion
moves the pointer far enough to be seen clearly.
(a) One student wanted to find out how much longer the rod became when heated above
room temperature with a Bunsen burner. The rod was 0.750 m long at room
temperature.
To find the circumference of the pin, the student wrapped a piece of string 10 times
round the pin, marked the string at the beginning and end of the 10 turns, and then
measured the length of the string between the marks. Fig. 4.2 shows the string actual
size.
Fig. 4.2
(i)
Use your rule to measure the distance x between the marks on the string on
Fig. 4.2.
x = ..
(ii)
Calculate the circumference c of the pin.
c = ..
[3]
0625/06/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) A second student measured the diameter d of the pin using a micrometer screw gauge.
The diameter was 1.20 mm. When the rod was heated, the pointer moved through 90.
(i)
Calculate the circumference c using the equation

c = d.
c = ..[2]
(ii)
Use this value of the circumference to calculate the increase e in the length of the
rod when heated.
e = ..[1]
(iii)
Calculate the length l of the heated rod.

l = ..[1]
(c) The micrometer screw gauge is a very accurate instrument. Suggest why the string and rule
method of finding the circumference, used by the first student, was inaccurate.
.................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................[1]
0625/06/M/J/03
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
5
A student was asked to carry out an experiment to compare the insulating properties of
cotton wool, cardboard and polystyrene. The apparatus provided was hot water, a
thermometer, a stopclock and a copper can with a lid, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
thermometer
copper can
lid
water
insulation
Fig. 5.1
The student wrapped one of the insulators around the can, poured hot water into the can,
and then took temperature and time readings as the water cooled. This was then repeated
for each insulator. The graph in Fig. 5.2 shows how the student displayed his readings.
80
temperature / C
polystyrene
60
40
cotton wool
20
cardboard
0
10
15
time / min
Fig. 5.2
(a) (i)
Using the information on the graph, which material appears to be the best
insulator?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Justify your answer by referring to the information on the graph.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/06/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) In this experiment, it is important to control the variables. Suggest three variables that
the student should keep constant for this experiment.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
3. .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/06/M/J/03
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2

3
4

provided.
5
Total

MML 4504 11/02 S53410/3
UCLES 2003
[Turn over
2
1
(a) A student was asked to make some measurements of the test-tube shown in Fig. 1.1.
He was given a 1 m length of thin string and a metre rule and instructed to determine
as accurately as possible the circumference of the tube. The student used the rule to
measure the diameter d of the tube and then calculated the circumference c using the
equation
c = d.
Describe how the student could have obtained a more accurate result with the
apparatus given. You may draw on Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b)
(i) On Fig. 1.2, show where you would place two small rectangular blocks of wood to
help you make an accurate measurement of the overall length of the test-tube.
Fig. 1.2
(ii) The test-tube is shown actual size in Fig. 1.2. Use your rule to measure the length l
of the test-tube.
l = ..............................................
[2]
0625/06/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
(c) Using another test-tube, the student obtained these readings.
l = 14.5 cm
c = 5.3 cm
Calculate the approximate external volume V of the test-tube using the students
readings and the equation
c 2l
V = .
4
V = ....................................................
[2]
(d) The equation used in (c) assumes the test-tube to be a cylinder with flat ends. It does
not allow for the rounded end of the test-tube.
(i) Estimate the volume Vm of the missing part of the cylinder shown shaded in
Fig. 1.3.
Fig. 1.3
Vm = ...........................................
(ii) Using your values for V and Vm , calculate the actual external volume Va of the
test-tube.
Va = ...........................................
[2]
0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
4
2
Fig. 2.1 shows a ray tracing sheet obtained by a student carrying out a reflection of light
experiment using pins and a plane mirror.
mirror
M'
B
Fig. 2.1
The student looks into the mirror MM' and views the images of pins A and B. He then places
pins C and D so that pins C and D and the images of pins A and B appear to be in line.
(a) On Fig. 2.1,
(i) draw the incident ray in this experiment,
(ii) draw the reflected ray,
(iii) draw a normal at the point where the incident ray meets the mirror,
(iv) measure the angle of incidence i.
i = ...............................................
[3]
0625/06/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) The student moves pin B and then repeats the experiment, obtaining the reflected ray
EF.
For
Examiners
Use
(i) On Fig. 2.1, continue the lines CD and EF behind the mirror to find the point
where they meet. Label this point X.
(ii) Draw the line AX. Label with the letter Y the point where line AX crosses the
mirror MM'.
(iii) Use your rule to measure the distances AY and YX.
AY = ...........................................
YX = ...........................................
[2]
(c) According to theory, AY = YX. Suggest why, in spite of very careful work, the students
values may have been slightly different.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
6
3
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the scale of an ammeter. Draw the position of the pointer when the
ammeter reading is 0.35 A.
[1]
0.4
0.6
0.2
0.8
A
1.0
Fig. 3.1
(b) The ammeter was used in the circuit shown in Fig. 3.2 to investigate the current in a
lamp.
Y
A
Fig. 3.2
(i) Name the component labelled Y.
...................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
7
(ii) The table shows the current I in the lamp for different values of the p.d. V across
the lamp.
1.
V/
I/
1.9
0.31
1.5
0.26
0.8
0.20
For
Examiners
Use
R/
Calculate the values for the resistance R of the lamp, using the equation
V
R= .
Write your answers in the table.

2.
(iii) Suggest how the value of V could be varied.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[8]
(c) Fig. 3.3 shows a power source connected to three resistors labelled X, Y and Z.
power
source
Fig. 3.3
Complete the diagram to show
(i) a voltmeter connected to measure the voltage across the resistors,
(ii) an ammeter connected to measure the current in resistor X only,
(iii) connecting wires to complete the circuit.
[3]
0625/06/O/N/03
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class was studying the acceleration a of a toy truck that was pulled along a
track by a force F. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 4.1.
truck
Fig. 4.1
The results obtained are shown in the table.
F/N
a / (m / s2 )
0.5
0.35
1.0
0.72
1.5
1.02
2.0
1.44
2.5
1.74
(a) Plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against a / (m / s2 ) (x-axis). Draw the line of best fit through
your points.
[6]
0625/06/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Theory suggests that the relationship between force and acceleration is given by the
equation
For
Examiners
Use
F = ma,
where m is the mass of the truck.
The gradient of the graph is equal to the mass of the truck.
From the graph, determine the mass m of the truck. Show clearly how you obtained
the necessary information.
m = ....................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
[4]
[Turn over
10
5
A student wants to find out which of the three materials is the best thermal insulator.
The students apparatus at the beginning of each test is as shown in Fig. 5.1.
200 cm3 of
water at
80 C
100 cm3 of
water at
80 C
material 1
100 cm3 of
water at
70 C
material 2
beaker A
material 3
beaker B
beaker C
Fig. 5.1
Each beaker is surrounded by a different insulating material. The water is allowed to cool
and the temperatures are recorded at different times. The student is unable to write a
correct conclusion because the variables have not been controlled.
(a) Study Fig. 5.1 and then state two ways in which you would improve the control of
variables.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State the reading shown on the thermometer shown in Fig. 5.2.
110 100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
Fig. 5.2
temperature reading .................................................................................................. [1]
0625/06/O/N/03
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) The graph of Fig. 5.3 shows the results obtained by the student.
The graph lines A, B and C correspond to the beakers A, B and C.
90
80
temperature / C
70
60
50
40
A
B
30
20
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100 120 140
160 180 200
time / s
Fig. 5.3
Which beaker cools the most quickly in the first 60 s?
...........................................................
0625/06/O/N/03
[1]
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2004
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2

3
4

provided.
5
Total

MML 5677 5/03 S61130/2
UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the conduction of electric current through copper sulphate
solution. The circuit used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
power source
electrode
copper sulphate
solution
Fig. 1.1
During the experimental work, the students measure the volume of water, the mass of
copper sulphate that is dissolved in the water, the current in the solution, the potential
difference across the electrodes and the gap between the electrodes.
One set of readings is shown in Figs. 1.2 1.6.
(a) Write down the readings shown. Include appropriate units.
1
0.5
1.0
0.5
1.5
1.5
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
current = ............................................
potential difference = .....................................
copper
sulphate
plastic
dish
empty plastic
dish
6.58 g
3.26 g
Fig. 1.4
mass of copper sulphate = .............................
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
cm3
200
180
160
140
120
water
100
80
60
40
20
Fig. 1.5
volume of water = ..........................................
electrode
0 cm 1
10
Fig. 1.6
gap between electrodes = ..............................
[6]
(b) It is not possible to put the rule inside the beaker to measure the gap between the
electrodes. Explain how you would overcome this problem.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest a variable, which is not measured in Figs. 1.2 1.6, that might affect the value
of the current.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
4
2
A student is investigating the oscillation of a metre rule that has one end resting on the
laboratory bench. The other end is held above the level of the bench by a spring attached
at the 90.0 cm mark. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 2.1.
clamp
spring
metre rule
bench
Fig. 2.1
The period of oscillation is changed by moving a 200 g mass to different positions along the
rule. The student records the time t taken for 10 oscillations of the end of the rule for each
position of the mass. He measures the distance d from the end of the rule to the mark
under the centre of the mass. The readings are shown in the table.
d / cm
t/s
20.0
3.4
40.0
4.4
50.0
4.9
60.0
5.3
70.0
6.0
80.0
6.3
T/s
(a) Calculate the period T for each set of readings and enter the values in the table.
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) Plot a graph of d / cm (x-axis) against T / s (y-axis). The scale on the x-axis has been
started for you.
[5]
20
40
60
For
Examiners
Use
80
(c) Using the graph, determine the period T when the distance d is 55.0 cm.
T = ............................................................ [2]
(d) The student suggests that T should be proportional to d. State with a reason whether
your results support this suggestion.
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
6
3
Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that a student uses to find the resistance of a combination of three
lamps.
power
source
Fig. 3.1
The voltmeter and the ammeter have not been drawn in.
(a) Complete Fig. 3.1 by drawing in the voltmeter and the ammeter, using conventional
symbols.
[2]
(b) The student obtains these readings.
current I = 0.54 A
potential difference V = 1.8 V
V
Calculate the resistance R using the equation R = .
R = ........................................................... [2]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) The three lamps are now connected in parallel with one another. Draw a circuit
diagram of the three lamps connected to the power supply. Include in your circuit
diagram
For
Examiners
Use
(i) an ammeter to record the total current through the lamps,

(ii) a variable resistor to vary the brightness of all three lamps,
(iii) a voltmeter to record the potential difference across the lamps.
[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class carries out an experiment using a convex lens, an illuminated object and
a screen. Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus. A sharp image is obtained on the screen.
illuminated
object
lens
screen
lamp
card
Fig. 4.1
(a)
(i) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance x from the illuminated object to
the centre of the lens.
x = ..................................................................
(ii) Use your rule to measure, on Fig. 4.1, the distance y from the centre of the lens to
the screen.
y = ..................................................................
(iii) Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus drawn to 1/5th of actual size. Calculate the actual
distance u between the object and the lens, and the actual distance v between the
lens and the screen.
u = ..................................................................
v = ..................................................................
v
(iv) Calculate the magnification m using the equation m = .
u
m = .................................................................
[5]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) The illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.2
Draw a diagram of the image as it would appear on the screen.
[1]
(c) State two precautions that the IGCSE class should take to obtain experimental readings
that are as accurate as possible.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
[Turn over
10
5
In a heating experiment, a student takes the temperature of a beaker B containing water at

room temperature. Fig. 5.1 shows the thermometer used.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
Fig. 5.1
(a) State the temperature reading shown on the thermometer.
temperature reading = ............................. [1]
(b) The student then transfers a small metal cylinder from beaker A of boiling water to the
beaker B of water at room temperature, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
string
metal
cylinder
boiling
water
water at
room
temperature
beaker A
beaker B
Fig. 5.2
The student assumes that the metal is at a temperature of 100 C when it enters the
water in beaker B.
The temperature of the water in beaker B rises to 36 C.
(i) Calculate the temperature rise of the water in beaker B.
temperature rise = ..........................................

(ii) Calculate the temperature fall of the metal cylinder.
temperature fall = ...........................................

[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) The student uses these readings and some other information to calculate the specific
heat capacity of the metal.
Why is it important to transfer the metal between the beakers as quickly as possible?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/M/J/04
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
provided.
2
3
4
5
Total

MML 5677 5/03 S67109/2
UCLES 2004
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water in a beaker. Some of the
apparatus used is shown in Fig. 1.1.
thermometer
string
beaker
hot water
Fig. 1.1
During the experiment, a student measures the temperature of the water, its volume, the
length of string wrapped round a beaker and the depth of water in the beaker.
(a) Write down the readings shown in Figs. 1.2 and 1.3. Include appropriate units.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
Fig. 1.2
temperature = ............................
cm3
100
80
60
40
20
Fig. 1.3
volume of water in the measuring cylinder = .....................................
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) The string is wrapped 5 times round the beaker and marked as shown in Fig. 1.4.
mark
string
beaker
mark
Fig. 1.4
The string is held against a metre rule as shown in Fig. 1.5.

string
cm 10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
metre rule
Fig. 1.5
(i) Write down the length of the string between the marks.
length = ................................ cm
(ii) Calculate the circumference c of the beaker.
c = ........................................ cm
(iii) Suggest one source of error in this method of determining the circumference.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iv) Suggest one improvement to this method.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
(c) A rule is placed beside the beaker, as shown in Fig. 1.6.
5
4
beaker
3
2
water
1
cm
Fig. 1.6
(i) Write down the depth d of the water in the beaker.

d = ........................................ cm
(ii) Calculate the surface area A of the curved surface of the beaker up to the water
level using the equation A = dc.
A = ..................................
[2]
(d) State the other measurements that need to be taken to determine the rate of cooling of
the water.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
5
2
A student carries out an experiment to determine the density of plasticine. She records the
mass m and the volume V of a range of differently-sized samples. These readings are
plotted on a graph as shown in Fig. 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
40
V / cm3
30
20
10
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
m/g
Fig. 2.1
(a)
(i) Determine the gradient G of the line. Show clearly how you obtain the necessary
information.
G = ...................................
1.
(ii) Determine the density of the plasticine using the equation =
G
= ....................................
[5]
(b) The student could calculate the density from one set of readings. Suggest why she
takes more than one set of readings and plots a graph.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
6
3
A student carries out an experiment using a simple pendulum. Fig. 3.1 shows the apparatus.
clamp
string
pendulum bob
Fig. 3.1
The student records the time t taken for 20 complete oscillations for a range of different
lengths x of the string. The readings are shown in the table.
x / cm
l / cm
t/s
90.0
38.5
80.0
36.0
70.0
33.4
60.0
31.4
50.0
28.2
40.0
25.5
T/s
The length l of the pendulum is given by the equation l = x + r, where r is the radius of the
pendulum bob.
Fig. 3.2 shows the pendulum bob drawn actual size.
pendulum
bob
string
bench
Fig. 3.2
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
7
(a)
(i) Use your rule to measure the diameter d of the pendulum bob.
d = ....................................
(ii) Calculate the radius r of the pendulum bob.
r = .....................................
(b)
[2]
(i) Complete the column for the length l / cm in the table using the equation l = x + r.
(ii) The period T is the time taken for one complete oscillation. Complete the column
for the period T / s in the table.
[3]
(c) Plot the graph of T / s (y-axis) against l / cm (x-axis). Start the T / s axis at T = 1.0 s.
[5]
(d) Using the graph, find the length la of the pendulum that would have a period of 1.50 s.
la = ............................ cm
UCLES 2004
[1]
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
8
4
A student is investigating the passage of light through a transparent block, as shown in

Fig. 4.1.
incident
ray
A
transparent
block
emergent
ray
eye
Fig. 4.1
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
9
The student looks through the block. He places pins so that two pins marking the incident
ray and two pins marking the emergent ray all appear to be exactly one behind the other.
For
Examiners
Use
(a) On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the four pins, two on the incident ray and two
on the emergent ray.
[1]
(b)
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal at point A.

(ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw in the line AB. Measure and record the angle of refraction r
between the line AB and the normal.
r = .....................................
(iii) Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the incident ray and the
normal.
i = .....................................
[4]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
10
5
The IGCSE class is carrying out investigations of the resistance of bare resistance wires.
Fig. 5.1 shows the circuit used.
power
source
A
l
A
B
bare
resistance
wire
Fig. 5.1
The students record the current I in the circuit and then record the p.d. V across different
lengths l of the bare resistance wire. The length of wire from A to B is 100.0 cm. The
readings obtained by one student are shown in the table.
I = 0.84 A
V/
(a)
l/
0.39
20.0
0.82
40.0
1.22
60.0
1.58
80.0
1.89
100.0
R/
(i) Calculate the resistance of each length l of wire using the equation R = V
. Write
I
the resistance values in the table.
(ii) Complete the column headings in the table.
[3]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) In a second experiment, the students use wires of the same material but with different
diameters d. The p.d. is measured across the same length of wire each time. Fig. 5.2
shows the circuit used.
For
Examiners
Use
power
source
A
B
bare
resistance
wire
Fig. 5.2
These are the readings correctly obtained by one student.
Wire 1
I = 0.1 A
Wire 2
V = 1.8 V
I = 0.4 A
V = 1.8 V
d = 0.24 mm
d = 0.48 mm
V.
(i) Calculate the resistance R of each wire, using the equation R =
wire 1, R = ..........................................
wire 2, R = ..........................................
[1]
(ii) Based on the results for the two wires, which of the following statements is a
correct conclusion? Tick one box.
A wire with half the diameter has half the resistance.
A wire with half the diameter has twice the resistance.
A wire with half the diameter has one quarter the resistance.
A wire with half the diameter has four times the resistance.
[1]
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
[Turn over
12
(iii) Using your answers to (i) and (ii), calculate the expected resistance of a wire AB
of the same material if it has a diameter of 0.12 mm.
expected resistance = ..............................................................
[1]
(c) What instrument would you use to measure the diameter of the wires as accurately as
possible?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
Copyright Acknowledgements
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been
reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly infringed.
UCLES 2004
0625/06/O/N/04
For
Examiners
Use
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2005
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2

3
4

provided.
5
Total

SPA (MML 8431 5/04) S81555/2
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is
added to it.
The students are provided with 100 cm3 of hot water and a supply of cold water at room
temperature.
(a) The thermometer in Fig. 1.1 shows the temperature of the cold water.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110
C
Fig. 1.1
Record the temperature of the cold water, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A student records the temperature of the hot water. He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold
water into the beaker containing the hot water. He records the temperature of the
mixture of hot and cold water and the volume V of cold water added. He then repeats
the process four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water. The table
shows the readings.
V/
/
80.0
20
58.0
40
48.0
60
40.5
80
34.0
100
29.0
(i) Complete the column headings in the table.
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
3
(ii) Use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume
V (x-axis).
20
40
60
80
For
Examiners
Use
100
V
/ cm3
[5]
Question 1 continues on page 4
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
4
(c) A sketch graph of the readings taken by another student carrying out a similar
experiment is shown in Fig. 1.2.
The theoretical line shows the results expected by the student after calculating the
values of . The student assumed that all the heat lost by the hot water was gained by
the cold water when the cold water was poured into the beaker.
The other line shows the experimental results.
80
/C
70
60
theoretical line
50
experimental line
40
30
0
20
40
60
80
100
V / cm3
Fig. 1.2
The student carried out the experiment with care. Suggest a practical reason why the
experimental line differs from the theoretical line.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
For
Examiners
Use
5
2
(a) The table below shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The
second column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity,
underline the value most likely to be correct. The first one is done for you.
quantity measured
recorded values
thickness of a metre rule
0.25 mm
For
Examiners
Use
2.5 mm
25 mm
volume of a test-tube
12 mm3
12 cm3
12 m3
0.5 A
current in a 12 V ray box

lamp at less than normal
brightness
5.0 A
50 A
the surface area of the

base of a 250 cm3 beaker
0.3 cm2
3 cm2
30 cm2
the mass of a wooden

metre rule
0.112 kg
1.12 kg
11.2 kg
the weight of an IGCSE

student
6N
60 N
600 N
[5]
(b) A student is to find a value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. Potential

difference V and current I can be recorded. The resistance is then calculated using the
equation
V
R = .
State, with a reason, one example of good experimental practice that the student could
use to obtain a reliable result.
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ........................................................................................................................ [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
6
3
For
Examiners
Use
A student investigates the resistance of wire in different circuit arrangements.

The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 is used.
power
source
A
A
B
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
D
80
90
crocodile
clip
metre rule
Fig. 3.1
The student measures the current I in the wire. She then measures the p.d. V across AB,
AC and AD.
The students readings are shown in the table below.
I/A
V/V
AB
0.375
0.95
AC
0.375
1.50
AD
0.375
1.95
section of wire
l / cm
(a) Using Fig. 3.1, record in the table the length l of each section of wire.
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
R/
[1]
7
(b) On Fig. 3.2, show the positions of the pointers of the ammeter reading 0.375 A, and
the voltmeter reading 1.50 V.
0.2
0.3
A
0.1
For
Examiners
Use
0.4
0.5
2
1
3
V
Fig. 3.2
[2]
(c) Calculate the resistance R of the sections of wire AB, AC and AD using the equation
V
R = .
Record these values of R, to a suitable number of significant figures, in the table.

(d) Complete the column heading for the R column of the table.
[2]
[1]
(e) Use your results to predict the resistance of a 1.50 m length of the same wire. Show
your working.
resistance = ...................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
8
4
For
Examiners
Use
A student investigates the period of oscillation of a mass attached between two springs.
The apparatus used is shown in Fig. 4.1.
clamp
spring
mass
spring
clamp
Fig. 4.1
A 400 g mass m is attached between two springs, displaced a small distance downwards,
and then released so that it oscillates. The time t taken for 10 complete oscillations of the
mass is recorded. The experiment is repeated using values for m of 300 g and 200 g. The
readings are shown in the table below.
m/g
t/s
400
9.0
300
7.8
200
6.3
T/s
(a) Calculate the period T of the oscillations. T is the time for one complete oscillation.
Enter the values in the table.
[2]
T
(b) Calculate and enter in the table the values of .
m
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[2]
9
(c) The student suggests that T should be directly proportional to m. State with a reason
whether the results in the table support this suggestion.
For
Examiners
Use
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) In this experiment, the mass oscillates rapidly so that it is difficult to take the times
accurately. A technique has been included in this experiment to obtain an accurate
value for the period T. State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved
to obtain the T value.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) Another student carried out the same experiment using a wider range of masses.
Suggest why, when the mass was 900 g, it could not oscillate freely.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
[Turn over
10
5
For
Examiners
Use
A student investigates the refraction of light through a transparent block.

He places the transparent block on a sheet of plain paper, largest face down, and draws a
line round the block. He draws a line to represent an incident ray and places two pins W
and X in the line. Fig. 5.1 shows the outline of the block and the incident ray.
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw a normal to line AB at the point where the incident ray meets the
block. The incident ray is drawn on the diagram. The positions of the two pins W and X
that mark the incident ray are shown.
[1]
(b) Measure the angle of incidence i.
i = ........................................................
[1]
(c) Draw in the refracted ray with an angle of refraction of 20. Continue this line until it
meets the line CD.
[2]
(d) The ray emerges from the block in a direction that is parallel to the incident ray. Draw in
this emergent ray.
[2]
(e) Two pins Y and Z are placed so that the pins W and X, viewed through the block, and
the pins Y and Z all appear exactly in line with each other. Mark on the diagram, with
the letters Y and Z, where you would place these two pins.
[2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/M/J/05
11
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/05
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all work you hand in.
For Examiners Use

1
2

3
4

provided.
5
Total

(SP) MML 8431 5/04 S82205/3
UCLES 2005
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
The IGCSE class is investigating the effect of a load on a rule attached to a spring.
clamp
metre rule
spring
zero end of rule taped to bench

mass

bench
Fig. 1.1
The rule has the zero end taped to the bench so that it does not slip. The rule is attached to
a spring at the 40.0 cm mark. The students hang masses, starting with a 10 g mass, on the
rule at the 90.0 cm mark. For each mass, they measure the angle between the rule and
the bench.
One students readings are shown in the table.
m/
/
29
10
28
20
26
30
25
40
22
50
19
(a) Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(b) A student suggests that should be directly proportional to m. State, with a reason,
whether the readings in the table support this suggestion.
statement .........................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
(c) A student carries out this experiment using the 360 protractor shown in Fig. 1.2.
50
60
80
70
90 100 1
10
12
0
13
0
40
0
14
10
20
30
70
60 1
0 1
15
40
02
23
0
32
350 0
40
03
33
180 190 20
0
2
10
22
0
260 270 280 290

250
300
31
0
Fig. 1.2
Explain how the student could use this protractor to measure the angle between the
metre rule and the bench. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) The range of angles measured in this experiment may be quite small. Using the same
apparatus and with the masses and spring in the same positions, suggest another
method of investigating as reliably as possible the extent by which the rule is pulled
down by the masses. This method must not use a protractor but an additional rule may
be used. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
4
2
An IGCSE student investigates the resistance of resistance wire ABCD in three different
circuit arrangements.
The circuits are shown in Fig. 2.1.
power
source
A
circuit (i)
C
V
power
source
A
circuit (ii)
C
V
power
source
circuit (iii)
Fig. 2.1
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
5
(a) Circuit (iii) is the same as circuit (ii) but with an additional connecting lead between A
and D.
For
Examiners
Use
On Fig. 2.1, complete the circuit diagram for circuit (iii) using the standard symbol for a
resistor to represent each section AB, BC and CD of the resistance wire.
[3]
(b) The student measures and records the current I and the p.d. V in each circuit. The
students readings are shown in the table.
circuit
I/
V/
(i)
0.91
1.80
(ii)
0.45
1.80
(iii)
1.37
1.85
R/
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance R for each circuit using the equation
V
R = .
Record in the table the values of R to an appropriate number of significant figures.

[2]
(c) Look at the resistance values for circuits (i) and (ii). The sections of resistance wire
AB, BC and CD are all of the same length. Suggest a value for the resistance of the
whole wire ABCD. Explain briefly how you obtained your value.
value ................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class carries out an experiment to investigate the effect of insulation on the rate
of cooling of hot water.
thermometer
thermometer
insulation
water
water
beaker A
bench
beaker B
Fig. 3.1
The students each have two glass beakers A and B. Beaker B is insulated. They also have
a supply of hot water.
A student pours hot water into beaker A until it is approximately two thirds full and then
measures the temperature of the hot water. He records this temperature in the table at
time t = 0 s. He then starts a stopwatch and records the temperature of the water at 30 s
intervals for a total of four minutes.
He repeats the experiment using beaker B. All the readings are shown in the tables below.
beaker A
/
t/
UCLES 2005
beaker B
/
t/
80
80
30
67
30
69
60
59
60
62
90
54
90
57
120
51
120
53
150
48
150
50
180
47
180
48
210
46
210
47
240
45
240
46
0625/06/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
7
(a) Complete the column headings in the tables.
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
(b) Use the readings for beaker A to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against
time t (x-axis). Start the temperature scale at 40 C. Draw the best-fit curve.
[4]
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220
240 260
280
t/s
(c) Use the readings for beaker B to plot another curve on the same graph axes that you
used in part (b).
[2]
(d) The experiment you have just done was designed to investigate the effect of insulation
on the rate of cooling. Suggest two improvements that could be made to the design of
the experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
8
4
For
Examiners
Use
An IGCSE student is investigating the reflection of light by a plane mirror.

M
M'
B
card
Fig. 4.1
On Fig. 4.1, the line MM' shows the position of the mirror that is standing on a sheet of
paper. The reflecting surface of the mirror is vertical. AB is a card that is standing vertically
and is parallel to the reflecting surface of the mirror.
(a) Draw a normal to the mirror such that the edge B of the card lies on the normal.
[1]
(b) Measure the distance x along the normal between the line MM' and the edge B of the
card.
x = ......................................................... [1]
(c) Draw a line from the edge A of the card to the point where the normal meets the line
MM'. This represents an incident ray from the edge of the card.
[1]
(d) Measure the angle i between the incident ray and the normal.
i = .......................................................... [1]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
x
(e) Calculate the ratio where y = 5.0 cm, the length of the card.
y
x
= ...................................................
y
(f)
[2]
The angle of reflection is to be determined as accurately as possible. On Fig. 4.1, mark

with the letters X, Y and Z the points where the student would place three pins in order
to plot the reflected ray.
[4]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
[Turn over
10
5
(a) The IGCSE class carries out an experiment to investigate the rate of cooling from
100 C of a range of hot liquids. Underline any of the following variables that are likely
to have a significant effect on the temperature readings. (You may underline one, two
or all three of the suggested variables.)
type and size of container
volume of liquid
temperature of the surroundings
[2]
(b) In an experiment to find the resistance of a wire, the students record the current in the
wire and the potential difference across it. They then calculate the resistance.
Underline any of the following variables that are likely to have a significant effect on the
current and/or potential difference readings. (You may underline one, two or all three of
the suggested variables.)
temperature of the wire
length of wire
[2]
(c) In an experiment, a short pendulum oscillates rapidly. A student is asked to find the
period of oscillation T of the pendulum using a stopwatch. The student sets the
pendulum swinging and records the time for one oscillation. A technique for improving
the accuracy of the value obtained for the period T should be used in this experiment.
State, briefly, what this technique is and any calculation involved to obtain the value
of T.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
For
Examiners
Use
11
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/05
12
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2005
0625/06/O/N/05
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2006
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total
MML 10813 4/05 T06423/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
For
Examiners
Use
The IGCSE class is determining the density of a sample of card.

Each student has a stack of ten pieces of card, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
w
Fig. 1.1
(a)
(i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the height h of the stack of card.

h = ................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the average thickness t of one piece of card.
t = .................................................... [2]
(b)
(i) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l and width w of the top piece of card.
l = ..........................................................
w = ................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the volume V of one piece of card using the equation
V = ltw .
V = ................................................... [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
(c) Calculate the density d of the card using the equation

m
d =
V
where the mass m of one piece of card is 1.3 g.
d = ................................................... [2]
(d) A sample of corrugated card of the same length and width as the card in Fig. 1.1
consists of two thin sheets of card with an air gap in between. The sheets of card are
separated by paper, as shown in the cross-section in Fig. 1.2. The thickness y of the air
gap as shown in Fig. 1.2 is between 2 mm and 3 mm.
card
paper
card
Fig. 1.2
Estimate the volume Va of air trapped within the corrugated card shown in Fig. 1.2.
Va = ................................................. [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of lamps in different circuit arrangements.
Fig. 2.1 shows a picture of the circuit.
power
source
variable
resistor
lamp
0-2 V voltmeter
0-1 A ammeter
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 2.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) The current I through the lamp and the voltage V across the lamp are measured. Then
a second lamp is connected in parallel with the first. The total current I in the circuit
and the voltage V across the lamps are measured. The table below shows the
readings.
I/
V/
0.24
1.39
0.45
1.30
For
Examiners
Use
R/
(i) Complete the column headings for each of the I, V and R columns of the table. [1]
(ii) Calculate the resistance R in each case using the equation
V
R = .
Enter the results in the table.
UCLES 2006
[2]
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is determining the refractive index of the material of a transparent block.
Fig. 3.1. shows the drawing that a student makes.
E
P1
P2
G
P3
P4
sheet of
plain paper
eye
Fig. 3.1
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
7
The student places two pins P1 and P2 on line EF to mark an incident ray. Then she places
the block on the paper and observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block
so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one behind the other. She places two pins P3 and
P4 between her eye and the block so that P3 and P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen
through the block, appear one behind the other.
(a)
For
Examiners
Use
(i) Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD.
Label this point H.
(ii) Measure the distance a between G and H.
a = ................................................... [1]
(iii) Draw the line HF.
(iv) Measure the length b of the line HF.
b = ................................................... [1]
(v) Extend the straight line EF within the outline of the block to a point I. The
distance FI must be exactly equal to b.
(vi) From I draw a line that meets NN at a right angle. Label this position J.
(vii) Measure the length c of the line JI.
c = .................................................... [3]
(viii) Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
c
n = .
a
n = ................................................... [2]
(b) Suggest two improvements you would make to this experiment to ensure an accurate
result for the refractive index n.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
8
4
An IGCSE student is investigating the temperature rise of water in beakers heated by

different methods. The apparatus is shown in Fig. 4.1. Beaker A is heated electrically and
beaker B is heated with a Bunsen burner.
fixed voltage
power source
A
V
beaker A
beaker B
Bunsen burner
Fig. 4.1
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
The student first records room temperature.

(a) Fig. 4.2 shows the thermometer at room temperature.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110
Fig. 4.2
(i) Write down the value of room temperature.
room temperature = ......................... [1]
(ii) The two beakers are heated from room temperature for the same length of time.
The new water temperature for beaker A is 30 C and for beaker B is 28 C.
Calculate the temperature rise of the water in each beaker.
temperature rise in beaker A = ...............................
temperature rise in beaker B = ......................... [1]
(b) The electrical heater and the Bunsen burner both have the same power and both
beakers were heated from room temperature for the same length of time. Suggest why
there is a difference in temperature rise between beaker A and beaker B.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) In order to keep the heating effect of the electrical heater constant throughout the
heating period, the student adjusts the current. Name the component in the circuit that
the student uses for this purpose.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
10
5
For
Examiners
Use
The IGCSE class is determining the weight of a metre rule.

newton
meter
metre
rule
pivot
bench
Fig. 5.1
A metre rule is supported at one end by a pivot through the 1.0 cm mark. The other end is
supported at the 91.0 cm mark by a newton meter hanging from a clamp.
(a) Describe how you would check that the metre rule is horizontal. You may draw a
diagram if you wish.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
11
(b) The students record the force F shown on the newton meter and the distance d from
the pivot to the 91 cm mark. They then repeat the experiment several times using a
range of values of the distance d. The readings are shown in the table.
F/N
d/m
0.74
0.900
0.78
0.850
0.81
0.800
0.86
0.750
0.92
0.700
1
Calculate and record in the table the values of .
d
(c)
For
Examiners
Use
1
(i) On the graph grid below, plot a graph of F / N (y-axis) against
d
Start the y-axis at 0.7 and the x-axis at 1.0.
(ii) Draw the line of best fit on your graph.
[1]
1
(x-axis).
m
[2]
[2]
Question 5 continues on the next page.
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
[Turn over
12
For
Examiners
Use
(iii) Determine the gradient G of the line.
G = ................................................... [3]
(d) Calculate the weight of the metre rule using the equation
G
W =
k
where k = 0.490 m.
W = .................................................. [2]
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
UCLES 2006
0625/06/M/J/06
Centre Number
Candidate Number
Name

0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total
MML 10815 4/05 T06425/2
UCLES 2006
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is determining the density of a type of wood.

The students are provided with a bundle of wooden rods, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the length l of a rod.
l = ............................................... cm [1]
(b) A student winds five turns of string round the bundle and marks the beginning and the
end of the five turns. She then uses the metre rule to measure the distance x between
the marks. She records that x = 24.5 cm.
(i) Determine the circumference c of the bundle of rods.
c = ..........................................................
(ii) Calculate the volume V of the bundle of rods using the equation
2
V = cl .
4
V = ................................................... [4]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
3
(c) The equation used in (b)(ii) assumes that the bundle is a solid cylinder. However, there
are air gaps between the rods.
For
Examiners
Use
(i) Estimate the total volume Vr of the rods themselves.
Vr = ........................................................
(ii) Calculate the density d of the wood using the equation
m
d =
Vr
where the mass m of the bundle = 6.3 g.
d = ................................................... [3]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule.

The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 2.1.
pivot
metre
rule
d
load
one complete swing
Fig. 2.1
The load is attached to the metre rule so that its centre is 90.0 cm from the pivot. The rule is
displaced a small distance to one side and allowed to swing. The time t taken for
10 complete swings is recorded. This is repeated using different values of the distance d.
The readings are shown in the table.
UCLES 2006
d/
t/
90.0
18.35
85.0
17.87
80.0
17.53
75.0
17.06
70.0
16.72
0625/06/O/N/06
T/
For
Examiners
Use
5
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
(b) Calculate the period T for each value of d. The period is the time taken for one
complete swing. Enter the values in the table.
[2]
(c) On the grid below, plot a graph of T / s (y-axis) against d / cm (x-axis). Start the x-axis
at d = 70.0 cm and the y-axis at a suitable value of T / s to make best use of the graph
grid.
[5]
(d) A student suggests that T is proportional to d. State whether or not the results support
this suggestion and give a reason for your answer.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason ..............................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for
one swing (the period), rather than just measuring the time for one swing.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating reflection in a plane mirror. Fig. 3.1 shows a ray diagram
that a student is constructing.
paper
G
E
F
mirror
eye
Fig. 3.1
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
7
(a)
For
Examiners
Use
(i) Draw a normal GH to line EF.

(ii) Mark a point A on line GJ so that the distance AG is 11.5 cm.
(iii) Measure the angle of incidence i between line GJ and the normal.
i = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The student pushes two pins into the paper on line GJ, one at point A, and the other at
a point B nearer to the mirror. He views the images of the pins from the direction
indicated in Fig. 3.1. He then pushes in two pins on line GK between his eye and the
mirror so that these two pins and the images of the pins on line GJ appear exactly one
behind the other.
(i) On Fig. 3.1, mark suitable positions for the pins on lines GJ and GK. Label the
marks with letters B, C and D.
(ii) To obtain an accurate result for this experiment, would you view the tops, bases or
central parts of the pins when lining them up? Give a reason for your answer.
I would view ..............................................................................................................
reason ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating conditions affecting the rate of cooling of a beaker of hot
water.
(a) The students start by measuring room temperature. Record the value of room
temperature as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 4.1.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110
Fig. 4.1
temperature = .................................. [2]
(b) The students are provided with hot water in beakers as shown in Fig. 4.2. Beaker A is
insulated and beaker B has a lid.
thermometer
thermometer
lid
insulation
water
Beaker A
water
Beaker B
Fig. 4.2
The students measure and record the temperature of the water in each beaker every
30 s for a total of five minutes. One students readings are shown in the tables.
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
9
beaker A
time / s
For
Examiners
Use
beaker B
/ C
time / s
/ C
83.0
82.0
30
82.0
30
82.0
60
81.0
60
81.0
90
79.5
90
80.0
120
79.0
120
79.0
150
77.0
150
78.0
180
75.0
180
76.0
210
74.0
210
75.0
240
72.0
240
74.0
270
71.0
270
73.0
300
70.0
300
72.0
(i) Look at the temperature readings in the tables. State whether the insulation round
beaker A or the lid on beaker B or neither is most effective in keeping the water
hot. By reference to readings in the tables, justify your answer.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable material for the insulation around beaker A.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) To obtain reliable results in this experiment, it is important that variables are
controlled. State three variables that should be controlled in this experiment.
variable 1 ..................................................................................................................
variable 2 ..................................................................................................................
variable 3 ............................................................................................................ [3]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
[Turn over
10
5
A student is investigating the relationship between potential difference V across a resistor

and the current I in it. Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus that the student is using.
switch
power
source
variable
resistor
lamp
resistor
ammeter
voltmeter
Fig. 5.1
(a) Draw the circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 5.1. Use standard circuit symbols.
[3]
(b) The student is using a lamp to show when the current is switched on.
Why is it unnecessary to use the lamp?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) State which piece of apparatus in the circuit is used to control the size of the current.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student removes the lamp from the circuit. He is told that the resistance of a
conductor is constant if the temperature of the conductor is constant. He knows that
the current in the resistor has a heating effect. Suggest two ways in which the student
could minimise the heating effect of the current in the resistor.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(e) Fig. 5.2 shows a variable resistor with the sliding contact in two different positions.
sliding contact in position A
metal bar
coil of resistance wire

sliding contact in position B
metal bar
coil of resistance wire
Fig. 5.2
State which position, A or B, shows the higher resistance setting. Explain your answer.
statement ............................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2006
0625/06/O/N/06
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/06

*4019966178*
0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2007
1 hour

DO NOT WRITE ON ANY BARCODES.
For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

MML 13215 4/06 T25816/4
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the temperature changes that occur when hot and cold
water are mixed.
(a) A student pours 50 cm3 of water into a beaker. He then measures the temperature 1
of the water in the beaker. Write down the value of 1 shown on the thermometer in
Fig. 1.1.
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
10
Fig. 1.1
1 = ................................................. [2]
(b) The student then measures the temperature 2 of some hot water. He pours 50 cm3
of this hot water into the beaker of water at room temperature. He then records the
temperature 3 of the water in the beaker. His readings are
2 = 76 C,
3 = 42 C.
Calculate
(i)
the temperature rise of the cold water, ......................................
(ii)
the temperature fall of the hot water. .........................................

[2]
(c) A theoretical calculation based on the equation

thermal energy lost by hot water = thermal energy gained by cold water
predicts a higher value for the temperature 3 than the value that is obtained by this
experiment. Suggest
(i)
a practical explanation for the difference in values,

..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
two practical improvements that you could make to the procedure for this experiment
to obtain a result that is closer to the theoretical result.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
3
2
A student is investigating the position of a sheet of card that is hanging from a pivot.
Fig. 2.1 shows the apparatus drawn full size.
stand
metre rule
pivot
pointer
card
h0
1 2 3 4 5 6
mass
Fig. 2.1
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
4
(a) On Fig. 2.1 measure the distance d between the centre of the hole labelled 1 and the
edge of the card at A. Record this value in the table.
hole
d / mm
h / mm
140
135
132
128
124
120
b / mm
[3]
(b) Repeat step (a) for each of the remaining holes 2 6.
(c) On Fig. 2.1 measure the height h0 of the pointer above the bench.
h0 = .....................................................
[1]
(d) A student hangs a 10 g mass from the hole 1 in the card. She records the height h of
the end of the pointer above the bench. She then repeats this procedure by hanging the
mass from each hole in turn. Her results are shown in the table above.
(e) Calculate the differences in heights b using the equation
b = (h h0)
and record the results in the table above.
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
For
Examiners
Use
5
(f)
Plot the graph of b / mm (y-axis) against d / mm (x-axis).

45
b / mm
40
35
30
25
20
[4]
(g) The student suggests that b is directly proportional to d. By reference to your graph,
state whether or not the results support the students suggestion. Give a reason for your
answer.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Reason ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(h) It is important when recording the heights that the rule is vertical. State briefly how you
would check that the rule is vertical.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of a wire. The circuit is as shown in Fig. 3.1.
power
source
D
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student uses the switches to connect the wire AB into the circuit and records the p.d.
V across the wire between A and B. He also records the current I in the wire.
The student then repeats the measurements using the wire CD in place of wire AB.
The readings are shown in the table below.
wire
V/
I/
AB
1.9
0.24
CD
1.9
0.96
R/
[3]
(i)
Calculate the resistance R of each wire, using the equation

R = V / I.
Record the values in the table.
(ii)
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) The two wires AB and CD are made of the same material and are of the same length.
The diameter of wire CD is twice the diameter of wire AB.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
Look at the results in the table. Below are four possible relationships between R
and the diameter d of the wire. Tick the relationship that best matches the results.
R is proportional to d
R is proportional to
1
d
R is proportional to d 2
R is proportional to
(ii)
1
d2
Explain briefly how the results support your answer in part (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) Following this experiment, the student wishes to investigate whether two lamps in parallel
with each other have a smaller combined resistance than the two lamps in series. Draw
one circuit diagram showing
(i)
two lamps in parallel with each other connected to a power source,
(ii)
an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,
(iii)
a voltmeter to measure the potential difference across the two lamps.
[3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating the formation of images by a lens.

Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus that is being used.
illuminated
object
screen
lens
x
d
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places the screen at a distance d = 0.800 m from the illuminated object. She
adjusts the position of the lens until a clearly focused magnified image is formed on the
screen. She measures the distance x between the centre of the lens and the screen.
Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, she moves the lens towards the
screen until a second clearly focused (but diminished) image is formed on the screen.
She measures the distance y between the centre of the lens and the screen. She repeats
the experiment with the distance d increased to 0.900 m. The readings are shown in the
table.
(i)
x/m
y/m
d/m
0.205
0.600
0.800
0.180
0.720
0.900
For each set of readings calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation
f=
xy
.
d
Enter the values in the table.
UCLES 2007
f/m
0625/06/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
9
(ii)
Calculate the average value of the focal length f.
average value of the focal length f = ................................................ [4]

(b) Suggest two precautions that can be taken in this experiment in order to obtain an
accurate result.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The illuminated object is triangular in shape, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
Fig. 4.2
In the space below, sketch the appearance of one of the images on the screen.
[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
[Turn over
10
5
(a) An IGCSE student is investigating the relationship between the extension of a spring
of unstretched length l 0 and the load hung on the spring. The apparatus is shown in
Fig. 5.1 below. The spring is shown larger than its actual size.
clamp
l0
set of ten
0.1 N weights
Fig. 5.1
Consider the readings that the student should take and write appropriate column
headings, with units, in the table below.
l 0 = 25 mm
0.0
25
0.1
30
0.2
36
11
0.3
43
18
0.4
50
25
[4]
(b) The student decides to repeat the experiment using a spring made of a different metal
in order to study how the extension may be affected by the metal from which the spring
is made. To make a fair comparison, other variables must be kept constant. Suggest
three variables that the student should keep constant.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ................................................................................................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/M/J/07
For
Examiners
Use
11
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/07
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/07

*6786650342*
0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

SPA (MML 13215 4/06) T25854/5
UCLES 2007
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of hot water.

(a) A student measures room temperature. Write down the value of room temperature 0
shown on the thermometer in Fig. 1.1.
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
10
Fig. 1.1
0 = ................................................. [1]
(b) He then pours hot water into a beaker until it is about two-thirds full. He measures and
records the temperature of the hot water and at the same time starts a stopwatch.
As the water cools, he records the temperature every 30 s for a total of five minutes. His
readings are shown in the table below.
t/
0
68.0
30
53.0
60
45.0
90
40.0
120
36.5
150
33.5
180
32.0
210
30.0
240
29.0
270
28.5
300
28.0
(i)
(ii)
Calculate the temperature fall T1 in the first minute of the experiment.

T1 = ....................................................
(iii)
Calculate the temperature fall T2 in the final minute of the experiment.

T2 = ....................................................
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[3]
3
(c) Theory suggests that the rate of cooling of the hot water at any time depends on the
difference between the temperature of the water at that time and room temperature.
(i)
For
Examiners
Use
State and explain whether your answers in (b) support this theory.
Statement .................................................................................................................
Explanation ..............................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii)
Suggest three variables that you would attempt to keep constant if this theory were
to be investigated further.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................... [3]
(d) Suggest one addition you could make to the apparatus provided in order to reduce the
rate of evaporation of the water in the beaker.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating a simple balance.

The diagram below shows the apparatus.
metre rule
stand
pivot
pointer
hook
150 mm
140 mm
130 mm
paper
clip
120 mm
110 mm
100 mm
card
90 mm
80 mm
70 mm
60 mm
50 mm
40 mm
30 mm
20 mm
10 mm
0 mm
Fig. 2.1
(a) A student records the height h0 of the pointer above the bench. She then hangs a paper
clip on the hook and records the new height h of the pointer above the bench. Next she
records the heights of the pointer above the bench using different numbers N of paper
clips. The readings are shown in the table below.
h0 = 100 mm
UCLES 2007
h / mm
108
114
120
125
134
141
0625/06/O/N/07
d / mm
For
Examiners
Use
5
Calculate the height differences d using the equation
d = (h h0)
and enter them in the table.
(b) (i)
(ii)
[2]
Plot the graph of d / mm (y-axis) against N (x-axis).
Use your graph to predict the value of d if a nail with the same mass as 4.6 paper
clips were to be hung from the hook in place of the paper clips. Show clearly on the
graph how you obtained your value.
d = ................................................. [6]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential difference across lamps and the currents in
the lamps.
Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit that is being used.
power
source
A
lamp 1
lamp 2
lamp 3
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student uses the ammeter to record the current I in the wire connecting the power
source to the rest of the circuit. He then moves the ammeter to new positions in the
circuit and measures the current in each lamp in turn. The positions of the pointer on the
ammeter scale are shown below.
(i)
(ii)
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.1
0.4
0.4
A
A
0
0.5
current I = ..............................................
(iii)
0.5
current I1 in lamp 1 = .............................

(iv)
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.1
0
0.3
0.1
0.4
0.4
A
A
0
0.5
current I2 in lamp 2 = .............................
0.5
current I3 in lamp 3 = .............................
Write down the ammeter readings I, I1, I2 and I3.

UCLES 2007
0.3
0625/06/O/N/07
[3]
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) Theory suggests that I = I1 + I2 + I3. State whether or not your readings support this
theory. Give a reason for your answer.
For
Examiners
Use
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Reason ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) To test the theory further, you would need to vary the value of I. State how you would
vary I.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) The student uses a voltmeter to measure the potential difference V across the lamps.
His reading is V = 1.6 V.
(i)
Calculate the resistance R of the lamps arranged in parallel, using the equation
R = V / I,
where I is the value of the current in (a)(i).
R = .....................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 3.1, add the symbol for the voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the lamps.
[3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating the refraction of light through a transparent block.
Fig. 4.1 shows the apparatus used.
eye
transparent
block
optics pin
sheet of
paper
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student looks down through the transparent block at the image of a line drawn on the
sheet of paper. She carefully places the point of the optics pin exactly in line with the
image.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin.
x = .....................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the height h of the transparent block.

h = .....................................................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
h
n = .
h x
n = ................................................ [5]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) To obtain a reliable value for the vertical distance x between the paper and the pin, it is
important that the pin is horizontal. Explain briefly with the aid of a diagram how you
would check that the pin is horizontal.
For
Examiners
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
[Turn over
10
5
(a) An IGCSE student is investigating the differences in density of small pieces of different
rocks. She is using an electronic balance to measure the mass of each sample and
using the displacement method to determine the volume of each sample. Fig. 5.1 shows
the displacement method.
cm3
cm3
100
100
80
80
60
60
40
40
20
20
V1
rock sample
V2
Fig. 5.1
(i)
Write down the volume shown in each measuring cylinder.

V1 = .....................................................
V2 = .....................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume V of the rock sample.
V = .....................................................
(iii)
Calculate the density of sample A using the equation

density =
m
V
where the mass m of the sample of rock is 109 g.
density = .....................................................
[4]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) The table shows the readings that the student obtains for samples of rocks B and C.
Complete the table by
(i)
inserting the appropriate column headings with units,
(ii)
calculating the densities using the equation density =
sample
m/g
193
84
50
34
130
93
50
43
m
V
V/
density /
[4]
(c) Explain briefly how you would determine the density of sand grains.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2007
0625/06/O/N/07
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/07

*4130189347*
0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2008
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

SP (SLM/CGW) T40877/4
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is determining the density of a solid metal cylinder using a balancing
method. Fig. 1.1. shows the apparatus.
metre
rule
bench
cylinder
pivot
Fig. 1.1
He places the cylinder on the metre rule so that its centre is directly above the 10.0 cm mark.
The rule is placed on the pivot so that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced.
He measures and records the distance a from the centre of the rule to the pivot and the
distance b from the centre of the cylinder to the pivot. He repeats the experiment with the
same cylinder at different positions on the rule.
The readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
a/
(a) (i)
(ii)
b/
12.6
27.4
11.0
24.0
9.5
20.5
M/
Complete the column headings in Table 1.1.

For each set of readings, calculate the mass M of the cylinder using the equation
M=
ka
.
b
The value of k is the mass of the rule which is 108 g.
Enter the results in Table 1.1.

[3]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) The cylinder completely covers the marks on the metre rule. Describe, with the aid of
a diagram, how you would judge that the centre of the cylinder is directly above the
10.0 cm mark.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Use your answers in Table 1.1 to calculate and record the average of the three values
for M. Show your working.
average value for M = .................................................. [2]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
(d) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder placed flat on the bench and viewed from one side.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.2
(i)
On the diagram, measure the diameter d and the thickness t of the cylinder.
d = ......................................................
t = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume V of the cylinder using the equation

2
V = d t .
4
V = ......................................................
(iii)
Calculate the density of the cylinder using the equation
= M.
V
= .................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
5
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
6
2
The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of resistors in different circuit
arrangements. The first circuit is shown in Fig. 2.1.
power
source
V
A
Circuit 1
Fig. 2.1
(a) The current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the three resistors are measured and
recorded. Three more circuit arrangements are used. For each arrangement, a student
disconnects the resistors and then reconnects them between points A and B as shown
in Figs. 2.22.4.
A
B
Circuit 2
Fig. 2.2
A
Circuit 3
Circuit 4
Fig. 2.3
Fig. 2.4
The voltage and current readings are shown in the Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Circuit
(i)
I/
V/
R/
1.87
1.68
1.84
0.84
1.87
0.37
1.91
0.20
Complete the column headings for each of the V, I and R columns of Table 2.1.
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
7
(ii)
For each circuit, calculate the combined resistance R of the three resistors using
the equation
R = V.
I
Record these values of R in Table 2.1.
[3]
(b) Theory suggests that, if all three resistors have the same resistance under all conditions,
the combined resistance in circuit 1 will be one half of the combined resistance in
circuit 2.
(i)
State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, your results support this
theory. Justify your answer by reference to the results.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Suggest one precaution you could take to ensure that the readings are as accurate
as possible.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
8
3
A student is investigating the effect of surface area exposed to the air on the rate of cooling
of hot water.
thermometer
thermometer
100 cm3
beaker
water
100 cm3
measuring
cylinder
water
A
B
Fig. 3.1
The student is provided with two containers. The beaker is labelled A and the measuring
cylinder is labelled B. Each container contains 100 cm3 of hot water. He records the
temperature of the water at 30 s intervals for a total of four minutes. Table 3.1 shows the
readings of time t and temperature .
Table 3.1
container A
(beaker)
container B
(measuring cylinder)
/ C
/ C
85
85
30
76
79
60
68
74
90
63
69
120
59
66
150
56
63
180
54
61
210
52
59
240
51
58
t /s
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
9
(a) (i)
Use the data in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of / C (y-axis) against t /s (x-axis) for the
beaker. Draw the best-fit curve.
(ii)
Use the data for the measuring cylinder to plot another curve on the same graph
axes that you used for part (a)(i).
20
40
60
80
100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

t /s
[6]
(b) The experiment is designed to investigate the effect of the surface area exposed to the
air on the rate of cooling. State briefly the effect of a larger surface area on the rate of
cooling. Justify your answer by reference to your graph.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
4
A student is determining a quantity called the refractive index of the material of a transparent
block.
Fig. 4.1 shows the ray-tracing sheet that the student is producing. ABCD is the outline of the
transparent block, drawn on the ray-tracing sheet.
C
P3
P4
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
Draw the normal NN' to side AB, extended to cross side DC, so that the normal is
2.0 cm from A. Label the point F where NN' crosses AB. Label the point G where
NN' crosses DC.
(ii)
Draw the line EF at an angle of 30 to the normal and to the left of the normal NN'.
E is a point outside the block and above AB on the ray-tracing sheet.
[3]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) Read the following passage, taken from the students notebook and then answer the
questions that follow.
I placed two pins P1 and P2 on line EF.

I observed the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that
the images of P1 and P2 appeared one behind the other. I placed two
more pins P3 and P4 between my eye and the block so that P3, P4 and the
images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appeared one behind the
other. I marked the positions of P1, P2, P3 and P4.
(i)
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD.
Label this point H.
(ii)
Measure and record the length a of the line GH.

a = ......................................................
(iii)
Draw the line HF.
(iv)
Measure and record the length b of the line HF.

b = .................................................. [3]
(c) Extend the straight line EF through the outline of the block to a point J. The point J must
be at least 5 cm from the block. The line EJ crosses the line CD. Label this point K.
(i)
Measure and record the length c of the line GK.

c = ......................................................
(ii)
Measure and record the length d of the line FK.

d = ......................................................
(iii)
Calculate the refractive index n of the material of the block using the equation
n=
cb
.
ad
n = .................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
12
5
An IGCSE student has carried out a timing experiment using a simple pendulum. She plotted
a graph of T 2/s2 against l /m. T is the time for one swing of the pendulum and l is the length
of the pendulum. The graph is shown below.
5
3
T 2 / s2
2
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.1
l /m
(a) (i)
Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained
G = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the acceleration g of free fall using the equation

2
g = 4 .
G
g = ...............................................m/s2
(iii)
The student could have calculated the acceleration of free fall g from just one set of
readings. State the purpose of taking sufficient readings to plot a graph.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [5]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
13
(b) The student next studies the relationship between the mass m of the pendulum and the
time for one swing T. The readings are shown in Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
(i)
m /g
T /s
50
1.58
100
1.60
150
1.61
200
1.57
250
1.59
Suggest two variables that must be kept constant to make the experiment a fair
test.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
(ii)
Study the readings in the table and complete the following sentence.
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the readings show that the mass m of
the pendulum ....................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/M/J/08
For
Examiners
Use
14
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/08

*2092097264*
0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

SP (SLM/CGW) T73783/6 R
UCLES 2008
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is determining the density of the metal from which a load is made.
0
metre rule
spring
S0
beaker
water
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student records the scale reading S0 on the metre rule at the bottom of the spring,
as shown in Fig. 1.1.
S0 = 37.4 cm
Describe briefly how the student can avoid a parallax error when taking the scale
reading.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) He then hangs the load on the spring as shown in Fig. 1. 2. He records the new scale
reading S1.
metre rule
spring
S1
load
bench
Fig. 1.2
S1 = 40.5 cm
(i)
Calculate the extension e1 of the spring using the equation

e1 = (S1 S0).
e1 = ......................................................
The student carefully raises the beaker under the load until it is completely under water.
The load does not touch the sides or base of the beaker. He records the new scale
reading S2.
S2 = 39.8 cm
(ii)
Calculate the extension e2 of the spring using the equation e2 = (S2 S0).
e2 = ......................................................
[2]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
4
(c) Calculate the density of the material of the load using the equation
e1
(e1 e2)
For
Examiners
Use
where k = 1.00 g/cm3.
= ................................................... [3]
(d) A second load, made from the same material and with the same mass, is too long to be
completely submerged in the water.
Suggest whether
(i)
the value obtained for e2 would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in
part (b) (ii),
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
the value obtained for would be greater, smaller or the same as that obtained in
part (c).
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
5
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential difference across, and the current in, wires.
power source
B
D
Fig. 2.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the apparatus. Use standard circuit symbols.
(The circuit includes two identical resistance wires AB and CD. Use the standard symbol
for a resistance to represent each of these wires.)
This circuit is called circuit 1.
[3]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
6
For circuit 1, the student places the contact S on the resistance wire AB at a distance of
0.500 m from A. He measures the p.d. V across the wire between A and S and the current I
in the circuit.
The student then records the measurements for circuits 2 and 3, shown in Fig. 2.2 and
Fig. 2.3.
power source
D
circuit 2
Fig. 2.2
power source
D
circuit 3
Fig. 2.3
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
7
The voltage V and current I for all three circuits are shown in Table 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
Table 2.1
Circuit
I/
V/
0.83
0.53
0.75
0.95
0.41
0.28
(b) Complete the column headings in the table.
[1]
(c) Theory suggests that,

1.
in circuits 1 and 2, the values of potential difference V will be equal,
2.
the value of potential difference V in circuit 3 will be half that in circuit 1 or circuit 2.
(i)
State whether, within the limits of experimental accuracy, the results support these
predictions.
Justify your statement by reference to the results.
Prediction 1 ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
Prediction 2 ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii)
Suggest one reason, other than a change in temperature of the wires, why the
results may not support the theory.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
8
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the change in temperature of hot water as cold water is
added to the hot water.
A student measures and records the temperature of the hot water before adding any of the
cold water available.
He then pours 20 cm3 of the cold water into the beaker containing the hot water. He measures
and records the temperature of the mixture of hot and cold water.
He repeats this procedure four times until he has added a total of 100 cm3 of cold water.
The temperature readings are shown in Table 3.1. V is the volume of cold water added.
Table 3.1
V/
0
82
68
58
50
45
42
(a) (i)
(ii)

Enter the values for the volume of cold water added.
[2]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
9
(b) Use the data in the table to plot a graph of temperature (y-axis) against volume (x-axis).
Draw the best-fit curve.
[4]
(c) During this experiment, some heat is lost from the hot water to the surroundings. Also,
each time the cold water is added, it is added in quite large volumes and at random
times.
Suggest two improvements you could make to the procedure to give a graph that more
accurately shows the pattern of temperature change of the hot water, due to addition of
cold water alone.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
For
Examiners
Use
10
4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a converging lens.

screen
x
y
lens
illuminated
object
Fig. 4.1
(a) The student places the lens at a distance x = 25.0 cm from the illuminated object. She
places the screen close to the lens and then moves it away from the lens until a sharply
focused image is formed on the screen. She measures and records the distance y
between the lens and the screen.
y = 37.1 cm
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation
f=
xy
.
(x + y)
f = ................................................... [2]
(b) She then repeats the procedure with the lens at a distance x = 30.0 cm from the
illuminated object.
Fig. 4.1 shows this position of the apparatus. It is a scale diagram.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure the distance xs between the lens and the illuminated object.
Also on Fig. 4.1, measure the distance ys between the lens and the screen.
xs = ......................................................
ys = ......................................................
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
For
Examiners
Use
11
(ii)
Calculate the actual distance y between the lens and the screen.
For
Examiners
Use
y = ......................................................
(iii)
Calculate the focal length f using the new values of x and y.
f = ......................................................
(iv)
Calculate the average value of f. Show your working.
average value of f = ......................................................

[7]
(c) The illuminated object has the shape shown below.
Draw a diagram to show the appearance of the focused image in (b) on the screen.
[1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08
[Turn over
12
5
(a) Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second
column shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline
the value most likely to be correct.
For
Examiners
Use
The first one is done for you.

Table 5.1
Quantity measured
Recorded values
The mass of a wooden

metre rule
0.112 kg
1.12 kg
11.2 kg
The weight of an empty 250 cm3

glass beaker
0.7 N
7.0 N
70 N
The volume of one sheet of this

examination paper
0.6 cm3
6.0 cm3
60 cm3
The time taken for one swing of a

simple pendulum of length 0.5 m
0.14 s
1.4 s
14 s
The pressure exerted on the ground

by a student standing on one foot
0.4 N/cm2
4.0 N/cm2
40 N/cm2
[4]
(b) (i)
A student is to find the value of the resistance of a wire by experiment. Potential

difference V and current I can be recorded. The resistance is then calculated using
the equation R = V/ I.
The student knows that an increase in temperature will affect the resistance of the
wire. Assuming that variations in room temperature will not have a significant effect,
suggest two ways by which the student could minimise temperature increases in
the wire during the experiment.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii)
Name the circuit component that the student could use to control the current.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
0625/06/O/N/08

*6752477947*
0625/06
PHYSICS
May/June 2009
1 hour

For Examiners Use
1
2
3
4
5
Total
SPA FF/DT T76304/3
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is making measurements as accurately as possible in order to determine

the density of glass.
Fig. 1.1 shows a glass test-tube drawn actual size.
d
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
Use your rule to measure, in cm, the external diameter d of the test-tube.
d = ....................................... cm
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
3
(ii)
Use your rule to measure, in cm, the length x of the test-tube.

x = ............................................
(iii)
For
Examiners
Use
Draw a labelled diagram to show how you would use two rectangular blocks of wood
and your rule to measure the length x of the test-tube as accurately as possible.
[4]
(b) The mass m of the test-tube is 31.2 g.
(i)
Calculate the external volume Ve of the test-tube using the equation

Ve =
d 2X .
4
Ve = ............................................
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
4
(ii)
The student then fills the test-tube with water and pours the water into a measuring
cylinder. Fig. 1.2 shows the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
water
30
20
10
Fig. 1.2
Record the volume reading Vi from the measuring cylinder. This is the internal
volume of the test-tube.
Vi = ............................................
(iii)
Calculate the density of the glass from which the test-tube is made using the
equation
m
.
(Ve Vi)
= ....................................... [4]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
5
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
6
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different conditions.
The students are provided with two thermometers A and B. Thermometer B has cotton wool
wrapped around the bulb. Fig. 2.1 shows thermometer A.
thermometer A
stand
water
Fig. 2.1
The students measure the temperature of the hot water in the beaker. Fig. 2.2 shows the
thermometer reading.
-10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
100C
thermometer A
Fig. 2.2
(a) Record in Table 2.1 at time t = 0 s the temperature shown in Fig. 2.2.
(b) The students remove the thermometer from the water, starting the stopclock at the same
time. Table 2.1 shows the temperature of the thermometer bulb at 30 s intervals. The
experiment is repeated using thermometer B which has cotton wool wrapped around
the thermometer bulb.
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
7
Complete Table 2.1 by inserting the appropriate unit in the time and in the temperature
column headings.
For
Examiners
Use
Table 2.1
Thermometer A
Thermometer B
t/
0
81
30
51
72
60
43
58
90
37
49
120
34
43
150
30
38
180
28
34
210
27
31
[2]
(c) Suggest which thermometer cooled more quickly at first. Justify your answer by reference
to the readings.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the two thermometer bulbs
under different conditions (in this experiment one thermometer bulb is covered with cotton
wool), it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two conditions that
should be controlled in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
8
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the resistance of a wire.
For
Examiners
Use

power
source
x
A
V
Fig. 3.1
AB is a resistance wire. The students place the sliding contact C on the resistance wire AB
at a distance x = 0.100 m from A. They switch on and measure the p.d. V across the wire
between A and C. They also measure the current I in the wire. The value of I is 0.38 A.
They repeat the procedure several times using different values of x. The readings are shown
in Table 3.1. The current I is 0.38 A for each value of x.
Table 3.1
x/m
V /V
0.100
0.21
0.300
0.59
0.500
1.04
0.700
1.42
0.900
1.87
R/
[2]
(a) Calculate the resistance R of the section AC of the wire for each value of x using the
equation R = V
. Record the values of R in the table.
I
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
9
(b) Use the results in Table 3.1 to plot a graph of R / (y-axis) against x / m (x-axis). Draw
the best fit line.
For
Examiners
Use
[5]
(c) Within the limits of experimental accuracy, what do you conclude about the variation of
resistance with distance along the wire? Justify your conclusion by reference to your
graph.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Using your graph, determine the value for R when x = 0.750 m. Show clearly on your
graph how you obtained the necessary information.
R = ....................................... [2]
(e) A variable that may be difficult to control in this experiment is the heating effect of the
current, which affects the resistance of the wire. Suggest how you would minimise the
heating effect.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
10
4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a lens.

Fig. 4.1 shows the experimental set-up. The student positions the illuminated object and the
lens and then moves the screen away from the lens until a sharply focused image of the
object is formed on the screen.
illuminated
object
screen
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using your rule, measure on Fig. 4.1 the distance u, in cm, from the centre of the lens to
the illuminated object and the distance v from the centre of the lens to the screen.
u = ...........................................
v =............................................ [2]
(b) (i)
Fig. 4.1 is drawn one fifth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from the
illuminated object to the centre of the lens and the actual distance y from the centre of
the lens to the screen.
Record these values in Table 4.1. The first pair of readings obtained by the student
has already been entered in the table.
Table 4.1
x / cm
y / cm
57.0
15.0
f / cm
[3]
(ii)
Calculate for both pairs of readings the focal length f of the lens using the equation
f=
xy .
(x + y )
Record the values of f in Table 4.1.
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) Calculate the average value of the focal length.
For
Examiners
Use
average value for the focal length = ....................................... [2]

(d) State two precautions you would take in the laboratory in order to obtain reliable
measurements.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09
[Turn over
12
5
An IGCSE student is investigating moments using a simple balancing experiment.
For
Examiners
Use
He uses a pivot on a bench as shown in Fig. 5.1.
pivot
bench
Fig. 5.1
First, the student balances the metre rule, without loads, on the pivot. He finds that it does
not balance at the 50.0 cm mark, as he expects, but it balances at the 49.7 cm mark.
Load Q is a metal cylinder with diameter a little larger than the width of the metre rule, so
that it covers the markings on the rule. Load Q is placed carefully on the balanced metre rule
with its centre at the 84.2 cm mark. The rule does not slip on the pivot.
(a) Draw on Fig. 5.1 the metre rule with load Q on it.
[2]
(b) Explain, using a labelled diagram, how the student would ensure that the metre rule
reading at the centre of Q is 84.2 cm.
[2]
(c) Calculate the distance between the pivot and the centre of load Q.
distance = ....................................... [1]

[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/M/J/09

*8413808010*
0625/06
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DCA (SHW 00210 3/08) 12805/3
UCLES 2009
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the period of oscillation of a simple pendulum.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the set-up.
bob
d
floor
one complete
oscillation
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i)
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d from the floor to the bottom of the
pendulum bob.
d = ......................................................
(ii)
Fig. 1.1 is drawn one twentieth actual size. Calculate the actual distance x from
the floor to the bottom of the pendulum bob. Enter this value in the top row of
Table 1.1.
The students displace the pendulum bob slightly and release it so that it swings. They
measure and record in Table 1.1 the time t for 20 complete oscillations of the pendulum
(see Fig. 1.2).
Table 1.1
x / cm
t/s
T/s
T 2 / s2
20.0
20.0
19.0
30.0
17.9
40.0
16.8
50.0
15.5
[4]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
3
(b) (i)
(ii)
Calculate the period T of the pendulum for each set of readings. The period is the
time for one complete oscillation. Enter the values in Table 1.1.
For
Examiners
Use
Calculate the values of T 2. Enter the T 2 values in Table 1.1.
(c) Use your values from Table 1.1 to plot a graph of T 2 / s2 (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis).
Draw the best-fit line.
[5]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
4
(d) State whether or not your graph shows that T 2 is directly proportional to x. Justify your
statement by reference to the graph.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
5
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
6
2
An IGCSE student is investigating the cooling of thermometer bulbs under different

conditions.
He places a thermometer in a beaker of hot water and records the temperature h of the hot
water.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
Fig. 2.1
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows the thermometer. Write down the value of h that it shows.
h ................................................ [1]
He then moves the thermometer until the thermometer bulb is just above the surface of the
water (position A) and immediately starts a stopclock.
He records the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in
Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
Position A
Position B
t/
/
/
30
65
56
60
58
47
90
54
40
120
52
35
150
50
32
180
48
30
(b) Complete the column headings in the table.
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[1]
For
Examiners
Use
7
The student replaces the thermometer in the hot water and then moves the thermometer
15 cm away from the beaker to position B and immediately starts the stopclock. He records
the time t and the temperature reading every 30 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
(c) State in which position the thermometer bulb cooled more quickly. Justify your answer
by reference to the readings.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) To make a fair comparison between the rates of cooling of the thermometer bulbs in
the two positions, it is important to control other experimental conditions. Suggest two
conditions that should be controlled in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
8
3
The IGCSE class is comparing the combined resistance of lamps arranged either in series
or in parallel.
The circuit shown in Fig. 3.1 is used.
power
source
Fig. 3.1
A student measures and records the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the two
lamps.
Fig. 3.2 shows the readings on the two meters.
0.2
0.3
0.1
0.4
A
2
V
Fig. 3.2
UCLES 2009
0.5
0625/06/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
9
(a) (i)
(ii)
Write the voltage and current readings in Table 3.1, below.
For
Examiners
Use

[3]
(b) The student then sets up the circuit shown in Fig. 3.3 and records the readings. These
readings have already been entered in Table 3.1.
power
source
Fig. 3.3
For each set of readings in the table, calculate the combined resistance R of the two
lamps using the equation R = V / I. Record the values of R in Table 3.1.
[2]
Table 3.1
V/
I/
1.8
0.52
R/
Circuit of Fig. 3.1

Circuit of Fig. 3.3
(c) Using the values of resistance you have obtained, calculate the ratio y of the resistances
using the equation
y=
resistance of lamps in series

.
resistance of lamps in parallel
y = ......................................................
[2]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
10
(d) Fig. 3.4 shows a circuit including two motors A and B.
For
Examiners
Use
power source
ammeter
motor A
A
variable resistor
motor B
Fig. 3.4
(i)
Draw a diagram of the circuit using standard circuit symbols. The circuit symbol for
a motor is:
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
11
(ii)
An engineer wishes to measure the voltage across motor A.

1.
On Fig. 3.4, mark with the letters X and Y where the engineer should connect
the voltmeter.
2.
State the purpose of the variable resistor.
For
Examiners
Use
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
12
4
An IGCSE student is determining the focal length of a lens by two different methods.
For
Examiners
Use
The set-up for Method 1 is shown in Fig. 4.1.
illuminated
object
object
screen
mirror
f
lens
Fig. 4.1
The student moves the lens and the mirror slowly towards the object screen until a sharply
focused image is obtained on the object screen as shown in Fig. 4.2.
image
Fig. 4.2
(a) On Fig. 4.1, use your rule to measure the distance f between the lens and the object
screen. This is the focal length of the lens.
f = ................................................ [2]
(b) For Method 2, the student takes measurements of the diameter d and maximum
thickness t of the lens. Use your rule to take measurements on Fig. 4.3.
Fig. 4.3
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
13
(i)
Determine an average value for the diameter d of the lens. Record your readings in
the space below.
For
Examiners
Use
d = ......................................................
(ii)
Measure the maximum thickness t of the lens.

t = ......................................................
(iii)
Draw a diagram to show how, in the laboratory you would use two rectangular
blocks of wood and a metre rule to measure the thickness of the lens as accurately
as possible.
(iv)
Theory shows that, for a perfectly formed lens, the focal length is given by the
formula
f=
d2
kt
where k = 4.16.
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using this formula.
f = ......................................................
[7]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
[Turn over
14
(c) Explain whether your results from Methods 1 and 2 support the theory in part (b)(iv).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
15
5
An IGCSE student is carrying out an optics experiment.

The experiment involves using a lens to focus the image of an illuminated object onto a
screen.
(a) Complete the diagram below to show the apparatus you would use. Include a metre rule
to measure the distances between the object and the lens and between the lens and
the screen. The illuminated object is drawn for you.
illuminated
object
lamp
card
[3]
(b) State two precautions that you would take to obtain accurate results in this experiment.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009
0625/06/O/N/09
For
Examiners
Use
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/06/O/N/09

*5429162966*
0625/61
PHYSICS
May/June 2010
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DC (KN/SW) 17179/5
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is investigating the stretching of springs.

Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus used for the first part of the experiment.
clamp
spring A
spring B
200 g mass
200 g mass
Fig. 1.1
The unstretched length lA of spring A is 15 mm.

The unstretched length lB of spring B is 16 mm.
(a) The student hangs a 200 g mass on each spring, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
(i)
On Fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring A.
l = ..................................... mm
(ii)
Calculate the extension eA of the spring using the equation eA = (l lA).
eA = ..................................... mm
(iii)
On Fig. 1.1 measure the new length l of spring B.
l = ..................................... mm
(iv)
Calculate the extension eB of the spring using the equation eB = (l lB).
eB = ..................................... mm
[2]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) The student then sets up the apparatus as shown in Fig. 1.2.
spring A
For
Examiners
Use
spring B
rod
load
Fig. 1.2
(i)
On Fig. 1.2 measure the new length of each of the springs.

spring A: l = ..................................... mm
spring B: l = ..................................... mm
(ii)
Calculate the extension of each spring using the appropriate equation from
part (a).
spring A: e = ..................................... mm
spring B: e = ..................................... mm
(iii)
Calculate the average of these two extensions eav . Show your working.
eav = ......................................mm
[3]
(c) It is suggested that (eA + eB)/4 = eav .
State whether your results support this theory and justify your answer with reference to
the results.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Describe briefly one precaution that you would take to obtain accurate length
measurements.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the cooling of water.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 2.1. shows the apparatus used.
thermometer
hot
water
Fig. 2.1
Hot water is poured into the beaker and temperature readings are taken as the water cools.
Table 2.1 shows the readings taken by one student.
Table 2.1
/ C
t /s
(a) (i)
85
30
78
60
74
90
71
120
69
150
67
300
63
Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T1 of the water
in the first 150 s.
T1 = ...........................................
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
5
(ii)
Using the information in the table, calculate the temperature change T2 of the water
in the final 150 s.
For
Examiners
Use
T2 = ............................................
[3]
(b) Plot a graph of / C (y-axis) against t / s (x-axis) for the first 150 s.
20
40
60
80
[5]
100 120 140 160

t /s
(c) During the experiment the rate of temperature change decreases.

(i)
Describe briefly how the results that you have calculated in part (a) show this
trend.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe briefly how the graph line shows this trend.

..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the effect of the length of resistance wire in a circuit on the
potential difference across a lamp.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows the circuit without the voltmeter. Complete the circuit diagram to show the
voltmeter connected in the circuit to measure the potential difference across the lamp.
power
source
l
A
sliding
contact
Fig. 3.1
[2]
(b) A student switches on and places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance
l = 0.200 m from end A. He records the value of l and the potential difference V across
the lamp.
He then repeats the procedure using a range of values of l. Table 3.1 shows the
readings.
Table 3.1
(i)
(ii)
UCLES 2010
l/m
V /V
0.200
1.67
0.400
1.43
0.600
1.25
0.800
1.11
1.000
1.00
For each pair of readings in the table calculate and record in the table the value
of V
.
l
Complete the table by writing in the unit for V
.
l
[3]
0625/61/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
7
(c) A student suggests that the potential difference V across the lamp is directly proportional
to the length l of resistance wire in the circuit. State whether or not you agree with this
suggestion and justify your answer by reference to the results.
For
Examiners
Use
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State one precaution that you would take in order to obtain accurate readings of V in
this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
8
4
An IGCSE student is investigating reflection from a plane mirror.
G
P2
For
Examiners
Use
F
P5
P6
P1
J
sheet of
paper
Fig. 4.1
The student is using a sheet of plain paper on a pin board. Fig. 4.1 shows the sheet of paper.
The straight line EF shows the position of the reflecting surface of a plane mirror standing
vertically on the sheet of paper. Line GH is a normal to line EF. Line JG marks an incident ray
and line GK is the corresponding reflected ray. The student marks the position of the incident
ray with two pins (P1 and P2) and uses two more pins (P3 and P4) to find the direction of the
reflected ray.
(a) (i)
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1 mark with two neat crosses, labelled P3 and P4, suitable positions for
the pins to find the direction of the reflected ray.
On Fig. 4.1 measure the angle of incidence i.
i = ............................................
(iii)
On Fig. 4.1 measure the angle of reflection r1.

r1 = ............................................
[3]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
9
(b) (i)
On Fig. 4.1 draw a line E'GF' such that the angle between this line and the line
EGF is 10. Start with E' below the line EGF. The straight line E'F' shows a new
position of the reflecting surface of the plane mirror standing vertically on the sheet
of paper.
The points labelled P5 and P6 mark the positions of two pins placed so that P5, P6
and the images of P1 and P2 appear in line with each other. P1 and P2 have not
been moved since the original set-up.
(ii)
Using a ruler, draw a line joining the points labelled P5 and P6, and continue this
line to meet the line E'F'.
(iii)
Measure the angle of reflection r2 between line GH and the line joining the points
labelled P5 and P6.
For
Examiners
Use
r2 = ............................................
(iv)
Calculate the angle through which the reflected ray has moved.
= ............................................
(v)
Calculate the difference between 2 and .

is the angle between the two positions of the mirror.
difference between 2 and = ............................................

[3]
(c) Theory suggests that if the mirror is moved through an angle then the reflected ray will
move through an angle of 2.
State whether your result supports the theory and justify your answer by reference to
the result.
Statement ........................................................................................................................
Justification ......................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[Turn over
10
5
The IGCSE class is investigating the swing of a loaded metre rule.
For
Examiners
Use
The arrangement of the apparatus is shown in Fig. 5.1.

pivot at 10 cm mark
d
metre rule
load at 90 cm mark
Fig. 5.1
A student displaces the rule a small distance to one side and allows it to swing. The time t
taken for 10 complete swings is recorded. She calculates the time T taken for one swing. She
repeats the procedure using different values of the distance d.
The readings are shown in the Table 5.1.
Table 5.1
0.900
18.4
1.84
0.850
17.9
1.79
0.800
17.5
1.75
0.750
17.1
1.71
0.700
16.7
1.67
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
[3]
11
(b) Explain why the student takes the time for ten swings and then calculates the time for
one swing, rather than just measuring the time for one swing.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student tries to find a relationship between T and d. She first suggests that T d is
a constant.
(i)
Calculate the values of T d and enter the values in the final column of the table.
(ii)
State whether or not the results support this suggestion and give a reason for your
answer.
Statement .................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
Reason .....................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/61/M/J/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

*0199664493*
0625/61
PHYSICS
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper

Write your Centre number, candidate number and name in the spaces at the top of the page.
For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DC (LEO/DJ) 25086/5
UCLES 2010
[Turn over
2
1
A student is determining the position of the centre of mass of an object using a balancing
method.
mass m
50.0 cm
mark
load of mass x
pivot
75.0 cm
mark
Fig. 1.1
A load of mass x is taped to the metre rule so that one side of the base is exactly on the
75.0 cm mark. The student places a mass m of 30 g on the rule and adjusts its position so
that the rule is as near as possible to being balanced with the 50.0 cm mark exactly over the
pivot, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
The student records the distance d from the centre of the 30 g mass to the 50.0 cm mark on
the rule. He then repeats the procedure using different masses. The readings are shown in
Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
m /g
d / cm
30
45.0
40
34.0
50
27.0
60
22.5
70
19.3
1 1
d cm
(a) For each value of d, calculate 1/d and enter the values in the table.
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
3
(b) Plot a graph of m / g (y-axis) against
1 1
(x-axis).
d cm
For
Examiners
Use
[4]
(c) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
necessary information.
G = .................................................. [2]
(d) Determine the horizontal distance z from the 75.0 cm mark on the rule to the centre of
mass of the load using the equation
z = G k,
x
where k = 1250 g cm and x = 50 g.
z = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of heating and cooling of a thermometer bulb.
thermometer
lid
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Record the room temperature r shown on the thermometer.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
r = ................................................. [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) For the cooling experiment, a student places the thermometer into hot water as shown in
Fig. 2.1. When the temperature shown on the thermometer stops rising, she records the
temperature at time t = 0 s. She removes the thermometer from the water, immediately
starts a stopclock, and records the temperature shown on the thermometer at 30 s
intervals. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
For
Examiners
Use
For the heating experiment, the student takes another thermometer and records the
temperature shown on the thermometer at time t = 0 s. She places the thermometer in
the beaker of hot water, immediately starts the stopclock, and records the temperature
shown by the thermometer at 10 s intervals. The readings are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.1
Table 2.2
t/
t/
74
25
30
60
10
69
60
52
20
80
90
45
30
81
120
39
40
81
150
35
50
82
180
33
60
82
(i)
Complete the column headings in both tables.
[1]
(ii)
Estimate the time that would be taken in the cooling experiment for the thermometer
to cool from the reading at time t = 0 s to room temperature r .
estimated time = ................................................. [1]
(c) State in which table the initial rate of temperature change is the greater. Justify your
answer by reference to your readings.
The initial rate of temperature change is greater in Table .................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) If one of these experiments were to be repeated in order to determine an average
temperature for each time, it would be important to control the conditions. Suggest two
such conditions that should be controlled.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the current in a circuit when different resistors are connected
in the circuit.
The circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1. The circuit contains a resistor X, and there is a gap in the
circuit between points A and B that is used for adding extra resistors to the circuit.
power source
A
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student connects points A and B together, switches on and measures the current I0 in
the circuit.
The reading is shown on the ammeter in Fig. 3.2.
0.6
0.4
0.8
0.2
0
1.0
Fig. 3.2
Write down the ammeter reading.
I0 = .................................................. [1]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For
Examiners
Use
7
(b) The student connects a 3.3 resistor between points A and B, switches on and records
the current I. He repeats the procedure with a 4.7 resistor and then a 6.8 resistor.
For
Examiners
Use
Finally he connects the 3.3 resistor and the 6.8 resistor in series between points A
and B, and records the current I.
(i)
[1]
R/
I/
3.3
0.23
4.7
0.21
6.8
0.18
0.15
(ii)
Write the combined resistance of the 3.3 resistor and the 6.8 resistor in series
in the space in the resistance column of the table.
[1]
(c) Theory suggests that the current will be 0.5 I0 when the total resistance in the circuit
is twice the value of the resistance of resistor X. Use the readings in the table, and the
value of I0 from (a), to estimate the resistance of resistor X.
estimate of the resistance of resistor X = .................................................. [2]

(d) On Fig. 3.1 draw two resistors in parallel connected between A and B and also a
voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across resistor X.
[3]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating the reflection of light by a mirror as seen through a
transparent block.
Fig. 4.1 shows a students ray-trace sheet.
mirror
A
B
N
transparent
block
E
D
P3
P4
N'
F
eye
sheet of
paper
Fig. 4.1
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For
Examiners
Use
9
(a) A student draws the outline of the transparent block ABCD on the ray-trace sheet. He
draws the normal NN' to side CD. He draws the incident ray EF at an angle of incidence
i = 20. He pushes two pins P1 and P2 into line EF and places the block on the sheet
of paper. He then observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block from
the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1 so that the images of P1 and P2 appear one
behind the other. He pushes two pins P3 and P4 into the surface, between his eye and
the block, so that P3, P4 and the images of P1 and P2, seen through the block, appear in
line. (The plane mirror along side AB of the block reflects the light.)
For
Examiners
Use
The positions of P3 and P4 are marked on Fig. 4.1.

(i)
On line EF, mark with neat crosses (x) suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2.
(ii)
Continue the line EF so that it crosses CD and extends as far as side AB.
(iii)
Draw a line joining the positions of P4 and P3. Continue the line so that it crosses
CD and extends as far as side AB. Label the point G where this line crosses the
[4]
line from P1 and P2.
(iv)
Measure the acute angle between the lines meeting at G.
= ......................................................
(v)
Calculate the difference ( 2i ).
( 2i ) = ................................................. [2]
(b) The student repeats the procedure using an angle of incidence i = 30 and records the
value of as 62.
(i)
Calculate the difference ( 2i).
( 2i ) = ......................................................
(ii)
Theory suggests that = 2i . State whether the results support the theory and justify
your answer by reference to the results.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) To place the pins as accurately as possible, the student views the bases of the pins.
Explain briefly why viewing the bases of the pins, rather than the tops of the pins,
improves the accuracy of the experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
[Turn over
10
5
The IGCSE class is investigating the time taken for ice cubes to melt when placed in water.
Each student is able to use
glass beakers,
a thermometer,
a stopclock,
a measuring cylinder,
an electronic balance,
a supply of ice cubes of different sizes,
a supply of cold water,
a stirrer,
a method of heating the water
and any other common laboratory apparatus that may be useful.
A student decides to investigate the effect of the mass of ice cubes on the time they take to
melt in water.
(a) Suggest three possible variables that should be kept constant in this investigation.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. .................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) In the table below, write the names of three items of apparatus that are necessary in
order to take readings in this investigation. In the second column of the table write the
quantity that the item measures.
item of apparatus
quantity measured
[3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
For
Examiners
Use
11
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
12
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2010
0625/61/O/N/10
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 9 0 9 6 7 1 7 3 6 0 *
0625/61
PHYSICS
May/June 2011
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DC (LEO/SW) 28913/4
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is determining the position of the centre of mass of a triangular card.
pin or nail
cork
A
stand
card
B
C
plumbline
Fig. 1.1
(a) The student hangs the card on the nail through hole A. He checks that the card is able
to swing freely and then hangs the plumbline from the nail so that it is close to, but not
touching, the card. When the card and plumbline are still, he makes a small mark at the
edge of the card where the plumbline crosses the edge. He removes the card and draws
a line from the mark to hole A.
He repeats the procedure using holes B and C.
Fig.1.2 is a drawing of the card.
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For
Examiners
Use
3
For
Examiners
Use
B
Fig.1.2
On Fig.1.2, the position of each of the marks the student makes is shown with a small
cross. On Fig. 1.2, draw in the lines between the positions of the holes A, B and C and
the corresponding crosses on the card.
[2]
(b) If the experiment is completely accurate, the centre of mass of the card is at the position
where the three lines meet. On Fig. 1.2, judge the best position for the centre of mass,
marking it with a small cross. Draw a line from this position to the right-angled corner of
the card and measure the distance a between the centre of mass and the right-angled
corner of the card.
a = ........................................[3]
(c) In this experiment, it is important that the card is able to swing freely. For this reason, the
plumbline should not touch the card but be a small distance from it. This could cause an
inaccuracy in marking the card at the correct position. Describe how you would minimise
this possible inaccuracy. You may draw a diagram.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water.
For
Examiners
Use
thermometer
beaker
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) Record room temperature R as shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.2.
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
10
Fig. 2.2
R = ........................................[1]
(b) The beaker contains 200 cm3 of hot water. A student takes temperature readings as the
water cools, as shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1
UCLES 2011
t/
79
30
65
60
58
90
55
120
53
150
52
180
51
0625/61/M/J/11
5
(i)
(ii)
Calculate the temperature fall T1 during the first 30 s of cooling.
For
Examiners
Use
T1 = ............................................
(iii)
Calculate the temperature fall T2 during the final 30 s of cooling.

T2 = ........................................[3]
(c) Plot the graph of temperature (y-axis) against time (x-axis).
[5]
(d) (i)
State how the rate of cooling in the first 30 s differs from that in the final 30 s.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Explain how the graph line shows this difference.

..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is measuring the currents in lamps in different circuits.
For
Examiners
Use
The first circuit is shown in Fig. 3.1.

V
power
source
lamp 1
A
lamp 2
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I in
lamp 1. She rearranges the circuit so that the ammeter is connected in series with
lamp 2 and again records the potential difference V across the lamps and the current I
in lamp 2.
Table 3.1
(i)
(ii)
V/
I/
lamp 1
1.9
0.35
lamp 2
1.9
0.32
R/
V
Calculate the resistance R of each lamp, using the equation R = , and enter the
I
results in the table.
Add together the two values of R to calculate RS, the sum of the resistances of the
two lamps.
RS = ............................................
(iii)

[3]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
7
(b) The student rearranges the circuit so that the lamps and the ammeter are in series. She
does not change the position of the voltmeter.
For
Examiners
Use
She records the readings on the voltmeter and the ammeter.

voltmeter reading.......1.9 V
ammeter reading.......0.23 A
(i)
Draw a circuit diagram of the rearranged circuit using conventional symbols.
(ii)
Use the voltmeter and ammeter readings to calculate RT , the combined resistance
of the two lamps in series.
RT = ........................................[3]
(c) A student suggests that the values of RS and RT should be equal. State whether the
results support this suggestion and justify your statement by reference to the calculated
values.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, without reference to the values of resistance that you have calculated, one piece
of evidence that the student can observe during the experiment that shows that the
temperature of the lamp filaments changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating reflection of light using a plane mirror.

A student has set up a ray trace sheet and this is shown in Fig. 4.1. The line MR shows the
position of a plane mirror.
mirror
N
M
P3
P4
eye
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i)
(ii)
Draw a normal to line MR at N.

Draw a line 10 cm long that is parallel to line MR and 12 cm below it. The ends of
this line must be at the same distance from the edges of the page as the ends of
line MR. Label this line CD with C directly below M.
[3]
(b) The student places a pin P1 so that it stands vertically at C. He places another pin P2 as
close as possible to the point N.
(i)
Draw a line from C to N.
(ii)
Measure and record the angle of incidence i between the line CN and the normal.
i = ........................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For
Examiners
Use
9
(c) The student views the image in the mirror of the pin P1 from the direction indicated by
the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P3 and P4 some distance apart so that pins P4,
P3, P2 and the image of P1 all appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P3
and P4 are shown on Fig. 4.1.
(i)
Draw in the line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets
the normal.
(ii)
Measure and record the angle of reflection r between the normal and line P3P4.
For
Examiners
Use
r = ........................................[2]
(d) Several students found that, in spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable
care, the measured value of the angle of reflection r was not exactly the same as the
value obtained from theory.
Suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
[Turn over
10
5
Table 5.1 shows some measurements taken by three IGCSE students. The second column
shows the values recorded by the three students. For each quantity, underline the value most
likely to be correct.
The first one is done for you.
Table 5.1
quantity measured
recorded values
the mass of a wooden metre rule
0.112 kg
1.12 kg
11.2 kg
the diameter of a test tube
0.15 cm
1.5 cm
15 cm
the volume of a coffee cup
10 cm3
100 cm3
1000 cm3
the area of a computer keyboard
0.07 m2
0.70 m2
7.0 m2
the current in a 1.5 V torch lamp at normal

brightness
0.12 A
12 A
120 A
the circumference of a 250 cm3 beaker
2.3 cm
23 cm
230 cm
[5]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
For
Examiners
Use
11
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
12
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2011
0625/61/M/J/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 1 3 1 3 1 3 5 5 9 2 *
0625/61
PHYSICS
1 hour


DC (SJF/CGW) 34182/5
UCLES 2011
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is determining the weight of a metre rule.

Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
d
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
X
pivot
Fig. 1.1
X is a 1.0 N load.
The student places the load X on the rule so that its centre is at d = 5.0 cm from the zero end of
the rule, as shown in Fig.1.1. He adjusts the position of the rule so that it is as near as possible to
being balanced, with the 50.0 cm mark to the right of the pivot.
He measures and records the distance x from the centre of the load X to the pivot, and the
distance y from the pivot to the 50.0 cm mark on the rule. He repeats the procedure using d values
of 10.0 cm, 15.0 cm, 20.0 cm and 25.0 cm. The readings of d, x and y are shown in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
UCLES 2011
d / cm
x / cm
y / cm
5.0
23.7
21.3
10.0
21.0
19.1
15.0
18.5
16.3
20.0
16.0
14.1
25.0
13.9
12.0
0625/61/O/N/11
3
(a) Plot the graph of y / cm (y-axis) against x / cm (x-axis). You do not need to include the origin
(0,0) on your graph.
[4]
(b) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = .......................................................... [2]
(c) Calculate the weight W of the metre rule using the equation W = L , where L = 1.0 N.
G
W = .......................................................... [1]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
4
(d) The calculation of W is based on the assumption that the centre of mass of the rule is at the
50.0 cm mark.
(i)
Describe briefly how you would determine the position of the centre of mass of the rule.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii)
Describe how you would modify the experiment if the centre of mass was at the 49.7 cm
mark.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
5
2
The IGCSE class is investigating temperature changes when cold water and hot water are mixed.
(a) A student records the temperature c of 100 cm3 of cold water and the temperature h of
100 cm3 of hot water.
10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
Fig. 2.1
Write down the temperature c shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.1.
c = .......................................................... [2]
(b) The hot water is at a temperature h = 86 C.
Calculate av , the average of c and h.
average av = .......................................................... [1]

(c) The student adds 100 cm3 of the hot water to the cold water. She records the temperature m
of the mixture of hot and cold water, m = 48 C.
State two precautions (other than repeating the experiment) that the student could take to
ensure the reliability of her value of the temperature m.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Suggest a practical reason in this experiment for the temperature of the mixture m being
different from the average value av , even when the student has taken the precautions you
suggested in (c).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) Suggest a modification to the experiment which should reduce the difference between m
and av.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(f)
The student decides to repeat the experiment to check the readings. Suggest one possible
variable that she should keep constant.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the current in resistors in a circuit.

power
source
D
B
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student measures the current IA at the position A shown by the ammeter, and then at
positions B (IB), C (IC) and D (ID).
The readings are:
IA= 0.28 A
IB = 0.13 A
IC = 0.14 A
ID = 0.27 A
Theory suggests that IA = IB + IC and ID = IB + IC.

(i)
Calculate IB + IC.
IB + IC = ...............................................................
(ii)
State whether the experimental results support the theory. Justify your statement by
reference to the readings.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
justification ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
7
(b) The student suggests repeating the experiment to confirm her conclusion. She connects a
variable resistor (rheostat) in series with the switch. State the purpose of the variable resistor.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The student connects a voltmeter and records the potential difference V across the
combination of the three resistors.
(i)
On Fig. 3.1, draw in the voltmeter connected as described, using the standard symbol for
a voltmeter.
[1]
(ii)
Write down the voltmeter reading shown on Fig. 3.2.
1
0
7
8
9
V
10
Fig. 3.2
V = ......................................................... [1]
(iii)
Calculate the resistance R of the combination of the three resistors using the equation
V
.
R=
I
R = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
8
4
An IGCSE student is investigating reflection of light in a plane mirror.

Fig. 4.1 shows the students ray trace sheet.
O
ray trace
sheet
R
P2
P3
eye
Fig. 4.1
(a) The line MR shows the position of a mirror.
(i)
Draw a normal to this line that passes through its centre. Label the normal NL. Label the
point at which NL crosses MR with the letter B.
[1]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
9
(ii)
Draw a line 8 cm long from B at an angle of incidence i = 40 to the normal below MR

and to the left of the normal. Label the end of this line A. Record the angle of incidence i
in the first row of Table 4.1.
Table 4.1
i /
r /
34
33
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the mirror which is made of polished metal and has a vertical line drawn on it.
mirror
line
Fig. 4.2
The student places the mirror, with its reflecting face vertical, on MR. The lower end of the
line on the mirror is at point B. He places a pin P1 at A. He views the line on the mirror and
the image of pin P1 from the direction indicated by the eye in Fig. 4.1. He places two pins P2
and P3 some distance apart so that pins P3, P2, the image of P1, and the line on the mirror all
appear exactly one behind the other. The positions of P2 and P3 are shown.
(i)
Draw the line joining the positions of P2 and P3. Continue the line until it meets the
normal.
(ii)
Measure, and record in the first row of Table 4.1, the angle of reflection r between the
normal and the line passing through P2 and P3.
[2]
(c) The student draws a line parallel to MR and 2 cm above it. He places the mirror on this line
and repeats the procedure without changing the position of pin P1. His readings for i and r are
shown in the table.
In spite of carrying out this experiment with reasonable care, it is possible that the values
of the angle of reflection r will not be exactly the same as the values obtained from theory.
Suggest two possible causes of this inaccuracy.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
10
(d) The student was asked to list precautions that should be taken with this experiment in order
to obtain readings that are as accurate as possible. Table 4.2 shows the suggestions.
Place a tick () in the second column of the table next to each correctly suggested
precaution.
Table 4.2
suggested precaution
avoid parallax (line of sight) errors when taking readings with the protractor
carry out the experiment in a darkened room
draw the lines so that they are as thin as possible
keep room temperature constant
place pins P2 and P3 as far apart as possible
use only two or three significant figures for the final answers
[3]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
11
5
The IGCSE class is carrying out an experiment to determine the speed of sound in air.
Fig. 5.1 indicates the method used. The experiment is conducted outside the school building.
student A
student B
drum
stopwatch
d
Fig. 5.1 (not to scale)
Student A strikes a drum once as loudly as possible. Student B stands some distance away from
student A and starts a stopwatch when she sees the drum being hit. She stops the stopwatch
when she hears the sound. She records the time interval t in Table 5.1. The experiment is repeated
several times. She calculates the speed of sound v and enters the values in the table.
Table 5.1
t/s
v / (m / s)
0.87
344.83
0.92
326.09
0.84
357.14
0.83
361.45
0.86
338.84
(a) Suggest a suitable distance d for students to use when carrying out this experiment.
d = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Suggest a suitable instrument for measuring the distance d.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the average value vav for the speed of sound from the results in the table. Show
your working.
vav = .......................................................... [2]

UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
[Turn over
12
(d) The student has recorded the values for the speed of sound v to five significant figures.
State whether this is a suitable number of significant figures for the speed of sound in air in
this experiment. Give a reason for your answer.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2011
0625/61/O/N/11
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 4 4 6 8 1 0 1 8 2 6 *
0625/61
PHYSICS
May/June 2012
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DC (NF/CGW) 42235/7
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
An IGCSE student is determining the mass of a metre rule using a balancing method.
Fig. 1.1 shows the apparatus.
50.0 cm mark
metre rule
M
pivot
Fig. 1.1
Mass M is placed on the rule. The position of the pivot is adjusted until the rule balances.
(a) The student chooses a mass M which is similar to the mass of the metre rule. Suggest a
suitable value for the mass.
suitable mass = ................................................. [1]

(b) The mass is cylindrical and has a diameter slightly larger than the width of the metre rule.
Describe briefly how you would place the mass so that its centre of mass is exactly over
the 90.0 cm mark on the metre rule. You should draw a diagram and mark the position of
the centre of mass on the cylinder.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From your experience of carrying out balancing experiments of this type, suggest one
difficulty that you are likely to come across that could make the final result inaccurate.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
3
(d) The student takes a reading of x and the corresponding reading of y. He then calculates
the mass of the metre rule.
For
Examiners
Use
Suggest how you would improve the reliability of the value of the mass of the metre rule,
using this method.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) Another student carries out a similar experiment to determine the mass of a 50 cm metal
strip. She calculates the mass and writes down mass = 234.872 g.
She checks the mass on an accurate balance. The value is 235 g. She thinks she must
have made a mistake in her experiment.
Write a brief comment on the accuracy of her experimental result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the heating of a thermometer bulb.
For
Examiners
Use
The apparatus is shown in Figs. 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.

thermometer
card
metre rule
lamp
d
Fig. 2.1
(a) Record the value of room temperature R shown on the thermometer.
-10
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
Fig. 2.2
R = ................................................. [1]
(b) A student switches on the lamp and places the thermometer so that its bulb is a horizontal
distance d = 100 mm from the surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.1. She records the
distance d between the thermometer bulb and the surface of the lamp. She also records
the temperature shown on the thermometer. She repeats the procedure using values
of d of 80 mm, 60 mm, 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm. The temperature readings are shown
in Table 2.1.
(i)
Record the d values in the table.
(ii)

Table 2.1
d / 00
/ 00
52
56
61
67
75
86
[2]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
5
(c) The student moves the thermometer away from the lamp and waits for about a minute
for the thermometer to cool. She places the thermometer so that its bulb is a vertical
distance d V = 100 mm from the top surface of the lamp, as shown in Fig. 2.3.
For
Examiners
Use
thermometer
dv
lamp
Fig. 2.3
She records the temperature V shown on the thermometer: V = 55 C.
Calculate the difference between V and the thermometer reading H at a horizontal
distance of 100 mm from the lamp. State whether V is higher, lower or the same as H.
temperature difference = ......................................................
V is ................................................. [1]
(d) A student suggests that V will be higher than the thermometer reading H because
thermal energy will travel by infra-red radiation and convection to the thermometer bulb
above the lamp but by infra-red radiation only when the bulb is to one side of the lamp.
If the experiment were to be repeated in order to investigate this suggestion it would
be important to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions, relevant to this
investigation, that should be controlled.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a
reliable result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is determining the resistance of a fixed resistor in a circuit.

power
source
A
d
resistance
wire
A
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) A student places the sliding contact on the resistance wire at a distance d = 10.0 cm
from point A. He measures the current I in the circuit and the p.d. V across the resistor
R. He repeats the procedure using d values of 30.0 cm, 50.0 cm, 70.0 cm and 90.0 cm.
Table 3.1
(i)
UCLES 2012
V/V
I/A
10.0
1.7
1.13
30.0
1.3
0.87
50.0
1.0
0.67
70.0
0.8
0.53
90.0
0.7
0.47
0625/61/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
7
(ii)
Plot a graph of V / V (y-axis) against I / A (x-axis). You do not need to include the
origin (0, 0) on your graph.
For
Examiners
Use
[5]
(iii)
Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained
G = ................................................. [3]
(b) The gradient G of the graph is numerically equal to the resistance R of the resistor R.
Write a value for the resistance R to a suitable number of significant figures for this
experiment.
R = ................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is determining the focal length of a lens.
For
Examiners
Use

illuminated
object
screen
lens
x
d
Fig. 4.1
(a) A student places the lens between the object and the screen and close to the object.
She moves the lens towards the screen until a clearly focused, enlarged image is
formed on the screen.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance d between the object and the screen.
d = ......................................................
(ii)
On Fig. 4.1, measure and record the distance x between the centre of the lens and
the screen.
x = ......................................................
[2]
(iii)
Fig. 4.1 is drawn one tenth actual size.

1. Calculate the actual distance D between the object and the screen.
D = ......................................................
2. Calculate the actual distance X between the centre of the lens and the screen.
X = ......................................................
[1]
(b) Without moving the illuminated object or the screen, the student moves the lens towards
the screen until a clearly focused, diminished image is formed on the screen. She
measures the distance Y between the centre of the lens and the screen: Y = 19.0 cm.
Calculate the focal length f of the lens using the equation f =
XY
.
D
f = ................................................. [2]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
9
(c) The student turns the lens through an angle of 180 and repeats the procedure obtaining
a value for the focal length f = 14.7 cm.
For
Examiners
Use
Theory suggests that the two values of the focal length f should be the same. State
whether the results support this theory and justify your answer by reference to the
results.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) Briefly describe a precaution that you would take in this experiment in order to obtain a
reliable result.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
10
5
The IGCSE class is determining the internal volume of a test-tube using two displacement
methods.
The apparatus used is shown in Figs. 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3.
cm3
cm3
100
100
90
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
water
measuring
cylinder
test-tube
40
40
30
30
20
20
10
10
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i)
50
Fig. 5.2
Fig. 5.1 shows water in a measuring cylinder. Record the volume V1 of the water.
V1 = ................................................. [1]
(ii)
On Fig. 5.1, show clearly the line of sight that you would use to obtain an accurate
volume reading.
[2]
(b) (i)
A student lowers a test-tube, closed end first, into the water in the measuring
cylinder and pushes the tube down until it is filled with water. From Fig. 5.2, record
the new water level V2.
V2 = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the volume VG of the glass of the test-tube using the equation VG = (V2 V1).
VG = ......................................................
[2]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
For
Examiners
Use
11
(c) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and empties the water
back into the measuring cylinder. He then puts the test-tube, open end first, into the
water in the measuring cylinder and carefully pushes it down with his finger until it is
covered with water as shown in Fig. 5.3.
For
Examiners
Use
finger
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
test-tube
50
40
30
20
10
Fig. 5.3
(i)
Record the new water level V3.

V3 = ......................................................
(ii)
Calculate the increase in water level (V3 V1).
(V3 V1) = ......................................................

(iii)
Calculate the volume VA of air in the test-tube using the equation VA = (V3 V1) VG.
VA = ......................................................
[1]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
[Turn over
12
(d) The student removes the test-tube from the measuring cylinder and fills the test-tube
with water from a beaker. He pours the water from the test-tube into an empty measuring
cylinder and records the volume VW of water:
For
Examiners
Use
18 cm3
VW = ......................................................
The student has attempted to determine the internal volume of the test-tube by two
methods. His two values for the internal volume are VA and VW.
Assuming that the experiments have been carried out correctly and carefully and that
the measuring cylinder scale is accurate, suggest two reasons why the value VA may be
inaccurate and two reasons why the value VW may be inaccurate.
VA:
reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
VW:
reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/M/J/12
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
w
om
.c
s
er

* 1 1 7 9 4 6 4 0 8 3 *
0625/61
PHYSICS
1 hour

For Examiners Use

1
2
3
4
5
Total

DC (CW/SW) 50194/4
UCLES 2012
[Turn over
2
1
The IGCSE class is investigating the stretching of a spring.
For
Examiners
Use
Fig. 1.1 shows the experimental set up.

clamp
spring
d0
bench
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, measure the vertical distance d0, in mm, between the bottom of the spring
and the surface of the bench.
d0 = .......................................... mm [1]
(b) The diagram is drawn 1/10th actual size. Calculate the actual distance D0, in mm,
between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.
D0 = .......................................... mm [1]
(c) A student hangs a 1.0 N load on the spring. He measures and records the distance D
between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench, and the value of the
load L.
He repeats the procedure using loads of 2.0 N, 3.0 N, 4.0 N and 5.0 N. The distance
readings are shown in Table 1.1.
Calculate the extension e of the spring, for each set of readings, using the equation
e = (D0 D). Record the values of L and e in Table 1.1.
Table 1.1
L/N
D / mm
e / mm
199
191
179
171
160
[2]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
3
(d) Plot a graph of e / mm (y-axis) against L / N (x-axis).
For
Examiners
Use
[4]
(e) Determine the gradient G of the graph. Show clearly on the graph how you obtained the
G = .................................................. [2]
(f)
When making measurements, the student is careful to avoid a line-of-sight error.

Suggest one other precaution that the student should take when measuring the distance
D between the bottom of the spring and the surface of the bench.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
4
2
The IGCSE class is investigating the rate of cooling of water under different conditions.
50
60
70
80
90
100
110 C
10
10
20
30
40
thermometer
water
Fig. 2.1
Fig. 2.2
(a) Record the value of room temperature R shown on the thermometer in Fig. 2.2.
R = .................................................. [1]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
5
(b) A student pours 150 cm3 of hot water into a beaker. She measures the temperature of
the water at time t = 0 and records it in a table.
For
Examiners
Use
She starts a stopclock and records the temperature of the water at 30 s intervals until
she has a total of six values up to time t = 150 s. The readings are shown in Table 2.1.
She repeats the procedure, using 250 cm3 of hot water.
Table 2.1
volume of water
150 cm3
250 cm3
84
85
30
79
79
60
74
75
90
70
72
120
68
70
150
66
68
t/
(i)
[1]
(ii)
State whether the rate of cooling is significantly faster, slower, or about the same
when using the larger volume of hot water. Justify your answer by reference to the
readings.
statement .................................................................................................................
justification ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) If this experiment were to be repeated in order to check the results, it would be important
to control the conditions. Suggest two such conditions that should be controlled.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
6
3
The IGCSE class is investigating the potential differences across circuit components.
For
Examiners
Use

power
pack
ammeter
lamp N
lamp L
lamp M
voltmeter
Fig. 3.1
(a) Draw a circuit diagram of the circuit shown in Fig. 3.1, using standard symbols.
[3]
(b) A student records the current IA, the potential difference VL across lamp L and the
potential difference VM across lamp M.
0.65 A
IA = ......................................................
0.9 V
VL = ......................................................
1.0 V
VM = ......................................................
(i)
Calculate the potential difference VA across lamps L and M using the equation
VA = VL + VM.
VA = ......................................................
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
7
(ii)
Calculate RA, the combined resistance of lamps L, M and N, using the equation
V
RA = A .
IA
For
Examiners
Use
RA = ......................................................
[2]
(iii)
On Fig. 3.2, draw a pointer showing the current IA = 0.65 A.

0.4
0.6
0.2
0.8
1.0
0
A
Fig. 3.2
[1]
(c) The student rearranges the circuit so that the three lamps are in series with each other.
He records the potential difference across each lamp in turn.
0.6 V
VL = ......................................................
0.7 V
VM = ......................................................
0.7 V
VN = ......................................................
Calculate the potential difference VB across the three lamps using the equation
VB = VL + VM + VN.
VB = ......................................................
(d) A student suggests that VA should be equal to VB.
State whether the results support this suggestion and justify your answer with reference
to the results.
statement .........................................................................................................................
justification .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
8
4
The IGCSE class is investigating the refraction of light passing through a transparent block.
The apparatus and ray-trace sheet are shown in Fig. 4.1.
O
P3
P4
eye
ray-trace sheet
Fig. 4.1
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
9
(a) A student places the transparent block, largest face down, on the ray-trace sheet. She
draws the outline of the block ABCD.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, draw a normal at the centre of side AB. Label the point E where the
normal crosses AB.
(ii)
Draw a line FE to the left of the normal and at an angle of incidence i = 30 to the
normal.
[2]
For
Examiners
Use
(b) The student places two pins P1 and P2 on the line FE, placing one pin close to E. She
observes the images of P1 and P2 through side CD of the block so that the images of P1
and P2 appear one behind the other. She places two pins P3 and P4 between her eye
and the block so that P3 and P4, and the images of P1 and P2 seen through the block,
appear one behind the other.
(i)
On Fig. 4.1, mark suitable positions for the pins P1 and P2.
[1]
(ii)
Draw a line joining the positions of P3 and P4. Continue the line until it meets CD
and label this point G.
(iii)
Draw the line GE.

[1]
(c) (i)
Measure and record the angle of refraction r between the line GE and the normal.
r = .................................................. [1]
(ii)
i
Calculate the ratio r .
i
r = .................................................. [1]
(d) The student repeats the procedure but with the angle of incidence i = 40. The angle of
refraction r = 26.
(i)
i
Calculate the ratio r .
i
r = .................................................. [1]
(ii)
i
A student suggests that the ratio r should be a constant.
State and explain briefly whether your results support this suggestion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
[Turn over
10
5
(a) The IGCSE class has a range of apparatus available. Here is a list of some of the
apparatus.
ammeter
barometer
beaker
electronic balance
manometer
measuring cylinder
metre rule
newtonmeter (spring balance)
stopwatch
tape measure
thermometer
voltmeter
Complete Table 5.1 by inserting the name of one piece of apparatus from the list that is
the most suitable for measuring each quantity described.
Table 5.1
quantity to be measured
most suitable apparatus
volume of water
a distance of about 50 m
the force required to lift a laboratory stool
the mass of a coin
the pressure of the laboratory gas supply
[5]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
11
(b) The IGCSE class is carrying out a lens experiment. This involves using an illuminated
object, a screen and a lens.
Firstly, the distance between the illuminated object and the lens is measured with a
metre rule. Next, a clearly focused image is obtained on the screen.
(i)
Explain briefly how you would avoid a parallax (line-of-sight) error when using the
metre rule.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii)
State a precaution that you would take to ensure that the image is well focused.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
For
Examiners
Use
12
BLANK PAGE
UCLES 2012
0625/61/O/N/12
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice May 1999
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
D
C
B
D
D
C
B
B
C
D
C
C
C
A
B
B
C
C
C
A
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
B
A
D
A
C
A
C
B
C
A
B
D
A
A
A
B
A
A
C
D
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice November 1999
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
A
C
C
D
C
B
C
B
C
B
B
C
B
A
A
B
B
B
A
D
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
D
D
C
D
D
B
C
A
A
B
A
D
C
A
D
D
C
C
B
A
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice May/June 2000
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
B
A
C
B
D
B
C
A
D
B
D
C
D
D
A
B
C
D
A
A
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
C
B
B
A
C
D
A
B
D
D
A
B
A
A
C
B
D
C
B
A
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice November 2000
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
D
B
D
C
C
B
B
D
A
D
B
B
D
D
C
A
B
D
C
B
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
D
B
B
B
B
C
D
A
C
B
C
D
A
D
A
D
D
C
A
B
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice May/June 2001
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
B
B
D
B
D
B
B
A
C
C
D
B
A
C
D
D
C
B
A
C
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
B
A
D
A
A
B
C
C
D
C
B
A
A
C
A
C
B
D
B
C
Back to questions
Answer key for IGCSE Physics (0625/1) Multiple Choice October/November 2001
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Correct Answer
A
A
B
A
B
B
C
D
C
D
D
D
A
D
A
A
B
B
A
C
Item
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Correct Answer
A
B
A
B
C
D
D
C
B
C
A
C
C
A
A
C
B
B
D
C
Back to questions
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS JUNE 2003
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
5
A
B
B
C
D
21
22
23
24
25
D
D
B
B
B
6
7
8
9
10
C
A
D
B
B
26
27
28
29
30
D
A
A
B
D
11
12
13
14
15
A
C
B
D
B
31
32
33
34
35
C
D
A
A
C
16
17
18
19
20
A
A
A
B
D
36
37
38
39
40
B
D
A
D
B
Paper
1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE EXAMINATIONS NOVEMBER 2003
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
D
C
21
22
A
D
3
4
5
A
C
C
23
24
25
C
B
A
6
7
B
C
26
27
B
B
8
9
10
A
C
D
28
29
30
B
B
D
11
12
D
B
31
32
C
C
13
14
15
D
D
D
33
34
35
B
B
B
16
17
A
D
36
37
C
A
18
19
20
A
B
B
38
39
40
A
C
A
Paper
1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
Page 1
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
D
A
21
22
C
B
3
4
5
D
A
D
23
24
25
D
C
C
6
7
D
C
26
27
C
B
8
9
10
A
B
C
28
29
30
B
A
B
11
12
A
A
31
32
C
A
13
14
15
A
C
C
33
34
35
A
A
D
16
17
D
D
36
37
A
D
18
19
20
A
C
D
38
39
40
D
B
C
Paper
1
TOTAL 40
Back to questions
University of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
1
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
B
B
D
21
22
23
C
C
B
4
5
C
D
24
25
B
A
6
7
8
D
D
C
26
27
28
D
C
C
9
10
D
A
29
30
D
C
11
12
13
D
A
C
31
32
33
A
C
A
14
15
B
C
34
35
B
C
16
17
18
B
C
B
36
37
38
C
A
D
19
20
B
A
39
40
C
C
Back to questions
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
1
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
5
B
D
C
D
B
21
22
23
24
25
A
A
B
B
B
6
7
8
9
10
B
A
C
C
D
26
27
28
29
30
C
A
C
D
C
11
12
13
14
15
B
B
D
C
D
31
32
33
34
35
D
B
B
D
B
16
17
18
19
20
D
C
A
D
C
36
37
38
39
40
A
B
A
C
C
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
5
B
B
A
D
D
21
22
23
24
25
A
B
D
B
C
6
7
8
9
10
B
B
D
B
D
26
27
28
29
30
C
D
C
B
A
11
12
13
14
15
A
B
A
D
B
31
32
33
34
35
A
C
A
A
B
16
17
18
19
20
B
A
C
C
D
36
37
38
39
40
A
A
B
B
A
Paper
1
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
5
A
C
C
B
B
21
22
23
24
25
B
C
C
B
B
6
7
8
9
10
D
A
A
B
A
26
27
28
29
30
C
B
B
D
A
11
12
13
14
15
B
D
B
D
C
31
32
33
34
35
C
C
D
C
A
16
17
18
19
20
A
B
A
D
D
36
37
38
39
40
A
C
D
C
D
Paper
01
Page 2
Mark Scheme
GCE A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
B
B
21
22
D
B
3
4
5
D
D
B
23
24
25
A
C
A
6
7
C
C
26
27
C
A
8
9
10
A
B
D
28
29
30
C
B
A
11
12
A
B
31
32
D
B
13
14
15
D
C
D
33
34
35
A
A
D
16
17
C
B
36
37
B
A
18
19
20
C
D
C
38
39
40
B
D
C
UCLES 2006
Paper
01
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
A
B
A
D
21
22
23
24
B
B
A
B
25
6
7
8
9
C
B
C
B
26
27
28
29
B
B
C
C
10
30
11
12
13
14
D
B
D
A
31
32
33
34
A
D
B
C
15
35
16
17
18
19
D
D
C
A
36
37
38
39
C
D
C
D
20
40
UCLES 2007
Paper
01
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE October/November 2007
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
C
A
A
D
21
22
23
24
B
C
C
C
25
6
7
8
9
B
C
C
A
26
27
28
29
C
C
B
C
10
30
11
12
13
14
C
D
D
D
31
32
33
34
B
B
B
A
15
35
16
17
18
19
B
B
C
B
36
37
38
39
D
D
C
A
20
40
UCLES 2007
Paper
01
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
B
B
21
22
D
C
3
4
5
C
C
B
23
24
25
A
C
A
6
7
C
B
26
27
D
A
8
9
10
D
C
D
28
29
30
B
B
A
11
12
C
C
31
32
B
A
13
14
15
A
C
B
33
34
35
B
A
B
16
17
D
D
36
37
C
C
18
19
20
A
B
A
38
39
40
A
B
B
UCLES 2008
Paper
01
Page 2
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
C
D
21
22
D
C
3
4
5
B
B
B
23
24
25
A
C
C
6
7
A
A
26
27
B
C
8
9
10
C
A
A
28
29
30
B
B
C
11
12
D
B
31
32
C
D
13
14
15
C
C
C
33
34
35
B
B
A
16
17
B
D
36
37
B
C
18
19
20
C
B
D
38
39
40
B
C
D
UCLES 2008
Paper
01
First variant Mark Scheme

Page 2
Mark Scheme: Teachers version

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
C
C
21
22
D
B
3
4
5
B
B
D
23
24
25
A
C
C
6
7
A
A
26
27
A
C
8
9
10
B
C
C
28
29
30
A
B
C
11
12
B
A
31
32
D
A
13
14
15
C
A
D
33
34
35
B
C
B
16
17
A
A
36
37
B
A
18
19
20
C
C
D
38
39
40
B
C
C
UCLES 2009
Paper
11
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
B
A
21
22
B
C
3
4
5
C
D
A
23
24
25
B
D
D
6
7
B
A
26
27
D
C
8
9
10
D
D
C
28
29
30
B
D
A
11
12
B
D
31
32
D
C
13
14
15
B
D
C
33
34
35
A
C
D
16
17
B
A
36
37
A
D
18
19
20
B
C
B
38
39
40
C
B
B
UCLES 2009
Paper
11
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
C
A
B
B
21
22
23
24
A
D
C
D
25
6
7
8
9
A
D
C
B
26
27
28
29
B
D
B
B
10
30
11
12
13
14
A
A
D
D
31
32
33
34
C
B
C
A
15
35
16
17
18
19
C
C
A
D
36
37
38
39
A
D
B
B
20
40
UCLES 2010
Paper
11
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
3
4
A
D
D
D
21
22
23
24
C
B
C
D
25
6
7
8
9
B
C
B
C
26
27
28
29
D
C
C
C
10
30
11
12
13
14
B
D
A
C
31
32
33
34
C
C
A
C
15
35
16
17
18
19
D
A
B
B
36
37
38
39
A
B
D
C
20
40
UCLES 2010
Paper
11
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
A
B
21
22
D
D
3
4
5
A
D
A
23
24
25
C
C
A
6
7
A
C
26
27
A
B
8
9
10
D
B
D
28
29
30
B
D
D
11
12
C
D
31
32
A
B
13
14
15
D
C
C
33
34
35
C
A
D
16
17
A
A
36
37
B
C
18
19
20
B
B
C
38
39
40
B
C
C
Paper
11
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
B
D
21
22
B
C
3
4
5
D
B
C
23
24
25
D
D
C
6
7
A
C
26
27
C
B
8
9
10
B
C
C
28
29
30
A
B
D
11
12
D
C
31
32
C
B
13
14
15
D
C
C
33
34
35
D
B
C
16
17
D
A
36
37
B
A
18
19
20
A
C
A
38
39
40
B
B
A
Paper
11
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
A
C
21
22
D
A
3
4
5
B
D
B
23
24
25
C
C
C
6
7
D
A
26
27
D
A
8
9
10
C
C
B
28
29
30
D
C
D
11
12
C
B
31
32
C
D
13
14
15
A
A
D
33
34
35
B
C
B
16
17
A
D
36
37
D
C
18
19
20
A
D
B
38
39
40
B
B
B
Paper
11
Page 2
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Question
Number
Key
Question
Number
Key
1
2
C
A
21
22
C
A
3
4
5
B
A
C
23
24
25
D
B
C
6
7
C
A
26
27
A
B
8
9
10
D
D
C
28
29
30
A
B
B
11
12
B
B
31
32
B
B
13
14
15
D
B
D
33
34
35
B
A
C
16
17
D
D
36
37
A
D
18
19
20
A
B
B
38
39
40
D
C
D
Cambridge International Examinations 2012
Paper
11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory May 1999
1
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
speed = distance/time in any form

20/50
0.4 (cm/s)
1
1
1
3
W1
towards pivot, or equivalent
pivot between W & W1
closer to W
1
1
1
1
4
middle box ticked

solid molecules vibrating / moving about a fixed position
gas molecules faster, move on one path until collision
chemical
heat (or equiv.)
light (or equiv.)
motion OR kinetic
position OR potential
geothermal
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
straight line
through origin
calculate gradient OR R = V/I
1
1
1
3
2
3
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
dispersion OR refraction
spectrum
red
red
(ideally, those colours which are not absorbed by the red filter)
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
(b)
coil turns
current-carrying coil in magnetic field experiences turning effect
(allow l for reference to force on current-carrying conductor/coil)
(electric) motor (ignore reference to d.c. or a.c.)
OR galvanometer etc
idea of avoiding contamination

idea of preventing radiation getting out
idea of warning of the presence of radioactive material
1
1
1
3
volume = l x w x h
3
volume of paper = 0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 OR 0.003 (m )
density = mass/volume in any form
OR
2.4 or 2.4(stated)
0.3 x 0.2 x 0.05 candidate's volume
800 allow e.c.f. if working shown
1
1
1
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)(i)
(ii)
-1-
2
1
4
1
1
(b)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
10
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
11
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
12
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
kg/m
24N
24 OR candidate's weight substituted at top
0.3 x 0.2 OR 0.06 substituted at bottom
400 allow e.c.f. if working shown
2
N / m OR Pa
half (NOT less)
same
half (allow ecf from (i))
half (allow ecf from (i))
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
ruler close to spring

measure original length
OR note reading of bottom of spring/other reference
hang load
measure final length
OR note new reading of bottom of spring etc
subtract
straight line sloping up
through origin
straight line through origin, but smaller slope
increases speed OR accelerates
same increase
same force
ON DIAGRAM
tube, closed at top
reservoir
mercury at suitable levels in tube & reservoir
appropriate meniscus on mercury (x3)
LABELLING
any 2 from: tube, reservoir, mercury, vacuum, scale
h indicating mercury column
clear & correct indication of distance
5 (cm)
idea of excess pressure
less
L.H. mercury higher than R.H. mercury
LH down, RH up BOTH
bigger
A and H
G and F
B and E
any waveform
reasonably constant period (by eye)
reasonably constant amplitude (by eye)
vertical line
different spacing
ladys waves closer together than mans waves
(allow 1 only for: mans waves more irregular shape)
-2-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory November 1999
1
(a)
(b)
volume = l x b x h
= 8 x 5 x 2
3
= 80 (cm )
line shown at 80 mark
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
(b)
dot at intersection of AX and BY

straight line through C and candidates centre of mass
1
1
2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
attraction
repulsion
attraction
nothing
1
1
1
1
4
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
BC
had to lift own weight / overcome gravity
greater
same ( or greater) work
less time / faster / power = work/time
1
1
1
1
1
5
(a)
series circuit using recognisable symbols

correct symbols for switch and cell / battery
correct symbol for battery
(b)(i) second bell in parallel with first
(ii)
more current / amps / charge / energy from battery
1
1
1
1
1
(a)
1
1
1
1
1
5
(b)
7
normal clearly and correctly shown

angle i correctly marked
angle r correctly marked
ray bent upwards
parallel to incident ray by eye
Any two from
reference to convection
hot water rises
no convection if heated at the top
Any three from
nucleus at centre
electrons in outside nucleus
electrons in orbital / shell
number of electrons equals the charge on the nucleus
(a)(i) fA shown between slit and lens A

clear and correct indication of distance
(ii)
fB shown between lens B and screen
clear and correct indication of distance
(b)(i) Any two of the following pairs
ray from top of O parallel to axis (by eye)
down through F ( _ mm)
ray from top of O through P ( _ mm)
continuing straight on
-1-
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
(ii)
(iii)
10
11
Any five relevant points

core
coil on right hand limb
coil on left hand limb
iron
primary
secondary
a.c.
input
output
laminations
etcetera
(b)
good conductor / low resistance / reduction of energy loss
(c)(i) correct rearrangement of equation
correct substitution
VS = 30 (V)
(ii)
zero
(d)
the same / a little less because of losses
4
1
1
1
1
1
13
(a)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
12
ray from top of O through F ( _ mm), not shown

parallel to axis after lens (by eye)
(Additional incorrect rays subtract 1 for each)
Both rays bending at centre line / refraction
at both surfaces
image in correct position
ecf for own image drawn
real
inverted
larger
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
any two different properties

appropriate means of detecting these properties
idea of a reference point
idea of a physical event which occurs at one temperature
steam / boiling water
100
melting ice / freezing water
0
any reference to standard pressure / pure / steam in above
melting point correctly indicated
boiling point correctly indicated
correct region identified
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
air molecules moving (not vibrating)

randomly
rapidly
molecule moving towards the wall
molecule bouncing off the wall
collision
with wall
many
force / push on wall
move faster / gain more energy
more / harder collisions (with wall)
greater pressure
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
-2-
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory May/June 2000
1
(a)
(b)
(c)
weight
mass
greater density OR less air gaps between potatoes
(a)
Any three from:

conduction
convection
radiation
evaporation
suitable procedure
correct form of heat loss for candidates procedure
(b)(i)
(ii)
3
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c) (i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
5
wind wire round iron bar

both ends of coil connected to battery
extra valid point e.g. cut off length of wire, strip ends etc.
suitable check e.g. picking up iron(filings)
deflects compass needle
repels another magnet
move into coil connected to galvanometer
1
1
1
refraction (allow slowing down of light/ angle of refraction)

normal correct, by eye
i correctly shown between candidates normal and ray
refraction away from normal
along ST
1. (total internal) reflection
2.angle in water> critical angle
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
idea that light travels faster than sound

extra detail
e.g. light travels extremely fast / much faster than sound /
8
instantaneously / at 3x 10 m/s
echo OR equivalent
idea of absorption of sound / dispersion / diffraction /
sound has travelled further / lower air density at altitude
(distance = ) approximately 330 x 4
1320(m)
1
4
1
1
1
1
7
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
smoke particles ticked

3rd box ticked
4th box ticked
1
1
2
4
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
potential OR stored OR position OR gravitational (potential)

kinetic OR motion OR movement
turbine(s) OR coil(s) OR blade(s) OR rotor / fins / wheel
electrical / electricity
1
1
1
1
(b)
Any two from:

waves
tides
steam
geothermal
2
6
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
320
candidates value correctly plotted _ small square
160
candidates value correctly plotted _ small square
points plotted at (60,80)and (80,40) _ small square
smooth curve through candidates points, by eye
either of last two boxes ticked
randomness OR idea of background
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
(a)(i)
(ii)
D
large(st) area
least pressure / pressure more spread out
increases
decreases
length AB
width BC
thickness CD
area touching the

horizontal surface
mass of sheet
weight of sheet
density of metal
pressure on surface
1
1
1
(b)
10
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c) (i)
(ii)
11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
12
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
stays the same

1
1
1
1
1
1
9
R = V/l in any form

12/1.5
8_
12(V)
0.75 (A)
16(_) OR 2 x candidates (a), correctly evaluated
16 (_/m) OR candidates (b)(ii)
64/candidates(ci)
4 (m) OR 64/candidate's (ci) correctly evaluated
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
sound
infra-red
X-rays
no air / vacuum on the moon implied
1. sound needs a medium/air
2. radio waves dont need a medium/air
radio / _ wave
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
B
greater force / weight / heavier
reference to formula or constancy of length
B
1
1
1
1
(ii)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
greater weight / force / heavier

reference to formula or constancy of height lifted
weight (of hammer) OR mass OR force
time (to lift)
energy of motion OR K.E.
Any two from:
heat. OR frictional
sound
K.E. of nail
1
1
1
1
1
2
11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory November 2000
1
2
speeding up
steady speed
(a)
(b)
slowing down
at rest
YES
YES
NO
increase diameter (accept size) of handle (accept tap)
OR change to type B/C
OR oil it
3
1
4
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
31 (m/s)
6 OR 11 0R 22 (m/s)
10 (s)
distance = area under graph OR distance = average speed x time
_ x l0 x 15
75 (m)
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
A, D, E, H ticked
E or H
evaporates more rapidly/easily
4
1
1
6
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
internal /(random) thermal / kinetic / heat / motion / movement

beaker + water / second one / middle one
1.
250 (g)
2.
250 (g)
3.
1050(J)
4.
200(J)
idea that sand requires less energy to raise its temp / temp of sand rises
more for same energy input / equivalent statement for water / water has
bigger SHC
1
1
1
1
1
1
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
(c)(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
8
(a)
(b)

reflected ray correct, by eye
i and r identified by Xs
OR angles with mirror identified by Xs
dot in correct position 2mm
ear on right identified
60 (cm)
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
refraction OR deviation
different path (could be from 2nd surface)
below red path
starting at first surface
2 downward refractions, not below normal at first
dispersion
T somewhere just above emergent ray
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
density = mass/volume in any form

12.6/1.4
3
9 (g/cm )
1
1
1
-1-
(c)
(d)
(e)
no e.c.f.
brass OR sensible deduction from candidates (b)
aluminium
(a)
R=R + R
60 (_)
p.d./current OR voltage/current OR volt/amp OR V/I OR 6/I etc
correct rearrangement
6/60 or candidates answer to (a)
0.1 ecf
A OR amp(s)
(b)(ii) x 40
4 OR candidates correct evaluation
V or volt(s)
answer to (c) or 4 (V)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
6
90/6 OR 90/ candidates answer to (b)(i)
15cm e.c.f.
1. (arcs of) circles
2. constant depth
same speed in all directions (or equiv.) OR same wave spacing
indication of vertical motion
up and down OR circles
transverse
longitudinal OR pressure
indication of motion along KL
backwards and forwards OR back and forth
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
(d)
10
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)(i)
(ii)
11
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
12
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
passes a current / charge / electricity) (NOT conducts electricity) OR

(some) electrons free to move about
does not pass a current / does not conduct electricity / all charges/electrons
fixed OR bad conductor
repel / move away
first and third boxes ticked
84 or bottom one
210 or top one
84 OR bottom one
210 - 84 OR 126 OR take bottom from top
OR take proton no. from nucleon no.
206
82
-2-
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
2
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory May/June 2001
1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
(a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
(a) (i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(a)
(b) (i)
3.05 ticked
3.35 ticked
30 (minutes) e.c.f.
30/5 e.c.f.
6 (minutes) e.c.f
1
1
1
some idea of turning/rotating

effect (of the force) OR force x (perpendicular) distance
same
X marked (on branch) at vertical through A 1/2 mm
1
1
1
1
4
idea of air molecules moving

idea of air molecules striking something
idea of air molecules striking balloon
move faster OR more energy
increases
idea of "more collisions" OR "harder collisions" OR "greater
momentum change" OR "greater force"
1
1
1
1
1
orientation and size reasonably correct

vertical edge correct distance from mirror (by eye)
all three corners correct position (by eye)
1
1
1
3
A and G OR B and H OR C and I

B and C OR E and F OR H and I
number of waves / oscillations / cycles / wavelengths / crests / troughs
per second / unit time / divided by time
1/0.2
5 (Hz)
1
1
+ve and no charge circled

does not conduct / bad conductor
electricity / charge / current / electrons
any acceptable recognisable insulator
2
1
1
1
5
0.1 (A)
IR
1.2 (V) c.a.o.
voltmeter / multimeter set to volts range
larger
12+5+3
20 (_)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
alternating / a.c.
N P/N s OR IS / Ip
iron NOT steel
12Ns = 100/50 in any form
1
1
1
1
2
5
1
6
2
1
1
6
(ii)
(iii)
9
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
6 (V)
6 (V)
0 (V) OR "it won't work"
1
1
1
7
Graph special case:

4 for a perfect line but no visible points
3 for poor line through our points
points correctly plotted _ small square
reasonable line through candidate's points
distance = area under graph OR average velocity x time
_ x base x height OR _ x 3 x 15
22.5 (m)
25 (m/s)
distance = speed x time (in any form) OR area under graph
25 x 3 e.c.f from (c)
75 (m) e.c.f. from (c)
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11
10
(a)
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii)
(d)
(e)
same
greater
chemical
food
potential OR PE OR gravitational OR position
PE decreases
KE increases
energy turned to sound
idea of energy losses OR idea of sound becoming heat
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
11
(a) (i)
0.2 x 0.1 x 0.06 OR 20 x10 x 6

-3
1.2 x 10 OR 0.0012 OR 12000
3
3
m OR cm according to working
candidates volume x 2400 (kg)
2.88 (kg)
1440 (kg)
less OR lighter OR mass in (a)(ii) is greater
different from brick
greater than brick
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
electrons / cathode rays (NOT _-particles)

something moving across screen / hitting the screen
idea of fluorescence / luminous / glows / mention of
fluorescent screen
idea of greater flow / energy of electrons / more electrons /
increased intensity of cathode rays / electrons move faster
OR increase anode voltage / increase electron gun voltage
(Y) input OR Y-plates
1.Y gain OR volts/(cm) (NOT Y-shift)
2. time-base OR ms/(cm) NOT X-shift
3.vertical line OR dot moving up and down
1
1
1
(ii)
(iii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
12
(a) (i)
(ii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
1
1
1
1
1
8
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/2) Core Theory October/November 2001
1
(a)
(b)
16 (cm)
16/8 e.c.f.
2 (cm) e.c.f.
1
1
1
3
wider base
idea of lowering C of M e.g. heavier base, make it shorter
1
1
2
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
heat it
increases
any suitable example
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
ray refracted down

parallel to incident ray (by eye)
Total Internal Refraction shown
Correct angle (by eye)
ray strikes surface at more than critical angle
straight on at first surface
straight on at second surface
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
should be refraction at first surface

should be dispersion at first surface
thermometer / thermocouple / bolometer / hand / thermopile / thermistor /
thermochromic paper / goggles
NOT I.R. detector
I. R. shown above red
1
1
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
any two from:

radio (or TV), microwave, ultra-violet (or UV), x-rays, y-rays
(NOT cosmic)
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
bar magnet held at each end of rod, implicit in answer

magnet won't attract / repel (either end)
magnet attracts both ends
magnet repels (one end) OR "the one left after the others are identified"
iron (or ferromagnetic)
electricity / current (in coil)
switch off current OR equiv. NOT switch off electromagnet
(a)
any two from:

mention of a fault / short-circuit
large current NOT increased current
overheating of cables
fire
(electric) shock
water conducts / transfers electricity (NOT "water and
electricity don't mix")
possible short circuit OR possible (electric) shock
(b)
(c)
8
(a)
some indication that nucleus changes

any particle emitted
1
1
2
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
2
1
1
1
5
1
1
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(c)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)(i)
(ii)
(d)(i)
(ii)
10
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
(c)(i)
(ii)
11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
12
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
becomes a different atom / nucleus / nuclide / element

5 (min)
4 OR 20/candidates half-life correctly evaluated
25 5.... only
022
100
(NOT 1)
(milli)ammeter OR multimeter set to amp / current range
A e.c.f.
voltmeter OR multimeter set to volt / p.d. range
V e.c.f.
resistor / resistance
variable
RHEOSTAT (2) NOT potentiometer
vary current OR vary p.d. across R NOT vary resistance
find gradient OR choose one point and use p.d./current
correct figures from graph seen or implied
5
_ OR ohm
greater
straight line through origin
greater slope e.c.f. from (i)
1
1
1
1
2
2
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
14
aluminium
greatest density OR "because mass increases as density
increases
aluminium OR candidates (a) (i)
aluminium OR candidates (a) (i)
A
smallest area
small area OR "because pressure increases as area
decreases"
great pressure (on sand)
any sensible suggestion involving larger area in contact with
sand (must involve chair and sand)
temperature NOT C
mercury OR alcohol OR pentane
100
C NOT C or C
stays the same OR "nothing"
ice
pure OR melting
any detail of sensible apparatus
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
bigger temperature difference

the glass is thin OR the window is a good conductor
OR because it isn't double-glazed
sum of figures quoted
4 150 000 (J/hour)
Any one of:

convection
radiation
through roof/ceiling
through floor
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9
1
1
1
draughts
opening door/ window
NOT switching on air conditioning
1
5
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
Mark Scheme
QUESTION
1
(b)
EITHER
greater
AND
Thickness of rule
OR overlap at ends
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
TARGET
GRADE
F
SCHEME
(a)
Syllabus
0625
OR
smaller
AND
thread stretched when
on rule
OR worn rule ends
Paper
2
MARK
B1
B1
2
(i)
10
B1
(ii)
stretch OR shape (or suitable sketch)
B1
(i)
120
B1
(ii)
up(wards) OR vertical (NOT vertically down)

Accept arrow on diagram
B1
(iii)
increase size/area of blocks/larger blocks

OR increase number of blocks
OR less soil in pot (NOT put pot on harder
ground)
B1
5
0.97 0.51
C1
0.46
A1
(i)
15
B1
(ii)
515 e.c.f.
B1
(iii)
D = M/V in any form, seen or implied

(words/letters/mix)
C1
EITHER
OR
OR
460
515
0.46
515
0.46
515 10-6 e.c.f.
C1
893.2No e.c.f.
8.932 10-4
(any number of significant figures)
C1
0.8932
0.89
8.9 10-4
890 (e.c.f. for

significant
figures)
A1
g/cm3
(0.89 kg/dm3 is
OK)
kg/cm3
(NOT 8.9-04)
kg/m3
B1
9
Page 3
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
Paper
2
idea of air molecules moving (allow vibrating)

(N.B. collide = moving)
C1
idea of air molecules striking something (condone

themselves)
C1
idea of air molecules striking walls
A1
(i)
moves down
B1
(ii)
increases (e.c.f.)
M1
A1
6
line starting at 0 oC
B1
reasonably horizontal line at any temp for > half the

time
horizontal from zero time as far as dotted line (ignore

anything to R. of line)
M1 mark
alongside
graph
A1
(i)
idea of more collisions

(per unit time) (e.c.f.)
OR P V1
Syllabus
0625
must follow
from (i)
water boils OR heat loss =

heat supplied (NOT evaporates/
turns to gas)
mark (i)
and (ii)
together
B1
(ii)
gives water/molecules energy to

escape OR break bonds
OR change state OR heat loss
from sides/surface/to air
(i)
B1
(ii)
reflected ray correct, by eye (ignore normal;

ignore any arrow)
B1
(iii)
both i and r correctly marked (condone

sloppy normal and sloppy refracted ray)
B1
B1
4
parallel to ray striking mirror 1 (allow incident ray)

OR same direction (NOT equal/same as)
(N.B. sentence must be completed, i.e. no inference
from line on diagram)
B1
5
mark
alongside
diagram
Page 4
Mark Scheme
(a)
680
(b)
5 points plotted
ignore 0,0 (e.c.f.)
(c)
1360
B1
small square (-1 e.e.o.o.)
B2
reasonable line through his points

drawn with rule/thickness reasonable
B1
(i)
flash
B1
light travels quickly OR sound travels slowly

(accept figure)
C1
light travels faster than sound (accept figure)
C1
light travels much faster than sound (accept

figures)
A1
1400 - 1450 OR correct value from his graph

12 square
B1
clear and correct indication on graph of how

obtained (minimum: dot at appropriate point)
B1
10
1
2
1700
Paper
2
(iii)
1020
Syllabus
0625
(a)
Charge(s) OR energy (NOT electricity (condone as

extra), charged particles (condone as extra), current,
electrons (condone as extra), voltage)
B1
(b)
(i)
B1
(ii)
mention of 6V
B1
mention of rising OR not instantaneous (NOT

reads)
B1
(iii)
any realistic example of something turned

on/off after a time lapse, e.g. electronic egg
timer, turn-off bedside radio
B1
6
(i)
wire shown curved between A and B
C1
wire displaced all along between A and B,

and reasonably smooth
A1
idea of force (in any direction)
M1
on current/current-carrying conductor
A1
when in magnetic field
A1
(a)
(ii)
mark
alongside
diagram
Page 5
10
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(b)
line curved in opposite direction
B1
6
(a)
(i)
electrons OR cathode rays (NOT betaparticles)
B1
something hitting the screen (NOT form a

spot)
B1
idea of fluorescence (of the screen, NOT the

gas)
B1
(ii)
focus
B1
(iii)
time base OR ms/cm
B1
(iv)
electrons/cathode rays deflected (e.c.f. from

(i); allow attracted if intention clear)
B1
something deflected horizontally
M1
some idea of repeated sweeps/back and

forth
A1
(i)
(y-)input (allow y-plates)
B1
(ii)
1. trace moves horizontally/sideways/left/right
B1
2. trace moves vertically/up/down
B1
11
Connection to either side of cell, but not shorted out
B1
VR in series with lamp, and not shorted out OR

correctly connected as a potential divider (condone
inclusion of a switch)
B1
(i)
R1 + R2
C1
12
A1
1. Resistance = p.d./current in any form

(words/letters/mix)
C1
6/12 e.c.f.
C1
0.5 or 12 e.c.f.
A1
(b)
11
Mark Scheme
(a)
(b)
(ii)
mark
alongside
diagram
Page 6
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
2. his calculated current

his calculated current
all 3
B1
A OR amp OR ampere somewhere in (ii)
B1
(iii)
B1
10
his calculated current
12
voltmeter shown correctly connected (any

recognisable symbol; allow re-drawn circuit)
(a)
his weight
B1
(b)
distance OR height
B1
(c)
(i)
1000N climber OR heavier OR first
B1
(ii)
his answer to (i)
B1
(i)
chemical (accept fuel)
B1
(ii)
food (accept muscles)
B1
(iii)
maintaining body function

C
B1
7
(d)
heat loss
K.E.
sounds
any 1
Mark first correct answer, condone extras
mark
alongside
diagram
Page 2
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS NOVEMBER 2003
QUESTION
1
(a)
Syllabus
0625
SCHEME
Paper
2
TARGET
GRADE
MARK
(i)
G within block, to left of vertical through midpoint or AB
B1
(ii)
Vertical line shown through A
B1
M1
more stable (or equivalent statement) e.g. less likely to

topple or weight within base
A1
so it does not topple over (or equivalent)
B1
(b)
(c)
5
2
reference mark on wheel
*(use stopwatch to)

time gets only one
of these
datum line (could be top or bottom)

*start timing/stopwatch as mark passes datum line
time a number of rotations (accept 1 here)
time at least 20 rotations
5C
B5
any 5
*stop stopwatch
divide time by number of rotations
repeat
make sure stopwatch at zero
3
gravitational OR potential OR PE OR GPE
B1
3F
B3
B1
motion OR KE OR kinetic
heat/internal/thermal
any order (1 eeoo)
sound
heat (accept potential)
OR internal/thermal
NOT strain potential/NOT chemical potential
NOT sound, even as an extra
4
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
vehicle 2
M1
large(r) area (in contact with ground)
A1
low/less pressure
A1
less likely to sink/get stuck
A1
small area
C1
large pressure
B1
(weight spread over) large(r) area NOT body area
B1
small/less pressure
B1
reference to weight somewhere in (b)
B1
9
(a)
(i)
ray perpendicular to surface at A (by eye)
B1
(ii)
normal at B correct (by eye)
B1
(iii)
ray refracted down at B, but NOT along surface
B1
(iv)
normal at D correct (by eye)
B1
(v)
ray refracted up at D, but NOT along surface
B1
Page 3
(b)
(a)
Syllabus
0625
converging OR will meet OR *one up, one down ALLOW *

opposite
B1
straight on OR split (depending on thickness of ray) OR no

change (indirection) OR not refracted
B1
(i)
speed
B1
(ii)
frequency, ALLOW wavelength
B1
(iii)
wavelength
B1
gamma OR OR cosmic
B1
condone x-rays as an extra

(a)
(b)
B1
*only if diagram acceptable
(b)
Paper
2
same deviation (or equivalent) OR angles of refraction

same
(c)
Mark Scheme
straight line sloping up to right
B1
through origin
B1
(i)
voltmeter OR multimeter on volts range (condone spelling)
B1
(ii)
potential difference OR p.d. OR volts/voltage (no e.c.f.)
B1
(iii)
ammeter OR multimeter on current/amps range (condone

spelling)
B1
(iv)
current OR intensity OR amps/amperes OR ampage (no

e.c.f.) NOT A
B1
(v)
evidence of 7.5
C1
evidence of 0.3
C1
7.5/0.3 OR V/I OR volts/current e.c.f. if written down
C1
25 e.c.f. only if V/I used
A1
or ohm
B1
hisR/50
C1
0.5 (/m) e.c.f.
A1
(vi)
13
8
(a)
(b)
EITHER
OR
iron filings
(plotting) compass
B1
NOT put
sprinkle/spread/pour/scatter
place near end of magnet

0000
F
0000000
B1
000000
tap card
mark end(s) of compass
B1
further detail
further detail
B1
B1
attraction of compass S pole

repulsion of compass N pole
attraction of S pole of another magnet
repulsion of N pole of another magnet
any 1
attraction of Earths N pole

repulsion of Earths S pole
Page 4
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
decreases
M1
by 2
A1
decreases
M1
by 2
A1
decreases
B1
66 (yrs)
C1
evidence of 3 half-lives
C1
fraction 1/8 seen or implied
C1
400
A1
9
1
small square (1 eeoo) ignore
2
0,0 (1 for very large blobs)
3F
B3
(b)
45 circled OR 2 circles ACCEPT point circled on graph
B1
(c)
idea of stretching more than before (for same load increase)

OR reference to elastic/proportional limit in some way
B1
10 (a)
points plotted correctly
(d)
11 (a)
EITHER
OR
measure unloaded length

ALLOW measure spring
NOT extension
idea of fixed end and free

end
B1
measure loaded length NOT

extension
note position of free end, no

load
B1
subtract
measure movt. free end,

loaded
B1
8
(i)
100
B1
(ii)
B1
(iii)
indication to the left of 0C mark
B1
B1
(b)
expansion of a solid
expansion of a gas/pressure of a gas
current/pd/e.m.f. of a thermocouple
conductivity/resistance of a conductor/wire/thermistor..
any 1
colour of a hot wire

melting of a wax
NOT expansion of alcohol ACCEPT density of a liquid
N1/N2 = V1/V2
12 (a)
(b)
in any form
4
F
C1
8000/N2 = 240/6 or correct substitution into correct equation
C1
200
A1
ALLOW B1 for 20 if 800 used instead of

8000 (working must be shown)
(i)
200 e.c.f. i.e. his (a)
B1
(ii)
400 e.c.f. i.e. 2 x his (a), evaluated
B1
5
Page 2
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
QUESTION
Paper
2
TARGET
GRADE
MARK
(a)
10
B1
(b)
division by 5 OR division by 6
C1
2.0 OR 2
A1
10 his(b) OR 11 his(b)
C1
20
A1
5
straight vertical arrow upwards to/from rail
B1
arrow to R of centre of rail
C1
arrow at R.H. end of rail (within 2 width of resting

block)
A1
(b)
moment ticked
B1
(c)
reduce weight/mass OR shorten rail, lighter rail,

thinner rail, open sideways, suitable long handle,
suitable 2 pulley system
B1
5
(a)
PQ or 0-50s or the horizontal part

NOT just P or just Q
B1
(b)
changing speed (however indicated) NO e.c.f from

(a). ACCEPT acceleration
but NOT increasing speed
B1
(c)
distance = area indicated in words or figures

anywhere in (c)
B1
20 50
C1
1000
A1
20 50 OR his(i)
C1
500
A1
(iii)
his(i) + (ii) correctly evaluated
B1
(iv)
his(iii)/100 OR total distance/total time stated
C1
correct evaluation
A1
10
(c)
SCHEME
Syllabus
0625
(a)
(i)
(ii)
c.a.o
c.a.o
Page 3
(a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(horizontal) force
allow F
B1
distance (travelled from A to B)

condone perpendicular
allow D OR d OR S
B1
goes faster OR less time
B1
accelerates
B1
(i)
2nd person (however expressed)
B1
(ii)
more work/energy OR bigger force OR pulls

harder
B1
smaller time OR greater speed

(more work/second gets B1, B1)
B1
7
(a)
drops OR decreases OR cools down
B1
(b)
idea of loss of molecules (from surface) OR

molecules evaporate
M1
more energetic/faster molecules

(SPECIAL CASE remaining molecules slower B1)
A1
(c)
any sensible example where cooling is noticeable

e.g. (feeling cold) after swimming, sweating,
refrigerators
B1
4
(a)
(increased) internal energy OR (increased) KE of

molecules OR (increased) thermal/heat (energy)
B1
(b)
any mention of thermal capacity
C1
smaller thermal capacity
A1
3
light wave fastest
2F
B1+B1
longitudinal
B1
transverse
B1
transverse
B1
B1
6
(a)
water wave slowest

(b)
(c)
light wave ticked
)
)
)
use + = 0 if extras
Page 4
A
B
C
D
Syllabus
0625
magnet OR magnetised
magnet OR magnetised
iron OR unmagnetised
aluminium
Paper
2
F
F
C
C
B1
B1
B1
B1
4
(a)
points plotted correctly ( small square)
3F
B3 (-1 eeoo)
(b)
smooth curve through points by eye, not too thick
B1
(c)
correct construction lines shown

(allow dot on curve at correct place)
B1
correct value from his graph, based on 800-400

( square)
B1
(i)
smaller
B1
(ii)
the same OR no change
B1
8
(i)
less turns on secondary

ACCEPT because Np=4800 and Ns=200
ACCEPT sycoil < pycoil
NOT secondary < primary
B1
(ii)
V2/V1 = N2/N1
C1
C1
10
A1
1. decreases
B1
2. runs slower OR will not work e.c.f. from

(iii)1.
B1
3C
B3
9
(d)
10
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a)
(iii)
(b)
in any form
ignore stage 1
from stage 2 onwards
B
E
A
D
)
)
)
)
(3 marks for any 3)

(2 marks for any 2)
(1 mark for any 1)
Page 5
11
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a)
thermistor
B1
(ii)
variable resistor (accept rheostat)
B1
(iii)
(ACCEPT LDR)
B1
(i)
1. resistance = p.d./current OR R=V/I

OR any correct reorganization
ACCEPT mixture of words and letters
B1
2. 12/0.5 OR correct sub in his 1, if shown
C1
24 c.a.o
A1
OR ohm
B1
1. decreases
B1
2. idea of greater resistance
B1
3. dimmer OR does not glow/work/shine

NOTE: NO e.c.f. in (ii)
B1
10
beard tip to dot perpendicular to mirror (by

eye)
B1
distance beard tip to mirror = dist. mirror to

dot (by eye)
B1
reflected ray along line from eye to his dot

(by eye)
M1
incident ray from beard tip to join reflected

ray at mirror
A1
arrows from beard to eye
B1
(iii)
virtual
B1
(iv)
angle of incidence = angle of reflection OR

i = r OR they are equal OR sini = sinr
B1
(i)
right hand
B1
(ii)
mark shown under L.H. eye on Fig. 11.2
B1
9
(i)
(ii)
(b)
Paper
2
(i)
(ii)
12
Syllabus
0625
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Question
Scheme
(a)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
Target
Grade
Mark
96
B1
(b)
top left eye circled
B1
(c)
100 96 e.c.f.
C1
4 e.c.f.
C1
4/80 e.c.f.
C1
0.05 e.c.f.
A1
6
(a)
(b)
(i)
21
B1
(ii)
1 increases
B1
2 falls )
) both e.c.f.
3 rises )
B1
(i)
same
B1
(ii)
greater (accept comparison of directions)
B1
5
(a)
(i)
0.6 x 0.5 x 0.2
C1
0.06
A1
B1
mass/volume
C1
7.2/his(i)
C1
120 e.c.f.
A1
kg/m3
B1
(i)
greater than ticked
B1
(ii)
Because of the air in the corrugated cardboard
B1
(ii)
(b)
9
4
(a)
(b)
(i)
chemical
)
internal OR heat OR thermal ) any 2
but also accept
)
nuclear OR kinetic OR potential for one of the
marks
2F
B1,
B1
(ii)
radiation
B1
(i)
K.E. OR kinetic OR motion
B1
(ii)
conduction
B1
(iii)
gravitational OR P.E. OR potential OR

position
B1
chemical/fuel/food
B1
7
Page 2
(a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
bright specks OR (smoke) particles OR dots

NOT molecules, NOT air particles
B1
something moving (however expressed)
M1
rapidly OR randomly OR zig-zag
A1
air molecules OR air particles (NOT just air)
M1
collisions between smoke particles and air

mols/particles
A1
invisible
fast moving
random
2C
B1,
B1
B1
)
) any 2
)
Idea of faster movement or more jerky movement
8
6
(a)
aluminum
B1
copper
B1
gold
B1
insulator NOT non-conductor
B1
(i)
copper OR aluminum OR gold
B1
(ii)
any of the insulators
B1
(d)
convection
B1
(e)
intelligent mention of convection currents
B1
(b)
(c)
(accept to make sure always covered by water

NOT heat rises)
8
7
(a)
(i)
(ii)
C1
correct substitution in his equation OR 1600/5
C1
320 c.a.o.
A1
B1
2C
B1,
B1
light travels instantaneously/very fast OR

reference to reaction time
NOT just faster than sound
(b)
explosion heard sooner/less than 5s

second sound/echo/reflection (from
rock face)
louder
)
) any 2
)
)
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
repulsion
B1
repulsion
B1
attraction
B1
attraction
B1
attraction
B1
5
(a)
(b)
(i)
3
3
(ii)
(i)
(ii)
)
) both
B1
10 + 10
C1
20
A1
1.5A ticked
B1
3A OR 3.0A
B1
B1
5 ticked
6
10
(a)
electrons
B1
(b)
neutrons OR atoms
B1
(c)
electrons
B1
(d)
electrons
B1
(e)
protons
B1
neutrons
B1
protons
B1
neutrons
B1
(f)
8
11
(a)
(b)
(i)
A or E
B1
(ii)
CE or AC or 2.5 cm
B1
2f, 1C
B1,
B1,
B1
B1
real
inverted
enlarged
(c)
)
)
) mark in pairs using + = 0
)
)
any ray from 0 to I refracting at mid-line of lens or

refractions at both surfaces
Page 4
12
(a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(i)
line from B to intersection
B1
(ii)
dot at printed intersection
B1
L.H. ornament
M1
lower C of M
A1
block A
M1
narrower/smaller base
A1
6
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
Question
Scheme
Target
Grade
100 20
C1
level shown at 80 (ignore meniscus) 1mm (need

not actually draw surface)
A1
(i)
16 (cm)
B1
(ii)
sub of (i) into formula
C1
sub of 100 into formula
C1
6.25
A1
B1
(a)
(b)
e.c.f. from (i)
cm
Accept working from any two correct values

2
(a)
Mark
2100 900
C1
12 OR
A1
B1
10.06 (i.e. travel time)
(b)
1500
(c)
B1
(i)
find area of first trapezium (or equivalent) bold

area under graph
B1
(ii)
find total area
M1
divide by total time OR divide by 12 OR divide

by travel time
A1
(d)
(ignore unit) OR 15.00 OR 1500 to 1800
7
3
(a)
(b)
it turns
M1
clockwise
A1
(i)
stationary OR nothing
B1
(ii)
horizontal arrow (intention of from OR to pivot condone gap, if clear)
M1
to left
A1
10 (N)
B1
6
(a)
gravitational
B1
(b)
kinetic
B1
(c)
kinetic
B1
(d)
electrical
B1
(e)
internal
B1
ACCEPT heat
condone valid extras
Page 2
(a)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
(i)
increased
(ii)
molecules move faster/have more energy
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
B1
B1
more frequent collisions (condone with each

other)/harder collisions
B1
collisions with walls
B1
idea of collisions causing a force
B1
(i)
evaporation
B1
(ii)
energy of molecules increases/molecules move

faster
B1
molecules escape/break bonds
C1
faster/higher energy molecules escape
A1
OR collisions more energetic
(b)
9
6
(a)
resistance = voltage/current
words, figures, mix
C1
2F
A1+A1
candidates 4 points correctly plotted small

square
-1 e.e.o.o.
2F
B2
(i)
reasonable curve, smooth, not too thick
B1
(ii)
resistance/temperature changes smoothly
B1
(i)
1500 - 1700 OR candidates lowest point on

graph, quoted correctly
B1
(ii)
idea of lowest resistance
B1
330
(b)
(c)
(d)
in any form, letters,
6.3
9
7
(a)
(from L to R) infra red (OR

x rays/gamma rays
wave)/ ultra violet/
sound ticked
4F
B1 x 4
B1
5
(a)
(b)
one 90 deviation at 1st mirror, by eye
C1
two 90 deviations at 1st mirror, by eye
A1
emerging rays parallel to incident rays, by eye
B1
upside down OR inverted OR same size OR real
B1
4
Page 3
(a)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
)
)
OR speed = 2 x distance/time )
Paper
2
speed = distance/time
(b)
C1
2 x 249/332
C1
1.5
A1
2C
B1 + B1
0.75 and 2.25 ticked

extras
in any form
e.c.f. use + x = 0 for
Mark (b) independent of (a)

10 (a)
(b)
(i)
conductor OR metal
B1
(ii)
metal (but not if answer to (i)) OR any named

metal OR any named liquid conductor
B1
(ii)
apply an e.m.f. OR apply a p.d. OR equivalent
B1
(i)
insulator
extra)
B1
(ii)
B1
B1
(c)
NOT non-conductor (but condone as
insulator OR (b)(i) e.c.f. from (b)(i) NOT

the name of a type of insulator
just
6
11 (a)
same ticked
B1
(b)
B1
(c)
R1 + R2 in any form, letters or numbers
C1
A1
(d)
(e)
e.c.f. from (b)
(i)
1 ticked
B1
(ii)
more than 0.3A ticked
B1
(i)
increases/stretches
B1
(ii)
increases c.a.o.
B1
8
12 (a)
1 (unit)
neutral /
1/1800 (unit) OR tiny /

OR outside nucleus
1
OR
OR negligible
2000
in shell
NOT zero
(b)
zero
-1 (unit)
in nucleus
/
in orbit
NOT just negative OR
4F,2C
B1 x6
(i)
proton and neutron
B1
(ii)
1.
4 (units)
B1
2.
(+)2 (units) NOT -2
B1
9
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
MARK
1
(a)
8.5 (cm)
B1
(b)
19.0 OR 19 ( 0.1) (cm)
B1
(c)
his (b) his (a)
C1
his correct subtraction
A1
[4]
(a)
distance/time
C1
25/2
C1
12.5
A1
m/s
B1
(b)
less OR decreased OR slowing down
B1
(c)
more than ecf
B1
[6]
(a)
(b)
skate
M1
small area (in contact with ice)
A1
large area
)
wind causes large force on side of truck ) any 2
vehicle liable to blow over
)
B1,B1
[4]
(a)
40 or 160
B1
(b)
720
B1
(c)
W=Fxd
C1
720 x 0.2
C1
144
A1
J OR joule
B1
his(c)/1.2
C1
his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated
C1
0.5 x his(c)/1.2 correctly evaluated

i.e. 60 gets C1, C1, A1 and 120 gets C1, C1, A0)
W OR watt OR J/s
A1
(d)
B1
[10]
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(a)
level in tube lower, or equivalent
B1
(b)
air has expanded (could be scored in (a), but not twice)

OR Kinetic Theory application to pressure
B1
(c)
any sensible comment

e.g. limited temp range, air bubbles out of tube, slow acting,
large volume of air, change in air pressure, no scale
B1
[3]
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(b)
current (in coil)
B1
magnetic field (around coil)
B1
magnetised OR attract
B1
current zero at first (even if only at origin)
B1
horizontal first part
B1
vertical rise somewhere
B1
horizontal final part
B1
[7]
(a)
three rays parallel and horizontal
B1
(b)
(i)
both principal foci marked
B1
(ii)
refraction at mid-line, then through F

(allow 2 surface refractions if lead back to mid-line)
B1
(iii)
ray through F to mid-line, then parallel

(allow as (ii))
B1
(iv)
image drawn between axis and intersection, perpendicular to axis C

(condone no labelling)
B1
drawing accuracy mark for image 2 squares tall 2mm and

4 squares away 2mm
B1
[6]
(a)
(b)
(i)
iron OR steel OR any ferromagnetic material

(B0 if magnetised stated)
B1
(ii)
1. nothing ecf from (i)

2. nothing
B1
B1
L.H. compass pointing to R
B1
top compass pointing to L
B1
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
bottom compass pointing to L
B1
[6]
(a)
(b)
1 correct
C1
2 correct
C1
4 correct
A1
(i)
all 6 components shown in series (any order)

ecf from (a) for symbols
B1
(ii)
voltmeter connected across cell, either our diag or his
B1
(iii)
both
B1
(iv)
0.5
B1
(v)
current stops OR ammeters read zero OR other bulb goes out
B1
[8]
10 (a)
(b)
10 x 4 x 6.5
C1
260 (cm3)
A1
D = M/V in any form, words, letters, numbers, mixed
C1
250/his V
ecf if written down
C1
0.961538
any no. of sig figs ecf
C1
0.96 ecf
A1
g/cm3 unless inconsistent with his figures
B1
[7]
Page 4
11 (a)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
electrons
B1
(b)
B1
(c)
(i)
B1
(ii)
idea of detecting electrons/making spot visible
B1
(d)
deflects them
B1
(e)
no air OR no molecules OR no particles OR nothing
B1
to stop/slow down/absorb the electrons/cathode rays
B1
[7]
12 (a)
(b)
(i)
time taken for (B0 for half the time)
B1
activity/count-rate/mass etc.
B1
to decrease to half original value
B1
(ii)
radiation due to surroundings
B1
(i)
80 25
C1
55 cao
A1
1. 27.5 ecf
B1
2. 52.5 ecf
B1
(iii)
15 1 ecf
B1
(iv)
background remains, even when source has decayed
B1
(v)
curve to the left of existing one
B1
flattening out at 25 count/min
B1
(ii)
[12]
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
TARGET
GRADE
F
F
(a) larger area

smaller pressure
(b) (i) get larger OR get firmer
(ii) molecules move faster
)
more collisions (per second) )
pressure increased
)
F
any 2
(c) (i) increases
B1
B1 + B1
B1
F
C
C
B1
B1
B1
9
2F
B2
(b) AB x BC x CD OR l x b x h OR his figures shown multiplied
B1
(c) cm3 OR cu.cm OR cubic cm
B1
4
(a) P and Q
B1
(b) R and S
B1
(c) (i) D = M/V in any form, including our figures
B1
C
C
C
C1
A1
B1
6
(a) 6.0 0.1 )

2.4 0.1 )
3.1 0.1 )
-1 each error or omission
(ii) 57.5/25
2.3
g/cm3
4
2C
MARK
B1
B1
(ii) smaller volume

more collisions (per second)
anywhere in (b)(ii) or (c)(ii), collisions with walls
2
Paper
02
(a) chemical, gravitational, internal, kinetic

(if more than 4 ticked, use + = 0 )
2F,2C B1 x 4
(b) kinetic
B1
(c) potential
B1
(d) chemical
B1
7
(a) idea of greater speed

idea of molecules further apart
F
C
B1
B1
(b) (i) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

e.g. thermometer, thermostat, bimetal strip, rivets, fitting steel tyres
B1
B1
4
NOT
internal
(ii) any suitable example involving expansion or contraction

e.g. expansion gaps in bridges etc, overhead cables, cracking glass
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) wavelength labelled clearly 3mm

wavelength labelled clearly 1mm
F
C
C1
A1
F
C
M1
A1
M1
A1
6
(a) ray bent down at first surface

not below normal
ray bent down at second surface
F
F
C
M1
A1
B1
(b) (i) dispersion ticked
B1
(ii) red
B1
(iii) violet
(allow B1,B0 if red and violet both written but interchanged)
B1
6
(a) end/point on magnet

idea of pointing N (when freely suspended)
C
F
B1
B1
(b) repulsive
B1
(c) (i) S at top and N at bottom
B1
B1
5
F
F
M1
A1
3F
B3
(ii) reasonable curve
B1
(iii) 8 (days) 0.5 OR his correct value 0.5

correct working shown on graph (minimum: dot on line)
C
C
B1
B1
8
B1
(ii) filament
B1
(iii) electrons ticked
B1
(iv) line along axis (by eye) OR conical beam along axis
B1
(v) light or glow indicated somehow
B1
(b) beam deflection shown

beam deflected upwards
indication of curve (condone curve outside electric field)
F
C
C
C1
A1
B1
(c) idea of no obstruction for cathode rays/electrons
B1
9
(ii) horizontal line

anywhere between top & bottom of wave pattern
(b) (measure time for)
(count number of)
(measure time)
(a number of
) OR (waves passing ) OR (for 1 wave
)
(waves to pass )
(
)
(to pass
)
OR
in 1 second
OR
f = 1/T
f = no. of waves
time
7
(ii) disappears
9
Paper
02
(a) strontium-90
decays most slowly OR longest half-life
(b) (i) points correctly plotted small square
10 (a) (i) A and B (both)
-1 each error or omission
OR A and C (both)
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
11 (a) (i) 10 x 2.5

25 (m)
Paper
02
F
F
C1
A1
F
F
F
C1
M1
A1
(b) 75/2.5
30 (m/s)
C
C
C1
A1
(c) accelerated
B1
(d) total distance = 3000 (m)

total time = 150 (s)
average speed = total distance/total time
3000/150
20 (m/s)
F
F
C
C
C
C1
C1
C1
C1
A1
13
F
F
F
B1
B1
B1
3
(ii) speed = distance/time in any form

500/10
50 (s)
12 L1 joined to R3 or R1
L2 joined to R4
L4 joined to R1
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE - OCT/NOV 2006
QU.
1
SCHEME
MARK
55 (s)
B1
(b)
55/5 ecf
C1
11 (s) ecf
A1
OR
OR
OR
300/hour
1 takes 11s
5 takes 55s
1hour for 300
B1
= 5/min
300 take 3300s
300 take 60x55s
3600/300s for 1
B1
takes less
than 1 min
for 5
less than 1hr

for 300
less than 1hr

for 300
1 takes less
time than
this
B1
YES/NO ticked according to his working
Paper
2
(a)
(c) EITHER
Syllabus
0625
B1
7
2nd box ticked
B1
3rd box ticked

(use + = 0 for extras)
B1
2
(a)
OP
accelerating
B1
PQ
accelerating
B1
QR
constant speed
B1
RS
slowing down (however expressed)
B1
(b)
O and S (both)
B1
(c)
6 (m/s)
B1
(d)
70 (s)
B1
(e)
find area OPQRS (however expressed)
B1
8
(a)
(i)
radiation
B1
(ii)
conduction
B1
(i)
kinetic (however expressed)
B1
potential (however expressed)
B1
idea of energy loss or friction
B1
5
(b)
(ii)
UCLES 2006
Page 4
Mark Scheme
(a)
(b)
(a)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(magnitude of) force
B1
distance (from fulcrum)
B1
(i)
force
B1
moment OR turning effect
B1
(ii)
F1 + F 2 + W
B1
(iii)
B1
6
(i)
eye to image line perpendicular to mirror, by eye
B1
object distance = image distance, by eye
B1
(ii)
normal correctly drawn, by eye
B1
(iii)
ray to bottom edge of mirror correct
M1
reflected ray at correct angle to mirror, by eye

(condone sloppy normal)
A1
(b)
sensible attempt at explanation
B1
(c)
(i)
2 (m) (NO ecf)
B1
(ii)
distance lady to mirror = 3 (m)
C1
distance moved = 2 (m) (NO ecf)
A1
away from mirror/wall
B1
10
(i)
large, OR accept any large example e.g. cliff
B1
(ii)
speed = distance/time OR speed = 2xdistance/time

(in any form)
C1
C1
480 (m) c.a.o.
A1
(a)
(b)
speed = 6/50 OR 3/50
C1
0.12 (m/s) OR 0.06 (m/s)
A1
6
UCLES 2006
Page 5
Mark Scheme
(a)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
(i)
(group) 1
B1
(ii)
(group) 2
B1
(iii)
plastics OR glass OR ebonite
B1
(b)
top and bottom +
B1
(c)
region/area/space etc.
B1
charge
B1
experiences a force
B1
7
(a)
good straight line through first 5 points, drawn with a rule
B1
(b)
intelligent attempt at a reason
B1
(c)
67 40
C1
27 (mm)
A1
2.4 2.5 (N)
B1
5
less turns on Sy OR more turns on Py
B1
(b)
voltage OR p.d. OR volts is less
B1
(c)
V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form
C1
C1
12 (V)
A1
voltage too high OR bell would be damaged
B1
6
92
B1
(b)
orbit OR outside nucleus
B1
(c)
146
B1
(d)
nucleus
B1
(e)
decreases
M1
by 2
A1
6
(d)
10 (a)
(d)
11 (a)
UCLES 2006
Page 6
Mark Scheme
12 (a)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
2
reverse connections to ammeter or battery
B1
(b)
current OR amps OR amperes
B1
(c)
4 components in series (ignore symbols)
B1
4 recognisably correct symbols (ignore connections)
B1
(i)
voltmeter OR multimeter on volts scale
B1
(ii)
voltmeter shown connected in parallel with resistor
B1
(d)
(e)
I = V/R in any form

C1
no ecf from wrong equation
C1
0.4 (A) c.a.o.
A1
(f)
his value of (e)
B1
(g)
(i)
7.5 ticked
B1
(ii)
increases current e.c.f.
B1
12
UCLES 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
TARGET MARK
GRADE
(a) seconds hand at 35 s

minutes hand at or just to R of 60 (up to division)
F
C
B1
B1
(b) seconds hand at 55 s

minutes hand between 4 and 5
F
C
B1
B1
(c) 4 minutes 20 s
B1
[Total: 5]
(a) speed = distance/time in any form OR 4800/12

400 (s)
F
F
C1
A1
(b) straight line up to 12 m/s, 20s small square

horizontal line for 400 s (e.c.f. for start point and from (a))
straight line down to 0 m/s at 500 s
F
F
F
B1
B1
B1
F
C
C
C1
A1
A1
A1
F
F
C1
A1
(c) distance = base x height

OR area under graph OR equation of motion
accel. distance = 120 m
decel. distance = 480 m
NOTE: NO MARKS for using (d) and then going back to (c)
total distance = 120 + 4800 + 480 stated
(d) average speed = total distance/total time
OR 5400/500 OR 5400/920
10.8 (m/s) OR 11 (m/s) c.a.o.
[Total: 11]
3
(a) (i) indication of force at A

upward vertical force OR upward force at rt. angles to card
F
C
M1
A1
B1
(b) when C of M lies outside base (idea of)

when vertical through C of M lies outside base (idea of)
F
C
C1
A1
(c) (i) less than
B1
B1
(ii) largest distance from hinge
(ii) idea of C of M of box raised OR matchbox less stable

NOT matchbox is taller
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
Page 4
4
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) large (bird)
Paper
02
F
M1
A1
(b) greater
the same
F
F
B1
B1
(c) small (bird)
B1
(d) lost/turned into/decreased (accept turned into KE)

as heat ignore mention of sound
F
C
M1
A1
(ii) greater weight/mass/force of gravity/heavier
[Total: 7]
5
(a) solid:
gas:
2, 3 and 6 ticked
1, 4 and 5 ticked
-1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras)

-1 each error ( use + = 0 for extras)
(b) molecules breaking free (of surface) NOT turns into a gas
mention of higher energy/faster/mols near surface
F, C
F, C
B2
B2
F
C
M1
A1
[Total: 6]
(a) [mark in pairs, use + = 0]

temp. decreasing
volume increasing
F
F
B1
B1
(b) (i) moved out/backwards/to the R
M1
A1
(ii) idea of raised temp increases pressure,

therefore move piston out to decrease pressure
[Total: 4]
7
(a) (i) (good) conductor OR equiv. NOT conductor of electricity
B1
(ii) poor conductor OR (good) insulator (allow electrical)

OR to stop your hand getting burned/prevent shock
B1
B1
F, C
B1+B1
B1
(b) (i) conduction

(ii) any 2 of conduction, convection, radiation ticked
(-1 if evaporation ticked)
(c) equal to 40W
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 5
8
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
(a) 50
B1
(b) his (a) x 4

200 (Hz) e.c.f.
F
F
C1
A1
(c) Yes, because it is between 20 20,000 Hz or more than 20 Hz

allow e.c.f. from (b) answer must tally with (b)
B1
[Total: 4]
(a) (i) series OR potential divider
B1
(ii) 12 ()
B1
(iii) I = V/R in any form

6/his (ii)
0.5 e.c.f.
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR a
F
F
F
F
C1
C1
A1
B1
(iv) his (iii) x 10

5 (V) e.c.f.
F
F
C1
A1
(v) his (iv)
B1
C
C
B1
B1
B1
(b) (i) 1. 6 (V)

2. 0 (V)
(ii) C or clear mark positioned below A but not lower than bottom of
the word contact
allow e.c.f. only if 6 and 0 in (i) are reversed
[Total: 12]
10 (a) connect wire across/to millivoltmeter
(any mention of connecting to electricity/battery gets B0 here)
B1
B1
(b) millivoltmeter deflects
B1
(c) generator OR transformer OR induction coil

OR coil on a car OR microphone
NOT relay/motor/power station etc
B1
move wire across magnetic field OR move magnet past wire

OR dip magnet into coil made of the wire
(condone connect to battery/electricity here)
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2007
Page 6
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
11 (a) dot to right of S:

horiz. line from end/pole, to right (must not curve)
dot to left of N:
horiz. line from end/pole, to left (must not curve)
dot by top LH corner: smooth curve from end/pole, above magnet,
to equivalent point at south end
dot below magnet:
smooth curve between N and S
curve leaving & entering side of magnet, not ends
(b) arrow clearly indicating N to S
Paper
02
F
F
B1
B1
F
F
C
B1
M1
A1
B1
[Total: 6]
12 (a) (i) 2, 2, 0 (accept blank for 0)
B1
(ii) 0, 0, 1 (accept blank for 0)
B1
(b) protons: 11
neutrons: 13
electrons: same as his protons
F
C
F
B1
B1
B1
(c) (i) 0
B1
(ii) -1
B1
(iii) OR electron OR e OR B OR beta

NOT b
B1
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
Page 3
Mark Scheme
QU.
1
Syllabus
0625
SCHEME
Paper
02
MARK
(a) 60 (cm3)
B1
(b) liquid surface lower than in cylinder

liquid surface level with 15 cm3 ( 5 cm3)
C1
A1
(c) less
B1
[Total: 4]
(a) 200,000 (m3)
B1
(b) D = M/V in any form

his (a) x 1.3
260,000 c.a.o.
kg
B1
C1
A1
B1
(c) decreases
air expands OR density decreases
M1
A1
(d) hot air rises
B1
[Total: 8]
(a) 7.5 (cmHg)

75 (cmHg)
(give C1, A1 for 1.0006 x 105 Pa or 1 x 105 Pa (N/m2) if unit given)
C1
A1
(b) nothing OR (Torricellian) vacuum OR Hg vapour
B1
(c) tube level lower

reservoir level higher (any amount)
B1
B1
(d) pressures on 2 surfaces equal (always)

Hg levels equal (always) OR no Hg column
no change when pressure changes
)
)
)
any two
B1+B1
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
Page 4
Mark Scheme
QU.
4
Syllabus
0625
SCHEME
Paper
02
MARK
(a) (i) arrow labelled W, vertically (by eye) down

from somewhere on either boat
B1
(ii) arrow labelled F, down slope, between either boat and slipway
B1
(b) (i) multiply W by (vertical) height raised OR Wh
B1
(ii) multiply F by distance along slope OR Fs
B1
(iii) add (i) and (ii)
B1
(c) time taken
B1
[Total: 6]
(a)
B1
(b) (i) ICE marked at 0
B1
(ii) STEAM marked at 100

(c) expansion/volume/pressure
expansion/length
resistance
bending
e.m.f/voltage
colour
colour change
B1
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
OF
a gas
a solid
a resistor/thermistor/wire
a bimetal strip
a thermocouple
a hot surface
certain chemicals
)
)
)
) any 2
)
)
)
B1+B1
[Total: 5]
6
(a) (i) uniform acceleration
B1
(ii) 9 (m/s)
B1
(iii) s = vt in any form

90 (m) OR 10 x his (ii), evaluated
C1
A1
(b) average speed is lower
B1
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2007
Page 5
Mark Scheme
QU.
7
Syllabus
0625
SCHEME
Paper
02
MARK
(a) (i) 1.5 (cm)
B1
(ii) circle centred on X, outside printed circle (circle need not be drawn
with a compass, but must be carefully drawn)
diameter 4.5 cm by eye
(b) sound longitudinal, water transverse
sound wave faster (than water wave)
different frequency/wavelength
)
)
)
any 2
M1
A1
B1,B1
[Total: 5]
(a) (i) principal focus unambiguously marked

focal length approximately indicated
focal length precisely indicated, from pole to principal focus
(ii) any ray from X to Y, correctly refracted at lens
B1
C1
A1
B1
(b) [mark in pairs, using + = 0]

real
diminished
inverted
image distance less
B1
B1
B1
B1
(c) gets smaller

gets closer to lens
B1
B1
[Total: 10]
(a) points correctly plotted ( small square)

smooth curve through his points
reasonable thickness
1 e.e.o.o.
B2
B1
B1
(b) (i) 5.3 6.1
B1
(ii) 0.9 1.7
B1
(c) R = V/I in any form

division by 25 or 25 x 103 somewhere
C1
C1
(i) answer between 220 and 240
B1
(ii) answer between 40 and 60

shown in either (i) or (ii)
B1
B1
(d) answer compatible with his (c)
B1
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2007
Page 6
Mark Scheme
QU.
SCHEME
10 (a) (i) shape appropriate outside coil (condone incomplete loops)

lines mostly parallel within coil
pattern roughly symmetrical
no lines touching or crossing
(ii) iron bar
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
MARK
M1
A1
A1
A1
B1
(b) rods become magnetised

same direction
repel
M1
A1
B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) within range 1820 (mins)
B1
(b) (i) 922 or thereabouts
B1
(ii) his (a)
B1
(c) alpha OR beta
B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) electrons
B1
(b) move
towards P1
M1
A1
(c) idea of making both P3 and/or P4 positive

equal potential
(earthing of P1 and P2 not required for answer)
B1
B1
(d) fluorescent screen OR any other appropriate method
B1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 3
1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) 9.2 0.2 (cm)
Paper
02
[B1]
(ii) Centre of mass at centre of rod anywhere between a line vertically above the i
and the and a line vertically above the left hand 1 in Fig. 1.1, anywhere across
diameter including the surface but NOT outside the surface
[B1]
(b) Centre of mass clearly to left of centre, inside the rod
[M1]
anywhere between a line vertically above the t in to and a line vertically above the t
in the first the AND on axis (by eye)
[A1]
[Total: 4]
2
(a) (i) suitable scale, probably 5 small squares = 10 s, no awkward ratios

(ii) (if no scale written on graph, assume our scale)
straight line from origin
reaching 25 m/s after 10 s NOT horizontal from (0,25) (10,25)
horizontal from 10 50 s
straight line down from end of his horizontal line
reaching axis at 70 s
(b) average speed = total distance/total time
1375/his 70
19.64 e.c.f. any number of sig. figs
20 (m/s) e.c.f.
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[C1]
[C1]
[C1]
[A1]
[Total: 10]
F3
[B1]
anticlockwise: F1
F2
[B1]
[B1]
(a) clockwise:
(b) c
[M1]
clockwise moment (accept moment on RH side) was too big
[A1]
reduce moment by reducing distance
[A1]
note: moment must be mentioned in both of the last 2 marks; accept turning effect,
torque and leverage as alternatives to moment
(c) any value bigger than 29 g and less than 30 g, but NOT 29 g or 30 g
[B1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008
Page 4
4
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) P.E. (however expressed)

(e.g. GPE, gravitational, gravity, potential, positional)
(ii) chemical
Paper
02
[B1]
[B1]
(b) electrician AND because he is heavier/greater force/greater weight/greater gravity

force/ greater mass
[B1]
(c) time AND either work done OR energy used OR equivalent
OR weight AND velocity/speed
[B1]
[Total: 4]
(a) nucleus OR nuclei OR -particle NOT nucleon or nuclide
[B1]
(b) electron(s) OR e allow -particle
[B1]
(c) neutron(s) OR n
proton(s) OR p
[B1]
[B1]
(d) alpha OR NOT a or A
[B1]
(e) electron(s) OR e allow -particles
[B1]
[Total: 6]
(condone rays not drawn with a ruler, if reasonably straight)

(a) straight ray through centre of lens (1 mm on axis by eye) (ignore any arrows)
[B1]
(b) (i) ray correct, either through pole or

reasonably parallel to axis and then through F1 (1 mm in either case)
NOTE: any refraction must be at centre line or at both surfaces
[B1]
(ii) (condone image not labelled if it is clear where it is; condone image labelled as
object if image line clearly drawn)
image located at his intersection, even if intersection of incorrect rays
[C1]
image drawn between axis and his intersection, and not beyond either
[A1]
(c) clear indication of screen at candidates image, using vertical line
[B1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2008
Page 5
7
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
(a) gas )
solid ) any 1 correct
liquid ) remaining 2 both correct
[B1]
[B1]
i.e. gas, solid, liquid: 2 marks gas, liquid, solid: 1 mark liquid, solid, gas: 1 mark
liquid, gas, solid: 0 marks solid, liquid, gas: 0 marks solid, gas, liquid: 1 mark
(b) (i) liquid
[B1]
(ii) idea that molecules/particles gain energy OR move faster (condone vibrating)
idea of molecules/particles becoming gaseous/breaking free
[B1]
[B1]
(iii) boiling, at one temperature only AND evaporation at any temperature

boiling throughout liquid AND evaporation at surface only
[B1]
[B1]
(c) (i) solid
[B1]
(ii) 660 (C) allow 659 (C) NOT 660 (C)
[B1]
[Total: 9]
(a) (i) 1
2
3
ice point OR freezing point of water OR melting point of ice NOT just freezing
point
[B1]
ice OR freezing water
[B1]
pure or melting or ice-water mix
[B1]
[B1]
0 (C) OR 273 K OR 273 K
(ii) 1
steam point OR boiling point of water

NOT just boiling point
2 steam
boiling (water) OR standard pressure
3 100 (C) OR 373 K OR 373 K
C OR K OR K used in either of the parts 3
(b) thermal capacity OR heat capacity, allow specific heat capacity
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[B1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2008
Page 6
9
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
(a) correct symbol

(b) D A C B
all 4 in correct order
[B1]
(allow B1 for any 2 in correct place)
[B2]
(c) (note: mark 1 and 2 together) (1 mark max from any one line below)
too great a current might flow
)
fuse might not melt NOT fuse wont work
) any 2
fuse wont protect OR appliance might be damaged
)
)
wiring might overheat/melt or equivalent
fire might be caused
)
NOT circuit broken, NOT short circuit, NOT electric shock
[B1,B1]
[Total: 5]
10 (a) R1 + R2 in symbols or figures
60 ()
[C1]
[A1]
(b) voltmeter correctly shown between X and Y (or equivalent), must be correct symbol
[B1]
(c) (i) I = V/R

1.5/60
e.c.f from (a)
0.025
A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) OR mA etc.
[C1]
[C1]
[A1]
[B1]
(ii) 1.5 (V)
[B1]
(d) (i) decreases
[B1]
(ii) decreases
[B1]
(iii) 60 ()
[B1]
e.c.f from (a)
[Total: 11]
11 (a) (i) no current in circuit OR no voltage in circuit
e.m.f. induced in AB is cancelled by e.m.f. induced in BC
[B1]
[B1]
(ii) idea of straightening out ABC OR rotate ABC (on its axis)
OR connect G across AB or CB
[B1]
(b) any valid answer

e.g. transformer, induction coil, generator, dynamo, microphone, alternator, computer
NOT motor, relay
(use right + wrong = 0 for incorrect extras)
[B1]
[Total: 4]
UCLES 2008
Page 7
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
12 (a) anything less than, or equal to, 30 min

between 22 and 27 min, inclusive
(b) (i) iodine(-128) OR the second one
(ii) radon-220 OR the first one
NOTE: NOT radon-222
NOT just radon, unless mention of 55 s in why section
shortest half-life OR decays most rapidly OR takes least time to decay
NOT because it only has a half-life of 55 s
UCLES 2008
Paper
02
[C1]
[A1]
[B1]
[M1]
[A1]
[Total: 5]
Page 3
1
(a)
attempt at subtraction
3 hrs 20 mins
200 mins
(b)
200/20 OR 200/10
10 OR 20
e.c.f.
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
C1
C1
A1
e.c.f. from (a)
C1
A1
(a)
LBH
2 1.5 1
3 (m3)
C1
C1
A1
(b)
M=VD
3000 (kg)
e.c.f.
correct units in both (a) and (b)
C1
A1
B1
YZ OR WZ and WY OR XZ and XY
B1
(a)
(b) (i)
Mark Scheme
4.2 4.6 (N)
B1
(ii)
his (i)
N
B1
B1
(iii)
increases
B1
(iv)
goes up OR oscillates OR accelerates
B1
(a)
radio OR TV
ultra-violet
B1
B1
(b)
long wavelength written at LH end
B1
(c)
any three acceptable uses
(d)
red
violet (NOT blue, purple, mauve)
[5]
[6]
[6]
B1,B1,B1
B1
B1
UCLES 2008
[8]
Page 4
5
(a) (i)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
reflected
B1
same frequency
B1
480 (m)
B1
(ii)
distance/time
his(i)/1.6
300 (m/s) e.c.f.
C1
C1
A1
(iii)
measured distance incorrect

measured time incorrect OR effect of reaction time
any reference to temperature
any reference to wind
any reference to humidity
any reference to pressure
time interval very small to measure on a stopwatch
(ii)
(b) (i)
)
) any 2
)
)
)
)
)
B1,B1
[8]
6
(a)
distance approximately marked (5 mm)

distance accurately marked (2 mm)
(b) (i)
(ii)
C1
A1
falls
B1
air mols bombard surfaces

cause pressure on Hg
B1
B1
(c)
Hg at same height as in LH tube (by eye)
(d)
rises
falls
rises
stays the same
B1
B1 4
)
)
[10]
7
(a) (i)
(b)
B1
(ii)
reflected ray in correct direction, by eye (condone poor normal)
B1
(iii)
i correctly labelled (condone poor normal)
B1
(iv)
r correctly labelled (condone poor normal)
B1
i=r
(c) (i)
(ii)
B1
second mirror correct, by eye
B1
ray parallel to original ray
B1
UCLES 2008
[7]
Page 5
8
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
N at left and S at right
B1
attract
e.c.f.
B1
N at left and S at right
B1
attract
B1
e.c.f.
(c)
attract
B1
(d)
nothing
B1
(a)
B1
(b)
B1
(c)
I = V/R
6/4
1.5
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
C1
A1
A1
B1
(d)
connection 2
both receive full voltage OR both run at full brightness
if one blows/switched off, other will continue working
B1
B1
B1
contact position shown at centre of potential divider, by eye
B1
10 (a)
(b)
current in coil
core magnetised
armature attracted
armature pivots
armature pushes contacts closed
)
)
) any 3
)
)
[6]
[9]
B1,B1,B1
[4]
UCLES 2008
Page 6
11 (a)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
core
B1
(b)
a.c.
B1
(c)
VP/VS = NP/NS in any form

200
C1
C1
A1
(d)
voltage too high OR lamp will blow
B1
84
B1
218
B1
12 (a)
(b)
(c) (i)
B1
(ii)
4
allow both marks for interchanged answers for (i) and (ii),
if answers to (a) and (b) were interchanged
B1
(iii)
alpha-particle
B1
UCLES 2008
[6]
[5]
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
(a) 35
B1
(b) vehicles/time in any form, letters words or numbers

700/35 e.c.f. (a)
20 e.c.f. (a)
C1
C1
A1
[4]
B13
[3]
work
force of gravity on a body

how big the body is
mass
power of a given force

weight mass
weight
amount of matter in a body

force distance moved
density
mass volume
the acceleration due to gravity
(a) 1500
B1
(b) second box ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(c) constant speed
B1
(d) award B1 from each of any 2 lines:

)
increased wind/air resistance OR headwind OR roof rack
rough(er) ground OR flat tyre OR increased road resistance/friction )
brakes applied
)
B1 + B1
IGNORE increased speed/changed car shape/increased load

IGNORE driver decided to stop
4
[5]
(a) 88 92
B1
(b) his (a)
B1
(c) 840 e.c.f. (b)
B1
(d) left level up and right level down

L at 80 and R at 150
B1
B1
UCLES 2009
[5]
Page 4
5

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) rapid/rapid heat transfer/gain OR rapid reading/response

NOT sensitivity/temperature transfer
Paper
02
B1
(ii) strength OR reduce chance of breaking OR to magnify the thread

ignore any mention of safety
B1
(iii) sensitivity or equiv. (e.g. idea of large movement of thread)
B1
(b) mercury OR alcohol
B1
(c) 0 and 100

C on at least 1 temperature
B1
B1
(a) (i) decreasing OR getting lower/quieter/softer
M1
(ii) amplitude/length of wave decreased OR waves got smaller

NOT wavelength decreased
(b) (i) nothing OR constant
[6]
A1
M1
(ii) waves equally spaced OR wavelength/period/T constant

(c) (i) 12 14
A1
B1
(ii) 1. 300 (waves, oscillations, vibrations) every second

2. 1/300 (s) OR 0.0033 OR 0.003 with indication of recurring 3
3. 1/his300 his 12 OR his (1/300)
0.04 (s) e.c.f.
(d) (i) yes/
)
)
(ii) yes/
)
)
(iii) no/
1 e.e.o.o.
B1
B1
C1
A1
B2
[11]
UCLES 2009
Page 5
7

IGCSE May/June 2009
(a) (i) 1. normal correct, by eye

2. i correctly labelled
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
B1
B1
(ii) i = r in any recognisable form accept incidence = refraction

NOT sin i = sin r B0 for refraction, refrection, reflaction
B1
(iii) V
B1
(iv) none
B1
(b) be reasonably generous:

correct inversion
stem approx. parallel to card edge
M1
A1
(a) (i) iron (rod)
B1
(ii) plastic (rod)
B1
(b) S S N
(c)
[7]
B1
somewhere on or near rod D, near end C

condone extra + or signs unless contradict
(d) one needle pointing N, by eye

both needles pointing N, by eye
B1
C1
A1
UCLES 2009
[6]
Page 6
9

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
Apply max 1 un. pen. in (a) and (b) together. Apply at first instance of unit penalty.
(a) (i) 6 V
B1
(ii) 50 mA OR 0.05 A
B1
(b) R = V/I in any form, letters, words, numbers OR V/I

6/50 OR 6/0.05 e.c.f. (a) OR 0.12 (0.12 gets 2, 0.12 gets 1)
120 c.a.o. accept V/A instead of
(c) (i) increase resistance/ohms
double resistance/ohms
OR halve e.m.f./voltage/p.d.
OR remove one cell/battery
(ii) idea of breaking the circuit
OR make voltage zero
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
add another resistor

decrease e.m.f./voltage/p.d.
add another R (in series)
use 3 V cell/battery
use only 1 cell/battery
OR removing battery
OR switch off
(d) (i) infinite OR very large (if figure quoted, must be [25 A)
NOT just higher
(ii) idea of damage but NOT blows up
ammeter coil burnt out OR pointer bent
battery overheats OR runs flat quickly
circuit overheat/burn out/insulation melts
NOT it trips out
C1
A1
B1
B1
C1
)
) any 1
)
10 (a) XY would move up/anticlockwise/motion reversed/pan moves down

(b) (i) 1. sensible choice of F scale
)
) both lost if scales reversed
sensible choice of I scale )
2. 4 points correctly plotted ( small square) 1 e.e.o.o.
B0 if ridiculous scale on either axis (e.g. non-linear, 3, 7, 9 etc.)
can award both marks if scales interchanged but otherwise O.K.
if any blob clearly >1 square diameter, then 1 for each (max 2)
3. reasonable straight line through his points, including 0,0
(ii) 0.036 0.038 OR his correct value 0.0005 (B0 if ridiculous scale)
(c) (electric) motor OR ammeter OR galvanometer OR voltmeter
NOT generator/electronic balance
UCLES 2009
C1
C1
A1
A1
[11]
B1
B1
B1
B2
B1
B1
B1
[8]
Page 7

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
11 For (a), (b) and (c), mark the names, not the box
(a) CATHODE in bottom left box
B1
(b) UP & DOWN in top middle box
B1
(c) GLOWS in bottom right box
B1
(d) battery shown connected across heater filament, any recognisable symbol
ignore extra wires if it would work
B1
(e) electrons NOT beta particles NOT positive electron
B1
(f) vacuum ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
electromagnetic radiation/waves/rays
NOT just rays etc.
B1 + B1
~ 8000 units OR very large
zero/nothing
NOT small/almost nothing
NOT (dash)
B1 + B1
negative allow (dash)
no charge OR zero/neutral
NOT negligible
NOT (dash)
B1 + B1
idea of not very (penetrating)

OR stopped (but if a substance is
mentioned, it must be appropriate,
not air)
NOT not penetrating
NOT slowly penetrating
idea of extremely (penetrating)

OR not stopped (but if a substance is
mentioned, it must be appropriate)
B1 + B1
12 (1) electron(s)
OR e (ignore any prefix or suffix)
NOT very/strongly/highly penetrating

NOT very fast penetrating
UCLES 2009
[6]
[8]
Page 3
1

(a) (i) 20 (cm3)

(ii) 25 (cm3)0.5
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
)
) both
B1
[1]
(b) 5 (cm3) e.c.f.
B1
[1]
(c) 5/200 e.c.f.

0.025 (cm3) e.c.f.
C1
A1
[2]
[Total: 4]
2
(a) kinetic or K.E. or motion
B1
[1]
(b) strain or elastic
B1
[1]
(c) gravitational or P.E. or G.P.E. or potential
B1
[1]
(d) weight /mass (of athlete) AND height/distance (of bar)
B1
[1]
[Total: 4]
3
(a) (i) 1. increasing

steady or uniform
2. constant
(ii) horizontal straight line between A & B
(b) (i) line on axis between B & C
(ii) horizontal straight line between C & D
lower than that for AB
(c) zero distance or equiv.
M1
A1
B1
[3]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
M1
A1
[2]
B1
[1]
[Total: 8]
4
(a) (i) moves to the left

accelerates to the left
C1
A1
[2]
(ii) arrow to the right

9N
B1
B1
[2]
(iii) blob on diagram clearly indicated as the C of M
B1
[1]
UCLES 2009
Page 4

(b) (i) rises

(ii) less stable
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
[Total: 7]
5
(a) (i) 1. cooling OR energy/heat lost seen anywhere in (i)

2. solidifying or temperature constant
3. cooling
B1
B1
B1
[3]
(ii) first and last both ticked

middle ticked
B1
B1
[2]
(iii) solid accept ice/frozen
B1
[1]
(b) rising curve of some sort

idea of mirror image of Fig. 6.1
C1
A1
[2]
[Total: 8]
6
(a) same
greater at B
greater at B
(b) box 1 ticked
box 3 ticked
B1
B1
B1
)
) use + =0 for extras
)
[3]
B1
B1
[2]
[Total: 5]
7
(a) q
B1
[1]
(b) F marked close to point of image/object
B1
[1]
(c) [mark in pairs, use + =0]

inverted
real
B1
B1
[2]
(d) same
B1
[1]
(e) (i) nothing
C1
[1]
A1
[1]
(ii) image blurs
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2009
Page 5
8

Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
(a) one sound direct

one sound after reflection/echo
B1
B1
[2]
(b) first
second one suffers absorption,dispersion
M1
A1
[2]
(c) (i) s = vt in any form (seen somewhere in (c))

time to hear 1st sound = 990/330 or 3 (s)
B1
B1
[2]
(ii) time to hear 2nd sound = (3 330)/330 or 9 (s)
B1
[1]
(iii) interval = 6 (s) e.c.f.
B1
[1]
[Total: 8]
9
(a) L.H. circuit series AND R.H. circuit parallel
B1
[1]
(b) (i) 280 + 200

480 ()
C1
A1
[2]
(ii) I = V/R in any form

12/his (i) seen or 12/480 need not be seen
0.025 or 25 or 1/40 c.a.o.
A or mA as appropriate
C1
C1
A1
B1
[4]
(iii) his (ii) 200 or proportion or potential divider calculation

5 (V) e.c.f.
C1
A1
[2]
(iv) connect voltmeter )

) (could be shown on diag)
between A and B )
M1
A1
[2]
[Total: 11]
10 (a) (i) core correctly labelled
B1
[1]
(ii) iron
B1
[1]
(iii) idea of magnetic linkage
B1
[1]
C1
C1
A1
[3]
(b) V1/V2 = N1/N2 in any form

120 (V)
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2009
Page 6

)
)
no worn insulation
)
)
no loose wires/connections
)
)
no short circuits
)
) any 3
plug correctly wired
)
)
any idea about continuity check )
)
no sharp bends in cable
)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
02
11 no exposed wires
B1 x 3
[3]
[Total: 3]
12 (a) 5 points correctly plotted (1 e.e.o.o.)
reasonable curve through his points
B2
B1
[3]
(b) (i) between 30 and 35 or his correct value 5
B1
[1]
(ii) 2 (minutes) or his correct value 0.02
B1
[1]
(c) 2 (minutes) or his (b) (ii)
B1
[1]
(d) (i) half-life too short
B1
[1]
B1+B1
[2]
(ii) mark any correct 2, ignore the rest

long half life
gamma-emitter
good penetration
similar particle size
similar density
)
)
)
)
) any 2
)
)
)
)
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2009
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2010
(a) distance
tape measure, trundle wheel, metre wheel

OR laser measure NOT (metre) rule
time
stopwatch/clock IGNORE just watch/clock

IGNORE just chronometer
(b) speed = distance/time

OR just distance/time
(c)
any arrangement, words or symbols

IGNORE magic triangles
Paper
21
B1, B1
B1, B1
B1
(i) idea of acceleration/deceleration

OR some distance at lower speed/lorry stops
B1
(ii) distance = speed time
C1
in this form only, words, letters or numbers
66 20 OR 66 OR 66 20/60
C1
22 (km) c.a.o. condone 0.33 used to give appropriate answer
A1
[9]
(a) 62.8 29.8

33.0 (cm) OR 33 (cm)
(b)
(i) 5.5 = constant 33
C1
A1
e.c.f.
C1
0.166 recurring e.c.f. ignore units

accept 1/6 or 0.16 or 0.166 or 0.167 or 0.17 or 0.2 NOT 0.20
A1
(ii) N/cm OR N/m OR n/cm OR n/m seen in (ii)

nothing else mark independently of (i)
Syllabus
0625
B1
[5]
(a) I = U + W accept words or mixture of words/symbols
B1
(b)
(i) 850 (N)
B1
(ii) force needed to accelerate load/get it started

OR if forces equal, then no movement
B1
(iii) height OR distance (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(iv) time (use + = 0 for extras)
B1
(c) greater than OR > OR stronger accept double etc
UCLES 2010
B1
[6]
Page 4
4

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) 1 nothing OR no change

2 quieter/softer OR loudness less/decreases
(ii) frequency control:
none OR no adjustment
amplitude control:
increase (amplitude)
allow turn clockwise/to right
B1
B1
B1
no e.c.f.
no e.c.f.
B1
(b) (i) echo OR reflection (of sound) OR bounced (back)
B1
(ii) idea of sound taking a finite time to travel

OR idea of sound doesnt travel infinitely fast
IGNORE sound has to travel to rock face and back
Paper
21
B1
[6]
(a) X marked anywhere, above or below, on vertical anywhere through rod
B1
(b) Y marked anywhere to right of X, but not beyond R.H. tip of parrot
B1
(c) idea of topples/falls/loses balance

topples clockwise/to the right/to the front/forwards
C1
A1
[4]
(a)
(i) radiation
evaporation
convection
any 2
B1, B1
(ii) cardboard/it is a poor conductor/(good) insulator

air is trapped OR air is a poor conductor/(good) insulator
reduced surface in contact with fingers
(b)
any 2
(i) heat/energy to raise/lower/change temperature of a body

OR heat/energy to heat up a body
by 1 C OR by 1K OR unit temp
(ii) low thermal capacity
less heat needed to raise temperature OR absorbs less heat
UCLES 2010
B1, B1
B1
B1
M1
A1
[8]
Page 5
7
(a)
(b)

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
(i) idea of heat concentrated in a small space

OR lots of wire in small space
OR to get required resistance in a small place
B1
(ii) radiation
B1
(i) mark 1 and 2 together

240 and 100 in correct order
V and W in correct order
B1
B1
(ii) I = V/R OR I = W/V in any form, symbols or numbers

240/576 OR 100/240
0.416 recurring,
accept 0.4 or 0.416 or 0.417 or 0.41 or 0.42 NOT 0.40
A OR a OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
Paper
21
C1
C1
C1
A1
[8]
(a) 10 (cm)
B1
(b) gets smaller NOT gets lower

gets closer to lens/moves to left/moves closer to F1
B1
B1
(c) (i) principal focus/foci OR focal/focus point(s)

NOT focal length NOT focus
B1
(d) (ii) (ignore any arrows)

ray drawn from top of object, through F2, to lens
must pass through the stroke indicating F2
single refraction clearly at centre line
OR two appropriate refractions at surfaces
travels parallel to axis after lens, by eye must be drawn with ruler
reaches top of image
(a) (i) water conducts/water lowers resistance

could get a shock (however expressed)
(ii) idea of cord insulating you from electricity OR cord not a conductor
OR idea of separates you from the electrics/live parts
B1
B1
B1
B1
[8]
B1
B1
B1
(b) 10A ticked
B1
(c)
B1
(i) large(r) current NOT more electricity

(ii) it/insulation/cable would overheat/melt OR cause fire
NOT blow up/damaged NOT fuse blows
UCLES 2010
B1
[6]
Page 6

IGCSE May/June 2010
10 (a) V1/V2 or N1/N2 or V1/N1 or V2/N2 in any form

substitution correct and seen
25 turns
Syllabus
0625
Allow full credit for use

of 25 turns to give 12V,
with working seen
Paper
21
C1
M1
A1
B1
Y and Z (either order)

(b) 240 (V)
B1
(c) core
iron NOT steel
B1
B1
(d) good conductor OR low resistance OR to reduce heating

OR for high efficiency IGNORE good/bad conductor of heat
11 (a) refraction OR slows down OR changes speed/wavelength OR bends

NOT reflaction or refrection
dispersion OR divides/splits into colours/wavelengths/frequencies
(b)
(c)
12 (a)
(b)
(i) red
If red and violet interchanged,

allow B1 only
B1
[8]
B1
B1
B1
(ii) violet NOT blue NOT purple
B1
(i) X at or above top of visible spectrum

middle of X clearly above top of visible spectrum but no more than
twice height of the letter A from top of visible spectrum, by eye
M1
(ii) infra-red OR IR OR ir OR heat/thermal (radiation)
B1
[7]
(i) beta, gamma 1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(ii) idea that radiation (from watch) can enter the body
B1
(i) bottom left box ticked
B1
1 e.e.o.o.
(ii) locked cupboard OR lock (it)

OR storage in lead/suitable containers
IGNORE protective clothing/tongs etc
UCLES 2010
A1
B1
[5]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
for the guidance of teachers
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21
Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
om
.c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2010 question paper
s
er
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME SYMBOLS & OTHER MATTERS

B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks
are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks
are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o.
means "correct answer only".
e.c.f.
means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen.
means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or
indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to

mean what we want, give credit.
Significant
figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures 2, except if specified

otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units
Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Fractions
These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras
Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
UCLES 2010
Page 3
1

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
(a) (i) 6 (cm)

5 (cm)
B1
B1
(ii) 6 5 2 ecf
60 (cm3) ecf
C1
A1
(b) D = M/V in any form, letters, words or numbers

53
2.65
OR 2650
g/cm3 OR kg/m3 (unit must be appropriate)
B1
C1
A1
B1
[Total: 8]
(a) distance/time in any form

960/8 OR 960/(8 60)
120
OR 2
m/min OR m/s must correspond with value
C1
C1
A1
B1
(b) friction or air resistance or force accelerating/decelerating legs
B1
[Total: 5]
(a) tidal
wave
hydroelectric
(any order)
B1
B1
B1
accept waterfall
(b) tidal
PE of rise and fall
flow through turbine
turbine drives generator
wave
PE of rise and fall
rotates/moves floats
floats drive generator
hydroelectric
water stored at high level
flowing water drives turbine
turbine drives generator
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
(a) focal length OR focal distance
B1
(b) 4 rays all passing through F

appropriate refraction at both lens surfaces
OR all rays bent at lens mid-line
M1
(c) focused image OR sharp image OR dot
B1
(d) 4 dots OR out-of-focus/blurred/fuzzy image
B1
A1
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
Page 4
5

(a) alpha and beta both underlined
Syllabus
0625
1 e.e.o.o.
Paper
21
B2
(b) gamma
B1
(c) radio
B1
(d) alpha
B1
[Total: 5]
(a) conduction
B1
(b) (i) convection
B1
(ii) hot water expands OR hot water less dense

hot water rises (ignore anything about cold water falling)
(c) convection cannot occur
water is a poor conductor
B1
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
(a) i correctly shown
B1
(b) (i) ray shown in air at angle > 40

angle same as in Fig. 7.1, by eye
C1
A1
(ii) ray reflected (MO if says along surface)

critical angle exceeded
M1
A1
[Total: 5]
(a) (i) one sound or equivalent (NOT an echo)

(ii) distance = speed time in any form ...... condone factor of 2
330 1.5
495 (m)
(b) (i) idea of one sound direct
OR original sound
other sound by echo
B1
C1
C1
A1
B1
B1
(ii) 1.5 (s)

4.5 (s)
B1
B1
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
Page 5
9

Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) N at left end and S at right end (inside or outside magnet outline)
both N and S within magnet outline
Paper
21
M1
A1
(ii) attracted/moves towards magnet OR it becomes magnetised
B1
(iii) nothing
B1
(b) (i) pass current through coil/wire OR connect a battery across coil
(ii) iron NOT steel
B1
B1
(iii) can be very strong

can be switched on & off easily
can reverse polarity easily
adjustable strength
)
) any one
)
)
B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) parallel
B1
(b) I = V/R in any form

100/250
0.4 (A)
C1
C1
A1
(c) 12 (A) OR 30 his (b), correctly evaluated
B1
(d) parallel
B1
(e) (i) none
e.c.f. from (a)
B1
(ii) none
e.c.f. from (d)
B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) cell/battery shown

complete series circuit, including cell/battery
(ignore any switch, open or closed
ignore any other component, as long as a current would flow)
M1
A1
(b) (i) S and M on door and frame (either way) so they would be next to each other when door
closed
B1
S on frame and M on door edge/door face close to edge
B1
(ii) any suitable application
e.g. shop door, security door, lift door, fridge door, oven door
B1
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2010
Page 6

12 (a) yes
yes
no
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
B1
B1
B1
(b) nucleus
B1
(c) (i) 6 points correct small square 1 e.e.o.o.

thin, smooth curve through points
B2
B1
(ii) 8 1 (mins)
108 1 (mins)
100 2 (mins) e.c.f. if working shown
C1
C1
A1
(iii) half his (ii) e.c.f.
B1
(d) his (ii) e.c.f.
B1
[Total: 12]
UCLES 2010
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21
examination.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
syllabuses.
om
.c
MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2011 question paper
s
er
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21

B marks
M marks
scored.
C marks
A marks
c.a.o.
e.c.f.
e.e.o.o.
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
OR/or
Spelling

Significant
figures

otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units
Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions
Extras
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT
Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another

otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
(a) 60.4 44.2

16.2 (cm3)
C1
A1
(b) (density =) mass/volume in any form, letters, words, numbers

40.5/16.2 e.c.f.
2.5
e.c.f.
g / cm3
(accept correct conversion kg / m3, with unit)
C1
C1
A1
B1
(c) 60.4 and 40.5 both ticked 1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(a) molecules/particles/atoms moving (accept vibrating/oscillating)

molecules colliding (accept with each other)
molecules colliding with walls
C1
C1
A1
(b) (i) LH graph temperature/T/ / C/K on horizontal axis

RH graph volume/V / m3/cm3 on horizontal axis
M1
(ii) X on LH graph at intersection of line and vertical axis
A1
(a) idea that non-renewable sources are finite / get used up
B1
(b) (i) solar/sun/sunlight (ignore just light)

wind/olienne accept windmill
waves (ignore sea)
tidal
(ignore sea)
hydro(electric) (ignore water)
geothermal
biomass
M1
(ii) high cost/low effectiveness

small output
environmental impact
cannot be relied upon (wind/solar)
any 1
any 1 (ignore efficiency)
A1
[8]
[5]
Page 4

IGCSE May/June 2011
(c) (i) fossil fuel

coal
oil
petrol
(natural) gas
peat
nuclear
lignite
(ii) plentiful/regular/constant/reliable supply
cheap/cost effective
high output
4
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
any 1
M1
any 1
A1
[5]
(a) cool air more dense OR cool air falls

OR warm air rises so it can be cooled
B1
(b) energy/heat removed from store must be released outside store

heat developed by refrigeration unit
B1
B1
(c) reduce/prevent heat coming in from outside NOT cold getting out
reduce/prevent conduction NOT convection/radiation
B1
B1
(d) idea that heat gained from outside = heat removed by refrigeration unit
allow B1 for idea of thermostatic control
B2
(a) boxes 1 and 4 ticked 1 e.e.o.o.
B2
(b) sound/wave reflected/bounces back (from surface) NOT just returns
B1
(c) (i) cliff A
B1
(ii) (s =) vt OR (s =) vt/2 in any form........... allow s = ut +at2

330 1.5
OR 495
OR 330 0.75 OR 247.5
OR 330 2.5 OR 825
OR 330 1.25 OR 412.5
OR 330 4
OR 1320
OR 330 2
660 (m)
(iii) both echoes at the same time OR one echo OR louder
time value quoted between 1.5s and 2.5s
[7]
C1
C1
A1
B1
B1
[9]
Page 5
6

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) ray bent down at 1st surface, but not beyond/along normal
ray bent down at 2nd surface, but not beyond/along surface
MAX 1 mark if any suggestion of a spectrum shown
B1
B1
(b) spot/dot/line AND of one colour
B1
accept a single named colour e.g. red
(c) spectrum/colours/light dispersed

ignore rainbow
red at top and violet at bottom in words in space provided
C1
A1
(a) spheres closer together
B1
allow touching spheres
(b) (i) charging (of anything) by friction/rubbing

plastic/furniture (becomes) charged OR electron/charge transfer
plastic/furniture attracts dust/fluff
(ii) idea of charge leaking
water is a conductor
8
Paper
21
B1
M1
A1
B1
B1
(a) (i) parallel
B1
(ii) 4.2 (V)
B1
(iii) V=IR in any form OR V/R

4.2 / 3 e.c.f. (ii)
1.4
e.c.f. (ii)
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s)
C1
C1
A1
B1
(iv) 1. bigger OR the sum of the two currents OR 2 (A)

2. same/equal
B1
B1
(b) clear series connection of all 3 across battery in one circuit

clear parallel connection of all 3 across battery in other circuit, and must not be
shorted out
allow B1 max in (b) if correct series/parallel circuits both shown, but with more or
less than 3 resistors in either/both
[5]
[6]
B1
B1
[10]
Page 6
9

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) all 3 lamps in parallel across battery + switch

(1 if any lamps in series, 1 if connections across battery only)
(b) (i) molecules vibrate over bigger distance OR molecules separate
OR bigger space between molecules
NOT just molecules need more space
ignore breaking bonds
(ii) 1. bends ignore expands
bends/moves to the right/away from contact/outwards/towards invar strip
2. idea that something gets hot
idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass bends/breaks circuit
idea that something cools (when no current)
idea that bimetallic strip/invar/brass straightens/makes contact
Paper
21
B2
B1
B1
B1
M1
A1
M1
A1
10 (a) (i) Fig. 10.1
B1
(ii) Fig. 10.3
B1
(b) 2 complete cycles, any shape (if full-wave rectified, must be 4 humps)
cyclical and equal amplitude above & below axis
uniform spacing
intention of sinusoidal shape accept sinusoidal full-wave rectification
11 (a) thermionic emission
B1
B1
B1
B1
[9]
[6]
B1
(b) (i) S2 OR 2
any 1 correct B1
(ii) S1 OR 1
ignore mention of S2
B2
all 3 correct B2
(iii) S3 OR 3
ignore mention of S1 and/or S2
(c) reverse polarity of plates (however expressed)/make upper plate positive

OR correct description of use of magnet
12 (a) (radio)activity OR count rate OR counts/s OR particles emitted/s
OR rate of decay OR number of undecayed atoms/nuclei
OR radiation OR original number of atoms/nuclei
NOT mass/substance/material, unless clearly specified
to decrease to half (original value) NOT half the time
B1
B1
B1
(b) (i) 53 1 (s)
B1
(ii) 84 1 (s)
B1
(iii) candidates (ii) + candidates (i)

correct evaluation of candidates (ii) + candidates (i)
C1
A1
[4]
[6]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21
examination.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21

B marks
M marks
scored.
C marks
A marks
c.a.o.
e.c.f.
e.e.o.o.
brackets.
OR/or
Spelling

Significant
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures 2, except if figures

specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units
Fractions
Extras
Ignore
plus wrong penalty.
Page 3
Not/NOT

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21

applies.
Page 4
1

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
(a) (i) BC
B1
(ii) AB
B1
(b) area under graph

0.5 15 5
37.5 (m)
C1
C1
A1
(a) tape measure OR trundle wheel OR laser measure IGNORE metre rule
B1
(b) (i) clock OR watch (any sort)
B1
(ii) set clock/watch to zero OR note start time OR start clock/watch/timing

(start clock/watch/timing) when wood seen to fall or equivalent
stop clock/watch/note time when wood reaches bridge 2
B1
B1
B1
(iii) speed = distance/ time in any form, letters, words, numbers

50/400
0.125
m/s
C1
C1
A1
B1
(a) (i) plumb-line (name or description) OR try-square and (horiz.) bench

OR spirit level
B1
(ii) line joining A and D

line joining B and E
intersection clearly labelled G (dependent on scoring both M marks)
M1
M1
A1
(b) X clearly on centre line

X clearly within semicircular portion, but not on surface
B1
B1
(a) dark specks OR bright specks NOT molecules/particles

moving
randomly/zigzag OR dancing about
B1
C1
A1
(b) Brownian motion/movement
B1
(c) invisible/too small to see/very small

moving fast/high kinetic energy
moving randomly/all directions
B1
B1
B1
(a) 150 3
450 (Hz)
[5]
[9]
[6]
[7]
C1
A1
Page 5
Syllabus
0625
B1
(c) increases/rises
B1
(a) ultrasound
B1
all 4 correct
(any 2 correct B1)
B1
(iii) infra-red
B1
(iv) X-rays OR gamma rays
B1
(a) (i) needle inside coil

current through coil OR connect battery/power supply
direct current OR d.c.
OR a.c. and switch off before removing needle/ magnet
[6]
B1
M1
A1
B1
(b) 4+ smooth curves leaving one end and going to the other (ignore any arrows)
no lines crossing or meeting, even at ends
B1
B1
(a) battery/ammeter connected wrong way round

OR negative of battery should go to negative of ammeter
B1
(b) correct symbols for battery, ammeter and rheostat

(allow common variants on battery/cell symbol)
all components in series
M1
A1
(c) voltmeter (any recognisable symbol) clearly in parallel with coil
B1
(d) (i) 2.8 (A) and 12 (V) both
B1
(ii) ammeter increases

voltmeter increases
B1
B1
(iii) 1.4 (A) OR half candidates original reading

6 (V) OR half candidates original reading
B1
B1
[4]
B2
(ii) radio OR the top/first one
(ii) freely suspend/pivot and see which end points N (or equivalent)
OR see which end is repelled by N pole of a magnet
Paper
21
(b) any figure between 20 and 50 inclusive

AND any figure between 15,000 and 25,000 inclusive
(b) (i) infra-red

visible
ultra-violet
X-rays

[6]
[9]
Page 6
9

Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
(a) transformer (ignore step-up/down)
B1
(b) 132,000/22,000 OR 240/132,000

X: 6
Y: 0.001818 to at least 4 dec. pl. OR 1/550 NOT 550
C1
A1
A1
(c) less heat/energy loss

thinner/smaller cables
less copper used
less cable weight
less massive pylons
cheaper
smaller current
any 2 use + = 0 for incorrect extras
10 (a) (electric) charge OR charged body

force
B1+B1
[6]
B1
B1
(b) A and B closer together allow touching

threads straight and equal angle (by eye) to vertical
M1
A1
(c) E horizontal to left

W vertically down
T up thread
B2
all 3 marked on his diagram 1 e.e.o.o.
(d) zero or 0 or nothing

11 (a) (i) filament/cathode clearly and correctly labelled
(ii) anode clearly and correctly labelled
(b) (i) battery shown connected across filament (no e.c.f.)
B1
B1
B1
B1
(ii) power supply connected between filament & anode (no e.c.f.)
B1
(iii) straight path shown along axis (no e.c.f.)
B1
(c) bright spot (or equivalent)
B1
(d) spot moves down
B1
12 (a) points correctly plotted ( small square) 1 e.e.o.o.

smooth curve through candidates points (by eye)
[7]
B2
B1
[7]
Page 7

Syllabus
0625
(b) (i) 1. in range 2.23.0

2. in range 18.019.0
(ii) 2 half-lives
(candidates 2 candidates 1)/2
7.58.6 (days) e.c.f.
Paper
21
B1
B1
C1
C1
A1
[8]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME

B marks
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
scored.
C marks
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
A marks
c.a.o.
means correct answer only.
e.c.f.
means error carried forward. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated e.c.f.
e.e.o.o.
means each error or omission.
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
OR/or
Spelling
Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
Units
Fractions
Extras
Ignore
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT

applies.
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) speed = distance time in any form OR (distance =) speed time

80 OR 80 0.5
40 (km)
C1
C1
A1
(b) (i) First section of line:

horizontal line starting at zero time, any speed
at 80 km/hour
from 0 to 0.5 hour, no further
M1
A1
A1
(ii) Second section of line:

straight line sloping down
line starting at end of previous section and ending at 1 hour
(condone not straight)
line ending at 30 km/hour
Third section of line:
vertical/near vertical line down to 0 at 1 hour
ignore further sections of graph
2
B1
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 10]
(a) 84 53
31 (cm3)
C1
A1
(b) 238 205

33 (g)
C1
A1
(c) density = mass volume, however arranged

33 31 e.c.f. (a) and (b)
1.0645161 correct to any no of sf > 2 dont accept fractions
g/cm3 accept kg/m3 if clear attempt to convert to kg and m3
Paper
21
B1
C1
A1
B1
[Total: 8]
(a) 70 000 (N) arrow to right accept labelled thrust

25 000 (N) arrow to left accept labelled friction
B1
B1
(b) (i) to left OR backward OR opposing motion
B1
(ii) 45 000 (N)
B1
(iii) air friction/air resistance/drag NOT wind/wheels/weight

NOT if any incorrect extra e.g. weight
B1
(c) (i) accelerates OR speed increases OR moves faster

(ii) idea of unbalanced force e.g. forward force > backward force
NOT just forward force is bigger
M1
A1
[Total: 7]
Page 4
4

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) they/molecules/particles/atoms moving/vibrating/have KE

C1
they/molecules/particles/atoms collide (condone with each other)
C1
they/molecules/particles/atoms collide with walls
A1
extra relevant information e.g. exert force, change of momentum, bounce back/off,
lots over an area, random/Brownian motion
B1
(b) (i) decreases
B1
(ii) increases
B1
[Total: 6]
(a) changed/converted/transferred to other forms
B1
(b) (i) 24 (kJ)
B1
(ii) idea of wasted/lost

heat ignore sound
C1
A1
(iii) 696 OR 720 candidates (i), correctly evaluated
B1
(iv) idea of not very good no e.c.f.

accept there is a lot of energy lost, accept calculation
ignore not 100%
Paper
21
B1
[Total: 6]
(a) EITHER
ray from tip of object through optical centre of lens
straight on after lens
OR
ray from tip of object through F2 and on to lens
parallel to axis after lens
M1
A1
(b) image drawn between candidates intersection and the axis
B1
(c) same size

inverted
real
B1
B1
B1
no e.c.f. use + = 0 for size and orientation
(d) smaller
closer to lens/to the left
M1
A1
B1
B1
[Total: 8]
Page 5
7

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) infra-red
B1
(b) infra-red
B1
(c) X-rays
B1
(d) microwaves
B1
[Total: 4]
(a) (i) charge(s) OR electron(s) NOT ions
B1
(ii) (an) ammeter
B1
(iii) (a) voltmeter
B1
(b) (R =) V/I in any form

9.6/0.8
12
OR ohm(s) OR volt/amp OR volts per amp
C1
C1
A1
B1
(c) (i) increases
B1
(ii) decreases OR e.c.f. from (i)
Paper
21
B1
[Total: 9]
(a) coil clearly and unambiguously indicated
B1
(b) increase strength/power of magnet

ignore increase magnetism/ignore add core
ignore magnets closer/bigger
increase current/voltage/energy from battery
accept stronger/more powerful battery
any 2
B1 + B1
increase number of turns (in coil)

ignore bigger coil ignore rotations
(c) reverse current OR reverse magnet/field however expressed
B1
[Total: 4]
Page 6

IGCSE May/June 2012
10 (a) any variation of
allow
Syllabus
0625
and
(b) (i) plug switch
Paper
21
B1
M1
(ii) exposed metal or equivalent OR not insulated OR (easy to get) shock

(c) (i) pull-cord switch
A1
B1
(ii) idea that water/moisture conducts ignore shock

covering/plastic/nylon is an insulator OR no metal is exposed
(d) 3 lamps connected in parallel with each other
NOT if shorted out by switch or extra wire
lamp combination (e.c.f.) in series with switch (e.c.f.) and supply
accept any recognisable symbol, accept closed switch
11 (a) any downward deflection and no upward deflection

curve, either all up or all down, from A to end of region between plates
straight on from end of region between plates, towards BC
(b) idea of deflection upwards/it goes upwards/it moves upwards no e.c.f.
ignore opposite direction/opposite path
12 (a) thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90
B1
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 8]
B1
M1
A1
B1
[Total: 4]
B1
(b) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43
B1
(c) barium OR Ba OR 139 OR 56

silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47
thorium OR Th OR 232 OR 90
B1
any 2
B1
NOTE: technetium + anything scores 1 mark, all of them scores 1 mark

(d) silver OR Ag OR 110 OR 47
(e) technetium OR Tc OR 99(m) OR 43 OR gamma
NOT any extras
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
om
.c
MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2012 series
s
er
Page 2
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21

B marks
M marks
are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
scored.
C marks
A marks
c.a.o.
e.c.f.
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o.
OR/or
o.w.t.t.e.
means or words to that effect.
Spelling
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units
Fractions
Extras
Page 3
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
21
Ignore
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT

applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
Page 4
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(a) moment/torque
ignore turning force
B1
(b) opposite direction

condone different direction(s)
larger or correct reverse argument (opening force is smaller)
B1
B1
(c) (apply) force further from hinge

OR oil/reduce friction/new hinge/use an assist mechanism/replace hinge(s)
B1
(a) D = M / V in any form
B1
(b) (i) length width height in any form

OR 2.5 ( 104) 6.0 ( 103) 3 ( 106) i.e. ignore powers of 10
4.5 10n any power of 10
450 (m3) c.a.o. 4.5 x 102
C1
C1
A1
(ii) 900 his 450 or correct sub into D = M / V

4.05 105 OR 405 000 (kg) e.c.f.
3
Paper
21
C1
A1
(a) speed = distance / time in any form OR distance / speed

80 / 320
0.25 (s)
C1
C1
A1
(b) (i) 0.45 OR his (a) + 0.2(0) correctly evaluated

(allow B1 only, 0.05 / his(a) 0.2(0) OR 0.25 / his (a) alone)
B2
(ii) start timing when he sees flash/smoke (accept any other

appropriate visual stimulus e.g. hand dropping as gun fires)
(c) 12.5 0.2(s) Condone (1 min) 12.5 s OR 12.05 / 12.5 0.45
12.95 OR 12.5 + his (b)(i)
[4]
[6]
B1
C1
A1
[8]
Page 5
4
Mark Scheme
Paper
21
(a) top box ticked
B1
(b) elastic/strain/potential NOT gravitational PE
B1
(c) kinetic
ignore heat
B1
(d) gravitational/gravitational potential/GPE/PE

maximum
kinetic OR thermal/allow heat
thermal allow heat
B1
B1
B1
B1
(a) (i) move/vibrate/oscillate faster OR increase/gain KE

move (further) apart OR (they) separate
B1
B1
(ii) any 1 increases/enlarges/gets bigger/expands o.w.t.t.e.

all three increase
Syllabus
0625
C1
A1
(b) nut/hole expands/enlarges

ignore particles expand/enlarge
bolt doesnt expand (as much)
B1
B1
(a) (i) r correctly shown
B1
(ii) bent up at first surface

bent up at second surface
straight line within prism
B1
B1
B1
(iii) P clearly shown as the original point of entry
B1
(b) (i) blue light refracted from same point at first surface
blue shown with greater refraction
blue light always below red light
(ii) dispersion
[6]
B1
B1
B1
B1
[7]
[9]
Page 6
7
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(a) arrow pointing to left
B1
(b) rotates/turns/S pole goes away from magnet/repelled/ changes direction

N pole points to magnet/S Pole points to N Pole (of Earth)/turns through 180
S Pole/N Pole points in opposite direction
B1
B1
(c) magnetic field/electromagnet(ism)/(ic)

caused by current
M1
A1
(a) its voltage/potential difference

condone volts
its e.m.f./electromotive force
C1
(b) V = IR in any form OR V / R

4.5 / 180
0.025 OR 2.5 102 OR 1 / 40
A/amps/amp/a
C1
C1
A1
B1
(c) (i) two resistors shown in parallel (accept any symbol here)
condone faint lines through resistors (where attempted to rub out wire)
B1
battery in series with resistances (allow any recognisable symbol here)

(even if resistances not in parallel)
all symbols correct (allow cell symbol for battery)
(allow rheostat for resistor condone old symbol)
B1
(ii) 1. 4.5 (V)

ignore units
2. 0.025 OR his (b)
ignore units
9
Paper
21
A1
B1
B1
B1
[11]
(a) switch correctly identified
B1
(b) (i) moves/flows condone (current) flows OR stays the same

ignore nothing (happens)
B1
(ii) increases/higher/greater
condone greater than zero
any indication of gradual increase
(c) remains the same OR decreases/goes back to zero (very) slowly i.e. ignore
decreases/getting smaller on their own.
[5]
M1
A1
B1
[5]
Page 7
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
10 (a) copper
Paper
21
B1
(b) core
B1
(c) Np / Ns = Vp / Vs in any form

8000/Ns = 240 / 6 OR 240 = 6 OR Ns = 6
8000 Ns
8000 240
200
C1
C1
(d) (i) lamp less bright/less than full brightness/wouldnt light

(up properly)/ has less energy
B1
(ii) lamp blows/bursts OR lamp too bright OR lamp

overheats/burns out OR much brighter/has more energy
11 (a) paper stops
sheet of paper makes no difference to count rate
A1
B1
C1
A1
(b) Aluminium absorbs allow aluminium stops

Aluminium makes count rate decrease
C1
A1
(c) (10mm) lead / Pb stops all OR only gets through (10 mm) lead / Pb
still some count rate with lead / Pb
B1
B1
12 (a) (i) (number of) protons + neutrons OR p + n

OR mass number/nucleon number
(ii) (number of) protons OR atomic number/ proton number
Ignore electrons
(b) (i) zero nucleons OR mass number is zero
(ii) negative charge OR requires a proton to be neutral
(c) (i)
(ii)
240
94 Pu
OR Pu OR
250
98 Cf
OR
250
98
B1
B1
B1
B1
NOT just Cf
B1
[6]
B1
240
94
[7]
[6]
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory May 1999
1
(a)
Distance moved in one revolution is equal to the circumference

= 62.8/63 (in)
Time for 1 rev is 5(s)
Speed = 62.8/5
= 12.6 (m/s)
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
(b)(i)
12.6 (m/s) / same value / same number

Direction to the right /east / as marked on diagram
Velocity is a vector or has direction / speed is a scalar or has no direction
P is moving in a circle/constantly changing direction/not in a straight line
If direction changes velocity changes/speed does not or definition of
velocity/speed
1
1
1
1
(c)
Rotation is taking place/direction changing

Force is the centripetal force/force needed for circular motion
Must act through centre otherwise motion not circular
1
1
1
3
(d)(i)
1. Any reference to air resistance

2. The water has hit the ground
1. Velocity on hitting ground = (10 x 0.6) = 6 (m/s)
Distance=6/2 x 0.6
= 1.8 (m)
2. Horizontal distance = average velocity x time or area under graph
= (9.5 x 0.6) = 5.7 (m)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
(ii)
(ii)
1
4 (max)
(e)
Water spreads out

1
Cross-sectional area of water at R much larger than at Q
1
Pressure = force/area
1
Same mass/volume/s spread over larger area = Lower pressure or vice versa2
4 (max)
(a)
Heat = mass x specific heat x temperature change

Heat = power x time
Heat from heater = heat in water
30 x l000 x l8 000 = 54000 x c x 2
= 5 000 (J/kg K)
1
1
1
2
1
6
(b)(i)
Most energetic molecules leave the water surface (evaporation)

Carry away extra/latent heat
Water heats air molecules at surface (by conduction)
Air molecules carry heat away by convection
Molecules in water surface emit radiation into air
Energy carried away as wave energy
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
(ii)
Some of the heat supplied does not end up in the water

Takes longer for same temperature rise
More heat supplied in longer time
1
1
1
7
(a)
Scale, full size

Line at object height, refracted through lens to pass through focus
Ray through focus produced back to pass through 3 cm line
Line through centre to locate object and image
Distance of object from lens, 2.5 cm to 2.9 cm
Distance of image from lens ,7.5 cm to 8.7 cm
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
(b)(i)
(ii)
Light of one colour / wavelength / frequency

8
3 x 10
m/s
Formula quoted sin i / sin r = refractive index
o
o
= sin 37 / sin 22
= 1.5
o
Beam continued using given angle of refraction (22 )
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
Reasonable curve, either direction

Curve to positive plate (upwards)
Electrons are negatively charged
Unlike charges attract
Positive plate attracts electrons
Arrow, towards P, anywhere on the lines PQRS
1
1
(iii)
(iv)
4
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)(i)
(ii)
(d)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
13
-19
2
1
5
Total charge/s = 10 x 1.6 x 10

-6
= 1.6 x 10 (C)
Charge = current x time
-6
Current = charge/1(s) or 1.6 x 10 / 1
Amperes / A
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
Equation E = V It or = V q
E = 10000 x 2.1 x 600 (J)
7
= 1.3x10 (J)
Equation P = E/t
7
P = 1.3 x l0 /600
4
2.1 x 10 (W)
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
Path curved, up or down

Curved downwards
Flemings (left-hand) rule stated
Current = 12/100
= 0.12 (A)
Bigger deflection
in the opposite direction
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
lonisation means creating positively charged and negatively charged ions

from the air molecules between the gauze and the wire
The wire and the gauze are charged, one positively and the other negatively
The ionised air molecules (atoms) move to the opposite charge
Create a surge of current seen as a spark
Alpha, a huge amount, any quoted figures
1
1
1
1
1
1
(b)
Beta, a small amount compared to alpha, any quoted figures

Gamma, virtually none at all
1
1
6 (max)
Beta:
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
Gamma :
mass 1/1836 amu/very small/ negligible

constitution 1 electron
charge -1 unit
mass zero
constitution waves/ wave energy
charge zero
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory November 1999
1
(a)(i)
PE (for one fall) is mgh
= (200 x 10 x 6)
= 12 000 J
(ii)
PE (lost) = KE (on impact) or v = 2gh or s = 2at
12000(J) or answer to (i) = _ mv or v = 2 x 10 x 6 or t = 1.1 s
v = 120 or v = gt
v = l0.95 or 11 m/s
(b)(i)
(Energy to do) work/mechanical

energy to move the pile against resistance/ground forces
(Energy to) heat
(Energy to) sound (energy chains max 1, first answer only considered.)1
At impact kinetic energy/ momentum large
After impact kinetic energy/ momentum soon zero
Kinetic energy change/ momentum change large
Slows to rest in very short distance/time
KE lost/work = force x distance the pile moves / rate of change of
momentum = force
1
1
1
(c)
lifting suspension etc/ pile deeper after each hit

need more p.e. each time
Rising mass gains k.e.
All lost at top
Power to stop/brake rising mass
All lost as heat
Efficiency of motor not 100%
Lost as heat
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
(d)
Greater mass
Fall greater distance
Use motor to drive mass down/thinner or pointed pile
1
1
1
3
(a)
Take temperatures before and after heating/ temperature difference

with thermocouple
Take the time that the heater is switched on/ time with stopwatch
Find in some way the mass of the block and the power of the heater
(ii)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
2
8 (max)
1
1
2
3 (max)
(b)
Heat input of heater = heat gained by the block

Heat input of heater =200 x 1 50(J)
Heat gained by metal =1 x s x 50(J)
s = 600 (J/kgK)/ 0.6 (J/gE)
1
1
1
1
4
(c)(i)
Outline e.g. 2 metals to suitable meter

Essential parts labelled
Temperature difference produces an emf/voltage/current
emf/current read by meter as a temperature
Temperature rapidly changing/small changes in temperature
1
1
1
1
1
(ii)
(iii)
measures high/low/wide range of temperatures

Not fragile like mercury in glass /can be made recording/remote
reading / thermometer not removed
1
6 (max)
(a)
Each reflected angle 85 /10 /170 deviation at each reflection

o
o
Total deviation 20 /160
1
1
2
(b)
(Angle of incidence much) greater than the critical angle

So total internal reflection occurs
1
1
2
(c)(i)
1.50 = 1/sin c
sin c=0.6667
o
o
c = 41.8 / 42
(Angle of incidence is) less than the critical angle
Refracted (out into the air)/ not totally internally reflected
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
Light of one colour/ wavelength

Light of one frequency
14
-7
Speed = 4 x l0 x 5 x l0
8
= 2 x l0 (m/s)
Speed in air/ speed in glass = refractive index
Speed in air / speed in glass x 1.50
1
1
1
1
1
1
5 (max)
(ii)
(d)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)(i)
Speed of rotation (of the coil/magnet)

is faster
The number of turns on the coil / number of coils (not transformer)
is greater
The strength of the magnet / magnetic field
is stronger
Any other correct factor identified
How factor change relates to the emf
(ii)
The induced emf/current produced by a conductor cutting a

magnetic field
induced emf/current also interacts with the magnetic field
interaction produces a force which slows/opposes the moving conductor
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(c)(i)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
1
1
1
7
Power input = power output / 400 x 80 = 30 000 x I

I = 1.1(A)
Reduce voltage
to value suitable for consumers / 240 V / 110 V
Current in these cables much reduced
(because) voltage increased
2
2
Heat = I Rt or Power = I R or heat in cables less
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6 (max)
3.1 (A) at X
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
0.8 (A) at Y
R = 110/any current value
R = (110/0.8) = 138 (ohm)
Any attempt at use of I/R formula for parallel resistors
1/R = 1/24 + 1/48
R = 16 (ohm)
2
Use of VI or I R for calculating power
2
= 110 x 4.6/4.6 x 24
= 506/508 (W)
2
Use of energy = I Rt / VIt
= 30000 / 31000 (J)
Diagram showing radioactive liquid in pipe, weld and detector in

correct places
three labels
Where weld thin reading rises
Radiation passes more easily through / less absorbed by thinner metal
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10 (max)
1
1
1
1
3 (max)
Alpha - none passes through steel

Beta - some passes through steel
Gamma - most/all passes through steel
Accept either beta or gamma with some reasoning
Beta/gamma with clear reason for the choice
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
Any 3 standard precautions which apply to this situation

(generally shielding/absorbing, distance, monitoring radiation)
3
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory May/June 2000
1
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Any three from:

velocity is a vector and speed is a scalar
vector or velocity has direction
scalar or speed has no direction or only magnitude
ref to vertical path as fixed direction
1. 4.5 0.1 s
2. any four from:
decelerates
uniformly
from high velocity at 0 s
to zero velocity(at 4.5 s)
accelerates (for the last 0.5 s)
2
1. ()10 m/s
2. 9.0 s or e.c.f. from 1
value stated as 45 m/s 1 m/s
3
3
1
4
1
1
1
8
(a)
specific latent heat = heat supplied/mass melted

(mass melted =) 0.18 kg
(heat supplied =) 60 000 J
specific latent heat = 330 000 J/kg
(b)
any 2 from:
molecules vibrate
pass energy from molecule to molecule
process is conduction
(a)(i)
(ii)
mass = 0.75 kg
weight =0.75 x 10
= 7.5 N
(b)
Any 3 from:
(sum of) clockwise moments = (sum of) anticlockwise
moments about pivot
no net turning effect
needs extra moment (one side) to turn
1
1
1
1
4
2
2
1
1
1
3
(c)
use of k.e. = _ mv
2
= _ x 0.5x1.2
=0.36 J
(d)
any 2 from; (only) k.e. (before impact)

less or some k.e. after impact
heat + sound
3
3
1
1
1
3
2
2
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
any 2 from:
random
collides with or bounces off sides
hits or bounces off other molecules
other relevant points/explanations
2
2
hits / bounces off ABCD at some time

hits / bounces off all sides at some time / chance of hitting all sides
equal (so equal pressure)
1
1
2
(c)
use of p.v = c
5
5
p = (0.09/0.04 x 10 ) = 2.3 x l0 Pa
(a)
hits at right angles to surface / angle i = 0 along normal
1
1
(b)
velocity/speed/wavelength
increases at F,decreases at D
1
1
2
(c)
correct angle marked / value 45
(d)
refractive index = 1/sin 45

= 1.4(1)
1
1
2
(a)(i)
(ii)
place of higher pressure / air molecules closer together

place of lower pressure / air molecules further apart
(b)
wavelength = 2.5 m
frequency = (330/2.5=) 130 Hz
(c)
distance travelled in 1.2 s = (330 x 1.2 =) 396 m

distance = 200 m
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
(a)
circuit with battery symbol and switch

and three from:
at least one straight line inside the coil
at least one loop at each side
at least one complete loop through the coil 2
full field
arrows correct
use of charge/time
= 0.4 A
1
1
2
(b)
1
1
2
o
2
2
3
4
(c)(i)
use of VIt
= 19(.2) J
resistance = 1.2/0.4
= 3 ohm
1
1
1
1
4
(d)
e.m.f. = joules/coulomb
= 24/16 or 1.5 V
1
1
2
(a)
any 3 from: primary (current) creates magnetic field

field is (constantly) changing
field in core links into secondary
changing field in or through secondary coil
induces a.c. in secondary coil,
(ii)
(b)
10
VpIp = VsIs
240 x Ip = 12 x 3.2
Ip (= 3.2/20) = 0.16 A
3
3
(a)
deviation up marked P
deviation down marked R /or opposite way, both marked
both correct and reasonable curves
(b)
Any three from:

in front/behind paper / at right angles to electric field
N-pole in front of diagram (to give field into paper)
magnetic field deflects beam downwards
by Flemings rule etc.
(a)
228
90
(b)(i)
must be _ because _ and _ absorbed by Aluminium /

only _ not absorbed
_/_/_
one reason e.g. range of any/all greater than 1.5 cm in air
(ii)
(c)(i)
(ii)
Th
4
2
He +
3
3
224
88
Ra
atoms of gas gain / lose electron(s) / by or from colliding particles

(photons) not particles / no mass / no charge / very penetrating /
speed of light etc.
energy (of photons) not big enough
1
1
1
3
2
3
2
2
2
1
1
4
1
1
1
3
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory November 2000
1
(a)
downward force through centre of mass
upward force along wire
downward force/weight = 5 N
upward force/tension = 5 N
1
1
1
1
4
(b)
weight/gravity/pull of earth
tension/pull of wire(on mass)
1
1
2
(c)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
continues straight line XY for any distance

line becomes curve of decreasing gradient to Z
1.5kg
12mm
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
change in property/length/volume per degree
(b)(i)
(ii)
nitrogen
gases expand more/most
1
1
1
1
2
(c)(i)
(ii)
copper
small increase in length per degree/high melting point etc
1
1
2
(d)
pointer movement not same for all degrees

effect different at different parts of the scale
1
1
2
(a)
use of p = hdg
= 6 x 1000 x 10
= 60 000 Pa
1
1
1
3
(b)
use of F = pA
(= 45 000 x 0.015) = 680 N
1
1
2
(c)
use of work done = Fs

(= 550 x 4) = 2200 J
1
1
2
(d)
at pulley (axles)
in persons body
at block
work/energy used against friction force
or work/energy used in moving parts of the body eg. lifting arms
1
1
1
2
1
4 (max)
(a)
use of v = f x wavelength,
(= 0.8 x 1.6) = 1.3 m/s
1
1
2
(b(i)
1.6 m or same
(ii)
0.8 Hz or same
1
2
(c)
(part) circles
centred on middle of gap
not complete semicircles
1
1
1
3
(a)
use of specific heat capacity =

heat supplied/mass x temperature change
= 15 500/0.45 x 8.2
= 4 200 J/kgK
1
2
1
4
(b)(i)
(ii)
compress gas/ move piston in

use of p x V = c
substitution correct
3
v = 0.0034 m
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
ray correct through F

ray correct through C or ray through other F
rays produced back to form image
1
1
1
3
(b)
sensible position, left of lens
1
1
(c)
image length 4.5 0.2 cm

Approximately x 3 [e.c.f. from (a)]
1
1
2
(a)
use of R = V/I
6 ohm
1
1
2
(b)
two in parallel = 3 ohm

circuit total = 9 ohm
1
1
2
(c)
use of current = V/R

= 1.3 A
1
1
2
(d)
voltage across R less than 12 V / low / 8V or current through R

less than 2 A (1.3 (A)
or lower voltage means less bright or lower current means less bright
current through P and Q equal / voltage across P and Q equal
current through P/Q less than through R or p.d. across P/Q less than
across R
(e)
all three in parallel
1
1
1
3
1
1
(a)
any sine wave

amplitude approx 7V
2 correct full waves
1
1
1
3
(b)(i)
any mention of a magnetic field

conductor cutting field/lines
(so) induces emf (must be linked to cutting lines)
change in rate of cutting lines of force
coil rotates cuts one way then other
change in cutting direction reverses emf
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
electrons move from duster to rod

extra electrons on rod so -vely charged
hold rod close to plate
touch plate to earth it
remove rod leaves plate positively charged
1
1
1
1
1
4 (max)
(b)
alpha particles (strongly) ionise air

make air conduct electrons to the plate
(or in terms of conduction and neutralisation of charg(e)
1
1
2
(a)
A
zX
e + Z+1Y
correct mass no. and correct atomic number
1
1
2
(b)(i)
some beta absorbed by paper, some / most pass through

thicker paper less pass through / lower reading
no gamma would be absorbed by paper
gamma are less safe
1
1
1
1
4
smooth curve, either direction

curve towards bottom of page
1
1
2
(ii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
10
(ii)
(c)
o
-1
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory May/June 2001
1
(a)(i)
(ii)
uniform acceleration
uniform speed / terminal velocity
1
1
2
(b)
20s
1
1
(c)(i)
(ii)
force of gravity / weight downwards

force of gravity / weight downwards and resistance / upthrust upwards
2
2
3 (max)
(d)(i)
(ii)
yes
no
(e)
distance = area under graph / 0.5 x 5 x 48

= 120m
1
1
2
(a)
momentum = mass x velocity / momentum = 800 x 20

= 16 000
kg m/s
1
1
1
2 (max)
(b)(i)
momentum change = 16000 - 4000

force = 12 000/4 = 3000 N
deceleration = speed change / time
2
= 15/4 = 3.8m/s
1
2
1
2
6
(a)
diagram showing balance and measuring cylinder

suitable labels
1
1
2
(b)
balance reading for mass

two volume readings
1
1
2
(c)
volume of stone from start and finish readings

density = mass / volume
1
1
2
(a)
suitable random path
1
1
(b)
air molecules hit particles

any two of:
molecules moving very fast / particles more massive / many hits
per particle / hits uneven
(c)
any two of: bigger movements / faster movements / air molecules faster
2
2
(a)
heat input = power x time / 50 x 600

temperature change for liquid = 45C
heat gained by liquid = mass x s x temperature change / 200 x s x 45
s = 30 000 / 9 000
1
1
1
1
(ii)
1
1
2
2 (max)
= 3.3
J/(g K)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(a)(i)
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
4
(b)
i = 32, and r = 20
R.I. = sin i / sin r
= sin 32 / sin 20
= 1.55
1
1
1
1
4
(a)
direction sound (wave) is travelling
1
1
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
pressure varies along sound wave / some particles closer than others
very few particles at P / P is a rarefaction
many particles at Q / Q is a compression
1
1
1
2 (max)
(c)
vibrates / oscillates / moves backwards and forwards

along the direction of the wave
1
1
2
(d)
40 mm
1
1
(a)(i)
current = power / voltage or = 0.6 / 1.5

= 0.4 A
resistance = voltage / current or 1.5 / 0.4 (e.c.f.)
= 3.8 ohm
charge = current x time or = 0.4 x 20 (e.c.f.)
=8C
1
1
1
1
1
1
5 (max)
two lengths in parallel

correctly shown on Fig. 8.2
two lengths in series
correctly shown on Fig. 8.3
1
1
1
1
3 (max)
(c)
energy = l x l x R x t or V x l x t
= 0.6 x 0.6 x 5 x 20
= 36 J
1
1
1
3
(a)(i)
any method of induction

any mention of magnetic field
changing / alternating
core transmits (changing) magnetic field from primary to secondary
1
1
1
1
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
any two of: heat lost to atmosphere / temperature rise less / bigger by
reference to equation
any one of: lagging / lid etc
any attempt shown to mark or measure critical angle

critical angle = 40 (not 42)
incident angle at Q greater
o
>40 (> than candidates value i.e. e.c.f.)
(ii)
1
1
5 (max)
(ii)
no change in magnetic field

energy not transferred from primary to secondary
1
1
5 (max)
(b)(i)
voltage ratio = turns ratio

2000 turns on primary
primary voltage x primary current = sec voltage x sec current
0.2 A
1
1
1
1
4
each correct entry scores one mark

mass of nucleus (much) greater than alpha particle
after collision effect on alpha particle greater
positive charge
repulsion from the positive nucleus
most alpha particles pass straight through
most of atom space or nucleus much smaller than atom
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
5 (max)
(ii)
10
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/3) Extended Theory October/November 2001
(a)(i)
10 m/s
1
(ii)
14 s
1
(iii)
(distance is area under graph ) = 140 m
1
3
(b)
deceleration = change in speed / time or 15 m/s in 8 s

2
= 1.9 m/s
1
1
2
(c)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
arrow clearly towards centre

causes circular motion / prevents it going in a straight line
rails push on wheels / train or need force to produce acceleration
1
1
1
3
(a)(i)
momentum = mass x velocity / 90 x 45

= 4050 kg m/s or Ns
average force = rate of change of momentum or force = ma or
= 4050/1.2 or 90 x 45/1.2
= 3380 N
1
1
(b)
kinetic to heat (+ sound)
1
1
(c)
k.e. = 0.5 x m v
0.5 x 90 x 2025
= 91 kJ
1
1
1
3
(a)
ruler on pivot with one mass hanger on each side of the pivot
ruler, pivot and masses labelled
1
1
2
(b)
any indication that masses and lengths from pivot measured

any indication of adjustment to achieve balance
1
1
2
(c)
e.g. 100 g at 20 cm balances 50 g at 40 cm, two examples

one calculation e.g. 100 x 20 = 50 x 40
2
1
3
(a)
(fast-moving) molecules hit M or each other

change of direction as a result of collisions stated or implied
1
1
2
(b)
motion is random
movement keeps doubling back so forward progress is slow
1
1
2
(a)
energy needed to heat 1 g through 10 degrees = 10500/250 or energy

needed to heat 1 g through 100 degrees = 10500/25 = 420 J
energy needed to convert 1 g of water = 33900/15 = 2260 J
difference = 1840 J
(ii)
(b)
energy needed to separate the liquid molecules

because there are forces holding the molecules together
1
1
4
2
2
1
5
1
1
2
(c)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
sensitivity, change in length / volume per degree or similar

range, lowest (temperature measured) to highest (large) or similar
linear scale, same distance between all degree intervals or similar
1
1
1
3
(a)
names, refraction and diffraction

wavelength change, (smaller) and same / no change
frequency, same and same
2
1
1
4
(b)(i)
(two) correct rays through lens

rays produced back to image
times bigger = 2
1. Eye position suitable to view virtual image
2. magnifying glass or eyepiece
2
1
1
1
1
6
A and B joined by (straight) line, all above the centre line

exterior loop A to B
arrow (internal) A to B and
arrow (external) B to A or one or more correct arrows on the loop
1
1
circle through C
arrow anticlockwise
lines can not touch or cross
1. Strength same, direction opposite
2. Stronger field, same direction
1
1
1
1
1
5
any use of W = V x I
X = 2.5 A; Y = 1.25 A
Z = 3.75 A (e.c.f.)
(b)
attempt to use parallel resistance formula or Ohms law on full circuit

resistance = 64 ohm
1
2
3
(c)(i)
total resistance = 288 ohm

current = 0.83 A
A, 80 V; B, 160 V
(ii)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
(ii)
(d)(i)
(ii)
9
(a)
(b)
(c)
10
(a)
1
3
1
2
1
2
3
any point e.g. lamps require 240 V or voltage divided in series

one reference to values worked out by candidate
parallel circuit / switch in each line affects only 1 lamp etc
1
1
2
4
connections correct
3.5 squares
1.4 V
any sensible attempt e.g. takes less current / shows any variations
in value
1
1
1
24 and 12 on magnesium
0 and 1 on e
1
1
2
1
1
(b)(i)
(ii)
curve to positive
electron charge negative
negative attracted to positive
1
1
1
3
(c)(i)
apparatus shown, beta source, detector / counter, paper in between

items above labelled
read detector, move paper and read again or use second sheet of paper
any change in reading means change in thickness
1
1
1
1
4
(ii)
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/03
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
force of gravity acts on masses/weight of masses

vector has direction/force has direction
B1
B1
(i)
spring 1 (more difficult)

any correct relevant pair of values
P marked at extension 25 mm to 28 mm
explanation in terms of end of proportionality
each graph read at 15 N, approx. 25 mm, 19 mm
difference correct, 6 mm +/- 1 mm
M1
A1
A1
B1
C1
A1
change in speed is 1.5 m/s

deceleration = decrease in speed/time or 1.5/12
a = (-/+) 0.125 m/s
C1
C1
A1
average speed = 1.75 m/s

distance = 21 m
C1
A1
attempt to use triangle or parallelogram of forces

stated scale used
950 N and 1220 N in correct relative directions
correct resultant drawn in
weight = 1785 N [limits 1700 N to 1850 N]
M1
A1
C1
C1
A1
work = force x distance or 1500 x 3.0

work = 4500 J
power = work/time or 4500/2.5
power = 1800 W
C1
A1
C1
A1
air molecules hit dust particles

hits continuously/unevenly/hits cause movement in all
directions
air molecules fast moving/high energy
M1
A1
B1
any attempt to use p x v = constant or correct

proportion
fraction 2 x 80/25 seen
p = 6.4 x 10 (Pa)
C1
C1
A1
(iii)
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
Paper
3
(i)
(ii)
(ii)
Syllabus
0625
6
[8]
3
2
[5]
4
[9]
[6]
5
(a)
(b)
(c)
Y is a wire of different metal/not copper

Z is a galvanometer/millivoltmeter/miIIiammeter
B1
B1
2 junctions at different temperatures, accept one hot,

one cold
temperature difference causes e.m.f./voltage/current
reading of meter changes (with temperature)
1 junction at known temperature/need for calibration
B1
dull or black surface
B1
B1
B1
B1
max 3
1
[6]
Page 2
(a)
Mark Scheme
(i)
C1
A1
B1
B1
use of sini/sinr
correct substitution from candidates values
value correct within agreed limits from candidate's
values
C1
C1
A1
3
[7]
(a)
value 3 x 10 m/s
A1
(b)
speed of light (much) greater than speed of sound or

value for sound
A1
source and receiver arrangement

with detail and labels
distance between source and receiver
time between flash and bang
speed = distance/time
C1
A1
B1
B1
B1
use of charge = It or I = 90/45

current = 2 A
resistance = voltage/current or 6/2
resistance is 3 ohm
energy = Vit or Vq or 6 x 90
energy is 540 J
C1
A1
C1
A1
C1
A1
idea of energy transfer

is (6) J/C
C1
A1
power = VI or 24 X 2
power is 48 W
voltage = power/current or 48/0.4
voltage is 120 V
C1
A1
C1
A1
(b)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Paper
3
incident ray, refracted ray and normal drawn

all correct and meeting at a point
angle of incidence and refraction correctly identified
values correct within agreed limits
(ii)
(iii)
Syllabus
0625
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
no/very little energy/power lost or energy/power in =

energy/power out
changing magnetic field
field passes through core or secondary coil
induces voltage in secondary coil
number of turns on secondary determines voltage
output
max 4
[6]
6
2
[8]
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
max 4
[8]
Page 3
10
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(ii)
circular line of force around wire through P

arrow(s) on line anticlockwise - none wrong
arrow through Q to left
M1
A1
A1
(i)
(ii)
none/stays same
direction reverses
B1
B1
at S - stronger
at T - same (strength)
at W - same (strength)
B1
B1
B1
source, detector
named absorber/air and labels
take detector reading with no source (background)
detector reading with source, detector and air only
detector reading with appropriate named absorber
(including distance in air)
same reading with absorber(including air) as
background
so all alpha absorbed by cardboard/paper/air, others
would get through
B1
B1
B1
B1
curved path stated or drawn

path at right angles to magnetic field
into paper
B1
B1
B1
(i)
(c)
11
(a)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Paper
3
3
[8]
B1
B1
B1
max 6
3
[9]
TOTAL 80
November 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
1 (a) (i)
(ii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
(ii)
Paper
3
7(.0 s)
A1
PQ or 0 2s or other correct description
A1
distance = av. speed x time or area under graph
C1
distance 11 x 2 m= 22 m
A1
deceleration (now) uniform (test 2)
B1
slower/lower (average) value/value between that of PQ and QR/takes longer

(or values) time to come to rest.
B1
deceleration = change in speed/time or 15/8
C1
value = 1.9 m/s

(c) (i)
Syllabus
0625
A1
graph shows constant acceleration
B1
force = ma (and m is also constant) so force is constant
B1
towards the centre of the motion/circle
A1
3
[11]
2 (a)
pressure = depth x g x density of water
C1
pressure = 50 x 10 x 1000
C1
so value is 500 000 Pa or N/m

(b)
force = pressure x area
in any form
A1
C1
force = 500 000 x 0.15 x 0.07
C1
force = 5250 N
A1
3
[6]
3 (a)
(b)
one slightly nearer the centre than the other
C1
20 kg is the nearer one to the pivot
A1
Clockwise moments = anticlockwise moments (about point/pivot)
A1
(accept opposite directions and equal)

(c)
18x2.5=20xB
C1
distance = 2.25(m)
A1
2
[5]
4 (a)
(b)
(c)
Some have extra/more energy than others
B1
most energetic leave surface/ break liquid bonds etc
B2
evaporation occurs strictly at the surface/at all temperature
B1
boiling occurs throughout liquid/ at one temperature (at normal at. pr.)/100C
B1
energy supplied = Wt /60 x 120
C1
sp.latent heat = energy/mass evaporated or 60 x 120/3.2
C1
value is 2250 J/g
A1
M2
3
[7]
5 (a) (i)
(ii)
nitrogen
M1
copper-solid-molecules very tightly bonded together so separate little
B1
water liquid molecules less tightly bonded/still small separation
B1
nitrogen gas molecules free and not bonded so separate most
B1
(N.B. accept 2 bonding statements for 2 marks. 1 separation statement for 1 mark)
M3
Page 2
(b) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
size of movement/change in length of liquid column per degree
B1
change in length (of liquid column) same for all degrees
B1
2
[5]
6 (a)
(b)
3 more roughly circular
B1
all drawn clearly circular, stop (well) clear of barrier and centred on slit
B1
wavelength constant throughout, both sides of barrier
B1
wavelength speed/frequency
C1
in any form
values substituted correctly
C1
answer 6 x 10 m
A1
3
[6]
7 (a)
two dots, marked F, each 5.0 cm from the lens
A2
(b)
each correct ray one mark
M2
(c)
correct image, labeled I
A1
(d)
rays pass along the axis undeviated/object distance same for all object/rays meet at
same distance on image/image distance same for all image
B1
(e)
magnifying glass/eyepiece of telescope or microscope
B1
1
[7]
8 (a) (i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
0-6 (V) positive and negative
A1
all waves roughly 6V amplitude
B1
3 waves approx. one wave every 0.1 s
B1
B1
coils (forced to) cut magnetic field
B1
includes e.m.f./voltage/current in the coils
B1
as in Flemings R.H. rule
B1
mechanical energy/work (in)/kinetic energy
B1
electrical (out) (+ heat) (ignore sound)
B1
M3
2
[8]
9 (a) (i)
regular (but)/not normal (sine) wave/several waves added together etc.
B1
(ii)
1.6(V)
A1
(iii)
connect known voltage to Y plates (without any changes to C.R.O.)
B1
read off against screen values
B1
6.1 (cm) (accept 6 or any value in range 6.0 to 6.2)
A1
50 ms for 10 cm or 5 ms per cm e.c.f.
C1
so 6.1 x 5 ms or 31 ms
A1
difference in time of runners finishing race or other timing between two closely
separated events.
B1
(b) (i)
(ii)
(iii)
4
[8]
Page 3
10 (a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
(iii)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
current = power/voltage or 150/12
C1
value is 12.5 A
A1
sum of currents at junction = current after junction/12.5 A = 5.0 A + I
C1
value is 7.5 A
A1
power = VI or is 7.5 x 12 e.c.f from (i)
C1
value is 90 W
A1
resistance = voltage/current or 12/7.5 e.c.f. from (i) but not from (a)
C1
value is 1.6
A1
6
[8]
11 (a)
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii)
top line correct, need 24 and 0
B1
bottom line correct, need 12 and 1 (accept or e for electron
B1
particles take curved path (accept from diagram)
B1
move between the poles at right angles to lines of force
B1
move out of paper
B1
use detector to pick up radiation (from isotope at points on/in body etc.)
B1
high count where circulation good or v.v. explained
B1
alpha particles all absorbed, none detected

beta particles may be largely absorbed, not penetrative enough
gamma rays reach detector/leave body
any two
B2
4
[9]
TOTAL 80
June 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
PHYSICS
Paper 3 (Extended)
Page 1
(a)
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i)
Paper
3
Acceleration / increase in speed

Uniform / constant or in a straight line
Uniform speed
Velocity changes / motion in a circle / accelerates
Similarity: same value / 6m/s or velocity changing
Difference: opposite directions / up at E, down at C
Average speed x time / area under graph / 3 x 20
60 m
6 x 52
312m
M1
A1
B1
B1
B1
B1
C1
A1
C1
A1
(a)
750 N
A1
(b)
p.e. lost / converted = mgh or weight x height

750 x 15 or 75 x10 x15 = 11250 (J)
p.e. lost = k.e. gained = 11250 (J)
C1
C1
A1
Any 3 of: heat in water / rock

(kinetic) energy of (moved) water / to make water move/
make waves
some k.e. still in (sinking) rock
sound energy on impact / of splash
B3
(ii)
(b)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
Syllabus
0625
(c)
4
2
4
[10]
(just heat and sound C1)

[7]
3
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
Extension proportional to load however expressed

Any relevant arithmetic to show direct proportion (or
straight line graph with values)
Work done = force x distance / 400 x 0.210
84.0 J
(total) work/time or (24 x) 84/60 (apply e.c.f from (i) )
33.6 W
B1
B1
Water molecules at higher temps. have higher (av) k.e.

/ energy
Higher energy molecules (have greater chance to)
escape the surface
Higher energy molecules have energy to break liquid
bonds or separate liquid molecules or more
evaporation at 85C (lowers level)
B1
Heat for evaporation = 34 500 600 = (33 900)
C1
Sp. latent heat of evaporation = heat/mass evap. or

33 900 / 15
2260 J/g (method and working correct, but no heat loss
used, 2/3)
(600 added or 34 500 used can score 2 max)
C1
A1
C1
A1
4
[6]
B1
B1
C1
A1
3
Page 2
(a)
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(a)
(i)
(ii)
Syllabus
0625
Thermopile / thermocouple / (blackened) thermometer /

infra red detector or use ammeter / voltmeter in supply
circuit
One of: same distance of plate to detector or use two
identical detectors or same time (after switching on)
Dull black better radiator / radiates more than silver / or
emits more heat / radiation
Infra red (i.r.)
B1
A1
any correct example e.g. heating water or chimney

current clear and complete
direction shown correctly by arrows
M1
A1
A1
Refraction at Q approx. correct, ray emerge from AB

parallel PQ
Angle of incidence correctly marked
Angle of refraction correctly marked
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
(can score even if incorrect / no refraction shown)

(b)
(c)
(d)
3
[7]
Refractive index = speed in air / speed in glass

Refractive index = (3 x 108 /2 x 108) = 1.5
B1
B1
(i)
Wavelength = v/f or 3 x 108/6 x 1014

Wavelength = 5 x 10-7 m
C1
A1
C,R,C,R,C,R marked (or v.v.) along XY
B1
Above normal / high air pressure or particles close

together
Below normal / low pressure or particles further apart
B1
B1
Oscillation / vibration of particles / molecules (or

particles / molecules move to and fro)
Oscillation is along XY
B1
B1
Time = distance / speed or (2x) 50/340

Time = 0.29 s
C1
A1
(i)
(ii)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
Paper
3
2
2
[7]
1
Page 3
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(a)
(b)
1.52 kW
(i)
B2
Current = power/voltage or 200/240

Current = 0.83 A
Energy = power x time or 1.2 x 3
Energy = 3.6 kWh or 1.3 x 107 J
Current = 60/240
R= V/I or 240/0.25
R =960
C1
A1
C1
A1
C1
C1
A1
Solenoid ends connected to meter, both labelled

One magnet in correct position to enter / leave
solenoid, labelled
B1
B1
(b)
Push magnet into coil / pull out / move near end of coil
B1
(c)
(magnet has / produces) magnetic lines of force /

magnetic field
lines cut (coils of) solenoid / coils / wires
B1
B1
Pull magnet out of coil / reverse effect to answer (b)

Move magnet faster or effect in (a) faster
B1
B1
Analogue, continuously increasing / decreasing

readings
Digital, readings increase / decrease by one unit
B1
B1
(c)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
(d)
10
A1
Paper
3
Each appliance is connected across 240 V supply or

equivalent
Any 2: all work on same voltage or on 240 V or mains
OR all have full/stated power OR each can be on or off
OR one goes off/breaks others stay on
(ii)
Syllabus
0625
(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
Transistors + other components such as resistors

Standard symbol, must have labeled inputs and output
Both inputs 0 (off), or either one input 0 (off), output 0
(off)
Both inputs 1 (on), output 1 (on)
OR correct truth table drawn (C1)
Some explanation of what truth table shows (A1)
B1
3
7
[11]
2
[7]
B1
B1
B1
B1
4
[6]
11
(a)
(b)
(c)
Particle 1 carries straight on

Particle 2 (slightly) deflected (less than 90)
Particle 3 turns back / (deflected more than 90)
Nucleus is heavy /dense / all or most of mass in atom in
nucleus
Most of atom is space or nucleus is (very) small
cf. atom
(mass) 4
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
1
[6]
Page 4
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
PAPER TOTAL = [80]
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
PHYSICS
(Extended Theory)
Page 1
1 (a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
deceleration/slows down/speed reduces

deceleration uniform/comes to rest at 4 s
1
1
40 (m/s)
4 (s)
speed falls from 0 to 40 m/s in 4 s

1
acceleration = change in speed/time taken or 40(m/s)/4(s) 1
acceleration = 10 m/s2
1
(d)
2 (a)
(b)
(c)
3 (a)
distance = average speed x time or area of triangle under

graph
= 20 x 4 or 2 x 40
= 80 m
pressure = hdg or 20 x 1000 x 10

= 2 x 105 Pa
1
1
force = pressure x area or 2 x 105 x 0.5 e.c.f.

= 1 x 105 N
1
1
potential energy (at water surface)

changed to kinetic energy (at pipe exit)
1
1
one mark for each labelled diagram

both diagrams sensible but no labels
max 1
1
1
3
(10)
2
(6)
(b)
newtons/10 is kg or equivalent
(c)
volume/level/reading of water then volume etc. water + rock 1
(d)
difference in the two readings
(e)
density = mass/volume
1
(6)
4 (a) (i)
1
1
(ii) high/low temperatures stated or high/low values quoted or

temperature varying rapidly or small site/at point or remote
place (from meter) or in control systems
any 2
2
(b) (i)
put hot junction in beaker (of hot water)

read temperature from galvo. in some way (calibration)
raises the water temperature
(ii) provides latent heat or boils/evaporates water
1
1
2
(6)
Page 2
5 (a) (i)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
any suitable random motion

molecules hit walls
Paper
3
1
1
(ii) 1.
rebound/bounce back or many hits per unit area or per unit
time or collisions create force
1
2.
(av) k.e./speed of molecules increases
1
more hits(/sec) or harder hits
1
p 1 v 1 = p 2 v 2 quoted or any recognisable substitution

2 x 105 x 0 . 3 5 = 5 x 1 0 5 x v
volume = 0.14 (m3)
1
1
1
6 (a)
expect two internal reflections at sensible angles
3
(8)
1
(b)
angle of incidence at Y greater than critical angle

total internal reflection occurs
1
1
frequency = velocity/wavelength or 1.9 x 108/3.2 x 10-7

= 5.9 x 1014Hz
1
1
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii) refractive index = 3/1.9 or 1.9/3

= 1.58 (no e.c.f.)
I = V/R or 12/8
= 1.5 A
7 (a)
(b) (i)
10()
(ii) 2()
power = VI or I2R or V2/R
= 72W
(c)
1
1
1
1
1
1
(ii) 6(V)
8 (a)
(b)
(c)
(d) (i) 12(V)
(resistance) less
(ii) (resistance) less
(e) (i)
4
(7)
diffraction
plane waves in front of gap
2
(10)
1
curved end effect shown, reasonable curves

1
wavelength constant throughout and approximately same
as in Fig. 8.1
1
good quality i.e. end effect starts at correct points
1
particles/water oscillate/vibrate/move up and down

at right angles to wave direction
1
1
(7)
Page 3
(a) (i)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
two coils on continuous core (not allow coils joined)

primary coil to 240 V, secondary coil to 6 V
iron core, primary/input and secondary/output labelled
(ii) any values with correct 40:1 ratio, accept here or on

diagram
(b)
(c)
10 (a) (i)
Paper
3
1
1
1
1
power in = power out or 240 x I = 12

current = 0.05 A
1
1
must be a changing magnetic field, only from a.c.

so that induction can take place
1
1
2
(8)
switch, relay or amplifier
(ii) any one of the three versions below, each 2 marks
(b) (i)
1. vary base current

transistor switches on for Vbe >0.6 V
1
1
2. small change in base current

produces a large change in collector/emitter current
1
1
3. vary potential divider connected to transistor base

transistor switches on for Vbe > 0.6 V
1
1
standard symbol with 2 inputs and an output labelled
(ii) one or both inputs 1, output 1 (accept on, high for 1)

both inputs 0, output 0 (accept off, low for 0)
11 (a)
(b) (i)
1
1
correct equation i.e. Ra gives Rn + alpha particle or He

all numbers correct on Rn and He
1
1
radiation from surroundings/background radiation
(ii) 532 to 552 counts/min
(iii) 5/6 cm
(iv) beyond 5/6 cm no alpha, only background radiation
3
(6)
2
4
(6)
June 2005
IGCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
PHYSICS
Extended
Page 1
1 (a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
acceleration, speed increases

acceleration getting less
acc. zero/constant speed along RT or terminal velocity
B1
B1
B1
air resistance or friction (force) up (accept upthrust)

weight/(force of) gravity down
B1
B1
air resistance (up) = weight (down) or two forces equal

no (net) force, no acceleration
B1
B1
(d) (i)
distance = speed x time or 120 x 40

distance = 4800 m
(ii) distance = average speed x time or 25 x 6 or area under graph
distance = 150 m
2 (a)
Paper
3
time a number of swings (if number stated, >5)

time divided by [2 x number of swings]
C1
A1
C1
A1
4
[11]
M1
A1
(b) (i) weight of gravity and tension

(ii) force towards centre of circular motion or towards support point
B1
B1
(c)
p.e. = mgh or 0.2 x 10 x 0.05

= 0.1 J
C1
A1
in a straight line or (vector) has direction
B1
f = ma or f = 3.0 x 2.0
= 6(.0) N
C1
A1
P = F/a or P = 120/0.05
= 2400 N/m2 (or Pa)
C1
A1
start temp. and final temp. or change in temperature

mass of iron
time heater on
B1
B1
B1
P x t, VIt or in words
= m x shc x cit or words
B1
B1
3 (a)
(b)
(c)
4 (a)
(b)
(c) (i) heat lost to surroundings/air

(ii) add lagging/insulate
B1
B1
2
[6]
2
[5]
2
[7]
Page 2
5 (a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
6 (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
7 (a) (i)
(ii)
(b)
(c)
8 (a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
air molecules hit particles or vice versa

air molecules have speed/moment/energy
hits uneven or from all directions
hits (by small molecules) can move a large particle or moves
particles small distances
B1
B1
B1
most energetic/fastest molecules

need energy to overcome forces/break bonds/separate mols.
so work must be done/energy used as work
B1
B1
B1
along normal or angle i = 0 so angle r = 0
B1
speed reduced, wavelength reduced, frequency unchanged

any two correct scores one mark
third correct scores second mark
B1
B1
reflected at 30o
refracted at > 30o
B1
B1
sin 30o/sin r = 0.67

sin r = sin 30o/0.67
r = 48o
C1
C1
A1
x-rays or gamma rays

infra red or radio
B1
B1
f = v/ or 3 x 108/ 1 x 10-12
= 3 x 1020 Hz
C1
A1
3 x 108 m/s
circuit which would work with supply and resistor

voltmeter in parallel and ammeter in series with resistor
variable resistor in series or means of changing p.d. across
resistor
B1
B1
B1
read ammeter and voltmeter

adjust rheostat/supply
B1
B1
I = V/R or V = IR or R = V/I or 0.5 = 6.0/3.0 + R

R = 9(.0)
(ii)
60 C
(iii) P = VI or = I2R or P = v2/R or (0.5 x 3.0) x 0.5
= 0.75 W
(c) (i)
B1
C1
A1
B1
C1
A1
3
[7]
3
[8]
1
[5]
5
[10]
Page 3
(a) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE JUNE 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
3
to change a.c. to d.c. or rectify (a.c.)

full sine wave at least 1.5 full waves
half wave rectified at least two d.c. bumps
B1
B1
B1
correct symbol
when input high or 1, output low or 0 or off
when input low or 0 or off, output high or 1 or on
B1
B1
B1
8 (mins) for value, no working shown

8 (mins) for value with suitable working or indication on graph
B1
B1
source, aluminium and detector, recognisable shapes

quality and all labels correct
count background
source and detector, no absorber, count taken
source, absorber and detector, count taken
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
magnetic field and current at right angles causes

force on wire which deflects it
or
field around wire (B1)
interacts with the field of the magnet (B1)
B1
B1
normal to/between poles, either way however expressed

out of paper
C1
A1
(c)
converts electrical energy to work/k.e./movement energy
B1
(d) (i)
split rings and brushes or equivalent (e.g. leaning wires)
B1
every half turn current passes from one ring to the other
so current flows opposite way around coil or commutates
B1
B1
(b) (i)
(ii)
10 (a)
(b) (i)
(ii)
11 (a)
(b)
(ii)
3
[6]
2
2
3
[7]
3
[8]
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2005
(a)
(b) (i)
(iii)
(c) (i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c) (i)
(ii)
Syllabus
Paper
0625
force of gravity on a mass or mg

mass/volume
B1
B1
hang object from spring balance, reading in N taken

divide reading in N by 10 or g
B1
B1
volume of water in cylinder or fill overflow can to top

add object find increase in volume or measure overflow
volume
{no credit for mass unless not scored in (i) and no credit for
density = mass/ volume unless not scored in a) }
B1
B1
2N
left
B1
B1
F = ma or 2 = 0.5 a
a = 4.0 m/s2
C1
A1
upwards force = downwards force or no resultant force

opposing moments equal or A.C.M. = C. M.
B1
B1
[2]
30 x spring balance reading = 40 x 6.0 or equivalent

spring balance reading = 8.0 N
C1
A1
[2]
0.5 N
downwards
B1
B1
P = hdg or 2 x 1000 x 10
= 20 000 N/m2 or Pa
C1
A1
[2]
p = f/a or 20 000 = 50/a

a = 0.0025 m2
C1
A1
[2]
potential energy of the water

converted to kinetic energy of water through outlet (and
heat)
B1
B1
turn on heater and wait until water starts dripping in beaker

empty beaker & replace, start watch
stop watch & remove beaker at same time
record time
find and record mass of water in beaker
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
[M4]
60 x t = 120 x 340
t = 680 s
C1
A1
[2]
ice gains heat from surroundings/ice falls through funnel
B1
lag or fit lid to funnel/place gauze in funnel bottom
B1
[2]
[4]
[4]
Total [10]
[2]
Total [6]
[2]
Total[6]
[2]
Total [8]
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2005
(a) (i)
Paper
0625
random
B1
hit and rebound
B1
(b) (i)
increase or further apart
B1
(ii)
increase or move faster
B1
random, fast in gas to vibration in solid
B1
long way apart in gas to very close or touching
B1
[2]
Total [6]
(a)
Sound reflects off wall
B1
[1]
(b)
400 Hz
B1
[1]
(c)
= v/f or = 330/400
C1
A1
[2]
(ii)
(c) (i)
(ii)
6
Syllabus
= 0.83 m
(d)
vibration/oscillation along line of/direction of wave
B1
(a) (i)
two approximately correct reflections

evidence of projecting back to image or use of equal
distance from the mirror, object and image
B1
virtual
any one of upright, same size, same distance from mirror
B1
B1
ray 1 correct
ray 2 correct
image correctly located
B1
B1
B1
eye symbol to right of lens
B1
(ii)
[2]
[2]
[1]
Total [5]
B1
[4]
(b) (i)
(ii)
[4]
Total [8]
8
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
force is produced
on any charge placed in the field
B1
B1
at least 3 parallel, straight lines plate to plate, ignore end

effect
at least one correct arrow, none wrong
B1
B1
[2]
q = It or 0.06 = I x 30
I = 0.002 A or 2 mA
C1
A1
[2]
E = Vit
= 1500 x 0.008 x 10
= 120 J
C1
C1
A1
[2]
[3]
Total [9]
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2005
(a)
3
B1
B1
[2]
low, OFF or 0 need both correct
B1
[1]
need 4 boxes correct for 2 marks, -1 for e.e.o.e.
B2
no change
B1
a.c. input causes constantly changing current through coil

magnetic field formed in or around coil
constantly changing magnetic field
B1
B1
B1
(ii)
(changing) magnetic field transferred to secondary coil
B1
(iii)
(changing) magnetic field cuts secondary coil

induces e.m.f.
B1
B1
[3]
(b)
more turns on secondary (than on primary)
B1
[1]
(c)
no transfer of magnetic field from primary to secondary
B1
[1]
(d)
Vp.Ip = Vs. Is or 100 x 0.4 = 200 x Is

Is = 0.2 A
C1
A1
-source and detector suitably arranged

deflecting plates suitably arranged
additional detail e.g. slit or collimator, vacuum chamber,
circuit connected to deflecting plates
B1
B1
at least 3 readings at right angles beyond & perp. to the

plates
one near +ve, one near ve and one in centre
M1
(c)
highest reading near +ve plate
B1
[1]
(d)
electrons negatively charged, attracted to +ve
B1
[1]
Total [7]
(ii)
(c) (i)
(ii)
11
Paper
0625
correct symbol
correct labels
(b) (i)
10
Syllabus
(a) (i)
(a)
(b)
low, OFF or 0
B1
[3]
Total [6]
[M2]
[2]
Total [9]
[3]
[2]
A1
Page 2
(a)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
point 8,12 identified

straight line joining 0,0 and 8,12
straight line joining 8,12 and 20,12
B1
B1
B1
(b) acceleration = change in v/change in t or 12/8 etc

= 1.5 m/s2
C1
A1
(c)
C1
A1
C1
A1
distance =
=
area under graph between t = 20 and t = 25

24 m to 28 m
(d) F = ma or 4000 x 1.2

= 4800 N
(e)
more passengers got on (so mass increased)

driver pressed accelerator less (so force decreased)
more traffic or going uphill
any two lines
B2
2
[11]
any closed triangle or parallelogram

forces in correct directions relative to each other
correct resultant indicated
resultant 7.7 N to 8.1 N
scale stated
resultant vertically upwards
C1
C1
C1
A1
B1
B1
(a)
C1
A1
A1
A1
work = force x distance

= force of gravity/weight x (vertical) distance/height
(b) (i)
work = (100 x 8) = 800 J
(ii)
power = (800/5) = 160 W
(iii) increases the k.e. of the water (ignore heat/sound)

4
Paper
03
4
2
[6]
B1
1
[5]
B2
(b) energy/work to separate molecules

(against) forces of attraction between water molecules
(to break bonds C1)
The k.e./speed of the molecules does not increase
B1
B1
B1
(c)
C1
C1
A1
(a)
on surface/throughout; no bubbles/bubbles; all temps./b.p.;

s.v.p. < at. pressure; svp = at. pressure
any two
Wt = mL or 120 x 1 = 0.05 x L
L = 120/0.05
L = 2400 J/g
[8]
Page 3
(a)
(ii)
(a)
Syllabus
0625
increase surface area of tank

blow air over surface/put in windy place
(b) (i)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
B1
capillary tube thinner/finer or liquid with higher expansivity

or bigger bulb
B1
p1v1 = p2v2 or 1 x 105 x 150 = p2 x50

p2 = 3 x 105 (Pa)
C1
A1
red ray refracted away from normal

violet ray refracted more than red ray in prism
violet ray further refracted from red ray to screen
B1
B1
B1
M1
C1
A1
2
[6]
(i)
3 x 108 m/s
A1
(ii)
same as (i)
A1
2
[8]
B1
(b) a correct C marked

a correct R marked
B1
B1
(c)
M1
A1
(c)
B1
B1
capillary tube longer or liquid with lower expansivity
(b) 1.52 = sin 40o/sin r

sin r = sin 40o/ 1.52 ( = 0.423)
r = 25o
Paper
03
(a)
Longitudinal or pressure waves
oscillation/vibration/backwards and forwards

along PY (consider pressure waves as alternative)
(d) wavelength = 340/200

PX(= /2) = 0.85 m
C1
A1
(a)
C1
A1
I = W/V or 9/6
I = 1.5 A
(b) (i)
8 ohm
A1
(ii)
6V
A1
(i)
brightness decreases/dimmer
B1
(ii)
resistance of circuit greater

current through lamp falls
B1
B1
(d) (i)
4 ohm
A1
(ii)
4 ohm
A1
(c)
2
[7]
2
2
[9]
Page 4
(a)
Paper
03
B1
B1
B1
must be constantly changing magnetic field
B1
magnetic field of primary passes through core to secondary

magnetic field of secondary cuts coil, induces output
B1
B1
(i)
18 W
A1
(ii)
540 J
A1
(ii)
10 (a)
Syllabus
0625
primary and secondary coils on iron core labelled

240 V a.c. to primary, 12 V a.c. to secondary
turns ratio shown or stated 20:1, stepdown
(b) (i)
(c)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
bring rod close but not touching plate

touch metal plate with earth lead
remove lead and then rod
(b) (i)
(ii)
M1
M1
A1
Q = 20 (mA) x 15 (s)
= 0.30 C
C1
A1
V = 20 (ma) x 10 (k)
= 200 V
C1
A1
11 line1 into paper

positive or +2
line 2 out of paper or opposite of line 1
negative or -1
line 3 no deflection
no charge
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
2
[8]
M3
[6]
6
[6]
Page 2
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
= v/g or 32/10
= 3.2 s
Paper
03
(i)
C1
A1
(ii)
straight line starting at zero, inclined

line joining 0,0 and 3.2, 32, accept c.f. from time (i)
C1
A1
(iii)
2.4 kg
A1
(i)
take volume of water before use

(totally) immerse stone and take new volume
(Not clearly measured before and after C1)
B1
B1
(ii)
hang rock from balance and take reading
B1
(iii)
density = mass/volume
B1
(iv)
need to tie "sinker" or cork or press cork down

need volume with sinker then volume with sinker and cork or just completely submerge
cork
B1
B1
[5]
[6]
[Total: 11]
2
(a)
limit of proportionality (allow elastic limit)
B1
[1]
(b)
force is proportional to extension or in terms of doubling
B1
[1]
(c)
(up to Q extension proportional to force applied)

Q to R extension/unit force more however expressed
B1
[1]
k = force/extension or 8/2 or other correct ratio

= 4.0 N/mm
C1
A1
[2]
(d)
[Total: 5]
3
(a)
(b)
(c)
p.e. lost = mgh or 1 x 10 x 7

= 70 J
C1
A1
[2]
70 = 0.5 x m x v2 or ecf
v2 = 140 or 2 x p.e.
v = 12 m/s
C1
C1
A1
[3]
some p.e. changed to heat/sound/either one/work done against air resistance air/resistance acts
against the motion
B1
[1]
[Total: 6]
4
(a)
(i)
1 is 20C
2 is 15 1C, need both correct for a mark
A1
more heat lost at higher temperature
B1
[2]
heat in = 60 x 210 or Wt or 12 600 (J)

heat in water = m x s x or 75 x s x 40
s = 12600/75 x 40
= 4.2 J/g C
C1
C1
C1
A1
[4]
outline correct, two wires with clear junction and a meter/datalogger/computer

labels, hot and cold junctions or clear, two different metals
M1
A1
[2]
(ii)
(b)
(c)
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2006
Page 3
5
(a)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
(i)
conduction
B1
(ii)
particles/atoms/ions vibrate or electrons move and carry energy

pass on energy from one particle to the next
B1
B1
[3]
(b)
four surfaces facing one heat source

suitable detector e.g. thermometer behind surface-read all 4
precaution e.g. equal distance/time
(Can not score last two marks if experiment is totally wrong)
B1
B1
B1
[3]
[Total: 6]
(a)
completed path
B1
[1]
(b)
any two correct, -1 each incorrect

virtual, inverted, same size as object
B2
[2]
(c)
angle of incidence zero/at right angles/along normal
B1
[1]
(d)
1.5 = Va/Vg = 3x 108/Vg

Vg = 2 x 108 m/s
C1
A1
[2]
angle of incidence = 45, so angle of reflection = 45, so ray turns through 90

OR angle i> angle c
so totally internally reflects
B1
B1
[2]
(e)
[Total: 8]
7
(a)
(b)
(c)
straight not circular or WTTE

waves not same wavelength/same distance apart
waves should extend into shadow area (more) any 2
B2
[2]
diagram showing large flat piece

with circular edges (ignore any wavelength changes) but straight part must be (very) nearly
equal to slit width
M1
A1
[2]
speed = 1.2 x 8
= 9.6 cm/s
C1
A1
[2]
[Total: 6]
8
(a)
switch in correct position
B1
(b)
(i)
rheostat/variable resistance symbol drawn
B1
(ii)
dot and R in line to 12 W lamp
B1
[2]
[2]
(c)
Question deleted
(d)
R = V/I or 12/.3
= 4
C1
A1
(i)
parallel circuit/all lamps connected separately across the 12V
B1
(ii)
4A
A1
(e)
[1]
[2]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2006
Page 4
(a)
(i)
(c)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
connections one to each plate

top one to +ve , bottom one to -ve
(New PSU drawn C1)
M1
A1
[2]
electrons negatively charged

one plate positively charged, one negatively charged
electrons attracted to +/repelled by
B1
B1
B1
[3]
(i)
time base applied to X plates stated or described
B1
(ii)
a.c. or varying voltage applied to Y plates
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
(ii)
(b)
Mark Scheme
2 full waves, (equal about centre line)
[Total: 8]
10
(a)
A resistor
(b)
(c)
B LDR
C transistor
D lamp
(1 each incorrect)
B2
[2]
B1
[1]
resistance of LDR low in light, high in dark

increase of resistance/potential in circuit cause transistor to conduct (Vbe > 0.6 V)
switches lamp on
B1
B1
B1
[3]
[Total: 6]
11
(a)
(b)
(i)
atoms interact with by particle/photon not radiation

electron(s) removed to form ions
B1
B1
(ii)
much greater mass or size/slower speed/more ion pairs/cm/larger charge
B1
(i)
any 2 correct
B2
(ii)
e.g. foil thickness described/outline diagram

foil too thick less reading/notes on diagram to show method
other examples will occur, must have two clear points:
e.g. 1. gamma rays aimed at cancer (not just radiation)
focused on tumour
e.g. 2. fission of heavy nucleus (accept named nuclide)
leads to more fissions/chain reaction
B1
B1
[3]
[4]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) straight arrow towards centre, by eye

(ii) force larger
(b) (i) straight arrow along tangent at P clockwise, by eye
(ii) friction between tyres and track provide centripetal force
friction too small (to provide required force)
(c) (i) constant speed/velocity OR uniform motion OR no acceln.
NOT constant motion
(ii) (3 25)/2 + (7 25) OR area under graph
Paper
03
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
B1
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
C1
212.5 cm any no s.f. 2
A1
(iii) 25/3 or increase in speed/time
C1
8.33 cm/s any no s.f. 2 OR 8 cm/s accept cm/s2
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 10]
2
(a)
moment of W down/anticlockwise, moment of steam opposite
C1
when moment of steam > moment of W, steam escapes

OR when clockwise moment > anticlockwise moment, steam escapes
A1
(b) (i) 12 = 0.2 F
[2]
C1
F = 60 N c.a.o. allow 6061 for ans if working for 60 N shown

(ii) (P =) F/A or 60/0.0003 e.c.f.
2 105 Pa or 200 000 Pa e.c.f. (accept N/m2) OR 20 N/cm2
A1
[2]
C1
A1
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 4
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) work done = force x dist or 600 x 3 or 60 x 3 or fd or mgh

work = 1800 J c.a.o. accept j or Nm for unit
(ii) power = work/time or 1800/12 e.c.f.
(b)
Paper
03
C1
A1
[2]
C1
power = 150 W e.c.f. accept J/s or NM/s for unit
A1
P.E. decreases/transformed (ignore mention of KE)
C1
all the decrease becomes heat (ignore mention of sound)
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 6]
4
(a)
total mass before ice added
B1
total mass after all ice melted
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
(b) (i) mass sp ht cap change in temp or 20 OR mc

(ii) mass (of melted ice) sp latent ht OR ml
OR (heat gained by ice) = heat lost by water
(c)
(d)
heat/mass or 12 800/30
C1
427 J/g OR 426667 J/kg any no s.f. 2
A1
[2]
heat gained from surroundings OR no lagging

heat needed to cool beaker/stirrer and thermometer ) any 2
too much ice added or similar point
)
allow stirring gives energy, allow evaporation/condensation
(ignore mistakes when taking readings or similar)
B1
+
B1
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
Page 5
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) heat for the same time
Paper
03
B1
take temps on both thermometers
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
B1
[1]
(ii) temperature rise small and/or small difference between them
B1
[1]
(iii) distance between each degree on scale is the same
B1
[1]
(ii) dull black box temp > white box temp OR black is hotter etc.
(b) (i) large expansion/change in reading for small change in temp
NOT detect/respond to small temp changes
[Total: 6]
6
(a) (i) refracted ray, angle < i, emergent ray approx parallel to incident
(ii) reflected ray at equal angle to incident, by eye
B1
[2]
B1
[1]
(ii) 43 c.a.o.
B1
[1]
(iii) n = sin (his90)/sin (his43)
C1
(b) (i) 8890
(c)
B1
1.466 or 1.47 or 1.5 c.a.o. any no s.f. 2
A1
n or his 1.5 = speed in air/speed in glass e.c.f.
C1
speed in glass = 2(.0) 108 m/s e.c.f. any no s.f. 2
A1
[2]
[2]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
Page 6
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
(a)
source of sound (e.g. gun/hooter), tape (100 m), stopwatch

NOT clock, metre rule (unless lab method)
B1
[1]
(b)
distance and time between flash and bang (must be clear)
B1
[1]
(c)
distance/time OR d/t OR 2d/t
B1
[1]
(d)
further apart/more accurate timer/repeat/any other
B1
[1]
(e)
speed of sound in air, tick 100
B1
speed of sound in water, tick 1000
B1
[2]
[Total: 6]
8
(a)
connections such that all lamps will light
B1
ammeter in correct position
B1
variable resistor in correct position (condone poor symbol)
B1
switch in appropriate position (could be 2 switches)
B1
[4]
B1
[1]
(ii) 4 OR 12/his(i) correctly evaluated
B1
[1]
(iii) 2 OR his(ii) correctly evaluated
B1
[1]
(iv) 1080 J e.c.f. from (i) & (ii) if working shown
B1
[1]
(b) (i) 3 A
(c)
lamps in series
M1
less current/less p.d. (across 1 lamp)/voltage shared/higher resistance

NOT current shared
A1
[2]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2007
Page 7
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
current in spoke in magnetic field
B1
causes force on spoke/wheel
B1
[2]
(b)
arrow to indicate anticlockwise motion
B1
[1]
(c)
outline of coil, pole pieces
B1
d.c. supply connected to brushes
B1
split rings connected to coil
B1
brushes connect to other split ring every half turn/coil vertical
B1
reverses direction of current every half turn/coil vertical
B1
(a)
(d)
[3]
[2]
[Total: 8]
10 (a)
(b)
(c)
when temperature rises resistance falls
(or v.v.)
M1
p.d. across it falls or equivalent
(or v.v.)
A1
idea of causes transistor to switch on lamp (or lamp off)
A1
[3]
change value of R1/use variable res/swap R1 with something
B1
brief explanation in terms of potential divider
B1
[2]
fire alarm/refrigerator fail light/other automatic lighting system
B1
[1]
[Total: 6]
11 (a)
(b)
A doubles back, either side
B1
B carries on, slightly deflected
B1
C carries straight on
B1
only (very) few scattered through large angles
B1
most pass undeviated so most of atom space
B1
scattering/deflection/repulsion due to concentrated

mass/charge/charge/nucleus
B1
[3]
[3]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 3
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) 1.6s to 1.8s ALLOW 4.2 6s ALLOW 4.4 6s NOT 2s NOT 4.0 6s
Paper
03
B1
(ii) 6 his (i), evaluated ALLOW 0 4.2s ALLOW 0 4.4s NOT 0 4s e.c.f.
B1
(iii) his (i) 20

32 36m or his (i) 20 evaluated
allow B1 only for 40m with no working
C1
(iv) area under whole graph or vt + his(iii)

70 95m
C1
A1
(b) (i) weight of ball down and (air) resistance up

OR friction opposes weight
upward/resistance/friction force increases
with time/distance/speed/as ball falls
net force reduces
less force, so less acceleration
A1
)
) any 3
)
)
(ii) up force = down force OR no resultant force OR air res. = weight

no net force, no acceleration/constant speed
B13
B1
B1
[Total: 11]
(a) (i) down to R and up towards Q/S, then reverse OR equivalent

OR back towards Q, then reverse
continues backward and forward until stops (at R)
B1
B1
(ii) idea of energy loss OR because of friction NOT PE/KE
B1
(b) (PE lost =) 1.2 0.5 OR 0.6 (J) OR 0.12 10 0.5 OR mgh OR wt dist
i.e. evidence of mgh
C1
0.5 0.12 v2 = mgh OR 0.6 etc. e.c.f.

i.e. evidence of mv2
C1
3.16 OR 3.2 m/s c.a.o.
A1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 4
3
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
(a) any logical method e.g.

extension is 2 cm for 8 N or 1 cm for 4 N
final extension is 3 cm
need 12 N to extend to 6 cm
C1
C1
A1
(b) (i) shown on diagram:

distance from pivot to F OR value of weights OR dist from weights to pivot
B1
(ii) force/weight of load distance from pivot to force

(accept symbols if clear)
B1
[Total: 5]
(a) (i) random

high speed (between collisions)
(ii) hit walls
many hits/unit area OR hit hard OR large force OR high energy
OR many hits/s OR hit very often
B1
B1
B1
B1
(b) particles vibrate (more) OR electrons gain energy

particle to particle transfer OR flow of free electrons
B1
B1
(c) 75 3200 OR ml
240 000 J OR 240 kJ OR 2.4 105J
C1
A1
[Total: 8]
(a) take readings of the detectors

fill box with water
take readings (again)
B1
B1
B1
(b) dull black best AND shiny white worst
B1
(c) two different metals

two junctions (could be at meter) hot and cold need not be indicated
any cell, max B1,B0
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 5
6
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
(a) mirror: 2 reflected rays approx correct

projected back to approx correct labelled image
note: images may be dots or lines
lens:
ray through F, correct by eye
ray through centre OR ray through other F, correct by eye
projected back to approx correct (labelled) image
M1
A1
M1
M1
A1
(b) (i) not produced by real rays crossing

OR cannot be caught on a screen
OR rays appear to come from image
B1
(ii) upright/right way up/erect c.a.o.
B1
(iii) lens image enlarged AND mirror image same size c.a.o.
OR (different) size OR (different) distance OR different side
B1
[Total: 8]
(a) (i) diagram showing compressions and rarefactions

(could be either spaced vertical lines or dots, or coil or sine wave)
2Cs and 2Rs in approx correct place
(ii) wavelength correctly marked, by eye
(b) (i) all 3 in correct positions
B1
B1
B1
B1
(ii) radio (waves)
B1
(iii) 3 108 m/s
B1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007
Page 6
8
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(a) circuit 1 series AND circuit 2 parallel

(b) switch off each one separately
one fails, other works
both get full current/voltage/same voltage
other good point e.g. more heat in parallel
lower resistance
Paper
03
B1
)
)
) any 2
)
)
B1+B1
(c) (total R =) 10 ()
(V =) 12V
C1
A1
(d) 1/R = 1/4 + 1/6 (= 5/12) OR 1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2

2.4 ()
C1
A1
(e) (i) 3(A)
B1
(ii) 24W
B1
(iii) 7200J e.c.f. (ii)
B1
[Total: 10]
(a) when magnetic field cuts/cut by conductor/wire/coil/solenoid

OR change in magnetic field linked with coil etc.
current/e.m.f caused
B1
B1
(b) solenoid ends connected to meter/lamp note: any sign of a cell gets B0
magnet indicated in suitable position on axis of solenoid
B1
B1
(c) insert/withdraw/move magnet into/out of solenoid

meter gives reading (as magnet moves) OR watch the meter OR lamp glows
B1
B1
(d) move magnet faster

increase strength of magnet
more turns on solenoid
closer to solenoid
)
) any 2
)
)
B1+B1
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
Page 7
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
03
10 (a) (i) low/0/off/no output
B1
(ii) low/0/off/no output
B1
(b) (i) temp sensor to NOT gate input, correct symbol

output of NOT gate (condone incorrect symbol) and humidity
sensor to AND inputs (condone labelled box for AND gate)
(ii) NOT low in, high out
AND both inputs high, high output
Note: B0, B0 for states on wrong diagram.
B1
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
11 (a) detector, no source, no aluminium, take count OR take background

no aluminium, take count
aluminium, take count
subtract background/reading 1 from results
(b) count decreases as thickness of aluminium increases
6-10 sheets/several sheets/few mm,
count reduced to background count/-particles stopped
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2007

Page 3
1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) v/t or (v-u)/t or 28.5/3 or his correct ratio

9.3 to 9.5 m/s2
Paper
31
C1
A1
(ii) area under graph or 0.5 3 28.5 or bh

42 to 44 m (allow reasonable e.c.f.)
C1
A1
(iii) 15 m/s
B1
(b) (plastic ball larger so) upward force/air resistance/drag more (or vice versa for rubber ball)
IGNORE wind resistance
B1
rubber ball, this force not big enough to balance weight/gravity (force)
B1
plastic ball, upward force/air resistance big enough to balance/equal weight/gravity
(force)
B1
(c) mg or 0.05 10 or 50 x 10 accept 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10

0.5 N or 0.49N or 0.4905N nothing else
C1
A1
(a) fusion (of nuclei) CARE: NOT fission or fision

condone radiation as an extra
B1
ACCEPT fussion
(b) radiant/heat energy from Sun or radiation from Sun

energy from Sun raises temperature of water/heats water/melts ice
energy from Sun evaporates water
PE in cloud
rain
stored water has PE
(c) (i) 25/100 for gas-fired or 30/90 for hydroelectric
or energy out/energy in or power out/power in
)
)
) any 3
)
)
)
B1 3
B1
(ii) 30/90 or 1/3 or 33% is more than 25/100 or or 25%

OR lower input into hydroelectric station, but more output than gas-fired station B1
IGNORE hydroelectric losses less than gas-fired losses
UCLES 2008
[10]
[6]

Page 4
3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) mgh or 90 10 14 accept 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10

12 600 J or 12348 J or 12360.6 J nothing else
C1
A1
(b) PE lost = KE gained or mgh = mv2

(v2 =) 280 e.c.f. or 274.4 or 274.68
16.7 m/s e.c.f. or 16.565 m/s or 16.573 m/s NOTE: 16.8 m/s gets A0
C1
C1
A1
(c) energy lost or friction/air resistance/drag/wind resistance
B1
(a) (pushing rubber cover) volume reduced

(when volume reduce), pressure goes up
M1
A1
(b) 1 (105 ) 60 = 1.5 (105 ) V

40 (cm3)
reduction in volume = 20 cm3 or 1/3
C1
C1
A1
(c) (ave) speed of mols/particles/atoms greater at high temp NOT energy/KE

stronger/more collisions with walls OR greater pressure
B1
B1
(a) SOLID higher temperature means higher energy/greater speed of

mols/particles/atoms
NOT more vibration NOT vibrate more
B1
GAS
vibrations get bigger or movement greater/take up more space

or separation larger
(ave) speed/energy of mols/particles/atoms greater
(ave) separation of mols/particles/atoms greater
or mols/particles/atoms take up more space
or increased pressure causes container to get bigger
(b) liquids: slightly more

gases: much more
[6]
[7]
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
(c) regular/uniform expansion or appropriate range (be generous if numbers quoted)

or expands a lot/large expansivity
or (relatively) non-toxic
or low freezing point/melting point
or measures low temperatures
any 1
IGNORE reacts to small temp change IGNORE high boiling point
UCLES 2008
B1
[7]

Page 5
6
Syllabus
0625
(a) (for all rays, ignore any arrows, -1 for each incorrect extra ray)
)
correct ray through F1 1mm on axis
)
) any 2
correct ray through F2 1mm on axis
)
ray through lens centre 1mm on axis
)
image drawn between his intersection and axis
(b) virtual
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
upright/erect
magnified/enlarged
further (from lens) any 3
B1, B1
B1
B1 3
[6]
(a) (condone discontinuities at boundaries)

mirror:
equally spaced reflected waves, approx. same spacing as incident (by eye)
IGNORE reflected waves to left of arrowhead
correct angle to surface, by eye
block:
reduced wavelength in block
ACCEPT refracted waves to left of arrowhead
at sensible angle of refraction
CONDONE reflected waves shown as well as refracted
(b) (i) 3 108/speed in glass = 1.5
2 108 m/s
B1
B1
B1
B1
C1
A1
(ii) sin70/sinr = 1.5

38.7895 to 2 or more sig figs
Paper
31
C1
A1
(a) all 4 lights in parallel with supply and none in series

master switch in a place where it will work (cannot score if no supply or if short
circuit)
one switch for 2 lights in living room AND one for bathroom
AND one for bedroom
(b) (i) W = V I or 100 = 200 I in any form
0.5 A or 0.5 a
(ii) I t or 0.5 60 e.c.f.
30 C or 30 c e.c.f.
B1
B1
B1
C1
A1
C1
A1
UCLES 2008
[8]

Page 6
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
(c) (i) 135 W
B1
(ii) any power any time (words or symbols or numbers)

NOTE: 280 (W) is the total power of lamps in house, so counts as power
486 000 J or 486 kJ or 0.135 kWh accept lower case units
NOTE: 45 3600 = 162000 J gets e.c.f. from (i)
Paper
31
C1
A1
[10]
(a) 3 complete circles about thick wire, roughly concentric on wire

clockwise or anticlockwise arrows on any 2 correct circles, and no contradictions
B1
B1
(b) (i) reduced
B1
(ii) same OR none
B1
(c) (i) thin wire is a current-carrying conductor in a magnetic field

field produced by current in thick wire
OR alternative approach:
( both wires produce a magnetic field
( fields interact
B1
B1
B1 )
B1 )
(ii) inwards/towards thick wire/to right/towards T1T2
B1
(iii) smaller force
B1
[8]
10 (a) correct symbol, must show 3 connections, condone rounded nose, ignore width of the
shape, allow OR gate followed by NOT gate, correctly drawn
B1
(b) if truth table is shown, mark the truth table and ignore the rest
either input 1, output 0 AND both inputs 1, output 0
both inputs 0, output 1
accept high/low, on/off for both
(c) (i) one input is high/1 AND output is low/0
IGNORE any reference to 2nd input
(ii) 1. on
2. off
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
UCLES 2008
[6]

Page 7
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
11 (a) number of protons 17 and 17

number of neutrons 18 and 20
number of electrons 17 and 17
(b) alpha, beta, gamma
Paper
31
B1
B1
B1
words or symbols, any order NOT gamma particles
B1
(c) (mark (i) and (ii) together)

(i) any correct use
M1
(ii) simple correct explanation
A1
UCLES 2008
[6]

Page 3
1
(a)
(i)
(ii)
Paper
31
C1
)
) any 1
)
)
to overcome/compensate for friction/resistance
A1
B1
2/2.5 or 4/5 etc. or F/a or F = ma

0.8 kg
C1
A1
(c)
0.7/0.8
e.c.f. from (b)
0.875 (m/s2) e.c.f. from (b)
B1
B1
(ii)
could be scored on table (no unit needed)
v = at or 0.5 1.2
0.6 m/s
C1
A1
any velocity time or speed time

(note: 0.72 m gets C1, A0)
0.36 m c.a.o.
C1
A1
(a)
two masses chosen with ratio 2:1 or 3:1 or 3:2

chosen masses in correct holes to balance
M1
A1
(b)
disc does not rotate/is balanced/in equilibrium/no movement

NOT spin the disc NOT anything to do with calculating moments
NOT when disturbed, returns to original position
B1
(c)
moment of one mass correct (ignore units)

accept mass distance calculated
equal answers
B1
B1
correct addition of masses/weights, including 200g

any mass correctly converted to N
B1
B1
(d)
any mention of force or weight ignore mass

Force to left > force to right
OR resultant force
OR unbalanced force
OR weight > friction
Syllabus
0625
(b)
(d) (i)
Mark Scheme
(a) (i)
(ii)
hdg or 70 1050 10
735 000 Pa or 7.35 105 Pa
accept N/m for Pa
8.35 105 Pa OR his (a)(i) + 1.0 105
accept N/m2 for Pa
[7]
C1
A1
B1
(b)
pressure area or P = F/A or 6.5 105 2.5

1.625 106 N
C1
A1
(c)
because density is less accept new calculation of pressure

OR because salt water is denser
B1
UCLES 2008
[11]
[6]

Page 4
4
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a)
typical random path drawn, at least 3 abrupt changes of direction
B1
(b)
air molecules hit dust particles in all directions/move it in all directions

just as likely to be up as down
(allow marks scored on diagram)
B1
B1
(c)
random movements smaller OR slower movement

OR less energy OR movement decreases
(a) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
B1
funnel no longer giving heat to ice OR ice at M.P./constant temp

OR heater reached max temp
inside of large pieces could be well below freezing point
OR smaller air gaps if pieces smaller
OR better contact between heater and ice
OR to ensure heat from heater only goes to the ice
OR larger surface area
Ignore ice melts faster
)
) any 1
)
)
)
B1
B1
(b)
mass of beaker NOT mass of ice NOT mass of water

mass of beaker + water
(apply + = 0 for extras other than power & time)
B1
B1
(c)
(mass of ice melted by heater = 16.3 2.1) = 14.2 g

ml in any form, words, symbols or numbers
Wt or Pt in any form, words, symbols or numbers accept VIt
338 J/g OR 338 000 J/kg c.a.o
C1
C1
C1
A1
(a)
light of one colour/frequency/wavelength
B1
(b)
n = sinr/sini OR n = sini/sinr in any form

sinr/sin30 = 1.49 OR sinr = 1.49 sin30
48.0 48.2
C1
C1
A1
(c)
ray at angle >30 and <60 to normal, by eye, correct way

Ignore any angles or labelling
(d)
colours/spectrum would appear OR range of angles (ignore rainbow)

OR dispersion OR ray splits up
B1
(e)
90 approx (accept any value 80 to 90)
B1
(f)
(totally internally) reflected OR T.I.R.
B1
ignore not refracted
UCLES 2008
NO e.c.f.
[4]
[8]
B1
[8]

Page 5
7
(a)
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
clear attempt at arcs of circles, at least 3

same wavelength as incoming waves, by eye
(ignore shape ignore distance to first wave)
centre of curvature of arcs at centre of gap, by eye
B1
(b)
speed/wavelength or 20/2.5 or v = f
8 Hz or 8 s1 or 8 waves/second
C1
A1
(c)
his (b) or the same
B1
(a)
changes a.c. to d.c. OR rectifies a/c OR allows current to flow one way only
OR prevents current flowing backward
B1
(b)
I t or 2 12 or 2 12 60 60 or amps seconds
24 Ah or 86 400 C or 86 000 C
(c)
emf = J/C OR energy converted/work done per unit charge/coulomb

OR W/A OR volts/p.d. when no current in circuit
12 J of energy are delivered/needed for every coulomb of charge
OR 12 W is the power to drive a current of 1 A
(d) (i)
Mark Scheme
(a)
(b)
B1
B1
C1
A1
C1
A1
series connection shown, any recognisable symbols
B1
(ii)
total power = 16 W OR 8/6

1.33 A accept fraction c.a.o.
C1
A1
(iii)
any power any time or 16 60 60 or IVt or 8 60 60

57 600 J or 0.016 kWh or 28 800 J or 0.008 kWh
C1
A1
pump water to higher level storage

or heat water
or charge accumulators/batteries
ignore charge capacitor NOT generator
)
) any one
)
[10]
B1
less/no energy/power/heat loss OR to reduce current

OR to allow thinner cables OR more efficient NOTHING ELSE
B1
(c)
I2R
B1
(d)
Ns/1200 = 32000/1100 OR N1/N2 = V1/V2 in any arrangement

34 880 or 34 900 or 34 909 or 34 910 or 35 000
C1
A1
(e)
input power = output power or V1I1 = V2I2

current = power/voltage in any form, words, symbols or numbers
25 A
C1
C1
A1
UCLES 2008
[6]
[8]

Page 6
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
10 (a) (i)
LDR correctly identified
B1
(ii)
lamp correctly identified
B1
(iii)
transistor correctly identified
B1
(b)
11 (a)
(b)
(ignore anything that is in terms of currents)

resistance of LDR becomes high
LDR gets larger share of the voltage OR voltage across LDR gets bigger
transistor switches/turns lamp on
M1
A1
A1
A
cathode OR electron gun
B
Y plates OR vertical deflection plates
C
X plates OR horizontal deflection plates
D
screen OR fluorescent/phosphor OR tube NOT glass
4 correct B2, 3 or 2 correct B1
B2
A; idea of releasing electrons/thermionic emission

B; move the electron beam vertically
B1
B1
(c) (i)
y-plates/y-input or B NO e.c.f.
B1
(ii)
x-plates/x-input or C NO e.c.f.
B1
UCLES 2008
[6]
[6]

Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2009
Paper
31
check zero on stopwatch OR repeat OR other sensible precaution

start stopwatch at some recognisable point in the cycle
stop stopwatch after at least 10 cycles OR count no. of cycles in at least 10 s
divide time by number of cycles
B1
B1
B1
B1
(a) water AND liquids expand more than solids
B1
(b) steel
(steel) expands at same rate / has same expansion (as concrete)
different expansion AND cracks / breaks / damages / destroys concrete
M1
A1
A1
(a) (i) straight line OR constant gradient / slope OR

change in speed with time constant OR speed proportional to time
B1
(ii) increase in velocity / time OR a = v/t , symbols, words or numbers

0.75 m/s2
C1
A1
(b) (i) decreases OR acceleration slows (down) NOT it slows down
C1
(ii) equal to forward / downward force / force down slope OR

constant / maximum OR (giving) no resultant force
equal to component of weight (down slope)
C1
A1
(iii) 1
B1
Syllabus
0625
[4]
[4]
graph starting at origin

curved from start AND decreasing gradient AND
horizontal final part
B1
label A on any correct curved region

label B on horizontal region
B1
B1 [10]
(a) (i) (note: diagram may be drawn in any orientation)

sides correct length, by eye
forces drawn at 45, by eye
parallelogram completed
correct diagonal drawn / correct resultant if intersecting arcs shown
(ii) magnitude: between 5500 N and 5700
direction:
between 28 and 32
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
(b) (i) it has direction (as well as magnitude)
B1
(ii) any example which is clearly a vector
B1
UCLES 2009
[8]

Page 4
5

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) mv2

7500 12 12
540 000 J OR 540 kJ
C1
C1
A1
(ii) W = E/t in any form

10% his (a)
54 000 W OR 54 kW e.c.f.
B1
C1
A1
(b) (i) 3750 kg
B1
(ii) [If ecf from (i) and no other errors, maximum mark is 2]
mass: OR correct sub in mv2
speed: OR 6750 (J)
fraction = / 0.125 / 1:8 ? 12.5 % (c.a.o.)
6
C1
C1
A1 [10]
(a) (i) P = F /A in any form, letters, words or numbers

1.4 106 Pa accept N/m2
C1
A1
(ii) 84 N OR 84.0 N
B1
(iii) same force over (much) smaller area

(much) bigger pressure
B1
B1
(b) (i) P = hdg in any form, letters, words or numbers

3 104 Pa OR 30 000 Pa OR 30 kPa accept N/m2
C1
A1
(ii) his (i)

7
Paper
31
B1
[8]
(a) Total penalty for use of particles rather than molecules is 1 mark.
(i) idea of some molecules gaining more KE
mols overcome attractive forces OR mols break free of surface
B1
B1
(ii) greater area

more mols escape (in given time)
B1
B1
(iii) increase temperature / supply more heat / make hotter

blow air across surface, or equiv.
reduce humidity
decrease pressure
)
) any 2
)
)
(b) water evaporates from cloth / water OR faster / more energetic

molecules evaporate
)
less energetic mols left behind
)
energy to evaporate taken from milk
) any 3
evaporation produces cooling
)
idea of cloth always being damp by soaking up water
)
UCLES 2009
B1 + B1
B1 3
[9]

Page 5
8

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) medium A because angle in air is bigger OR angle in A is smaller OR

refracts / bends away from normal / angle of refraction greater than angle
of incidence / total internal reflection only occurs in denser medium
B1
(b) air: light travels faster in less dense medium OR air: air is less dense / rarer
B1
(c) 4243
B1
(d) total internal reflection
B1
(e) n = sin i / sin r OR n = sin r / sin i OR 1.49 = sin i / sin 35

(allow 1.49 or refractive index instead of n in any of above)
58.719 to at least 2 s.f. Allow 58.71
C1
A1
(f) n = speed in air / speed in medium in any arrangement

OR 1.49 = 3.0 108 / speed in medium A
2.01343 108 m/s to at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
(a) half-wave rectification clearly indicated (any wave shape, repeated):

at least 2 humps with all spaces more than half width of hump, by eye.
B1
(b) (i) A (c.a.o.)
M1
(ii) For answers A and B only in (i), not C or D:

Route to resistor: correct arrow on one downwards diode and
nothing wrong on this route
Route from resistor: correct arrow on one downwards diode and
nothing wrong on this route
UCLES 2009
[8]
B1
B1
[4]

Page 6

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
10 (a) (i) 0 (A) / zero Unit penalty if wrong unit
Paper
31
B1
(ii) 12 V
B1
(b) (i) V / R OR V = IR in any form, letters, words or numbers

0.5 A
(ii) 8 candidates (i) OR 8/24 12
4 V OR 4.0 V e.c.f.
C1
A1
(c) 1/R1 + 1/R2 = 1/R OR R = R1R2 / (R1 + R2) in any form

5.3 () OR 5 () OR 16/3 ()
12 / candidates R
2.25 A c.a.o.
B1
C1
C1
A1
Alternatively: 12/16 (= 0.75) OR 12/8 (= 1.5)

12/16 (= 0.75) AND 12/8 (= 1.5)
Currents added
2.25 A c.a.o.
11 (a) ignore any extra ticks against
3rd and 4th columns ticked
(use + = 0 for extras) i.e. 2 correct
1 correct, nothing else
1 correct, 1 wrong
2 correct, 1 wrong
2 correct, 2 or 3 wrong
1st column ticked (use + = 0 for extras)
C1
C1
C1
A1 [10]
2 marks
1 mark
1 mark
1 mark
0 marks
(b) idea of in plane of page OR perpendicular to magnetic field

top to bottom of the page OR opposite direction of deflection of OR
down the page
Ignore downwards. Ignore references to + or plates, for both C1 and A1
UCLES 2009
C1
A1
B1 + B1
B1
C1
A1
[5]
Page 4
1

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) micrometer OR screw gauge OR vernier scale NOT vernier callipers
B1
(b) 2.73 mm
B1
(c) check/set zero

close instrument on to paper
not too tight/use ratchet
take reading of both scales
use several sheets
divide reading by no. of sheets
)
)
) any 3
)
)
)
B1 3
[5]
2
(a) measuring cylinder with liquid

immerse statue
volume from difference of readings from measuring cylinder
OR
displacement can/equivalent/beaker, filled to overflowing with liquid
immerse statue
measure volume displaced with measuring cylinder
(b) (D =) M/V OR 600/65
9.23 g/cm3 (minimum 2 s.f.) N.B. unit penalty applies
OR
(For gold) (M =) V D OR 65 19
1235 g (minimum 2 s.f.)
N.B. unit penalty applies
OR
(For gold) (V =) M / D OR 600/19
N.B. unit penalty applies
31.6 cm3 (minimum 2 s.f.)
NO ticked if justified by previous work in (a) or (b).
e.c.f from wrong values above
B1
B1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
(B1)
B1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
(B1)
(B1)
B1
[6]
(a) 5 points correctly plotted small square 1 e.e.o.o. (ignore 0,0)
B2
(b) 3 N one, however identified OR 3rd value OR 4th value
B1
(c) good straight line through origin and candidates remaining points
B1
(d) straight line / constant gradient

does obey Hookes Law
OR
special case: obeys Hookes law because force extension or wtte
M1
A1
UCLES 2009
B1
Page 5

Syllabus
0625
(e) graph becomes non-linear / curves / bends

Ignore reference to direction of curve or bend.
(f) will have exceeded / reached proportional / elastic limit
OR permanently deformed or equiv OR staightened
OR will have broken OR no longer elastic or wtte
Paper
31
B1
B1
[8]
(a) in direction of the force Do not accept forward on is own.
B1
(b) changes direction / causes acceleration / stops straight line motion / keeps object
from leaving circle / keeps path circular / pulls object into circle
B1
(c) (i) 1. 600 N

2. same as his 1. accept 600 N if no value given in (c) (i) 1.
B1
B1
(ii) ma OR 60 2.5
150 N
C1
A1
(iii) 750 N e.c.f. from (c) (i) 2 and/or (c) (ii)
B1
(iv) same as his (c) (i) 2 accept 600 N if no value given in (c) (i) 2.
B1
[8]
(a) (P.E.) = mgh

12 10 3 Accept g = 9.8 or 9.81
360 J
g = 9.8 gives 352.8 J (minimum 2 s.f.)
g = 9.81 gives 353.16 J (minimum 2 s.f.)
C1
C1
A1
(b) (P =) E/t
360/60
6W
352.8 J gives 5.88 W
C1
C1
A1
353.16 J gives 5.886 W (minimum 2 s.f.)
[6]
6
(a) (i) increases
B1
(ii) pV = const in any form

1.05 ( 105) 860 ( 106) = p 645 ( 106)
1.4 105 Pa
UCLES 2009
C1
C1
A1
Page 6

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(iii) F = pA in any form

EITHER
OR
accept weight for F

C1
C1
increase in pressure = 0.35 105 (Pa)
C1
0.35 105 5.0 103
175 N (minimum 2 s.f.) c.a.o.
A1
1.05 105 5.0 103 or 525 N or 1.4 105 5.0 103 or 700 N (C1)
700 525 N e.c.f. from (a) (ii)
(C1)
175 N (minimum 2 s.f.) c.a.o.
(A1)
(b) (i) increases
B1
(ii) no change
B1
(iii) extra weight (on tray/piston)
B1
(iv) increases
B1
[12]
(a) EITHER
copper
copper
constantan
OR
constantan
constantan
copper
B1
(b) galvanometer OR millivoltmeter OR milliammeter OR digital ammeter

OR digital voltmeter
(c) rapid response
small area
can measure high / low temperatures
small thermal capacity (idea of)
remote reading
large range
data logging / continuous monitoring possible
takes temperature of a surface
N.B. (very) sensitive not accepted
)
)
)
) any 1
)
)
)
)
B1
B1
[3]
8
(a) 2 cm (by eye) vertical object somewhere between F2 and lens

(condone no O, if clear)
(b) any two standard rays correctly drawn (no extrapolation needed)
correct rays extrapolated back to intersect
virtual image drawn at candidates intersection of extrapolated rays
(condone no I, if clear)
B1
B1
B1
B1
[4]
UCLES 2009
Page 7
9

Syllabus
0625
(a) (quantity of) heat/energy to raise temp by 1 C/1degC/1K/unit temp rise

1 kg OR 1 g OR unit mass
(Mention of change of state gets M0 A0)
(b) long time to heat up/cook
long time to cool down
expensive to heat
takes a lot of energy to heat up
)
) any 1
)
)
Paper
31
M1
A1
B1
(c) (i) 1.8 degC OR 1.8 C OR 1.8 K

AND 77.1 degC OR 77.1 C OR 77.1K
B1
(ii) (Q =) mcT in any form, seen anywhere

0.2 4200 1.8 e.c.f. from (c) (i)
1512 J (minimum 2 s.f.) c.a.o.
B1
C1
A1
(iii) 1512 = 0.05 c 77.1 in any form e.c.f. from (c) (i) and/or (c) (ii)
392 J/kg K (N.B. must be to 3 sf ; A0 for wrong s.f.) e.c.f.
C1
A1
(iv) heat lost during transfer

boiling water not at 100 C / reason for not boiling
at 100 C e.g. water not pure/ not standard pressure
energy lost to cup etc. / surroundings
thermometer not accurate / sensitive enough
temperature / mass(es) not accurately measured
)
)
) any 1
)
)
B1
[10]
10 (a) (i) step-up transformer
B1
(ii) less heat/energy/power loss (from lines) / thinner wires (possible)

OR lower current
NOT more efficient
(b) P = V I
2.5 A
in any form, figures or symbols / (P =) VI
B1
C1
A1
(c) P = I2R in any form, figures or symbols / (P =) I2R

18.75 W e.c.f. from (b)
C1
A1
(d) V = IR in any form, figures or symbols OR (V =) IR OR

P = V2 / R in any form, figures or symbols OR (P =) V2 / R OR V = (PR)1/2
C1
7.5 V e.c.f. from (b) or (c)
A1
UCLES 2009
Page 8

Syllabus
0625
(e) 22,000 7.5 7.5 OR 22,000 7.5 ecf

21,985 V e.c.f. (minimum 4 s.f.in this case)
OR
55,000 37.5 = 54962.5
54962.5 / 2.5 = 21985 V (minimum 4 s.f. in this case)
Paper
31
C1
A1
(C1)
(A1)
[10]
11 (a) A
B
NOT or inverter
AND
B1
B1
(b) (accept 1 or ON for HIGH, and 0 or OFF or NOT HIGH for LOW throughout)
(i) A HIGH and B LOW (both) no e.c.f.
B1
(ii) A HIGH and B HIGH (both) no e.c.f.
B1
(iii) A LOW
B1
and B LOW (both)
no e.c.f.
(c) (i) B cannot provide enough power / current for lamp, or equiv.
OR allows remote lamp
B1
(ii) the second one / dark and warm / HIGH, HIGH e.c.f. from (b)
B1
(iii) warning if temperature in a closed / dark space (e.g. refrigerator, kiln) reaches
too high a value
N.B. to switch on a lamp when it is dark and warm not accepted
B1
[8]
UCLES 2009
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2010
(a) decreases / braking / decelerating

constant / steady / nothing
increases / accelerate
Syllabus
0625
)
) all 3
)
Paper
31
B1
(b) speed x time

in any form, symbols, numbers or words
OR any area under graph used or stated
13 (m/s) OR 24 (s) seen or used in correct context
312 m
C1
C1
A1
(c) rate of change of speed OR gradient of graph OR 18/12
C1
18 (m/s) OR 12 (s) seen or used in correct context

1.5 m/s2
C1
A1
(d) same gradient / slope OR equal speed changes in equal times OR

allow graph symmetrical
B1
(a) mv2 OR 900 x 302

405 000 J
C1
A1
(b) force x distance OR 2000 x 30

60 000 J OR 60 kJ
C1
A1
(c) 60 000 W OR 60 000 J/s OR 60kW OR 60 kJ/s ecf from (b)
B1
(d) chemical
B1
(e) idea of energy loss / heat / sound / inefficiency / energy used within car /
possibility of increase in P.E. Ignore work done against against friction
B1
(a) 2nd statement re-written to include force in first gap and inversely
proportional to mass in second gap. NOT indirectly proportional
B1
(b) F = ma OR in words in any correct arrangement
B1
(c)
(i) nothing OR continues as before OR same / constant velocity OR

same / constant speed & direction OR no acceleration
B1
(ii) idea of retardation. Ignore stop. Ignore brakes. Ignore goes in

opposite direction
B1
(iii) moves in (arc of a) circle or curve OR deflected OR turns OR

changes direction
B1
UCLES 2010
[8]
[7]
[5]
Page 4
4

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
(a) matt black

(b)
B1
(i) L down and R up, equal amounts (by eye)
B1
(ii) on black side or on left (more) energy / heat absorbed OR greater

temp rise OR heats up quicker
B1
on black side or on left greater expansion of air / greater pressure of air

5
(a) energy / heat required to change state / phase / any example of change of
state / phase
with no change in temperature / at a specified temperature
OR energy to break bonds between molecules /atoms
with no change in K.E.
B1
A1
M1
A1
B1
(c) turns substance to gas / vapour OR causes evaporation OR escape

from liquid
C1
(d)
(a)
A1
(i) Pt / 2 4 / 2000 4 / 2 240 / 2000 240 / 8 / 8000 / 480 / 480000

480 000 J OR 480 kJ
C1
A1
(ii) ( =) 43 (C) seen anywhere

Q = mc OR 480000 = m x 1760 43 in any form ecf. from (i)
6.34 kg or 6.3 kg ecf.
C1
C1
A1
(i) same / unchanged / nothing
B1
(ii) reduced / slows down
B1
(iii) reduced
B1
(b) v = f in any form or in words [not numbers]

OR f =1/T in any form or in words [not numbers]
0.12 = f 0.08 OR T = 0.08 / 0.12
1.5 Hz / cycles per sec / c.p.s. / per s
[only 2 marks if B1 mark above not scored]
UCLES 2010
[4]
M1
(b) any time or range of time between 1.6 (min) and 14.0 (min) inclusive [no UP]
energy to break bonds/separate molecules/overcome intermolecular forces

Ignore move faster / PE increases
Paper
31
B1
C1
A1
[10]
Page 5

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(c)
(ignore length of waves)

waves bending in correct direction (be generous)
A and B correct by eye, straight and parallel
C and D parallel to A and B by eye
7
M1
A1
A1
(a) idea of light travelling (much) faster than sound

(b)
[9]
B1
(i) 4.0 (min)
B1
(ii) always a (measurable) time difference / never zero time difference

Ignore time would be less
B1
(iii) distance/time in any form, symbols, words, numbers OR 1200/3.6

333.3 m/s to 2 or more sig figs
C1
A1
(iv) idea of light travelling instantaneously OR no wind

OR idea of lightning at ground level OR no obstruction to sound
Ignore echoes
B1
(c)
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
light waves

sound waves

1 e.e.o.o. i.e. 1 mark subtracted from 3 for each error or omission
UCLES 2010
B3
[9]
Page 6
8
(a)

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
(i) N1/N2 = V1/V2 in any form, symbols, words or numbers

12 (turns) [possible unit penalty]
(ii) mention of magnetic / electromagnetic field
change of flux linkage / magnetism
OR field lines being cut
Induced current / emf / voltage
Paper
31
C1
A1
)
)
)
)
) any 3
)
)
B1 x 3
Fewer coils in secondary so smaller emf / voltage

OR larger current
)
(iii) heat in either coil / wires
eddy currents in core / heat in core
magnetic leakage from core
sound from core/coil
(b)
)
) any 1
)
)
B1
(i) 12 V d.c. OR low d.c.voltage
B1
(ii) diode OR rectifier [Ignore extras unless wrong]
B1
(c) V1I1 = V2I2 in any form, or words or numbers

OR power in = power out or equivalent
C1
8A
A1
(a) first finger field / magnetism / flux

second finger current / charge flow (NOT electron flow)
(b)
)
) both
B1
(i) brush OR contact OR sliding connector

split ring OR commutator NOT slip ring
B1
B1
(ii) clockwise OR right side down OR left side up OR correct arrows

on figure NOT turn to the right
B1
(iii) more current / more voltage / stronger battery / more power

more turns on coil / more coils
stronger magnet Ignore bigger magnets
closer magnet / magnetic poles
more magnets
iron core
UCLES 2010
)
)
)
) any 2 B1, B1
)
)
[6]
[10]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31
Paper 3 (Extended Theory), maximum raw mark 80
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31

Points applicable to all answers
B marks
M marks
are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored, the
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to
score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
C marks
A marks
e.e.o.o.
brackets.
OR/or
Spelling

Extras
Ignore
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT

applies.
UCLES 2010
Page 3

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
Points applicable to numerically worked answers only

Final
answers
If the final answer to a numerically worked question is correct, with the correct unit and
an acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are awarded.
The points which could have gained C marks need not be examined, even if wrong.
Ecf
may be given marks indicated by ecf. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind any earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Significant
figures

Units
Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from an answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question.
No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly
in the working.
Arithmetic
errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is an arithmetic one.
Fractions
Extras
response or are forbidden by the mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
UCLES 2010
Page 4
1

Syllabus
0625
(a) (parallelogram or triangle may have any orientation)

NOT a copy of Fig. 1.1
two sides at right angles, by eye
one side longer than the other
diagonal or completion of triangle drawn and labelled resultant OR R
Ignore numerical values. Condone arrows in wrong direction
Paper
31
B1
B1
B1
(b) 98 N 102 N
(accept value found by calculation)
B1
(c) (vertically) up/opposite to W NOT North
B1
(d) his (b) OR correct value calculated

ignore mass
B1
[Total: 6]
(a) constant velocity must be in a straight line/direction of motion is changing
B1
(b) (i) if no force, then constant velocity in straight line OR force is needed
to change direction
B1
body moving in circle is changing direction/velocity/accelerating

so force is needed
B1
(ii) towards centre (of circle)/at right angles to motion/inwards
B1
(iii) friction between tyres and road/reaction from banking of track
B1
[Total: 5]
(a) (i) (P =) F/A in any form OR 1000/0.01

100 000 Pa accept N/m2
(ii) multiplication of either force or area by 4
0.08 his (i) OR 0.02 his (i)
8000 N e.c.f. from (i)
(2000 N gets C0, C1, A1)
(b) his (ii) 2000 correctly evaluated
600 kg e.c.f.
C1
A1
C1
C1
A1
C1
A1
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2010
Page 5
4

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) heat/energy to raise/change temperature

of 1 kg/1g/unit mass through 1C/1K
(mention of change of state scores zero)
M1
A1
(b) Q = mc (for accept t, T, , t, or T)

23800 = 0.93 c (41.3 13.1)
907.5 or 907 or 908 or 910 J/(kg C) or J/(kg K) at least 2 sig. figs
(for unit in (b) and (c)(i) condone no brackets and extra solidus)
B1
C1
A1
(c) (i) 1212.9 or 1200 or 1210 or 1213 or 1214 J/(kg C) or J/(kg K)
B1
(ii) more energy lost (to surroundings)

(average) temperature is higher/initial temperature higher/no cooling
time allowed/temperature rise is lower/time of heating may be longer/
rate of heating may be lower
(d) insulate block/provide lid/cover with shiny foil
)
start & finish same amount below & above room temperature ) any 2
get heater up to temperature before inserting
)
put oil in gap between heater & block
)
B1
B1
B1 + B1
[Total: 10]
5
(a) (i) (speed =) distance/time in any form, words, letters, numbers

0.15 m/s or 15 cm/s
(if answer only, 1 mark for either if no units)
C1
A1
(ii) (PE =) mgh OR mgh OR Wh symbols, words or numbers

100 J OR 98.1 J OR 98 J
C1
A1
(iii) his (ii)/40 OR his (ii)/4

2.5 W OR 2.45 W e.c.f. from (ii)
C1
A1
(b) (input) greater/output less NOT a numerical factor
B1
[Total: 7]
(a) incident ray in (more) dense medium

angle of incidence greater than critical angle/42
no light refracted
reflected with i = r
)
) any 3
)
)
(b) reflection at Q only, no further reflections

(allow B1 only, if there is one further reflection at lower surface)
(give B0 for more than one further reflection)
UCLES 2010
B1 3
B2
[Total: 5]
Page 6
7

Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) sound
Paper
31
B1
(ii) particle OR mechanical OR compression OR longitudinal

OR matter wave
B1
(iii) ultra violet/uv
B1
(b) v = f OR = v/f
3.0 108/2.5 108 OR 3.0 x 108 = 2.5 108
1.2 m
B1
C1
A1
[Total: 6]
(a) capacitor/capacitance/condenser
B1
(b) (i) 5
B1
(ii) 5 and 20 both used OR 25

1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2
4
OR
C1
R 1R 2
(R =)
seen or used
R1 + R 2
(c) EITHER
ammeter reading falls (to zero)
as capacitor charges
C1
A1
OR
no current/reading
M1
P already charged/does not conduct d.c.
A1
(d) Formula for calculation of I (I = V/R) OR P (P = V2/R)

Use of energy = power time in any form
400 s
C1
C1
A1
[Total: 10]
(a) (i) negative at LH end and positive at RH end
B1
(ii) (+ve) charge on A attracts electrons/-ve charges/-ve ions

OR unlike charges attract (ignore reference to + charges)
electrons move to end X/towards A
(unbalanced) +ve charges (left) at end Y NOT repelled to Y
B1
B1
B1
(iii) idea that each electron leaves behind an equal unbalanced proton
in nucleus/B has no net charge/B is neutral/idea that B has not
gained or lost any charges
B1
(b) (i) nothing OR nothing implied
B1
(ii) +ve charge cancelled/neutralised

by electrons/negative charges flowing up from earth
B1
B1
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
Page 7

10 (a) idea of background radiation

random/different at different times
(b) A
Syllabus
0625
NOT places
Paper
31
M1
A1
nothing OR background
reading doesnt change (when source removed)
M1
A1
gamma OR
gamma undeflected (by magnetic field)
uncharged/neutral OR electromagnetic radiation
M1
A1
A1
beta OR
deflection is big/more deflection than alpha
low mass/much smaller than alpha
B1
B1
B1
OR
beta OR
negative
deflects according to left-hand rule
B1
B1
B1
[Total: 10]
11 battery
a.c. supply
a.c. supply
+ diode
horizontal line across at least 4 squares

above or below horizontal centre line
M1
A1
alternating trace, any shape one or more cycles, at least

4 squares wide
above and below centre line, need not be symmetrical
M1
A1
only humps or only troughs seen, minimum 2 humps or troughs

M1
horizontal lines, approximately same width as humps or troughs,
separating humps or troughs
A1
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
Page 7

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
10 (a) proton number OR atomic number OR (number of) protons / electrons

OR position in periodic table OR chemical properties
(b) mass (number) OR nucleon number OR (number of) neutrons / nucleons
OR (number of) protons plus (number of) neutrons
(c)
11 (a)
Paper
31
B1
B1
(i) mass (number) OR nucleon number OR (number of) nucleons

OR (number of) protons plus (number of) neutrons
B1
(ii) proton number OR atomic number OR (number of) neutrons

OR (number of) protons / neutrons / electrons
OR position in periodic table OR chemical properties
OR a neutron changes into a proton
B1
(i) 4
B1
(ii) IVt OR I2Rt OR V2t/R in any form or words or numbers

Condone t = 9 if substituted
possible ecf from (i)
540 (s)
437.4 J possible ecf if 4 from (i) used
C1
C1
A1
(b) R = L/A OR R L/A OR R L and R 1/A or 1/d2 or 1/r2

A2 = A1 OR A2 = 0.25A1
R2 = (0.45/0.3) R1 OR (3/2) x R1
OR 0.375 OR 37.5 %
OR
[4]
C1
C1
C1
A1
R = L/A OR R L/A OR R L and R 1/A or 1/d2 or 1/r2
C1
Resistance of thinner wire with same length as thicker wire = 4 4 = 16
C1
Actual resistance of thinner wire = 1.8 /0.3 = 6.0
C1
Ratio: L of thinner wire / L of thicker wire = 6.0 / 16 = 3/8 = 0.375 = 37.5 %
A1
UCLES 2010
[8]
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical May 1999
1
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)(i)
(ii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Accurately drawn straight lines passing through all the relevant points
Pencil work, neat with thin lines not thicker than (circle line)
Correct labels
o
o
o
Using candidates lines, d and e to nearest degree, d = 86 and e = 14 1
Candidates value accurate to 2 / 3 s.f. {6. 14}
E on reflected ray beyond P4
To prevent light from objects behind I reaching the eye {at E}
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
8
Use of any suitable vertical, set-square / plumb-line

Straw no longer horizontal
B moves downward
25.7 cm / 257 mm / 0.257 m
Table with two columns
Headed with identification and unit for h
na = 9.44/9.5; nw = 4.4 to 4.5
upwards and smaller than weight / apparent loss of some weight
2
1
1
1
1
1
8
26.8 C exact.
0.2, unit not required
variation of 0.2 over such a long time is insignificant or similar
3
Expt l.
0cm
Expt 2
6.2
Expt 3
27.8 unit not required
3
27.8/5 = 5.56/5.6 cm /h unit required
Conclusion should establish, in the candidates own words that
Expt 1, no water leaks out from the tube so the rate of flow is zero
Expt 2, absorption by and evaporation from tissue results in a rate
of flow {1 .6}
Expt 3, Expt 2 + forced evaporation results in a larger rate of flow {x3.5}
1
1
1
X = variable resistor / rheostat

Y = ammeter
To change the value of the current
Set X to maximum value, close switch
Adjust X to obtain desired value of I
Measure I and V
Repeat settings for a check / some worthy practical point e.g. tap analogue
meters or zero the meters.
{max V = 9.5 x 0.1 = 0.95 V} FSD = 1 volt
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
8
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
Correct axes (h along y axis) labelled and with suitable scales

All plots to nearest 1/3 small square
Good line judgement. neat and thin line
Candidate uses the graph values correctly
any two from:
reduces the chance of error / mentions parallax / reading can easily be
repeated or checked by someone else / can be made rigid allowing reading
1
1
1
1
(c)
(d)
to be taken at leisure
So that the straw moves freely in the water / effect of meniscus on straw
always the same
Straw would stick to the side of the container at the top of the meniscus
2
1
1
8
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
Notes about Mark Scheme Symbols and Other Matters

B marks
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidates answer.
M marks
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidates answer. If a
scored.
C marks
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
A marks
c.a.o.
means correct answer only.
e.c.f.
means error carried forward. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated e.c.f.
e.e.o.o.
means each error or omission.
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
OR/or
Significant
figures

Units
Fractions
Extras
Ignore
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT

applies.
Page 3
1

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) all points correctly plotted small square

straight line of best fit for candidates points
B1
B1
(b) (i) candidates correct value with unit ( 0.2), (expect 1.2 N)
B1
(ii) remains stationary / nothing happens / no acceleration NOT constant speed
B1
(c) Correct data from candidates graph for F and m, used in F/m
B1
(d) (i) F = ma in any form, letters, words
B1
(ii) gradient = F/a OR gradient = m ignore m=F/a

candidates (c) with correct unit
Paper
31
C1
A1
(e) straight line of positive gradient
B1
(a) distance/height AND tape measure/(metre) rule(r)

weight OR load OR force
AND balance/scale(s) OR newton-meter/spring balance/force meter
time AND watch/clock/timer
B1
B1
B1
(b) power = work/time OR energy/time in any form

OR Pt words or numbers seen anywhere e.g. 528 x 5
(work =) force distance in any form
11
C1
C1
A1
(c) efficiency = Eout/Ein OR Pout/Pin seen anywhere, clearly identified

OR 520 (20/11) 5
OR (work done =) 800 20 0.3 OR 800 20 30 OR 4800 (J) OR 720 (J)
(energy used =) 32,000 J
C1
A1
[9]
[8]
Page 4
3

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) smaller because area smaller

(ii) smaller because depth/height smaller
B1
ignore less water
(b) (i) hg OR 12 1000 10

1.2 105 Pa OR 1.1772 105 Pa OR 1.176 105 Pa accept N/m2
(ii) candidates (i) + 1.0 105 Pa correctly evaluated with unit (correct value
2.2 105)
Paper
31
B1
C1
A1
B1
(iii) p1V1 = p2V2 in any form

1.1 cm3
OR 0.5 candidates (ii)/105 correctly evaluated
C1
(iv) value in (iii) too small OR volume larger o.w.t.t.e.
B1
(a) rheostat/variable resistor AND control/vary/change/ limit

current /resistance/power/voltage across heater
B1
(b) (i) P = VI in any form OR (I=) P/V

1.25 A
C1
A1
(ii) (R =) V/I in any form words or numbers

(voltage across X =) 2.4 (V) OR 6 - 3.6 (V)
1.92 e.c.f. from (b) (i)
A1
C1
C1
A1
(c) battery running down/going flat/energy of battery used up OR V or e.m.f. less

OR more/increasing resistance (of heater) NOT resistance of X increases
B1
(d) (i) transformer condone step-up OR potential divider/potentiometer NOT extras
B1
(ii) diode OR rectifier OR L.E.D. NOT extras
[8]
B1
[9]
Page 5
5

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) (i) potential difference OR e.m.f. OR voltage ignore volts

(ii) frequency accept cycles/s ignore waves/s
all 3
B1
(iii) power accept energy/s

(b) (i) case/frame/outside/base/parts that can be touched ignore metal parts
(ii) electric shock/electrocution/death by electricity o.w.t.t.e. ignore anything else
live wire touches case
(c) heaters in parallel with any supply
(M0 if no supply, clear break in circuit, short across supply or heater)
one switch controlling both heaters and one switch controlling one heater
OR one switch in series with each element
special case: heaters in series with supply and one switch shorting out one
resistor AND another switch in series with supply
6
B1
B1
B1
M1
A1
B2
(a) A and C
B1
(b) (i) 4.2 1010 years
B1
(ii) idea of decay OR changes proton/neutron/nucleon number

OR change into another nuclide/isotope/element/type of atom
OR emits / particle (ignore / radiation)
B1
(iii) idea of insignificant change in activity during stated time up to 5 109 years
OR experiment time insignificant c.f. 1.4 1010 years OR long half life
OR long time to decay
B1
[6]
[4]
Page 6
7

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) idea of fine ray/beam shone into (glass) block / pins appropriately placed
shown in diagram or described
angles i & r or C measured OR correct i & r or C marked on diagram
sini/sinr OR sinr/sini OR 1/sinC OR sinC
n = speed in air/speed in glass OR c/v = sini/sinr OR n = 1/sinC OR c/v = 1/sinC
(b) (i) v = f OR 240/1.9 105 OR T=d/s AND f=1/T
0.00126 Hz OR 0.0013 Hz NOT 0.0012 Hz
ignore more than 3 s.f. accept s-1
(ii) distance = speed time in any form accept s = 2d/t
(time for tremor =) 240 (s) or 4 mins also gives first C1
(time for tsunami = ) 2500 (s) or 41 mins 40 s also gives first C1
(warning time = ) 2260 (s) or 37 mins 40 s
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
A1
C1
C1
C1
A1 [10]
(a) (i) total (internal) reflection OR reflection but no refraction/doesnt emerge

angle (of incidence} > critical angle
B1
B1
(ii) initial reflection + 0 or 1 further reflection only, not at lower surface

must be straight and reach within 1cm of end
B1
(b) (i) bends easily/less likely to break (ignore stronger) OR smaller pixels/
more detail/greater resolution/see smaller objects/wider field of view
Paper
31
B1
(ii) light travels down/along/through fibres
B1
(iii) light/image returns up/along/through fibres ignore cameras
B1
(a) (i) down

down OR anti-clockwise
both
(ii) BC is parallel to the field/doesnt cut field or vice-versa/not at angle to field

ignore BC not perpendicular to field
(b) continues moving/turning
NOT reverse/other direction
idea of moving things continue moving OR reference to Newtons Laws
OR reference to momentum/KE/inertia NOT reference to force still acting
B1
B1
M1
A1
[6]
Page 7

IGCSE May/June 2011
(c) more turns/several coils

iron core
increase current/voltage
stronger magnet
smaller air gap
curved poles
more efficient brushes
poles closer
use split-ring commutator
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
any 1
B1
[5]
10 (a) release of electrons due to heating/high temperature/heater
B1
(b) X- and Y-plates labelled

anodes either order, labelled, either plates/cylinders with holes
closed tube of sensible shape
AND cathode AND anode(s) AND X- & Y- plates, all three features in correct
order
labels not needed for last mark but if given must be correct
B1
B1
B1
(c) change current in filament/cathode/heater IGNORE limit

OR change temperature/heat/power/energy of filament/cathode/heater
OR change cathode-anode p.d./voltage
OR change charge/voltage of grid
B1
(d) (i) (I=)Q/t in any form

0.0019 A OR 1.9 10-3 A OR 1.9 mA
C1
A1
(ii) (E=) VIt OR VQ in any form, words, symbols, numbers (accept t=5s)
190 J OR candidates I 100 000 correctly evaluated
C1
A1
11 (a) Pt OR 1.2 104 9 OR 1.2 104 (11 2)

(l=) E/m OR E/0.36 OR Pt/m OR Pt/0.36
3 105 J/kg
C1
C1
A1
(b) (i) liquid ignore vapour/gas/water

(ii) move around more rapidly / faster / more KE
ignore start to vibrate etc but accept starts to vibrate faster
move further apart / spreads out (NOT molecules expand)
break free / evaporate / overcome bonds / overcome forces of
attraction /escape / change state (accept boils)
convection (current)
[9]
A1
any 2
B1
[6]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31

M marks
are method marks upon which further marks depend. For an M mark to be scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate
fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks:
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidates
answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final
numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
acceptable number of significant figures, all the marks for that question are normally
awarded.
It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong
approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C
marks on their merits.
C marks
are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These can be

scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it.
For example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down
the actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew
the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two points which contradict each
other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( )
around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets.
underlining
indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or
e.e.o.o.
o.w.t.t.e.
Spelling

Not/NOT

applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and

does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Page 3

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
ecf
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may
in particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf
may be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the
earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a
particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs.
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures 2. Any

exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general,
accept numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be
right.
Units
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per
question. No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is
shown correctly in the working.
Arithmetic errors Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one.
Transcription
errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
previously calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
Fractions
Page 4

Syllabus
0625
(a) acceleration = v u OR v (symbols used to be explained)

t
t
OR change of velocity time
OR rate of change of velocity
OR change of velocity per second / in 1 sec (allow in a certain time)
accept speed for velocity
(b) (i) use of any area under graph
750 m
(ii) time = change of speed acceleration OR 30/0.60
= 50 (s)
if working for t = 50 s not shown, allow 2 marks for correct use of 50 s
graph: along y-axis to 180 s / rise starts at 180 s
from x-axis rises to 30 m/s at 230 s / candidates calculated time
horizontal from top of slope to 280 s
allow square tolerance at 180 s where relevant
allow ecf from wrong t
(a) two processes from:

vapour rising
condensation
rain falling
water falling from lake / through pipes
water turns turbine / generator
electricity generated.
energy changes:
PE to KE matched to a process
KE to electricity energy for turbine / power station
(b) (i) (PE =) mgh OR 2 105 10 120 allow g = 9.8 or 9.81
2.4 108 J
(ii) (KE of water =) mv2 OR 2 105 142
1.96 107 J OR 2.0 107 J
Paper
31
B1
C1
A1
C1
A1
B1
B1
B1
[8]
max B2
B1
B1
C1
A1
C1
A1
[8]
Page 5
3
(a) 1.
2.

Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
no resultant force acts / no net force acts

OR total force up / in any direction = total force down / in opposite direction
allow sum of forces or resultant force for total force
no resultant moment / couple / torque acts
OR (sum of) clockwise moments and (sum of) anti-clockwise moments
(about any point / axis) balance
(b) (i) (anti-clockwise moment =) F 2

(total clockwise moment =) (120 33) + (20 15) = 4260 (N cm)
2130 N
B1
B1
(a) surfaces shown at realistic levels in dish and tube AND vertical height h between
levels clearly shown
top label: vacuum / mercury vapour
bottom label: mercury
B1
B1
B1
(b) (P =) hdg OR 0.73 13600 10

99280 Pa at least 2 s.f.
C1
B1
(c) one from:

abnormal weather / atmospheric conditions o.w.t.t.e.
air in space above mercury in tube
barometer is in a high altitude location o.w.t.t.e.
space above mercury is not a vacuum
ignore atmospheric pressure varies ignore temperature
5
B1
C1
C1
A1
(ii) 1990 N OR candidates (b)(i) 140 N

force is downwards
4
B1
(a) (i) most: gas

least: solid both required
(ii) because change of pressure (also) causes volume change (in a gas)
NOT gas can be compressed
(b) (i) two from:
expands uniformly (over required range)
remains liquid over required range
expands more than glass / has high expansivity / expansion
has (reasonably) low specific heat capacity.
has low freezing point / lower freezing point than mercury
(ii) make (capillary) tube narrower (and longer) / thinner / smaller diameter
make bulb larger (and tube longer)
allow bore for tube ignore smaller ignore narrow thermometer
B1
B1
B1
max B2
B1
B1
[7]
[6]
Page 6

Syllabus
0625
(c) allows fast(er) flow of heat to / from alcohol

OR allows fast response (to temperature change)
OR because glass is a poor conductor / good insulator (so needs to be thin for
fast response)
OR heat transfer more efficient / faster
OR glass takes up less heat
ignore reference to sensitivity ignore easier
6
(a) (i) 1.
2.
compressions and/or rarefactions closer together

OR more compressions and/or rarefactions
ignore wavelength shorter
B1
[7]
B1
layers closer together at compressions

B1
layers farther apart at rarefactions
B1
OR
compressions narrower
(B1)
rarefactions wider
(B1)
ignore wavelength shorter ignore amplitude greater ignore maximum
displacement greater
(ii) distance between 2 compressions or 2 rarefactions shown with reasonable

accuracy
Paper
31
B1
(b) time taken by sound in air = 200 / 343 = 0.583 s

time taken by sound in steel = 0.583 0.544 = 0.039 s
5128 m/s
C1
C1
A1
(a) (i) light of a single wavelength / frequency ignore one colour
B1
(ii) n = sin i/sin r OR 1.52 = sin 50/sin r OR sin r = sin 50/1.52

30.26 at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
(iii) ray closer to normal in block

ray parallel to incident ray emerging from block
B1
B1
(b) (i) n = vA/vG OR n = 1.54/vG OR vG = 3 108/1.54

1.948 108 m/s
C1
B1
(ii) ray with smaller angle of refraction than red in block i.e. violet ray under red ray
emerging ray parallel to incident ray
B1
B1
[7]
[9]
Page 7
8

Syllabus
0625
(a) any three from:

use a strong(er) magnet
increase the number of coils in the solenoid / turns of solenoid closer together
move the magnet fast(er).
place iron core in the solenoid
use thick(er) wire / low(er) resistance wire for solenoid
max B3
(b) (i) NP/NS = VP/VS OR 200/800 = VP/24 OR VP = NPVS/NS
OR VP = 200 x 24/800
6.0 V
(ii) IpVp = IsVs OR IpNp = IsNs OR IP = ISVS/VP OR IP = ISNS/NP
OR IP = (0.5 x 24)/6 OR IP = (0.5 x 800)/200
2(.0) A
allow ecf from (b)(i)
Paper
31
(a) (i) 1.
2.
resistance is constant / doesnt vary

resistance increases
(ii) 7 V
C1
A1
C1
A1
[7]
B1
B1
B1
(b) resistance of resistor = 4/2.6 (= 1.54 )

resistance of lamp = 4/3.6 (= 1.11 )
1/R = 1/R1 + 1/R2 OR (R =) R1R2/(R1 + R2) OR either eq. with numbers
0.645 or 0.65
OR
current through resistor = 2.6 A
current through lamp = 3.6 A
total current = 2.6 + 3.6 = 6.2 A
0.645 OR 0.65 OR R = 4/sum of candidates currents
accept R value based on no. of sig. figs. for resistors used by candidate
10 (a) (i) thermistor
C1
C1
C1
A1
(C1)
(C1)
(C1)
(A1)
B1
(ii) lamp is ON at 20 oC / low temperature and OFF at 100 oC / high temperature

p.d. across B is high at 20 oC / low temperature
p.d. across B is low at 100 oC / high temperature
OR as temperature rises, p.d. across B falls
transistor acts as a switch for the lamp at a certain temperature
OR lamp is ON if there is current in base / collector
OR potential of base is high
OR lamp is OFF if there is no current in base / collector
OR potential of base is too low
B1
B1
B1
(B2)
B1
[7]
Page 8

Syllabus
0625
(b) to switch on a warning light when temperature (required for a process) becomes
too low
OR to switch off a warning light when temperature (required for a process)
becomes high enough
example (e.g. freezer or incubator) not needed, but if given, explanation required
11 (a) (i) to heat the cathode / C
Paper
31
B1
B1
(ii) to emit electrons / to undergo thermionic emission (when heated)
B1
(iii) to attract / accelerate electrons

to allow the electrons / beam to pass through to the screen / to focus the
beam / to direct the beam / produce a straight beam / to fix the beam current
B1
(b) (i) p.d. / voltage / battery / power supply applied between / across plates
upper plate positive and lower plate negative
(ii) sketch showing: straight vertical lines from top plate to bottom plate
arrows pointing downwards / from + to
[6]
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
[8]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
NOTES ABOUT MARK SCHEME

M marks
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score
a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to be scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidates answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions.

If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
awarded.
It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely wrong
approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C marks on
their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain all the
marks available.
C marks

provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
OR / or
e.e.o.o.
o.w.t.t.e.
Spelling
what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities, accidental
or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction /
diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT

applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and does
not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Page 3
ecf

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be
awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier
mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular
mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Significant Figures
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures 2. Accept
answers that round to give the correct answer to 2 s.f. Any exceptions to this general rule
will be specified in the mark scheme.
Units
Deduct one mark for each incorrect or missing unit from a final answer that would
otherwise gain all the marks available for that answer: maximum 1 per question. No
deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown correctly in
the working.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic one.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
Fractions
e.g. , etc are only acceptable where specified.
Page 4
1

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) Period: 1.81 s OR 1.8 s as mean value

OR 1.8 s as most common reading / the mode
(b) Time a minimum of 2 (successive) oscillations
Divide result by the number of oscillations
OR
Count no. of oscillations in at least 20 s
Divide the time by the number of oscillations
OR Divide no. of oscillations by time and find reciprocal
2 of:
Repeat (several times) and find mean
Time with reference to fixed / fiducial point or top or bottom of oscillation
Check / set zero of stop-watch
Show knowledge of what is meant by one oscillation
Paper
31
B1
B1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
B2
[Total: 5]
(a) (i) Increasing speed / acceleration
B1
(ii) Constant / steady / uniform speed or motion
B1
(iii) Decreasing speed / deceleration / braking / slowing / stopping / negative

acceleration
B1
(b) (i) (Total) distance / (total) time OR d / t OR 400 / 60

6.67 m/s at least 2 s.f.
(ii) Mention of maximum gradient OR clear that whole or part of B to C is used
Use of correct data from graph to +/ square
Answer rounds to 9.2 to 9.4 m/s, at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
C1
C1
A1
[Total: 8]
Page 5
3

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) Example: e.g. battery: (chemical to) electrical

engine: (chemical to) kinetic / mechanical
fire: (chemical to) thermal / heat
(human) body: (chemical to) heat / kinetic
B1
(b) (i) (P =) IV OR in words OR 0.27 17

= 4.59 W at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
(ii) (K.E. =) efficiency input OR 0.35 4.59

= 1.61 J or Nm at least 2 s.f.
(iii) 1.
2.
C1
A1
d = m/V OR (m =) V d OR in words OR 0.00014 1000

= 0.14 kg
C1
A1
P.E. gained = K.E. lost OR mgh = mv2

OR 0.14 10 h = 1.61 OR 1.6
h = 1.15 m OR 1.14 m at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
OR
mv2 = 1.61 OR
v2 = 2 1.61 / 0.14 = 23 OR v2 = 2 1.6 / 0.14 = 22.86
(h =) v2/2g = 23/20 = 1.15 m OR (h =) 22.86/20 = 1.14 m
(C1)
(A1)
[Total: 9]
(a) (p =) F/A OR in words OR 90/4.8 OR 90 / 0.00048

= 18.75 N/cm2 OR 1.875 105 Pa OR 187500 Pa
OR 187.5 kPa OR 0.1875 MPa at least 2 s.f.
C1
(b) Area of Y bigger (than area of X so force greater)
B1
(c) Volume of oil moved at Y = volume of oil moved at X

Area of Y distance moved by Y = Area of X distance moved by X (so distance
move by Y smaller)
OR
Work done by piston X = work done on piston Y
Work = force distance and F2 is greater than F1 so distance moved by Y smaller
(than distance moved by X)
B1
(d) Air bubbles compress when pressure applied

More movement of piston X required for same movement of piston Y
OR Y moves less (for same movement of X)
OR Driver must push the brake pedal further / do more work
OR Pressure reduced / force on Y reduced
OR System is less efficient
A1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
M1
A1
[Total: 7]
Page 6
5

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) e.g. freezing, solidification, condensation

OR example e.g. water to ice, steam to water, gas to solid
(ii) No change
(b) Heat/energy required to change temperature of the body
by 1 C / 1 K / 1 unit / 1 deg
OR
mass (of body) specific heat capacity
(c) (i) Q = mc OR in words OR 250 4.2 20
= 21000 J
Paper
31
B1
B1
B1
B1
(B2)
C1
A1
(ii) 21000 J OR same as (c)(i)
B1
(iii) Q = mL OR m = Q/L OR either in words

OR 21000 = m 330 OR m = 21000/330
= 63.6 g at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
[Total: 9]
(a) (i) Glass / flask receives heat / rises in temperature

Glass / flask expands
B1
B1
(ii) Heat flows through glass to water OR Water receives heat / thermal energy
from / conducted by glass OR Water temperature rises OR Water molecules
move faster / gain K.E.
Water expands / Water molecules move further apart
B1
B1
(iii) Glass / solid expands less OR water / liquid expands more
B1
(b) Use a bigger flask OR a narrower tube

OR Use a solid and a liquid that expand more
B1
[Total: 6]
Page 7
7

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) (Molecule) moves up and down / rises and falls

OR oscillates perpendicular to direction of wave
OR describes a circle
(b) (i) At least 3 circular arcs, angular spread greater than 90 (symmetrically above
and below slit
Centre of arcs at centre of slit and with same spacing (by eye) as incident
waves
(ii) Diffraction
Paper
31
B1
B1
B1
B1
(c) v = f OR 12 = f 1.4 OR f = v / OR f = 12 / 1.4

f = 8.57 Hz / per s / waves or vibrations per s
at least 2 s.f.
C1
A1
[Total: 6]
(a) (i) Electron(s)
B1
(ii) At least 2 + signs on left-hand side of S

Same number of signs on right-hand side of S
B1
(iii) Connect S to earth (with rod in place)

Remove connection of S to earth
Remove R / rod
M1
M1
A1
(b) (i) Q = It OR I = Q / t OR in words OR I = 30/120

= 0.25 A or C/s
C1
A1
(ii) E = IVt OR in words OR 0.25 1.5 106 120

OR
E = QV OR in words OR 30 1.5 106
E = 45000000 J / 4.5 107 J / 45 MJ / 12.5 kWh
C1
(C1)
A1
[Total: 9]
Page 8

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) I1 = I2 + I3
Paper
31
B1
(ii) I1 = I4 OR same
(b) (i) (V = IR = 0.80 3.0 =) 2.4 V
(ii) I = V/R in any algebraic form OR 2.4 / 2 OR (b)(i) / 2
OR any voltage divided by 2
(I3 = V/R = 2.4 / 2 =) 1.2 A
OR
I3/I2 = 3/2
I3 = 3/2 0.8 A = 1.2 A
(iii) (I2 + I3 OR Current through R = 0.8 + 1.2) = 2.0 (A)
OR 6 V / 2 A used
Parallel combination formula: 1/r = 1/r1 + 1/r2
OR (r =) r1r2/(r1 + r2)
Use of formula: combined resistance = 1.2 ()
(R + 1.2 = 6/2 = 3.0 R =) 1.8
OR
Current through R = 0.8 + 1.2 = 2.0 (A)
P.D. across R = 6.0 2.4
= 3.6 (V)
R = 3.6 / 2.0 = 1.8
B1
A1
C1
A1
(C1)
(A1)
C1
C1
C1
A1
(C1)
(C1)
(C1)
(A1)
[Total: 9]
10 (a) (i) Parallel lines perpendicular to pole faces with arrows N to S

(ii) Arrow pointing to the right
(b) (i) Geiger (counter) / Geiger (tube) (+ scaler / ratemeter) / photographic plate /
scintillation counter / cloud chamber / luminescent or phosphorescent plate
B1
B1
B1
(ii) Out of the plane of the paper
B1
(iii) (Path is) a curve / circular / arc
B1
(iv) (Air molecules are) ionised / lose electrons
B1
[Total: 6]
Page 9

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
11 (a) Transistor
Paper
31
B1
(b) Resistor / variable resistor / rheostat identified

Light-dependent resistor / LDR identified
Resistor or alternative in gap A; LDR in gap B
B1
B1
B1
(c) Thermistor / thermal resistor / heat or temperature dependent resistor identified

Thermistor (or alternative name) in gap A and resistor in gap B
B1
B1
[Total: 6]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/31
components.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31

M marks
point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to
score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent marks can be scored.
B marks
are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to scored,
the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidates answers.
A marks
In general A marks are awarded for final answers to numerical questions. If a final
numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is correct, with the correct unit and an
awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at a correct answer by an entirely
wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not award the A marks, but award C
marks on their merits. However, correct numerical answers with no working shown gain
all the marks available.
C marks

provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
brackets ( )
around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
brackets.
underlining
indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or
e.e.o.o.
o.w.t.t.e.
c.a.o.
correct answer only
Spelling

mean what we want, give credit. However, beware of and do not allow ambiguities,
accidental or deliberate: e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection /
refraction / diffraction / thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Not/NOT

applies.
Ignore
Indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and

does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
ecf
meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions.
Page 3
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may
be awarded, provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier
mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular
mistake, but only applies to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs.
Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2. Any

exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme. In general, accept
numerical answers, which, if reduced to two significant figures, would be right.
Units
No deduction is incurred if the unit is missing from the final answer but is shown
correctly in the working.
Arithmetic
errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one.
Transcription Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because given or
errors
Fractions
e.g. , , 1/10 etc are only acceptable where specified.
Crossed out
work
Work which has been crossed out and not replaced but can easily be read, should
be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
Use of NR
(# key on the keyboard) Use this if the answer space for a question is completely blank
or contains no readable words, figures or symbols.
Page 4
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
(a) (i) s = area under graph, stated or clearly used

= ( 18 10) + (120 18) + ( 18 20) Award if at least one term correct
= 90 + 2160 +180
= 2430 m / 2.43 km at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies
(ii) v = u + at in any form OR (a=) gradient OR 18/10
= 1.8 m/s2 *Unit penalty applies
C1
C1
C1
A1
C1
A1
(b) (F=) ma OR 1.1 105 1.8 ecf from (a)(ii)

= 1.98 105 N at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies
C1
A1
(c) driving force = friction/air resistance/drag
B1
[9]
*Apply unit penalty once only

2
(a) Size / magnitude (NOT distance) and direction
B1
(b) Vectors towards East and North with arrows correct by eye
Complete triangle or rectangle for candidates vectors
Resultant with correct arrow
Resultant 94 to 96 m/s by scale OR 95 m/s by calculation *Unit penalty applies
Angle measured 13.5 15.5 OR 15 by calculation *Unit penalty applies
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
[6]

3
(a) No resultant/net force OR no resultant force in any direction

OR no resultant force in any two perpendicular directions
B1
No resultant/net moment/turning effect/couple/torque

OR (total) clockwise moment = (total) anticlockwise moment
B1
Either order
(b) (i) F 120 / F 0.12
= 20 500 OR 20 0.5
F = 83.3 N at least 2 significant figures. Allow 831/3 *Unit penalty applies
(ii) F/A or in words OR 83.3/0.0036 ecf from (b)(i)
= 23100 Pa / N/m2 OR 2.31 N/cm2 OR 23.1 kPa *Unit penalty applies
C1
C1
A1
C1
A1

4
(a) (The point in the body) where (all) the mass / weight / gravity acts / appears to act
(owtte)
(b) h is the height through which the centre of mass/rises
OR centre of mass/rises (much) less than 2.0 m
B1
[7]
Page 5
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
OR centre of mass/of athlete is above the ground level

OR centre of mass/gravity passes under bar
Paper
31
B1
Allow centre of gravity in place of centre of mass
(c) Standing: has chemical energy

Run-up: kinetic energy gained
Pole bent: has strain / elastic energy
Rise: potential energy gained
Fall: kinetic energy gained
On mat: has thermal / heat / sound / strain / elastic energy
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
(a) (i) (Force exerted when) molecules hit wall / surface / solid (and rebound)
Allow (force) due to momentum change in collision
B1
(ii) Molecules/atoms/particles collide with / push against walls

more (often)
(so) bigger force / push
[8]
B1
B1
B1
NOT collide faster
(b) P1V1 = P2V2 OR PV = constant

8.0 105 5000 = 1 105 V2
V2 = 40 000 cm3
Volume escaped = 40 000 5000 = 35 000 cm3
C1
C1
C1
A1
(a) Heat required to change state of / melt 1 kg / 1 g / unit mass of solid (with no
change of temperature)
B1
Allow specific example e.g. ice to water

NOT liquid to gas
[8]
Page 6
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(b) (i) d = m/V in any form OR (m =) V d

OR (m =) 0.25 0.012 920
= 2.76 kg at least 2 significant figures. *Unit penalty applies
(ii) 60% of 250 = 150 (W/m2) OR 250 0.25 = 62.5 (J)
Heat absorbed in 1 s = 150 0.25 = 37.5 (J)
OR 60 % of 62.5 = 37.5 J OR J/s OR W *Unit penalty applies
Paper
31
C1
A1
C1
A1
Allow J/s or W because in one second.

(iii) Q = mL OR m = Q/L OR m = 37.5 / 3.3 105 ecf from (b)(ii)
m = 0.0001136 (kg) (in 1 s)
Time taken = 2.76/0.000114 = 24300 s at least 2 significant figures. *Unit
penalty applies
OR
P = Q/t OR t = Q/P OR t = mL/P
t = 2.76 3.3 105 / 37.5
= 24300 s *Unit penalty applies
C1
C1
A1
(C1)
(C1)
(A1)
[8]

7
(a) Faster / more energetic molecules escape / evaporate (from surface)

Molecules left (in liquid) have lower average speed / energy so temperature is
lower
OR
(Latent) heat needed to evaporate / leave the surface
comes from remaining liquid
(b) (i) Dull surface is better radiator / radiates faster
OR Shiny surface is poorer radiator / radiates slower
B1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
B1
(ii) C hotter (than A) OR A cooler (than C) (so evaporates at a faster rate in C)
B1
(iii) Less liquid in D OR more liquid in A
B1
(iv) E has greater (surface) area / more open to air / is shallower

greater rate of loss of heat by evaporation / convection /
conduction / radiation
B1
(a) (i) Diagram to show boundary, normal and ray bending towards normal
Angle of incidence labelled i or 51
Angle of refraction labelled r or 29
(ii) n = sin i / sin r OR n = sin 51 / sin 29
n = 1.603 at least 2 s.f. *Unit penalty applies
B1
B1
B1
B1
C1
A1
[7]
Page 7
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(b) Ray is totally internally reflected / undergoes TIR

Angle of incidence is more than / equal to the critical angle (of the glass)
OR
Ray travels along the boundary
Angle of incidence = critical angle (of the glass)
OR
Critical angle calculated as 38.6 ecf from (a)(ii)
Angle of incidence greater than critical angle (of the glass)
9
(a) (i) In the opposite direction OR downwards

Faster / fast
(ii) No voltage/current induced
Currents/voltages (induced) in each half of XY are equal and in opposite
directions/oppose each other
(b) (i) Y-plates
Paper
31
B1
B1
(B1)
(B1)
(B1)
(B1)
[7]
B1
B1
B1
B1
B1
(ii) Up and down (repeatedly) owtte
B1
(iii) Off / zero
B1
[7]
10 (a) (i) current

(ii) p.d. OR potential difference OR voltage
B1
Both required
(b) R = R1 + R2 OR 1.2 + 3.6 OR 4.8 (k )
I = 9.0 / 4.8 = 1.875 (mA) OR 9.0/4800 = 1.875 103 (A)
Voltmeter reading = 6.75 V *Unit penalty applies
OR
Voltmeter reading = [R1 / (R1 + R2)] V
= [3.6 / (1.2 + 3.6)] 9.0
= 6.75 V *Unit penalty applies
(c) (In fire) temperature of thermistor rises and its resistance falls
Current (through thermistor and relay coil) rises / flows
OR voltage / p.d. across / of relay coil rises
Magnetic field of relay closes switch (and bell rings)
C1
C1
A1
(C1)
(C1)
(A1)
B1
B1
B1
[7]
Page 8
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
31
11 (a) (i) alpha or

(ii) beta or
(iii) gamma or
B2
Symbols must be clear

3 correct B2
2 correct B1
(b) (i) repulsion
particle and (gold) nucleus / protons of (gold) nucleus have positive charges
B1
B1
(ii) Any two of:

Nucleus is very small (compared to size of atom) OR Most of atom is empty
space
Nucleus is positive / contains protons OR Nucleus has (all) the positive charge
of the atom
Nucleus is heavy OR Nucleus has most / all of the mass of the atom
Ignore neutrons
B2
[6]
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical November 1999
1
(a)
(b)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(c)(i)
(ii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
98, 83, 52 mm OR any other checkable value to 1 mm

corresponding values 68, 53, 21mm OR other checkable value to 1(mm)
Correct subtraction of candidates Q from candidates P (i.e. e.c.f)
Clear working throughout, accurate and in range (3/3.1) and good
presentation of h
written answer / candidates diagram / from drawing on Fig 1.1:
ANY four points from:
Set perpendicular
zero on bench
close to tube
use of fiducial aid
position of eye to avoid parallax
read bottom of meniscus
use of background
repeats
1
1
1
1
4
8
Four acceptable symbols (i.e. can be found in text books) and in series
Power-supply polarity labelled, correct diode connection
Open switch
Polarity of ammeter compatible with diode connections
Ammeter anywhere in series with other components
Yes box ticked plus current is same at every point in circuit
3/100 A, 0.03 A or 30mA (unit required)
no other resistance in circuit / 3 volt across 100 _ / max resistance
is 100 _
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ratio of masses: 9 or 9:1, not other way round

ratio of areas: 8 - 8.1, or 8:1 etc
The height was the same for each area
Use of table, specific use or by just referring to areas, / balls / masses
Observation is consistent/true/same for all the masses or balls
as the mass decreases h increases
Heaviest: each piece absorbs all of the KE / KE is transformed into other
forms of energy or into two other named forms / No KE of rebound
Lightest: each piece absorbs some KE/ some KE converted into other
forms etc / a smaller amount of KE of rebound
1
1
1
1
1
1
reduce/prevent conduction of heat into (the solution) / insulates the can

produce a uniform temperature
assists in accurate temperature measurements
0
18.7 or 18.8 C
8.9 or 9
unit with one of the three temperatures
Any ONE point from
assists accuracy
helps avoiding parallax
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
8
(c)
(a)(i)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
more certain when the thread reaches the scale division

Take the reading with the line of sight perpendicular to the scale,
marked on a diagram
Correct axes {y against x) and labelled

Axes scaled sensibly occupying at least half the grid with units and using
the required origin
Five correct plots, to the nearest 1/3 small graph square
A fine line and neat plots
Five correct subtractions {2.3., 2.1, 2.3, 2.1, 2.1.}
Showing y x on diagram
They remain constant / approximately constant
(y-x) larger
1
8
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
8
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical May/June 2000
1
(a)
neat, thin line OA

neat, thin line AP1P2
arrow shown, correct direction on either
P2P1 extended to LL correct and neat
I labelled
continuation of IA shown
IR/OC shown
value 2.9 - 3.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
Move centre of compass along line from magnet

Judged parallel to OX in some sensible way
(e.g. use lined paper with a line along OX or
use ruler and set square, etc)
Tap compass to prevent sticking
Mark either end of needle as near as possible to
compass then mark A between
Look directly down on to compass so centre is
on line
N pole marked (RH end)
moves gradually
to direction approx.
(a)
(b)
(c)(i)
(ii)
(d)
0-10
correct position (between 6.2 and 6.4)
3.4 _
0.2 _
correct symbol
1
1
1
1
1
(e)
connect variable resistor in series
1
6
(a)
suitable table (rows or columns)

mass unit shown
temperature unit shown
way of taking an average
or there will be errors in readings, so way of
showing expected results without the errors
1: 0.8
2: 3
o
tick in box 1 and reason (e.g. difficult to measure temp to 1 C)
or heat losses involved
or easy to measure mass to better than l g)
1
1
1
(b)
(c)
(d)
(a)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)
(b)
(c)(i)
1.096 (1.10)
1.068 (1.07)
1.006 (1.01)
0.866 ( 0.87) all correct
greater accuracy
Graph:
scales right way round and suitable i.e. cover at least 1/2 grid no unsuitable
scales e.g. 10 sq = 0.3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
(ii)
(iii)
(d)
scales labelled with quantity or unit

all plots correct to nearest square
ABCD labelled
T increases,
increase is greatest for larger values of d
1.l (+)
increased range OR largest difference in T value with larger d values
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
11
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical November 2000
1
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
use metre rule (or other straight edge) held horizontally

at height of rule near clamp
and measure height from floor
(OR measure height from floor near clamp 2)
(i.e. appreciation that even without weight, free end of rule is depressed)
metre rule and some means to ensure it is vertical (e.g. set-square)
means to more easily locate reading on vertical rule
(e.g. short rule, set-square)
OR fixing vertical rule in clamp & stand
OR convincing avoidance of parallax (action AND reason)
NOTE: (i), (ii) and (iii) may be scored directly from the diagram(s).
Take time (t) for several oscillations (N)
Calculate T from t/N
stopclock / stopwatch
make N as large as possible
OR repeat readings
use of fiducial mark at centre of oscillation
OR explanation of what fiducial mark means
OR shown on diagram
(mere use of word fiducial is not sufficient)
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
(a)
(b)
w / cm
x / cm
2
wx / cm
w,x and wx tabulated

w and x with corresponding units
wx unit
correct wx value (2/3 sf) X3
all wx correct to + 2 mm
As x increases, w decreases
OR w decreases faster than x increases
4.4
3.30
14.5
2.8
5.90
16.5
1
1
1
1
1
2
1.9
7.75
14.7
0.95
10.65
10.1
7
(a)
need to add brass, not water, to cup
(b)
(start clock)
at stated time remove brass
place brass in cup after time t
1
1
(c)
(d)(i)
(OR hold thread, start clock at same time as removing brass

place brass in cup after time t)
cool for 60s
record maximum temperature of water
use fresh water from tap
1
1
(ii)
OR use thermometer to measure temperature and adjust

use 50 g measure on balance
1
1
(e)
ensure temp same throughout liquid
1
8
(a)(i)
(ii)
r angle of resistance
to obtain any value of current
1
1
(b)(i) 1.
1
(ii)
2. move slider along line
3. to ensure good electrical contact
insulate 23 cm
correct end clear
OR
23cm
1
1
tape
7
5
(a)
graph:
(b)(i)
scales
labelled
plots correct to the nearest half square
line
y1 to the nearest half square
y2 to the nearest half square
ratios correct to 2/3 s.f.
force increases as separation decreases
x ratio is < 1; y ratio > 1
(ii)
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical May/June 2001
1
(a)
(b)
a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(b)
Graph:
Axes, labelled, y against x
Scales suitable
plots 6 correct
(OR 5 correct = 2, OR 4 correct = 1)
line judgement
string slipped on pulley / other sensible point
lo and l1 clear and from same points
e = l1 lo
o
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
9
7 C, 16 C, 12 C
C
lid
same volume / same initial temperature
A
would not have gone below room temperature
goes down to room temperature
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
0.94, 0.35, 0.48

1.77 (or sum of above)
unit
2.69, 1.00, 1.37 correct to 2 / 3 s.f.
unit at least once
diagram:
resistors in parallel
voltmeter correct
ammeter correct
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)(i)
(ii)
(e)
correct temperature
0
ensure at 100 C
heat not lost during transfer
69.5C
10.5C
contains more heat
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
(a)
3.00, 1.47, 1.01 arithmetic

all to 2 / 3 s.f.
suitable explanation / diagram e.g. mark on block
and measure to object with metre rule
upside down
2.9 0.1 cm
centre of object and lens in line
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
(b)
(c)
(d)
Mark scheme for IGCSE Physics (0625/6) Alternative to Practical October/November 2001
1
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
(a)(i)
(iii)
(b)(i)
(ii)
(a)(i)
(ii)
(b)
Graph:,
axes, labelled, d/mm against L / N
scales suitable
plots 6 correct
line judgement
reading to 1/2 square
clearly shown
Any two from:
horizontal rule at top
vertical rule in centre
clamped rule in centre
rule in centre resting on floor
1
1
3
1
1
1
0.22, 0.23, 0.17(5) correct

all correct
all to 2/3 s.f.
unit (at least once)
circuit:
lamps in parallel
voltmeter correct
ammeter correct (for any one lamp)
2
1
1
1
h = 18(mm)
t = 1.2mm
correct arithmetic
unit
d correct arithmetic
2/3 s.f.
mass on correct side
approximately twice as far from pivot (by eye)
(between 35 and 40)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
35, 23, 32 correct

Any two from:
same initial temperature
same size cans
same distance from heater
same time
same room temperature
R
18 - 19C
clear how obtained
lines correct, thin and neat

o
o
30 1
Any two from:
view base of pins
ensure vertical pins as far apart as possible
(or > 5cm)
1
1
2
10
1
1
1
8
1
8
2
1
1
1
6
(c)(i)
(ii)
(iii)
use a third pin

2.4 0.1 cm
6.8 0.1 cm
n = 1.3 - 1.5 (from correct arithmetic)
no unit and 2/3 s.f.
2
1
1
1
1
8
June 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
PHYSICS
Alternative to Practical
Page 1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(a)
Seven correct values: 0, 2, 3, 6, 9, 10, 12 (-1 each error)
(b)
Graph:
Scales, labelled, suitable size
Axes, right way round
Plots to sq (-1 each error)
1
1
2
Line shape
Line thickness
1
1
Triangle greater than line and method used

Correct interpolation to sq
1
1
(c)
TOTAL
2
36o (61o)
(b)
Refracted ray drawn

22o (61o)
normal correct (by eye)
neat, thin, correct lines
1
1
1
1
(c)
Correct refracted ray (by eye) with arrow
(d)
Separation (LHS) at least 5cm

Separation (RHS) at least 5cm
1
1
(a)
(i)
Voltmeter across lamp
(ii)
Variable resistor/rheostat
(b)
Correct position
(c)
V
A
1
1
1
1
1
1
correct R at 9.8V = 8.16666 (any sf)

all R to 2/3 sf
consistent 2 sf or consistent 3 sf
TOTAL
4
10
(a)
TOTAL
3
Paper
6
(a)
(b)
(i)
6.8cm (68mm)
(ii)
6.8
unit, mm
1
1
(i)
3.8/3.77 or 0.38/0.377
mm or cm as appropriate
1
1
Page 2
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
(ii)
0.94/0.95 (or evidence of division by 4)
(iii)
0.75094/0.75095
Thickness of string/thickness of marks on string/stretching of

string/metre rule measures to 1mm
(c)
TOTAL
5
(a)
(b)
Paper
6
(i)
polystyrene
(ii)
Least steep curve (or numbers suitably quoted)
Three from:
Thickness of insulator
Room temp.
Starting temp.
Mass/vol./amount of water
Using same can
3
TOTAL
November 2003
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
PHYSICS
Page 1
(a)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
wind string round more than once
divide measured length by number of turns to find c
correct diagram, blocks parallel, one at each end
119 mm OR 11.9 cm to 121 mm OR 12.1 cm
(c)
V = 32.39 to 32.41
cm3
1
1
(d) (i)
Vm = 0.5 2 cm3
(b) (i)
(ii)
(ii)
correct calculation and 2/3 sf
(ignore unit)
1
TOTAL 8
(a) (i)(ii) 2 neat continuous rays
(thickness up to as EF)
(iii)
normal where incident ray meets mirror (90 by eye)
(iv)
i = 20 1 (allow e.c.f. if mark for normal not scored)
(b) (i)(ii) lines complete and neat with AX correctly intersecting

(iii)
(c)
AY = 5.9 6.1 cm AND YX = 5.5 + 0.3 cm
1
1
any one from:

thickness of mirror
thickness of lines
thickness of pins
judgement of where lines cross
1
TOTAL 6
(a)
pointer at 0.35 A
(b) (i)
variable resistor/rheostat/potentiometer
One R correct
(ii)
All R correct
(iii)
(c)
(6.129, 5.769, 4, correctly rounded)
Consistent sf for R (either all 2 sf or all 3 sf)
variable resistor/number of cells
Voltmeter in parallel with resistors (or power source)
Ammeter next to X
Symbols correct and all connections drawn in
1
TOTAL 12
Page 2
(a)
(b)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
Scales: y-axis 1N = 4 cm; x-axis 1m/s2 = 4/5 cm right way round
Both axes labelled with quantity and unit
Plots to sq (-1 each error or omission, minimum mark zero)
Line thickness less than 1 mm and no 'blob' plots
Well judged best fit single straight line
Large triangle used (> line) clear on graph
Interpolation to sq
(if large enough triangle present)
Value 1.38 1.48
kg and 2/3 sf
1
TOTAL 10
(a)
Two from:
same volume of water
same starting temperature of water
same size/shape/type beakers
same thickness/mass/volume of insulator
same room temp
(b)
64C (with unit)
(c)
1
TOTAL 4
June 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
PHYSICS
Page 1
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
Syllabus
0625
(a)
0.63 0.65 (A) (strictly)

1.64 1.66 (V) (strictly)
3.32 (g)
150 (cm3)
8 (mm) or 0.8 (cm)
All units correct
1
1
1
1
1
1
(b)
Remove electrodes from beaker

A method to ensure gap remains the same
(or other suitable suggestion e.g. measurement arrangement that
the beaker sits on)
1
1
(c)
New variable (e.g. temperature, surface area / vol / size of

electrodes, power source setting, depth of immersion)
1
TOTAL
Paper
6
(a)
All T values correct (0.34, 0.44, 0,49, 0.53, 0.60, 0.63)

All T values to 2 sf OR all to 3sf
1
1
(b)
Graph:
Scales suitable
Scales labeled and with units
Plots correct to sq (-1 each error)
Line judgement
Line thickness (and small, neat plots)
1
1
2
1
1
(c)
T = 0.51 (s) correct answer only; NO ecf
(d)
Statement: NO
Reason: line not through origin (or equivalent)
1
1
(allow mark if candidate describes str. line or constant gradient)

TOTAL
3
11
(a)
Correct voltmeter
Correct ammeter
1
1
(b)
R = 3.3, 2/3 sf
Unit or ohm
1
1
(c)
Circuit with correct parallel connections

Ammeter and ONE voltmeter correct
Variable resistor correct
1
1
1
TOTAL
Page 2
(a)
Mark Scheme
PHYSICS - JUNE 2004
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(b)
Syllabus
0625
x = 14 16mm
y = 76.5 78.5 mm
u = 75mm (ecf) and v = 390mm (ecf)
x,y,u and v all correct and with no unit
m = 5.2 (ecf) 2/3 sf and with no unit
1
1
1
1
1
Upside down
Precaution 1
Precaution 2
(e.g. repeats, use mark on block supporting lens to show centre of
lens, place metre rule on bench to take readings or clamp rule in
position, use a dark area, explanation of how to avoid parallax
error, vertical screen/lens/both, centres of lens and object in line)
1
1
TOTAL
5
(a)
(b)
(c)
(i)
(ii)
Paper
6
22
14 (ecf)
64
units all correct
1
1
1
So that heat is not lost (wtte)
1
TOTAL
PAPER TOTAL = [40]
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
PHYSICS
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a) (i) 84
(ii) 50
both units correct
C and cm3 (or ml)
(b) (i) 75
(ii) 15 (ecf)
(iii) source of error e.g. thickness of string/extension of string/diagonal

windings/identified parallax
(iv) improvement e.g. thinner string/inextensible string/parallel windings/

no gaps between windings/repeats and averages
(c) (i) 2.1 (cm)

(ii) 31.5 or 32 cm 2 (2/3 sf and unit required)
(d) time
1
1
1
another temperature
1
TOTAL 11
(a) (i) triangle seen
large triangle (> line)
correct readings to sq
G = 0.37 0.39
(ii) = 2.63 (ecf)
2/3 sf and g/cm3
(b) increased accuracy
1
TOTAL 6
(a) (i) 2.15 2.25

(ii) 1.1 (+ both with correct unit, cm/mm) ecf
(b) (i) all correct 1 values, 91.1, 81.1, 71.1, etc
(ii) all correct T values, 1.93, 1.80, 1.67, 1.57, 1.41, 1.28
3/4sf for T
1
1
1
1
1
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE November 2004
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(c) Graph:
scales suitable T start at 1.0s, T: 10sq : 0.2s
1: 10sq : 20cm; both labelled
and correct way round
plots correct to sq (-1 each error)
line judgement
line thickness
(d) 58 cm
1
TOTAL 11
(a) 4 pins at least one separation, separation > 5 cm
normal at 90o (by eye)
r = 19 21
i = 31 33
unit given for both
1
TOTAL 5
(a) (i) all R correct, 0.464, 0.976, 1.45, 1.88, 2.25

2/3 sf for R
(ii) V, cm,
(b) (i) 18, 4.5 (ignore unit)
1
1
1
1
(ii) answer 4
(iii) 72
(c) micrometer
1
TOTAL 7
June 2005
GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
PHYSICS
Page 1
(a)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE June 2005
21oC (ignore unit)
Syllabus
0625
(20.9 acceptable)
Paper
6
[1]
(b) (i) t in oC and V in cm3

(ii) axis labelled, with unit
scale 10oC to 1 cm
or 0 - 100 in 25 sq steps or 20 - 80 in 10 sq steps
correct plots to sq (-1 each error)
well judged best fit line
[1]
[2]
[1]
(c)
[1]
heat lost to surroundings or by evaporation
[1]
[1]
[total: 8]
2
(a)
12 cm3
0.5 A
30 cm2
0.112 kg
600 N
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b)
repeats
to spot anomalous results/to calculate average
or series of different V and I, plot graph
or switch on/off, prevent temp rise
or low current, minimise temp rise
or avoidance of parallax, action and reason
or clean wires, resistance caused by dirt
or tap meter, prevent sticking
or check zero error, accuracy
(in each case the reason must support the statement
to gain the second mark)
[1]
[1]
[total: 7]
3
(a)
l values 50, 75, 100
[1]
(b)
1.50 V shown correctly

0.375 A shown correctly
[1]
[1]
(c)
2.5(3); 4.0(0); 5.2(0) all correct

all to 2sf or all to 3sf
[1]
[1]
(d)
[1]
(e)
R = 7.50 - 8.00
(or R = 6.60 - 7.49)
[2]
[total: 8]
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE June 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a)
0.90; 0.78; 0.63 (-1 each error, ignore sf)
[2]
(b)
0.00225; 0.00260; 0.00315 all correct (ecf)

all to 2sf or all to 3sf
[1]
[1]
(c)
NO
T/m increases as m decreases (wtte) - if statement (no) correct
[1]
[1]
(d)
time n oscillations
divide by n (n at least 3)
[1]
[1]
(e)
lower spring fully compressed (wtte)
[1]
[total: 9]
(a)
normal in correct position and at 90o (by eye)
[1]
(b)
i = 29 - 31
[1]
(c)
refracted ray correct side of normal and at angle < i

r = 18 - 22
[1]
[1]
(d)
ray displaced and parallel to incident ray (by eye)

all correct lines drawn neatly, not too thick, and forming
continuous path
[1]
[1]
two pins on emerging ray, labelled Y and Z

pins at least 3 cm apart
[1]
[1]
(e)
[total: 8]

MARK SCHEME for the November 2005 question paper
0625 Physics
0625/06
Paper 6 Maximum mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners meeting before marking began. Any
substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be recorded in the published
Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in candidates
scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with these
mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
Page 1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a)
m in g and in degrees
(b)
not directly proportional to m

as m increases decreases
1
1
(c)
clear in words or diagram that 'centre point' of protractor

is at point where bottom edge of rule meets protractor
and 0 180 line is horizontal
similarly clear how 'dead space' is dealt with, e.g. protractor
stuck to edge of bench with 0 180 line at top of bench level
OR rule placed on block that is same height as 'dead space'
(d)
words or diagram to show rule at end of metre rule

to measure height above bench level
clear that rule is vertical (e.g. use set square)
OR clamped at constant angle
1
1
1
1
TOTAL 7
(a)
correct symbols for resistor, voltmeter and ammeter

correct connections between resistors AB and BC in series with
CD in parallel with both
voltmeter and ammeter correctly positioned
1
1
1
(b)
I in A, V in V, R in
1.98 or 2.0; 4.00 or 4.0; 1.06 or 1.1
all to 2 sf or 3 sf
1
1
1
(c)
5.9 6.1
resistance proportional to length/
doubling length, doubled resistance/
3 x length will have 3 x resistance/
wtte
1
TOTAL 8
(a)
in oC, t in s
(b) & (c) axis labelled

scale starts at 40 oC and 2 cm to 10 oC
plots correct to sq (1 each error)
well judged best fit curves
lines not too thick
(d)
Two from:
e.g. use a lid
insulate the bottom of the beaker
use a container that is a good conductor (metal)
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
TOTAL 9
(a)
normal in correct position and at 90o (by eye)
(b)
9.9 10.2 cm
Page 2
Mark Scheme
IGCSE NOVEMBER 2005
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(c)
incident ray drawn in correctly
(d)
27o ( 2o)
(e)
2.0 (or correct from candidates x value)

2 or 3 sf and no unit
1
1
(f)
X on incident ray close to mirror

Y and Z on reflected ray
Y Z distance at least 5 cm
i = r (by eye)
1
1
1
1
TOTAL 10
(a)
1, 2 and 3 (1 each error or omission)
(b)
2 and 3 (1 each error or omission)
(c)
time a number (n) oscillations

divide time by n
1
1
TOTAL 6

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
Paper 6, maximum raw mark 40
These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements
of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks.
They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and
syllabuses.
Page 1
(a) (i)
(ii)
(b) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
1.6 (cm) 16 (mm)
[1]
0.16 (cm) 1.6 (mm)

both in cm (or mm)
[1]
[1]
1 = 5.8 cm and w = 6.0 cm (58 mm, 60 mm)
[1]
V = 5.568 (or 5.57)

V in cm3 (or mm3)
[1]
[1]
(c) d = 0.233 (2/3 sf)

d in g/cm3 (or g/mm3)
[1]
[1]
(d) Va = 7/8/9/10 cm3
[1]
TOTAL 9
(a) correct ammeter and voltmeter symbols

correct power source, variable resistor and lamp symbols
correct circuit
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i)
A; V;
[1]
5.8 or 5.79 or 5.792; 2.9 or 2.89 or 2.889

consistent 2/3 sf
[1]
[1]
(ii)
TOTAL 6
3
(a) All lines present and neat, a = 1.5 cm
[1]
(iv)
b = 4.3 cm
[1]
(iv)
FI = 4.3 cm (or cand's a value)
[1]
(v)
IJ meets NN' at right angle (by eye)
[1]
(vi)
c correct to + 1 mm, 2.1 cm
[1]
(vii) n calculation correct

2/3 sf and no unit (1.4)
(b) repeats and averages
greater pin spacing
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
TOTAL 9
Page 2
(a) (i)
(ii)
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2006
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
24(oC)
[1]
6(oC); 4(oC) (ecf)
[1]
(b) Heat lost to surroundings

round flame/to gauze/tripod
[1]
[1]
(c) Variable resistor
[1]
TOTAL 5
(a) description / diagram showing 2 equal heights from bench
[1]
(b) 1.11(1); 1.18(1.176); 1.25(0); 1.33(3); 1.43(1.428)
[1]
(c) (i)
Axes suitable and labelled, false origin as instructed

Plots correct to small sq
[1]
[1]
(ii)
Well judged best fit line

line suitably thin
[1]
[1]
(iii)
triangle method seen

More than line used
Gradient value correct
[1]
[1]
[1]
(d) Correct W value using cand's G

2/3 sf and in N
[1]
[1]
TOTAL 11

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
Paper 6 (Alternative to Practical), maximum raw mark 40
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners meeting before marking began.
demonstrated.
examination.
The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.
syllabuses.
Page 2
1 (a)
(b)
(c)
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
4.1 (cm)
[1]
(i)
4.9 (cm)
both in correct unit
[1]
[1]
(ii)
7.83(4)
cm3
[1]
[1]
(i)
7/7.0/7.1/7.2/7.3/7.4/7.5
(ecf: less than V by up to 10% with equivalent sf)
[1]
correct d value (0.84 0.90, no ecf)

1/2/3 sf and g/cm3
[1]
[1]
(ii)
(ecf)
[Total: 8]
2 (a)
cm; s; s
[1]
(b)
1.835; 1.787; 1.753; 1.706; 1.672 (accept 3 sf)

consistent sf (3/4)
[1]
[1]
(c)
Axes suitable (plots occupy at least grid)

and labelled, false origin as instructed
Plots correct to small sq (1 each error)
Well judged best fit line
line suitably thin
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
(d)
No and not a straight line through the origin
[1]
(e)
greater accuracy (wtte)
[1]
[Total: 10]
3 (a)
(b)
(i)
normal correct (by eye) (single, thin line)
[1]
(ii)
AG = 11.5 cm (+ 0.1)
[1]
(iii)
i = 26o/27o/28o (ignore unit)
[1]
(i)
CD pin separation > 5 cm
[1]
(ii)
bases
pins may not be vertical
[1]
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2006
Page 3
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
28oC value
unit
[1]
[1]
(b)
B
smaller temp drop
(OR neither, insignificant difference)
[1]
[1]
(c)
any suitable insulator
[1]
(d)
Any 3 from
initial temp
volume of water
size/shape of beaker
room temp/draughts/simultaneous timings
material of beaker
beakers on same surface
[3]
4 (a)
[Total: 8]
5 (a)
correct symbols for ammeter and voltmeter

correct symbols for variable resistor, lamp and resistor
circuit correct
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b)
ammeter will show current/voltmeter shows reading
[1]
(c)
variable resistor
[1]
(d)
(i)
(ii)
(e)
low current/increase R of variable resistor/

lower voltage/add another lamp
[1]
switch off between readings
[1]
A, more resistance in circuit
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2006

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
demonstrated.
examination.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a) 1 = 23
unit oC correctly written
[1]
[1]
(b) 19 (C) ecf

34 (C) ecf
[1]
[1]
(c) (i) heat loss (to surroundings)
[1]
(ii) any two from:

insulation / mat / foil
lid
speedier transfer
repeats
wait to record max temperature
stirring
include beaker in calculation
[2]
[Total: 7]
(a) and (b) 6 d values

correct values for d 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30
[1]
[1]
(c) h0 = 100mm (including unit, cm/m allowed)
[1]
(e) correct values for b 40, 35, 32, 28, 24, 20 (ecf)
[1]
(f) Graph:
correct d axis labelled with symbol / unit
plots to nearest sq (-1 each error or omission)
best fit straight line
single line, thin and best fit
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
(g) no
line not through origin
OR when b increases, d decreases
OR negative gradient
[1]
(h) use of set square / protractor / spirit level / plumbline
[1]
[Total: 11]
UCLES 2007
Page 3
3
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a) correct arithmetic for R values 7.92, 1.98

both R to 2sf OR both to 3sf
all correct units: V, A,
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) final box (ecf)

second R (or I) about of first
[1]
[1]
(c) lamp symbol correct

ammeter and voltmeter symbols correct
correct parallel circuit (ONE ammeter and ONE voltmeter, no extra components,
but accept switch if present, ignore power source or lack of)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) correct arithmetic for f, 0.154, 0.144 (any sf)

correct average f (0.149, ecf)
average f to 2/3 sf
correct unit for average f (m)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) precautions:
any two from:
use darkened area (wtte)
metre rule on bench or clamped
object and lens same height from bench
mark on lens holder to show position of lens centre
take more readings
choosing mid point between acceptable positions
parallax, action and reason
lens/screen perpendicular to bench
[2]
(c) inverted
[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007
Page 4
5
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2007
(a) weight / load / force / W / L / F

length / l
extension / e / x / (l l0)
units N, mm, mm
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) any three from

length of spring / l0
diameter/thickness of spring
range of loads
length of wire
diameter / thickness of wire
number of coils
coil spacing
do NOT allow size or room temperature
[3]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2007

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
demonstrated.
examination.
syllabuses.
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
(a) 24
[1]
(b) s, C
23, 1 (-1 each error)
[1]
[2]
(c) (i)
[1]
reason consistent with results
(ii) Three from:

room temp/draughts etc
volume
beaker
liquid
amount of stirring
surface area
[3]
(d) lid
[1]
[Total: 9]
(a) 8, 14, 20, 25, 34, 41 (-1 each error)
[2]
(b) (i) Graph:

suitable scales labelled symbol/unit
all plots to nearest sq (-1 each error or omission)
line thin and straight
[1]
[2]
[1]
(ii) correct value (29mm 31mm)to nearest sq.

clear how obtained
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) 0.41, 0.13, 0.14, 0.12(-1 each error)

I in A at least once
[2]
[1]
(b) statement (yes)

Reason correct within limits of experimental accuracy
[1]
(c) variable resistor/extra cell/variable power source/potential divider/potentiometer
[1]
(d) (i) correct arithmetic for R 3.90 (ecf)

unit and 2/3 sf
[1]
[1]
(ii) voltmeter correct position and symbol
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2007
Page 3
4
Mark Scheme
(a) (i) x = 2.1, 2.2
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
[1]
(ii) h = 6.5, 6.6

x and h with same unit
[1]
[1]
(iii) correct arithmetic for n1.47 1.51 (ecf)

2/3 sf and no unit
[1]
[1]
(b) two equal heights from bench (or other valid method)
[1]
[Total: 6]
(a) (i) 50, 75/76
[1]
(ii) 25 (ecf)
cm3 (at least once and not contradicted)
[1]
[1]
(iii) density 4.36 (ecf)
[1]
(b) V2, V1
cm3(at least once and not contradicted)
density g/cm3
5.68, 3.02 both to 2/3 sf
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) Same method, lots of grains
[1]
[Total: 9]
UCLES 2007

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
demonstrated.
examination.
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
(a) (i) cm, cm, g
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
[1]
(ii) 49.66 (or 49.7), 49.50 (or 49.5), 50.05 (or 50.0)
consistent significant figures (3 or 4)
[1]
[1]
(b) clear explanation/diagram
[1]
(c) correct method

value 49.7 (ignore a fourth significant figure)
and allow ecf from (ii)
[1]
[1]
(d) d = 1.8 (cm), t = 1.2 (cm)

V = 3.05 (cm3) (ecf)
= 16.3 unit g/cm3, 2/3 significant figures (ecf)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 9]
Table:
(a) Units V, A, (symbol/word)
R values 1.11, 2.19, 5.05, 9.55
Consistent 2 or consistent 3 sig fig for R
(b) (i) Yes (if within 10%) No (if not)
Circuit 1 and circuit 2 compared
(ii) limit current (so temperature not increased)
OR switch off between readings
OR check for zero error
OR Repeats
OR Parallax error explained
OR Tapping meter
[1]
[1]
[1]
[M1]
[A1]
[1]
[Total: 6]
Graph:
Temperature axis labelled /C
Suitable scales (plots occupy at least grid)
Plots correct to nearest square (1 each error)
Lines well judged curves
Lines thin
(b) Statement:
larger surface area increases rate of cooling
Justification:
Correct reference to gradients of lines or readings
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
Page 3
4
Mark Scheme
IGCSE May/June 2008
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
Trace:
(a) all lines present, thin, neat and in correct area
normal at 90 (by eye)
and EF at 30 to normal (by eye)
line KJ to at least beyond P4
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) a = 1213 (mm) no ecf
[1]
(ii) b = 40 (mm) no ecf

a and b both with appropriate unit
[1]
[1]
(c) (i) & (ii) c recorded and d = 44 (mm)
[1]
(iii) correct calculation of n, value 1.43 (ecf)

2/3 significant figures with no unit
[1]
[1]
[Total: 9]
(a) (i) triangle method used

(whether or not shown on graph)
Triangle using more than half line
and position indicated on graph
Expect G = 4.004.35 (but allow correct working
from points read from beyond 1.0 on x axis)
Expect g = 9.079.87 (ecf from G)
(ii) greater accuracy/average value
(b) (i) amplitude
length
(other possible correct responses shape/size of bob
and number of swings)
(ii) does not affect time
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008

0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
demonstrated.
examination.
syllabuses.
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a) view perpendicular to (or straight in front of rule)/use of set square
[1]
(b) (i) correct e1 value 3.1 and correct e2 value 2.4

e in cm
[1]
[1]
(c) density 4.43 (ecf)

2/3 significant figures
g/cm3
[1]
[1]
[1]
(d) e2 greater
greater (or identical to e2 answer) (ecf)
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
Diagram: correct symbols for ammeter and voltmeter

correct symbols for resistor
correct circuit arrangement
[1]
[1]
[1]
Table: units V, A (symbol/word)
[1]
(c) Prediction 1 Yes close enough (or words to that effect)

OR No not close enough (or words to that effect)
Prediction 2 Yes approximately half (or words to that effect)
[1]
[1]
Resistance at connections
Internal resistance of source/other sensible suggestion
[1]
[Total: 7]
Table
in C, V in cm3
correct V 0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100
[1]
[1]
Graph: axes labelled with symbol and unit

axes suitable (e.g. not 3 scale) and plots occupy more than grid
all plots correct (better than sq)
well judged, thin best fit line
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) 1. sensible comment about heat loss to the surroundings, e.g. use of insulation/lid
2. sensible comment about adding water in a regulated, timed flow (including smaller
volumes/set time intervals/shorter intervals
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2008
Page 3
4
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
6
(a) f = 14.9(4), or 15
correct unit for f
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) xs = 5.0(cm) and ys = 5.2(cm)
[1]
(ii) factor of 6
y = 31.2(cm) (ecf)
[1]
[1]
(iii) 15.29, 15.3, 15 (ecf)
[1]
(iv) correct method

2 or 3 significant figures and correct unit
average f 15.1 (correct answer only)
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) inverted image
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) 0.7 N
6 cm3
1.4 s
4.0 N/cm2
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) minimum current/turn down power supply/increase resistance

switch off between readings/carry out without delay
[1]
[1]
(ii) variable resistor/rheostat
[1]
[Total: 7]
UCLES 2008


0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
examination.
Page 2
1

IGCSE May/June 2009
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
(a) d 2.5 (cm)

x 14.5 (cm)
diagram showing blocks correctly placed across the ends
rule position (or distance) shown correctly
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) Ve 71.1 - 71.2 (cm3) ecf allowed
[1]
(ii) measuring cylinder reading 56 (cm3)
[1]
(iii) 2.052.08 (or 2.1) ecf allowed

g/cm3 and 2 or 3 significant figures
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) 87 (oC)
[1]
(b) s, oC, oC
[1]
(c) A ecf allowed

[1]
justified by reference to readings (up to 90s) with comparison of drops in temperatures (with
numbers) given (ecf allowed)
[1]
(d) Any two from:
starting temperature
room temperature
carry out at same time
same thermometer (words to that effect)
same position of thermometers
same time intervals
[2]
[Total: 6]
(a) R values 0.553, 1.55, 2.74, 3.74, 4.92

(2,3,4 or more significant figures)
Consistent 3 or consistent 4 significant figures for final four entries
[1]
[1]
(b) Graph:
Axes labelled and scales suitable (must include origin)
Plots correct to square (1 each error or omission)
Well judged str. line taking account of all points and reaching an axis
Thin line
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
(c) Statement proportional (wtte) or as x increases, R increases

Justification straight line through origin
[1]
[1]
(d) Clear indication of method on graph

Correct value to square
[1]
[1]
UCLES 2009
Page 3

IGCSE May/June 2009
(e) low current/switch off between readings

or add (variable) resistor/lamp
or reduce voltage/power
Syllabus
0625
Paper
06
[1]
[Total: 12]
(a) 4.0 (cm)

6.0 (cm)
[1]
[1]
(b) 20, 30 ecf allowed

f values 11.88 (11.9), 12.00 (12.0)
f consistent 3 or more significant figures
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) average f 11.9, 11.94, 11.95, 12.0, 12 (cm) ecf allowed

2/3 significant figures
[1]
[1]
(h) Any two from

use of darkened room
slowly moving lens back and forth to get good image
clamp rule or place on bench
avoid parallax action given
object/lens/screen perpendicular to bench
object and lens same height from bench
repeats
[2]
[Total: 9]
(a) Q correct position with suitable number(s)

Rule correctly tilted, and on bench (or arrow to indicate)
[1]
[1]
(b) Any two from:

Readings taken at either side/diameter of cylinder
Position of mid point found
Mark position of centre
[2]
(c) 34.5 cm
[1]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009


0625 PHYSICS
0625/06
examination.
syllabuses.
Page 2
1

Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) d 0.5 cm or 5mm
Paper
06
[1]
(ii) x 10.0
[1]
(b) (i)(iii)
table: T 1.0, 0.95, 0.895 (0.90, 0.9), 0.84, 0.775 (0.78)
T2 1.00, 0.903, 0.801, 0.706, 0.601 (if T correct)
[1]
[1]
(c) graph:
axes labelled
scales suitable, plots occupying at least half grid
plots all correct to square
well judged line
thin line, 5 neat plots
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(d) statement NO and not through origin/

inverse/negative gradient/
x increases, T2 decreases/ wtte
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) 91 (oC)
[1]
(b) t in s, both in oC
[1]
(c) statement B and justified by reference to readings
[1]
(d) any two from:

same starting temperature/temperature of hot water
constant room temperature/keep away from draughts/out of direct sunlight
same time intervals
[2]
[Total: 5]
(a)(c)
table:
V, A,
V 1.8
I 0.25
R values 7.20, 3.46(3.5)
consistent significant figures for R (2 or more)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(d) y 0.48, 0.49, 0.5 (ecf)

2/3 significant figures and no unit
[1]
[1]
UCLES 2009
Page 3

Syllabus
0625
(e) (i) correct symbols and circuit (ignore power source symbol)
Paper
06
[1]
(ii) voltmeter position correct
[1]
(iii) control current/voltage/resistance/speed of motor
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) f 14.95 + 0.05 (cm)

unit to match number
[1]
[1]
(b) more than one value shown

d 6.5 + 0.1
[1]
[1]
(c) t 0.85 + 0.05 (cm)

d and t both with correct unit
[1]
[1]
(d) diagram showing blocks correctly placed

rule shown correctly touching both blocks
[1]
[1]
(e) f 10.9 13.1 (cm) (or 109 131 (mm))

no, too far out to be explained by experimental inaccuracy (wtte)
[1]
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) lens between object and screen (not mirror)

lens at least 2 cm from object and screen
metre rule on bench or clamped
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) any two from:

use of darkened room/brighter object
slowly moving lens back and forth to obtain good image
avoid parallax, action given
lining up object and lens
object and lens at same height from bench/object on principal axis
repeats
screen/lens perpendicular to bench
mark centre of lens position on block
[2]
[Total: 5]
UCLES 2009


0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
examination.
Page 2

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a)
(i) l = 29 (mm) and l = 31 (mm) (allow 2.9 cm, 3.1 cm)

eA = 14 (mm) and eB = 15 (mm) (ecf) (ignore minus signs)
[1]
[1]
(b)
(i) both l correct to (21.5 22) and 24
[1]
(ii) (6.5 7) and 8 (ecf)
[1]
(ignore minus signs)
(iii) eav = 7.5 (c.a.o.)
[1]
(c) statement matches readings (expect YES)

justification matches statement and by reference to results
(expect within limits of experimental accuracy, wtte)
(d) any one of:
avoidance of parallax error explained
use of horizontal aid
measuring to same point each time
repeats
wait for springs to stop moving
(ecf NO) [1]

(too different, wtte) [1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(i) T1 correct 18
[1]
(ii) T2 correct 4
unit oC (either position and not contradicted)
[1]
[1]
(b) graph:
y-axis labelled
plots occupying at least half of grid on suitable scale
all plots correct to square
well judged single, smooth curve line, not point-to-point
thin line
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(a)
(c)
(i) T2 < T1 (wtte)
[1]
(ii) decreasing gradient (wtte)
[1]
[Total: 10]
UCLES 2010
Page 3
3

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) correct symbol

correct position
[1]
[1]
(b) table:
V / l values correct 8.35, 3.58, 2.08, 1.39, 1.00
consistent 2 or 3 significant figures
unit V/m
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) statement matches readings (expect NO)

justification matches statement and by reference to results
V / l not constant, as l increases V decreases
[1]
[1]
(d) any one of:

check for zero error
avoidance of parallax error explained
switch off between readings
repeats
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a)
(i) pins at least 5 cm apart
[1]
(ii) i = 30
[1]
(iii) r1 = 31
[1]
(b) (i) & (ii) both lines correct area
[1]
(iii)(v) r2 correct to + 1o with unit

difference = 1 or 1 (c.a.o.)
(c) statement matches result (expect YES)
justification matches statement and by reference to result
(expect within limits of experimental accuracy, wtte)
[1]
[1]
(ecf NO) [1]
(too different, wtte) [1]
[Total: 8]
UCLES 2010
Page 4

IGCSE May/June 2010
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) column 1: d, m (or in words)

columns 2 and 3: t, T (or in words)
columns 2 and 3: s, s (or in words)
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) accuracy/reducing uncertainty/sensible comment on reaction time
[1]
(c)
(i) at least three correct values entered in table

1.66, 1.52, 1.40, 1.28, 1.17 (at least 2 significant figures) c.a.o
[1]
(ii) statement matches result (expect NO) AND

justification matches statement and by reference to result
(expect decreasing, not equal, not constant, different, changing, wtte)
allow ecf from (i)
[1]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
1

Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) correct 1/d values 0.0222, 0.0294, 0.0370, 0.0444, 0.0518

all to 2 significant figures or all to 3 consistent significant figures
[1]
[1]
(b) graph:
axes suitable and labelled
all plots correct to small square
good line judgement
(position)
thin line, single, no blobs (quality)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) gradient by triangle method using at least candidates line

clear, on graph, how obtained
[1]
[1]
(d) z value 0.9 2.5

2 or 3 significant figures and unit cm given
[1]
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) r 26
(b)
(i) s and C
[1]
in both tables
[1]
(ii) at least 300s and given to nearest 10s or in mins
[1]
(c) Table 2.2 (heating) justified by two temperature differences compared,

must see 14 and 44/56 OR 74 to 60 and 25 to 69/81
[1]
(d) any two from:

same starting temperature
constant room temperature/avoid draughts/same place
same time intervals
same thermometer (wtte)
same mass/amount/volume of water
same beaker
lid always used
[2]
[Total: 6]
UCLES 2010
Page 3
3

Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) 0.3 0.31
[1]
(b) , A
10.1
[1]
[1]
(c) correct calculation of 0.5Io shown (ecf)

10()
[1]
[1]
(d) diagram:
resistors in parallel
voltmeter symbol
voltmeter position
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total 8]
(a) (i) (iii)

EF extended correctly and neat
P3P4 line drawn correctly and neat
G labelled
P1 and P2 at least 5cm apart
(iv) and (v) 40 42
( 2i) correct
(b)
(ecf)
(ecf)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(i) 2 and unit ( ) present at least once
[1]
(ii) yes (or No, ecf)

reference to within limits of experimental accuracy
(or close enough or wtte)
[1]
(c) no concern about pins being vertical (or wtte)
[1]
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) any three from:

mass/volume/amount of water
room temperature
temperature of water
amount of stirring
size/shape of beaker
temperature of ice cube
number/mass/size of cubes
[3]
(b) any three from:

stopclock:
balance:
thermometer:
measuring cylinder:
[3]
time
mass
temperature
volume (of water)
[Total 6]
UCLES 2010
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
1.

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) Three straight lines in correct positions

All lines continuous, straight, neat and thin
[1]
[1]
(b) a = 4.2 4.4 (cm) no ecf

Well-judged position in triangle
Line correctly drawn
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) Viewing line directly in front of card (owtte)
[1]
[Total: 6]
2.
(a) 23 (C)
[1]
(b) t in s, in C
[1]
T1= 14
T2 = 1
[1]
[1]
(c) Graph:
Axes the right way round, both labelled with quantity, ignore unit
Use of the scale temperature 50 80 and time 0 200 or 0 250, using the whole grid
All seven plots correct to small square
Good line judgement
Thin line
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(d) Greater rate of cooling in first 30 s (owtte) ecf possible

Decreasing slope of graph (owtte) ecf possible
[1]
[1]
[Total: 11]
Page 3
3.

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) 5.4 or 5.43 or 5.429 AND 5.9 or 5.94 or 5.938

R values both to 2 significant figures OR both to 3 significant figures, in table
(iii) V, A ,
Paper
61
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) Correct series circuit

Correct symbols for ammeter, voltmeter and lamps
(ii) RT = 8.26()
[1]
[1]
[1]
(c) Statement: expect No (ecf available for Yes)

Outside limits of experimental accuracy (owtte)
[1]
[1]
(d) Brightness changes (owtte)
[1]
[Total: 9]
4.
(a) Normal in centre at 90o to MR

CD drawn correctly
Both neat and thin
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) CN drawn correctly
[1]
(ii) i = 23(o) 1(o) (ecf allowed)
[1]
(c) (i) Line through P3 and P4 correct

r = 21(o) 1(o)
[1]
[1]
(d) Any two:

Thickness of lines
Thickness of mirror
Protractor can only be read to + 1o OR protractors are not that precise (owtte)
Thickness of pins
[2]
[Total: 9]
5.
1.5 cm
100 cm3
0.07 m2
0.12 A
23 cm
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 5]
Page 4

IGCSE May/June 2011
Syllabus
0625
Abbreviations in the mark scheme:

ecf = error carried forward.
owtte = or words to that effect.
c.a.o. = correct answer only
Paper
61
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
1
(a) graph:
axes:
scale:
plots:
line:

Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
the right way round, labelled x and y with unit cm

both 10 small squares = 2 cm
(either or both 20 small squares = 5 cm also acceptable)
all correct to small square
well-judged, best-fit, straight, thin, continuous line
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) correct triangle method using at least candidates line, with method clearly indicated
on graph
G = 0.94 1.00, no ecf
[1]
[1]
(c) 1.0/(candidates G) calculation correct, 2 or 3 significant figures and unit N
[1]
(d) (i) (where rule) balances on pivot o.w.t.t.e.
[1]
(ii) take readings from 49.7 OR

adjust rule by adding weight until it balances at 50.0 cm mark
[1]
[Total: 9]
(a) c = 24
o
C
[1]
[1]
(b) av = 55 (oC) ecf from (a)
[1]
(c) any two from:

stirring
waiting for temperature (to stabilise)
view thermometer at right angles o.w.t.t.e.
[2]
(d) heat loss (to surroundings) o.w.t.t.e.
[1]
(e) one from:

lagging beakers o.w.t.t.e.
use of lid
swifter transfer of water
[1]
Page 3

Syllabus
0625
(f) one from:

amount of stirring o.w.t.t.e.
hot water temperature
cold water temperature
room temperature o.w.t.t.e.
transfer time
Paper
61
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) (i) 0.27 (A)
[1]
(ii) expect YES (ecf: no)

expect close enough / within limits of experimental accuracy o.w.t.t.e.
ecf: beyond limits of experimental accuracy o.w.t.t.e.
[1]
[1]
(b) vary/control current/voltage
[1]
(c) (i) voltmeter symbol correct and correctly connected across all three resistors
[1]
(ii) 2.2 (V)
[1]
(iii) R correctly evaluated

ecf from (ii)
2 or 3 significant figures and unit
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) (i) normal at 90o, at centre of MR and crossing MR

(ii) AB is a continuous line from B, 8 cm long
AB is at 40o to normal
(b) (i) continuous, thin line that reaches normal and at least touches P2 and P3 dots
(ii) r = 40 43(o) (no ecf)
(c) any two from:
thickness of lines
thickness of protractor o.w.t.t.e. / accuracy of reading protractor
thickness of pins / pin holes
accept thickness of mirror / glass in front of mirror
(d) ticks in boxes 1, 3, 5 (1 mark each)
(if more than 3 ticks, 1 for each tick in a wrong box to minimum of 0)
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[Total: 10]
Page 4
5

Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) 200 m or more with unit
[1]
(b) tape measure, trundle wheel or gps device
[1]
(c) correct working seen

345.67 (accept 345.66, 345, 346, 350)
[1]
[1]
(d) (No), readings (time or distance) too inaccurate
[1]
[Total: 5]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
examination.
syllabuses.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
1

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) 50250 g (or 0.050.25 kg) correct unit required
[1]
(b) Centre of mass marked close to centre of cylinder

Clear indication of how centre of mass is placed above the 90.0 cm mark
[1]
[1]
(c) Rule unlikely to exactly balance/ difficult to balance

OR rule could slide on pivot
OR mass could slide
OR centre of mass of rule not at 50.0 cm mark
OR rule not uniform1
Do not accept comments about poor/careless technique
(d) Repeat readings (wtte)
OR a reference to finding exact position of centre of mass of metre rule
OR a reference to dealing with centre of mass of rule not being at 50.0 cm mark
(e) Good/ fine/ reasonable/ same to 3 significant figures
OR Within limits of experimental accuracy (wtte)
OR Too many significant figures in experimental result
[1]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 6]
(a) R = 22(C)
[1]
(b) Table:
mm, C
Correct d values 100, 80, 60, 40, 20, 10
[1]
[1]
(c) Temperature difference = 3(C), higher
[1]
(d) Draughts
Room temperature/humidity
[1]
[1]
(e) One from:

Relevant avoidance of parallax explained, in using rule or thermometer
Waiting time between readings
Wait for steady thermometer reading
Allow lamp to cool/warm up
Repeats and average
[1]
[Total: 7]
Page 3
3

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
(a) (i) (cm, V, A)
Paper
61
[no mark awarded]
(ii) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around
Suitable scales plots occupy at least half the grid
All plots correct to small square
Good line judgement (ecf for curve if d plotted)
Single, thin, continuous line
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
(iii) Triangle using at least half of candidates line clearly indicated on graph
Evidence of subtraction seen
G value 1.5 when rounded to 2 significant figures
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) Same as G, rounded to 2 or 3 significant figures

unit /ohms
[1]
[1]
[Total: 10]
(a) d in range 79 to 80 (mm), 7.9 to 8.0 (cm)

x = 61 (mm) and consistent correct unit for both (mm or cm)
D = 80 (cm), X = 61 (cm) ecf from (i) and (ii)
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) f = 14.5(cm) allow ecf from (a)

2 or 3 significant figures and correct unit
[1]
[1]
(c) Correct statement for results (expect Yes or wtte)

Idea of within (or beyond) experimental accuracy or wtte
Can only score if previous mark is scored
[1]
[1]
(d) Any one from:

Use of darkened room
How to avoid parallax when taking readings
Movement of lens back and forth to obtain clearest image
Mark lens holder to show position of centre of lens
Metre rule clamped or on bench
Object, lens and screen all perpendicular to bench
Object and lens same height above bench
[1]
[Total: 8]
Page 4
5

IGCSE May/June 2012
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) V1 = 74
Line of sight perpendicular to scale
Perpendicular line continues to measuring cylinder at surface level
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) V2 = 81, VG = 7 (ecf allowed)

All volumes in cm3, unit given at least once, not contradicted
[1]
[1]
(c) (V3 V1) = 24, VA = 17 (ecf allowed)
[1]
(d) Any three from:

VA: Finger increases V3 / tube not pushed in far enough
Some water in test-tube/air is compressed
VW: Water remaining in tube
Water remaining in measuring cylinder
Tube overfilled, wtte (surface tension effect)
Either VA or VW (accept only once):
Measuring cylinder readings not very sensitive
Subtraction produces large percentage uncertainty
[3]
[Total: 9]
w
ap
eP
e
tr
.X
0625 PHYSICS
0625/61
components.
om
.c
s
er
Page 2
1
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) d0 = 21 (mm)
[1]
(b) Do = 210 (mm) or 10 candidates (a)
[1]
(c) L values 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0

e values 1.0, 9.0, 21.0, 29.0, 40.0
[1]
[1]
(d) Graph:
Axes correctly labelled with quantity and unit and correct way around
Suitable scales
All plots correct to small square
Good line judgement and a single, thin, continuous line
[1]
[1]
[1]
(e) Triangle method used and shown on the graph

Using at least half of line
[1]
[1]
(f) Any one from:

Always measure from same point on spring (top or bottom of ring)
Wait for spring/weight to stop bouncing
Use of horizontal aid/ensure ruler is vertical
Bench surface not uniform
[1]
[Total: 11]
(a) R = 24(C)
[1]
(b) (i) Table:

s, C, C
[1]
(ii) About the same

Justified with reference to numbers in table
(c) Any two from:
Volumes of water
Room temperature/draughts
Same beaker
Initial water temperature
[1]
[1]
[2]
[Total: 6]
Page 3
3
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) Correct symbols for ammeter, voltmeter and lamps

Ammeter and voltmeter in correct positions
Correct parallel circuit
[1]
[1]
[1]
(b) (i) and (ii) VA = 1.9(V) RA = 2.9(2) ()

Units V and
[1]
[1]
(iii) Pointer at correct position (0.65)
[1]
(c) No mark awarded

(d) Statement matches readings (expect YES)
Justified with idea of experimental inaccuracy
(expect close enough, owtte)
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
(a) Trace:
Normal at 90 in correct position
Angle of incidence = 30 ( 2)
[1]
[1]
(b) P1P2 distance [ 5.0 cm

P3P4 line and line GE correctly and neatly drawn
[1]
[1]
(c) (i) r = 18 or 19 or 20
[1]
(ii) i/r value correct
[1]
(d) (i) i/r value 1.54 and both i/r values with no unit and to 2 or 3 significant figures
(ii) Idea of within (or beyond) limits of experimental accuracy
[1]
[1]
[Total: 8]
Page 4
5
Mark Scheme
Syllabus
0625
Paper
61
(a) Measuring cylinder

Tape measure
Newtonmeter (spring balance)
Electronic balance
Manometer
1 mark each
[5]
(b) (i) Viewing scale perpendicularly (owtte)

(ii) Any one from:
Moving lens back and forth
Dark area (owtte)
Object and lens at same height from bench
Object lens and screen at right angles to bench
[1]
[1]
[Total: 7]

Igcse Physics 0625 Past Papers 1999-2012

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Igcse Physics 0625 Past Papers 1999-2012

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MULTIPLE CHOICE

International General Certificate of Secondary Education

This question paper consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.

A measuring cylinder contains some liquid.

What does the reading of the measuring cylinder scale give?

the density of the liquid

the height of the liquid

the mass of the liquid

the volume of the liquid

A tennis ball falls from the upstairs window of a house.

Ignoring air resistance, what happens to the acceleration of the ball?

For how many seconds is the car moving at constant speed?

Two apples are placed on a balance. The balance stays level.

The diagram shows a racing car.

Where should the centre of mass be, and why?

to give the car more acceleration

to give the car more stability

to give the car more acceleration

to give the car more stability

An object is pushed and then allowed to slide along a table.

It increases the objects weight.

It slows the object down.

It speeds the object up.

A student swings on a rope tied to a branch of a tree.

The diagram shows four types of power station.

hot rocks heat

coal burned to heat

nuclear fuel heats

water from mountain

The drawing pin is easily pushed into the wooden board.

The flat head raises the centre of mass.

The force produces a large moment about the point.

The large area of the flat head increases the force.

The small area of the point increases the pressure.

11 A liquid evaporates quickly.

air molecules being hit by air molecules

air molecules being hit by smoke particles

smoke particles being hit by air molecules

smoke particles being hit by smoke particles

13 A substance that melts at 60 C is heated in a test-tube to a temperature of 95 C. The substance

What would be seen after heating?

The liquid expands uniformly with temperature.

17 A hot-air balloon rises when the air inside it is heated.

The air contracts and becomes less dense.

The air contracts and becomes more dense.

The air expands and becomes less dense.

The air expands and becomes more dense.

cover it with a layer of red brick dust

cover it with a layer of soil

paint it with tar

paint it with whitewash

24 A student holds two pins on to a magnet as shown.

The student removes his thumb.

Which line in the table shows what happens to the metals?

27 A battery is labelled 9 VOLTS.

Which information does the label give about the battery?

the power it can supply

the current it can supply

its electromotive force (e.m.f.)

The lamp marked X blows and breaks the circuit.

30 In which diagram is the fuse correctly connected?

31 The diagram shows an electrical hazard.

soft plastic insulation

hard plastic lamp holder